CONTENTS

Turner, A. J.: Studies in Australian Lepidoptera

Hickman, V. V.: The Simpson Desert Expedition, 1939, Scientific Reports. No. 1,

Biology—Scorpions and Spiders ; 3 ae a af

Carrot, D.: The Simpson Desert Expedition, 1939, Scientific Reports. No.2, Geology—

Desert Sands es ae ae Pe ae AR is = os -

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M.: Remarks on some Parasitic Nematodes from

Australia and New Zealand

Sanpars, D. F.: A Contribution to the Knowledge of the Microcotylidae of Western

Australia

Womers_Ley, H.: Notes on and Additions to the Trombiculinae and Leeuwenhoekiinae

(Acarina) of Australia and New Guinea

Jounsron, T. H., and Simpson, E. R.: Life History of the Trematode—Echinochasmus

pelecani n. sp.

Crespin, I.: The Occurrence of Cycloclypeus in the Tertiary Deposits of South Australia

Kerman, A. W.: On the Analysis of Beryl from Boolcoomatta, South Australia

Jounston, T. H., and Stmeson, E. R.: Larval Trematodes from Australian Fresh-

water Molluscs, Pt. IX ..

Womerstey, H.: Australian Acarina, Families Alycidae and Nanorchestidae

Crocker, R. L.: Soil and Vegetation Relationships in the Lower South-East of South

Australia — A Study in Ecology

OerrteL, A. C., and Prescott, J. A.: A Spectrochemical Examination of some Ironstone

Gravels from Australian Soils

Stacu, L. W.: Ecology of the Sand Flats at Moreton Bay, Reevesby Island, South

Australia... ne 2 HF a Be a iG <6

ZIMMER, W. J.: Notes on the Regeneration of Murray Pine (Callitris spp.)

Mawson, D., and Dattwitz, W. B.: Palaeozoic Igneous Rocks of Lower South-eastern

South Australia

Fintayson, H. H.: A Further Account of the Murid, Pseudomys (Gyomys)

apodemoides Finlayson EA oo ops ap: a et:

Hate, H. M.: Australian Cumacea, No. 8, The Family Bodotriidae

Corton, B. C.: Recent Australian Species of the Family Rissoidae (Moilusca) ..

ANpbREWARTHA, H. G.: The Distribution of Plagues of Austroicetes cruciata Sauss.

(Acrididae) in Australia in Relation to Climate, Vegetation and Soil

Mawson, P. M.: Some Species of the Chactognath Genus Spadella from New South

Wales

Mawson, D.: The Nature and Occurrence of Uraniferous Mineral Deposits in South

Australia

Ostruartes: Mr. Fred. Chapman and Rey. N. H. Louwyck ..

Verco MEDAL

BALANCE-SHEET

List or FELLOWS

INDEX

Page

144

173

177

183

191

210

225

286

315

327

334

358

359

360

363

STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA

By A. JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., F.R.E:S.

Summary

I am indebted to Mr. T. Bainbridge Fletcher for pointing out that we have been using some generic

names which have been preoccupied, and for which new names must be substituted. For instance,

Macraeola Meyr. (Tineidae 1893) must give place to Tenaga Clem. (1862). He has also substituted

Thalamarchella for Thalamarchis.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED

STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA

By A. Jerreris Turner, M.D., F.R.E.S.

[Read 13 April 1944]

I am indebted to Mr. T. Bainbridge Fletcher for pointing out that we have

been using some generic names which have been preoccupied, and for which new

names must be substituted. For instance, Macraeola Meyr. (Tineidae 1893) must

give place to Tenaga Clem. (1862). He has also substituted Thalamarchella tor

Thalamarchis.

I propose the following changes :—

for Palaeoneura Turn. 1923 (Tineidae). Archaeoneura.

Lophozancla Turn. 1933 (Gelechiidae). Phaeotypa. ( hatoruTos,

with dark markings.)

Idiozancla Turn. 1936. (Occophoridae). Phobetica, ( PoBytixos,

timid. )

Stenophara Turn. 1940. (Occophoridae.) Jschnophara,

Fam. NOTODONTIDAE

Gallaba diplosticha n. sp.

durAoortexos, with double lines.

8, 40-44 mm.; 9, 35-40 mm. Head and thorax grey-whitish sprinkled with

fuscous; face whitish. Palpi whitish, outer surface of second joint except apex

dark fuscous. Antennae grey-whitish; pectinations in male 6, in female 13.

Abdomen whitish-grey. Legs whitish sprinkled with fuscous; inner surface and

tarsal rings of anterior and middle pairs dark fuscous. Forewings sub-oblong,

narrow, costa in male slightly sinuate, in female slightly arched, apex sub-

rectangular, termen rounded, slightly oblique; grey mixed with whitish and

sparsely sprinkled with fuscous; markings fuscous; a double line from base to

one-sixth costa; another from one-third costa to one-fourth dorsum, slightly

waved, indented above dorsum; a single sinuate median transverse line; a double

wavy line from two-thirds costa to two-thirds dorsum ; an interrupted subterminal

line; orbicular and reniform represented by white spots partly outlined with fus-

cous, the former round, the latter elongate, almost linear, on the posterior edge

of median line; cilia grey, apices whitish. Hindwings of male very broad, rounded,

with a tuft of long hairs from near base of costa, in female moderate with apex

pointed and termen sinuate; 6 and 7 coincident in male, stalked in female; pale

fuscous with whitish suffusion towards base; cilia whitish, bases pale fuscous. In

one female there is an irregular blackish subdorsal streak from base.

Western Australia: Margaret River in October; Albany in March; Denmark

in November and April; Perth; seven specimens, of which three are in the

Queensland Museum.

Fam. OENOCHROMIDAE

Taxeotis homoeopa n. sp.

épowwros, similar.

3, 19-22 mm. Head grey; face blackish, Palpi 14; blackish, sharply

white towards base beneath. Antennae grey; ciliations one-half. Thorax,

Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 68, (1), 28 July 1944

abdomen, and legs grey. Forewings triangular, costa nearly straight, apex pointed.

termen straight, oblique; grey with a few scattered fuscous scales; markings

fuscous; dark costal spots at one-third and two-thirds; a dorsal dot at one-fourth.

and another in disc midway between this and first costal ; a small medium discal dot:

a subterminal series ot spots more or less connected and obscured by fuscous

irroration and preceded by a parallel line not reaching costa of ferruginous dots

with fuscous centres; terminal edge pale with a series of dark fuscous dots; cilia

grey with fuscous points. Hindwings with termen rounded; colour, termina!

dots, and cilia as forewings; a short transverse fuscous line from three-fifths

dorsum.

?, 19-24 mm. Palpi 1}. Forewings with apex acute; markings much more

obscure and often partly obsolete.

Most nearly resembling 7. blechra Turn. from Western Australia, but the male

differs in the darkly suffused subterminal line preceded by ferruginous dots on

forewings, The female of T. blechra often has minute transverse strigulae over

both wings.

' Queensland: Cunnamulla in October; six specimens.

PHRATARIA WIk.

Walker 1862, 35, 1700.

Westwood (1841) made the genus Eptdesmia for tricolor Westw. Walker

(1862) made Phrataria for replicataria Wlk., 35, 1700. Meyrick (1890) sank

Walker’s genus to Epidesmia, and at the same time described Satraparchis for

bijugata, overlooking the fact that these species agreed in neuration. The genus

Phrataria must be restored. It differs from Epidesmia essentially in the stalking

of 3 and 4 of the forewings, and contains replicataria WIk.? transcissata W1k.,

bijugata Wlk., and the following species.

Phrataria V-album n. sp.

V-album, marked with a white V.

8, 24 mm. Head, palpi and thorax fuscous. Antennae fuscous; pectina-

tions in male, four. Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous. Forewings triangular, costa

moderately arched, apex pointed, termen sinuate; fuscous; veins streaked with

whitish-ochreous ; a broad straight white line from just beneath midcosta to tornus,

edged with dark fuscous, its dorsal portion preceded and followed by very fine

whitish parallel lines; a white line from apex to termen just above tornus,

obtusely bent inwards above middle; a slender white terminal line; cilia fuscous.

Hindwings with termen rounded; grey; a slightly darker straight postmedian line;

a faint whitish subterminal line from apex to tornus; a slender white termina!

line; cilia grey.

Queensland: Milmerran in October; one specimen received from Mr. J.

Macqueen.

Fam. SYNTOMIDAE

SYNTOMIS APERTA WIk. 1864

Walker 1864, Cat. 31, 72.

Hydrusa nesothetis Meyr. 1886, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 783.

Syntomis melitospila Turn, 1905, ibid., 853; Hmps. 1914, Suppl. 1, 20, pl. ii, fig. 2.

Queensland: Gladstone, Eidsvold, Gayndah, Toowoomba, Dalby, Injune,

Milmerran, Inglewood, Cunnamulla. New South Wales: Murrurundi, Hay.

ERESSA STREPSIMERIS Meyr. 1886

Meyr. 1886, sbid., 786.

Eressa xanthostacta Hmps. 1903, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (7), 11, 339.

Eressa stenothyris Turn, 1933, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 57, 160.

North Queensland: Cape York, Cairns, Mount Mulligan, Townsville, Bowen,

Queensland: Yeppoon.

EressA MEGALOSPILA Turn 1922

Turn, 1922, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 28.

Eressa strepsimeris Hmps. 1914, Suppl. i, 47, nec Meyr. 1886, ibid., 786,

North Australia: Darwin, Daly River.

Fam. ARCTITDAE

Heliosia perichares n. sp.

Tepryapys, cheerful.

$ 9,18 mm. Head and palpi orange-yellow. Antennae pale grey, towards

base yellowish; ciliations in male 1. Thorax, anterior half orange-yellow, posterior

half blackish. Forewings suboblong, costa moderately arched, apex rounded,

termen oblique; orange-yellow with three blackish fasciae ; first small, basal; second

moderate, from one-third costa to mid-dorsum, margins wavy or straight, anterior

edge with a slight prominence above middle, posterior leaving a narrow orange-

yellow terminal strip, which may or may not extend to tornus; cilia blackish,

towards apex of wing yellowish. Hindwings with termen rounded; 3 and 4

coincident; orange-yellow; a broad blackish terminal band; cilia blackish. Very

similar to H. charopa, which has different neuration of hindwings, no basal fascia

in forewings, and subterminal fascia differently shaped.

Queensland: Milmerran in October, November and December; three speci-

mens received from Mr. J. Macqueen.

Halone nephobola n. sp.

vepoBoXros, overcast with clouds.

$, 27-30 mm, Head and thorax fuscous sprinkled with whitish-ochreous.

Palpi dark fuscous. Antennae fuscous; in male with tufts of moderate ciliations

(1). Abdomen grey mixed with whitish-ochreous; tuft and underside ochreous.

Legs ochreous with fuscous tarsal rings; posterior tibiae ochreous. Forewings

triangular, costa strongly arched, apex round-pointed, termen nearly straight,

obligue; whitish-ochreous sprinkled and suffused with fuscous, darker in central

area; markings dark fuscous; a basal costal spot, from which proceeds a curved

line ending on fold and enclosing a pale spot; shortly followed by a suffused line

also from costa to fold; antemedian irregularly dentate from one-third costa to

three-fifths dorsum; a pale-centred discal spot outlined with fuscous; postmedian

from two-thirds costa, dentate, with a broad quadrangular projection from beneath

costa to below middle; a broadly suffused interrupted subterminal line; cilia

fuscous mixed with pale ochreous. Hindwings with termen gently rounded;

orange-yellow ; a fuscous apical spot; cilia yellow, on apex partly fuscous.

Allied to H. sinuata and H. coryphaea, but larger, differing in details of fore-

wing markings, and without fuscous terminal line on hindwings.

Tasmania: Hobart in October (Dr. V. V. Hickman); two specimens taken

at rest on the wall of the University. The larvae feed on lichens and pupate in

crevices between the stones.

Philenora malthaca n. sp.

poAgaxos, gentle,

9, 20 mm. Head whitish. Palpi and antennae fuscous. Thorax fuscous

with anterior and posterior whitish spots. Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous;

posterior pair whitish-ochreous. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa nearly

straight, apex pointed, termen oblique; whitish suffused with fuscous, appearing

grey; a transverse elongate whitish basal spot, separated by a fuscous line from a

whitish fuscous-edged dorsal blotch, which extends nearly to middle; upper edge

of blotch nearly straight, subcostal, posterior edge deeply indented, forming median

and dorsal obtuse projections; an oblique fuscous line from midcosta to upper

angle of hlotch; a second oblique line from three-fourths costa to three-fourths

dorsum, the costal portion of area between these lines whitish; an irregular sub-

terminal fuscous fascia, indented posteriorly above middle, containing a whitish

dorsal triangle, its apex produced to middle of disc; cilia fuscous with whitish

bars. Hindwings broad, termen rounded; pale ochreous; a pale fuscous apical

blotch tolerably well defined; cilia pale ochreous, on blotch fuscous.

New South Wales: Newport, near Sydney, in September; one specimen

received from Mr. J. Macqueen.

Fam. NOCTUIDAE

Subfam. MELANCHRINAE

MELIANA scottr Butl. 1886

Butl. 1886, Trans. Ent. Soc., 391; Hmps. 1905, 5, 95, pl. xev, fig. 22.

Leucania melanopasta Turn. 1902, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 81.

Borolia microsticta Turn. 1909, ibid., 341.

Male with mid-tibiae densely clothed throughout with long hairs on ventral

surface. Lateral hair-tufts on penultimate abdominal segment. Antennae with

short ciliations (one-half) and longer bristles (1). Both sexes with posterior

tibiae smooth.

North Australia: Darwin, Queensland: Cape York to Brisbane. North-

west Australia: Wyndham.

MELIANA LEWINII Butl, 1886

Butl. 1886, Trans. Ent. Soc., 390; Hmps. 1905, 5, 556.

M. similis Butl. 1886, ibid., 392.

M. xylogramma Meyr. 1897, Trans. Ent. Soc., 367.

Peak Downs to Sydney.

Subfam. ACRONYCTINAE

Acronycta anceps n. sp.

anceps, two-headed.

é, 32-40 mm. Head and thorax fuscous-brown mixed with whitish; thorax

with a slender fuscous transverse antemedian line. Palpi reaching vertex, terminal

joint short, obtuse; fuscous-brown. Antennae fuscous; in male shortly ciliated

(one-half). Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous-brown with whitish tarsal rings.

Forewings elongate-triangular, costa nearly straight, apex rounded, termen

rounded, oblique; fuscous-brown with some whitish suffusion; markings fuscous;

an ill-defined sub-basal line; a slender blackish sub-dorsal line from near base to

one-fourth; orbicular obsolete; reniform outlined with whitish, narrow, oblique, its

lower extremity connected by an inwardly curved line with two-thirds dorsum;

a suffused oblique line from midcosta to lower extremity of reniform, thence out-

wards, blackish, and soon dividing into two heads, running respectively to dorsum

above tornus and termen below middle; three whitish costal dots beyond middlc ;

some whitish subapical suffusion; subterminal line obsolete or indicated by some

blackish dots; cilia fuscous with slender whitish bars. Hindwings with termen

rounded, slightly wavy; 5 obsolescent from below middle of cell (one-third) ;

fuscous with a large suffused whitish basal blotch; cilia fuscous, becoming whitish

towards tornus.

North Queensland: Kuranda in March; two specimens received from Mr.

F. P. Dodd.

Namangana eugraphica n. sp.

cbypadixos, well inscribed.

4, 35 mm. Head, palpi, thorax, and abdomen pale grey. Antennae grey-

whitish; in male bipectinate almost to apex, pectinations 2. Leg, grey-

whitish; anterior tarsi dark fuscous with whitish rings. Forewings elongate-

triangular, costa almost straight, apex rounded-rectangular, termen rounded

slightly oblique; grey-whitish; markings fuscous, very clear and distinct; four

strigules on basal fifth of costa; a sub-basal median dot; a double wavy transverse

line at one-fifth; claviform long, U-shaped; orbicular outlined, broadly oval;

reniform outlined, large, connected with dorsum by a dentate line; a dot on mid-

costa; postmedian line double, finely dentate, from two-thirds costa outwards,

curved beneath costa to become transverse, ending on dorsum near tornus; a finely

dentate subterminal line; a terminal series of blackish dots; cilia grey-whitish with

two faintly darker lines. Hindwings with termen gently rounded; white; a

slender fuscous terminal line; cilia white.

Queensland: Cunnamulla in April; one specimen received from Mr. N. Geary.

NAMAGANA HOROLOGA (Meyr. 1897)

Meyr. 1897, Trans. Ent. Soc., 367 (Orthosia).

Prometopus horologa Hmps. 1909, 8, 369, pl. cxxxi, fig. 7.

I think this species is best placed here.

Eidsvold to Melbourne, Clermont, Scone, Charleville.

Barybela n. gen.

BapuBedos, with heavy palpi.

Tongue strong. Face not projecting. Palpi ascending, rather long, clothed

with appressed scales; second joint much thickened, reaching middle of face;

terminal joint moderate, obtuse. Thorax with a moderate posterior bifid crest.

Abdomen with dorsal crest on basal segment. Posterior tibiae mostly smooth but

with short hairs on dorsum. Hindwings with 5 obsolescent from well below

middle. Apparently allied to Namangana, but with different palpi.

Barybela chionostigma n. sp.

Xeovootrypos, with white spots.

?, 30mm. Head and thorax dark fuscous with a few whitish scales. Palpi

2; dark fuscous, bases of second and terminal joints and a few scales whitish.

Antennae dark fuscous. Abdomen whitish heavily sprinkled with fuscous. Legs

dark fuscous; apices of tibiae and tarsal joints white. Forewings elongate-

triangular, costa straight, apex rectangular, termen slightly rounded, scarcely

oblique ; dark fuscous with a few whitish scales towards costa, markings white, a

mid-basal spot; three or four minute costal dots beyond middle, orbicular a snow-

white dot at one-third; reniform a snow-white ring incomplete on costal edge;

cilia dark fuscous with obscure grey bars. Hindwings with termen rounded;

grey ; cilia grey, bases whitish.

Western Australia: Yanchep, in November; one specimen.

Macroprora Turn, 1941

Turn. 1941 (June), Mem. Qld. Mus., 12, 48.

Conocrana Turn. 1941 (August), Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 72 (type C. ochthera

Turn., tbid.),

A characteristic feature of this genus, not mentioned in my description, is the

large erect dorsal crest on the fourth abdominal segment. Type, M. chienobola

Turn., ibid. To this genus should be referred M. oostigma Turn. 1929, Trans.

Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 53, 302, and M. symprepes, both of which were described as

of the genus Crypsiprora, Trans. Ent. Soc., 1902, 29,

The genus Conocrana becomes a synonym,

MAcROPRORA CHIONOBOLA Turn. 1941

Turn, 1941 (June), Mem. Old. Mus., 12, 48.

Conocrana ochthera Turn. 1941 (August), Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld.

Evrrora Hmps. 1926

New Gen. and Sp. Noct. 1926, 88.

Tongue strong. Face with moderate smooth rounded prominence. Palpi

porrect, slender; second joint reaching to facial prominence, shortly rough-scaled ;

terminal joint short. Thorax and abdomen not crested. Tibiae hairy. Forewings

elongate, narrow at base, posteriorly dilated; 2 from three-fourths, 7, 8, 9 stalked

from areole, which is short and broad. Hindwings with 5 from middle of cell,

weakly developed except towards termen, 12 anastomosing with cell near base.

Type, £. lichenophora.

This genus should be referred to the Acronyctinae. It agrees in wing-shape

and is probably akin to the following genus, which differs in palpi, neuration of

forewings, and smooth legs.

EUPRORA LICIKENOPHORA Low. 1902

Low. 1902, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 26, 224.

Victoria: Gisborne.

Litoscelis n. gen.

AttooxeAcs, smooth-legged.

Tongue strong. Face with moderate smooth rounded prominence. Palpi

smooth, porrect; second joint very much thickened; terminal joint minute.

Thorax and abdomen not crested. Tibiae smooth. Forewings elongate, strongly

dilated; 2 from two-thirds, areole short and broad, 7 arising from it separately.

Hindwings with 5 obsolescent from middle of cell, 12 closely approximated to cell

to beyond middle.

LITOSCELIS TANYPHYLLA Turn. 1929

Turn. 1929, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 53, 304.

North Queensland: Cairns, Atherton.

FEREMAULA Turn, 194]

Proc. Roy. Soc. Old., 74.

My definition needs amendment, In the type specimen the thorax was

abraded, but in another I find a moderate smooth rounded posterior crest. There

is also a small crest on the first abdominal segment. The origin of 5 of the hind-

wings from below the middle is correct for the type, but in two other examples it

is median.

EREMAULA MINOR (Butl. 1886)

Butl. 1886, Trans. Ent. Soc., 397; Hmps. 1909, 8, 547, pl. cxxxvi, fig. 31 (Cram-

bodes).

This species cannot be referred to Namangana (Staud. 1888, Ent. Zeit., 49,

28; Hmp., 8, 541). £E. ptilopleura Turn. 1941 is a synonym.

Queensland: Peak Downs; Injune; Cunnamulla.

Bathytricha aethalion n. sp.

aifadior, dusky.

é,38mm. Head, palpi, thorax, abdomen, and legs fuscous. Antennae grey;

pectinations in male 1. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa nearly straight, apex

rounded, termen rounded, oblique; dark grey with dark fuscous dots; three dots

in a transverse line at one-third; a series of dots in a sinuate line at three-fourths;

a supramedian dot displaced inwards; a terminal series of dots; cilia dark grey.

Hindwings with termen sinuate; cilia grey-whitish with a darker median line.

Closely similar with B. truncata Wlk., except that in the hindwings vein 5, which

is weakly developed, is not approximated at base to 4, but straight and arising

from middle of cell.

Victoria: Orbost; the larvae feeding on maize stems (W. V. Ludbrook) ;

one specimen.

ARIATIUISA

Wilk. 1865 33, 747; Hmps., Cat. Lep. Phal., 1909, 8, 383.

Tongue strong. IJ'ace not projecting. Palpi ascending, second joint thickened

with appressed scales, somewhat rough anteriorly; terminal joint short, obtuse.

Thorax with a small bifid posterior crest; tegulae rather large. Abdomen with-

out crests but with lateral tufts of hair directed towards middle, Posterior tibiae

hairy. Neuration normal.

To this genus I refer all the species formerly included by me in Caradrina,

Trans, Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 1920, 44, 154, except C. obtusa Hmps., Ill. Het. B.M.,

8, 29, pl. exlv, fig. 6, and C. maculatra Low. 1891, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1902,

657. Two species, including the type, are known from Africa, one from New

Zealand and one from Fiji, but there are many in Australia. Their discrimination

is often difficult. In addition to a certain amount of variability some show sexual

differences. Much work remains to be done before the species are accurately

known. Thoracolopha Turn., Proc. Roy. Soc. Qid., 1939, 13, is a synonym.

Ariathisa loxonephra n. sp.

Aoforeppos, with oblique reniform.

é,30mm. Head whitish; face grey. Palpi whitish, sparsely sprinkled with

fuscous. Antennae fuscous; in male serrate with fascicles of short cilia (1).

Thorax whitish sprinkled with fuscous and pale ochreous, Abdomen whitish,

on dorsum faintly ochreous-tinged. Legs whitish sprinkled with fuscous; tarsi

except posterior pair with dark fuscous rings. Forewings elongate-triangular,

costa almost straight, apex rounded-rectangular, termen rounded, slightly oblique,

whitish partly ochreous-tinged, with fuscous markings; costa barred throughout ;

subcostal, median, and plical streaks from base to antemedian line; antemedian

sharply angled inwards on fold, obsolete towards costa; postmedian from two-

thirds costa to three-fifths dorsum, sharply dentate, costal half nearly transverse,

dorsal half inwardly oblique; median area between lines mostly suffused with

fuscous ; orbicular a longitudinal oval whitish ring with fuscous centre; reniform

large, oblique, two-lobed, edged with whitish except on costal aspect, closely fol-

lowed by postmedian line; beyond this fine streaks on veins; a terminal series of

dark fuscous lunules, cilia fuscous with slender whitish bars. Hindwings with

termen rounded, crenulate; white with grey terminal suffusion; an interrupted

fuscous terminal line; cilia white.

Western Australia: Tammin in October; one specimen.

Ariathisa desertorum n. sp

desertorum, living in the wilderness.

@, 28 mm. Head, thorax, and palpi grey or pale ochreous sprinkled with

fuscous. Antennae fuscous; in male shortly and evenly ciliated (one-half).

Abdomen whitish-ochreous with some fuscous scales. Legs fuscous with whitish-

ochreous rings; posterior pair mostly whitish-ochreous, Forewings rather narrow,

posteriorly dilated, costa straight, apex rounded-rectangular, termen slightly

rounded, slightly oblique; whitish-ochreous or grey more or less suffused with

fuscous; markings dark fuscous; a sub-basal line from costa to fold; a slightly

dentate line from one-fourth costa to one-third dorsum; an ochreous or pinkish

line or suffusion on fold; orbicular a small pale circular spot; reniform dark fus-

cous, irregularly oblong, its angles sometimes produced, anterior and posterior

edges pale and sometimes pinkish-tinged; median line dentate, incomplete or

blurred; postmedian slender finely dentate from two-thirds costa, first outwardly

curved, bent inwards below middle and indented above dorsum; an apical fuscous

suffusion sometimes extended towards dorsum, a submarginal series of pale spots

sometimes pinkish-tinged; a terminal line; cilia grey mixed sometimes with fus-

cous and whitish. Hindwings with termen rounded; whitish sometimes with grey

suffusion on apex and termen; cilia whitish.

South Australia: Ooldea in October (W. H. Matthews); three specimens.

Subfam, ERASTRIINAE

NaRANGODES GLYCYcITROA (Turn, 1904)

Micrapatetis glycychroa Turn. 1904, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 28, 218; Himps.,

9. 453, pl. exlvi, fig. 20.

Darwin; Thursday Island; Cape York; Cairns; Yeppoon; Duaringa.

Eublemma hapalochroa n. sp.

dmadoxpoos, softly coloured.

@¢9, 15-18 mm. Head and thorax ochreous-brown. Palpi fuscous.

Antennae fuscous; ciliations in male minute. Abdomen ochreous. Legs fuscous

with ochreous rings. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa gently arched, apex

pointed, termen slightly rounded, oblique; ochreous; a fuscous spot on base of

costa prolonged on costal edge; a broad postmedian purple-fuscous band, edged

with fuscous, and containing a small ochreous discal spot, anterior edge at two-

fifths, slightly outwardly curved, posterior edge from two-thirds costa to dorsum

before tornus, with subcostal and median obtuse projections; a purple-fuscous

apical suffusion, broadest on costa; cilia purple-fuscous. Hindwings with termen

rounded ; grey; cilia pale grey.

Queensland: Thargomindah in April; two specimens received from Mr, N.

Geary.

EustTroTia MACROSEMA (Lower 1903)

Xanthoptera macrosema Low. 1903, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 27, 48.

Nanaguna albirena Amps. 1909, 8, 557, pl. exxxvii, fig. 9.

Eustrotia macrosema limps. 1910, 10, 605, pl. clxvii, fig. 1.

Euprora crypsichlora Turn. 1931, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 341.

Queensland: Brisbane; Toowoomba; Bunya Mountains; Carnarvon Ranges.

E. cyclospila Turn, 1932, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 56, 178, and FE, eremo-

tropha Turn., ibid., 177, are allied species,

Subfam. EUTELITINAE

Phlegetonia bathroleuca n. sp.

Badporevxos, white at the base.

@, 32 mm. Head grey. Palpi with second joint nearly reaching vertex,

terminal joint one-half; ochreous-whitish, outer surface sprinkled with fuscous,

towards base wholly dark fuscous. Antennae fuscous. Thorax greenish-grey

mixed with fuscous. Abdomen fuscous; tuft fuscous-whitish. Legs fuscous;

tarsi with ochreous-whitish rings. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa straight,

apex rounded-rectangular, termen crenulate, slightly curved to vein 3, there

bowed, and thence oblique to tornus; basal area to one-third fuscous with waved

pale transverse lines each edged with dark fuscous; thence grey; reniform narrow,

constricted in middle, greenish, preceded by a dark fuscous spot, and followed by

a pale suffusion, which is traversed by an S-shaped fuscous line ending in dorsum

beyond middle; postmedian double, fuscous, strongly sinuate, interrupted above

middle by a thick blackish streak, which curves to below midtermen; a dentate

sinuate subterminal line; an apical fuscous suffusion; a fuscous tornal spot;

cilia fuscous, on middle of termen barred with greenish-grey. Hindwings with

termen rounded; fuscous, a basal white blotch deeply incised in middle; cilia

fuscous.

North Queensland: Tully, near Innisfail, in June; one specimen,

Subfam. SARRHOTHRIPINAE

Neocleta n. gen,

reoxAytos, newly chosen.

Tongue well developed. Face not projecting. Palpi rather long, porrect;

second joint much thickened especially at apex, where there is a broad rounded

dorsal tuft; terminal joint minute, depressed. Thorax not crested. Abdomen

with a minute crest on basal segment. Posterior tibiae smooth. Forewings with-

out areole, 7, 8, 9, 10 stalked, 11 anastomosing with 12. Hindwings with 3 and 4

coincident, 2 and 5 equidistant from 3, 12 anastomosing to middle of cell.

Near Microthripa Hmps., 11, 226, but with 11 and 12 anastomosing, an

unusual feature in this group, and with different palpi.

Neocleta empyra n. sp.

€umupos, scorched, carbonised.,

¢. Head and thorax blackish. Palpi one and a half; blackish. Antennae

dark fuscous; ciliations in male one-half. Legs dark fuscous; posterior tibiae

mostly grey-whitish. Forewings suboval, costa strongly arched, apex round-

pointed, termen oblique; fuscous with blackish markings; a costal streak from

base almost to middle; a dorsal streak from base to two-thirds, a suffused fascia

interrupted in middle connecting apices of these streaks; a fine line from apex of

costal streak beneath costa to two-thirds, there bent in a right angle to below

middle, where it is again angled and inwardly curved to dorsal streak; a whitish

dot in dise at three-fifths; cilia fuscous. Hindwings and cilia whitish. Adapted

for concealment on blackened tree trunks.

Western Australia: Merredin in September; one specimen.

Calathusa anisocentra n. sp.

dvicoxevrpos, with unequal spurs.

2,32 mm. Head grey mixed with white on crown; face with strong anterior

tuft. Palpi 3, obliquely ascending; second joint strongly expanded towards apex,

especially on dorsum; terminal joint one-fourth; grey mixed with whitish.

Antennae grey. Thorax grey. Abdomen ochreous-grey-whitish. Legs fuscous

sprinkled with white; posterior pair white; posterior tibiae with outer spurs very

short. Forewings elongate, narrow, posteriorly dilated, costa slightly arched, apex

rounded, termen obliquely rounded; grey unevenly suffused with white except in

median area; a slender fuscous antemedian line from one-fourth costa obliquely

outwards to fold, there acutely angled inwards to end on dorsum near base; outer

edge of median area sharply defined, indented in middle, above dorsum, and on

dorsum ; dark fuscous discal dots with raised scales at two-fifths and three-fifths ;

a third dot at four-fifths almost connected with a wavy streak from dorsum before

tornus; all veins partly streaked with fuscous; a terminal series of longitudinal

elongate fuscous dots; cilia grey with some fuscous bars. Hindwings with termen

slightly sinuate ; whitish with grey terminal suffusion broadest at apex; cilia white.

This species presents some structural peculiarities of minor importance.

Queensland: Milmerran in August; one specimen received from Mr. J.

Macqueen.

Calathusa englypta n. sp.

éyyAvrros, indented.

4, 9, 28-30 mm. Head and thorax fuscous, Palpi 2; fuscous. Antennac

fuscous; ciliations in male 2, Abdomen fuscous; basal segment whitish; tuft

ochreous-whitish. Legs fuscous; posterior pair whitish. Forewings elongate-

oval, costa slightly arched, apex rectangular, termen rounded, slightly oblique ;

fuscous unevenly sprinkled with whitish; markings dark fuscous; an incomplete

dentate sub-basal line; antemedian line from one-third costa to one-third dorsum,

indented in middle with a posterior tooth above and beneath; postmedian from

before two-thirds costa to two-thirds dorsum with a posterior rectangular projec-

tion indented in middle, thence incurved, preceded by a short line from costa; fine

streaks on veins in terminal area; sometimes a short whitish submedian suffusion;

an irregular dentate whitish subterminal line; cilia grey with fuscous bars. Hind-

wings with termen slightly bisinuate; grey, towards base suffused with whitish;

cilia whitish.

Queensland: Milmerran in March; two specimens received from Mr. J.

Macqueen.

Subfam. ACONTIINAE

Verz., 164; Hmps., 11, 326.

The genus Eligma Hb. should be placed in this subfamily next to Cacyparis

Wik., 26, 1.572; Hmps., 11, 461.

Subiam. OPHIDERINAE

Eremnophanes n. gen.

épenvoborns dark.

Tongue present. Face with strong rounded prominence. Palpi long, porrect,

shortly rough-scaled; terminal joint long, stout, obtuse. Thorax with a strong

posterior crest. Abdomen with crests on first two segments. Forewings with

areole present, 10 arising from it separately. Hindwings with 5 approximated to

4, 6, and 7 connate, 12 anastomosing to beyond middle of cell,

Eremnophanes apicinota n. sp.

apicinotus, with apical mark.

9, 20 mm. Head, antennae, and thorax dark fuscous. Palpi 3; fuscous.

Abdomen whitish; crests dark fuscous. Legs fuscous. Forewings narrowly

triangular, costa nearly straight, apex pointed, termen obliquely rounded, crenu-

late; dark fuscous; markings blackish, obscure, partly edged with whitish; a short

white streak from base of costa edged blackish posteriorly ; antemedian line from

one-third costa to dorsum near middle, angled on fold; orbicular a small whitish

ring; a median transverse line projecting obtusely in middle and above dorsum;

reniform large, outlined with blackish, whitish towards costa; a broad white streak

from costa near apex to median line, traversing reniform; cilia fuscous, extreme

bases whitish. Hindwings with termen rounded; whitish with some fuscous

terminal suffusion; cilia white.

Queensland: Cunnamulla in February; two specimens recieved from Mr,

N. Geary.

Stenoprora triplax n. sp.

tpurAag, threefold.

8, 21 mm. Head and thorax grey sprinkled with dark fuscous. Palpi 3,

second joint much exceeding face, terminal joint short, truncate; grey sprinkled

with dark fuscous, lower edge white towards base. Antennae grey; ciliations in

male one-half. Abdomen whitish-grey ; basal crest dark fuscous. Legs fuscous

sprinkled with white; anterior coxac and posterior tibiae and femora white. Fore-

wings narrow, posteriorly dilated, costa almost straight, apex round-pointed,

termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique; grey; markings and some irroration

dark fuscous; a sub-basal line from costa to fold; sharply angled inwards beneath

costa and outwards above fold; antemedian from one-third costa to one-third

dorsum, double, slightly waved; orbicular and reniform outlined with dark fus-

cous, large, closely applied; orbicular semilunar with convexity anterior; reniform

about twice as large, transversely oval with median constriction; a line from inner

edge of orbicular below middle almost enclosing a large circle, then angled to two-

thirds dorsum; a slight whitish suffusion from upper end of reniform to apex;

four whitish dots on posterior half of costa; an irregular subterminal line incised

in middle; a crenulate terminal line; cilia grey with fuscous bars. Hindwings

with termen gently rounded; whitish; a fuscous terminal suffusion; cilia white.

Queensland: Cunnamulla in October; one specimen.

Capelica n. gen,

kamyAtxos, misleading.

Tongue developed. Face with strong anterior tuft of scales. Antennae in

male minutely ciliated. Palpi obliquely ascending, reaching vertex; second joint

moderately thickened with appressed scales; terminal joint short, obtuse. Thorax

with erect expansile anterior tuft. Abdomen without crests but with first segment

clothed dorsally with long hairs. Posterior tibiae hairy on dorsum. Forewing

neuration normal. THindwings with 5 well developed from near angle; 12

anastomosing with cell near base,

Capelica oxylopha n. sp.

égvAodos, sharp--crested.

#, 36mm, Head, palpi, and thorax pale ochreous-grey. Abdomen fuscous.

Legs fuscous with narrow whitish tarsal rings; posterior pair grey. Forewings

elongate-triangular, costa nearly straight, apex rounded, termen nearly straight,

slightly oblique ; glossy ochreous-grey ; a blackish dot on lower posterior angle of

cell, closely followed by a whitish dot; three blackish dots on fold, and several

between veins representing a subterminal line; cilia grey. Hindwings with termen

rounded, grey; cilia pale grey. On casual inspection this would be taken for one

of the Melanchrinae or Acronyctinae.

Western Australia: Yanchep in September; one specimen.

Oglasa prionosticha n. sp.

mptovorttxos, with serrate lines.

@, 38mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen whitish-ochreous. Palpi ascending,

reaching vertex; second joint thickened with smoothly appressed scales; terminal

joint short, stout, pointed; whitish-ochreous, lower two-thirds of external surface

of second joint blackish. Antennae fuscous, towards base whitish-ochreous.

Legs fuscous (posterior pair missing). Forewings elongate-triangular, costa

slightly arched, apex round-pointed, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique ;

whitish-ochreous slightly brownish-tinged; a blackish triangle on mid-costa, its

apex acute and reaching lower edge of cell; a blackish dot midway between this

and dorsum; a sub-quadrate blackish blotch on costa before apex; a blackish dot

on one-sixth costa giving origin to a slender sharply dentate fuscous line to one-

third dorsum; a slender fuscous line from median triangle beneath costa almost

to subapical blotch, then curved, strongly sinuate, and minutely dentate to two-

thirds dorsum; a fuscous costal dot just before apex; cilia pale brownish. Hind-

wings with termen rounded; grey: a faint dentate fuscous postmedian line; cilia

whitish-ochreous.

North-west Australia: Wyndham; one specimen received from Mr. L. J.

Newman.

Artigisa anomozancla n. sp.

dvopolay«Aos, with unusual sickles,

a, 30 mm. Head and thorax fuscous sprinkled with whitish-ochreous.

Palpi in male very long (6) ; terminal joint as long as second, with a dense mass

of long expansile scent-hairs on inner surface; fuscous, scent-hairs and irrora-

tion whitish-ochreous. Antennae fuscous; in male bipectinate to near apex, each

pectination (one and a half) terminating in a longer bristle. Abdomen fuscous;

tuft ochreous-grey. Legs dark fuscous with ochreous-whitish rings ; posterior pair

paler. Forewings triangular, costa nearly straight, apex pointed, termen bowed

on vein 3, slightly oblique; ochreous-whitish suffused with grey, veins mostly

whitish; markings dark fuscous, an irregular sub-basal line from costa to fold,

edged ,with whitish posteriorly; a small triangular spot on one-fourth costa

emitting a fine waved line to one-third dorsum; orbicular a whitish dot beneath

one-third costa, margined with fuscous; a broad median costal triangle; reniform

immediately following this, a whitish oval ring indented posteriorly, partly edged

with whitish; closely beneath and following are several irregular dots; a grey

postmedian shade at one-third, angled outwards, its inner margin crenulate; a

terminal series of triangular interneural dots; cilia whitish-ochreous, bases

sprinkled with fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded; fuscous, suffused

darker antemedian and double dentate postmedian lines; terminal dots and cilia

as forewings.

Queensland: Macpherson Range (3,000 ft.) in January; one specimen re-

ceived from Mr. E. J. Dumigan.

Rhapsa occidentalis. n. sp.

occidentalis, western.

4, %, 34-38 mm, Head and thorax grey, sometimes brownish-tinged. Palpi

extremely long (8), porrect or ascending; laterally compressed, second joint very

long, thickened with loosely appressed scales; posterior two-thirds of dorsal edge

rough-scaled; terminal joint moderate, similarly thickened, its apex hidden in a

terminal quadrangular tuft; grey sprinkled with fuscous. Antennae grey-whitish ;

ciliations in male one and a half. Abdomen grey-whitish. Legs ochreous-whitish,

more or less sprinkled with fuscous; anterior pair darker. Forewings triangular,

costa slightly arched, apex acute, termen sinuate beneath apex, bowed in middle,

scarcely oblique; in male with a broad costal fold beneath extending to middle

and enclosing a tuft of scent-hairs; grey, sometimes brownish-tinged except in

terminal area; markings and some sparsely scattered scales fuscous; a dot in disc

at one-fourth, rarely obsolete; two discal dots in middle, placed transversely,

rarely white-centred; sometimes an obscure line from four-fifths costa to two-

thirds dorsum; a terminal series of dots; cilia ochreous-whitish with a grey basal

line, apices sometimes fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded; grey, towards

base whitish-grey ; a whitish subterminal line edged on both sides with grey; cilia

as forewings but without fuscous apices.

Western Australia: Margaret River in October and November ; two male and

five female examples.

Zethes hemicyclophora n. sp.

jpixedopopos, carrying a half-circle.

9, 63 mm. Head grey, mixed on crown with fuscous. Palpi long (5),

porrect; second joint greatly expanded with rough scales towards apex; terminal

joint short, stout, truncate; grey-whitish sprinkled with fuscous. Antennae grey-

whitish; in female with minute cilia and long bristles (one and a half). Thorax

grey; anteriorly fuscous. Abdomen pale grey sprinkled with fuscous. Forewings

triangular, costa slightly arched, apex rounded, termen excavated beneath apex,

with rounded median prominence; grey; markings and a few scattered scales

fuscous; a basal costal spot; an antemedian band, towards costa grey except in

margins, containing a small white semi-circular crescent; anterior edge of band

curved, dentate, from one-fourth costa to one-third dorsum, posterior edge from

two-fifths costa to mid-dorsum, strongly sinuate; two median blackish discal dots

placed transversely; postmedian line slender, sinuate, dentate, from three-fifths

costa to four-fifths dorsum; a waved line of submarginal dots, the second from

costa larger; cilia grey, apices dark fuscous. Hindwings with termen dentate,

rounded; colour as forewings; slender median and postmedian lines not reaching

costa; an interrupted dentate subterminal line ochreous with dark fuscous edge

thickened near tornus; submarginal dots and cilia as forewings.

Queensland: Macpherson Range (3,000 feet) in January; one specimen

received from Mr. E. J. Dumigan.

Subfam. HYPENINAE

Gn. Delt. & Pyr., 41; Hmps. 1895, Fauna Brit. Ind., Moths, 3, 98; Meyr. 1927,

Rev. Hbk. Brit. Lep., 164.

HYPENODES

Gn, Delt. & Pyr., 41.

I think 7. demonias Meyr., Tr. Ent. Soc., 1902, 39, and T. asthenopa Meyr.,

ibid., 40, ascribed to Tipasa Wk. should be referred here, and with them the

species ascribed by Hampson, ibid., 95, 97, to Chusaris Wk. 1858, Cat.

16. Hypenodes has normally 8, 9, 10 of forewings stalked, but 9 may be absent.

HYPENODES COSTISTRIGALIS Stph.

Meyr. 1927, ibid., 165.

Western Australia: Yanchep in September. A European species, which

occurs also in Australia; no doubt artificially introduced.

HYPENODES PORPHYRITICA Meyr, 1902

Meyr. 1902, Trans. Ent. Soc., 40.

South Australia: Wirrabara.

HyPENopEs MIcropa Meyr. 1902

Meyr. 1902, ibid., 41.

Queensland: Brisbane. New South Wales: Sydney.

Hypenodes ptocas n. sp.

TTWKASy shy.

é, 16mm. Head and thorax grey. Palpi 3; grey. Antennae grey; in male

shortly ciliated (1). Abdomen pale grey. Legs fuscous with whitish tarsal rings.

Forewings elongate-triangular, costa nearly straight, apex pointed, termen slightly

rounded, oblique; grey; markings fuscous, obscure; a series of minute costal dots,

towards apex of wing separated by ochreous-whitish dots; twin discal dots at

three-fifths ; a terminal series of dots; cilia grey. Hindwings with termen rounded ;

pale grey; cilia pale grey.

New South Wales: Ebor in December; two specimens.

Camptocrossa n. gen.

Kaprroxpoooos, with bent margin,

Tongue developed. Palpi long, straight, obliquely ascending, second joint

very long, thickened with scales, smooth beneath, but forming a rough ridge above,

terminal joint short, stout, acute. Legs smooth, Forewings without areole, 2 from

two-thirds, 3, 4, 5 separate, 4 from angle, 7, 8, 9, 10 stalked, 11 connate. Hind-

wings with 2 from middle, 3 and 4 connate, 5 from well above angle (one-third),

6 and 7 stalked. Type, N. selenotypa. Near Philogethes Turn, 1930, Proc. Roy.

Soc. Qld.. 149, from which it differs in the absence of the areole; also near

Camptochetlus Hmps. from India, but lacks the tuft on terminal joint of palpi,

and 5 of the hindwings does not arise from angle.

Camptocrossa selenotypa n. sp.

oedyvotvros, moonstruck.

$, 20 mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen fuscous. Palpi 5, second joint

strongly expanded towards apex; fuscous. Antennae fuscous; in male with

minute ciliations and short bristles (one-half). Legs fuscous with whitish tarsal

rings; posterior pair mostly whitish. Forewings triangular, costa straight, apex

rounded, termen angled on vein 4, concave above and straight beneath angle;

fuscous partly mixed with ochreous-whitish; a semilunar patch on costa from

middle to near apex, mostly ochreous-whitish, strongly margined with dark

fuscous; a suffused transverse dark fuscous line at one-third; an oblique suffused

dark fuscous line from middle of semilunar patch to mid-dorsum; on its outer edge

a whitish dot above dorsum, and a whitish line beneath costa; a series of whitish

costal dots from middle to apex ; a subterminal line of whitish dots edged with dark

fuscous posteriorly; cilia fuscous. Hindwings with termen crenulate and with a

short tooth on vein 4; colour and markings as forewings but with costal and median

areas largely suffused with white, a subterminal dark line edged posteriorly with

whitish dots; subterminal dots and cilia as forewings.

North Queensland: Atherton Plateau (Lake Barrine) in June; one specimen.

Camptocrossa acrocausta n, sp.

axpoxavetos, scorched at the apex.

6,18mm. Head and thorax pale grey. Palpi 4; pale grey with some fus-

cous sprinkling, and a penultimate ring on terminal joint; fuscous. (Antennae

missing.) Abdomen fuscous-brown; apices of segments and tuft pale grey. Legs

whitish-ochreous. Torewings triangular, costa straight, apex rectangular, termen

angled on vein 4, concave above, straight beneath ; ochreous-whitish sprinkled with

grey ; an oblong apical blotch from apex to mid-termen, fuscous-brown edged with

whitish ; three or four fuscous dots on costa; some brown irroration above tornus ;

a crenulate dark fuscous terminal line; cilia ochreous-whitish, on blotch mostly

fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded; ochreous-whitish, suffused with

purple-brown towards costa and termen; a faint postmedian line; a crenulate

fuscous terminal line; cilia ochreous-whitish,

North Queensland: Tully, near Innisfail, in June; one specimen.

Esthlodora acosmopa n. sp.

déxoogperos, tinadorned.

¢, 18mm. Head, antennae, thorax, and abdomen grey. (Palpi missing.)

Legs fuscous with whitish tarsal rings. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa

straight to near apex, apex pointed, termen strongly bowed in middle, above con-

cave, beneath straight; grey with fuscous markings; a slender, outwardly curved

line at one-fourth, slightly dentate; an outwardly oblique blackish mark on mid-

costa, joined at an angle by a slender line to mid-dorsum; before this angle a small

circle representing orbicular, and beyond it another representing reniform; a

triangular mark on costa before apex, its lower part blackish, edged by a whitish

line; from this mark proceeds a slender sinuate slightly dentate line to three-

fourths dorsum, and another to tornus; a terminal line; cilia fuscous, bases

whitish-ochreous. Hindwings with termen rounded, broadly excavated at tornus;

grey ; a blackish discal dot; three obscure wavy transverse lines ; cilia grey.

Queensland: Brisbane; one specimen.

Fam. LASIOCAMPIDAE

Aproscepta n. gen.

drpockertos, unforseen.

Eyes smooth. Palpi short, not exceeding frontal tuft, densely hairy. Fore-

wings with 2 from near middle, 3 from three-fourths, 4 and 5 approximated from

angle, 6 from upper angle connate with 7, 8, which are long-stalked, 9 and 10 long-

stalked, 11 from two-thirds. Hindwings with 4 and 5 approximated from angle,

6 and 7 connate from upper angle, 11 well developed, running not far from base

into 12, which is widely separated from cell; no pseudoneuria, The neuration

differs from that of any genus known to me, but comes nearest to that of Perna

Wik., 5, 1,127, which has a much larger accessory cell in the hindwing, while that

of Endromis, which I refer to the Lasiocampidae, is still smaller.

Aproscepta amblopis n. sp.

épBroms, dull.

2,40 mm. Head ochreous. Palpi pale fuscous. Antennae fuscous; pectina-

tions in female one and a half. Thorax pale fuscous. Abdomen dark fuscous ;

bases of segments whitish. Legs pale fuscous. Forewings elongate-triangular,

costa nearly straight, apex rounded, termen long, rounded, oblique; pale fuscous ;

markings slightly darker, obscure: a subcostal spot at one-third and another before

two-thirds; a sinuate suffused line from three-fourths costa to three-fourths

dorsum ; a roughly parallel similar subterminal line ; cilia pale fuscous. Hindwings

short, termen rounded; colour as forewings, but without markings.

Queensland: Milmerran in January; one specimen received from Mr. J.

Macqueen,

THE SIMPSON DESERT EXPEDITION, 1939 - SCIENTIFIC REPORTS

NO. 1, BIOLOGY - SCORPIONS AND SPIDERS

By V. V. HICKMAN, Ralston Professor of Biology, University of Tasmania

Summary

Dr. C. T. Madigan has kindly sent me for examination the scorpion and spiders collected during his

recent expedition across the Simpson Desert. I am indebted to him for the opportunity of studying

the collection. My thanks are also due to the Trustees of the John Ralston Bequest under whose

auspices the work was carried out, and to Mr. A. Musgrave of the Australian Museum for literature

not available in Tasmania.

THE SIMPSON DESERT EXPEDITION, 1939 — SCIENTIFIC REPORTS

No. 1, BIOLOGY — SCORPIONS AND SPIDERS

By V. V. Hicxman, Ralston Professor of Biology, University of Tasmania

[Read 13 April 1944]

Priates I ro III

Dr. C. T. Madigan has kindly sent me for examination the scorpion and

spiders collected during his recent expedition across the Simpson Desert. I am

indebted to him for the opportunity of studying the collection. My thanks are

also due to the Trustees of the John Ralston Bequest under whose auspices the

work was carried out, and to Mr. A. Musgrave of the Australian Museum for

literature not available in Tasmania.

Our knowledge of the spiders of Central Australia is based mainly on four

collections. The first of these was made by the Horn Expedition in 1894 and was

described by H. R. Hogg (1896, 309). The specimens forming the second collec-

tion were found by Herr von Leonhardi in 1910 and forwarded to the Sencken-

berg Museum. They were described by E. Strand (1913, 599). The third collec-

tion was made by Capt. S. A. White during an “expedition into the Interior of

Australia” in 1913, and a list of the species found has been published by R. H.

Pulleine (1914, 447). The fourth collection was made in 1914, also by Capt.

S. A. White, from the north-western regions of South Australia. This collection

was described by W. J. Rainbow (1915, 772).

In the list of 18 spiders published by R. H. Pulleine (1914, 447) the name

Hemicloea longipes Koch is attributed to the wrong author and should be

Hemucloea longipes R. H. Hogg. Storena graeffei Keys. should be Storena graeffet

L. Koch. Carepalxts monticulo is probably meant for Carepalxis montifera

L. Koch. Mtturga lineata Koch should be Miturga lineata Thorell and Lycosa

arenosa Koch may be intended for Lycosa arenaris Hogg.

The present collection contains 1 scorpion and 105 spiders. The spiders are

distributed over 14 families and comprise 28 species, 14 of which are new. All

the specimens were collected by Mr. H. O. Fletcher and members of the Simpson

Desert Expedition.

The following are the species recorded in the present publication, The

number of specimens of each species is shown in brackets.

SCORPIONES ARANEAE

Urodacus yaschenkoi (A. Birula) (1) -Lycesa sp. (immature) - (3)

Oxvyopes elegans L. Koch - (1)

ARANEAE Storena toddi n. sp. - - (1)

Aganippe simpsonin.sp. - (1) Latrodecius hasseltti Thorell - (1)

Aname sp. (immature) - - (1) Argiope protensa L. Koch - (8)

Dinopis wnicolor L. Koch - (1) Araneus transmarinus (Key-

Ixeuticus senilis (L. Koch) - (31) serling) - - - - (6)

Pardosa eyrein.sp. - - (2) Nephila imperatrix L. Koch - (11)

Pardosa pexa n. sp - - (1) Odo australiensis n. sp. - (2)

Lycosa abmingani n. sp. - (3) Isopeda pessleri (Thorell) - (8)

Lycosa burti n. sp. - - (1) Pediana horni (Hogg) - - (1)

Lycosa finkei n. sp. - - (1) Pediana regina (L. Koch) - (1)

Lycosa fletcherin. sp. - - (1) Oltos inframaculatus (Hogg)- (1)

Lycosa goyderin.sp. - - (1) Tharpyna simpsonin.sp. - (1)

Lycosa halei n. sp. - - (1) Miturga lineata Thorell - - (6)

Lycosa madigani n. sp. - (5) Saitis lacustris n.sp. —- - (1)

Lycosa halei n. sp. - - (1) Ocristona sp. (immature) - (1)

Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 68, (1), 28 July 1944

The collection is too small for one to draw any definite conclusions in regard

to the relative abundance of the different species. Nephila imperatrix L. Koch,

Argiope protensa L. Koch, Araneus transmarinus (Keys.), Isopeda pessleri

(Thorell) and Miturga lineata Thorell were collected at many different localities

and appear to be well distributed throughout Central Australia. Two species,

Odo australiensis n. sp. and Lycosa madigani n. sp. were found at the centre of

the Simpson Desert, while Pardosa eyrei n.sp. and Saitis lacustris n. sp. were

taken on the salt-crust surface of Lake Eyre two and a half miles from shore.

The widely distributed poisonous spider, Latrodectus hasseltii Thorell, has

been recorded from Central Australia on three previous occasions.

Order SCORPIONES

Family SCORPIONIDAE

Sub-Family URODACINAE

Genus Uropacus Peters, 1861

Uropacus YASCHENKo! (A. Birula)

(PL. I, fig. 1-6)

Hemthoplopus yaschenkoi A. Birula 1903, Ann. Mus. Zool. Acad. Sci., St. Peters-

bourg, 8, xxxili-xxxiv.

Urodacus yaschenkoi K. Kraepelin 1908, Fauna Siidwest-Australiens, Jena, 2,

89-95.

Urodacus yaschenkoi K. Kraepelin 1916, Arkiv for Zoologi, Stockholm, 10, 1-43.

Urodacus yaschenkoi 1.. Glauert 1925, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., Adelaide, 49,

85-87

Birula’s type specimen of this scorpion is from Killalpaninna on Cooper

Creek, which flows into Lake Eyre. Two other specimens from Cooper Creek

and Miller’s Creek are recorded and briefly described by Glauert (1925, 87).

Birula does not mention the sex of the type specimen but Kraepelin considers that

it is probably a female. The two specimens recorded by Glauert are stated to

be females.

The single specimen in the present collection comes from 17 miles north of

Andado Station in the Northern Territory. From its smaller size, longer tail

and bisected genital operculum it appears to be a male. Its description is as

follows:

Total length, 63°0 mm. ; length of carapace, 8-9 mm.; length of tail, 35-0 mm.

Colour is a fairly uniform clay-yellow. The fingers, however, together with

the fifth caudal segment and vesicle are dark brown. A longitudinal stripe on

each side of the vesicle and a pair of similar stripes on its ventral surface are

yellowish.

Anterior margin of carapace with a median notch furnished with a pair of

setae. Distance from the notch to the median eyes is 3°60 mm, Diameter of a

median eye, 0°58 mm. The interocular groove is continued behind to the posterior

triangular depression, and in front to the marginal notch. Anteocular area fur-

nished with a few coarse granulations, the rest of the carapace being smooth

except for a few minute scattered granules. The two lateral eyes of each side

are mounted on a common tubercle. The diameter of the anterior eye is 0-46 mm.,

that of the posterior eye 0°29 mm. The two eyes are separated by a space equal

to the diameter of the posterior eye. There is a conspicuous seta below and

slightly behind the lateral eyes and another seta in front of them and somewhat

towards the middle.

The first six tergites of the preabdomen are smooth except for minute granu-

lation on their posterior half. The seventh tergite has, on each side, a pair of

short longitudinal granular keels.

The sternum has the form shown in pl. I, fig. 1, and possesses a median longi-

tudinal depression. On each side of the depression are six small hairs, and in front

of it about eight. The genital operculum is oval and bisected longitudinally but,

owing to the hardness of the specimen, I am not certain whether the two halves

are entirely free from each other. Behind the operculum is a pair of small median

apophyses (pl. 1, fig. 1).

The marginal area of the pectines is coniposed of three sclerites. The middle

area is indistinctly divided into three or four sclerites, the left side differing from

the right (pl. I, fig. 1). The number of teeth is 15 on both sides. The sternites are

smooth and shining.

The segments of the postabdomen or tail have the following measurements

in millimetres :

Segment : I II III IV Vv

Length... ee 3°77 4-06 4-52 4-99 7 +25

Width Sad 1's 3°77 3°65 3-48 3+19 3-25

The superior keels of the first four caudal segments are subdenticulate and end

behind in a moderately large tooth. ‘The supero-lateral keels are granular and the

three ventral keels smooth. The fifth caudal segment is without a dorsal sulcus,

except towards the base. Its keels are denticulate and the supero-lateral keels

about two-thirds the length of the segment. The ventral surface of the segment

is coarsely granular between the keels, the sides and dorsal surface smooth. Apical

margin is toothed laterally and ventrally. The vesicle is large and oval, 3:25 mm.

wide. The aculeus sharp and well curved. Ventral surface and sides of vesicle

granulate. Dorsal surface smooth.

Chelicerae about 56 mm. long, Fingers with teeth on upper margin only,

the lower margin being smooth. The fixed finger has a large conical tooth near

the middle and a large bicuspid tooth nearer the base. The movable finger has

two large teeth separated by a small tooth, and there is another small tooth near

the base (pl. I, fig. 2}. The dorsal surface of the movable finger is furnished with

about six setae and there is a transverse row of about four setae near the base of

the fixed finger. The ventral surface of the chelicerae densely clothed with fine hairs.

Pedipalpi moderately strong. Humerus measures 6°5 mm. long. Its keels

are coarsely granular and there are a few smaller granules on upper and lower

surfaces. The brachium is 8:0 mm. long and is smooth except for the upper and

lower keels bordering its anterior surface. The ventral surface lacks a keel but

is furnished with a longitudinal row of 17 trichobothria (pl I, fig. 3). The hand

is 16-1 mm. long and 5-9 mm. wide. The movable finger is 9-2 mm. long. The

dorsal surface of the hand is very slightly granular and furnished with two very

weak and smooth finger keels. The keel of the under-hand is also smooth and on

its inner side, in the case of the left padipalp, there are 25 trichobothria arranged

as shown in pl. I, fig. 4. Ina similar position on the right pedipalp there are about

29 trichobothria.

The legs are smooth. Tarsal claws very unequal. Jn the first and second

tarsi the outer claw is about twice the length of the inner claw. In the third and

fourth tarsi the inner claw is minute and appears like a small papilla in the fourth

tarsi (pl. I, fig. 5). First and. second metatarsi with a dorsal row of seven strong

spines (pl. I, fig. 6). On the outer side of the tarsal claws there are three or four

black spines, and on the inner side about seven.

Localitty—Seventeen miles north of Andado Station, Northern Territory.

Coll. 519 (14 ? with second and fourth legs of right side slightly damaged).

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate 1

Order ARANEAE

Sub-Order MYGALOMORPHAE

Family CTENIZIDAE

Sub-Family CTENIZINAE

Genus AGANIPPE Cambridge 1877

Aganippe simpsoni n. sp.

(PL. I, fig. 7-10) ‘

?—Total length, 23-0 mm. Length of carapace, 9°O mm. Width of cara-

pace, 7-0 mm. Length of abdomen, 11-0 mm. Width of abdomen, 7-0 mm.

The colour of specimen (in alcohol) is light brown, and there is no distinct

pattern on the abdomen.

Carapace convex. Thoracic region lightly clothed with dark brown woolly

hair and the head region with fine setae. Thoracic groove distinctly procurved.

A median row of coarse black bristles extends from the eyes half-way to the

thoracic groove. There is a group of five black bristles, which curve towards the

front, immediately behind the AME. In a median position in front of the AME

is a single large bristle. Between the ALE there is a group of four setae which

curve backwards,

The eight eyes are arranged in three rows, as shown in pl. I, fig. 7. Ratio

of eyes, AME: ALE: PME: PLE=8: 10:9: 12. The quadrangle formed

by the four anterior eyes is wider in front than behind in ratio 31 : 24, and wider

in front than long in ratio 31 : 26. The posterior row of eyes is wider than the

front row in ratio 51 : 31. The ALE are separated from each other by 15/10 of

their diameter, and from AME by 12/10 of their diameter. The AME are

separated from each other by 11/8 of their diameter and from PLE by 13/8 of

their diameter. The hind margins of the eyes of the posterior row are in an almost

straight line. The PME are separated from each other by 19/9 of their diameter

and from PLE by 6/9 of their diameter. The ALE are separated from the margin

of the clypeus by about 6/10 of their diameter.

Chelicerae clothed in front with coarse black bristles and provided with a

rastellum. Promargin of furrow with six teeth and retromargin also with six

teeth. A median row of five very small teeth in the furrow. Fang strong and

provided with coarse serrations. Labium wider than long in ratio 22 : 9, devoid

of spinules, submerged and almost hidden by the maxillae. The maxillae with a

reddish scopula and numerous spinules in a group at the base near the inner angle,

The sternum is convex, longer than wide in ratio 8: 5, Three pairs of sigilla are

arranged as shown in pl. J, fig. 8. In front of the sternum and behind the labium

is a pair of sclerites resembling sigilla.

Legs: 4.1.2.3. Clothed with black bristles. The first and second tarsi

scopulate. Third and fourth tarsi without scopula, ‘Trichobothria in two rows

on each tibia, in an irregular group near the distal end of each metatarsus and on

the distal half of each tarsus. On the dorsal side of the first and second tarsi

and metatarsi, but not on the third and fourth, are brushes of stiff, erect, black

setae. These setae have small barbs near the tip. Three tarsal claws. are present.

The upper claws of the first and second tarsi with two teeth near base (pl. I, fig. 9),

those of third and fourth tarsi with one tooth near base (pl. I, fig. 10). The third

claw small and without teeth. The palpus is scopulate on the end segment and its

claw has two teeth near the base. The segments of the legs and palpi have the

following measurements in millimetres:

Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total

I sibs 5°91 3-42 2°90 2:90 1-80 16-93

Il w= 516 3-20 2°61 2-72 1-86 15+55

If wee 435 3-19 2°61 2°96 215 15-26

Iv ae O91 4-35 4-41 4-60 2°61 21°88

Palpi ... 4°70 2-67 290 _— 3°48 13-75

The spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur

0. Patella 0. Tibia with numerous coarse black bristles on prolateral and retro-

lateral sides. Metatarsus: ventral 1-2-1-—4, elsewhere 0. Tarsus with an

irregular group of about 14 small spines on ventral side near claws. Second leg—

Femur 0. Patella 0. Tibia with prolateral and retrolateral bristles. Metatarsus:

ventral 2—2—1-—4, elsewhere 0. Tarstis with a ventral group of about 23 small

spines near claws. Third leg—Femur 0. Patella with eleven spines in an irregular

group on prolateral side, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1—1, retro-

lateral 1-1, ventral 3 at apex. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1—1-—1—- 1,

retrolateral 1-1—1-—1 -1, ventral 2 with 4 at apex. Tarsus with a ventral group

of about 16 small spines near claws, elsewhere 0. Fourth leg—Femur 0. Patella

0. Tibia with 1 spine on ventral side at apex, elsewhere 0, Metatarsus: ventral

1-2-—2-1-4, elsewhere 0. Tarsus with a ventral group of about 17 small

spines on distal half of segment. Palpws—Femur 0. Patclla 0. Tibia: dorsal 0,

prolateral 3 near apex, retrolateral numerous black bristles, elsewhere 0. Tarsus:

dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1 on basal half, retrolateral 1-1-1 on basal half, ventral

a group of 2-2-2 close to claw.

Abdomen oval, clothed with fine hairs and long slender bristles. Spinnerets

four. Inner pair small, being only 0-81 mm. long. Outer pair 2°61 mm. long,

stout and three-segmented. The basal segment is nearly four times the length of

the second segment. The third segment is dome-shaped and sunken in the end

of the second segment.

meg ee miles east of Hale River, Simpson Desert. Coll. 549

1¢@).

In some respects this species resembles Aganippe pelochroa Rainbow and

Pulleine (100, 1918). The latter, however, is said to have the front eyes “just

touching edge of clypeus.” There is also a difference in the dentition of the

chelicerae.

Family DIPLURIDAE

Sub-Family DIPLURINAE

Genus ANAmE L, Koch 1873

ANAME sp.

The specimen is too immature for the species to be determined.

Lecality—Camp, 23. Thirty miles north-west of Birdsville, Queensland.

(1 pullus.)

Sub-Order DIPNEUMONOMORPHAE

Family DINOPIDAE

Genus Drnopis Macleay 1839

Dinoris uNiIcoLor L. Koch 1879

Locality—Hale River, 20 miles up stream from junction with Todd River,

Coll. 548 (1 adult ¢ ).

This species has also been recorded from Western Australia.

Family AMAUROBIIDAE

Sub-Family [XEUTICINAE

Genus Ixeuticus Dalmas 1917

IxXEUTICUS SENILIS (L. Koch)

Locality—Indinda Well, near Andado Station, Northern Territory (2 adult

é é,8adult 9 9, and 21 pullus).

This spider was originally described by L. Koch under the name Amaurobius

semilts. Comte de Dalmas (p. 329, 1917) has shown, however, that most of the

Australian species placed in the genus Amaurobius possess a calamistrum com-

posed of a single line of curved hairs, whereas the European species have a

calamistrum composed of two parallel lines of curved hairs. He has therefore

established the genus Jreuticus for the Australian forms. Jxeuticus senilis has

been recorded from Queensland, Victoria and Tasmania.

Family LYCOSIDAE

Sub-Family PARDOSINAE

Genus Parposa C. Koch 1848

Pardosa eyrei n. sp.

(Pl. I, fig. 11-13)

é-—Total length, 17-0 mm. Length of carapace, 8-0 mm. Width of cara-

pace, 6°0 mm. Length of abdomen, 9°0 mm. Width of abdomen, 6:0 mm.

Caput of specimen in alcohol black with white hairs and brown setae.

Thoracic region dark brown, densely clothed with recumbent brown hairs in the

middle region and white hairs round the margin. Chelicerae, maxillae, labium,

sternum and coxae dark brown. Basal two-thirds of ventral surface of femora

dark brown. First and second metatarsi and distal half of first and second tibiae

also dark brown. Other parts of legs yellowish-brown. Palpi yellowish-brown

except tarsal segment, which is dark brown. Dorsal surface of abdomen yellow

with a median dark brown patch, having the form shown in pl. I, fig. 11. Ventral

surface of abdomen very dark brown, almost black, nearly to spinnerets. Spin-

nerets yellow.

Head with straight sides. Thoracic groove longitudinal. Front row of eyes

shorter than second row (pl. I, fig. 12). Ratio of eyes AME: ALE: PME:

PLE=8:6: 17: 15. AME separated from each other by 5/8 of their diamcter,

from ALE by 4/8 of their diameter, and from PME by 3/8 of their diameter.

PME separated from each other by 16/17 of their diameter, and from PLE by

18/17 of their diameter. PLE separated from each other by 52/15 of their

diameter. The quadrangle of the posterior eyes wider than long in ratio 70: 46.

Face densely clothed with white hairs. Six long slender bristles on clypeus

below AME. Clypeus in front of AME equal to 6/8 of their diameter. Near the

dorsal margin of each PLE there is a group of long slender bristles projecting

outwards over the eye. The space between the PME is furnished with a number

of bristles which project forward. There are no bristles near the thoracic groove.

Chelicerae clothed in front with white hairs and black bristles. Condyles

well developed. Promargin of furrow with three teeth, of which the median is

the largest and the distal the smallest. Retromargin with three equal teeth. A

brown scopula on promargin. Labium wider than long in ratio 22: 19. Maxillae

wider in front than at the base. Front margin rounded. Scopula brown. Serrula

well developed. Ventral surface of maxillae clothed with long slender erect black

setae. Sternum oval, pointed behind, longer than wide in ratio 60 : 50, clothed

with fine erect black setae.

Legs: 4.2.1.3. Clothed with white hairs and long erect brown bristles. First

and second tarsi and metatarsi scopulate to base. Third and fourth tarsi also

scoptlate to base but their scopulae divided by a longitudinal band of setae. All

scopulae very light. Trichobothria in two rows on tibiae and tarsi, in one row on

metatarsi, Three tarsal claws. Upper claws with ten teeth, lower claw without

teeth. The form of the palpus is shown in pl. I, fig. 13. The segments of the legs

and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres:

Leg Femur Pateva Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total

I... 82 2-9 6-0 7°0 2-9 27-0

I 8-0 3-0 6-0 8-0 3-0 28-0

i... = 783 2-9 5-1 8-1 2:9 263

IV. 98 3-0 6-0 10-0 3:8 31:8

Palpi 3°8 1+7 2-3 —_ 2-6 10-4

The spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur:

dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 2 near end, retrolateral 1-1-1 -1, ventral 0. Patella:

dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral QO. Tibia: dorsal 1-1,

prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, pro-

lateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. Second leg—Femur: dorsal

1-1-1, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1—1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella, tibia, and

metatarsus armed as in first leg. Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral

1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1 -1, ventral 0. Patella, tibia and metatarsus

armed as in first leg. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1-1-1,

retrolateral 1-1—1-—1, ventral 0. Patella and tibia armed as in first leg. Meta-

tarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 1-2-2 -3.

Palpus—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1 -1, prolateral 1 near end, retrolateral 1 near

end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1 —1 fine bristles, prolateral 1 bristle, elsewhere 0.

Abdomen clothed on dorsal surface and sides with short white hairs. A few

setae at front of brown patch on dorsal surface but elsewhere none. The dark

brown colouration of the ventral surface includes the lung-covers and extends

from the petiolus almost to the spinnerets, there being a thin yellowish line imme-

diately in front of the spinnerets. Hairs on ventral surface short and black.

Spinnerets yellow, the anterior pair with black hairs towards the apex.

Locality—Surface of North Lake Eyre two and a half miles from the shore.

Coll. 669 (1 adult & and 1 pullus).

Pardosa pexa n. sp.

(PL. II, fig. 14) :

¢—-Total length, 10-7 mm. Length of carapace, 5°39 mm. Width of cara-

pace, 4°23 mm. Length of abdomen, 5:51 mm, Width of abdomen, 3°82 mm.

Carapace very dark brown (in alcohol) and densely clothed with grey hairs.

Chelicerae also very dark brown and clothed in front with white hairs. Labium

brown with white hairs on its basal half. Sternum brown, densely clothed with

grey hairs. Mazxillae, legs and palpi yellowish, the legs being marked with in-

distinct transverse bands of brown on dorsal side. Abdomen yellow above with

a median longitudinal patch of brown on front half and several transverse brown

markings on posterior half. Sides of abdomen pale yellow with brown spots.

Ventral surface pale yellow and without pattern. Lung-covers brown. Spin-

nerets yellow.

Carapace is pyriform in outline. Sides of head slightly inclined, the dorsal

surface being rather flat. Thoracic groove longitudinal. Front row of eyes pro-

curved and shorter than the second row in ratio 31: 44. Ratio of eyes AME:

ALE: PME: PLE = 8:6: 19: 14. AME separated from each other by

about 2/8 of their diameter, from ALE by 1/8 of their diameter and from PME

by 2/8 of their diameter, PME poised obliquely and separated from each other

by 11/19 of their diameter and from PLE by 17/19 of their diameter. PLE

separated from each other by 36/14 of their diameter. The quadrangle of the

posterior eyes is wider behind than in front in ratio 52: 44 and its length is

shorter than its width in front in ratio 39: 44, The clypeus in front of AME

is equal to 5/8 of their diameter. Front and sides of head clothed with grey

silky hairs. Dorsal surface of head clothed with grey hairs and brown setae

which point forward.

Condyles of chelicerae brown and well developed. The promargin of furrow

armed with three teeth, of which the median is the largest. Retromargin with

three subequal teeth. Fang dark brown and moderately long. Scopula brown

and on promargin only, Labium truncate in front, excavated on each side near

the base and slightly longer than wide in ratio 13: 12. Front edge fringed with

a row of black setae. Maxillae parallel and clothed with grey hairs on outer side.

Scopula brown. Sternum oval, longer than wide in ratio 42 : 32.

Legs: 4.1.2.3. Clothed with grey hairs and setae. First and second tarsi

and metatarsi scopulate to base, the scopula being composed of rather long hairs.

Third and fourth metatarsi without scopula. Third tarsus missing on both sides.

Fourth tarsi with a light scopula bisected by a longitudinal band of setae. Tricho-

bothria in two rows on tibiae and tarsi, in one row on metatarsi. Upper claws

of first leg with about four tecth, those of fourth leg with seven teeth. Third

claw small and bare. The dorsal surface of the tarsal segment of the palpi is

densely clothed with white hairs, The form of the palpus is shown in pl. IT, fig. 14.

The segments of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in milli-

metres:

Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsud Tarsus Total

4-64 2:32 4-46 5-04 2-61 19-07

Il... = 452 2°20 3:94 4-46 2:49 17-61

WI. )~=— 4-06 2-03 3-13 4-46 lost ?

IV...) = 516 2-15 4-58 7-02 3-07 21-98

Palpi ... 2-03 0-98 1-16 — 1-91 6-08

The spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur:

dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-2, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal

1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, pro-

lateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral

1—1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. Second leg—Femur: dorsal

1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella, tibia and meta-

tarsus are armed as in the first leg. Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, pro-

lateral 1-1, retrolateral 1—1—1, ventral 0, Patella, tibia and metatarsus are

armed as in first lege. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1,

retrolateral 1—1—1, ventral 0. Patella and tibia armed as in first leg. Meta-

tarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 1-2-2 ~3.

Palpus—Femur: dorsal 1-1-2, prolateral 1 mear end, retrolateral 1 near end,

ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 bristles, prolateral 1 bristle, retrolateral 0, ventral

0. Tibia: dorsal 1 bristle, prolateral 1-1 bristles, elsewhere 0, Tarsus: 4 spines

on ventral side near apex. :

Abdomen densely clothed with grey hairs. Anterior spinnerets cylindrical,

the second segment being sunk in the apex of the first. The posterior spinnerets

distinctly two-segmented and projecting beyond the anterior pair.

Locality—Burt’s Waterhole, South Australia, 55 miles south of Birdsville.

Coll. 645 (1 adult ¢ lacking portions of the third pair of legs).

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate IT

Sub-Family LYCOSINAE

Genus Lycosa Latreille 1804

The collection contains eighteen specimens belonging to the genus Lycosa.

’ Five of these are too young to be identified with certainty. The others represent

seven new species. It is unfortunate that in most cases only one sex is available

for description, The seven new species may be distinguished by the following key:

1 Retromargin of chelicerae with two teeth. 2

Retromargin of chelicerae with three teeth. 3

2 First femur with three retrolateral spines. L, madigant n. sp

First femur with no retrolateral spines. L. goyderi n. sp.

3 First and second patellae with no lateral spines. 4

First and second patellae with a prolateral spine. 6

4 Third tibiae with two dorsal spines. 5

Third tibiae with no dorsal spines. L. abmingani n. sp.

5 Ventral surface of abdomen with a transverse black band. L. finkei n. sp.

Ventral surface of abdomen yellow-brown, without markings. L. burti n. sp.

6 Second and third metatarsi equally long. L. fletcheri n. sp.

Second metatarsus shorter than third. L. halei n. sp.

Lycosa abmingani n. sp.

(PI. II, fig. 15)

¢—Total length, 13-0 mm. Length of carapace, 6°5 mm. Width of cara-

pace, 4°6mm, Length of abdomen, 7-2 mm. Width of abdomen, 4-1 mm.

Carapace yellow (in alcohol) with a longitudinal brown band extending from

the sides of the head to posterior margin. Radial grooves dark brown. Legs and

sternum brownish-yellow. Tarsal scopulae dark brown. Labium and maxillae

brown. Chelicerae and fang dark reddish-brown, Dorsal surface of abdomen

yellowish-brown clothed with dark brown hairs and black bristles. A median

longitudinal dark brown patch on anterior half, followed by two pairs of black

spots. Ventral surface yellowish, clothed with white hairs and fine black setae.

Head with slanting sides. Thoracic groove longitudinal. On the lower edge

of the brown band at each side of the head is a row of about six black bristles.

There is also a row of five bristles extending from the lower edge of PLE to lower

edge of PME. Numerous erect bristles occupy the interocular space and also the

area extending from the eyes to the thoracic groove, There are a few bristles at

the sides of the groove. On each side near the posterior end of the groove is a

radial row of four bristles, extending about half-way to the margin of the carapace.

First row of eyes shorter than the second in ratio 21: 25, slightly curved

downwards. The ratio of eyes AME: ALE: PME: PLE = 5:4: 10:8.

AME separated from each other by 2/5 of their diameter, from PME by the same

distance, and from ALE by half that distance, PME separated from each other

by 7/10 of their diameter. PILE separated from each other by 20/8 of their

diameter and from PME by 10/8 of their diameter. The quadrangle of the

posterior eyes wider behind than long in ratio 31 : 25. Clypeus 6/5 of diameter

of AME. A single long bristle between AME and a transverse row of four black

bristles on the clypeus below AME. Qn each side there is also a small group of

bristles on the margin near the condyles of the chelicerae.

Chelicerae reddish-brown clothed in front with long black bristles and white

hair. Lateral condyles yellow. Promargin of furrow with three teeth, of which

the median is the largest and close to the distal one which is the smallest. Retro-

margin with three equal teeth. Scopula on promargin only. Lip as wide as long.

Maxillae with brown scopula and clothed with black bristles. Sternum oval,

truncate in front and longer than wide in ratio 50: 34. It is lightly clothed with

erect black bristles.

Legs: 4.1.2.3. Clothed with black bristles. Scopula dense and entire on first

and second tarsi and metatarsi, bisected by a longitudinal band of setae on third

and fourth tarsi. The scopula on the third and fourth metatarsi is very light.

Trichobothria in two rows on tibiae and tarsi, in one row on metatarsi, There

are also a few lateral trichobothria on the tibiae. Tarsal claws three. Upper

claws on first tarsi with four teeth, on fourth tarsi with eight teeth. Third claw

bare. Palpi yellow, clothed with black bristles. Palpal claw with four teeth. The

segments of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres :

Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total

I 4-2 2°55 3-1 3-0 2:2 15:0

II 3:8 23 2:8 2:9 2-1 13-9

Ill 3°5 1:8 2:9 3°5 2-1 13:8

IV... = 49 2-4 3:9 5+6 2-7 19-5

Palpi ... 2-0 1-0 1-3 —_ 1-7 6-0

The spines on the first two pairs of legs are small, those on the ventral sur-

face of the first and second metatarsi being almost hidden by the scopula. On the

ventral surface of the first and second tibiae the basal and middle spines are repre-

sented by small bristles. The arrangement of the spines on the legs and palpi is

as follows: First leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 2 near end, retrolateral

1~1-1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal

0, prolateral 1 small spine near middle, retrolateral 0, ventral 2—2-2, the basal

and middle pairs being bristles. Metatarsus: ventral 2-2-3 small spines, else-

where 0. Second leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1,

ventral 0. Patella, tibia and metatarsus armed as in first leg. Third leg—Femur:

dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal

1—1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, pro-

lateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral

1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal

1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 0. Patella and tibia armed as

in third leg. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1~-1,

ventral 1-2-2-3. Palpus—Femur: dorsal 1-1-2, prolateral 1 near end,

retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 bristles, prolateral 1

bristle, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 2 bristles, elsewhere 0. Tarsus:

dorsal 0, prolateral 2-1 bristles, retrolateral 1 bristle, ventral 0.

Abdomen oval. Spinnerets yellow. Form of epigynum is shown in pl. II,

fig. 15.

Locality—-Finke River, 25 miles from Abminga, South Australia; Coll. 520

(1 adult ¢). Goyder’s Lagoon Bore, South Australia; Coll. 647 (1 adult @ and

1 immature ¢ ). '

Lycosa burti n. sp.

(PL II, fig. 16) .

?—Total length, 18-0 mm. Length of carapace, 8°O0 mm. Width of cara-

pace, 6°0 mm. Length of abdomen, 11‘0 mm. Width of abdomen, 7-0 mm,

Carapace brown (in alcohol) and densely clothed with grey hairs. A grey

longitudinal band extends from eyes to posterior margin. Lateral margin grey.

Dorsal surface of legs greyish-brown. Ventral surface of legs from apical third

of tibia to end of tarsus much darker, Chelicerae black. Maxillae brown.

Labium, sternum and coxae very dark brown. Dorsal surface of abdomen fawn

with a median brown patch on front half. An indistinct pattern of transverse

bars on posterior half. Sides of abdomen fawn. A dark brown, almost black,

shield covers the ventral surface and extends from the epigastric furrow to the

spinnerets. The middle area of the shield is somewhat lighter in colour and

marked by a pair of indistinct longitudinal fawn stripes. The front margin of

the epigastric furrow and the region immediately surrounding the epigynum are

light brown. Further towards the front the ventral surface, including the lung-

covers, is dark brown.

Sides of head slanting. Thoracic groove longitudinal. A median row of

weak bristles extends from front of head almost to the thoracic groove. There

is a pair of setae behind each PLE. A fringe of grey hairs above each of the

four posterior eyes. A circlet of setae round each PME and a row of setae between

the lower edge of PME and PLE. First row of eyes shorter than second row in

ratio 25 : 36. The ratio of eyes AME : ALE: PME: PLE = 5:4: 15:12.

The AME separated from each other by 3/5 of their diameter and by the same

distance from ALE and PME. PME separated from each other by 9/15 of their

diameter, and from PLE by 14/15 of their diameter, PLE separated from each

other by 28/12 of their diameter. The quadrangle formed by the posterior eyes

wider behind than in front in ratio 45 : 36, its length being equal to its width

in front. Clypeus equal to the diameter of AME. A transverse row of four

strong setae on front edge of clypeus.

Chelicerae black, clothed in front with dense grey hair and long black

bristles. Lateral condyles large and yellowish-brown. Promargin with three

teeth. Retromargin with three teeth. Scopula dark brown and on promargin only.

Labium slightly longer than wide in ratio 20 : 19, and with lateral excavations at

base. Front of labium slightly emarginate. Maxillae wider in front than at base

and nearly twice the length of the labium. Scopula brown, Sternum oval and

longer than wide in ratio 57 : 44, It is clothed with brown hair and long black

setae. Fourth coxae contiguous.

Legs: 4.1.2.3. Clothed with grey hairs and black setae. All tarsi and meta-

tarsi scopulate to base. In the third and fourth legs the scopula is bisected by a

band of setae. In the first two pairs of legs the tibiae have a light scopula on the

apical two-thirds of the ventral surface. Trichobothria in two rows on tibiae and

tarsi, in one row on metatarsi. There are also a few lateral trichobothria on

the sides of the tibiae near the base. Upper tarsal claws of front legs with six

teeth, of hind legs with seven teeth. Lower claw small and bare. Palpal claw

with about four teeth. The segments of the legs and palpi have the following

measurements in millimetres:

Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total

I. 568 2:96 4-35 4°47 2-78 20°24

IIo... = 510 2°73 3°94 412 2:90 18-79

TIT, = 4-99 2-32 3-60 4-81 2°55 18-27

IV bbe 6°84 2-90 5-45 8°12 3°36 26:67

Palpi .... 2-61 1-57 1-51 — 2°32 8-01

The spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur:

dorsal 1~1~1, prolateral 2 near end, retrolateral 1—1-— i, ventral 0. Patella:

dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral

1—1, retrolateral 1 very short spine near end on left leg, O on right, ventral

2-2-2. Metatarsus: ventral 2-2-3, elsewhere 0, Second leg—Femur:

dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1 — 1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal

1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 0. prolateral 1-1,

retrolateral 0, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: ventral 2-2-3. Third leg —

Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-— 1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0.

Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0.

Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1— 1, ventral 2-2-2.

Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1—1- 1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2~2~3,

Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1 near end,

ventral 0. Patella, tibia and metatarsus armed as in third leg. Palpus —

Femur: dorsal 1-1-2, prolateral 1 near end, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0,

Patella: dorsal 1—1 fine bristles, prolateral 1 bristle, elsewhere 0 . Tibia: pro-

lateral 2 bristles, elsewhere 0. Tarsus: prolateral 1-1, elsewhere 0.

Abdomen oval, clothed with black setae and grey hairs. The form of the

epigynum is shown in pl. I, fig. 16.

Locality—Burt’s Waterhole, South Australia, 55 miles south of Birdsville.

Coll. 645 (1 adult @ ).

Lycosa finkei n. sp.

(Pl. Il, fig. 17-18)

9 —Total length, 15°O mm. Length of carapace, 6°2 mm. Width of cara-

pace, 4°6 mm. Length of abdomen, 9-0 mm, Width of abdomen, 6°0 mm.

Carapace brown (in alcohol) with a median longitudinal yellowish band.

Interocular space black. Chelicerae black. Labium, maxillae, sternum and coxae

dark brown, Dorsal surface of abdomen yellowish-brown with a faint dark brown

median patch in front and five indistinct brown chevrons on posterior half.

Ventral surface of abdomen fawn. A black spot immediately in front of the

spinnerets and a transverse black band with a trilobed posterior edge close behind

the epigastric furrow (pl. II, fig. 17). A narrow fawn band in front of the furrow.

Lung-covers brown and the area between them dark brown. Spinnerets dark

brown.

Head with slanting sides, Thoracic groove longitudinal with a pair of setae

close in front of its anterior end. The front row of eyes shorter than the second

in ratio 23 :33, and curved downward. Ratio of eyes AME: ALE: PME:

PLE = 5:4:13:10. The AME are separated from each other by 3/5 of

their diameter, from ALE by 2/5 of their diameter and from PME by the same

distance. The PME are separated from each other by 8/13 of their diameter and

from PLE by once their diameter. The PLE are separated from each other by

21/10 of their diameter. The quadrangle formed by the posterior eyes is wider

behind than in front in ratio 36 ; 33 and its length is equal to its width in front.

The clypeus is slightly less than the diameter of AME and is provided with a

transverse row of four setae.

Chelicerae clothed in front with yellowish hairs and long brown setae. Pro-

margin of furrow with three teeth, of which the median is the largest. Retro-

margin with three subequal teeth. Maxillae wider in front than at the base and

provided with a thick brown scopula. Labium slightly longer than wide in ratio

16 : 15, truncate in front and with lateral excavations at the base. Sternum oval,

pointed behind, longer than wide in ratio 50: 38 and clothed with erect brown

setae and short grey hairs.

Legs: 4.1.2.3 Tarsi and metatarsi scopulate to base. The first and second

tibiae slightly scopulate. The scopula on the third and fourth tarsi bisected by a

band of setae. On the third and fourth metatarsi the scopulation is very slight and

mainly on the sides of the segment. Trichobothria in two rows on tibiae and

tarsi, in one row on metatarsi. Upper tarsal claws of front legs with six teeth,

those of hind legs with eight teeth. Third claw small and bare. The palpal claw

has four teeth. The segments of the legs and palpi have the following measure-

ments in millimetres:

Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total

I 4°5 2-4 3-4 3-4 2°3 16-0

II 4-3 2-3 3-1 3:2 2-2 15-1

III 4-1 2-0 2:6 3:8 2:3 14°8

IV 5-2 2:2 4-4 6+4 2-9 21-1

Palpi 2:2 1:2 1-2 = 1-7 6-3

The spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: Furst leg—Femutr:

dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 2 near end, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0, Patella:

dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1, retrolateral 0,

ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: ventral 2—2—-—3, elsewhere 0. Second leg—Femur:

dorsal 1— 1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella, tibia and

metatarsus armed as in first leg. Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral

1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, pro-

lateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1-1, retro-

lateral 1-1, ventral 2~2-—2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1, retro-

lateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1~—1, pro-

lateral 1-1, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0, Patella, tibia and metatarsus armed

as in third leg, Palpus—Femur: dorsal 1-1-2, prolateral 1 near end, retro-

lateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1 bristle.

elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 1 bristle, prolateral 2 bristles, elsewhere 0. Tarsus:

prolateral 1-1 bristles, retrolateral 1 bristle, elsewhere 0,

Abdomen oval. The form of the epigynum is shown in pl. II, fig. 18.

Locality—Finke River, 25 miles from Abminga, South Australia, Coll. 520

(l adult 9 ).

Lycosa fletcheri n. sp.

(PI. II, fig. 19)

?—Total length, 13-0 nm. Length of carapace, 5-0 mm. Width of cara-

pace, 3-6 mm. Length of abdomen, 8-0 mm. Width of abdomen, 4-9 mm.

Carapace dark brown (in alcohol) with a light brown patch surrounding the

thoracic groove and a small light brown marginal spot above each coxa. Ocular

space black. Surface of carapace clothed with white hairs. Legs and palpi

yellowish-brown. Chelicerae nearly black. Maxillae, labium and sternum dark

brown. Dorsal surface of abdomen light brown with dark brown markings.

Ventral surface and sides yellowish-brown without markings.

Sides of head slanting. First row of eyes shorter than second in ratio 20 : 27.

Ratio of eyes AME : ALE: PME: PLE=5: 3: 10: 9. AME are separated

from each other by 2/5 of their diameter, and from ALE and PME by the same

distance. PME are separated from each other by 7/10 of their diameter and from

PLE by once their diameter. PLE are separated from each other by 21/9 of their

diameter. The quadrangle of the posterior eyes is wider than long in ratio 33:26.

Each PME is partly surrounded by an irregular circle of bristles. There is a

single bristle between AME, and also a row of five bristles just below and between

PLE and PME. A median longitudinal row of about five weak bristles extends

from the eyes to the thoracic groove. At the anterior end of the groove is a pair

of bristles. Clypeus is equal to 4/5 of the diameter of AME and is furnished

with a transverse row of four strong setae.

Chelicerae nearly black but clothed with white hairs and long black bristles

in front. Lateral condyles large. Promargin of furrow with three teeth, of which

the median is the largest. Retromargin with three sub-equal teeth. Scopula

brown and on promargin only. Labium as wide as long. Maxillae wider in front

than at the base, with a well-developed brown scopula and black serrula. Sternum

oval, longer than wide in ratio 36: 27, clothed with white hairs and, near the

margin, a few brownish bristles. It ends in a sharp point between the fourth

coxae.

Legs: 4.1.2.3. First and second tarsi and metatarsi densely scopulate to

base. Scopula on third and fourth tarsi and metatarsi not very dense and bisected

by a longitudinal band of setae. The upper claws of first legs with five teeth,

those of fourth legs with six teeth. Trichobothria in two rows on tibiae and tarsi,

in one row on metatarsi. Palpi yellowish-brown with end segment darker. Palpal

claw with four teeth. The legs and palpi have the following measurements in

millimetres :

Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total

IT 3°9 1-9 2°8 2:7 1-7 13-0

II 3-6 1-7 2:5 27 1-7 12-2

III 3-1 1-6 273 2-9 1-6 11-5

IV 4-1 1-8 3-5 4-9 2-1 16:6

Palpi 1-7 0-9 1-0 —_ 1-5 5-1

dorsal 1—1 fine bristles, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1, retrolateral 0,

ventral 2—2-~2. Metatarsus: ventral 2-2-3, elsewhere 0. Second leg—

Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1—1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella

armed as in first leg. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 0, ventral

2-2-2. Metatarsus armed as in first leg. Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1,

prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles,

prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1-1, retro-

lateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1, retro-

lateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral

1-1, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella and tibia armed as in third leg.

Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral

1-2-2-3. Palpus—Femur: dorsal 1-1-2, prolateral 1 near end, retrolateral

1 near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1 bristle, else-

where 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1 bristles, retrolateral 1 bristle, ventral 0.

Tarsus: dorsal 0, prolaterai 2—1 bristles, retrolateral 1 bristle, ventral 0.

Abdomen oval, clothed with yellowish and brown hairs, The form of the

epigynum is shown in pl. II, fig. 19. Spinnerets yellowish-brown.

Locality--Charlotte Waters, Northern Territory, 27 May 1939. (1 adult @.)

Lycosa goyderi n. sp.

(PI. TL, fig. 20)

¢ Total length, 8-2 mm. Length of carapace, 4-4 mm. Width of carapace,

30mm. Length of abdomen, 4:1 mm. Width of abdomen, 2-9 mm.

Carapace dark brown (in alcohol) with a narrow median longitudinal stripe

of yellowish-brown. Caput, chelicerae, labium and sternum very dark brown,

almost black. Maxillae brown. Legs yellowish-brown with faint bands of dark

brown on femora and tibiae. Dorsal surface of abdomen dark brown with two

pairs of dark spots near the middle and three transverse rows of indistinct spots

on posterior half. Ventral surface of abdomen and spinnerets yellowish-brown.

Sides of head slanting. Carapace clothed with short brown hairs. A median

row of short black setae ends in a pair of bristles in front of the longitudinal

thoracic groove. First row of eyes almost straight and as long as the second row

of eyes. Ratio of eyes AME: ALE:PME:PLE = 11:9:21:18. The

AME are separated from each other by 6/11 of their diameter, from ALE by 4/11

of their diameter, and from PME by 6/11 of their diameter. PME separated

from each other by 15/21 of their diameter and from PLE by once their diameter.

PLE separated from each other by 42/18 of their diameter. Quadrangle of ©

posterior eyes wider behind than in front in ratio 68: 52. The length of the

quadrangle is equal to its width in front. There is a seta above each AME and ©

also a large bristle between them. The clypeus is 9/11 of the diameter of AME

and is furnished with a row of four strong bristles.

Chelicerae clothed in front with black bristles. The promargin armed with

three teeth, of which the median is the largest. Retromargin with two teeth.

Scopula brown and on promargin only. Maxillae wider in front than at the base.

Labium truncate in front, as wide as long and about half the length of the

maxillae. Sternum shield-shaped, longer than wide in ratio 30: 24. It is clothed

with erect black setae and fine rectumbent yellowish hairs. Fourth coxae

contiguous.

Legs: 4.1.2.3. Light scopula on tarsi, that of the fourth tarsi being confined

to the sides of the segment. The ventral surface of the fourth tarsi is occupied

by a band of setae. Weak scopulation on the first and second metatarsi, none on

the third and fourth metatarsi. Upper tarsal claws with about six teeth. The

lower claw bare. Palpal claw with one large and two very small teeth. The

segments of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres:

Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus. Tarsus Total

Toe, 0 1-51 2-03 1-97 1-56 9°97

Tio... «62°61 1-33 1-86 1-91 1-33 9-04

Ill ... 2:44 1-27 1-55 2-09 1-28 8-63

IV... 3°25 1-56 2:55 3+36 1-74 12-41

Palpi.. 1-39 0-69 0-81 — 1-04 3+93

The spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur:

dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1 near end, elsewhere 0, Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine

bristles, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1—1, retrolateral 0, ventral

2-2-2. Metatarsus: ventral 2-2-3, elsewhere 0. Second leg—YFemur:

dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, elsewhere 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles,

prolateral 1, elsewhere 0. Tibia armed as in first leg. Metatarsus: prolateral

1 near middle and 1 apical, ventral 2-2-3, elsewhere 0. Third leg—Femur:

dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal

1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, pro-

lateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral

1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal

1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella, tibia and

metatarsus armed as in third leg. Palpus—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1,

retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1 bristle,

elsewhere 0, Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1 bristles, retrolateral 1 bristle,

ventral 0. Tarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 2-1 bristles, elsewhere 0.

Abdomen oval. Clothed with yellowish hairs and short black setae. A fringe

of white setae in front. The form of the epigynum is shown in pl. I, fig. 20.

Spinnerets normal for genus. A smali colulus present.

Locality—Goyder’s Lagoon Bore. South Australia, Coll. 647 (1 adult ¢ ).

Lycosa halei n. sp.

(PI. I, fig. 21)

?—Total length, 20°0 mm. Length of carapace, 9°5 mm. Width of cara-

pace, 8°0 mm. Length of abdomen, 11:0 mm. Width of abdomen, 7°5 mm,

Carapace yellowish-brown (in alcohol), clothed with recumbent white hair.

Radial grooves dark brown and clothed with black hair. Legs light brown, clothed

with white hair and black bristles. Tarsi appear black underneath owing to the

dark scopula, Labium, sternum and chelicerae dark brown, Fang nearly black.

Dorsal surface of abdomen light brown speckled with black, the small black spots

forming six transverse bands. Ventral surface of abdomen light brown with a

narrow transverse black band immediately behind the epigastric furrow, Behind

the band are a few black spots. Lung-covers light brown. Area between lung-

covers nearly black. Spinnerets light brown, clothed with black hairs.

Carapace convex. Head with slanting sides. Thoracic groove longitudinal.

First row of eyes shorter than second. Ratio of eyes AME: ALE: PME:

PLE — 8: 6:21:18. AME separated from each other by 5/8 of their

diameter, from ALE by 3/8 of their diameter and from PME by 4/8 of their

diameter. PME separated from each other by 14/21 of their diameter and from

PLE by 20/21 of their diameter. PLE separated. from each other by 46/18 of

their diameter. Quadrangle of posterior eyes wider than long in ratio 62 : 46.

A row of four strong bristles, together with several smaller setae and white hairs

on clypeus. Clypeus equal to twice the diameter of AME. PME surrounded by

a circlet of white hairs. A black bristle between AME and a pair of black bristles

a little above AME. An irregular circle of black bristles round each PME. Three

or four black bristles behind each PLE.

Chelicerae clothed with white hair interspersed with slender black setae. Pro-

margin of furrow with three tecth, of which the median is the largest. Retro-

margin with three equal teeth. Scopula on promargin only and of a dark brown

colour. Labium as wide as long. Maxillae wider in front than at base. Scopula

dark brown. Serrula short. Sternum longer than wide in ratio 65 : 60, pointed

behind, truncate in front and clothed with erect black setae.

Legs: 4.1.2.3, All tarsi and metatarsi scopulate to base. The tarsal scopulae

bisected by a longitudinal band of setae. The band is more strongly developed on

the third and fourth than on the first and second tarsi. In the first two pairs of

legs the tibiae are also scopulate almost to the base, Trichobothria are in two

rows on the tibiae and tarsi, and in one row on metatarsi. On the tibiae there are

also a few lateral trichobothria on each side near the base. Tarsal claws three.

Superior claws with six teeth, inferior claw without teeth. The segments of the

legs and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres.

Leg Femur Patelia Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total

I 7°5 3-6 5°3 5°7 3°5 25°6

IT 8-0 3-4 5-2 6-0: 3:5 26°1

Il 7-0 32 5°3 6-0 3°5 25:0

IV 8-0 355 7-0 8-5 4-1 31-1

Palpi 3°2 1-8 2-6 —_— 3-2 10-8

The spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur:

dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 2 at apex, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella:

dorsal 1—1 fine bristles, prolateral 1 near middle, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 0,

prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 0, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral

1-1-1, retrolateral 0, ventral 2-2-3. Second leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1,

prolateral 1~1, retrolateral 1 — 1-1, ventral 0. Patella and tibia armed as in first

leg. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 0, ventral 2-2-3.

Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1 -1, retrolateral 1-1-1,

ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1—1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0.

Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1—1, retrolateral 1~—1, ventral 2-1-2. Meta-

tarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1. retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3.

Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1-1 on left leg and 1- 2-1

on right, retrolateral 1 at end on left leg and 1-1 —1 on right, ventral 0. Patella

armed as in third leg. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1,

ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1,

ventral 2-2—1—3, Palpus—Femur: dorsal 1-1-2, prolateral 1 at end, retro-

lateral 1 at end, ventral 0. Patella 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1 near base, else-

where 0, Tibia: dorsal 1 bristle, prolateral 1-1 bristles, elsewhere 0, Tarsus:

dorsal 0, prolateral 2—1 bristles, retrolateral 1 bristle, ventral 0.

Abdomen ovate, clothed with recumbent white hairs interspersed with black

bristles, many of which arise from little spots composed of black hairs. The form

of the epigynum is shown in pl. II, fig. 21. Spinnerets normal for the genus.

Colulus distinct.

Locahity—Eleven miles east of Hale River, Simpson Desert, Coll. 549

(1 adult ¢).

This species bears some resemblance to Lycosa palabunda L. Koch, but differs

from it in the form of the epigynum, in the arrangement of the eyes and in the

markings on carapace.

Lycosa madigani n. sp.

(Pl. Il, fig. 22-25)

9—Total length, 16:0 mm. Length of carapace, 9°0 mm. Width of cara-

pace, 6°0 mm. Length of abdomen, 8°O0 mm. Width of abdomen, 5:0 mm.

Carapace yellowish-brown (in alcohol) with a wide longitudinal band of

black hairs on each side. Margin yellow. Legs yellow-brown. Tarsi and meta-

tarsi dark underneath. ‘Sternum black. Prolateral surface of first coxae black.

Labium and maxillae dark brown. Chelicerae almost black. Abdomen brown

above with a faint pattern of transverse bars. Sides of abdomen yellowish-brown.

Ventral surface yellowish-brown with a large black shield behind the epigastric

furrow (pl. II, fig. 22). The shield reaches about half-way to spinnerets. Lung-

covers and region in front of epigastric furrow yellowish-brown.

Head with slanting sides. Thoracic groove longitudinal with a pair of setae

immediately in front of its anterior end. First row of eyes shorter than the

second, Ratio of eyes AME: ALE: PME: PLE: = 8:5: 19: 17.

AME separated from each other by 4/8 of their diameter, from ALE by 2/8 of

their diameter, and from PME by 2/8 of their diameter, PME separated

from each other by 13/19 of their diameter and from PLE by 17/19 of their

diameter. PLE separated from each other by 33/17 of their diameter. Quadrangle

of posterior eyes wider than long in ratio 54: 47. A row of four large bristles

on clypeus. Behind each PLE an oblique row of six long setae. The four

posterior eyes with a dorsal fringe of yellowish hairs and long brown setae. A

number of setae which point forward occupy the space enclosed by the quadrangle

of the posterior eyes.

Chelicerae clothed in front with white hairs and black bristles. Condyles

well developed. Promargin of furrow with three teeth, of which the median is

the largest. Retromargin with two equal teeth. Scopula on promargin only.

Fang black and well curved. Labium longer than wide in ratio 22: 19. Maxillae

wider in front than at the base. Clothed with black setae. Scopula dark brown.

Serrula short. Sternum longer than wide in ratio 53 : 47, black and clothed with

black setae.

Legs: 4.1.2.3. All tarsi scopulate, but the scopulation on the third and fourth

tarsi is not very dense and is divided by a broad band of black setae. A scopula

is also present on the first and second metatarsi but not on the third and fourth.

In the first two pairs of legs the scopula extends on to the ventral surface of the

tibiae. Trichobothria in two rows on tarsi and tibiae, in one row on metatarsi.

There are also a few lateral trichobothria on each side of the tibiae near the base.

Tarsal claws three. The superior claws with eight teeth, inferior claw without

teeth. Palpal claw with seven teeth, The segments of the legs and palpi have

the following measurements in millimetres :

Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total

Too... 656 2°9 3-9 3-7 2°8 18-9

ITI... 5-4 2°8 3°6 3-9 2-7 18-4

III ane 5-0 2-5 3°3 4-5 2-9 18+2

IV... 65 31 4-6 6-0 3-2 23-4

Palpi ... 2:+9 1:4 1-4 — 2-0 77

The spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur:

dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 2 near end, retrolateral 1—1—1, ventral 0. Patella:

dorsal 1 ~1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, elsewhere 0. Tibia: prolateral 1-1, ventral

2-2-2, elsewhere 0. Metatarsus: ventral 2-2-3, elsewhere 0. Second leg—

Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1- 1-1, ventral 0.

Patella and tibia.armed as in first leg. Metatarsus: prolateral 1, ventral 2-2-3,

elsewhere 0, Third leg—Femur armed as in second leg. Patella: dorsal 1-1

fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0, Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral

1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral

1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal

1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 0. Patella: tibia and meta-

tarsus armed as in third leg. Palpus-—-Femur: dorsal 1-1-2, prolateral 1 near

end, retrolateral 1 near end,.ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, pro-

lateral 1 bristle, elsewhere 0, Tibia: dorsal 1 bristle, prolateral 1-1 bristles,

elsewhere 0. Tarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 2-1, retrolateral 1, all bristles, ventral 0.

Abdomen ovate. Dorsal surface clothed with light brown hairs and fine black

bristles. Five pairs of small spots composed of black hairs on anterior half. Sides

and ventral surface, excepting the black shield behind the epigastric furrow,

clothed with pale yellow hairs. The form of the epigynum is somewhat variable.

(See pl. II, fig. 23 and 24.) Spinnerets clothed with dark hairs. Colulus present.

é—Total length, 10°8 mm. Length of carapace, 5-7 mm. Width of cara-

pace, 4*1 mm. Length of abdomen, 5°1. Width of abdomen, 3°5 mm.

The male resembles the female in colouration and markings of carapace, legs,

chelicerae, labium, sternum, ventral surface of abdomen and spinnerets. The

dorsal surface of the abdomen, however, is marked in the anterior two-thirds with

a median longitudinal patch of dark brown, while the sides are speckled with small

black spots.

Carapace as in female. First row of eyes shorter than second. Ratio of eyes

AME: ALE: PME: PLE = 6:4: 13:12, AME separated from each

other by 4/6 of their diameter, from ALE by 1/6 of their diameter and from

PME by 2/6 of their diameter. PME separated from each other by 10/13 of

their diameter and from PLE by 11/13 of their diameter. PLE separated from

each other by 21/12 of their diameter. The quadrangle of the posterior eyes wider

than long in ratio 35 : 32.

Chelicerae clothed in front with white hairs and slender black bristles. Pro-

margin with three teeth, retromargin with two teeth. Scopula on promargin only.

Labium longer than wide in ratio 13 : 11. Maxillae as in female. Sternum black,

longer than wide in ratio 45 ; 36, clothed with black setae.

Legs: 4.1.2.3. The first and fourth pairs of legs are equal in length. AN

tarsi except the fourth scopulate. A scopula is also present on the first and second,

but not on the third and fourth metatarsi. The trichobothria are arranged as in

the female. Superior tarsal claws with about eleven teeth. The inferior claw

small and bare. The form of the palpus is shown in pl. IJ, fig. 25. The segments of

the legs and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres:

Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total

I 4-9 23 3:7 4-2 2-9 18°60

IT 4-8 2°3 3-6 4-0 2:8 17-5

Til 4-6 2-1 3°2 4-4 2-7 17-0

Iv 4-9 1-8 3-8 4-8 2-7 18-0

Palpi 2-4 1-2 1-2 —_ 1-7 6:5

The spines on the legs are larger and more numerous than in the female, and

those of the fourth tibiae are curved. The arrangement of the spines is as follows:

First leg—Femur: dorsal 1—1-—1, prolateral 2 near end, retrolateral 1-1-—1,

ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0.

Tibia: dorsal 1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2~2~—2. Metatarsus:

dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1 -—1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. Second leg—

Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella,

tibia and metatarsus armed as in first lege. Third leg—-Femur: dorsal 1-1-1,

prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles,

prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1~1, retro-

lateral 1—1, ventral 2~2-—2. Metatarsus : dorsal 2 at apex, prolateral ]-1-1.

retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1,

prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine

bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia and metatarsus armed as in

third leg. Palpus—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1 near end, retrolateral 1

near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 bristles, prolateral 1 bristle, elsewhere

0. Tibia: dorsal 1 bristle, prolateral 1-1 bristles, elsewhere 0. Tarsus: ventral

4 at apex, elsewhere 0.

Abdomen oval, shorter than carapace. Ventral surface with a black shield

behind epigastric furrow as in female. Spinnerets light brown clothed with

dark hair.

Locality—Six miles north of junction of Todd and Hale Rivers, Coll. 540

(1 adult ¢ and 1 pullus). Centre of Simpson Desert, Coll 570 (2 adult ¢@ @ ).

Indinda Well, near Andado Station, Northern Territory (1 adult 9).

Family OXYOPIDAE

Genus Oxyores Latreille 1804

OXYOPES ELEGANS L., Koch 1878

Locality--Andado Station, Northern Territory (1 immature @ ).

The immaturity of this specimen makes the specific identity somewhat doubt-

ful. It is the only member of the genus Oxyopes in the present collection.

Three species belonging to this genus were collected by the Horn Scientific

Expedition to Central Australia in 1894.

Family ZODARIIDAE

Sub-Family ZODARIINAE

Genus STorRENA Walckenaer 1805

Storena toddi n. sp.

(PI. II, fig. 26-28; pl. ITI, fig. 29-30)

é—Total length, 4-1 mm. Length of carapace, 2:1 mm. Width of cara-

pace, 1-5 mm. Length of abdomen, 2°0 mm. Width of abdomen, 1:3 mm.

Carapace yellow (in alcohol) with a V-shaped patch of dark brown extending

from the sides of the head region to the posterior margin. Clypeus dark brown.

Legs yellow. Chelicerae and palpi slightly darker than legs. Sternum, Jabium

and maxillae pale yellow. Dorsal surface of abdomen dark brown with a white

spot above the spinncrets and four pairs of white spots arranged as shown in

pl. 11, fig. 26. Sides of the abdomen white, ventral surface light brown.

Carapace smooth and without bristles. A few minute hairs on clypeus and

round the margin, Thoracic groove longitudinal. Eyes in two strongly pro-

curved rows, All eyes with black rims. The interocular space is black except

between the PME. Eye ratio AME: ALE: PME: PLE = 9:7:6:8.

The eyes are arranged as shown in pl. II, fig. 27. The AME are separated from

each other by 5/9 of their diameter, from ALE by 3/9 and from PME by 7/9

of their diameter. The PME are separated from each other by 9/6 of their

diameter and from PLE by the same distance. The PLE are separated from

ALE by 3/8 of their diameter and from AME by 4/8 of their diameter. The

quadrangle formed by the median eyes is wider in front than behind in ratio

23 : 21, and its length is slightly less than its width in front. The clypeus is very

high and slopes steeply to the front (pl. II, fig. 28). The distance from AME to

the margin of the clypeus is equal to 38/9 of the diameter of AME. There is a

small seta between the AME and in line with their lower margin. A thin dark

brown line extends from the eye-space down the middle of the clypeus almost to

the margin.

Chelicerae conical, clothed in front with black hairs. Lateral condyles present.

Margins of furrow without teeth. Promargin with a black scopula. Fang short.

Maxillae strongly converging, provided with a black scopula. Serrula absent.

Labium triangular, its apex reaching almost to the front of the maxillae. Sternum

shield-shaped, longer than wide in ratio 18: 16, and lightly clothed with small

hairs which point backwards. There are a few erect setae near the margin.

Legs: 4.1.3.2. Slender, tapering and clothed with short barbed hairs.

Trichobothria in two rows on tibiae, in one row on metatarsi and tarst. Three

tarsal claws. The upper claws similar and armed with about eleven teeth, The

lower claw small and bare. The form of the palpus is shown in pl. III, fig. 29.

The segments of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in milli-

metres :

Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus! Tarsus Total

I... 1:86 0-58 1-51 1-51 1-16 6-62

II — 1-74 0-58 1-39 1-57 1-04 6-32

Ill... 1:74 0-64 1-27 1-80 0-99 6°44

IV...) 2-09 0-70 1-74 2°44 1-28 8-25

Palpi ... @-81 0-35 0-17 — 1-16 2°49

The spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur :

dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1 near end, elsewhere 0. Patella: ventral 2 near end.

elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 1 near base, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 0, ventral

2-2-2 and about 26 small spines distributed over the whole ventral surface

(pl. IIT, fig. 30). Metatarsus: dorsal 2 at apex, prolatera] 1-1, retrolateral 1 at

apex, ventral 2—2~-2 and about nine small spines on basal half. Second leg—

Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1 near end, elsewhere 0. Patella: prolateral

1-1, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 1 near base, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 0,

ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 2 at apex, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1 at

apex, ventral 2~2-2. Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1,

retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1, prolateral 1 ~1-—1-1, else-

where 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral

2-1-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 2 at apex, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1,

ventral 2-2-2. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1 near end;

elsewhere 0. Patella: dorsal 1, prolateral 1-1—1-1, elsewhere 0. Tibia:

dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 1-1-2, Meta-

tarsus: dorsal 2 at apex, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2 ~-2-.

Palpus—Femut: dorsal 1 —1, prolateral 0, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 1-1-1.

slender bristles. Patella: dorsal 1 near base, prolateral 1, elsewhere 0. Tibia:

dorsal 0, prolateral 2 bristles, elsewhere 0. Tarsus: ventral 6 near apex.

Abdomen oval, clothed with very small fine hairs. At anterior end are six

slender bristles, arranged three on each side just above petiolus, Anterior spin-

nerets much longer than the posterior pair, which are small and indistinct. Middle

pair not visible.

Locality—-Six miles north of junction of Todd and Hale Rivers, Coll. 540

(1 adult 3). %

Family THERIDIIDAE

Sub-Family LATRODECTINAE

Genus Latrropectus Walckenaer 1805

LaTRODECTUS HASSELTIZ Thorell 1870

Locality—-Camp No. 37, Cowarie Station, South Australia (1 adult 9).

This poisonous spider is widely distributed throughout Australia, including

Tasmania. It also occurs in New Zealand, India and Arabia.

Family ARGIOPIDAE

Sub-Family ARGIOPINAE

Genus ARGIOPE Audouin, 1825

ARGIOPE PRoTENSA L. Koch 1871

Locality—Six miles north of junction of Todd and Hale Rivers, Coll, 540

(1 pullus). Sixteen miles east of Hay River, near Queensland border, Coll. 608

{1 2). Fourteen miles north-east of Cowarie Station, South Australia, Coll. 659

(1 pullus). Twenty miles west of Cowarie Station, South Australia, Coll. 661

(1 pullus). Camp No. 16, Hay River, near Queensland border (1 pullus), Camp

No. 21, Annandale Station, Queensland (1 9). Camp No. 37, Cowarie Station,

South Australia (1 2 mature and 1 pullus).

Sub-Family ARANEINAE

Genus ARANEUS Clerk 1757

ARANEUS TRANSMARINUS (Keyserling)

Locality—Finke River, 25 miles from Abminga, South Australia, Coll. 520

{1 9). Birdsville-Marree Track, Mount Gason, South Australia, Coll. 651

(1 @). Twenty miles west of Cowarie Station, South Australia, Coll 661 (1 2).

Camp No. 21, Annandale Station, Queensland (2 2°9). Camp No. 23, thirty

miles north-west of Birdsville, Queensland (1 ¢ ).

Sub-Family NEPHILINAE

Genus NEepHiILa Leach 1815

NEPHILA IMPERATRIX L, Koch 1871

Locality—One mile east of Andado Station, Northern Territory, Coll. 503

(1 ¢). Finke River, 25 miles from Abminga, South Australia, Coll. 520 (1 ¢@).

Sixteen miles east of Hay River, near Queensland border, Coll. 608 (1 ¢).

Kaliduwarry Station, Queensland, Coll. 620 (2 @ 9). Birdsville-Marree Track,

Mount Gason, South Australia, Coll. 651 (1 @). Twenty miles west of Cowarie

Station, South Australia, Coll. 661 (1 2). Camp No. 2, twenty-two miles north

of Andado Bore No. 1, Andado Station, Northern Territory (1 pullus). Camp

No. 19, Hay Rvier, near Queensland border (1 2). Camp No. 21, Annandale

Station, Queensland (1 9). Camp No. 23, thirty miles north-west of Birdsville,

Queensland (1 2).

Family CTENIDAE

Sub-Family CALOCTENINAE

Genus Opo Keyserling 1887

Odo australiensis n. sp.

(Pl. III, fig. 31-34)

@—Total length, 9°7 mm. Length of carapace, 4°35 mm. Width of cara-

pace, 3°13. mm. Length of abdomen, 6°09 mm. Width of abdomen, 3°71 mm.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate III

Carapace yellow (in alcohol) with four irregular dark brown patches on each

side. Legs yellow with faint brownish rings, Chelicerae reddish-brown with a

dark brown patch in front. Maxillae, palpi, labium and sternum yellow. Abdomen

yellow with four pairs of small dark brown marks in the middle third of the dorsal

surface. Sides of abdomen speckled with dark brown.

Carapace convex, clothed with a band of white silky hairs near the margin,

and above this a band of dark brown hairs extending from PLE to posterior

margin. Thoracic groove longitudinal, Front of groove ends in a thick patch of

brown hairs. A median row of small setae extends from eyes to the thoracic

groove. A long seta behind and a row of six setae above each PLE.

The eyes are arranged in two strongly recurved rows (pl. III, fig. 31). Ratio of

eyes AME: ALE: PME: PLE = 7:5:9: 10. AME separated from each

other by 2/7 of their diameter, from ALE by the same distance and from PME

by 4/7 of their diameter. The PME are separated from each other by 2/9 of

their diameter, from PLE by 5/9 of their diameter and from ALE by 4/9 of their

diameter. The posterior row of eyes is longer than the front row in ratio 32 : 26.

The quadrangle formed by the four median eyes is wider behind than in front in

ratio 20 : 17, and its width behind is equal to its length. Clypeus narrow, being

equal to 6/7 of AME. A row of about eleven setae along margin of clypeus.

Chelicerae conical. Furnished in front with a number of long brownish

bristles. Lateral condyles large. Promargin of furrow with three teeth, of which

the middle one is the largest. Retromargin with two teeth. A scopula is present

on the promargin.

Maxillae parallel. Clothed with long yellowish setae on outer side. Scopula

extending slightly onto the ventral surface. Labium wider than long in ratio

20 : 15, excavated at the base, and not exceeding half the length of the maxillae

(pL. ITI, fig. 32). Sternum slightly convex, longer than wide in ratio 50:47, clothed

with brownish setae and white hair around the margin. The setae near the first

coxae are larger than those on other parts of the sternum. The fourth coxae

meet behind the sternum.

Legs: 4.3.1.2, Trochanters notched. All tarsi and metatarsi scopulate. In

the first two pairs of legs the scopulation extends onto the sides of the basal halt

of the tibiae. The scopulae of the third and fourth metatarsi and tarsi are bisected

by a longitudinal band of setae. Trichobothria in two rows on tarsi and tibiae,

in one row on metatarsi. Two tarsal claws which are long and slightly curved.

About five teeth on the claws of the first tarsi, and about eight on those of the

fourth. Palpal claw with five teeth. The segments of the legs and palpi have the

following measurements in millimetres:

Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsug Tarsus Total

TI... 360 1-74 2:96 2:38 1+74 12-42

i NSPS) 1-68 2-84 2-32 1-74 11-83

Wi... = 360 1-56 2:78 2°96 1-91 12-81

TV...) 481 1-74 4-06 4°23 2-20 17-04

Palpi ... = 1-74 0-93 0-81 — 1-45 4:93

Spines on legs and palpi are arranged as follows: first leg—Femur: dorsal

1—1-—1, prolateral 2 near end, retrolateral 1 near middle, ventral 0. Patella 0.

Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 0, ventral 2-2-1. Metatarsus:

ventral 2 near base, elsewhere 0. Second leg-—-Femur: dorsal 1~1-—1, prolateral

1—1~-1, retrolateral 1 near middle, ventral 0. Patella 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, pro-

lateral 1-1, retrolateral 0, ventral 2—2-—2. Metatarsus: ventral 2 near base,

elsewhere 0. Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral left 1-1-—1-1

(right 2-1-1-1), retrolateral 1-—1-—1-1, ventral 0. [Patella 0. Tibia:

dorsal 2—1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus :

dorsal 0, prolateral 1-2-1, retrolateral 2-1-1, ventral 2--O~1, Fourth

leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1-0 -1, retrolateral 1 near

end, ventral 0. Patella. Tibia: as for tibia of third leg. Metatarsus: dorsal 0,

prolateral 1-2-2, retrolateral 2-2-2, ventral 2-2-1. Palpus—Femur :

dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1 near end, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella:

dorsal 1~1, prolateral 1, retrolateral 0, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral

2-2, elsewhere 4. Tarsus: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 2-2, retrolateral 2—2, ventral

3 near claw. ;

Abdomen oval, clothed with white hair and fine brown setae. In front there

are dark curved bristles. The epigynum has the form shown in pl. III, fig. 33.

Six spinnerets. The anterior pair cylindrical and two-segmented. The end seg-

ment is very small and sunken in the apex of the first segment. The posterior

spinnerets slightly longer than the anterior. The middle spinnerets slender and

hidden by the others.

§—Total length 6-°9 mm. Length of carapace, 3-48 mm. Width of carapace,

2°61 mm. Length of abdomen, 3-48 mm. Width of abdomen, 2-09 mm.

The colouration and markings as in the female. The body, however, is some-

what smaller and the legs longer and more slender,

The eyes are arranged in two strongly recurved rows. The AME are rela-

tively larger than those of the female. Ratio of eyes AME: ALE: PME: PLE

= 7:4:5:5. The AME are separated from each other by 2/7 of their

diameter, from ALE by 1/7 of their diameter, and from PME by 3/7 of their

diameter. The PME are separated from each other by 2/5 of their diameter and

from PLE by 4/5 of their diameter, The PILE are separated from ALE by 4/5

of their diameter. The posterior row of eyes is longer than the front row in ratio

25: 21. Owing to the large size of the AME the quadrangle formed by the

median eyes is wider in front than behind in ratio 14: 12. It is longer than its

front width in ratio 15 : 14. The clypeus is 5/7 of the diameter of AME.

The chelicerae resemble those of the female. Vhe promargin of the furrow is

armed with three teeth, the retromargin with two. The maxillae as in the female.

The labium wider than long in ratio 13 : 9 and less than half the length of the

maxillae. The base of the labium is not so strongly excavated as in the female.

Sternum oval, convex and slightly longer than wide in ratio 45 : 43. Fourth

coxae meet behind sternum.

Legs: 4.1.3.2. Long and slender. All tarsi and wmetatarsi scopulate.

Trichobothria as in female. Two tarsal claws, similar and armed with about 8 teeth.

The palpus has the form shown in pl. IT, fig. 34, The tibia is short and on its

retrolateral side there is a short black bifid apophysis. The segments of the legs

and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres :

Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total

I a. ~—6-4°06 1-45 3-60 3°36 2-32 14-79

IT Jot 3-88 1-39 3:48 3:36 2°26 14-37

Wi. 3°77 1-28 3-19 3°83 2-38 14°45

IV... 493 1-45 4-29 5°22 2-78 18°67

Palpi .. 1-51 1-33 0-40 ne 1-51 4°75

Spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur:

dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 2 near end, retrolateral 1~1—1, ventral 0. Patella 0.

Tibia: dorsal 1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus:

dorsal 1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2~1. Second leg—Femur:

dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1- 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella 2.

Tibia: dorsal 1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus:

dorsal 1, prolateral 1—1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2—1. Third leg—Femur:

dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1-1 -1, retrolateral 1-1-1-1, ventral 0.

Patella 0, Tibia: dorsal 1-1. prolateral 1-1. retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral

2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-2-1, retrolateral 2-2-1, ventral

2-1-1. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1—1-—1-—1, retro-

lateral 1~1~-1, ventral 0. Patella 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1-1, retro-

lateral 1-1-1 ventral 3-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 2-2-2, retro-

lateral 2-2-2, ventral 2-2-1. Palpus—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral

1 near end, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1—1 bristles, pro-

lateral 1, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 1 bristle, prolateral 1—1 bristles, retro-

lateral 1 bristle, ventral 0.

Abdomen oval and fringed in front with dark curved bristles which are

coarser and more numerous than in the female.

Locality — Eleven miles east of Hale River, Simpson Desert, Coll. 549

(1 adult ¢). Centre of Simpson Desert, No. 8 Camp, Coll. 567 (1 adult @ ).

Family EUSPARASSIDAE

Sub-Family EUSPARASSINAE

Genus Isopena L. Koch 1875

IsopEDA pEssLERI (Thorell)

Heteropoda pessleri Thorell 1870, Ofv. K. Vet. Akad. Forh., 387.

lsopeda pessleri L. Koch 1875, Arachn. Austral., 684.

Tsopeda pessleri H. R. Hogg 1896, Horn Exped., Zool., Ar., 342.

lsopeda pessleri H. R. Hogg 1902, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 444.

Locality —Camp No, 16, Hay River, near Queensland border, Coll. 606

(229 and 2 pullus). Kaliduwarry Station, Queensland, Coll. 620 (1 ¢).

Goyder’s Lagoon Bore, South Australia (1 pullus). Andado Station, Northern

Territory (2 pullus).

Genus PeprAna Simon 1880

PEDIANA HORNI (Hogg)

/sopeda horni H. R. Hogg 1896, Horn Exped., Zool., Ar., 340.

Pediana horni H. R. Hogg 1902, Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 462.

In his original description of this species Hogg (1896, 340) states that “on

tibia III and IV there is one spine on the upper side.” Some years later (1902,

462) he transferred the species to the genus Pediana and said that there are “no

spines on tibia III or IV.” In view of these contradictory statements it is difficult

to identify the species, However, the specimen in the present collection agrees

very closely with Hogg’s original description, and possesses a dorsal spine on the

third and fourth tibiae.

Locality—Finke River, 25 miles from Abminga, South Australia, Coll. 520

(1 adult 2).

PEpIANA REGINA (L. Koch)

Heteropoda regina L. Koch 1875, Arachn. Austral., 716.

Pediana regina H. R. Hogg 1902, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 460,

Locality—Goyder’s Lagoon Bore. South Australia, Coll. 647 (1 pullus).

Sub-Family MICROMMATINAE

Genus Oxios Walckenaer 1873

OLI0S INFRAMACULATUS (Hogg)

Heteropoda inframaculata H. R. Hogg 1896, Horn, Exped., Zool., Ar., 343.

Neosparassus inframaculatus H. R. Hogg 1902, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 428.

Locality—Camp No. 13, 24 miles west of Hay River, Simpson Desert

(1 pullus). ?

Family THOMISIDAE

Sub-Family MISUMENINAE

Genus THArpyna L. Koch 1874

Tharpyna simpsoni n. sp.

(PL. ITI, fig. 35-39)

?—Total length, 5-6 mm. Length of carapace, 2:0 mm. Width of cara-

pace, 2;°0 mm. Length of abdomen, 3-8 mm. Width of abdomen, 3-4 mm.

Carapace dark chocolate-brown with cream spots (in alcohol), Radial

grooves lighter brown. Face, sides and ocular tubercles cream with brownish

blotches. Femora cream, spotted and blotched with dark brown on dorsal, ventral

and prolateral surfaces. Retrolateral surface dark brown. Other podomeres

with brown and cream markings not so distinct as on femora. Labium brown.

Maxillae brown towards inner side and base, cream towards outer side and apex.

Sternum cream with brown blotches. Dorsal surface of abdomen almost covered

by an irregular brownish-black patch, marked with a few cream spots (pl. III.

fig. 35). Sides of abdomen cream, speckled with dark brown. Ventral surface

light brown, speckled with cream and dark brown. Lung-covers brown, Spin-

nerets cream.

The carapace is as wide as long with steep sides and flat upper surface. It is

clothed with a number of coarse black setae, some of which are arranged in

radial rows.

The eyes are arranged in two recurved rows (pl. III, fig. 36). The posterior

row is longer than the front row in ratio 112: 89. The median eyes are much

smaller than the lateral eyes. All the eyes have conspicuous black pupils. The

ratio of the diameters of the pupils AME: ALE: PME: PLE=6: 10:5:

10. The AME are separated from each other by 14/6, from ALE by 22/6 and

from the PME by 20/6 of their pupil-diameter. The PME are separated from

each other by 28/5 and from PLE by 33/5 of their pupil-diameter. The PLE

are separated from ALE by 25/10 of their pupil-diameter, The median ocular

quadrangle is wider than long in ratio 38 : 30. The lateral eyes are mounted on

slightly raised tubercles.

The chelicerae are small and cone-shaped. There are about 13 coarse

setae on the front of the paturon. Margins of furrow without teeth. Fang small.

Labium longer than wide in ratio 3: 2. Surface provided with about 15

short setae. Maxillae longer than labium in ratio 23 : 18, converging and almost

meeting in front of lip (pl. III, fig. 37). Surface of each maxilla furnished with

about 14 coarse setae. Sternum shield-shaped, longer than wide in ratio 41 : 36,

ending in a sharp point between the fourth coxae, This point bears three con-

spicuous setae. The lateral margins of the sternum are furnished with two or

three rows of coarse setae, the central region with a few hairs (pl. III, fig. 37).

Legs: 124.3. Laterigrade. Clothed with longitudinal rows of spine-like

setae, except the retrolateral side of each femur, which is smooth. The setae on

the legs and body are barbed (pl. III, fig. 38). Trichobothria are present on tibiae,

metatarsi and tarsi. Two tarsal claws, each having about ten teeth, are present.

Claw tufts absent. Palpi are small and without a claw. The segments of the legs

and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres:

Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus ‘Tarsus Total

Io...) =61574 0-87 1:51 1-45 0:87 6-44

il +, 1-85 0-93 1:56 1-27 0-81 6:42

III... = 1-23 0-70 1-16 0-99 0-64 4:72

IV...) 1°27 0-70 1-16 0:99 0-64 4-76

Palpi 2... +52 0-35 0-41 — 0-58 1-86

The spines on the legs differ very little from the ordinary setae. They are

arranged as follows:—First leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1-1, prolateral

1-1—1-1, elsewhere 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 very small, elsewhere 0. Tibia:

dorsal 1 near middle, elsewhere 0. Metatarsus 0. Second leg—Femur: dorsal

1-1-1-1, elsewhere 0, Patella: dorsal 1-1 very small, elsewhere 0. Tibia :

dorsal 1 before middle, elsewhere 0. Metatarsus 0. The spines on the ¢hird and

fourth legs are arranged as on the second.

Abdomen broadly ovate and somewhat dorso-ventrally compressed. It 1s

furnished with coarse setae arranged in rows. There is a pair of large oval

muscle spots near the middle of the dorsal surface. The epigynum has the form

shown in pl. III, fig. 39.

Locality—Twenty miles west of Cowarie Station, South Australia, Coll. 661

(1 adult 2).

Family CLUBIONIDAE

Sub-Family LIOCRANINAE

Genus Miturca Thorell 1870

Miturca LINEATA Thorell

Locality—Finke River, 25 miles from Abminga, South Australia, Coll. 520

(2 pullus). Mount Gason, Birdsville-Marree Track, South Australia, Coll. 651

(2 pullus). Fourteen miles north-east of Cowarie Station, South Australia.

Coll. 659 (1 g and1 @).

Family SALTICIDAE

Sub-Family PLEXIPPINAE

Genus Sarris Simon 1876

Saitis lacustris n. sp.

(PI. III, fig. 40)

g—Total length, 4°70 mm. Length of carapace, 2-49 mm. Width of cara-

pace, 1°85 mm. Length of abdomen, 2°44 mm. Width of abdomen, 1:97 mm.

Thorax dark brown (in alcohol). Caput nearly black. The dorsal surface

of the head is clothed with recumbent white hairs interspersed with a few slender

erect black bristles. Clypeus yellow and densely clothed with white hairs. Dorsal

surface of the three distal segments of the palpi yellow and clothed with long

white hairs. Legs dark brown with yellowish-brown markings on dorsal side of

patellae, the ventral side of the femora and the coxae. Chelicerae brown with

patches of yellowish-brown in front. Mazxillae, labium and sternum dark brown.

Legs lightly clothed with white silky hairs. Abdomen dark brown above; paler

at the sides and underneath; not marked by any distinct pattern; clothed with

silky hairs.

Carapace high and convex. Head region somewhat flat, but sloping gently

forward from the posterior eyes. Thorax sloping steeply under the front of the

abdomen.

Eye-group wider in front than behind in ratio 25: 23. The front width

greater than the length in ratio 25: 18. First row of eyes slightly recurved,

wider than the second in ratio 25: 24. Ratio of eyes AME: ALE: PME:

PLE = 7:5: 1:5: 3-5. AME separated from each other by about 1/7 of their

diameter and from ALE by about twice this distance. PME separated from

ALE by a distance equal to the diameter of AME, and from PLE by 4/7 of the

diameter of AME, that is the eyes of the second row are nearer PLE than ALE.

Clypeus 4/7 of diameter of AME and sloping backward.

Chelicerae conical, not diverging, condyles lacking. Margins oblique. Two

teeth on promargin, one on retromargin. Lip triangular, about as wide as long.

Maxillae short and wide. Sternum oval, longer than wide in ratio 17: 11.

Fourth coxae almost contiguous.

Legs: 3.4.2.1. Trichobothria in two rows on tibiae, in one row on meta-

tarsi and tarsi. Two tarsal claws, similar, with about five teeth. The three distal

teeth are large and widely spaced. Palpi are clothed with long white hairs on the

dorsal surface and sides of the tarsus, tibia and patella. No spines are present,

but there is a small black seta on the dorsal surface of the femur and patella near

the apex of the segment. On the prolateral side the tibia is produced into a sharp

apophysis. The genital bulb has the form shown in pl. III, fig. 40. The segments

of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres:

Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total

I... = 1-28 0-8t 0+87 0-87 0-70 4°53

Wo. 1-33 0-87 0-87 0:87 0-70 4-64

WI...) 1°85 0-87 1-22 1-28 0-58 5-80

Vow. 151 0-70 0-99 1-28 0-70 5-18

Palpi ... 0°60 0-35 0-23 _ 0-64 1-82

The spines on the legs are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur: dorsal

1-1-1, prolateral 1 near end, elsewhere 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles,

prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1 near base, prolateral 1-1,

retrolateral 1, ventral 2~2-—2. Metatarsus: dorsal 1 near base, prolateral 1-1,

retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2—2. Second leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral

1 near end, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral O. Patella: dorsal 1—1 fine bristles,

prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1, prolateral 1~1, retro-

lateral 1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 1, prolateral 1—1, retrolateral

1-1, ventral 2-2. Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1 near end,

retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1,

retrolateral 1, ventral 0, Tibia: dorsal 1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1,

ventral 1-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral

2-2. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 0, retrolateral 0, ventral 0.

Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 0.

Tibia: dorsal 1, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 1-2. Meta-

tarsus: dorsal 1, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2—2-2.

Abdomen oval somewhat dorso-ventrally compressed. Spinnerets six, almost

cylindrical. Anterior pair much larger than the others. Colulus absent.

Locality—Surface of North Lake Eyre, two and a half miles from shore,

Coll. 669 (1 adult 2).

Sub-Family MARPISSINAE

Genus Ocrisiona Simon 1901

OCRISIONA sp.

Locality—Twenty miles west of Cowarie Station, South Australia, Coll. 661

(1 pullus).

The specimen is immature but appears to be closely related to, if not identical

with, Ocrisiona complana (L. Koch).

LITERATURE

Brruta, A. 1903 Ann. Mus. Zool. Acad. Sci., St. Petersbourg, 8, xxxili-xxxiv

Datmas, COMTE DE 1917 Ann. Soc. ent. France, 86, 317-430

GLAvERT, L. 1925 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 49, 85-87

Hocc, H. R. 1896 Horn Exped., Zool., Ar., 309-356

Hoce, H. R. 1902 Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 414-466

Kocu, L. 1871-1889 Arachn. Austral., Nurnberg

KRAEPELIN, K. 1908 Fauna Siidwest-Australiens, Jena, 2, 89-95

KRAEPELIN, K. 1916 Arkiv. for Zoologi, Stockholm, 10, 1-43

PuLierne, R. H. 1914 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 38, 447-448

Ratnzow, W. J. 1915 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 39, 772-793

Rainsow, W. J., and Putterne, R. H. 1918 Rec. Aust. Mus., Sydney, 12,

81-169

Srranp, E. 1913 Zool. Jahrb. Abt. f. Syst., Jena, 35, 599-624

THorELL, T. 1870 Ofv. K. Vet. Akad. Forh., 387

Fig.

tw Nee

Fig.

Fig,

Fig.

Fig. 10

Fig, 11

OMT Aun

Fig. 12

Fig. 13

Fig. 14

Fig. 15

Fig. 16

Fig. 17

Fig. 18

Fig. 19

Fig. 20

Fig, 21

Fig. 22

Fig. 23

Fig. 24

Fig. 25

Fig. 26

Fig. 27

Fig, 28

Fig. 29

Fig. 30

Fig. 31

Fig. 32

Fig. 33

Fig. 34

Fig. 35

Fig. 36

Fig. 37

Fig. 38

Fig, 39

Fig. 40

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES

Piate [

Urodacus yaschenkoi—Sternum, genital operculum and. pectines.

_ Urodacus yaschenkoi—Ventral view of left chelicera.

Urodacus yaschenkoi—Trichobothria on ventral surface of brachium of left

pedipalpus.

Urodacus yaschenkoi—Trichobothria on inner side of wnder-hand of Ieft

pedipalpus.

Urodacus yaschenkoi—End of fourth tarsus, showing minute inner claw.

Urodacus yaschenkoi—Last two segments of first leg showing dorsal row of

seven spines on metatarsus.

Aganippe stmpsoni n.sp—-¢@ Dorsal view of eyes.

Aganippe simpsoni n.sp.—Sternum, labium and maxillae.

Aganippe simpsont n.sp.—An upper claw of first tarsi.

Aganippe simpsoni n. sp.—An upper claw of fourth tarsi.

Pardosa eyret n.sp.— @ Dorsal view of abdomen, to show the shape of the

median dark brown patch.

Pardosa eyrei n.sp.—Front view of eves.

Pardosa eyret n. sp—Ventral view of right palpus.

Pate IT

Pardosa pexa n. sp— 4 Ventral view of Icft palpus.

Lycosa abmingani n.sp— 9 Epigynum.

Lycosa burti n.sp.— 9 Epigynum.

Lycosa finket n.sp— 9 Ventral view of abdomen.

Lycosa finkei n.sp— Q Epigynum.

Lycosa fletcheri n.sp.— 9 Epigynum.

Lycosa goydert n.sp.— 9 Epigynum,

Lycosa halei n.sp—Q Epigynum,

Lycosa madigani n.sp.— Q Ventral view of abdomen,

Lycosa madigant n.sp.—Epigynum of a specimen from the Simpson Desert.

Lycosa madigani n, sp.—Epigynum. of a specimen from Indinda Well.

Lycosa madigant n.sp— @ Ventral view of right palpus.

Storena toddi n.sp.— @ Dorsal view of the carapace and abdomen.

Storena toddi n.sp—Dorso-anterior view of cyes.

Storena toddi n.sp.—Lateral view in outline.

Priate IIT

Storena toddin.sp.—~ @ Ventral view of left palpus.

Storena toddin,sp-——Spines on ventral surface of tibial segment of first pair

of legs.

Odo australiensis n. sp— 9 Front view of eyes.

Odo australlensts n. sp—Maxillae, Jabium and sternum.

Odo australiensis n. sp.—Epigynum.

Odo australiensis n.sp.— ¢ Left palpus from below.

Tharpyna simpsoni n, sp-—- 9 Dorsal view of carapace and abdomen.

Thar pyna simpsoni n. sp-—Dorsal view of eyes.

Thar pyna simpsoni n. sp.—Maxillae, labium and sternum.

Thar pyna simpsoni n. sp.—A barbed seta from the legs.

Tharpyna simpson n. sp—Epigynum.

Sattis lacustris n, sp— g Ventral view of left palpus.

THE SIMPSON DESERT EXPEDITION, 1939

SCIENTIFIC REPORTS: NO. 2, GEOLOGY - DESERT SANDS

By DOROTHY CARROLL, University of Western Australia

Summary

The grading, mineralogy and various other features of some sands collected in the Simpson Desert

by the Simpson Desert Expedition of 1939 are described in this paper. The material was examined

through the courtesy of Dr. C. T. Madigan.

THE SIMPSON DESERT EXPEDITION, 1939

SCIENTIFIC REPORTS: No. 2, GEOLOGY ~— DESERT SANDS

By Dororny Carroii, University of Western Australia (0

[Read 13 April 1944]

Pirate IV

INTRODUCTION

The grading, mineralogy and various other features of some sands collected

in the Simpson Desert by the Simpson Desert Expedition of 1939 are described

in this paper. The material was examined through the courtesy of Dr, C. T.

Madigan.

The Simpson Desert is situated almost in the centre of Australia, where it

covers about 56,000 square miles between Lat. 23° S. and 27° S. and Long. 135°

and 139° E. (Madigan 1938, 506.)

The Desert consists of straight, parallel, spinifex-covered sand-ridges running

in a north-north-west, south-south-easterly direction. Individual ridges, which

are about 60 feet high on an average, may run unbroken for fifty miles or more.

There are three or four ridges to the mile, and cach ridge is separated from the

next by a narrow flat. ‘To the north of the Simpson Desert the country gradually

merges into a sandy plain; to the south is Lake Eyre. East and west it gradually

changes to plain country with remnants of sediments and wide flats, on which

water from the infrequently flowing rivers dries up. (Madigan 1936, 213.)

The sand is fine-grained, bright red in colour, except in the south-east of the

Desert, and consists mainly of quartz. It is somewhat similar (Madigan 1938,

915) to the sand in English hour-glasses, which is obtained from. the

Bunter sandstones which originated as desert sands in the Triassic period.

(Boswell 1933, 31.)

The samples examined can be divided into those from the crests of dunes and

those from the hollows. Most of the sands are bright red in colour, except Nos. 3

and 4, which are white, and several of the inter-ridge sands from the eastern side

of the Desert which are brownish. The distribution of samples is given in Table !.

Further particulars of locality and depth of sample appear in the Appendix.

TABLE [

Geographical Distribution of the Samples within the Simpson Desert

Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos.

Sands from dune crests pass bad ~— 2 = ronan

1 6223 6222 3,4

— 6227 — =

on 6228 _— =

Sands from inter-ridge areas, etc, .... = 6224 6221 6236

— 6225 6232 ome

— 6226 6233 —

—_ 6229 6234 vat

aa 6230 6235 —

— 6231 — a

G) Written in 1940, while a Research Fellow of the University of Western Australia.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68, (1), 28 July 1944

GRADING AND SORTING OF THE SANDS

1 MECHANICAL ANALYSIS

Mechanical analyses of the samples were made by hand-shaking through a

set of Tyler screens giving the Wentworth scale (Wentworth 1922) of grade terms

for sediments. The details of these analyses are given in Table II.

TaBce I]

Mechanical Analyses of Simpson Desert Sands

Retained on: 16 32 60 115 250 —~ 250

Screen openings (mm.): 0:99 0-49 0-24 0-12 0-06 —

Sands from crests: % % % % % %

1 ps yt 53 — ~ 12-65 69:57 17-11 0-27

2 a _ ants — a 1-5 83-18 14-82 0-50

6223 at ae An, — = 6°34 61:28 31-47 —

6227 if he; uy = 1:63 11-20 41-63 43-14 4-39

6228 ed te otis — _ 14:02 76°42 9-32 0-24

6222 ~~, sans are — 2-13 27-10 = 49-25 20°70 1-82

3 - Bae site — 0:27 33-56 = 2-02 13-82 0-49

4 A _ fe ~ 0-28 50-17 39-65 9-57 0-33

Sands from inter-ridge areas:

6224 Rake hag ae — §+1 7°54 = 20°76 60-59 5-91

6226 Se eet mm 1-93 5-94 12-80 33-28 41-06 4-99

6229 _ aes cas te 3°02 15-87 18-05 57°40 = 5-66

6231 Lach ae As 0-25 §-27 23-51 24-84 42-19 3°94

6232 ef: be Put — 0-42 4:12 19-87 66°74 8-85

The samples from the dune crests are coarser than those from the inter-

ridge areas. The dune crest sands are well sorted and contain no grains larger

than 1 mm. diameter. In general the bulk of each sample is contained in the

—60 +115 grade, i.c., the grain diameters are between 0°24 and 0°12 mm, This

distribution of size is shown in fig. 1, where the frequency curves have high sharp

peaks at the position of the maximum grade. Fine dusty material makes up the

smallest grade.

The samples from the inter-ridge areas were collected as soil profile samples,

but in this investigation only the surface and lowest samples were sieved. The

maximum grade in the inter-ridge sands is in the —115 +250 grade, grain

diameters between 0°12 and 0°06 mm. ‘This difference in size of the grade con-

taining the bulk of the sand grains in the dune crest sands and the inter-ridge

sands is seen in fig. 1,

Gypsum was found in all sand samples taken near Lake Eyre. In the case

of No. 6236, from an inter-ridge area north of Lake Eyre, no mechanical analysis

was made, as the coarse secondary gypsum crystals were in sufficient proportion

to give a false impression of the coarseness of the sand as a whole. In Nos. 3

and 4, dune crest sand from the east side of the Lake, the gypsum was less and

finer and the mechanical analyses were done in the usual way.

2 Sorrine

The samples from the ridge crests and from the hollows are well sorted.

There is very little difference in the degree of sorting between the samples collected

at the edges and at the middle of the Desert, although the best sorted sample is

from the middle of the Desert, and samples from the eastern and southern sides

show slightly less perfect sorting, which appears in the frequency curve of fig. 1

as a spreading and a lowering of the peak. Samples from the ridge slopes are not

nearly so well sorted as those from the ridge crests (see 6227, fig. 1).

3 COMPARISON WITH OTHER DESERT SANDS

The grade containing the bulk of the sand in samples from the ridge crests

in the Simpson Desert is slightly finer in grain size than similar sands from other

deserts; for instance, the majority of sand grains in the Libyan Desert are

between 0-8 and 0-08 mm. and less than 3% are smaller than 0:04 mm. (Bagnold

1935, 343). In the Simpson Desert sands the greatest number of grains are

between 0°24 and 0°06 mm., and there is sometimes a greater percentage of very

fine grains than in the Libyan Desert sand. Mechanical analyses of wind accumu-

lated sands for grain size show that the peaks of such curves never occur of the

small side of 0-015 cm. and rarely of 0:022 cm. Sand having a peak size nearest

100

Percentage by weight between sizes indicated

Mesh 16

Mms. 0-98

Grain-size

Fig. 1

MECHANICAL ANALSES OF THE SIMPSON DESERT SANDS

Sands from middle of Desert, Nos. 2, 6223, 6227, 6228, shown thus: —-—--——---

Sands from edges of Desert, Nos. 1, 3, 4, 6222, shown thus —--—-—-— —---

Inter-ridge sands, middle of Desert, Nos. 6224, 6229, shown thus: —.—.—.—.—

Inter-ridge sands, edge of Desert, No. 6232, shown thus: 7 eae

to this is found at the crests of dunes (Bagnold 1937, 435). It will be seen from

fig. 1 that the Simpson Desert sand fits into this limit, and the analyses can also

be matched with many of Wentworth’s aeolian sands (Wentworth 1932).

The difference in grain size between the sand from crests and hollows in the

Simpson Desert is similar to the differences observed in the Libyan Desert.

MINERALOGY OF THE SANDS

1 LABoRATORY PROCEDURE

The heavy minerals were separated from quartz in the sands with bromo-

form. Experience has shown that by using one of the finer grades of any sedi-

mentary material for separation a larger crop of more easily identifiable heavy

minerals is obtained than if the unsieved sand is used (Carroll 1939, 101), for

most heavy minerals belong among the originally smallest grains in rocks, and

are therefore to be expected in the finer grades of sediments. This statement is

particularly true for zircon, rutile, tourmaline and the minerals more rarely scen

in heavy residues. During transportation large grains of the heavy minerals, even

if they were present in the source rock, cannot be carried as readily as can

quartz and felspar grains (Rubey 1933). Therefore, although some heavy

mineral grains could probably be obtained from the grade containing the bulk of

the sand, it is more profitable to obtain them from the sand with grains smaller

than those in the maximum grade. Often the very finest grade shows abundant

heavy minerals. (See fig. 3. Dark grains are heavy minerals in an unseparated

fine sand of less than 0-06 mm. grain diameter,)

Before microscopic examination, the red film of iron oxide was removed by

boiling in 1:1 conc, HCI.

2 DETAILS OF THE MINERALOGY

(i) Heavy Minerals

Table III gives the details of the heavy mineral assemblages, the grade of

sand separated, and the index figure, or percentage by weight of the heavy frac-

tion. The percentage figures for the individual minerals were obtained by count-

ing the grains in 10 to 12 microscope fields, amounting to approximately 500 grains

for each residue. These figures refer only to the non-magnetic minerals as the

highly magnetic grains, usually comprising one-third to one-half of the heavy

fraction, were removed before mounting so that the remaining grains could be

more easily seen. The order in which the minerals are arranged in Table III has

no special significance, Where counts were not made, the presence of a mineral

is indicated by ++.

As seen in Table III the residues contained the following heavy minerals:

magnetite, ilmenite (and leucoxene), tourmaline, rutile, zircon, amphiboles,

epidote, zoisite, garnet, sillimanite, titanite, staurolite, anatase, apatite, kyanite,

chlorite, corundum, monazite, andalusite, and spinel. The first ten of these are

present in nearly every sample.

Details of the Individual Minerals are:

Ilmenite—The ilmenite percentage of the total heavy residue in Table III

includes that for leucoxene, which may make up about one-third of the total.

Both ilmenite and leucoxene grains are rounded.

Tourmaline often occurs as spherical grains, commonly of green, brown,

pinkish-brown, and blue colours, respectively. Pale blue, parti-coloured blue and

brown, and mauve grains were much less common. Some samples contain worn

prismatic grains, but the tourmaline is generally well worn, which indicates a long

period of attrition.

Rutile, in deep reddish-brown, well-worn prismatic grains is one of the

minor constituents of these residues. Small golden-brown geniculate twins, also

well worn, occur in sample 6224 from the middle of the Desert.

Zivcon—Each non-magnetic residue contains between 9 and 40%, generally

about 24%, of zircon grains the majority of which are well worn, clear, colour-

less, and contain few inclusions. There are occasional brownish grains (No. 1)

‘yuasaid = +4 ‘yuepunge Aisa =

‘soTdules []@ 10} pourutsajyap jou ‘sa8ejusoied sue alqu} ut soinsiy

$BolW IAPii-19U Woy pues = PY ‘adpls Jo jso19 wosy puvs =

et++pe+t+tt

mp pore

“ttt<+ ++

attt++ +4

tthe +t geese +

e_tt+++ $+ +

e+ t+tt+++4+4H+

SHtt+t+ tt

net

<o8

jeurds

ayisnpepuy

DPZEUO IW

uinpunio7y

aol)

IPUBAYT

awedy

aseyeuy

aUSloZ

IPLOINES

ayued L,

aPULATTS

youseyy

ajoprdy

(ss9],9) ajoqrydury

(45) ajoqryduy

—, “Yoon

anny

SUTPLUING FT

ayuatuy]

ayyausey

}

I §

t I

+ I Zz

+ v T

+ z

i %

+ v4 82

+ 8 eT

+ I II

+ 6¢ ge

Vv Vv Vv

z-0 TT TT

os7+ OSZ+ OSZ+

H 2) 2)

9£29 i ¢

HLIAOS

F-0

stl

$¢c9

Fd o-0 OT T-¢ Be Oe

Ose ~ OSe+ OSZ+ | OSe— OSE

H H 2) H H

£79 = 1ee9.— 2e29 T€z9 = 6€Z9

L3Va

9¢¢9

— ose 0s¢-

Fre oe

H s)

Fez9 = BEzO

aATAaCIW

l-¢

£29

OSZ+ Ose —

TPT GS

OSZ+ OSS+

feo

:aansry xXapuy

ipoyeredag apelin

suon diosa

DON adues

spues jlosaq uosdung ay} ur syesoulpy AaRaTy

II] Fav

and one or two purple grains (No. 6236). Purple zircon is present in some of the

residues of sediments derived from the Pre-Cambrian in Western Australia, and

the writer had expected to see more of it in this material which must have

originally come from the surrounding Pre-Cambrian terrains. American workers

(Report on Accessory Minerals in Crystalline Rocks, 1935) consider that purple

zircon is characteristic of Archaean gneisses. The increase to 40% zircon in

sample 6224 may be due only to the fact that the very finest grade was separated,

for zircon, occurring in minute grains in most rocks, nearly always tends to be

concentrated in the finest grade of any sediment,

Amphiboles—Both green and colourless amphibole grains are found in these

residues. Most of the grains are worn at the edges, Green amphibole is more

plentiful than colourless, and is the blue-green variety characteristic of meta-

morphosed basic rocks. ZA c = 13°, indicating the cummingtonite group. Some

residues, notably No. 1, contain occasional brownish-green grains, slightly

pleochroic, with ZA c= 18°, belonging to the pargasite group. Colourless

amphibole grains with a very small extinction angle or with parallel extinction

occur in nearly all the samples, and may have accompanied the blue-green variety

in the original parent rock,

Epidote and zoisite—In some of the samples epidote makes up a consider-

able proportion of the residue. In samples from the south and east of the Desert

there is much less than in those from the middle-and west. The epidote is a very

pale yellowish-green colour and the grains are generally somewhat worn, though

almost un-worn prismatic grains also occur. Some grains appear to be between

epidote and zoisite in optical properties. Zoisite has the characteristic ultra blue

or watery yellow polarisation colours in many instances, but could not be identified

with certainty in all the residues. A suggested origin for both epidote and ziosite

is in metamorphosed basic rocks, such as greenstones.

Garnet is constantly present in these residues. The grains are almost in-

variably angular, with surfaces sometimes lightly etched, occasionally fracture

surfaces or smooth. Garnet seems seldom to become well rounded during trans-

port, and in the writer’s experience most of the garnet encountered amongst well-

worn grains of other minerals is still angular; this may suggest that garnet is too

brittle to be abraded without breaking, and that angular garnet in a sediment is

no proof of the nearness of the parent rock. The colours of these grains range

from deep pinkish-brown, light brown, to colourless ; these suggest pyrope, alman-

dine, and grossularite,

Sillimanite, in clear, colourless, slightly worn prismatic grains was identified

in a number of the residues, but only in Nos. 2 and 6223, from the Middle of the

Desert, is it in conspicuous amounts.

Small quantities of staurolite, kyanite, and andalusite occurred in some of

the residues. The staurolite is a pale yellowish-brown variety; the grains are

chunky, angular prisms. In contrast, kyanite and andalusite are well worn; the

latter is sometimes strongly pleochroic and may be rather more plentiful than

indicated in Table III, as there were some colourless grains which could not be

satisfactorily identified.

The remaining minerals, titanite, anatase, apatite, chlorite, corundum, mona-

site, and spinel call for little comment, Titanite was found as rather angular,

colourless grains. Anatase, because of its well-developed crystal faces, appears

to be authigenic, but not necessarily formed in the Desert sand as it now is, but

perhaps in a sandstone or limestone from which the Desert sand was derived.

Apatite was only found in samples which were not boiled in acid. It occurs

in well-worn prismatic grains exhibiting no unusual features. White (1939, 746)

Sillimanite Ee

re: =

Amphibole ny rs EL EL es

Garnet EL | ie os

E pidote

Zoisile

Rutile

Tourmalhue

Zircon

Hmenite ,

Sample No. I

Middle +

3 4 ~=5

6 7

South

Fig. 2

has recorded apatite from most

desert sands. He suggests that its

presence is due to the greater stabil-

ity in an arid environment than

elsewhere. Apatite is certainly not

stable in all environments, but does

occur in beach sands. (Carroll 1939,

102.)

Corundwm—The presence of a

few grains of blue corundum is

interesting, for it is one of the

minerals less frequently encountered

in heavy residues.

Monazite occurs in the usual pale

yellowish-green, rounded grains. It

is present in five of the residues.

White (1939, 746) states that it is

an unusual mineral in desert sands,

but this probably depends on the

ability of the desert-forming rocks

to supply it.

Spinel is a rare mineral in these

residues. The grains are pale green

which may indicate gahnite, the zinc

spinel, but this identification re-

quires a chemical analysis.

Few generalisations concerning

the heavy residues of these sands"

can be made on a small number of

samples, but there are several note-

worthy features:

1 The dominantly metamorphic

and granitic nature of these

mineral assemblages.

2 The uniformity of the index

figure or percentage by weight

of the residue in the grade of

sand separated.

Variation in percentage of indi-

vidual minerals. The distribu-

tion of the principal non-mag-

netic minerals, arranged accord-

ing to position of each sample in

the Desert, is given in fig. 2.

The amount of ilmenite, tourma-

line, rutile, and zircon does not

Pistocrams or Non-mMaGNetic Heavy Resrpvues, Stmpson Desert SAnns.

Percentage figures from counts as in Table 11],

sample 1, west side of desert.

sample 2, middle of desert.

sample 6223, middle of desert.

sample 6224, middle of desert.

represents

sample

6222, east side of desert.

3, south side of desert.

sample 4, south side of desert.

vary much with respect to locality; garnet, epidote, and sillimanite do vary

considerably. This variation may indicate that the sands have been derived

from rocks which have disintegrated more or less in situ.

4 Attrition, resulting in rounding and blunting of corners, is noticeable with most

minerals except garnet and staurolite.

. (it) The “Light” Minerals

Quartz makes up the bulk of these sands which had to be boiled in acid to

remove the red colouring matter, probably hematite, which occurred as a thin film

around each grain. The grains are sub-angular to well-rounded, and many

contain inclusions of rutile needles (sagenite webbing), chloritic or sillimanitic

needles, and pepper-dust ores. Such inclusions fall into Mackie’s acicular group

(1889) and indicate a metamorphic parentage.

The appearance of quartz grains in three grades of sand from the middle of

the Desert (Sample No. 2) is illustrated in pl. IV. There are no grains with

angular corners, so that the sand as a whole has suffered considerable movement.

Many of the grains have matt surfaces and are not shiny as is usual with grains

of water-borne sediments.

Plate TV shows that in the coarsest grade a few of the grains are very well

rounded, but the majority merely have had the corners blunted. In the finer

grades most of the grains are sub-angular, the attrition having only been sufficient

to remove the angular edges which must originally have been present.

In this investigation it was not possible to work out any numerical value for

the degree of roundness of the quartz grains by the methods now used (Krumbein

and Pettijohn, chap. 8), but an estimation of roundness is given in Table IV.

Taste 1V

Roundness of Quartz Grains

Sample Grade

No. Desc. Loc. +16 +32 +60 +115 +250 —250

1 Sand WwW SA-WR SA-WR SA SA-WR

2 Sand M SA-WR SA-WR SA-WR SA-WR

6223 Sand M SA-WR SA-WR SA+ SA+

6227 Sand M SA+WR SA+WR SA-R SA-WR SA-WR

6228 Sand M SA SA+ SA+ SA-R

6224 Soil M SA-WR SA-WR SA-R A, SA-R SA-R

6226 Soil M SA SA-WR SA-R SA-R SA-R SA-R

6222 Sand E SA-WR SA+R SA SA+ SA+

3 Sand S R SA-WR WR-SA SA SA

4 Sand S R SA-R SA+ SA SA+R

SA = sub-angular, corners blunted; SA+ = grains somewhat more worn than SA;

R = corners of grains rounded; WIR = corners well rounded; SA-WR = some of the

grains are SA, others WR; SA+WR = majority of grains are SA, but there are a few

R; SA+R = majority of grains are SA, but some are R.

W = west side of desert; M = middle of desert; E = east side of*desert; S = southern

side of desert.

The quartz grains of the Simpson Desert sand are not more worn than those

in many beach sands or beach dune sands, but there appear to be a greater number

of slightly rounded or sub-angular grains in the finer grades than is usual with

sands from other environments in which the finer grades are generally angular.

The wear which is shown in the rounding of these Simpson Desert sand

grains may have been due to movement during several cycles of sedimentation.

This does not mean that desert conditions have alone been responsible for the

rounding, for the source of the sand may be a sandstone as in the Egyptian and

Libyan Deserts.

Felspar is a fairly prominent constituent and occurs in fresh angular grains.

Orthoclase and microcline are both present.

Gypsum is plentiful in some of the inter-ridge sands, particularly in samples

from below the surface, where it has arisen authigenically. Only odd grains of

gypstim were seen in the dune sands. (Sands from crests of ridges. )

(iit) Comparison with other Desert Sands

Comparatively little has been written about the mineralogy of desert sands,

the most comprehensive account being by White (1939). He has recorded the

heavy minerals found in a great many desert sands, including sands froin Oodna-

datta, Cooberpedy Tablelands, Tarcoola, and Glenloth. The sample from Oodna-

datta is the only one which is near enough geographically to be compared with the

Simpson Desert sands. The Oodnadatta sample contained hematite, limonite,

tourmaline, calcite, epidote, zircon, hornblende, and zoisite. The absence of

ilmenite and magnetite is surprising as these minerals are so conspicuous in the

Simpson Desert sands.

In Arabia and Egypt many of the heavy minerals recorded from the sands

are also found in the sandstones surrounding the deserts, which implies that there

has been little addition of material from outside the desert basin; a conclusion

which might also be reached if sedimentary rocks from around the Simpson Desert

were examined.

The suites of heavy minerals recorded for a number of sands collected in

deserts in other parts of the world are restricted in number of constituents. White

(1939) has suggested that this restriction is caused by abrasion during movement

of the sand itself. Certainly only the most resistant minerals remain, but it seems

likely, however, that the poverty or richness in heavy minerals of the rocks, in

most instances sandstones, from which the sands are derived is probably as

important a cause as the loss by abrasion. If large numbers of sands from each

desert could be examined, it is possible that the number of heavy minerals recorded.

would be increased. As an example, White’s sample from Oodnadatta contained

8 heavy minerals; the total from the Simpson Desert sands is 20 heavy minerals.

GENERAL CONCLUSIONS

As only a few sands from the Simpson Desert have been examined the fol-

lowing conclusions must be regarded as tentative:

1 IMMEDIATE SOURCE OF THE SANDS

(i) The mechanical analyses show that the sands have been sorted into two

well-defined groups (see fig. 1), the finer sands being from the inter-ridge areas,

the majority of whose grains are between 0-12 and 0°06 mm. in diameter, a size,

as noted by Bagnold (1937, 436) difficult to remove by wind. Material of this

size will not form dunes, so that it is reasonable to suppose that in the Simpson

Desert this fine sand has been left when the coarser was formed into dunes.

[Sand from slopes is apparently a mixture of crest-sand and inter-ridge sand.] It is

possible, too, that the inter-ridge sands are soils developed from very fine parent

rocks such as shale or fine-grained argillaceous sandstone underlying the desert.

(i) Roundness of grains—There is nothing remarkable or characteristic

about the grain roundness in these sands, except the amount of rounding of the

heavy minerals; the sands might, so far as this feature goes, have come from a

beach dune. The grains have undergone considerable attrition but there is no

way of telling whether this was by wind or water or both. Nor, of course, is it

possible to say through how many cycles of sedimentation separated by periods of

rest as consolidated sediments the grains have passed.

At the present time there is no agreement as to the method and time taken

to round sand grains, nor whether wind is more efficient at rounding small particles

than water. Aeolian sands generally show better sorting and rounding than sands

transported by other agents (Russell 1939, 41), The greater roundness of grains

in dunes is often due (McCarthy 1935) to the selective transportation of the

rounder grains in beach sand by wind, and even many desert dunes are derived

from beach sands of former lakes and inland seas (Russell 1939, 37).

The degree of roundness of the quartz grains and of most of the heavy

minerals in the Simpson Desert sand indicates that they have all had a fairly long

past history, involving considerable attrition. This attrition may have taken place

within the basin now containing the Desert and its surroundings and may be the

result of much movement in a fairly restricted area.

(ti) Heavy mineral evidence—Apart from the roundness of the heavy mineral

grains these minerals present little evidence of source. The variation in composi-

tion of the heavy mineral residues from different parts of the Desert and the rather

uniform Index Figure, together with a similarity of grain size throughout the

samples examined, suggest that the sands were derived from the parent material

without much transport. The wear exhibited by the grains themselves shows that

at some stage considerable transportation must have occurred. The sand may

have come from the slightly higher surrounding country and come to rest in the

desert basin from which it never appreciably moved; alternatively, as Madigan

suggests (1938, 524), the sand may be due to the disintegration of sediments,

in situ, which by the mineralogy of the resulting sands must have come fairly

directly from crystalline rocks. The variation in percentage composition of the

heavy non-magnetic residues, as shown in fig. 2, indicates that this is a likely

possibility. If the sands had been re-worked from underlying sandstones or other

_rocks, then it is likely that there would be an impoverishment in mineral species,

which is not shown in Table IIJ. The Simpson Desert sands contain the same

variety of minerals as would be expected in post-Tertiary sands to which newly

disintegrated igneous and metamorphic rocks had contributed.

The variation in heavy mineral percentages. suggests that transportation was

not very active during dune formation. It has been thought possible that the

river flood-plains to the south-east have contributed to the desert sands (Madigan

1938). Transport of large quantities of sand would have been reflected in the

heavy minerals, first by a marked decrease in the index figure in the direction of

movement, i.¢., in the north-west ; and secondly, by the disappearance of prismatic

grains such as amphibole and sillimanite which do not “carry” so well as the more

equidimensional grains, but amphibole and sillimanite are at their maximum per-

centages in the samples from the middle and west.

Active transportation would also result in marked differences in the grain

size and the sorting of sands from different parts of the Desert. Table IT and

fig. 1 show that there are very few of these differences.

2 PRIMARY SOURCE OF SAND GRAINS

Reasons have been given in | for considering that the last parent rock of the

Desert sands may have been a sediment. Whether this is correct or not, it is

evident that the heavy minerals must have originated in crystalline rocks which are

similar to those strongly developed north, west, and south of the Desert area.

Possible source-rocks for a number of the heavy minerals occur in these peripheral

regions; ¢.g., amphiboles, epidote, zoisite and garnet in the MacDonnell Ranges,

and corundum in the schists of the Mount Painter area. Gneisses and granites are

indicated by the abundant zircon. Tourmaline indicates that the source rocks

included pegmatites and granite,

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate [V

Magnification: 37

Photos: H. J. Smith

PHOTOMICROGRAPHS OF QUARTZ GRAINS FROM SAMPLE 2,

MIDDLE OF SIMPSON DESERT

Above, grains from the —250 grade, less than 1/16 mm. in

diameter. Note the concentration of heavy minerals (dark)

in this grade which represents only 4% of the sand.

—115 +250 grade, between 1/8 and

Centre, grains from the

This grade was separated for heavy

1/16 mm. in diameter.

minerals.

Below, grains from the maximum grade, between 1/4 and 1/8 mm.

in diameter. 83% of the sand is made up of this grade.

All grains were boiled in acid to remove the red coating, and were

mounted in kerosene, R.I. about 1-46, to show the outlines.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

My thanks are due to Dr. C. T. Madigan who very willingly gave the samples

of sand described in this paper; to Professor E. de C. Clarke for advice and help

during the preparation of this manuscript; and to the University of Western

Australia in whose programme of research in Geology initiated by the Common-

wealth grant to the Universities this investigation is a part.

APPENDIX

List of Sand and Soil Samples from the Simpson Desert

Live sand, Andado Station, west side of desert; dune crest.

Live sand, Camp 14, middle of desert; dune crest.

Live sand, Camp 44, east side Lake Eyre; dune crest.

Live sand, Camp 48, east side Lake Eyre; dune crest.

6221 Soil, 0-12", Goyder’s Lagoon Plain.

6222 Live sand, Camp 20, Kaliduwarry Station, Mulligan River; crest.

6223 Live sand, Camp 8, middle of desert; dune crest, 0-46".

6224 Sand, Camp 8, inter-ridge area, 0-5”.

6225 Sand, Camp 8, inter-ridge area, 5-37”.

6226 Sand, Camp 8, inter-ridge area, 37-46”.

6227. Sand, Camp 8, sand-ridge slope, 045”.

6228 Sand, Camp 8, crest of ridge, 0-18”.

6229 Sand, Camp 8, inter-ridge area, 0-5”.

6230 Sand; Camp 8, inter-ridge area, 5-26”.

6231 Sand, Camp 8, inter-ridge area, 26-45”.

6232 Sand, Camp 19, west of Mulligan River, inter-ridge area, 0-12”.

6233 Sand, Camp 19, west of Mulligan River, inter-ridge area, 16-27”.

6234 Sand, Camp 19, west of Mulligan River, inter-ridge area, 27-32”.

6235 Sand, Camp 19, west of Mulligan River, inter-ridge area, 32-45”.

6236 Sand, Camp 42, north of Lake Eyre, inter-ridge area, 0-6”.

eon

List or REFERENCES

Bacnotp, R. A. 1935 Movement of Desert Sand, Geog. Jour., 85, 343

BaGnotp, R. A. 1937 Transport of Sand by Wind, Geog. Jour., 89, 409

Boswet., P. G. H. 1933 On the Mineralogy of Sedimentary Rocks, London

Carrott, D. 1939 Beach Sands from Bunbury, Western Australia, Jour. Sed.

Petrol., 9, No. 3, 95

KruMBEIN, W. C., and Petriyomn, F. J. 1938 Manual of Sedimentary Petro-

graphy, New York

MacCartuy, R. G. 1935 Eolian Sands: a comparison, Amer. Jour. Sc., 230,

Mackie, W. 1899 The Sands and Sandstones of Eastern Moray. Trans, Edin.

Geol. Soc., 7, 148

Mapican, C. T. 1936 The Australian Sand-ridge Deserts, Geog. Review, 26,

No. 2, 205

Mapican, C. T. 1938 The Simpson Desert and its Borders, Jour. Roval Soc.

N.S.W., 71, 503

Rupey, W. W. 1933 The Size-distribution of Heavy Minerals within a Water-

laid Sandstone, Jour. Sed. Petrol. 3, No. 1, 3

a PD. 1939 Effects of Transportation: Recent Marine Sediments,

S.A,

Wentwortu, C. K. 1922 A Scale of Grade and Class Terms for Clastic Sedi-

ments, Jour. Geol., 30, 377 -

WentwortH, C. K, 1932 Mechanical Composition of Sediments in Graphic

Form, Univ. Iowa Studies, 14, No. 3

Wrirrt, W. A. 1939 The Mineralogy of Desert Sands, Amer. Jour. Se., 237, 742

NaTIoNnaL Researcu Councit, Division of Geology and Geography, 1935, Report

of Committee on Accessory Minerals of Crystalline Rocks for 1934-35

REMARKS ON SOME PARASITIC NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIA

AND NEW ZEALAND

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and PATRICIA M. MAWSON, University of Adelaide

Summary

During the past year several collections of nematodes have been submitted to us for examination.

Amongst them were many from birds from Dunedin and Invercargill in southern New Zealand, the

material having been forwarded to us by Miss Marion Fyfe, Zoology Department, University of

Otago. H. McL. Gordon, of the MacMaster Veterinary Research Institute, Sydney, sent us oxyurids

from a Fijian lizard, Brachylophus faciatus. Messrs. K. Sheard, of the C.S.I.R. Fisheries Laboratory,

Cronulla, and A. Rau, of the South Australian Museum, forwarded viscera from some fish. Mr. J.

M. Holtham, of Narrung, sent us specimens and information relating especially to worm infestation

of fish in the lakes near the mouth of the Murray. Mr. G. G. Jaensch assisted us in regard to material

from the Murray swamps at Tailem Bend. To all of these collaborators we express our thanks. The

study was carried out in connection with the Commonwealth Research Grant to the University of

Adelaide. Types of new species have been deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

REMARKS ON SOME PARASITIC NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIA

AND NEW ZEALAND

By T. Harvey Jounston and Parricta M. Mawson, University of Adelaide

{Read 11 May 1944]

During the past year several collections of nematodes have been submitted to

us for examination. Amongst them were many from birds from Dunedin and

Invercargill in southern New Zealand, the material having been forwarded to us

by Miss Marion Fyfe, Zoology Department, University of Otago. HH. Mcl..

Gordon, of the MacMaster Veterinary Research Institute, Sydney, sent us oxyurids

from a Fijian lizard, Brachylophus faciatus. Messrs. K. Sheard, of the C.S.LR.

Fisheries Laboratory, Cronulla, and A. Rau, of the South Australian Museum,

forwarded viscera from some fish. Mr. J. M. Holtham, of Narrung, sent us

specimens and information relating especially to worm infestation of fish in the

lakes near the mouth of the Murray. Mr. G. G. Jaensch assisted us in regard

to material from the Murray swamps at Tailem Bend. To all of these collaborators

we express our thanks. The study was carried out in connection with the Com-

monwealth Research Grant to the University of Adelaide. Types of new species

have been deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide,

List of Hosts and Parasites mentioned in this Paper.

: BIRDS

PHALACROCORAX BREVIROSTRIS Gould — Contracaecum spiculigerum (Rud.)

Cosmocephalus jaenschi Johnston and Mawson, New Zealand.

PHALACROCORAK CARBO L. — Procamallanus murrayensis Johnston and Mawson,

Tailem Bend, S.A. (probably ingested with its fish host).

SULA SERRATOR Gray——Contracaecum magnicollare Johnston and Mawson;

Contracaecum sp. immature, New Zealand.

NINOX NOVAESEELANDIAE Gmelin—Heterakis gallinae (Gmelin), probably ingested

with its avian host; Capillaria strigis n. sp., New Zealand.

EUDYPTULA MINOR Forst.—Contracaecum sp. immat., New. Zealand.

EMBERIZA CITRINELLA Linn. Capillaria emberizae Yamaguti, New Zealand

(introduced species).

GYMNORHINA TIBICEN Latham—Diplotriaena clelandi (Johnston), Burnett River,

Queensland.

PELAGODROMA MARINA Lath.—Seuratia marina Johnston and Mawson, Bass Strait.

REPTILES

BRACHYLOPHUS FAscIATUS—Alaeuris brachylophi n. sp., Fiji (via Sydney).

AMPHIBIA

HyLa AurREA Lesson—Spironoura simpsoni nom. nov.. for S. hylae Johnston and

Simpson, N.S.W.

Pson, Fis i

GALAXIAS ATTENUATUS Jenyns—Enustrongylides gadopsis (larva). Contracaecum

sp. (larva), Lake Alexandrina, S.A.

SALMO FrArIO L.—Eustrongylides gadopsis, Murray Bridge, S.A.

RETROPINNA SEMONI Weber—Eustrongylides gadopsis, Tailem Bend, S.A.

AGONOSTOMUS FORSTERI Cuv. and Val.—Eustrongylides gadopsis, Lake Alexan-

drina and Tailem Bend.

PLECTROPLITES AMBIGUUS Rich.~Eustrongylides gadopsis, Lake Alexandrina,

THERAPON (BIDYANA) BIDYANA Mitchell—Eustrongylides gadopsis, |ake Alexan-

drina.

SERIOLA GRANDIS Casteln.—Capsularia marina J... Rapid Bay, S.A.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68, (1), 28 July 1944

‘THREPTERIUS MACULOSUS Rich.—Contracaecum legendrei (larva), Cucullanellus

sheardi n. sp., Ascarophis australis n.sp., Cape Borda, 5.A.

UPENEICHTHYS PorosuS Cur. and Val.—Contracaecum legendrei (larva), Port

Lincoln, S.A.

Lepmpopus cAupATUS Euphr.—Capsularia marma L.; Capillaria lepidopodis

n.sp., St. Vincent Gulf, S.A.

Alaeuris brachylophi n. sp.

Fig. 1-3

The following description is based on specimens forwarded to us for identifi-

cation by Mr. H. Gordon of the McMaster Veterinary Research Laboratory,

Sydney. They were taken from a lizard, Brachylophus fasciatus, from Taji.

The males are 1-5 mm.—3 mm. in length, the females 3-5-4-5 mm, The

oesophagus is very long and thin, ending in a somewhat pyriform bulb, the entire

organ being about half the body length in the male, and two-fifths in the female.

The nerve ring is very near the anterior end, ‘2 mm. in the female; the excretory

pore is just prebulbar in both sexes.

The spicule of the male is about -6 mm. long, very stout for the greater part

of its length but tapering in the distal quarter to a fine point. The V-shaped

gubernaculum is strongly chitinised. The caudal alae are wide and extend to the

extremity of the tail. There are three pairs of perianal papillae, and one pair at

the extreme tip of the tail.

The vulva in the female lies at about the middle of the body; the eggs are

about 130-150» by 60-70. The tail is -3 mm. long.

The species is placed in the genus Alaeuris because of the single spicule and

the presence of gubernaculum and caudal alae. It differs from the four previously

described species of this genus chiefly in the extent of the caudal alae and the

size of the spicule.

HETERAKIS GALLINAE (Gmelin)

From Ninox novaescelandiae, from Invercargill and Dunedin, New Zealand.

The parasite has not previously been recorded from a bird of prey; it is more

than probable that these specimens were accidentally ingested with the food of

the host.

CoNTRACAECUM MAGNICOLLARE Johnston and Mawson 1941

This species is now recorded from a gannet, Sula serrator, from Dunedin,

New Zealand. It was originally taken from Anous stilodus from Queensland.

In the original description the length of the spicules was inadvertently omitted ;

they are 1:3-—3-6 of the body length.

CONTRACAECUM SPICULIGERUM (Rud.)

From Phalacrocorax brevirostris from Dunedin. As far as we are aware

this species has not previously been recorded from this host, although it appears

to be the common ascarid parasite of cormorants in many parts of the world.

In a previous communication we recorded it from cormorants on the sub-

antarctic islands of New Zealand (Johnston and Mawson 1943).

CAPSULARIA MARINA L.

A larval worm apparently belonging to this species was taken from a king-

fish, Seriola grandis, caught at Rapid Bay, and from Lepidopus caudatus, washed

ashore at Glenelg, South Australia.

CONTRACAECUM (TITYNNASCARIS) LEGENDREI Dollfus

Young stages of this worm were taken from the “silver spot”, Threpterius

maculosus, caught at Cape Borda; and from Upeneichthys porosus from Port

Lincoln, South Australia.

CONTRACAECUM spp. (larvae)

1 Immature specimens of Contracaecum, probably ingested along with fish,

were obtained from Sula serrator and Eudyptula minor from Dunedin. The

arrangement of the lips resembled that of Phocascaris sp. and no doubt represented

an immature stage before the typical condition present in Contracaecum had

become established.

2 From Galarias attenuatus, Lake Alexandrina. About twenty small worms

obtained, all with three larval lips, but without larval tooth. Length, 8-4—

10-5 mm.; breadth, 3°3-3-6 mm.; oesophagus one-tenth body length; oesopha-

geal appendix: length of oesophagus = 1:1°3; length of intestinal caecum:

oesophageal appendix = 1:1:6-1°8.

SEURATIA MARINA Johnston and Mawson

In the original description (1941) of this species from the small petrel,

Pelagodroma marina, from Flinders Island, Bass Strait, the lengths given for the

spicules are incorrect, due to an error in the position of the decimal points. They

should read +14 and -24 mm. respectively.

COSMOCEPHALUS JAENSCHI Johnston and Mawson

A. female was identified from Phalacrocorax brevirostris from Dunedin.

The species was originally described (1941) from males from P. carbo from

South Australia. Subsequently a female worm from Pelecanus conspictllatus, also

from South Australia, was identified with the species, although its cervical papillae

were bicuspid, while those of the male were tricuspid. In the present material,

one female, the cervical papillae are bicuspid.

Ascarophis australis n. sp.

Fig, 4-5

A number of specimens of an apparently new species of Ascarophis were

obtained from a “silver spot,” Threpterius maculosus, caught by Mr. K, Sheard

off Cape Borda, South Australia, The body of the female is swollen in the

posterior third which contains the uteri; and this is especially marked in older

females, which at first glance suggest members of the genus Capilaria, The males

are 6-6°5 mm. long, the females up to 25:5 mm. long, 120 wide anteriorly,

200 » wide posteriorly.

The head bears two large lip-like processes. The mouth leads into a long

narrow cylindrical vestibule -15 mm. long, 50 wide (measured in the largest

female.) The nerve ring surrounds the anterior end of the oesophagus and the

excretory pore is shortly behind this. he narrower part of the oesophagus is

-24 mm. in length in the female, and +17 mm. in the male; the wider posterior

part 2°1 mm. in the female, 1-1 mm. in the male.

The ventral surface of the male for a short distance anterior to the cloaca

is raised into several longitudinal rows of bosses. The caudal alae appear to be

more or Jess symmetrical, but it was not possible to get a direct ventral view of

the entire tail. There are three pairs of preanal papillae, the most anterior of

them double-headed, the second and third close together, and six pairs of post-

anal papillae arranged as in fig. 5. The spicules are -08 mm, and ‘28 mm. long;

a gubernaculum is not present.

In the female the vulva is ‘64 mm. in front of the anus; the tail is -18 mm.

long and ends in a knob, The eggs are more or less spherical, 36 » in diameter

and contain a coiled embryo.

The species appears closest to 4. morrhua Beneden with which it agrees in

the appearance of the head and vestibule, but it differs from that species in the

position of the vulva.

Fig. 1-3, Alacuris brachylophi--1, whole female worm; 2, ventral view of male tail;

3, lateral view of male tail. Fig. 4-5, Ascarophis australis—4, anterior end; 5, male

tail, Fig. 6-10, Cucullanellus sheardi—6 and 7, lateral and ventral views of head; black

spot on fig 7 marks position of cervical papilla; 8, tip of male tail in ventral view

(young specimen); 9, male tail; 10, very young male. Fig. 11, Capilleria emberizac,.

ventral view of male tail. Fig. 12, Capilleria sirigis, cgg. Fig. 13, Capillaria

lepidopodis, egg. Fig. 2, 3, and 5 to same scale; fig. 4, 11, 12, and 13 to same scale;

fig. 6, 7, 9, and 10 to same scale.

PROCAMALLANUS MURRAYENSIS Johnston and Mawson

A male was collected from the cormorant, Phalacrocorax carbo, from Tailem

Bend. It must have been ingested with its normal fish host. It was 9:2 mm. long,

the male being recorded in the original account (1940) as 4 to 5 mm. in length.

Cucullanellus sheardi n. sp.

Fig. 6-10

From Threpterius maculosus from Cape Borda (coll. K. Sheard) and the

Althorpe Islands (Adelaide fish market). Stout worms, tapering from the level

of the base of the oesophagus backwards; the young forms, of which several are

present, markedly nail-shaped, tapering from the truncated head end to a pointed

tail (fig. 10), Males to 2-4 mm., females to 4mm, Cuticle very thick. Oesophagus

-64 mm. long in female, *52 mm. in male, greatly widened anteriorly and with a

marked constriction at level of nerve ring, Intestinal caecum reaches to nerve

ring. LExcretory pore and cervical papillae at about level of nerve ring, ‘36 mm.

from head in female and -22 mm. in the male. In the male, spicules °55 mm.

long; 11 pairs of caudal papillae and sometimes one or two additional pairs

anterior to the sucker; in young worms a single more or less dorsally-situated

papilla observed more anteriorly still—shown in very young male in fig. 10. On

the female tail are two large papillae situated ait the beginning of the second half.

Vulva 1 mm. from the tail. Eggs 634 x 39 n,

The species is apparently very close to C. fraseri Baylis, from which it may

be distinguished by the arrangement of caudal papillae in the male (the three

adanal with one laterally from the first and another laterally from the third), by

the more posterior position of the vulva, and by the relatively greater length of

the spicules.

Spironoura simpsoni nom. nov.

Dr. H. A. Baylis, in a private communication, has kindly drawn our atten-

tion to the fact that Spzronoura hylae Johnston and Simpson 1943 is a nom.

praeocc., having been used by Reiber, Byrd and Parker, 1940, for a parasite from

Hyla spp. We therefore suggest S. simpsoni as a new name for the species para-

sitic in Hyla aurea from Sydney.

DIPLOTRIAENA CLELANDI (Johnston 1912)

In 1912 Filaria clelandi was described by the senior author from a single

male specimen. The type is not at present available, but from the drawings and

description the species obviously belongs to the genus Diplotriaena, Yrom the

brief account given, it is impossible to say whether any of the Diplotriaena spp.

since described are referable to D. clelandi; this point may be cleared up by the

examination of further material from the type host, Gymnorhina tibicen, The

specimen was collected at Eidsvold, Burnett River, Queensland.

EUSTRONGYLIDES GADOPsIs Johnston and Mawson

This long larval worm was first described (1940) from Gadopsis marmoratus

from New South Wales and was recorded from a perch, probably Plectroplites

ambiguus, from Northern Queensland. Baird’s Filaria sanguinea from Galaxias

scriba from the Murray, and Linstow’s Spiroptera bicolor (1889) from

G. attenuatus from the Adelaide district were also placed under it. £. galaxias,

a larval form from Galaxias olidus from the vicinity of Adelaide was regarded as

a distinct, but closely allied, form. We think it probable that E. gadopsis and

E, galaxias are synonyms and represent the larval stage of E. phalacrocoracis

Johnston and Mawson 1941, which was recorded from two species of cormorants,

Phalacrocorax melanoleucus, and P. carbo in 1941, and later (1942) from

P, fuscescens, all from South Australia. Our attempts to infect freshwater fish

with eggs of E. phalacrocoracis have been unsuccessful.

Mr. J. M. Holtham, of Narrung, sent us larval material from the congolli,

Pseudaphritis wrvillei; callop, Plectroplites ambiguus; Galaxias attenuatus; and

Murray bream, Therapon bidyana; all from Lake Alexandrina, He also for-

warded an adult from Phalacrocorax melanoleucus from the same locality. He

informed us that the same species of larva occurred in the mullet, Agonostomus

forsteri. Mr, E. Deed told us that he had observed the larva in the introduced

trout, Salmo fario, in the vicinity of Murray Bridge. We have taken it from

Philypnodon grandiceps, Retropinna semoni, and Pseudaphritis urvillei from the

swamps at Tailem Bend.

In a larva forwarded by Mr. Holtham the six inner lips are well developed,

each bearing a large conical papilla. Behind these is a ring of six rounded papillae.

None was seen on the lateral lines. The buccal cavity measures -13 mm. long,

and the oesophagus 12 mm. in length in a worm 102 mm. long. The specimens

differed from those previously described by us in the shorter length of the buccal

cavity and in the greater development of the lips whose condition was much more

suggestive of that which we figured for the adult Eustr. phalacrocoracis,

In 1819 Rudolphi described Filaria cystica from a Brazilian freshwater fish,

Symbranchus laticaudus. Leuckart (1876, 381) referred to Rudolphi’s parasite

and associated with the same species two worms collected from Galaxias by

Schomburgk and identified previously as F. cystica by Schneider (1866), who

considered the species to be the larval stage of Eustrongylus gigas. Leuckart

figured a specimen from Galaxias, the worm being 75 mm. long and 0-6 mm. in

maximum diameter, and considered the parasites to belong to the same species as

Rudolphi’s F. cystica, and to be larval stages of Eustrongylus. His remarks imply

that Schomburgk’s material came from Guiana. Cobbold (1879, 209) referred

to F. cystica as being the young stage of Eustrongylus gigas. Shipley in the Cam-

bridge Natural History (2, 1896, 142) mentioned Galawias scriba and Sym-

branchus laticaudatus as hosts for F. cysttca.

Baird’s identification (1861) of the red worms from Galaxtas scriba from

the Murray as Fil. songuinea Rud. has been mentioned by us in our account of

Eustrongylides gadopsis (Johnston and Mawson 1940, 350), as also has Linstow’s

identification of material from Galaxias attenuatus (collected by Schomburgk in

Adelaide, and housed in the Berlin Museum) as Spiroptera bicolor.

Leuckart’s association of Galaxias with the name of Schomburgk and with

Guiana as a locality may be explained by the fact that the latter botanist in 1840-42

accompanied his brother during the delimitation of the boundary of British

Guiana, but R. Schomburgk came to South Australia in 1848 and was Director of

the Adelaide Botanic Garden from 1866 to 1890—hence the locality mentioned

by Linstow (1899, 17) for the material. G. scriba is a synonym of G. attenuatus.

Gunther (Introduction to the Study of Fishes, 1880, 625) reported that the genus

Galexias occurred in New Zealand, Southern Australia, Tasmania and the extreme

south of South America, hence Guiana can be excluded as a habitat for fishes of

the genus. Miss Cram (1927, 368) was in error in quoting Rudolphi as recording

G. scriba as a host for Fil, cystica. Jagerskiold (1909) noted that the larvae from

G. scriba resembled Eustr, ignotus, but we have not been able to consult his paper.

Yamaguti (1941, 345) described larvae from a Japanese fish, Rhinogobius similts.

Available evidence has led us to believe that, for the present, the species

occurring as larvae in Southern Australian freshwater and estuarine fish should

be listed under E. gadopsis,

Capillaria strigis n. sp.

Fig. 12

From Ninox novaeseelandiae, Invercargill. One male specimen, 12 mm.

long, with oesophagus 4:7 mm, long, width of body at head ll p, at base of

oesophagus 54 y, and at the widest part of the body 63 w.. The spicules are exceed-

ingly long, the distal ends, which are poorly. chitinised, lying just posterior-to the

oesophagus. There is apparently no bursa-like structure, the posterior end being

simply rounded. >

CAPILLARIA EMBERIZAE Yamaguti

Fig, 11

Both males and females of a species of Capillaria were taken from Emberiza

cityinella from Dunedin. Males about 13-13-5 mm. long, females to 14 mm.

Ratio of oesophageal to post-oesophageal region = 1: 2-4 in both sexes. Breadth

across head 9» in the female, 8 in the male; at base of oesophagus 54m in

female, 45 » in male; at widest part of body 72 in female, 54 in male; across

anal region 30 in female, 36» in male. Anus 16, from posterior end in

female. Egg, 22» by 54. Cuticle at posterior end of male swollen to form

two lateral “alae” 6, long, which at the extremity of the worm are constricted

and give place to a small “bursa” containing two pairs of papillae. Spicule

1:26 mm. long; sheath not spinous.

The specimens differ from Capillaria emberizae Yamaguti 1941 from

Emberiza spp. from Japan in the form of the bursa and the ratio of body parts

in the female, but otherwise agree with it.

Capillaria lepidopodis n. sp.

Fig. 13

A single female worm, of which the posterior extremity is missing, was taken

from Lepidopus caudatus from St. Vincent’s Gulf. The worm is 25-2 mm. long,

the oesophagus 7:1 mm. long, the rest of the body 18-1 mm. at least (worm much

coiled and tip of tail missing), so that the ratio of anterior to posterior parts of

body is about 1:3. The width at the head is 11», at base of oesophagus 54 p, at

widest part 724. The vulva is a simple opening situated just behind oesophagus;

the eggs are 30» x 60 y, their shells marked with fine irregular grooves.

According to the method of identification of Capillaria spp. from fish, devised

by Heinze 1933, this species falls into the group in which females are longer than

10 mm.; this group comprises C. gracilis (Bellingh.), C. fritschi (Trav. 1914),

and C. plerophylli Heinze 1933. Of these it is distinguished from C. pterophylli

and C. gracilis by the shape of the egg, and from C. fritschi by the absence of

papillae on the cuticle.

LITERATURE

Barrp, W. 1861 P.Z.S., 207-208; A.M.N.H., (3), 8, 269-270

Bayvis, H. A. 1929 Discovery Reports, 1, 543-559

Coppotp, T. 5. 1879 Parasites. A Treatise, etc., London

CrAM, E. 1927 U.S. Nat. Mus., Bull. 140

Heinze, K. 1933 Zeitschr. Parasit., 5, 393-406

JAGERSKIOLD, L. 1909 Nova Acta reg. Soc. Sci., Upsal., (4), 2, 1-48

Jounston, T. H. 1912 Proc, Roy. Soc. Qld., 21, 63-91

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M. 1940 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 64,

240-252

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M. 1941 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 65,

110-115; 254-262

Jounston, T, H., and Mawson, P.M. 1943 Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 7, (3),

237-243

Jounston, T. H., and Srmpson, E. R. 1943 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 66,

172-179

Leucxart, R. 1876 Die menschlichen Parasiten, 2

Linstow, O. 1889 Mitt. Zool. Samml. Mus. Naturk., Berlin, 1, (2), 5-28

Ruporrit, C. 1819 Entozoorum synopsis.

YaAmacuTi,'S, 1941 Jap. Journ. Zool., 9, (3), 343-395; 441-480

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE KNOWLEDGE OF THE MICROCOTYLIDAE

THE OF WESTERN AUSTRALIA

By DOROTHEA F. SANDARS, M.Sc., Hackett Student, University of Western Australia

Summary

The measurements (taken from specimens mounted in balsam) are the average for several parasites

where possible, and those of the type specimen are given in brackets. The parasites were fixed in

Kleinenberg's picric acid; acetic acid alum carmine was the commonly used stain, but cochineal

alum carmine was also utilised. 70% alcohol saturated with chlorine gas was used as a destaining

agent with both stains. Borax carmine was also used, followed by weak acid alcohol as the

destaining agent.

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE KNOWLEDGE OF THE MICROCOTYLIDAE

OF WESTERN AUSTRALIA

By DororHea F. Sanpars, M.Sc.,

Hackett Student, University of Western Australia

[Read 11 May 1944]

INTRODUCTION

The following is a list of the hosts and the respective parasites obtained from them:

GERRES OVATUS Waite—Microcoiyle gerres n. sp.

Penrapopus MILIr Bory St. Vine.—Microcotyle pentapodi n. sp.

ScorPis AEQUIPINNIS Richdon.—Microcotyle scorpis n. sp.

HELotes SEXLINEATUS Q. & G—Microcotyle helotes n. sp.

CaARANX GEORGIANUS Cuv, Val.—Gonoplasius carangis n. g., 1. sp.

AGONOSTOMUS FORSTERI Cuv. Val.—Diplasiocotyle johnstoni n.g., n. sp.

The measurements (taken from specimens mounted in balsam) are the

average for several parasites where possible, and those of the type specimen are

given in brackets. The parasites were fixed in Kleinenberg’s picric acid; acetic

acid alum carmine was the commonly used stain, but cochineal alum carmine was

also utilised. 70% alcohol saturated with chlorine gas was used as a destaining

agent with both stains. Borax carmine was also used, followed by weak acid

alcohol as the destaining agent.

Appreciation is expressed for the co-operation of the Government Fisheries

Department, which has been very useful in this work, especially under the present

conditions due to war-time restrictions. The writer would also like to express

thanks to Professor G. E. Nicholls for his help and encouragement; to Miss O.

Goss for guidance, and to Professor T, Harvey Johnston for assistance in prepar-

ing this paper for publication.

Microcotyle gerres n. sp.

(Fig. 1-3)

From the gills of the silverfish, silverbelly or roach, Gerres ovatus, from

Mandurah. The gills of the host species were examined frequently during a period

from the middle of February to the middle of June, 1943. The parasites were not

numerous at any time, nor does there appear to be any period when their occurrence

is more prevalent. The maximum taken from one fish was three. Of 52 fish

examined only 15 had parasites, only one Microcotylid being present in most cases.

M. gerres is a small, elongated form, having a total length 2-43 mm. (2°35)

and a maximum breadth of 0°36 mm. (0°37) across about the middle of the genital

complex. Body tapering slightly towards both ends. Body width across region

of oral sucker 0-14 mm.; across region of penis 0-20 mm. Cotylophore distinctly

demarcated from rest of body; 1-07 mm. (0°98) long, hence about two-fifths of

total body length. Fifty pairs of posterior suckers on cotylophore, varying in

size from anterior to posterior; anterior having width of 0-038 mm. (0-037),

those at about the middle length 0-058 mm. (0°062), and those posteriorly

0-042 mm. (0°050) ; the length in each case being 0°025 mm, (fig. 3).

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68, (1), 28 July 1944

Oral suckers approximately circular, 0-063 mm. diameter, without transverse

septa. Three groups of “sticky” glands near mouth and anterior to oral suckers

(fig. 1). Buccal cavity large; pharynx circular 0-037 mm. diameter; oesophagus

0-125 mm. long with lateral diverticula and dividing just in front of penis, at

0:20 mm. from anterior end of body ; intestinal canals with numerous lateral diver-

ticula and extending 0°63 mm. into cotylophore (fig. 1).

Brain rectangular, at 0°13 mm. from head end; a pair of small nerves pass-

ing forwards from its anterior corners; a pair of longitudinal nerves and a pair

of smaller nerves given off posteriorly (fig. 1).

Sixteen testes, subcircular, average diameter 0°375 mm., occupying inter-

vitelline field 0-63 mm. long, approximately the posterior half of body anterior to

cotylophore; several of most anterior lying beside part of main genital complex.

Vas deferens, wide, running from anterior end of testicular field in an almost

straight course to penis; anterior end of latter 0-187 mm. from anterior end of

body (fig. 1). This Microcotylid is peculiar in that it possesses no genital arma-

ture, there being merely a chitinous penis, which, when extended, has a length of

0°046 mm. (0°037) (fig. 2).

Ovary median, differing from the typical ovary in that it begins on the left

side of the intervitelline field about half-way up the genital complex, and curves

over to the right, the oviduct then passing posteriorly to be joined by the common

vitelline duct. Vitellarium arising 0°24 mm. from anterior end of body, occupying

two lateral fields which join behind testicular field and extend 0°65 mm. (0°63)

into cotylophore. Vitelline ducts arising laterally at unequal distances from

anterior end; left and right ducts leaving vitellarium at 0°96 mm. and 0°88 mm.

respectively from anterior end of worm; common vitelline duct passing posteriorly

for 0-04 mm. to unite with oviduct; genito-intestinal canal passing to the left.

Uterus thin-walled, straight, dorsal, passing forwards to open by pore at anterior

end of penis (fig. 1).

M. gerres appears to be a rather distinct form, bearing perhaps the closest

resemblance to M. sillaginae Woolcock (1936) and M. parasillaginae Sandars

(1944). There are, however, many outstanding differences between these forms,

as shown in the table (measurements in mm.).

Tasie I

Oral

Et Pairs and Suckers Relation of

Total Length of Size of Size of with or Genital | Intestinal

Body Cotylo- Posterior Oral without No. of Lengthof| Atrium | Bifurcation

Length phore Suckers Suckers Septa Testes Penis Armature} to Atrium

M, gerres and 2-43 1.07 50; 0.063 Without 16 +046 Absent Anterior

Ca # Vary.: Diam.

Body Ant..0.038,

length | Mid. 0.058,

Post. 0.042

M. sillaginae .. 4.0 Half- 32; +08 x .04 With 1 +037, Absent Anterior

length -05—.07 plus

or more wide Papilla

M. parasillaginae 2.15 Ca.4 25-27; -08 x -048 With 14 +048, Present Posterior

length Constant No

= 064 Papilla |

Microcotyle pentapodi n. sp.

(Fig. 4-7)

From the gills of the butterfish, Pentapodus milii, from Rockingham. The

gills of several hosts were examined during January 1943, and all were heavily

infected with Microcotylids. Examination from 23 to 26 April 1943 showed the

fish to be infected, 0-5 parasites being obtained from each fish, No systematic

investigation could be carried out, but examinations indicated the Microcotylids

as being more numerous during summer months and decreasing in April.

M. pentapodi is a small, elongated, slender form, 2°06 mm. (2°14) long;

maximum width 0°25 mm. at approximately half-way along the body proper;

body tapering towards both ends; body width 0-2 mm. at level of genital armature ;

Be.

Be TS

cal @

Fig. 1-7—1-3, Microcotyle gerres: 1, whole specimen; 2, penis; 3, skeleton of posterior

sucker. 4-7, Microcotyle pentapodi: 4, whole specimen; 5, genital armature; 6, skeleton of

posterior sucker; 7, egg.

0-16 mm. across oral suckers. Cotylophore sharply demarcated from rest of body,

0°623 mm. (0°617) long, anterior border 0:04 mm. (0-05) wide, 0-023 mm.

(0-016) long (fig. 6).

Oral suckers with transverse septa; width 0:°063 mm. (0-066) ; length

0-052 mm. (0°05). Buccal cavity large, opening anteriorly ; pharynx 0-033 mm.

wide, 0-05 mm. long; ocsophagus passing anteriorly for 0-22 mm., then bifurcat-

ing immediately behind genital sucker, uniting again in cotylophore and extending

into it for 0°25 mm. ; lateral diverticula present (fig. 4).

Fifteen circular testes in intervitelline field; latter approximately one-fifth of

body length, 0°059 mm, (0-066) diameter in middle of testicular field, 0-046 mm.

(0°05) diameter at both ends. Vas deferens thick-walled, wide, passing anteriorly

and medially in a sinuous course to genital atrium 0°24 mm. from head end of

worm. Atrium unusual in being completely surrounded by a large sucker (genital

sucker), 0°125 mm. (0°15) maximum width, 0-1 mm. maxinuni length. Atrial

hooks approximately central in atrium and forming complete circlet, 0-06 mm.

wide, 0-05 mm. long, 0:24 mm. (0°25) from anterior end of body. Two curved

tows of hooks arranged lengthwise occur posteriorly to this. All hooks extremely

small, Atrial cavity with two lateral pockets, diameter approximately 0-025 mm.,

outside the armature of spines (fig. 5).

Median ovary arising near anterior testes and passing forwards to form

enlarged broad curved portion, thence transversely and backwards. Vitellarium

commences 0°35 mm. (0°38) from anterior end of body, uniting behind testicular

field and extending 0-32 mm. (0°28) into cotylophore. Paired vitelline ducts

0-16 mm. long, originating 0-83 mm. from head end, uniting as common vitelline

duct 0-15 mm. long, joined by oviduct; genito-intestinal canal, passing to left.

Uterus thin-walled, straight, opening into genital atrium: between two curved rows

of hooks, posterior to vas deferens. Posteriorly to left of genital pore, 0-3 mm.

from anterior end of worm, a single pore (probably vaginal) opens (fig. 4).

Egg single, oval, with appendage 0-15 mm. at each end, observed in uterus ;

egg length (excluding appendages) 0-2 mm., width 0-05 mm. (fig. 7).

M. pentapodi appears to be related to M. ditrematis, which Yamaguti (1939)

related to M. incisor Linton (1910). It differs from M. ditrematis in the genital

atrium, which, although apparently of a related type in both, shows obvious differ-

ences. Both bear saccular outgrowths; in M/. ditrematis single and armed; in

M, pentapodt, paired and unarmed. It also shows some resemblances in general

structure to the group M. elegans and M. sebastis Goto (1895), M. hiatulae Goto

(1899), M. australiensis MacCallum (1921), M. bassensis Murray (1931),

ABBREVIATIONS

AC, alimentary canal; AGS, anterior glandular structure; ALH, anterior large

hooks; ANC, anterior nerve cord; ANT, anterior; B, brain; BC, buceal cavity: C, cotylo-

phore; Cl’, cilia of Ist region of body of larva; CI’’, cilia of 2nd region of body of larva;

CI’’’, cilia of 3rd region of body of larva: CVD, common vitelline duct; DGS, duct con-

necting glandular structures; DS, dorsal sucker: F, egg: E’, eyespot: EC, excretory

canal; EP, excretory pore; EV, excretory. vesicle: GA, gemtal atrium; GC, genital com-

plex; GD, genital duct, GH, genital hooks; GIC, gcnito-intestinal canal; GP, genital

pockets of atrium; GS, genital sucker; H, hooks; I, intestine: M, mouth (fig. 25-30

miracidium): MB, muscular base; O, ovary; O’, developing ovary; OES, oesophagus;

OS, oral sucker; OSH, hooks of oral sucker; OV, oviduct; P, penis; PGS, posterior

glandular structure; PH, pharynx; PNC, posterior nerve cord; PS, posterior sucker:

RS, receptaculuim seminis; SH, small hooks: SO, shell gland and ootype: SPS, small

pusterior sticker; T, testes: T’, tail: TS, transverse septum; U, uterus; UP, uterine pore;

V, vitellarium; VC, vaginal canal: VD, vas deferens: VITD, vitelline duct; VP, vaginal

pore.

M. temnodontis Sandars (1944). hese vary in structure of the genital atrium.

Other differences shown in the table (measurements im mm.),

TABLE I]

Se a

Oral | Genital ViteHlarium

| Pairs and | Suckers, | Atrium extends

Length ot Size of With or. With or into

Total Catylo- Posterior Without Without No. of Cotylo-

' Length phore Suckers Septa | Sucker | Testes phore

| j

fe eee | 7 fate Resta tiie i. ~j

M. pentapodi | 2606 | 0662 24-25 ; With | With | 15 0.32

| 4x 2028 | :

! i

AM, ditrematis .. | 3.4-4-5 1.2-2.1 39-44 ; With Without 22-35 Almost to

-06-.08 Post. End

i i |

1 | .

AM. tenmodontis .. | 2-72 | 0.72 553 Without | Without 21 0.08

' “G16 x 32 |

M. australicnsis .. 4.0 led Numerous ;/ ? _ Without 25 ?

: |

M.sebastis .. 0. 5-50 1.83 29; With | Without | 40 Nil

+ 068-.128 \

| |

Melegaus .. .. | 4-0 1.3 50: With =| Without | 27 ?

| -04-.063 |

Mf. victoriae rh 4.82 Ca. 1-2 21; ? | With | Without 18-22

| } ?

{ i |

Muhiatulae .. 1.) 355 23; ? Without 15 Nil

{ ? |

Microcotyle scorpis n. sp.

(Fig. 8-10)

From the gills of the sweep, Scorpis aequipinnis, from Safety Bay. In

January 1943, from the gills of the only sweep examined, six Microcotylids were

collected. No further specimens could be obtained, hence no systematic examina-

tion could be made.

M. scorpis is a broad, compact form of total length 2-67 mm. (2°68), maxi-

mum breadth (at level of ovarian curve) 0°66 mm. "Body tapering anteriorly to

0-38 mm. from front of body, then narrowing conspicuously. Body width across

genital armature 0-22 mm.; across oral suckers 0°20 mm. Body not tapering

posteriorly; cotylophore not distinctly separated (fg. 8). Cotylophore of total

length 0°83 mm. (0°81); width across anterior berder 0°63 mm., across renal

border 0-09 mm. Twenty suckers along left border of cotylophore which i

0:63 mm, lang, 34 along right border whieh 4 is 0°94 mm. Tach sucker 0-037 mm.

long, 0-062 mm. (0°05) wide (fig. 10).

Oral suckers, without transverse septa, maximum width 0-07 mm. (0-075),

length 0-062 mm. Mouth aperture at anterior end. Cireular muscular pharynx,

diameter 0-037 mm., leading into oesophagus 0°125 mm. long; latter bifurcating

immediately anterior to region of genital atrium; latter 0°24 mm. from anterior

end of body. Intestinal canals with numerous lateral diverticula and extending

0:5 mm. into cotylophore, but left arm 0-13 mm. longer than right arm (fig. 8).

Anterior portion of both longitudinal excretory ducts run along either side of

body (fg. 8).

Brain complex rectangular, dorsal to oesophagus, at 0°13 mm. from anterior

of body; one pair of nerves passing forwards, another pair backwards (fig. 8).

Testes 32, irregularly shaped, varying in size from 0.112 mm. wide by

0:025 mm. long, to 0-212 mm. wide by 0°05 mm. long, close together, occupying

approximately one-third of total body length posteriorly. Vas deferens thick-

walled, fairly wide, winding anteriorly, opening into ventral genital atrium; latter

0-275 nin. from anterior end of body and with an armature of conical hooks

curving inwards, length 0-012 mm. Genital armature arranged ovally, maximum

width 0-037 mm., maximum length 0-025 mm.

Ovary, maximum length 0°35 mm. median, arising in front of anterior testes,

passing forwards to left, bending to right, curving to pass backwards and then

joined by common vitelline duct. Vitellarium commencing 0°40 mm. from anterior

end of body, occupying both lateral fields, extending 0°44 mm. (0°41) into cotylo-

phore where the two arms join behind the testes. Left vitelline duct arising

0°69 mm. from anterior of body, right 0°56 mm.; left passing 0°38 mm. posteriorly,

right 0-50 mm., before joining to form common vitelline duct with length

0:23 mm.; genito-intestinal canal passing to right. Uterus thin-walled, passing

posteriorly, then curving forwards to genital atrium (fig. 8).

M. scorpis appears to be most closely related to M. seriolae Yamaguti (1939)

and M. reticulata Goto (1895), the most obvious feature in common being the

asymmetry of the cotylophore, whose suckers are in each case more numerous on

the right side. The general anatomy of these forms seems to be similar; that of

M. scorpis most resembling 47. seriolac. Many differences are shown in the table.

TAsre III

| Oral

Total Length of; No.of [Av, Sizeof| Suckers Size of No, and Genital

Body Cotylo- Posterior | Suckers of | with or Oral Form of Atrium

Length : phore Suckers Cotylo- without Suckers Testes Armature

t phore Septa

| J) Adin Liens . lone spate es geri tea 7 "

| i

M.scorpis .. .. | 2.68 0-83 34 right, {0.037.long,} Without /0-062 long, $2, Present

20 left -062 wide x irregular

| 0.07 wide

| H |

M.seviolac .. .. | 4:1-8-5 | 1-78-3.5) Right /0.036-.12 ? 0-060~ | 0-100, Absent

: 45-47, wide -075x | irregular

i | left 39-42 -080-.093 |

: i

M. reticulata ‘ 6-10 Little more Right 42, |/0.075--227; Without ? Numerous, Present

than 4 left 23 wide rounded

Body ?

length |

Microcotyle helotes n. sp.

(Fig. 11-14)

From gills of the trumpeter, Helotes sexlineatus, from Swan River, at Ned-

lands, Rockingham, Safety Bay. During January 1943 the gills of several hosts

were examined and Microcotylids found. From two from Swan River, in mid-

eva:

Ger

Fig. 8-14—8-10, Microcotyle scorpis: 8, whole specimen; 9, genital armature; 10, skeleton

of posterior sucker. 11-14, Microcotyle helotes: 11, whole specimen; 12, genital armature;

13, skeleton of posterior sucker; 14, egg.

March, 1 and 11 parasites respectively were collected. Of 23 fish from Safety

Bay, in early May, two had each one parasite, three had each two.

M. helotes is a medium-sized, elongated form of total length 2°87 mm.

(2°69) ; maximum width (just anterior to commencement of paired vitelline ducts)

0°38 mm. Body tapering anteriorly and posteriorly. Width across. oral suckers

0-14 mm.; across genital atrium 0-2 mm. Cotylophore not distinctly demarcated

from rest of body; 1-02 mm, (0°81) long; with 32 pairs of suckers, each

0-058 mm. (0°037) wide; 0-033 mm. (0-037) long (fig. 13).

Oral suckers, 0-059 mm. (0-052) wide, 0-071 mm. (0-075) long, with trans-

verse septa. Three groups of “sticky” glands anterior to oral suckers (fig. 11).

Buccal cavity opening anteriorly ; pharynx circular, diameter 0-038 mm. Straight

oesophagus passes 1-187 mm. backwards, dividing shortly behind genital armature,

0-31 mm. from the anterior of body. The two longitudinal arms with numerous

diverticula, extending 0°46 mm. into the cotylophore. Brain rectangular, 0-15 mm.

from head end; dorsal to oesophagus; one pair of nerves passing anteriorly, two

pairs posteriorly (fig. 11).

Fourteen irregular testes approximately 0-05 mm. by 0-054 mm, (0-037), in

an intervitelline field 0°625 mm. long, hence one-quarter of body length; most

anterior testes extending forwards, laterally to main genital complex. Genital

armature of numerous minute hooks; of maximum width 0-087 mm. (0-087),

maximum length 0-07 mm. (0°063) situated 0-24 mm. (0-25) from anterior end

at body (fig. 12).

Ovary, maximum length 0°3 mm., passing forwards to left, then swinging to

right by an enlarged region, then passing backwards to become joined by common

vitelline duct. Vitellarium begins 0-34 mm. from anterior of body, occupying both

lateral fields, extending into the cotylophore 0-51 mm. (0°46), uniting behind

testicular field. Paired vitelline ducts arising laterally 1:06 mm. from anterior end

of body, passing posteriorly for 0-06 mm., then joining to form common vitelline

duct, 07175 mm. long; genito-intestinal canal passing to left. Uterus thin-walled,

median (fig. 11). Egg seen in uterus only; anterior appendage over 1 mm.,

posterior 0-06 mm.; body of egg 0°225 mm. long, 0-062 mm. wide (fig. 14).

M. heloies appears to have closest affinities with M. acanthogobii Yamaguti

(1939). In both the body is fusiform, and the cotylophore is not sharply de-

marcated from the rest of the body. In M. acanthogobii it commences at the level

of the posterior testes; in AZ. helotes it begins just anterior to the latter, Testes

of both species are of like shape, and are similarly arranged. Major differences

are tabulated (measurements in mm.).

TABLE TV

_ ae 4 2. —s eee a = = a

Oral {

Size of Suckers {

Total Length of | Pairs of | Suckers of | with or Size of No. of Size of

Body Catyto- Posterior Cotylo- without Pharynx Testes Body

Lengti: phore Suckers phore Septa of Ege

AK elites on 2.87 1.02 32 0-033 x With 0.038 14 0.255 x

0-058 diam. » 0-062

AL. acanthogobii . 1655- | 0.62-1.2 | 20-25 0.08 With |0.030-.048) 7-12 | -0-18-.30

3-05 diam. x { x

+036--054 [0 -066—.075

Gonoplasius carangis. n.g., n. sp.

(Fig. 15-19)

From gills of the skipjack, Caranx georgianus, from North Beach, Rocking-

ham. Vrom 24 fish exammed between mid-February and mid-July 1943, five

parasites were obtained, two from one host, one from each of three others. No

parasites were obtained from Carany caught at Mandurah, Bunbury, Augusta

and Albany.

G. carangis is a very elongated, narrow form of total body length 4°75 mm.;

maximum width of body (anterior to cotylophore) 0-4 mm. in region of genital

complex where ovary curves from one side to other; this width continuing for-

_wards for 0°625 mm., then tapering very gradually both anteriorly and posteriorly ;

width at level of genital armature 0-337 mm.; across oral suckers 0-275 mm.

Cotylophore 0°75 mm. long, approximately one-sixth total body length, sharply

demarcated from rest of body by increase in width. Anterior border of cotylo-

phore 0°525 mm. wide, posterior border 0-037 mm. Cotylophore with unequal

lateral borders; right 0-112 mm. long, bearing 34 small suckers; left 0°56 mm.,

bearing 17 small suckers, each with characteristic framework (fig. 18); constant

length 0°037 mm.; width of anterior suckers 0-062 mm.; middle suckers

0-075 mm.; posterior 0°05 mm, At anterior end of body five conspicuous

glandular structures, four large, one small; of three around buccal cavity two are

large with maximum width 0-125 mm., length 0-037 mm.; most anterior central

glandular structure 0°05 mm. wide, 0°037 mmm. long. Close to oesophagus, at

0-162 mm. from anterior of body, two more glandular structures, left with

maximum width 0°075 mm., length 0-1 mm.; right with maximum width

0-087 mm., length 0-1 mm, From each, running anteriorly, are two ducts; the

inner branches 0:062 mm. from anterior of body, the outside branch in each case

going to one of the large anterior structures and the inner to smaller central

structure. Hach anterior structure has two branches from two posterior groups

(fig. 16).

Laterally and dorsally, 1-01 mm. from anterior of body are two pairs of

structures of unknown function, appearing as apertures with edges set with

minute hooks in a slightly muscular structure (fig. 19). These may be remnants

of dorsal suckers in process of disintegration, since Microcotyle agonostomi,

M. canthari, M. alcedimis, and M. centrodontis have small similarly situated

suckers,

Buccal cavity at extreme anterior end of body, containing oral suckers with

maximum width 0-15 mm., length 0-062 mm., and with transverse scpta. Pharynx

close to oral suckers, length 0-05 mm., width 0-037 mm. Oesophagus unbranched,

total length 0°31 mm. Intestinal bifurcation about middle of genital atrium. Two

longitudinal ducts in lateral fields of body have numerous lateral branches, and

extend into cotylophore, 0°31 mm, on right and 0-15 mm. on left, beyond vitel-

larium, At 0-875 mm. from anterior end of body in mid-ventral line, 0-25 mm.

posterior to genital atrium, is excretory vesicle, a nearly globular structure with

maximum width 0-05 mm., length 0-037 mm. Paired lateral longitudinal ducts

connect with vesicle (fig. 15).

Testes 48, rounded, 0-025-0-05 mm. diameter, occupying about one-fifth of total

body length in an intervitelline field; vasa efferentia clearly seen between many of

the testes; winding vas deferens passing anteriorly centrally; very coiled between

excretory vesicle and genital atrium (fig. 15). Genital atrium with complex arma-

ture on ventral body surface, 0-387 mm. from anterior end of body; armature of

small and large hooks, some set in a muscular base at anterior and posterior ends of

atrium and of varying shapes; small hooks distributed between these; large

anterior hooks 0-037 mm. long; largest posterior hooks 0°025 mm. long; small

hooks in central groups 0-012 mm. Width of anterior part of atrium (with

armature) 0°137 mm.; of middle part 0-075 mm.; of posterior 0-125 mm.;

maximum length of genital atrium with armature 0-237 mm. (fig. 17).

tp fb

Fig. 15-19-—Gonoplasins carangis: 15, whole specimen; :16, anterior of body showing

glandular structures; 17, genital armature; 18, skeleton of one posterior sucker; 19, structure,

probably dorsal suckers.

Conspicuous ovary at anterior end of posterior half of body, beginning imme-

diately anterior to the testicular field, from which it winds to the right and at

2-62 mm. from anterior end of body, then curves to left and passes posteriorly on

right. Ovary, maximum length 0:412 mm., maximum width 0:062 mm. Two

lateral fields of vitellarium commencing 0:587 mm. from anterior end of body,

quite distinct anteriorly and posteriorly ; posteriorly left arm extending 0-235 mm.

into cotylophore; right 0-037 mm. Paired vitelline ducts arising from lateral

fields 2-625 mm. from anterior end of body; base of each with enlargement, pro-

bably vitelline reservoirs; ducts then passing 0-012 mm, posteriorly to unite as

common vitelline duct, 0-187 mm. long and joining oviduct. Genito-intestinal

canal entering right intestinal arm. Uterus Straight, thin-walled, opening

apparently posterior to male pore.

GeNERIc Dtacnosts: Gonoplasius n. g, Microcotylidae—Body very elon-

gated, narrow; symmetrical except for the cotylophore, Latter comparatively

short, sides unequal in length, longer side with a greater number of small suckers.

Genital atrium large, armed with small and large hooks, some of the latter being

embedded in a muscular base. Several groups of large glands associated with

buccal cavity. Excretory system with terminal vesicle, median, dorsal, posterior

to genital atrium.

Gonoplasius bears a very strong resemblance to Microcotyle Beneden and

Hesse, but differs in several features. One of the most conspicuous differences is

the presence in the former of the groups of anterior glandular structures, some

around the buccal cavity and the rest near the oesophagus. Gonoplasius has a

completely different and much more elaborate genital armature than that of

Microcotyle. Goto (1897) stated regarding the excretory system, “in Microcotyle

there is no distinct terminal sac, the vessel presenting just a perceptible enlarge-

ment before it opens to the exterior.” Also in Microcotyle the excretory opening

appears to be always on the same level as the genital armature or anterior to it

In Gonoplasius there is a very conspicuous excretory vesicle posterior to the genital

atrium, opening medially and dorsally.

Diplasiocotyle johnstoni n. g., n. sp.

(Fig. 20)

From gills of the yellow-eyed mullet or pilchard, Agonostomus forsteri, from

Mandurah and Bunbury. From the middle of February to the middle of August

1943, gills of 146 of these fish were examined, 185 parasites being obtained, there

being usually only one parasite per fish until the middle of May. After that date

they were very numerous, especially in June, when on one occasion 21 parasites

were taken from one fish; the average at that period being three parasites per fish.

D, johnstoni is a large form, of total length 5-96 mm. (6-47) ; maximum body

with 0°83 mm. (0-937) across region anterior to testicular field; body tapering

anteriorly and posteriorly ; body width across oral suckers 0-25 mm.; across genital

atrium 0°287 mm. Cotylophore 1:77 mm. (1-94) long, hence occupying approxi-

mately one-third total body length; anterior margin 1:25 mm. long, posterior

margin 0-562 mm. Seven large long-stalked suckers along each margin of

cotylophore; one pair of minute suckers at extreme posterior end of cotylophore.

Former of varying sizes; most. anterior pair 0-425 mm. wide, 0-312 mm. long;

middle pair 0-437 mm. wide, 0-312 mm, long; penultimate pair 0°375 mm.

wide, 0-25 mm. long; last pair 0-25 mm. wide, 0-187 mm. long. All suckers with

characteristic skeleton of a median hollow piece, with solid piece attached at one

end to form U-shape; on either side two more pieces, one arm of which moves in

the other which is slightly hollow (fig. 22). The pair of minute stckers

0°062 mm. wide, 0-044 mm. (0-05) long, have skeletons much as above, except

that the lateral pieces are comparatively longer (fig. 23). A pair of small, simple,

dorsal, lateral suckers of 0-075 mm. diameter at 1-125 mm. from anterior side

of body.

Fig. 20-32—JDiplasiocotyle johnstoni: 20, whole specimen; 21, genital armature; 22,

skeleton of large posterior sucker; 23, skeleton of small posterior sucker; 24, egg; 25 and 26,

egg showing developing miracidium; 27, egg after miracidium has escaped; 28 and 2),

miracidium: 30, miracidium elongated (28, 29, 30 to same scale = °1 mm.) ; 31, very immature

specimen ; 32. immature specimen (scale = +2 mm.).

Buccal cavity with subterminal aperture, with pair of conspicuous oral

suckers, without septa, 0-137 mm. wide, 0°109 mm. (0°125) long, with inner

margins set with small hooks. Pharynx, close to oral suckers, diameter 0-10 min.

Oesophagus 0-375 mm. long with numerous lateral diverticula. Intestinal bifurca-

tion dorsal to genital atrium; two main longitudinal ducts along each side of body

with numerous lateral diverticula, uniting behind testicular field; in cotylophore

forming common canal 0-875 mm. long. Alimentary canal extending total distance

of 1624 mm. into cotylophore.

Twenty-two sub-quadrangular testes, all closely applied together in an inter-

vitelline field, occupying approximately one-quarter total body length. Testes

varying from 0°10 to 0°212 mm, in width, 0-075 to 0-25 mm. in length. Vas

deferens passes anteriorly to genital atrium (fig. 20). Genital atrium 0-525 mm.

from anterior end of body, armed with hooks constantly 0-013 mm. long; one

central circlet of 15 hooks and on either side of this a semi-circle each with nine

and seven hooks respectively (fig, 21).

Conspicuous ovary, shaped like mark of interrogation (viewed dorsally ),

arising anterior to testicular field towards left of body; maximum width

0-137 mm.; maximum length 0°562 mm.; oviduct passing diagonally to right.

Vitellarium occupying both lateral fields, beginning 1-022 mm. (0-687) from

anterior end of body. Vitelline fields distinct anteriorly, joining posteriorly to

testicular field and passing 1503 mm, (1-562) into cotylophore. Paired vitelline

ducts commencing 1°125 mm. from anterior end of body in same region as dorsal

suckers and passing 1-06 mm. posteriorly to unite as common vitelline duct,

0°312 mm. long, which joins oviduct. Genito-intestinal canal joining right arm of

alimentary canal. Uterus passing posteriorly and then curving forwards as a thin-

walled duct to open into atrium. Often as many as six eggs at one time seen in

uterus. Eggs oval, with long hooked tail at end opposite to operculum, Egg

‘2 mm. wide, 0-575 mm. long, including tail 0-038 mm. long; hook 0-013 mm. long,

0-10 mm. wide (fig. 24).

GENERIC DrAcnosis: Diplasiocotyle n.g. Microcotylidae — Body large,

symmetrical; mouth aperture subterminal; buccal cavity with two oral suckers.

Mid-ventral genital atrium armed with equal-sized small hooks. Conspicuous

cotylophore without hooks but bearing several pairs of large suckers with typical

skeletal support ; also one pair of small suckers at posterior extremity,

Diplasiocotyle is assigned to the Microcotylidae, since it agrees with known

members in its general anatomical structure. It probably approaches Microcotyle

most closely, but differs in the cotylophore, which in the latter genus has numerous

small suckers, all of approximately the same size, whereas Diplasiocotyle bears

suckers of two widely different sizes but the majority are extremely large.

Skeletal structures of these suckers differ from the type found in Microcotyle.

The name of Professor T. Harvey Johnston is associated with the species,

SEVERAL STAGES IN THE Lire History or DIeLAstocoryLe JOHNSTONI

A number of specimens of D. johnstoni were taken from their host and placed

in some small glass dishes containing water from the Swan River at Crawley,

which was approximately of the same salinity as sea water. After periods varying

from one to several hours, these forms which had been quite inert, recovered and

became active. A few of these specimens produced some eggs, laying an average

of 25 each, although some produced as many as 60, which, when laid, sank to the

bottom of the dish. The parasites lived usually for a period of three days, but

some remained alive for four days, during which they were quite active.

In order to hatch the eggs it was found necessary to keep them in sterilized

river water at a constant temperature and in an enclosed vessel to prevent evapora-

tion and to ensure a constant salinity. A larval form, almost ready to be hatched,

moved quite actively and rotated within the egg by means of cilia (fig, 26 and 27).

The operculum was eventually forced open by the movement of the miracidium

which, after it had liberated itself, immediately began to swim about quite rapidly

(fig. 27). The opening of the operculum required from one to two hours. The

eggs hatched within 19 days after having been laid, producing larvae with bodies

constricted into three definite regions, each covered with cilia. A cotylophore

region is distinctly constricted and bears three pairs of minute hooks set in small

projections, as well as two pairs of large median hooks 0-037 mm. long, one pair

of which can be protruded from the posterior end of the body. This miracidium has

a maximum length of 0-186 mm, including 0-062 mm. occupied by the cotylophore

and a maximum width of 0-062 mm. when at its normal length. The eye-spots

then are situated 0°062 mm. from the anterior extremity of the body (fig. 28 and

29). The body can be extended considerably, reaching two or three times its

normal length (fig. 30). The miracidia move very rapidly by a rotating move-

ment and are usually most numerous round the edges of the container. These

larvae continue their movements for two days, at the end of which time their

activities are considerably lessened and death soon follows, if the required host

has not been reached.

The youngest parasite form (fig. 31) recovered from the gills of the host has

a maximum length of only 0°687 mm. ; maximum with 0°137 mm. at approximately

the anterior end of the genital complex.

The developing cotylophore occupies 0-312 mm. of the total body length and

bears altogether four pairs of suckers and two developing suckers. Three pairs

of these suckers, those centrally situated are large, those of the middle pair being

0-125 mm. wide, 0-05 mm. long. Posterior to these three pairs is another pair of

much smaller suckers, 0°062 mm. wide, 0-05 mm. long. The right side of the

cotylophore bears both at its anterior and its posterior ends a small developing

sucker, The anterior one of these is 0-062 mm. wide, 0-037 mm. long; while the

most posterior one is 0-025 mm. wide, 0-037 mm. long.

The small paired oral suckers have a diameter of 0-037 mm.; no hooks are

apparent along the edges. At this stage the genital organs have not become

differentiated, though a genital mass is present, occupying the region of the future

ovary and testes. This mass has a maximum width of 0°075 mm. and a maximum

length of 0°25 mm.

Another immature, but later and more developed stage (fig. 32) in the life

history was also obtained from the gills of Agonostomus forsteri. Total body

length of parasite 1-375 mm. and the maximum width of the body anterior to the

cotylophore 0-175 mm., occurring across the middle of the testicular field. The

cotylophore, 0°525 mm. long, occupies approximately two-fifths of total body

length and measures 0°237 mm. across its anterior border, while the width across

its posterior border is 0°162 mm. It bears three pairs of large suckers; the largest

is the central pair with a maximum width of 0-137 mm. and a maximum length of

0-112 mm. The most posterior pair have each a maximum width of 0-075 mm.

and maximum length of 0°05 mm. Anteriorly to these four pairs of suckers is

another pair, 0-087 mm. wide and 0-075 mm, long. The most anterior pair

of suckers are in the process of developing, and the larger of these has a maximum

width of 0-075 mm. and a length of 0037 mm.

The oral suckers in the buccal cavity have acquired very small hooks along

their edges; each sucker has a maximum width of 0-075 mm. and a maximum

length of 0-05 mm. The buccal cavity leads into the pharynx, which is very close to

the oral suckers and has a diameter of 0°05 mm. The oesophagus has lateral

branches and bifurcates at 0°25 mm. from the anterior end of the body.

The pair of longitudinal arms of the alimentary canal pass backwards and

unite immediately behind the testicular field.

By this stage the genital complex has advanced sufficiently for the testes to

have become differentiated and individual follicles can be recognised. Each

follicle has an average diameter of 0°012 mm. The whole testicular field is

0:25 mm. long. The ovary has not yet become specialised. Leading from the

held occupied by the genital organs is a duct, probably the developing vas deferens,

which terminates at 0-312 mm. from the anterior end of the body, There are no

signs of any genital armature.

LITERATURE

Braun, M. 1879-1893 in Bronn, Klassen u. Ordnungen des Tierreichs, Bd. 4,

Abt. i.a., Mionelminthes .

Brown, E. M. 1929 Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 67-83

Goro, 5. 1894 Journ. Coll. Sci., Tokyo, 8, 1-273

Goto, 5S. 1899 Journ. Coll. Sci., Tokyo, 12, 263-295

Linton, E. 1940 Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 88, 1-172

MacCatium, G. A. 1921 Zoologica, 1, (6), 135-284

Murray, F, V. 1931 Parasitology, 23, 492-506

Parowa, C., and Perucia, A. 1890 Atti Soc. Ligust. di Sci. Nat. Geogr., Genova,

1, Fasc. III, 59-70

SAnpars, D. F. 1944 Journ. Roy. Soc. Western Australia, 29 (in press)

Wootcock, V. 1936 Parasitology, 28, 79-91

¥Amacuty, S. 1933-1934 Jap. Journ. Zool., 5, 249-541

Yamacutr, S. 1938 Jap. Journ. Zool., 8, (1), 15-74

Yamacuti, S. 1939 Jap. Journ. Zool., 9, (1)

NOTES ON AND ADDITIONS TO THE TROMBICULINAE AND

LEEUWENHOEKITINAE (ACARINA) OF AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA

By H. WOMERSLEY, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., Entomologist, South Australian Museum

Summary

Since the publication of the preliminary monograph on the "Trombiculinae of the Austro-Malayan

and Oriental Regions” by Womersley and Heaslip (Trans. Ray. SOC. S. Aust., 67, (1). 68-142,

1943) a large number of larvae and a few adults have been received from various localities in

Australia and New Guinea. Some of these specimens represent new species, which are described

and figured in this contribution.

NOTES ON AND ADDITIONS TO THE TROMBICULINAE AND

LEEUWENHOEKIINAE (ACARINA) OF AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA

By H. Womerstey, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., Entomologist, South Australian Museum

[Read 11 May 1944]

Since the publication of the preliminary monograph on the “Trombiculinae

of the Austro-Malayan and Oriental Regions” by Womersley and Heaslip (Trans.

Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 68-142, 1943) a large number of larvae and a few

adults have been received from various localities in Australia and New Guinea.

Some of these specimens represent new species, which are described and figured in

this contribution.

In the above cited paper, on p. 71, it was also suggested that, when sufficient

material was available for study, it would be useful taxonomically, to study the

“Standard Data” statistically. The additional material now in hand has enabled

me to do this for certain species, and in most cases it is possible to get some idea

of the theoretical possible range of variation in the different characters used. In

1943, stress was laid firstly on the number and arrangement of the dorsal setae,

and secondly on the Standard Data. The statistical studies show that where the

arrangement and number of dorsal setae are close in two species, there are usually

significant differences in the statistics of the Standard Data. Further, in certain

species it is revealed that there are slight but statistically significant differences in

a few or many characters of the same species from different localities. This is of

much importance and, as indicating geographical races or variations, may throw

some light on the occurrence or not of “scrub-typhus” in different areas.

The statistical calculations have been based on Simpson and Roe’s “Quantita-

tive Zoology” and the statistics employed are: (1) Mean, (2) Standard Deviation,

(3) Theoretical Range as expressed by M + 3c, and (4) the Coefficient of

Variation.

Closely allied species and different populations of the same species have been

compared by calculating the Standard Deviation (Error) of the Difference of

Means, using the formula

= mt

My, , ™

= + 92

ad a/ N. OM, N*M,

2 1

and regarding a value of d/og>2 as a positive and significant difference.‘))

In the above cited 1943 paper, all the specimens of Leeuwenhoekia then avail-

able were referred to the one species, L. australiensis Hirst. With fresh and

additional material now before me, I have found that three species are repre-

sented, while three other species are also described. The genus is thus represented

in Australia and New Guinea by six species, five of which are new. While studying

this material, especially fresh mounts, it was! found that the genus differs from all

other genera of the Trombiculinae in possessing a pair of true stigmata from which

tracheal tubes traverse the body. These stigmata are situated one on each side,

between the base of the gnathosoma and the first coxae. The atrium itself is not so

well chitinised as the so-called “‘ventral stigma” or “urstigma”’ which 1s present in

all larval Trombidiidae between the first and second coxae, and from which no

©) d= Difference of Means.

Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 68, (1), 28 July 1944

The presence of such an important feature in the genus Leeuwenhoekia

necessitates the separation of the genus from the rest of the Trombiculinae

(except possibly Hannemannia) as a new subfamily, the Leeuwenhoekiinae.

The genus Hannemannia in the structure of the dorsal scutum, with its paired AM,

but lacking the median anterior process, is possibly closely related and, if shown

to possess true stigmata, should be placed in the new subfamily. No such stigmata

have, however, been figured for any species, and the genus is so far unknown

from Australia or New Guinea.

in addition two insufficiently described species, Schéngastia salmi Oudms.

1922 from Java and Schéngastiella disparunguis Oudms. 1929 also from Java,

are discussed.

Subfam. TROMBICULINAE s. str.

Genus Trompicuta Berl. 1905

Acari nuovi; Manipl. IV, 155, in Redia II, fase. 2, 1905.

Trombicula translucens n. sp.

Fig, 1, A-E

Description—Adult @. Colour in life a translucent white with the body con-

tents showing through as a dark mass. Length 850, width across propodosoma

425 », across hysterosoma 510». Eyes absent. Crista 104» long, with triangular

posterior sensillary area, with paired fine ciliated sensillae 50 » apart at bases and

HAD AS

Sen

Fig. 1 Trombicula translucens ».sp. Adult: A, dorsal; B, crista, C, front tarsus

and metatarsus; D, posterior dorsal seta, FE, anterior dorsal seta.

8&4

75 long. Body clothed with strongly ciliated setae, those on the propodosoma

short, 13 «; on hysterosoma anteriorly 13 », posteriorly to 65 » long, and appear-

ing as a characteristic fringe. Legs rather short, anterior the longest; front tarsi

- 110 » long by 45 » wide, metatarsi 65 » long.

Locahiiy—Two adult females from moss from Mount Arden, South Aus-

tralia, October 1943 (H. M. Cooper).

Remarks—This species, by the key (loc. cit. 1943, 48) to the adults and

urymphs, will fall into the akamushi group. All of this group, however, are from

Japan and are all said to be reddish in colour. The posterior fringe of long setac

seems to be rather characteristic,

Trombicula scincoides n. sp.

Fig. 2, A-C

Deseription—Larvae. Colour in life a light reddish-yellow. Shape oval.

Length to 550», width to 340, (moderately engorged). Dorsal scutum with

Fig. 2 Trombicula scincoides n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C, scutum x 500.

transverse rows of punctuations, shaped as in figure and with the following

Standard Data in microns, derived from 12 specimens.

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW -) - &89+140°85 2:95 +0°60 80-3-97°9 86°5-93-0 3°3

PW -_ - 106°8-0°76 2°65 40°54 98-9-114°-7. 103-0-111:0 2-5

SB - = 47-540°30 1:10+0-22 44-2-50°8 46:0-50°0 2°3

SD - - 46°240°30 0-94 +0:20 43-4—49-0 45-0-48:0 2:0

A-P - - 30°14+0°30 0-°99+0-21 27°1-33-1 29-0-32°0 3°3

AM - - 35:54+0:42 1-354+0°32 31°5-39°5 33-0-38°0 3°8

AL - - 38:5+40°30 0-99 +0-21 35°5-41°5 37°0-40°0 2°5

PL - - 44-8+0°52 1-80 +0°37 39°4—50°2 43-0-48-0 4-0

Sens. - - 55°740°48 1-60 40°34 50-9-60-5 51-0-58-0 2:9

Sens)

120 60

118 ‘ 50 [> oo

; AL

AM +

100 40 7

AW :

AP {

90 30

80 20

Graphs showing the Statistics of the Standard Data of larval

Trombicula scincoides n. sp.

PSB is slightly longer than ASB.

edge of scutum.

fairly stout and straight with serrations rather than ciltations.

(Measurements in microns.)

Fyes 2--+ 2, about one diameter fron

Mandibles and palpi normal.

Dorsal setae arranged 2.6.6.4.2,

Legs:

1 240 ys,

{I 260», III 200,; all tarsi with paired claws and longer median claw-like

empodium, I and II with the usual dorsal rod-like seta. All coxae unisetose with

a long slender finely ciliated seta; a pair of such setae between coxae I and between

coxae III; thereafter ventral setae arranged 6.2.4.2., the posterior two rows

stronger and more like the dorsal setae.

Locality and Host—A number of specimens from the axillae of a scink,

Lygosoma (Liolepisma) bicartnatus (MacL. 1877) from New Guinea, October 1

1943 (R. N. McCulloch), host 7d. by Mr. J. R. Kinghorn, Australian Museum,

Sydney. <A single specimen, collected on boots, Buna, N.G., 27 August 1943

(CR. N. McC.).

Remarks—tin the arrangement of the DS this species belongs to the ainor

group, but comes nearest to wichmanni Oudms. in the shape of the dorsal scutum,

which is shorter and wider in the new species. The ratio of PW/SD = 2:31 in

semcoides and 1°85 in wichmanni. The DS are not so tapering, nor so finely

ciliated as in mtnor and its allies.

Trombicula obscura n. sp.

Fig. 3, A-C

Description—Larvae. Shape oval. Length to 300 p, width to 150%. Dorsal

scutum as figured and with the following Standard Data for the two specimens

Fig. 3. Trombicula obscura n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal, B, ventral; C, sctum x 500.

measured: AW 65, 68, PW 79, 79, SB 32, 32, ASB 29, 26, PSB 14, 18, A-P 32,

32, AM 57, 58, AL 43, 45, PL 70, 72, Sens. 60. 60. Dorsal setae robust and

strongly ciliated, arranged 2.8.8.8.6.4.2. Eyes 2-+ 2. Mandibles and palpi normal.

Legs: I 255, I] 205 yp, Il 250,; tarsi 1 and II with the usual rod-like seta.

All coxae unisetose; a pair of setae between coxae I and between coxae III, there-

after the ventral setae are arranged approximately 4.4.6.4.4.4.2, those posterior of

the anal opening being stronger and similar to dorsal setae.

Locality and Hosts—Type and three paratypes (only two measured) from

the ear of a rat at Milne Bay, New Guinea, August 1943 (A. L. A.), along with

numerous T, deliensis Walch, and rather fewer Schéngastia blestowei Gunther and

Neoschongastia impar Gunther.

Remarks—Somewhat near to T. deliensis Walch but differing in the number

and arrangement of the dorsal setae.

Since drawing up the above description a number of other specimens from

Buna, New Guinea, collected from rats, January 1944 (Maj. Hicks) have come

to hand. Of these, 10 specimens have been measured, giving the following

Standard Data:

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - - 68:°3+40°88 2°10+0°47 62:0-74-6 65°0-72:0 30

PW -) - 78°8+0°83 1-99+0:44 728-848 76°0-82-0 2°5

SB -) - 32°6+0°49 1°564+0°35 27°9-37°3 30°0-36°0 48

SD - - 41:140°85 2°70+0°60 33-0-49°2 38 0-46-0 6°6

A-P - - 27-440-61 1:9640°61 21-5-33°3 25°0-29:°0 771

AM -) - 52:24+0°82 2°334+0°58 45°2-59°2 50°0-56-0 4-5

AL - - 36°940°55 1-6640°39 31:9-41°9 36:'0-440 4-5

PL - - 56°941:04 3°3040°74 47-0-66°8 54°0+-65°0 48

Sens. - - 62°64+0°89 2°82 40°63 54-1-71-1 57-0-68°0 45

From the above it is seen that the specimens from the two localities agree

except in the AL and PL values which are ‘significantly different, but this is not

sufficient to regard them as more than different populations of the one species.

Trombicula kohlsi n. sp.

Fig. 4, A-E

Description—Larvae. Shape subrotund. Length (excluding gnathosoma)

216», width in line of coxae ITI, 180. Dorsal scutum very large and wide,

occupying almost all of the anterior width of dorsum, as figured. The Standard

Data from four specimens are as follows:

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - 110-25 —1-98 3°9641°4 98:35-122°15 104:0-115'0 3:6

PW - - 125°541-09 2°1840°77 =119°0-132°0 122°0-128:0 = =1-+72

SB - - 62°0+40°61 1°73 40°43 56-8-67-2 61:0-65:0 2-4

SD - 66°0 No variation recorded

A-P - - 36°75+0°65 1-304+0°45 32°85-40°65 36°0-39-0 3:5

AM -. - 46:254+0°65 1°304+0°45 42°35-50°15 44:0-47-0 28

AL 2g 47-0 No variation recorded

PL H+ 58-0 No variation recorded

Sens. - - 61:0 No variation recorded

Dorsal scutum pitied in transverse rows, setae thick, blunt-ended and strongly

ciliated. Eyes 2-+2. Mandibles and palpi normal. Chelicerae as figured.

Dorsal setae thick, apically blunt and strongly ciliated, arranged 2.6.6.4.2.2. Legs

relatively long, 1 324 w, 111288 », II 324»; tarsi | and II with long stout sensory

rod as figured; tibiae I and II dorsally with a similar but shorter rod and another

tod which is pointed; tarsi with stout paired claws and a longer, more slender

empodium. Venter: gnathosoma with transverse lines of pits and a pair of long

Fig. 4 Trombicula kohlsi n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C, scutum x 500;

D, chelicera; E, tarsus and metatarsus TI.

ciliated setac; all coxae unisetose; a pair of long ciliated setae between coxae I

and between coxae II], and thereafter the setae are arranged 4.4.2, these are

tapering and not so thickly ciliated as the dorsal setae; all coxac with lines of pits

but the cuticle otherwise striated. Anus at extreme end of venter. ,

Locality—A small number of specimens collected on shoes from amongst

Kunai grass, Buna area, New Guinea, November 1943 (G. M. Kohls).

Remarks—In the DS this species belongs to the minor group, but differs con-

spicuously in the large and wide dorsal scutum, which would place it at the end

of the key (loc. cit., 75) to the larvae of this genus, and in caption 28, together

with sambont Wom. and macropus Wom.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 83, 1943.

TROMBICULA WALCHI Wom. and Heasp. 1943

This species occurs commonly in parts of New Guinea along with the follow-

ing species, T. fletcheri W. and H.

ventral setae 4.6.4.4.2.

Beside the type and paratype, 16 specimens from the Buna and Abidari areas

of New Guinea have been examined and the following statistics of the Standard

Data calculated,

The DS are arranged 2.8.6.6.4.2 and the

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW 60°5+0°36 1°544+0°26 55°9-65'1 58°0-65:°0 2°5

PW 68°2+40°55 2°32+0°39 61+2-75-°2 65:°0-75-0 3-4

SB 28°65 40°23 1-00+0°16 25°6-31°6 26:0-30:0 3°5

SD 38°5 40°68 2°894+0°48 29°8-47-2 33-0-43°0 7+5

A-B 26°7 40°62 2°65 +0°46 18-8-34-6 25:0-32:0 9-9

AM 43-1+40-86 3:54+0°60 32°5-53°7 40-0-52:0 8-2

AL 35:0+0°36 1°53+0°25 31-0-40°2 32°0-39°0 4:3

PL 42-440°96 4:07 + 0-68 30°2-54°6 40:0-54-0 9-6

Sens. 60°3 40°65 2°05 + 0°46 54-1-66°4 56-0-65°0 3:4

Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 86, 1943.

TROMBICULA FLETCHERT Wom, and Heasp. 1943

The DS in this species are arranged 2.10.8.6.4.2 to 2.10.8.8.6.4.2, ie., 32-38

as compared with only 28 in T. walcht,

8.8.8.6.4.4.2.

The ventral setae are arranged ca.

Of this species, which occurs along with the preceding, 13 specimens have

been carefully measured, and the statistics for the Standard Data estimated as

follows:

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW 67°8+0°79 2°87 +0°56 59°2-76°4 62:0-72°0 4:

PW 77°2+0°65 2-29 +0°45 70°4-83:°0 73-0-79:-0 2:9

SB 32°140-41 1:-49+0°28 27°6-36°6 30°O-36°0 4:6

SD 40°2+0°76 2°7640°54 31°9-48°5 34-0-44-0 6:8

A-P 28°3+0-58 2:09+40°41 22:0-34°6 25°0-32-0 7-4

AM 52°0+0-89 3:08 +0°63 42-8-61°2 45-0-56'0 5-9

AL 37°5+0°57 1:98 +0-40 31°6-43°0 35-0-40°0 5°3

PL 51°141-24 4-48 +0°88 37°7-64°5 43-0-57-0 8-8

Sens. 64°440°57 1:80+0°-40 59:0-69°8 62°0-68 0 2°8

Remarks—aA calculation of the Standard Error of the Difference of Means

of the populations of this and the preceding specics shows clearly that the two

species are distinct and that the two groups cannot belong to the same population.

The values of d/oq for all the items AW, PW, SR, AM, AL, PL, and Sens. are

>2, but SD and A-P both show an insignificant value of <2:0.

The statistical evidence from the Standard Data therefore confirms the

separation of the two species based on the DS.

TROMBICULA DELIENSIS Walch 1923

Kitasato Arch Exper. Med., 5, (3,) 63, 1923; Tr. 5th Bien. Congr. Far East.

Assoc. Trop. Med., Singapore, 1923 (publ. 1924).

Trombicula vanderghinstei Gunther 1940, Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 65, (3-4), 252.

Trombicula deliensis Wom, and Heasp. 1943, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 87.

This is one of the most abundant species both in New Guinea and in Queens-

land, It was originally described from Sumatra, and Mehta’s record (1937) of

“T deliensis” as associated with scrub typhus in the Simla Hills may be correct.

From information available from both Queensland and New Guinea this

species is probably one of the few which secm, so far, to he somewhat more

definitely associated with scrub typhus in those areas.

Morphologically the species is well separated by the DS being 2.8.6.6.4.2, and

by the “Standard Data.” Since the original “Standard Data” was published, collec-

tions have been received from the Buna and Milne Bay area of New Guinea.

These collections, together with the original lot from Cairns, Queensland, and

the small lot from Bulolo, New Guinea, described by Gunther as vanderghinstei,

have been studied statistically and separately. The difference between the various

pairs of populations have been tested for significance by taking the value of d/o,

The Standard Data for the individual populations are as follows:

Cairns—Number of specimens = 20.

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - - 63:15+0°50 2°2440°35 56°4-69°8 60°0-67°0 3:

PW -) - 76°9540°75 3°38 40°53 66°8-87-0 70°0-82:°0 4-4

SB - = 29:°9+40°34 1°53 40-24 25°3-34°5 26°0-32-0 5-1

SD - - 37°24+0°43 1°9440-30 31°4-43-0 35:0-41-0 5:2

A-P - - 28'4+0°28 1-28 +0°20 24-6-32°2 27°0-30:0 4:5

AM - - 55:94+0-49 2°15+40°34 49°4-62°3 52:0-60-0 3°8

AL - - 43:6+0:49 2°20+0°35 37-0-50°2 40-0-48-0 5:0

PL - - 62°640°56 2°52+40-40 55-1-70°1 57:0-67°0 4-0

Sens. - - 62°8+0°52 2°09 40°37 56°5-69°1 60°0-65-0 3:3

Bulolo—Number of specimens = 4.

Standard Theoretical Observed = Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - - 65°0+0°47 0°82 40°33 62°6-67°4 64-0-66:0 1-25

PW - - 74:°041-24 2716+0°81 67°5—~80°5 71:0-76:0 29

SB - - 29°3+0:98 1-70+0°69 24:°2-34°4 27°0-31-0 5:8

SD - - 39°7-—1:26 2°184+0°89 33°2-46°2 36°0-40:0 5°5

A-P - - 27:5+0°75 1°50+40°53 23°0-32-0 26°0-30°0 5-4

AM - - 54:241-82 3°6341-28 43-3-65°2 50-0-60-0 6:7

AL - - 42:7-0°25 O-5140°18 41°25-44:25 42:0-43-0 1:2

PL - - 61°7-0°74 1:-4840°52 57°25-66°25 60°0-64:0 2-4

Sens. - - 65:0 No variation recorded

Milne Bay—Number of specimens = 22.

Standard Theoretical Observed = Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - - 67°240°57 2°69 +0°40 59°2-75°2 61-0-72-0 4:0

PW - - 84:241:°32 6:204+0°93 65°6-102°8 =72:0-93-0 7°3

SB - - 32:2+0°43 2°02 +0°30 26°2-38-2 29-0-36-0 6:2

SD - - 40°0+0°41 1:9440°29 34:2-45°8 39-0-44-0 4-8

A-P - - 30°440°25 1:13 +0°18 27°033°8 29-0-32-0 3°7

AM - - 52°840°48 2°25 40°34 46:0-59°6 47°0-57°0 4:2

AL - - 42:340°31 1-45+0°22 38°0-46'6 40°0-45-0 3°4

PL - - 58:0+0°63 2°95 +0°44 49-0-67°0 50-0-65-0 5:0

Sens. - - 63°04+0°61 2:54 40°44 55-4-70°6 61-0-68-0 4-0

Buna—Number of specimens = 7.

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff, of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - 70°440°69 1°84+40°49 64°9-75-9 68-0-72:°0 2°6

PW - 83°741-07 2°86+0°76 75°1-92°3 79°0-86°0 3°4

SB - 32:8+0°91 2:41 +0°64 25-6-40-0 29-0-36-0 7°3

SD - 41°85+41-30 3°3540°89 31°8-51°8 39-0-47-0 8:0

A-P ~ 30°341:04 2°76 40°74 22:°0-38-6 25-0-32-0 9-1

AM - 67:°6+40-96 2°554+0°68 60-0-75-2 65-0-72-0 38

AL - 55°340°56 1°48 +0-40 50-8-59°8 54-0-57°0 27

PL - 86°441°47 3°90 + 1-04 74°7-98:1 83-0-94°0 45

Sens. - 69°7+1-30 3°454+0°92 59°35-80-0 62°0-72°0 5-0

The significance of the differences between these populations, taking a value of

d>2e¢4as being positively significant, is shown in the following table.

Table of Significance of Four Populations of T. deliensis

AW PW SB SD A-P AM AL PL Sens.

Cairns-Buna_ - OF te + + 42 9b + +

Cairns-Milne Bay f | fH GE He at

Cairns-Bulolo - 5 ees eee eo eS, ae

Buna-Milne Bay a oe Lan 2S ss gs t+ ae

Buna-Bulolo - - + ~~ ae $+ +} bog

Milne Bay-Bulolo a BL : Ag te aie Ot

It is seen that while the Cairns population shows a significant difference from,

and might conceivably be separated from those of Buna and Milne Bay, yet they

are linked together by the Bulolo population. T. deliensis is, then, rather a widely

variable species, and for specific identification the range of variation of the

Standard Data as given by the four above populations combined must be taken

into account. It is also to be noticed that the statistics for AM, AL and PL of

the Buna populations are markedly higher than for the other populations, and this

may indicate a tendency for a genetical separation in this locality. The. statistics

of the “Standard Data for the combined populations are as follows:

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - 65-940-°50 3°58 40°35 55°2-76'6 60:0-72-0 5-4

PW - &0°340°80 5°77 +0°57 63°0-97°6 70:°0-93-0 7°2

SB - 31:°340°31 2°28+0°22 24-5-38°1 26:°0-36'0 7°3

SD - 39-040-37 2°67 40°26 31:1-47-1 35-0-47°0 68

A-P - 29°:440°26 1°93+0°19 23°6-35-2 25°0-32°0 6°5

AM - 56°04+0°74 5-30+0°52 40-0-72-0 47-0-72:0 9°5

AL - 44:040°63 4°574+0-44 30°7-58°3 40-0-57°0 10:0

PL - 63°341-20 8°7840°85 37:0-89-6 50-0-94-0 5-4

Sens - 64°240°52 3°48 40°37 53°7-74°7 60-0-72-0 5-4

The acconipanying graphs of the parameters for each particular character of the

different populations give a more visual picture of the variations within the species.

Each measurement, e.g., AW, PW, etc., in microns is shown separately for

the four populations in the order from left to right of Cairns, Bulolo, Milne Bay

and Buna. The Means for each are linked together, and to the right again is a

graph showing the statistics considering the four populations as one. The statistics

shown.are: Mean +3o,y, theoretical range as expressed by Mean +3o, the

value of Mean +2c, and the obscrved range (indicated by x,x). To save space

the graph of Sens. has been increased 20, so that this must be allowed for in

reading.

1to

Graphs showing Variation in Statistics of Standard Data of four populations of

larval Trombicula. deliensis Walch.

(Measurements in microns, except Sens., to which 20,4 has been added to save

space. Populations from left to right in each set are from Cairns, Bulolo,

Milne Bay and Buna, followed by the combined. graph.)

TROMBICULA MINOR Berl. 1904

Trombicula minor Berl. 1905, Acari Nuovi, Manip. TV, 135; Womersley 1939

(July), Trans. Roy. Soc. S .Aust., 63, (2), 152; Gunther 1939 (December),

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.5S.W., 64, (51-6), 466; ibid., 65, (5-6), 477; Womersley

and Heaslip 1943, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 92.

Trombicula pseudoakamushi v. deliensis Walch 1924, Tr. 5th Bien. Congr, Far

East. Assoc. Trop. Med., 601.

Trombicula hirsti Sambon 1927, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (9), 20, 157; nec Hirst

1929, ibid., (10), 3, 564; nec Womersley 1934, Rec. S. Aust., 5, (2), 212;

Gate 1932, Parasitology, 24, 143.

Trombicula hirsti v. morobensis Gunther 1938 (nom. nud.), Med. J. Aust., 2,

(6), 202.

Trombicula hirsti v. buloloensis . Gunther 1939, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 64,

(1-2), 78.

Trombicula minor vy. deliensis Wom. and Heasp. 1943, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.,

67, (1), 93.

Of this species, which is common in parts of New Guinea and Queensland,

separate populations for each area (New Guinea 23 specimens, Queensland 50

specimens) have been examined with the following results:

Queensland. Standard Theoretical Observed — Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - - 83:440°38 2°69+40°27 75°3-91-4 75°0-90-0 3°2

PW - - 96°6+40°37 2°63 +0°26 88-7-104°5 90-0-104:0 2-7

SB - - 42-84+0°21 1-5240°15 38° 347-3 40°0-47-0 3°5

SD - = 67:7 40°33 2:35 40°23 60°7-74-7 61:0-72:0 3°4

A-P - - 35:9+0°+17 1-21 +0-12 32°3-39°-5 32°0-39-0 3:4

AM -) - 40°6+40°33 2°33 40°24 33°6-47°6 34:0-47-0 5°7

AL ~ - 45°940-33 2°35+40°23 38-9-53-0 40-0-50°0 4+]

PL - - 54-140-28 2°00 40-20 48-1-60-1 47-0-60°0 37

Sens. - - 64 440-57 3°08 +0°40 55°2-73:7 51-0-68°0 4-8

New Guinea. Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - - 84:5+40-°64 3°06+40°45 75°3-93°7 80:0-91-0 3°6

PW - - 99°340-46 3°1040°33 90°0-108-6 95-0-106-0 2-2

SB - ~ 44°340°33 1-58 +0°23 39°6-49-0 41-0-47-0 3°5

SD - - 65:°44+0-41 1-894+0-29 59-7-71-7 61:0-70-0 2°9

A-P - - 34:64+0-40 1-93 +0°28 28-8404 31:0-38-0 5-7

AM - - 47-1+0°60 2°68+0°42 39°1-55°] 43-0-50-0 5:7

AL - - 53+140°56 2°72 +0-40 45-0-61:2 48:0-58-0 51

PL - - 57:7+0°60 2°89 40°43 49-0--66-4 50-0-64:0 5:0

Sens - - 58:94+0-81 3°65 40°57 48-0-69°9 50-0-65-0 6:2

Comparing these two populations in which the ranges of variation but not

the ranges of Means, except for AW and SB, overlap considerably, it is found

that, taking the standard error of the difference of means, they are significantly

different for all characters except AW, the values for d/og being AW 1°48,

- PW 4°37, SB 4:05, SD 4-0, A-P 3-5, AM 10-0, AL 11-6, PL 6°8, Sens. 5+7.

Further, the ratio of PW/SD differs considerably, as follows: Queensland

1-427, New Guinea 1°519,

It seems reasonable therefore that, while both populations may belong to the

saine species, and there is not sufficient difference to regard the New Guinea (and

Sumatran) material (previously recorded as T. minor v. deliensis Walch) as 1

distinct variety, yet there is a geographical genetical difference between the two

populations.

The two closely allied species, T. wichmanni Oudms. and T. hatorii Wom. and

Heasp. are not known from sufficient material but appear to be significantly

different, in the Stan «rd Data, and in the ratio of PW/SD which for wichmanni

is 1°85 and for hatorii 1°57.

; Pw

110

100

Comparison of Trombicula minor Berl, from

Queensland and T. minor v. deliensis Walch

x from New Guinea. (The first graph of each

set is T. minor. Measurements in microns.)

Sens.

re T

i PL

» x aa ,

60 -

Ty 7

SB y |

50 17 af x

: rl i! is L

_ / oo

* x Ty / 5

yy, AY ' a

7 AP / .

, +

40 7 a

med

Trombicula sarcina n. sp.

Fig. 5, A-C

Description—Larva. Shape shortly oval. Length 25», width 160 p. Dorsal

scutum as figured with the following Standard Data in microns: AW 79, PW 90,

SB 36, ASB 25, PSB 32, SD 57, A-P 32, AM 26, AL 34, PL 40, Sens. ? Dorsal

setae 26 in number, arranged 2.6.6, then two well separated clusters of 6 on each

Fig. 5 Trombicula sarcina n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C, scutum x 500.

side (see fig. 5 A), 40-47 » long, fairly robust and well ciliated. Eye 2-2. Palpi

and mandibles typical of the genus. Venter: gnathosoma with a pair of ciliated

setae, a pair between coxae I and between coxaec III, thereafter 4.2, and then a

pair of clusters of 9 to 10 each as on the dorsum (fig. 5B). All coxae unisetose.

Legs: I 270p, I] 250p, III 290; tarsi I and II with dorsal rod-like seta; all

tarsi with paired claws and claw-like empodium.

Locality and Host—aA single specimen (one of two) found in lesions on the

skin about the shanks and coronets of sheep, Clermont, Queensland, March 1944

(sent by Mr, D, A. Gill, McMaster Laboratory, Sydney). Eight specimens

collected on boots in ti-tree sheep camp, Clermont, Queensland, April 1944.

Remarks—This species is rather closely related to T. mtmor in the general

conformation of the scutum but differs in the length of AM, AL, and PL, and

more particularly in the greater number of DS, and their arrangement posteriorly

into two well separated lateral clusters. The sensillae are missing except for a

short piece of one, but long enough to place the species in Trombicula, With

the eight specimens from Clermont, Queensland, received after the above descrip-

tion was drawn up the Standard Data are as. follows:

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW -) - 77:040°63 1940-44 71-35-82-65 = 75-0--79-0 2°45

PW - - 88°65+40°57 1-740°40 83-55-93-75 85-0-90°0 1:91

SB - = 40°140°85 2°55+0-°60 32°5-47°7 36°0-43-0 6:3

SD - + 57:0 No variation recorded

A-P - - 57-0 No variation recorded

AM -. - 29:040°47 1-4140°33 24°8-33-2 26°0-32:0 4°85

AL - = 35°840-21 0°6340-15 33°9-37°7 34:0-36°0 1°8

PL - - 42:7+40°31 0-944+0°22 39-9-45-5 40°0-43:0 2:2

Sens. - - 57-0 No variation recorded

Genus SCHONGASTIA Oudemans 1910

Entom., Ber., 1910, 3, (54), 86.

Schongastia pusilla n. sp.

Fig. 6, A-C

Description—Larvae. Colour in life probably light yellowish-red. Shape

ovoid. Length to 210», width to 155. Dorsal scutum typical of the genus, as

figured, and with the following Standard Data as derived from 28 specimens.

Standard Theoretical Observed = Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - - 54-8540°48 2°57 +0°34 47-1-62°5 50-0-61°0 4:7

PW -) - 72:74+0°51 2:7240°36 64°5-80°8 68°0-79-0 3-7

SB - - 21:25+0°21 1-1340°15 17-85-2465 19°0-23°0 5+3

SD - - 50°640°47 2°34 40°33 43-6~57°6 44-0-57-0 4-6

A-P - ~ 25:454+0°31 1:68 +0°22 20°4-30°5 23:°0-32:0 6°6

AM - - 30°-4+0-30 1°50+0°21 25°9-34°9 28:0-32:0 5-0

AL - ~ 57°540°54 2°87 40°39 48-9-66°1 54-0-61-0 5:0

PL - = 44-2+0°70 3°63 40°49 33°3-55°1 39-0-50-0 8-2

Sens. - - Nude, ca. 33 » long, with head 24 x 24p

Dorsal setae slender, tapering and ciliated, and arranged 2.8.2 (outer).

8.8.6.2.2. Eyes 2+ 2. Mandibles and palpi normal for genus. Legs: I 2504

long, II 210», III 235 »; tarsi with paired claws and median claw-like empodium ;

tarsi I and II with the usual sensory dorsal rod. Venter: all coxae unisetose;

between coxae I and between coxae III with the usual pairs of similar setae;

thereafter the setae are arranged approximately 2.6.6.6(4).4(2). (2).

Locality —In numbers, collected on boots in Kunai grass, Buna area of

New Guinea, 1943, together with S. blestowet Gunther and T. walcht Wom, and

Eeasp.

ftemarks-—This is rather a small species and in the key (Trans. Roy. Soc.

S. Aust., 67, (1), 102) comes near to S. katonis Wom. and Heasp. but can be

distinguished by the Standard Data and arrangement of DS, and the nude head

of the sensillae. As it might also be confused with S. blestowei, with which it

occurs, the Standard Error of the Difference of the Means for both species have

been compared and found to be significant (see under S. blestowei).

Fig. 6 Schéngastia pusilla n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C. seutum x 500.

SCHONGASTIA BLESTOWET Gunther 1939

Schéngastia yeomansi Gunther 1938, Med. J. Aust., 2, (6), 202, (nom. nud.);

blestowet Gunther 1939, Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W.. 64, (1. 2). 92; Womers-

ley and Heaslip 1943, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 103.

Of this species, which so far is only known from New Guinea, I am now able

to report on three populations irom different areas, viz., Suein River, Sepik Dis-

trict (7 specimens from man); 3 specimens from Bulolo from Megapodius

duperrexi, and 32 specimens collected on boots, Buna area.

The Standard Data

for the first two populations were reported in 1943, but are now examined statisti-

cally with those of the Buna collection.

Buna—Number of specimens = 32.

A~P

Sens.

Mean

67°64+0°80

88-8+0°70

27°25 40°35

67°1 40°77

32'7+0°35

39°5+0-40

77°8 40°99

59-640°85

35-0

Standard

Deviation

5040-62

3°95 40°49

Theoretical

Range

52-6-82°6

77°0-100°5

21°2-33°3

54°3-79-9

26°8-38°6

33°0-46:0

61°0-94°6

45-5-74+1

Observed

Range

61-0-79-0

82°0-97:°0

25-0-29-0

56:0-75-0

29-0-36°0

35°0-43-0

70-0-90°0

50-0-72-0

Not individually measured

Coeff. of

Variation

KNIUID ND

PNuDdRu

Suein River, Sepik District, on man, Number of specimens = 7.

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - - 65:0 No variation recorded

PW - - 89°34+0°66 1-75 +0°47 84-0-94-5 87:0-91-0 1-95

SB - + 25°740°26 0°704+0-19 23°6-27°8 24-0-26-0 27

SD - - 60°440°75 1-99+0°53 54-4-66°4 58-0-65-0 3:3

A-P - - 30°0+0:28 O-7540°20 27°75-32:25 29-0-31°0 2°8

AM - - 36°2+0°70 1:87 40°50 30-6-41°8 35°0-40-0 5-1

AL + & 65:0 No variation recorded

PL - = 50°85-+0°37 0°99 +0°26 47 -8-53-9 50-0-52-0 1:95

Sens. - - 35-0 No variation recorded

Bulolo (cx Megapodius)—Number of specimens = 3

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - - 90°0+0°47 0-81 40°33 56°6-61 4 58:0-60-0 :

PW -) - 90:040-47 0:91 40°33 77°0-83:0 78-0-82°0 1°4

SB - - 33:040°81 1-4140°57 28 °8-37-2 32-0-35-0 4-2

SD - - 62:0 No variation recorded

A-P - - 20-0 No variation recorded

AM - - 37-0 Only 1 specimen measured

AL = - 63-0 Only 1 specimen measured

PS - - 60:041°42 2°00 + 1:0 54-0-66-0 58°0-62°0 3°3

Sens. - - 30:0 No variation recorded

The above three populations have been tested for significant differences and

the results summarised in the following table, a value of d/o >2 being regarded

as positive, those in the neighbourhood of 2:0 being indicated by +.

Significance of Differences of three Populations of S. chéngastia

blestowet Gunther.

AW PW SB SD A-P AM AL PL

Buna-Suein Rv. = 4 ma + + + + ae +

Buna-Bulolo - 7 + + 4 + + + + 7

Suein Rv.-Bulolo — - + + + + + oy + a

From this it is seen that the Bulolo specimens regarded in the 1943 paper as

a variety megapodius of blestowei differ significantly from those of Suein River

and Buna, but that the Suein River population only differs from the Buna popula-

tion in the factors SD, A-P, AM, AL and PL.

That megapodius should be regarded as a distinct variety is also borne out

by: (1) that its host is a bird Megapodius duperreyi and (2) that on the venter

behind coxae III the setae number 26 arranged ca. 6.6.4.4.4.2, whereas in

blestowei {, typ. they number 40, arranged approximately 8.8.8.6.4.4.2.

The ratios of the PW/SD of the three populations are Buna 1°32, Bulolo

1-29, Suein River 1-48. A comparison of the Standard Data of these populations

with those of S. pusilla shows a positive difference in all characters, the

values of d/o in all cases greatly exceeding one of 2.

SCHONGASTIA SALMI Oudms. 1922

Ent. Bericht, 1922, 6, (126), 81; idem, 6, (128), 114.

This species, overlooked in the 1943 paper, was described from Java without

any figure and with only the briefest description, a translation of which is as

follows:

“Differs from hitherto described species in the form of the scutum, which is

trapezoidal, wider behind than in front, anteriorly concave, posteriorly strongly

convex with a deep medial incision. The posterior half of the scutum is finely

wrinkled as is the dorsal cuticle. On the dorsum with 12 transverse rows of

10 ciliated setae.

“Living in grass; parasitic on ——-——? Kediri, (Java), Dr. A. J. Salm.”

In a short additional note (above) Oudemans says, “Tenkoe des abres; in

gras, Magelang, Sept. 1916.”

There is, uniortunately, nothing in the above by which one can place the

species in Schdngastia, Neoschéngastia or Paraschéngastia, except possibly the

wrinkling (striations) of the posterior half of the scutum which perhaps suggests

a member of the last genus. it seems, therefore, that until the type can be located

and examined, the species must be regarded as “incertae sedis”.

Genus NEoscr6éncastra Ewing 1929

Manual of External Parasites, 1929, 187.

Fig. 7 Neoschingastia mccullochi n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C, chelicera;

D, scutum x 500; E, dorsal seta.

100

Neoschongastia mecullochi n. sp.

Fig. 7, A-E

Description—| arvae. Shape ovate. Length 170y, width 130,, Dorsal

scutum as figured, with the following Standard Data in microns: AW 48, PW 6/,

SB 19, ASB 19, PSB 16, A-P 20, AM 16, Al. 42, PI. 64, Sens. 22 (head nude,

17x17). Dorsal setae 48 » long, foliate with very large lateral teeth (ci. fig. 7 A)

and arranged 2,6.6.6.4.2. The scutal AL and PL are similar to the DS in form;

but AM is of normal form. Eyes 2 + 2, close to the margins of the scutum. Man-

cibles and palpi normal. Legs: [ 248 » long, Hi 208 », LI] 248 »; tarsi with paired

claws and median claw-like empodium. Venter: all coxae with 1 normal ciliated

setae; a similar pair between coxae | and between coxae [1], and thereafter

arranged 2.6.4.4.2, the first row of 4 stronger and more ciliated than the rest.

Locality—A single specimen collected on boots, Abidari, New Guinea, 28 July

1943 (R. N. McCulloch).

Remarks --'This species is close to N. foltata Gunther, but differs in the

broader and stronger teothed DS, which are only 26 in number as compared with

32. Other differences lie in the smaller scutum and the Standard Data.

Genus GUNTHERANA Womersley 1943

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943, 67, (1), 132.

Guntherana parana n. sp.

Fig. 8, A-B

Description—lLarvae. Shape broadly oval, without a distinctive waist. Length

to 195 », width to 143». Anterior dorsal scutum rectangular as figured, with the

follawing Standard Data based on seven specimens.

Standard Theoretical Observed Coett. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - - 46°740°78 2°054+0°55 40'6-52°8 43-0-50-0 4-4

PW - - 64°7+41-:00 2:654+0°71 56°7-72°6 61:0-68-0 4+]

SB - - 17-440°34 0:90 +0°24 14°7-20°'1 16°0-18-0 5-2

SD - - 46°64+0°4 1-05 +0-28 43-5—-49-7 44-0-47-0 2°25

A-P - - 29°140°5] 1-354+0°36 25-1~33°1 27 0-32-0 4:7

AM - - 30°0+40°4 1:07 +0°28 26°8-33 2 29-0-32-0 3°5

AL - - 30°04+0°:4 1:07 +0°28 26° 8-332 29-0-32°0 3:5

AL - - 74:0+1°6 4°3741-17 60°9-87-1 68-°0-81-0 5°9

PL - - 98-441-6 4-3441-13 85°4-111-4 93-0-108-0 4:4

Sens. - - No variation recorded

The ratio

(19: 16).

2.6.4.6.2,

of PW/SD = 1°39 and the ASB is slightly greater than PSB

Sensillae globose, the head nude and 16x 16.

the last 2 being 90-120, long. Posterior dorsal scutum somewhat

Dorsal setae arranged

reniform, 104 wide, by 65, long, not subdivided, with very fine pitting (or

pubesence) and with three pairs of very fine setae uniformly 31 long. Eyes

2+2. Mandibles and palpi normal as in G. bipygalis (Gunther). All coxae

unisetose, a pair of setae between coxae T and between coxae III, and thereafter

ventral setae 8.6.4.4.2, Legs: I 260, I] 235 », HI 286 uw; tarsi with paired claws

and a claw-like empodium; tarsi 1 and 11 with a short smooth sensorial rod

dorsally.

Locality—A number of specimens collected on boots at Abidari, New Guinea,

28 July 1943 (R. N, McCulloch).

Remarks—Differs from the genotype in the smaller anterior dorsal scutum

with different Standard Data, especially SB, and the fewer and different arrange-

101

ment of the DS (20 as compared with 28 in bipygalis). The posterior dorsal

scutum also differs, the setae being uniform in length, whereas in bipygalis they

are shorter and not uniform.

The remarkable habit of C. bipygalis of attaching its eggs to the fur of its

host has not been observed for G. pavana, neither has it yet been found upon

any host.

Fig. 8 Guntherana parana n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, scutum x 500.

Genus WaALcurA Ewing 1931

Proc, U.S. Nat. Mus., 80, (8), 10. Genotype Walchuun glabruam Walch.

WaALCHIA DISPARUNGUIS (Oudms. 1929)

= Schéngastiella disparunguis Ouds. 1929, Ent. Ber., 7, (165), 398.

This species was described from specimens from the ears of Mus rattus var.

from Garoet (W. Java), Aug., W. C. van Heuren.

Oudemans’ original description, translated, reads as follows:

“Length of a moderately engorged specimen 225 p, greatest breadth 145 p.

Scutum roughly pentagonal with one angle directed posteriorly; in each of the

other four angles a seta. On each shoulder is a seta and behind the scutum five

rows of six setae in each. Pseudostiginal organ clavate, the stem about one-third

of its length. Dorsal setae about 30 » long, brush-like and shortly ciliated. Eyes

small, cornea half-spherical, Venter: all coxae (also maxillae) with a feathered

seta; coxae III with two such. Between coxae I and between coxae III a pair

of similar setae. Then 17 pairs of setae similar to the dorsal sctae. Gnathosoma

dorsally with six pairs of smooth setae, ventrally with one more; externally on

the tibiae with a short smooth seta, and on the very short and difficult to see palpus

are four setae of which one is a short thick rod-like olfactory seta, the three others

are short thick setae distally divided into four or five branches. Palpi claw bifid.”

Oudemans was rather uncertain about placing this species in Schéngastiella

Hirst as it differed from Hirst’s diagnosis in having only four setae besides the

sensillae on the scutum instead of three pairs. He also noted that the scutum

resembles that of Typhyothrombium Ouds. 1910 (= Gahrliepia Ouds. 1912), but

102

in his description it is suggested that the posterior angle is sharply defined (not

tongue-like as in Gahrliepia as now understood) and similar to that of Walchia

Ewing.

Oudemans also refers to the disparity in form and size of the three tarsal

claws, and named his species on this character. This feature, in which the median

claw (empodium) is much stronger than the others and of median length, the

outer longer and only slightly more slender, and the inner only slightly shorter

than the median but much thinner, is, however, present in all the species of

Walchia known to me and is, I believe, a good generic character.

The multisetose coxae IIf also places Oudemans’ species in Walchia, but all

other species have either one, three, four or six setae present and disparunguis is

intermediate between W’. glabrum Walch (= pingue Gater) with three coxal setae

and the group, morebensis Gunther, rustica (Gater) and turmalis (Gater) with

only a single seta on coxac HII. In the DS it will be closely related to glabrum.

WALCHIA GLABRUM (Walch 1927)

Trombicula glabrum Walch 1927 Genesk., Tijdsch. v. Ned., Indie, 67, (6), 926.

Watchia glabrum Ewing 1931, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 80, (8), 10; Womersley and

Heaslip 1943, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 134.

Walchia pingue Gater 1932, Parasitology, 24,

Of this species I have now been able to examine seven specimens from the

Runa area of New Guinea, 1943 (G. M. Kohls). The statistical values of the

Standard Data for these specimens are as follows:

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - - 29°34+0°26 0-70 +0-19 27°2-31-4 28°0-30-0 2°4

PW - - 51-4+0-90 2°5540°68 43°7-59°-1 48 °0-54-0 5:0

SB - - 26°85 +0°55 1:4640°39 22-5—31-2 25°0-29-0 5-4

SD - - 54°8540-47 1-25 +0°33 51:0+58-6 53-0-57°0 2°3

A-P - - 36°85 +0°37 *98 40°37 33-9-39°8 36:0-38-0 27

AL - os 29°0 No variation recorded

PL - - 33:-440°:52 1-440°37 29-2-37°6 32°0-35:0 4-2

In the 1943 paper, on page 135, it was stated that one of the lateral claws was

wanting. I now find that this is not so, the inner claw is definitely present but

fine and difficult to see, in comparison with the outer claw and empodium.

Subfam. LEEUWENHOEKIINAE nov.

Trombiculinae with a respiratory spiracle situated in front of the first coxae

and on each side of the gnathosoma, from which radiate tracheal tubes.

A study of many specimens of Leeuwenhoekia has recently revealed the

presence of the above pair of true spiracles, each of which is supplied with a

tracheal system. The larvae of the Trombidtiidae are separated from those of the

Erythraeidae by the presence ventrally between the first and second coxae of a

pronounced and conspicuous spiracle-like opening or “urstigma”. No tracheal

tubes, however, have ever been observed arising therefrom and its precise function

is unknown. The above true stigma, however, is of a different type, smaller and

less strongly chitinised, and long tracheae can be traced running down the body

for a considerable distance.

On the presence of an organ of such fundamental importance it becomes

necessary to erect a new family, ranking with the Trombiculinae in the restricted

sense,

103

Unfortunately, the allied genus Hannemanmia has not been found in this

region and the presence of such an organ in the species of that genus requires

determination by other workers. At present only the genus Leeuwenhoekia can

be placed in the subfamily.

Genus LEEUWENHOERIA Ouds, 1911

Entom., Ber., 3, (5-8), 137. Genotype Heterothrombium verduni Ouds. 1910.

The first species of this larval genus to be recorded from Australia was

L. australiensis Hirst 1925 (Trans. Roy. Soc. Trop. Med. and Hyg., 19), which

was described from specimens collected in the suburbs of Sydney, where they

were a source of much annoyance to people working in the gardens.

Fig. 9 Leeuwenhoekia australiensis Hirst. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral;

C, seutum x 500; D, palp; FE, tarsus I; F, tarsus and metatarsus 1V.

In 1934 (Records S. Aust. Mus., 5, (2), 217) I recorded, under the same

name, specimens taken from the ears of a cat from Glen Osmond, Adelaide

(D. C. S., 1931), and in 1939 (Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 64, (1, 2), 95) Gunther

104

recorded it for New Guinea from a single specimen from a Cassowary at Bulolo,

upon my determination.

In my joint paper with W. G. Heaslip (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1),

1943, 141) the Standard Data for a number of specimens from (Queensland were

also recorded.

It is now found that the Adelaide specimens are different and they are re-

described as a new species. ‘Several other new species are also described and a

key to the species of the genus presented.

LEEUWENHOEKIA AUSTRALIENSIS Hirst

Fig. 9, A-F

Trans. Roy, Soc. Trop. Med. and Hyg, 1925, nec Womersley 1934. Rec. S. Aust.

Mus. 1934, 5, (2), 217; Gunther 1939, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 64, (1, 2),

95; Womersley and Heaslip 1943, Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 141

(in part).

A population of 13 specimens from Chatswood, Sydney, practically the type

locality, collected in April 1943 (R. N. McCulloch), have been examined together

with four from Cairns, Queensland, 1939, on bandicoots (W. G. Heaslip); four

from bandicoots, Brisbane, Queensland, 1938, (W. G. H.), one from the same

host, Little Mulgrave, Queensland, and one from man, Brisbane, Queensland, 1935

(F. H.S.). Both the Queensland and Sydney populations showed no significant

differences in any of the characters used for the Standard Data.

Another specimen from Bulolo, New Guinea, collected by Gunther does, how-

ever, show a slight and significant difference from the Australian specimens in

that the AL. and PI. are longer. It cannot, however, be regarded as more than a

minor geographical difference.

In his original description Hirst gives the following data: scutal length 60 4,

width 96; length of anterior scutal process 21 2; AM 40-45, AL 464, PL

63% DS 42-43. The DS, according to his figures, are arranged ca.

2.10.7.10.12.11.8.6.4 = 70.

A fresh description is now drawn up from the Chatswood, Sydney, material,

except that the Standard Data is from the Sydney and Queensland material

combined.

Deseription—Length (excluding gnathosoma) to 340y, width to 230 .n.

Shape an elongate oval. Dorsal scutum as figured, with following Standard Data:

Standard Theoretical Observed — Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW -- - 77°35+0°98 4°7340°70 63°25-91-45 = 72-0-90-0 61

PW - - 93:-441:0 4-78 +0°70 79°1-107°7 860-102-051

SB - = 30:240°43 2°06 40°30 24: 1-36°3 25:0-36°0 6'8

SD - = 70°8+0°73 3°5140-52 60°3-81°3 63°0-77°0 5°0

A-P - - 31°9+40°64 1:7640°45- = 26°6-37-2 29°0-36°0 9-7

AM -) - 44:940°68 3°27 +0°48 35°1-54°7 40-0-50-0 773

Al. - - 49-040-67 3°21+0°47 39-4-58°6 45-0-58:0 6:5

PL - + 63-640°57 2°75 40°40 55-4-71°8 58:0-70°0 4:3

Sens. - 64-040°71 2°77 +0°50 §5-7-72°3 61-0-68-0 4°3

Ratio of ASB/PSB = 41/30 and PW/SD = 1°32.

Dorsal setae about 76 in number, 45-60 long and arranged approximately

2.12.8.8.12.12.10.6.4.2. Anterior median projection of scutum 25, long by 14h

wide at base. The AM setae are 124 apart at bases and placed about 21 w behind

the anterior margin of scutum. Eyes 2+ 2. Legs: longer than body, I 395 gz,

Uf 310», IT 410», including coxae; coxae I with two setae, I] and JIT with one

105

seta, these setae 40 » long; tarsi | and HT with a stout dorsal sensory rod; all tarsi

with paired claws and a longer median claw-like empodium; tibiae III with a pair

of long slender whip-like setae and tarsi III with one such. Palpi and mandibles

normal, chelae serrated. Gnathosoma with a pair of ciliated sctae. Between

gnathosoma and coxae | on each side is a distinct, lightly chitinised stigma from

which tracheal tubes run; between coxae I and coxae II on each side is the larger,

more chitinised pseudo-stigmata (urstigma) from which no tracheal tubes arise,

and which is characteristic of all larval Trombidiidae. Ventrally, between coxae I,

there are no setae, a pair between coxae III, and thereafter about 60 setae, to

60 » long.

Locality and Hosts—-As given in the introduction of this species.

Remarks-—-The Standard Data for the single specimen from Bulolo, New

Guinea, are as follows:

AW PW SB ASB PSB SD A-P AM AL PL Sens.

83 07 32.43 32 32 30 54 61 72 60

As stated above, it is only significantly different in the values for AL and

PL, and agrees in all morphological characters. Pending more material from

Bulolo, it can only be regarded as a geographical variation.

Leeuwenhoekia adelaideae n. sp.

Fig. 10, A-C

Description—Larvae. Shape elongate oval. Length to 360 4, width to 210 p.

Dorsal scutum as figured, and the Standard Data based on the South Australian

material as follows:

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - - 76:440°88 1-96+0°62 70°5-82°3 74-0-80°0 2°5

PW - - 92:440°53 1:2040°38 88-8-96-0 90-00-93 -0 1°3

SB - - 28°84+0°65 1°47+0°46 24-4-33-2 26°0-30-0 5-1

SD - = 69°24+0:18 *404+0°12 68 °0—70-4 69-0-70-0 5

A-P - - 32:84+0-18 -40 40°12 31:°6-34:0 32°0-33-0 1:2

AM - - 41°2+0°65 1-47 +0-46 36°8-45-6 40-0-43-0 3°6

AL - - $7:840°43 98 4+0°31 34°9-40°7 37°0-39-0 2°6

PL - - 59°8+41-14 2°56+0°81 52-1-67°5 56°0-64-0 4-2

Sens. - - 63:040°86 1-734+0°61 57 -8-68°2 60:0-64-0 27

Ratio of ASB/PSB = 40/29 and PW/SD = 1°335,

Dorsal setae ca. 52 in number and arranged ca. 2.12.8.10.8.6.4.2. Anterior

median projection of scutum 18» long by 7 wide at base. The AM setae Il»

apart at base and about 7 » behind anterior scutal margin. Eyes 2+ 2. Legs

rather longer than body, 1 450, II 370 p, ITI 430 p, including coxae; coxae I with

two setae, If and III with one seta each, these setae tapering, finely ciliated and

about 50 » long; tarsi I and II with a stout dorsal sensory rod; all tarsi with paired

claws and a rather longer slender, claw-like empodium; tibiae III with a pair of

long slender whip-like setae, tarsi III with one such. Palpi and mandibles normal,

chelae serrate. Gnathosoma with a pair of long ciliated setae, Between gnatho-

soma and coxae I on each side with a true stigmal opening as in australiensis.

Ventrally, no setae between coxae I, a pair between coxae III and thereafter about

26 setae to 40 » long.

Remarks—Three specimens from rats from Cairns, Queensland, 1939

(W. G. H.), agree with the above data except that PW, A-P and especially AL

and Sens., are significantly greater. It hardly seems possible, however, to regard

these specimens as more than a geographical variation.

Fig. 10 Leeuwenhoekia adelaideae n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C, scutum x 500.

The Standard Data for these specimens are as follows:

Standard Theoretical Observed = Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW - - 74:041:05 1°82+0°74 68°5-79-5 72°0-75°0 2°5

PW - 88-341-°96 3°40+1-39 78° 1-98°5 85-0-93-0 3°8

SB - - 29-0 No variation recorded

SD - = 67°341:90 3°3041°35 57°4-77°2 65:0-72-0 4-9

A-P - - 31:0+0-°81 1°-414+0-58 26°8-35°2 29°0-32-0 4-5

AM - - 43°341°65 2°87 41°17 34°7-51-9 40-0-47-0 6'°6

AL - - 45°-7+41-09 1-89 40°77 40-1-51-3 43°0-47'0 . 4-1

PL - 58-04+1-49 2°5841-05 50:3-65°7 54-0-60-0 4-45

Sens. - 70°7 40°54 -94 +0-38 67:°9-73°-5 70-0-72°0 1°33

107

Locality and Hosts—Five specimens from ears of domestic cats, three from

Glen Osmond, South Australia, November 1931 (D.C. S.), and two from Unley,

South Australia, February 1941 (R. V. S.). Also three specimens from rats,

Cairns, Queensland, 1939 (W. G. H.).

Leeuwenhoekia hirsti n. sp.

Fig. 11, A-C

Length (excluding gnathosoma) 3304, width 275 g.

Description—Larva.

Dorsal scutum as figured with the following Standard

Shape an elongate oval.

Fig. 11 Leeuwenhoekia hirsti n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C, scutum x 500.

Data in microns: AW 79, PW 97, SB 29, ASB 46, PSB 31°5, SD 77:5, A-P 36,

AM 43, AL 43, PL 54, Sens. 72, DS 45-60, Ratio PW/SB = 1:252. Dorsal setae

rather more robust than in australiensis, 82 in number and arranged ca.

2.8.12.10.10.12.8.8.6.4.2, the anterior rows rather confused. The AM setae ll»

apart at base and about 21 » behind anterior scutal margin. Anterior process of

108

scutum 29» long, and 11» wide at base. Eyes 2+ 2. Legs: I 360 ,, I] 330n, -

ITI 375 p, including coxae; coxae I with two setae, II and III with one seta, these

setae to 40 long; tarsi [ and I] with dorsal rod-like seta; tibiae ITI with two

long whip-like setae, tarsi II] with one such; all tarsi with paired claws and rather

longer, median claw-like empodium. A true stigma present on each side of gnatho-

soma. Palpi normal, with bifurcate tibial claw. Mandibles normal, chelae serrate.

No setae between coxae I, a pair between coxae III, and thereafter 12.12.12.10.10.

8.6.4.2 setae, to 36» long.

Locality—-Described from a single specimen collected on boots at Skull

Pocket, Kairi, Queensland, February 1943 (R. N. McC.).

Remarks—In the Standard Data this species agrees with australiensis, but

differs in the greater number of DS (82) and in the somewhat deeper scutum,

giving a PW/SD of 1:252. The DS are also more robust, and the ventral setae

more numerous.

Leeuwenhoekia mecullochi n. sp.

Fig, 12, A-C

Description—-Larvae. J.ength (excluding gnathosoma) to 315, width to

210». Shape an elongate oval. Dorsal sctitum smaller and not as long as in other

Big. 12 Leeuwenhoekia neceniloch v.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C, scutum 500.

190

species, as figured with the following Standard Data in microns, based on four

specimens.

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW, - - 64:040°87 1:73 +0°61 58°8-69:2 61-0-65°0 27

PW - - 81°041-00 2°0040°71 75:0-87:0 79-0-83:°0 2°5

SB - = 25-0 No variation recorded

SD - - 1041-41 2°83 + 1-00 62°5-75°5 67°0-75-0 4-0

A-P - - 32:°540°43 0°87 40°31 29:9-35°1 32°0-34-0 27

AM -) - 36°5+40°43 0°87 40°31 33°9-39° | 36°0-38°0 2:4

AL - - 38:041-0 2°04+0°-71 32-0-44-0 36°0-40°0 5:2

PL - = 54-0 No variation recorded

Sens. - - 44°341-09 1:8940°75 38-6-49°9 43 -0-47°0 4°3

Ratio of ASB/PSB = 39/29 and of PW/SD = 1-194.

Dorsal setae ca. 70 in number 45-55 » long, and arranged ca, 2.8.10.8.10.10,10.

6.4.2. Anterior median projection of scutum about 22 long and 10, wide at

base. The AM setae Il » apart at base and about 15 » behind anterior margin of

scutum. Eyes 2+ 2. Legs: [ 345, If 290», II] 360 4; coxae I with two setae,

If and I11 with one seta, these setae to 47 » long, tarsi I and II with dorsal rod-

like seta, all tarsi with paired claws and median claw-like empodium; tibiae III

with a pair of long slender whip-like setae, tarsi II] with one such. Gnathosoma

with a pair of ciliated setae. A true stigma present on each side of gnathosoma.

No setae between coxae I, a pair between coxae TIT, and thereafter 12.10.10.10.

6.4.2. setae, to 36 long and finer than the dorsal and other ventral setae, Palpi

normal with bifurcate tibial claw. Mandibles with serrate chelicerae.

Locality—Four specimens collected on boots, on edge of scrub. Trinity Beach

area, Queensland, July 1943 (R. N. MeC.).

Remarks—Very distinct from all other species with approximately similar

number of IDS and whip-like setae on tibiae and tarsi If], in the Standard Data of

the scutuni.

Leeuwenhoekia southcotti n. sp.

Fig, 13, A-C

Description—Larvae, Length (excluding gnathosoma) to 310, width to

260. Shape elongate oval. Dorsal scutum small and relatively short, as

figured, with the following Standard Data in microns based on seven specimens.

Standard ‘Theoretical Observed Caeff. of

Mean Deviation Range Range Variation

AW -- ~ 62:715+0°56 1-484+0°-39 57°7-66°6 61-0-65:0 2:

PW -— - 82-4+0-66 1-7640°46 77°\-87°7 79:0-85°0 271

SB - - 28:64+0°37 1:0+0°26 25°6-31°6 26°0-29:°0 374

SD - - 49:140°51 1:35 40°36 45-1-53-1 47-0-50-0 27

A-P - - 27:640°49 1:29+0°34 23°7-31°5 260-290 4-6

Al, - - 29-95+40-41 1-20+0°30 26°6-33°3 29°0-32°0 37

PL - ~~ 40°85+40°51 1°35 +0'36 '36°8-44-9 40-0-43-0 3°3

Sens. - - 64:340°58 1°48 40°43 59-9--68°7 61:0-65:0 2°3

Ratio of ASB/PSB = 24/19 and of PW/SD = 1-744,

Dorsal setae ca. 42, arranged ca. 2.6.6.8.8.6.4.2, strong, ciliated and apically

blunt. Anterior median projection of scutum 14» long by 5 wide at base. The

AM setae with bases 5 «4 apart and about 4» behind anterior margin of scutum.

Eyes 2+ 2. Legs: 1 340, 11 305, IIT 390 p, including coxae; coxae I with

two setae, If and IIT with one seta, 32 » long; tarsi I and II with usual dorsal rod-

like seta, III without any whip-like setae on tibiae or tarsi; all tarsi with paired

claws and longer claw-like empodium. Gnathosoma with a pair of ciliated setae.

110

On each side of gnathosoma and between coxae I is a true stigma as in aus-

traliensis. No setae between coxae I, a pair between coxae III, and thereafter

84444.44 setae. Palpi normal with bifurcate tibial claw. Mandibles with

chelae serrated.

Locality and Hosts—Two specimens from a skink (Lygosoma sp.) from

Adelaide River, Northern Territory, Australia, June 1943 (R. V. S. Slide ACB

169B) and eight specimens from a similar host and the same locality July 1943

(R.V.S. Slide ASB 169A).

Remarks—Differs markedly from all other species in the Standard Data and

the lack of the long whip-like setae on tibiae and tarsi II.

: di e

Pa.

Fig. 13 Leeuwenhoekia southcotti n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral, C, scutum x 500.

Leeuwenhoekia nova-guinea n. sp.

Fig. 14, A-C

Description—Larvae. Length, fully fed to 800, unfed 400,, width fully

fed to 600, unfed 320». Shape an elongate oval, in life and before mounting

with a distinct contraction behind coxae ITT. Dorsal scuttum as figured, with the

sides of the posterior angle slightly concave, and with the following Standard

Data in microns based on 12 specimens.

A-P

Sens.

Mean

- 85°7541-35

98-441°18

27°940°65

73°041-84

- 34°25 41-23

41°540°94

62'141°68

72°84+0°74

58°7 1°33

111

Deviation

Standard

Range

Theoretical

71°7-99°8

86-°1~110-7

21-1-34-7

574-886

23°85-44-65

32°6-50-4

44-6-77°6

65-1-80°5

46-1-71-3

Range

Observed

79-0-93-0

94-0-108-0

25-0-32°0

65-0-79-0

29-0--38°0

36°0-45°0

54°0-72:0

70°0-79:0

54-0-65-0

Variation

Coeff. of

SE AAO SIS S08 =

DO on BR Re et Re ee

Fig. 14 Leeuwenhockia nova-guinea n.sp. Larva:

A, dorsal; B, ventral; C scutum x 500.

Ratio setae ca, 62 and arranged ca. 2.12.8.10.12.10.6.2, but the transverse

rows are difficult to interpret, fairly strong and strongly ciliated.

cess of scutum: 25 » long by 11 » wide at the base.

14, apart and placed 14» behind the antcrior margin of scutum.

Anterior pro-

The AM setae with their bases

Eyes 2+ 2.

Legs: I 480 long including coxae, II 430», ITI 490 »; coxae I with two slender,

112

60 yw, fine setae, I] and II] with one seta; no pair of setae between coxae I, a pair

between coxae HIT and thereafter about 70 setae 30-45 » long; tarsi with paired

claws and slender claw-like empodium; tarsi I and II with short dorsal rod-like

seta; tibiae III with a pair of long simple whip-like setae and tarsi III with one

such, Palpi normal with bifurcate tibial claw. Mandibles with serrate chelae.

Gnathosoma with a pair of ciliated setae. Between base of gnathosoma and

coxae I, on each side is the characteristic true stigma of the subfamily.

Locality and Hosts—A number of specimens from a magpie, Gymnorhina sp.

Buna area, New Guinea, 21 November 1943 (G. M. Kohls), and froma kingfisher,

same locality, 27 November 1943 (G. M. K.).

Remarks-——Differs from other species in the number of DS, the Standard

Data and the form of the dorsal seutum, as well as the construction behind the

third pair of coxae.,

Key To THE AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA SPECIES OF LEEUWENHOEKIA

1 Tibia and tarsi of leg IIL with some Jong simple whip-like setae. 2

No _ long whip-like setae on tibiae or tarsi of leg III. Scutum small and relatively

shallow, PW/SD=1-74. AW 62-1544-45, PW 82-445-3, SB 28-6 43:0,

SD 49-144-0, A-P 27-643-9, AM 20-941-1, AL 29-9-4.3-3, PL 40-8 +44-0,

Sens. 64-344-4. DS relatively short, straight and blunt at apex, 42 in number.

; LL. southcotti v.sp.

PW/SD tess than 1-3,

PW/SD ereater than 1-3. 4

3) PW/SD = 1-194, DS ca. 70 in number. AW 64-04.5-2, PW 81-:046-0, SB 25-0,

SD 71-048-5, A-P 32-542-6. AM 36-542-6, PI 54-0, Sens. 44-345-7. DS

fed

tapering 45-55 , long. L. mecullochi n. sp.

PW/SD = 1-252. DS ca. 82 in number AW 79-0, PW 97-0, SB 29-0, SD 77-5,

A-P 36:0, AM 43-0, AL 43-0, PL 54-0, Sens. 72-0. DS tapering. LL. hirsti n. sp.

4 DS 52-54 in number. PW/SD = 1-336. AW 76-445-9, PW 92-44.3-6, SB 28-84 4-4,

SD 69:-241-2, A-P 32:841+2, AM 41-2444, AL 37-842°9, PL 59°8 47°7,

Sens. 63-0 45-2. LL. adelaideac n. sp.

DS 62 in number. PW/SD = 1-32. AW 85-7414-0, PW 98-44 12-3, SB 27-9 4.658,

SD 73:0415-6, A-P 34:2410-4, AM 41-548-9, AL 62:1417-5, PL 72:8 47-7,

Sens. 58-7 4 12-6. L. novd-yuinea uw. sp.

DS 76 in number. PW/SD = 1-32. AW 77-3414-2, PW 93-44 14-3, SB 30-2+46-1,

SD 70-84 10-5, A-P 31-945-3, AM 44-949-8, AL 49-049-6, PL 63-648-2,

Sens. 64-0 48-3. L. australiensis Hirst

N.B.—The values of the Standard Data given in this key are the Means plus

or minus three times the Standard Deviation, 7.e., they indicate the theoretical

tange of variation.

LIFE HISTORY OF THE TREMATODE,

ECHINOCHASMUS PELECANIN. SP-

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and E. R. SIMPSON, University of Adelaide

Summary

Echinochasmus pelecani n. sp.

This small echinostome has been found in the small intestine of the pelican, Pelecanus

conspicillatus Temm., at Tailem Bend, Murray River, on several occasions during the past six

years, the number present being always small. The following measurements (in millimetres) have

been taken from specimens which were egg-bearing, the average being based on ten worms in

glycerine or methyl salicylate. Length 1-4-2-57 mm., average 1-92; maximum breadth -29--4 mm.,

average -36, occurring in the vicinity of the acetabulum, though the width at the oral crown

(excluding the oral spines) is in most cases almost equal to it. Oral sucker terminal, approximately

circular, though sometimes the length is slightly greater, -062--075 mm. diameter. Acetabulum

circular. -24- -28 mm. diameter; distance of its anterior edge from head end of worm -72-1-1 mm.,

the ratio of this distance to length of worm 1: 2-2-2-9; acetabulum entirely in anterior half in. larger

specimens, more or less completely so in smaller worms, the post-acetabular length being relatively

greatest in largest worms. The ratio of the breadths of the oral and ventral suckers is nearly 1:4 (1:

3-7-4-0) in most specimens, but in the best-preserved material the oral sucker is -087 mm. wide by

-070 long, and the acetabulum -225 mm. in diameter, the ratio of breadths thus being approximately

1: 2-6. The maximum breadth of such a worm was -35 mm, in the vicinity of the acetabulum, while

the oral crown measured -31 mm. in width.

113

LIFE HISTORY OF THE TREMATODE, ECHINOCHASMUS PELECANI n. sp.

By T. Harvey Jounston and E. R. Simpson, University of Adelaide

[Read 11 May 1944]

Echinochasmus pelecani n. sp.

This small echinostome has been found in the small intestine of the pelican,

Pelecanus conspicillatus Temm., at Tailem Bend, Murray River, on several

occasions during the past six years, the number present being always small. The

following measurements (in millimetres) have been taken from specimens which

were egg-bearing, the average being based on ten worms in glycerine or methyl

salicylate. Length 1°4-2-57 mm., average 1°92; maximum breadth -29--4 mm.,

average *36, occurring in the vicinity of the acetabulum, though the width at the

oral crown (excluding the oral spines) is in most cases almost equal to it. Oral

sucker terminal, approximately circular, though sometimes the length is slightly

greater, -062--075 mm. diameter. Acetabulumi circular, -24--28 mm. diameter ;

distance of its anterior edge from head end of worm +72-1-1 mm., the ratio of this

distance to length of worm 1:2+2-2-9; acetabulum entirely in anterior half in.

larger specimens, more or less completely so in smaller worms, the post-acetabular

length being relatively greatest in largest worms. The ratio of the breadths of

the oral and ventral suckers is nearly 1:4 (1:3-+7-4-0) in most specimens, but in

the best-preserved material the oral sucker is -O87 mm. wide by -070 long, and the

acetabulum *225 mm. in diameter, the ratio of breadths thus being approximately

1:2°6. The maximum breadth of such a worm was °35 mm, in the vicinity of

the acetabulum, while the oral crown measured -31 mm. in width,

In most specimens the covering of body spines had disappeared, since the

worms disintegrate rather rapidly. These triangular, scale-like spines are closely

arranged, similarly to those figured for E. donaldsoni by Beaver (1941), and the

series extends on the dorsal and ventral surfaces from the oral region at least as

far as the level of the testicular region.

The collar spines are lost more or less completely soon after the death of the

worms. The series is interrupted mid-dorsally where the interval between two

spines is rather less than the diameter of the oral sucker. The majority of the

spines are about °075 mm. long by 16-17 », but the three situated on each ventral

lobe are smaller and exhibit an alternate arrangement (fig, 10). The inmost is

the smallest, ‘045 mm. long by 12°52; the next -065--07 mm, by 174; and the

next ‘0575 by 15-16. There are about 10 minute spinules on the anterior border

of the oral sucker.

Prepharynx about as long as oral sucker; pharynx -0753-:103 mm. long, as

long as or slightly longer than diameter of oral sucker, -038--07 mm, wide, usually

“O55. Ocsophagus long, widening posteriorly, bifureating immediately in front

of genital aperature. Crura extending to sides of excretory bladder. Lateral

excretory siphons passing forwards laterally from caeca, oesophagus and pharynx,

terminating each as a narrow canal close to prepharynx a short distance behind

oral sucker,

*15--21 mm. broad, in contact with posterior testis; latter more elongate, usually

rounded-triangular but occasionally almost elliptical, -15-'275 mm. long, -138-

*20 mn. broad. Cirrus sac relatively large, lying largely in area bounded by crura

and anterior border of acetabulum, but extending dorsally above latter to about

its middle; -175--25 mm. long, *112--162 mm. broad; seminal vesicle consisting

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68, {1), 28 July 1944

Testes almost entirely in third quarter of worm: anterior *11--20 nm, long,

bei

114

of rounded anterior and posterior chambers; numerous prostate glands associated

with most anterior part of cirrus sac; cirrus very short, simple.

Ovary more or less spherical, -07--08 mm. diameter, lying on right side of

midline just in front of anterior testis; oviduct arising dorso-medianly, and curv-

ing downwards to enter Mehlis gland lying on left side of midline and continuing

ventrally as the uterus; inner portion of latter sometimes considerably swollen

with semen (receptaculum seminis uterinum of Yamaguti). Uterus thrown into

a few convolutions closely crowded into region between anterior testis and acetabu-

lum, then passing above latter to one side of, and somewhat ventral to, cirrus sac

as the metraterm to terminate in the shallow genital atrium. Eggs 1-24 in uterus;

-075--087 by -050--062 mm.; average of 20 eggs, “081 x :059. Vitellaria lateral,

extending from anterior border of excretory vesicle to level of posterior border of

acetabulum, fields more or less coalescing in post-testicular region; rarely with

narrow irregular isthmuses crossing testicular zone. ‘Transverse vitelline ducts

lying immediately in front of anterior testis, one on more ventral level than the

other; passing below corresponding crus to travel inwards and dorsally to enter

the prominent yolk reservoir ; latter approximately median, dorsal. Laurer’s canal

transverse, just in front of anterior testis.

A specimen which had not yet produced an egg but whose seminal vesicle

was distended with sperms, possessed the following measurement in millimetres :—

length 1-47 mm.; breadth of oral crown -30, breadth at acetabulum -286; oral

sucker °057 diameter; acetabulum °20 by °185; sucker ratio 1:2°6; front of

acetabulum at -72 mm. from head end, ie., at almost half body length. In three

specimens which were each producing the first egg, their dimensions were 1-4 long,

-29 broad; 1-6, -36; and 1°65, -37 respectively, with the front of the acetabulum

at 1: 2-°3-2-4 of body length distant from the anterior end.

Very young worms were taken on various occasions. The smallest worm

(a well-preserved specimen, fig. 12) found in a pelican measured -42 mm. long;

“162 mm. across the oral crown; °125 mm. across the acetabular level; breadth of

oral sucker -045 mm., of acetabulum -07, the ratio of widths thus being 1: 1:6;

the two testes and ovary were recognisable; and the oral crown showed the same

relative sizes and positions of the oral spines as in the adult. In specimens *7

(fig. 13) and ‘8 mm. (fig. 14) long the corresponding measurements were :—

“187, -20; 125, -187: *375, -40 (ratio 1:1°86, 1:2); -05, -06; and -087, °137

(ratio of widths of suckers 1:1°7, 1:2°3) respectively. Vitelline glands in an

immature condition were abundant, but rather restricted in their distribution, in

a specimen 0°99 mm. long; they were not seen in smaller worms.

We believe that our species is £. mordax (T.ooss) described (1899, 688)

from an Egyptian pelican, P. onocrotalus, but the account of the parasite is brief

and Looss’ figure indicates a different arrangement of the ventral collar spines.

We are not aware of any subsequent description of that species and consequently

consider it wiser to describe our own as new, than to include it under E. mordar.

We expect that re-examination of the latter will reveal an arrangement of the

collar spines similar to that seen in the Australian parasite and will lead to the

suppression of our specific name. The dimensions mentioned by [.ooss generally

fall within the range stated by us; the general form is similar; the presence of

22 collar spines in both; the inmost ventral collar spine has a similar length; his

figure shows that the ratio of the breadths of the oral sucker and acetabulum is

about 1:2°6; the front end of the acetabulum is at about two-fifths of the body

length; and the eggs have similar dimensions. The host in each case is a species

of Pelecanus.

Echinostomum mordax was selected by Odhner (1910, 163) as the type of

a new genus, Heterechinostomum (Echinochasminae), but Price (1931, 6)

115

Fig. 1-10, Echinochasnms pelecani—1, cercaria; 2, lateral view of cercaria showing genital

system; 3, cysts on gills of fish; 4, metacercaria in cyst; 5, metacercaria; 6, redia;

7, mouth of redia, end view, showing pharyngeal lips; 8, freehand sketches of cercaria:

(a) in resting position, (b and c) when swimming; 9, adult, ventral view, collar crown

and body spines omitted; 10, head region, ventral view; 11, head end, lateral view;

12-14, very young stages from pelican, spines omitted from 13, 14. Fig. 1, 4-6, 9-14, drawn

with the aid of a camera lucida; fig. 4 and 5 to scale below fig. 5; 10 and 11 to scale

below 10; 9, 12 to 14 to same scale.

116

suppressed the latter as a synonym of Echinochasmus, to which genus he trans-

ferred H. mordax,

Two Australian species of Echtnochasmus have been described: &. teniicollis

S. J. Johnston 1919, from a cormorant in New South Wales; and E. prostho-

vitellatus Nicoll 1914 from a hawk in Queensland. The former species was

transferred to Paryphostomum by Price (1931) and by Johnston and Angel

(1942), and was subsequently shown by Johnston (1942) to be a synonym of

P. radiatum (Rud.). FE, prosthovitellatus, because of the forward distribution

of its vitellaria, was transferred by Price (1931, 6) to Lpisthinium.

The presence of 22 spines on the oral collar links £. wordav and E. pelecant

with a small number of other species of the genus. LE. schwartsi Price (1931),

from the muskrat and dog in U.S.A., seems to be the nearest species, but it differs

in the sizes of the suckers, length of oesophagus, size of eggs, and arrangement of

the oral spines on the ventral lobes. &£. neulvi Yamaguti 1939, from Milzvus

migrans in Japan, is a smaller species with a less extensive uterus containing very

few eggs, with a shorter oesophagus, and with a different form of the testes; but

it has a similar arrangement of the oral spines on the ventral lobes, and the eggs

are of similar size. FE. dietzevi Issaitchikov (1927), a 20-spined forin, possesses

three alternating angle spines on each side, as also do the 24-spined species.

FE. bursicola (according to Odhner 1910. pl. v, fig. 1) and £. cerci Bhalerao

(1926). LE. bursicola was placed under Episthintum by Lithe (1919), under

Echinochasmus by Odhner (1910, 162}, and restored to /pisthiminm by Price

(1931).

We have not succeeded in our attempts to infect with eggs of E. pelecani,

Ameria spp., Limnaca lessoni, Plotiopsis and Corbicuina angast, the chief mollus-

can species occurring in the Murray and its swamps at Tailem Bend. However,

we have encountered very commonly in Plotiopsis tate? (Melantidae) as a natural

infection, a cercaria which, though gymmocephalous, enters fish and gives rise to

an echinostome metacercaria belonging to Echinochasmus, This larva possesses

the same number of collar spines, and these have a similar arrangement to that

present in £. pelecamt, Such similarity has not been observed in any other adult

and larva known to us. Plotiopsis is restricted in the region to the banks of the

Murray, occupying a zone about three to six feet in depth, pelicans utilising the

adjacent bank as a resting place. We had not used the molluse for our subsequent

attemps at infection because we had not yet succeeded in rearing the species in our

aquaria. For the reasons given above we consider that the redia, cercaria and

metacercaria to be described are the larval stages of HH. pelecant,

CERCARIA STAGE

This cercaria is the commonest of those observed by us to be emitted from

Plotiopsis tatei (Melaniidae) at Tailem Bend and Swan Reach, and was found in

514 out of 7,123 examined, the percentage of infected individuals being 7-2. The

highest infection rate was observed on 12 December 1937, when 227 out of 519

individuals collected harboured the parasite, the percentage of infection being

nearly 44. The cercaria has been met with fairly regularly since then during the

period November to May of cach year. It has not been looked for during the

remaining months.

The swimming movements of this small active cercaria resemble those of an

echinostome. The resting position is typical (fig, 2), the organisms hanging as

a fine cloud in the water in that part of the tube which is of optimum light intensity.

The cercariae are given off in great numbers usually before 8 o’clock in the morn-

ing for the first few days in the laboratory, but on succeeding days few cercariace

emerge, Snails kept in captivity over the winter have not been observed to give

117

off cercariae in the following December, although small rediae were found in

the liver.

In ten specimens killed in boiling 10% formalin the body length varied from

114 to 179» (average 1292), and the breadth from 68 to 87» (average 79).

The anterior sucker varied in length from 30 to 38», and in breadth from 27 to

30 »; and the posterior sucker measured 27 to 30 w long by 27 to 30 broad. The

sucker ratio is 17:16. The distance of the posterior sticker from the anterior

end varied from 61 to 152 (average 84,2). The short annulate tail measured

91 to 178 » long (average 122). Both suckers have a frilled edge. The anterior

sucker is retractile and can be withdrawn for some distance into the body of the

cercaria, which then acts as a hood, Three refractive structures having the

appearance of ducts are present on the dorsal part of the sucker, and ventral to

them are 10 minute spinules, The body cells stain heavily with neutral red.

Cystogenous cells are arranged in four longitudinal groups and fill the central

parts of the body. They are pale yellow and, are filled with rod-shaped granules.

In, nearly every specimen two refractive spots were seen on either side of the

pharynx. These were the nuclei of the most anterior cystogenous cells of the two

median rows. The body has a fine granular appearance, due to minute spines on

the surface. Collar spines are not apparent, but in a few specimens refractive

dots (apparently the immature collar spines) are seen arranged vertically as

in fig. 1.

Following the mouth is a prepharynx. The pharynx is pear-shaped and is

consistently on its side when the cercaria contracts. The oesophagus is long and

the intestine is large and refractive and reaches to the bladder. The first part of

the intestine is particularly hard to sce.

The excretory system resembles that of an echinostome. The bladder is

bilobed and a small duct leads posteriorly to a wide prominent opening at the

junction of tail and body. The two main excretory tubes meet before entering

the bladder by a median duct. About nine excretory granules, some of them com-

pound, are present. Before these excretory tubes reach the anterior sucker, they

form a loop and descend to the level of the middle of the ventral sucker. Two

ciliated patches are present in these parts (fig. 1). The tube then divides into

two; the ascending ramus, travelling anteriorly, gives off a secondary branch near

the level of the pharynx; and the posterior ramus divides into two in the region

of the bladder. Flame cells were not seen, though consistently looked for, and

immature cercariae were examined. The excretory system in the tail is seldom

seen. It consists of a median tube dividing into two in the distal part of the tail,

This was confirmed by the study of immature cercariae.

The reproductive apparatus is represented by two masses of cells medially

placed, dorsal to the posterior sucker, They are connected by a strand of cells

(fig. 2) .. Their position indicates that the anterior is the anlagen ofthe cirrus

sac and associated structures, and that the posterior mass will differentiate into

the gonads.

ReEprA STAGE

_. Rediae (fig. 6) are present in all stages of development in thé tissues of the

snail. The liver is not usually discoloured but contains rediae and cercariae, which

are often present in far greater numbers elsewhere in the body., These parts are

coloured orange, and in heavily infected snails are compact masses of cercariaée and

rediae. The former are present in such numbers that they must, after birth, remain

in the tissues of the snail several days before being emitted. —

_. One well developed redia measured about 1-68 mm. and contained numerous

developing cercariae and germ. balls. “The mouth leads into a.small vestibule just

in front of a well-developed pharynx. The mouth of the, pharynx (fig..7) has

118

two semi-circular lips with thickened (probably chitinised) edges which form

strong biting jaws. The intestine is large and extends beyond the two foot pro-

cesses. The collar and birth pore are usually readily seen. The walls contain

orange pigment. Some snails giving off this cercaria during the summer were kept

through the winter and retested in the following December; although no cercariae

had been given off in the aquarium during the latter period, a number of small

rediae were found in the liver.

METACERCARIA STAGE

The cercaria has been found experimentally to encyst in the laboratory in the:

fish, Oryzias latipes and Gambusia affinis. Tadpoles (Crinia sp.) and the snails,

Limnaea lessoni and Ameria spp. were tried, but with negative result. The meta-

cercariae (fig. 3) are found only on the gills of the fish, where they may be present

in great numbers. They are oval and fairly uniform in size. Of ten specimens

the average measurements were 88 » by 68. In the laboratory all the cysts were

dead on the third day after the death of the fish. The cyst is thin-walled and’

easily broken and the expressed metacercariae die almost immediately, thus mak-

ing examination difficult. The addition of horse serum to the water did not

merease their longevity.

Free metacercariae measure about 0°18 mm, long, with a maximum width

(across the oral crown) of 075 mm. Small spines in transverse and longitudinal °

rows completely cover the body, giving a fine, but distinctly hairy, appearance to.

the metacercaria. Ventrally the collar spines become smaller and the first and third

spines from the ventral end are markedly smaller than any of the others. The

third spine, set at an angle to the others, is the most anterior in position. No.

separate group of corner spines was seen. Body spines, slightly smaller than the

rest, are present between the mid-dorsal gap of the collar spines and continue

up to the anterior sucker. The ten oral spinules noticed in the cercaria are still.

present, though not readily seen. The globules (usually eight or nine on each:

side) present in the metacercaria are probably the ducts of small gland (cysto-

genous) cells. They stain the same shade as the three oral ducts.

We fed to a pigeon and to a rat numerous small fish which had been infected

in the laboratory, an estimated total of about 200 cysts being fed in each case, but

no adult stages were recovered, Yamaguti (1933) described various stages in the

life cycle of some Japanese species (EF. elongatus, E. rugosus and E. rediodupli-

catus), having obtained his adults by feeding to rats, mice or dogs, infected

molluscs or tadpoles in’ which the mctacercaria stage occurred. He also figured

the miracidium of FE. rugosus (1933, 113). Cuirea (1931, 292) reported that

cysts of Z. liliputanus occurred on the gills of Roumanian marine fish and obtained

adults by feeding the latter to dogs. Kurisu (1931) found that, from a cercaria

from Melania, adult stages of E. grandis could be obtained from experimental rats

and dogs. Beaver (1941) published an excellent account of the life history of

E, donaldsoni from a grebe.

Our cercaria may be compared with that of Echinochasmus donaldsoni, as

described by Beaver (1941). The behaviour and general characteristics are

similar, The latter cercaria is distinctly smaller and the spination present on the

ventral sucker and ventral lip of the anterior sucker were not noticed in our

specimens. The body spines and collar spines have been seen, though with diffi-

culty, in our form. Slight differences in the excretory system are apparent. The

number of excretory granules is less and their position more restricted in our.

cercaria, and the bladder seen in the proximal part of the tail is not present in our -

form, unless the excretory sac, consistently present below the dorsal excretory

pore, be it. The difference between the two is more marked in the metacercaria,

where the collar spines number 22 in our form but only 20 in E. donaldsoni.

119

Rediae are similar in both forms, though in our species they are considerably

larger, and the lips of the pharynx are reinforced.

Cercaria indica XLI (Sewell 1922) is probably the cercaria of an Echino-

chasmus, Its habits and general appearance, including the three oral ducts, are

similar to those of our cercaria. Obvious differences are the much greater size of

the Indian form, the presence of diverticula at the base of the caudal excretory

canal, and the presence in the redia of an intestine which does not reach the level

of the foot processes.

Type specimens of the various stages have been deposited in the South Aus-

tralian Museum. We desire to acknowledge generous assistance rendered by

Messrs. G. G., F., and Bryce Jaensch and L. Ellis, of Tailem Bend, in regard to

collecting host material. The work was carried out with the aid of the Common-

wealth Research Grant to the University of Adelaide.

SUMMARY

1, The anatomy of Echinochasmus pelecani n.sp. from Pelecanus con-

sptcillatus is described.

2. Cercariae and rediae from Plotiopsis tatet are regarded as its larval stages,

the metacercaria developing experimentally in freshwater fish (Oryzias latipes,

Gambusia affinis).

LITERATURE

Beaver, P. C. 1941 Jour. Parasit., 27, 347-354

Buarerao, G. D. 1926 Parasitol., 18, 387-398

Crurges, I. 1931 Arch. Roum. Path. Exp. Microbiol., 4, 291-299

Dietz, E. 1910 Zool. Jahrb. Syst. Suppl., 12, (3), 256-512

Jounston, S.J. 1917 Jour. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 50, (1916), 187-261

Jounston, T. H. 1942 Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 66, 226-242

Jounston, T. H., and ANnceLt, L. M. 1942 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 66,

119-123

Kurisu, Y. 1931 Jap. Jour. Zool., 4, 1933, 105, Abstract of paper published

in Japanese in 1931

Looss, A. 1899 Zool. Jahrb. Syst., 12, 521-784

Ltwe, M. 1919 Siisswasserfauna Deutchlands, Heft 17

Nicott, W. 1914 Parasitol., 7, (2), 105-126 ;

OpHNER, T. 1910 Nordostafrikanische Trematoden, etc. Results Swedish

Zool. Exp. Egypt and White Nile, 23 A, 1-170

Price, E,W. 1931 Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 79, (4), 1-13

SEWELL, R. B. 1922 Cercariae indicae. Ind. Jour. Med. Res., 10, Suppl.

YamacvTl, S. 1933 Jap. Jour. Zool., 4, (1),1-134

YAMAGUTI, S. 1939 Jap. Jour. Zool., 8, (2), 129-210

THE OCCURRENCE OF CYCLOCLYPEUS IN THE

TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By IRENE CRESPIN, B.A., Commonwealth Palaeontologist,

Mineral Resources Survey Branch, Canberra, A.C.T.

Communicated by Sir Douglas Mawson

Summary

In a recent microscopic examination by the writer of a sample of bryozoal limestone from a locality

labelled “4 miles below Morgan, River Murray, South Australia,” and collected by Mr. F. A.

Cudmore some years ago, the discovery was made of the zonal foraminifera Cycloclypeus

victoriensis Crespin. As far as can be ascertained, this is the first record of the occurrence of the

genus Cycloclypeus in the South Australian Tertiary deposits. In the Victorian Tertiaries

Cydoclypeus is restricted to a definite horizon in the Middle Miocene, namely the Batesford

Substage (Crespin 1943), which is considered as a subdivision of the Balcombian Stage

120

THE OCCURRENCE OF CYCLOCLYPEUS IN THE

TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By Irene Crespin, B.A., Commonwealth Palaeontologist,

Mineral Resources Survey Branch, Canberra, A.C.T.

Communicated by Sir Douglas Mawson

[Read 11 May 1944]

In a recent microscopic examination by the writer of a sample of bryozoal

limestone from a locality labelled “4 miles below Morgan, River Murray, South

Australia,” and collected by Mr. F. A. Cudmore some years ago, the discovery was

made of the zonal foraminifera Cycloclypeus victoriensis Crespin. As far as can

be ascertained, this is the first record of the occurrence of the genus Cycloclypeus

in the South Australian Tertiary deposits. In the Victorian Tertiaries Cyclo-

clypeus is restricted to a definite horizon in the Middle Miocene, namely the Bates-

ford Substage (Crespin 1943), which is considered as a subdivision of the

Balcombian Stage.

Cycloclypeus victoriensis is very common in certain beds in the limestone

quarries at Batesford near Geelong, Victoria. It is also recorded from the Hamil-

ton Bore in Western Victoria, which is the nearest known occurrence to the present

South Australian one at Morgan. The genus is restricted to a very limited zone

in the Gippsland Bores. In all these instances it is found in association with the

important zonal foraminiferal genus Lepidocyclina, together with a typical fora-

miniferal assemblage. Further systematic collecting from the limestones near

Morgan may yield Lepidocyclina,

The genus Cycloclypeus is practically restricted to the Indo-Pacific region.

it is found living in shallow, warm, tropical waters in the vicinity of coral reefs.

Tt is well distributed in the Miocene rocks in North-west Australia, Papua, New

Guinea, the Netherlands East Indies and Japan, the various species being of dis-

tinct zonal value.

_DeEscrtpTion or THE LIMESTONE AND NOTES OF THE

ForRAMINIFERAL ASSEMBLAGE

The rock from Morgan is a cream-coloured bryozoal limestone containing

foraminifera, bryozoa, fragments of echinoids, molluscan shells and ostracoda.

The bryozoa are well preserved and all species are typical of those present in the

bryozoal limestones referable to the Balecombian Stage in Victoria. The species

of ostracoda are similar to those found in all Balcombian deposits,

As previously stated, the foraminiferal assemblage in the limestone from

Morgan is typical of the Batesford Substage. Operculina victoriensis Chapman

and Parr is very well developed and the eccentric shapes of many of the tests

indicate the warm to hot climatic conditions under which the organisms existed.

Gypsina howchini Chapman and Amphistegina lessonii d’Orb. are also common,

and the irregular shapes of the tests of these forms are also results of the climatic

conditions. Numerous tests of a species of Elphidinm are present. The form is

apparently new and seems referable to “Elphidium sp.” recorded by Howchin and

Parr (1938) from the Miocene beds in the Abattoirs Bore near Adelaide.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68, (1), 28 July 1944

121

Foraminifera determined from the limestone near Morgan are as follows:

Textularia fistulosa Brady

Dorothia parri Cushman

Clavulinoides ssaboi (Hantk.) var. victoriensis Cush.

Trifarina brady: Cushman

Dentalina soluta Reuss

Gypsina globulus Reuss

Notorotalia howchini (Chapman, Parr and Collins)

Cibicides victoriensis Chapman, Parr and Collins:

Siphonina australis Cushman

Llphidium sp.

Amphistegina lessonii d’Orb,

Operculina victoriensis Chapman and Parr

Cycloclypeus victoriensis Crespin

REFERENCES

CMAPMAN, F. 1910 A Study of the Batesford Limestone, Proc. Roy. Soc.

Vict., ns., 22, (2), 263-314

CHAPMAN, F., and PArr, W. J. 1938 Australian and New Zealand Species of

the Foraminiferal Genera Operculina and Operculinella, ibid., 50, (2),

283-287

Crespin, I. 1936 The Larger Foraminifera of the Lower Miocene of Victoria,

Pal. Bull. No. 2.(Dept. of the Interior)

Cresptn, I. 1940 The Genus Cycloclypeus in Victoria, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict.,

1.8., 53, (2), 301-314

CRESPIN, I. 1943 The Stratigraphy of the Tertiary Marine Rocks in Gipps-

land, Victoria, Pal. Bull. No. 4, Min. Res. Surv., Canberra

Howcuin, W., and Parr, W. J.. 1938 Notes on the Geological Features and

Foraminiferal Fauna of the Metropolitan Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide,

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 62, (2), 287-317

ON THE ANALYSIS OF BERYL FROM BOOLCOOMATTA,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By A. W. KLEENMAN, M.Sc.

Summary

Beryl, associated with quartz, feldspar and muscovite, is a not uncommon constituent of the

pegmatites associated with the Boolcoomatta granitic Bathylith. The first specimens from this area

were collected by Professor D. Mawson in the year 1906. In more recent years some few tons have

been mined to meet the demand for beryllium ore.

122

ON THE ANALYSIS OF BERYL FROM BOOLCOOMATTA,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By A. W. Ki&eman, M.Sc.

[Read 11 May 1944]

Beryl, associated with quartz, feldspar and muscovite, is a not uncommon

constituent of the pegmatites associated with the Boolcoomatta granitic Bathylith.

The first specimens from this area were collected by Professor D. Mawson in the

year 1906. In more recent years some few tons have been mined to mect the

demand for beryllium ore.

The beryl is met with as prismatic crystals from less than an inch to several

feet in diameter. Its colour varies from waxy yellow-green to a bluish-green.

though the Refractive Index (w = 17581) remains sensibly constant for specimens

that have been examined from several localities in the area. Of the specimens

collected from many occurrences on Old Boolcoomatta and Outalpa stations, two

have been subjected to critical chemical analysis with the following results.

The analyses are as set out below:

Molecular

Proportions

A B in B

SiO, - * - - - 64°70 64°51 1-075

Al,O, - - ~ - - 19-00 18-90 “185

FeO (total Iron) - - - 1-50 1-57 ‘O11

BeO~ - - - - - 12-50 12-74 “510

MgO - - - = - 13 “14 0035

CaO - - - 3 = 36 25 0045

Na,O - - - - - 34 “34 0055

K,O, Li,O, Rb,O, Cs,0-— - nil nil

H,O-— - - - - “10 -07

H,O-+ (loss on ignition) - 1-74 1-72 095

TiO, - : - . nil nil

100-37 100-24

A. is a light bluish-green beryl from a small open cut one mile south of Bin-

berrie Hill.

B. is a light yellow-green specimen, collected from an open cut on mineral

claim 2785, four and a half miles south of Bimbowrie.

The specific gravity (compared with water at 4° C.) of specimen A was deter-

mined as 2°654 but it contains many microscopic bubbles, hence the true value

exceeds that obtained.

The determination of Refractive Index was made by the immersion method

using sodium light, the Refractive Index of the liquid being checked on an Abbe

Refractometer beside the microscope.

Through the good offices of Mr. M. Mawby, who recently visited America

to investigate the supply of the lighter metals, I was able to obtain a copy of a

graph which Dr. W. T. Schaller, of the United States Geological Survey, has

compiled from a study of the better class analyses of beryl. In this graph, which

Dr. Schaller is preparing for publication and which he has emphasised, is only

tentative, the percentage of the various oxides has been plotted against the Re-

Trans. Rey. Sac. S. Aust., 68, (1), 28 July 1944

123

fractive Index ». According to the graph our specimen should have 126% BeO,

64:9% SiO,, 2°0% H,O, and 1-7% total alkalies.

The only oxides that differ widely from our analysis are the alkalies. The

explanation seems to be that the calcium, and perhaps iron and magnesium, are

proxying the alkalies in this beryl.

The analysis, when calculated on a basis of 18 oxygen atoms and excluding

water, gives the result:

(Bey.gq, Ca-go, Mg, Fea, Na-gg) Algvog (Sis-o1 Altos) Ors:

This agrees with the accepted formula, Be,, Al,, Sig, O,,-

However, if the water is considered and the whole calculated to 18 atoms of

oxygen the result is:

(Bes.zg, Cayo, Mg-oo, Fe-yg, Nagg) Al y-o9: Sts-7¢ (Or6-98» OH y-02)-

This is similar to the grossularoid formula suggested recently (Hutton 1943,

Belyankin and Petrov 1941, Pabst 1942), where four hydroxyl groups replace one

silicon-oxygen group.

Rough tests suggest that the majority of the water is lost at about 700°-800° C.

Some Notes on THE QUANTITATIVE EsTIMATION OF BERYLLIUM IN BERYL

In the analysis of Beryl the chemist is faced with several difficulties, con-

sequently a summary of the following methods based upon the author’s experience

in this field is worthy of record, Schoeller and Powell (1941) review the methods

for separating Beryllium from all the elements which are precipitated with it by

ammonia. However, the analysis can go astray long before the ammonia oxides

are assembled free from other metals.

Fusion with sodium carbonate and subsequent double evaporation with

hydrochloric acid to remove silica does not get beryllium into solution, In fact,

fusion at 1,100° C., as suggested by some authorities, results in forming ignited

beryllium oxide which is insoluble in concentrated hydrochloric. Sulphuric acid

will dissolve the beryllia but is not suitable where silica is to be separated and, in

any case, it is not expedient to have any amount of sulphate present at this stage.

However, the presence of even small amounts of potassium keeps beryllium in an

acid-soluble form, and it is suggested that fusion mixture be used to attack the

mineral. This attack is effective with ordinary finely ground powders. Some

beryllia remains with the silica, and is recovered after the evaporation of silica.

with hydrofluoric acid, by fusion with potassium pyrosulphate.

Assembly of the Oxides of the Ammonia Group

In ordinary mineral analysis, alumina, iron, titania, etc., are precipitated by

a slight excess of ammonia, using methyl red as an indicator. Mellor quotes the

iso-electric point of beryllium hydroxide at pH 7°5, and it is therefore suggested

that brom-thymol blue be used as an indicator in preference to methyl red, as it~

appears that the precipitation of beryllium hydroxide is not complete at the end —

point of methyl red. In the presence of the sulphate ion beryllium hydroxide ts

not quantitatively precipitated at any pH.

The filtrate from this precipitation should be evaporated down to small bulk

as recommended by Washington (1930) and, to assist the recovery of traces of

hydroxide, about 1 cc of a 10% aqueous solution of tannin should be added.

The small amount. of oxide which has been recovered from the silica and which

has been brought into solution by fusion with potassium pyrosulphate should be .

precipitated separately in order to keep the main bulk of the analysis free from

sulphate. About 1ce of tannin solution can be added to ensure complete pre-

cipitation.

124

The Separation of Aluminium and Beryllium

Schoeller and Powell (op. cit., 49) recommend the fusion of the ignited

oxides from the ammonium precipitate with 6 grams of sodium carbonate for two

hours. (This sodium carbonate should be free from potassium.) Leaching the

melt leaves beryllium and iron as an insoluble residue and alumina passes into the

filtrate. This alumina can be precipitated as hydroxide after acidifying the filtrate

with nitric acid. The leached residue from the fusion is washed with hot water,

ignited and weighed as “crude BeO”. This precipitate is then dissolved in potas-

sium pyrosulphate; iron and traces of alumina are precipitated by tannin in the

acetic acid solution, Schoeller and Powell, (op. cit., 48) add ammonia till it pro-

duces turbidity and then just clear the solution with acid. They then precipitate

by adding 10 grams each of ammonium chloride and ammonium acetate, and one

gram of tannin in water. This, however, tends to co-precipitate some beryllium,

and it is recommended that the ammonia, be added ‘to slight turbidity (or the end

point of bromphenol blue) and then 3cc of glacial acetic be added and the

aluminium and iron precipitated as before. This procedure precipitates aluminium,

iron and titanium free from beryllium. If doubt exists as to the completeness of

precipitation of aluminium, enough ammonia should be added to neutralise most

of the acetic, If no precipitate is formed aluminium was completely precipitated.

lf any precipitate is formed it should be carefully examined to determine whether

it is aluminium or beryllium hydroxide or a mixture of both,

The Separation of Iron and Beryllium

Iron cannot be separated from beryllium by boiling with a slight excess of

caustic soda, as is advocated by some workers (Groves 1937, Van Tongeren 1937).

Gilchrist (1943) has shown that beryllium hydroxide is precipitated hydrolytically

by sodium hydroxide in solutions ranging from pH 4°7 to pH 10. Experiment

has shown that in the separation of iron from beryllium, with slight excess of

sodium hydroxide, considerable amounts .of beryllium are precipitated even in a

short period of boiling, Probably the separation can be made by using warm

solutions but this possibility was not tested, as.with small amounts of iron the

precipitation with tannin is much more convenient. The precipitate with tannin

does not adsorb sulphate as the charge on the colloidal hydroxide is neutralised

by the colloidal tannin. =

REFERENCES

Beryankin, D. S., and Petrov, V. P. The Grossularoid Group (Hibschite

Plazolite), Am. Min., 26, 450-453 i

GitcHrist, R. 1943 Analytical Separations by Means of Controlled Hydrolytic

. Precipitation, Journ. Res., Nat. Bur. Stand., U.S.A.,. 30, 89

Groves, A. W. 1937 Silicate Analysis, London

Hetron, C. O. Hydrogrossular, a New Mineral of the Garnet-Hydrogarnet

Series, Trans. Roy, Soc. N.Z., 73, 174-180

Mertor, J. W. 1923 A Comprehensive Treatise on Inorganic and Theoretical

Chemistry, 14, London

Passt, A. Re-examination of Hibschite, Am. Min., 27, 783-792

SCHOELLER, W. R., and Powett, A. R. 1940 The Analysis of Minerals and Ores

of the Rarer Metals, London

Van TONGEREN, W. 1937 Gravimetric Analysis, Amsterdam :

Wasuincton, H. 5S. 1930 The Chemical Analysis of Rocks, 4th Ed., New York

WincHeELL, A. N. 1933 Elements of Optical Mineralogy, 3rd Edit.. New York

LARVAL TREMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN FRESHWATER

MOLLUSCS PART IX

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and E. R. SIMPSON, University of Adelaide

Summary

Cercaria ellisi n. sp.

A new echinostome cercaria with 45 collar spines has been studied in the laboratory for several

years. It is frequently obtained from Limnaea lessoni, from the Murray at Tailem Bend, and is the

only echinostome cercaria, with the exception of C. Paryphostomi-radiati, so far noticed by us from

this snail host. During the months mentioned the following numbers of snails were found infected

with it: May 1937, 10 out of 119 collected; December 1937, 100 of 639; April 1938, 1 of 12;

October 1939. 1 of 4; February 1940, 2 of 63; November 1940, 1 of 15; February 1941, 1 of 106;

January 1942, 6 of 116; February 1942, 2 of 96; March 1941, 30 of 883; May 1942, 1 of 8; Marcl1

1943. 1 of 3 - a total of 156 out of 2,064 examined during the period October to May, 1.e., 7-5%. It

was not recognised in collections made on other occasions during the spring, summer and autumn

1937-1944.

125

LARVAL TREMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN FRESHWATER MOLLUSCS

PART IX :

By T. Harvey Jonnsron and E, R. Simeson, University of Adelaide

[Read & June 1944]

Cercaria ellisi n. sp.

(Fig. 1-6)

A new echinostome cercaria with 45 collar spines has been studied in the

laboratory for several years. It is frequently obtained from Limnaea lessoni,

from the Murray at Tailem Bend, and is the only echinostome cercaria, with the

exception of C. Paryphostomi-radiati, so far noticed by us from this snail host.

During the months mentioned the following numbers of snails were found infected

with it: May 1937, 10 out of 119 collected; December 1937, 100 of 639; April

1938, 1 of 12; October 1939, 1 of 4; February 1940, 2 of 63; November 1940,

I of 15; February 1941, 1 of 106; January 1942, 6 of 116; February 1942, 2 of

96; March 1941, 30 of 883; May 1942, 1 of &; March 1943, 1 of 3—a total of

156 out of 2,064 examined during the period October to May, i.e., 7°5%. It was

not recognised in collections made on other occasions during the spring, summer

and autumn 1937-1944,

‘The cercariae are almost incessantly active and exhibit in swimming the

typical echinostome figure of 8 When the movement slackens, the tail moves

slowly from side to side and the body straightens and is thrust forwards. They

are negatively phototropic. The greatest nunibers of cercariac are emitted between

11 and 12 in the morning,

The body measurements (in micra) given below are taken from 10 specimens

killed by adding to the liquid containing them an equal volume of boiling 10%

formalin: length of body from 190-239 » (average 224) ; across region of ventral

sucker 129-141 » (average 136); anterior sucker 34-42» long (average 38) by

38-46 » wide (average 42). The posterior sucker was difficult to measure, since

in most specimens it was flattened, as in fig. 1. The length in such cases was from

23 to 34, but in well-extended specimens ranged from 46 to 53. The breadth

was more constant, varying from 57 to 65 » (average 61). No satisfactory sucker

ratio could be ascertained, though their relative breadths in compressed specimens

are about 1:1°5. The distance of the posterior sucker from the anterior end of

the cercaria varied from 103 to 148 (average 129), and the length of the tail

from 342 to 440 w (average 391). There is no finfold on the tail.

The collar, which is not very evident, bears 45 inconspicuous spines (includ-

ing four corner spines at each end) arranged in two:rows, The spines of the aboral

row are slightly longer than those of the oral series. One spine from the aboral

row and one from a corner group both measured 11-9. On the ventral and

dorsal surfaces minute spinules are arranged regularly as far as the level of the

ventral sucker.

The alimentary system is typical of echinostomes. The pharynx is suc-

ceeded by a relatively long oesophagus, from which the intestinal caeca arise at

the level of the anterior border of the acetabulum and extend to the urinary bladder.

Cystogenous cells are numerous and finely granular. The glands were not seen.

The genital anlage consisted of two cell masses connected by a string of cells, one

mass slightly posterior to the ventral sucker, the other on a level with the anterior

border of the ventral sucker.

Trans, Roy. Soe. 8. Aust,, 68, (1), 28 July 1944

126

The excretory system is typical of echinostomes. The cercariae were studied

in equal parts of horse serum and water. In most specimens 22 flame cells were

seen on each side, arranged as in fig. 1, and appeared to be grouped in threes, but

their connections were extremely difficult to work out. These cells opened into a

descending ramus which, near the base of the bladder, connected with an ascend-

ing ramus, The latter had 15 ciliated patches arranged as in fig. 1, and its con-

volutions were fairly constant in the cercariae studied. Ona level with the top of the

pharynx it loops around to enter the main excretory tube. This, as far as the level

of the acetabulum, is filled with many small granules, two or three being present

in cross section. At the level of the acetabulum the concretions cease, and the

main tube forms a characteristic bend in towards the centre and continues to the

bladder. The latter is in two parts, a smaller anterior and larger posterior. From

the latter a median tube extends for a short distance into the tail and opens by two

Fig. 1-6—Cercaria ellisi: 1, cercaria, collar spines omitted; 2, enlarged freehand

diagram of posterior part of excretory svstem of one side to show position of ciliary

flames and flame cells: 3, head end, showing spination; 4, cyst; 5, cercaria, general

appearance; 6, redia. Fig. 1, 3 and 4 drawn to scale below fig. 3.

short branches laterally. A small external opening is present on the dorsal sur-

face of the bladder.

Cysts have been obtained experimentally from the following hosts: Amertanna

pyramidata; A. tenuistriata (abundant in mantle cavity); Planorbis tsingy;

Limnaea lessoni,; Plotiopsis tatei (abundant in mantle cavity) ; Corbiculina angasi

(a few); and a tadpole, Crinia signifera (numerous in kidneys). The almost

circular cysts varied in measurement between 118 and 133 #; 10 from tadpoles

averaged 126 by 125 », while those from snails were slightly smaller, 122 by 122 p.

Two young tadpoles were placed in water infested with C. ellisi, and within

a few minutes cercariae were seen creeping over the surface of the tadpoles and

127

entering and emerging through the various apertures. After four hours the tad-

poles were killed. Twenty-nine cysts and five tailless cercariae were found in the

tissues of the mesonephros of one; they were present in least numbers amongst

the tubules of the kidney, and in greatest numbers massed near the glomeruli

along the nephric ducts. They were also present in the mesenteries.

Another tadpole, killed two hours after having been placed in infected water

showed, in addition to the positions mentioned above, two cercariae encysted in

the auricle, and several around the heart and aorta, in addition to one in the lung.

Cysts were fed to a canary in February and March 1942, and to a fowl in

November and December 1939, but the adult stage was not obtained.

The specific name is given in recognition of assistance received for many

years from Mr. L. Ellis, of Tailem Bend and Murray Bridge.

Cercaria ellisi most closely resembles C. clelandae Johnston and Angel 1939.

When killed under the same conditions our cercaria is slightly shorter and wider

than C. clelandae (230-290 » by 89-130»). This difference is more marked in the

metacercaria, the cysts of C. clelandae being consistently 30» larger. in diameter

than those of the present species, C. clelandae could not be made to encyst in tad-

poles which are a normal secondary host of C. ellzsi. The rediae in our species are

similar but grow to a larger size and contain more developing cercariae. The gut

is dark-coloured in C. clelandae and inconspicuous in our form. Slight differences

occur in the excretory system, which was extremely difficult to work out. Seven-

teen flames and 24 flame cells have been counted on each side in C. clelandae, but

only 15 flames and 22 flame cells were seen on each side in our form. As the flame

cells are inconspicuous, one or more may have been overlooked.

During January 1943 faecal material deposited by a pelican at Tailem Bend

was placed in an aquarium along with several Limnaea lessom, Amerianna spp.,

Hydrobia and Segmentina australis, and some carp. The snails were tested at the

end of February, and weekly after that. Ninety days later two of the Limnaea

were observed to be giving off a 45-spined echinostome cercaria closely resembling

Cercaria ellisi, and continued to do so until they died on 5 May 1943 and 5 June

1943 respectively. The remaining snails which had not already died before the

latter date, showed no infection.

The body length of these cercariae measured 201 to 243 » (average 216) ; the

maximum breadth 106-125 » (average 118); and the tail 293-343 » long (average

326). The anterior sucker was 42 to 57 uw long (average 46) ; the posterior sucker

42-57 » (average 46) long by 46-49 » (average 48) across, and its distance from

the anterior end of the cercaria varied from 106 to 140, (average 114). These

measurcments are similar to those given above for C. ellisi, the main differences

being in the breadth of the ventral sucker and the length of the tail, which are

somewhat less in this form, ‘The material examined consisted of preserved free

cercariae as well as of others taken from preserved Limnaea snails, and the

former may not have been mature when measured. The collar spines are similar

to those of C. ellisi, and body spines are present on the dorsal and ventral surfaces

down to the ventral sucker.

Numerous cysts were found in the liver (particularly at the apex) and mantle

cavity and scattered throughout the tissues of the longer-lived host snail. The

average measurement of ten cysts was 120 by 121». 114, was the lowest and

125 » the greatest length measurement observed by us. The Limnaea snails used

in the experiment were laboratory bred and free from infection. In experimental

infections of snails, to obtain cysts of C. ellisi, it is unusual to find these else-

where in the body than in the mantle cavity. It is possible that the cysts present

in the liver belonged to cercariae which had encysted there instead of emerging

128

and then encysting in a suitable host. It was very difficult to count the oral spines

of these metacercariae, but there seemed to be about 43. We regard this form as

belonging to C. ellisi..

The characters of the collar spines of C. ellisi (and C. clelandae) indicate that

the adult is probably a species of Echtmostoma or allied genus. The vertebrate

host is probably a bird whose diet includes freshwater molluscs. Nicoll (1914,

112) described Echinostoma hilliferum, a 47-spined species from a coot, Porphyrio

melanotus, North Queensland. Echinostoma bancrofti Johnston (1928, 140),

described from a waterhen, Gallinula tenebrosa, from the Burnett River, Queens-

land, is recorded to have about 44 collar spines arranged in two alternating rows,

with the four corner spines larger and more prominent, but the actual number of

oral spines is more likely to be 43 or 45. Gallinula tenebrosa and other species

of waterhens and coots occur abundantly in the swamps at Tailem Bend. We

have not yet found in the pelican an echinostome with 45 collar spines. Water-

hens and pelicans frequent the same narrow bank between the swamp and Murray

River on which the faecal sample was collected. Contamination of the material

from a pelican with that from a waterhen was thus possible.

Cercaria gigantura var. grandior nov.

(Fig. 7, 9-11)

On 27 January 1943 one, and on 24 February 1943 two, snails of Amerianna

pyramidata, from Tailem Bend, were found giving off a cercaria closely resemb-

ling C. gigantura Johnston and Angel 1941, which these authors regarded as the

larva of Petasiger australis. On the latter date two snails also (Asmerianna

pyramidata) gave off C. gigantura, and it was possible to study the two cercariae

side by side in the laboratory (fig. 8, 9). Macroscopically they appeared to be

quite distinct. C. gigantwra var. grandior was much the larger and was relatively

a sluggish cercaria. The resting period was usually 4-5 seconds (2-3 seconds in

C, gigantura) ; and the tail, because of its greater size, did not move as freely

from side to side as that of C. gigantura,

Microscopically C. gigantura var. grandior differed in the following charac-

ters: The tail was considerably larger, varying in length from 571 to 1,175 », with

an average of 717 in ten specimens (C. gigantura 434 to 584). its breadth

ranging from 144 to 245 w, with an average of 184 (C. gigantura 134 to 200 2).

The longitudinal muscles were more distinct in our variety, and the circular

muscles less so. There was no clear area between the central longitudinal muscle

strand and the outer edge (a consistent feature in C. gigantura), and the tail was

much less transparent. The myomere cells in the tail were also smaller. The tail

whip was neither as distinctly marked off, nor as long, as in the typical form, its

approximate length being 53 to 114 with an average of 79 (C. gigantura

83-192 p).

The body of the cercaria seemed in no essential particular other than size to

differ from that of C. gigantura, The measurements of the varicty, with those of

C, gigantura added in brackets for comparison, were as follows. Length of body

137-300 », average 258 yp (105-267); breadth of body across ventral sucker

57-103 », average 70m (50-100); length of anterior sucker 30-38», average

34 (21-30 ») ; breadth of anterior sucker 30-38 », average 34 w; length of posterior

sucker 34-42 p, average 36 (21-30 yw) ; breadth of posterior sucker 34-42 y, average

36 » (28-38 »). On remeasurement we found that the size of the ventral sucker

of C. gigantura fell within the range of that of the variety, The spinules present

on the ventral surface of the body were slightly larger in the new variety. The

position and character of the collar spines were identical. The length of the latter

was 5y. Their length in C. gigantura was given in error as 13 p. but on re-

129

measurement they were found to have the same length (5) as in the variety;

thus bringing the species closer to C. Petasigeri-nitidi Beaver 1939.

Our snail hosts died before work on the excretory system of the cercaria was

completed. The details found agreed with those of C. gigantura. In addition,

there was seen in the proximal part of the tail of one specimen a short tube

apparently connecting with the excretory bladder in the tail stem. This tube had

two short arms, hence it was possible that the excretory tube extended into the

Fig. 7-14. fig. 7, 9-11—Cercaria gigantura var. grandior: 9, with tail contracted;

10, with tail elongated—its more usual condition while alive; 11, cyst. Fig. 8—Cercaria

gigantura (typical), for comparison with its variety, fig. 9. Fig. 8-10 to same scale

(below 9) ; 7 and 11 to same scale (beside 7). Fig. 12-14—Cercaria angelae: 12, body;

13, tail; 14, a, b, c, freehand sketches of attitudes of living cercariac.

tail for a short distance and opened by two branches laterally. The redia was

similar to that of C. gigantura.

Cercariae were found experimentally to encyst around the oesophagus and

pharynx of the aquarium fish, Gambusia affinis, and leopard fish, Phalloceros

caudimaculatus, Cysts were not recovered from a Barbus exposed to infection

at the same time. The cysts were similar to those off C. gigantura but the dimen-

130

sions were slightly larger, ranging from 129 to 133» in length, and 91 to 99g in

breadth (C. gigantura 125 by 75»).

Cercaria angelae n. sp.

(Fig. 12-14)

Cercaria angelae is a small furcocercaria which has been found consistently,

though not frequently, emerging from its snail hosts, dmerianna pyranidata and

A. tenuistriata, from the Tailem Bend swamps. The examination of snails for

its presence took place from 15 January 1941 to 3 February 1944, and the per-

centage infection for the period was 0-9%. The largest number of infected snails

was observed. on 15 January 1941, when 27 out of 861 snails were found giving

off the parasite. We have associated with this new form the name of our col-

league, Miss L. M. Angel.

C. angelae remains fairly evenly distributed in water, and is an active and

yigorous swimmer, appearing to have no resting period. The maximum emission

from infected snails occurred between 12 noon and 1.30 p.m., during the summer

months. Cercariae collected during these hours were all dead by 9 a.m. the

next morning.

The following measurements of 10 cercariae were obtained after adding to

the water containing them an equal volume of boiling 10% formalin: Body length

111-216 » (average 158); body breadth 27-53 (average 41); length of tail

stem 163-190 » (average 175) ; breadth of tail stem 30-46» (average 36) ; length

of furcae 163-190 (average 176); length of anterior organ 30-46 (average

37) ; length of posterior sucker 19-23 » (average 19) ; breadth of posterior sucker

19-23 » (average 22); distance of posterior sucker from anterior end of cercaria

53-110 » (average 77).

_ About eight rows of irregularly-placed spines are present, forming a collar

immediately behind the mouth. Two rows of irregularly situated spines (about

12 in number) lie immediately dorsal and anterior to the mouth. Scattered spines,

difficult to see, occur on the anterior part of the body, and two irregular rows of

spines are present on the ventral sucker. The body has about the same width as

the tail stem, and the furcae and tail stem are of almost equal length.

The mouth is subterminal and the pharynx is immediately behind the anterior

organ. The latter is more muscular in its posterior portion, though not markedly

so. Immediately behind the pharynx are eight large nucleated cells staining deeply

with neutral red. The oesophagus is difficult to see and divides into two imme-

diately in front of the ventral sucker. The length of the intestine was not deter-

mined owing to the presence of gland cells obscuring it.

Four pairs of large, granular, irregularly-shaped penetration glands, staining

with neutral red, are present posterior to the ventral sucker. Their ducts lead

anteriorly (fig. 12) with irregular swellings opposite the nucleated post-

pharyngeal cells, and with an enlarged section in the anterior part of the anterior

organ. A pair of clear cells, with a central granular portion, are ‘present just

anterolateral from the ventral sucker. They do not stain with neutral red; perhaps

these preacetabular bodies (of Cort and Brackett 1937) are non-pigmented eyes.

The reproductive anlage is represented by a group of cells, staining with haematoxy-

lin, in the posterior part of the body. Six well-defined caudal bodies are present

in the tail stem. The first caudal body is often considerably smaller than the

remainder. A small pair of caudal bodies is present at the base of the furcae.

They vary considerably in shape and size, the size probably depending on the age

of the cercaria. In this region two globules of similar material are usually present,

attached to the central core which supports the caudal bodies,

The bladder consists of two rounded parts each connecting with a short

median section which reaches the tail. From the bladder a slightly coiled collect-

131

ing tube extends to the level of the posterior part of the ventral sucker. Here it

forms a loop, from which arises a postacetabular transverse commissure which

joins the loop of the excretory tube on the other side. The main duct then divides

into two, an anterior and, a posterior collecting tubule. Two flame cells open into

the posterior collecting tubule, and five flame cells into the anterior collecting tube.

Their arrangement is given in fig. 12. Two flame cells are present in the proximal

part of the tail. A median excretory tube runs down the tail stem, divides into

two branches which open at the tip of the furcae.

The long, much twisted sporocysts, present in the liver of the snail host, are

colourless or faintly tinged with yellow, and are hard to disentangle without

breaking. One end is pointed and very retractile, the other end rounded, the rest

of the body being of uniform thickness except where the cercariae are mature.

One sporocyst measured was 21 mm. long,

Attempts to obtain the metacerearia by exposing to infection freshwater

molluscs, prawns, crayfish and aquatic insect larvae, and fish (Gambusia, Barbus)

and a leech (Limnobdella australis) were unsuccessful. Many laboratory-bred

tadpoles of Limnodynastes tasmaniensis were also utilised, most of them unsuc-

cessfully, but in one of them a number of Tetracotyle were recovered many months

later in the walls of the thorax and rectum, in the pericardium, and in tissues of

the tail and those near the base of ,the forelimbs. The oval cyst, about 325 by

400 », had a thick clear outer wall, and a thin pigmented inner wall surrounding

the Tetracotvle which varied in size in different cysts. The Tetracotyle will be

described later. The presence of a pharynx was not demonstrated with certainty.

C. angelae is a Strigeid larva belonging to the pharyngeal longifurcate group.

The posterior position of the eight gland cells and of the transverse excretory

canal, as well as the presence of a well-developed acetabulum suggest that the adult

may belong to Apatemon, Strigea, or perhaps Apharyngostrigea.

In swimming constantly during its free life our cercaria is similar to

C. longifurca, C. dohema and the cercaria of Cotylurus flabelliformis. Of these

three, C. angelae in its anatomy somewhat resembles C. dohema Cort and Brackett

1937. The measurements of our specimens (which were killed in similar manner

to theirs) agree within a few micra with those given for C. dohema, except that

the furcae appear to be 20 » shorter in our species. Caudal bodies agree in number

and size except that in our specimens the caudal bodies at the base of the furcae

are not so large, The caudal excretory tube in C. angelae (though not readily

seen) opens at the tip of each furca. The excretory bladders are similar; that

illustrated in fig. 12 for our species is somewhat contracted, but when it is fully

expanded it assumes the form given for C. dohema. The number of flame cells

is four on each side of the body in C. dohemea, but there are seven in our species

and their arrangement is somewhat different. The nucleated postpharyngeal cells

are absent in C. dohema which has three instead of four pairs of penetration glands

in the postacetabular region.

C. riponi Brackett (1939) from Stagnicola from Michigan is another

Strigeid cercaria somewhat resembling our form, The most striking differences

are in its swimming habits; the different number and arrangement of the flame

cells and caudal bodies; the presence of only three pairs of postacetabular gland

cells; the smaller preacetabular bodies; and the absence of the postpharyngeal

group of nucleated cells.

The presence of four pairs of longitudinally arranged postacetabular glands

has been rarely recorded. Lutz (1933, 35, 40, 53, pl. ii, fig. 8) mentioned and

figured a “Pseudodistomulum” with such an arrangement, This organism, which

is really a cercaria that has shed its tail, was found encysted in a Brazilian frog,

Ayla crepitans, and a Tetracotyle resembling it was reported by him as occurring

in young birds, snakes and some carnivores. The adult stage was stated to be-

132

Strigea vaginata (Brandes) from Brazilian Accipitrine birds. Dubois (1938, 94,

fig. 37) republished Lutz’s figure as M esocercaria Strigeae-vaginatae. From the

foregoing it is most probable that the adult of C. angelae is a Strigea from an

Australian bird of prey, several species having already been recorded from hawks

and owls from North Queensland.

C. pseudoburti Rankin 1939 has four pairs of postacetabular gland cells, but

their arrangement is different from that in,C. angelae. In C. burti Miller the

eight postacetabular glands are arranged in two transverse series (Cort and

Brooks 1928, pl. xxviii). This cercaria is the larva of an Apatemon and

closely resembles that of A. gracilis as described by Szidat (1929). Cercaria

helvetica Dubois (1929, 94, pl. iv, fig. 14) from Limnaea and .Planorbis

in Switzerland has the eight glands postacetabular and arranged in two close longi-

tudinal rows, and has pre- and postacetabular excretory commissures, but the

relative lengths of the prepharynx and oesophagus are different from those of

C. angelae. Dubois’ cercaria also belongs to Apatemon (Dubois 1938, 96).

The cercaria of Apharyngostrigea pipientis, described by Olivier (1940), has

its eight glands almost surrounding the acetabulum, and also differs from

C. angelae in the relative lengths of ‘the prepharynx and oesophagus and in the

form of the tail stem, especially when contracted.

SUMMARY

(1) Cercaria ellisi n. sp., a 45-spined echinostome, is described from Limnaea

lessoni. The cyst stage occurs in the molluscs, Amerianna spp., Planorbis isingt,

Limnaea lessoni, Corbiculina angasi and Plotiopsis tatet; as well as in the tadpole

of Crinia signifera, The adult probably occurs in a Ralline bird, e.g., a waterhen.

(2) Cercaria gigantura var. grandior nov. from Amerianna pyramidata differs

from the type form in the characters of the tail and in having slightly larger cysts.

The latter occurs in freshwater fish.

(3) Cercaria angelae n.sp. from Amerianna spp. is a Strigeid larva with

eight longitudinally arranged postacetabular penetration glands. The metacercaria

is a Tetracotyle occurring in tadpoles. Its adult stage is perhaps a species of

Strigea parasitic in Australian birds of prey or an Apharyngosirigea from herons.

We desire to acknowledge assistance generously given by Messrs. G. G.

Jaensch, Bryce Jaensch and L. Ellis, of Tailem Bend, Murray River, in regard

to material. The work was carried out under the terms of the Commonwealth

Research Grant to the University of Adelaide. Type material is being deposited

in the South Australian Museum,

LITERATURE

Braver, P. C. 1939 Jour. Parasit., 25, 268-276

Brackett, §. 1939 Jour. Parasit., 25, 263-266

Cort, W. W., and Brackett, S. 1937 Jour. Parasit., 23, 265-280; 297-299

Cort, W. W., and Brooxs, S. T. 1928 Tr. Amer. Micr. Soc., 47, 179-221

Dusors, G. 1929 Bull. Soc. Neuchat. Sci. Nat., 53, (1928), 1-177

Dunors, G. 1938 Monogr. Strigeida, Mem. Soc. Neuchat. Sci. Nat., 6, 535 pp.

Jonnston, T. H. 1928 Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 4, (1), 135-142

Jounsron, T. H., and Ancer, L. M. 1939 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63,

200-203

JoOuNSTON, 2; H., and Ancer, L. M, 1941 Trans. Roy. Soc. 5S. Aust., 65,

285-291

Lurz, A. 1933 Mem. Inst. Osw. Cruz, 27, 33-60

Nicott, W. 1914 Parasitol., 7, 105-126

Otivier, L. 1940 Jour. Parasit., 26, 447-477

RaAnkKIN, J. S. 1939 Jour. Parasit., 25, 87-91

AUSTRALIAN ACARINA, FAMILIES ALYCIDAE AND

NANORCHESTIDAE

By H. WOMERSLEY, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., Entomologist, South Australian Museum

Summary

Subfam. BIMICHAELINAE noy.

The family Alycidae Canest. 1891 (previously unknown from Australia), as hitherto understood by

acarologists, includes the following twelve genera:

133

AUSTRALIAN ACARINA, FAMILIES ALYCIDAE AND NANORCHESTIDAE

By H. Womerstey, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., Entomologist, South Australian Museum

[Read 8 June 1944]

Subfam. BIMICHAELINAE nov.

The family Alycidac Canest. 1891 (previously unknown from Australia),

as hitherto understood by acarologists, includes the following twelve genera:

Alycus C. L, Koch 1842 (= Pachygnathus Dugés 1834).

Bimichaelia Sig Thor 1902 (= Michaela Berl. 1884, preoc.).

Nanorchestes Tops. and Trt. 1890 (== Monalichus Berl. 1904, in part).

Caenonychus Ouds. 1903.

Sebaia Ouds. 1903 (= Monalichus Berl. 1904, in part).

Sphaerolichus Beri. 1904,

Speleorchestes Tragh. 1909,

Leptalicus Berl. 1910.

? Alicorhagia Berl. 1910.

Hybalicus Berl. 1913.

Epistomalycus Sig Thor 1931.

Willania Ouds. 1931.

The family name Pachygnathidae has been used by Oudemans, Vitzthum and

other workers, on the opinion of the first author that Dugés’ genus Pachygnathus

(type P. villosus Dugés 1834) is synonymous with Koch’s Alycus (type A. roseus

Koch 1842). A comparison, however, of the original figures and description of

Dugés and Koch, reproduced by Oudemans in his “Krit. Hist. Acarol., IIc, 868-

869,” does not support this view, and it seems preferable at present to keep to

Sig Thor’s use of Canestrini’s family name Alycidae based on Koch’s genus. In

the Zool. Anz., 95, 109, 1931, Sig Thor erected a third suborder, the Monopro-

stigmata, of the Prostigmata (in which he also placed the Stomatostigmata as a

suborder) for the genera Nanorchestes and Speleorchestes. In the Prostigmata

s. str. the peritremal tubes are paired and open in front of the mandibles, and in

the Stomatostigmata the opening is medial and behind the mandibles, whereas in

the Monoprostigmata the stigmal tube is unpaired, somewhat hook-like, with a

small median sac, and opens amidst the mouth parts and in close association with

the mandibles,

Sig Thor, however, did not follow this up by making the necessary new

family for these genera, and the name Nanorchestidae is herewith proposed.

A close study of the other genera hitherto placed in the Alycidae reveals

further important differences in the various genera which suggest that it is in

reality a rather heterogeneous assemblage.

The genus Bimichaelia, with very long slender mandibles with short simple,

almost styliform chelicerae, and without dorsal setae, must be separated from

the rest, which all have short robust mandibles with stout, sometimes dentate

chelicerae, and with two dorsal setae. or this genus, a new subfamily,

Bimichaelinae is proposed.

The genera Nanorchestes, Speleorchestes, Epistomalycus, Sebaia, Caenony-

chus and Wéillania all have the tarsal claws wanting, a claw-like empodium, a

more or less triangular well developed epistome overlapping the base of the

mandibles, besides a more or less quadrate propodosomal shield. As yet, how-

ever, only in the first two named genera has the structure of the stigmal organ

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68, (1), 28 July 1944

134

been defined. Nevertheless, on the other above mentioned characters the other

four genera are more nearly related to Nanorchestes and Speleorchestes than to

Bimichaelia or the Alycus group of genera. In Nanorchestes and Speleorchestes

the epistome is longitudinally bilobed, freely jointed to the anterior margin of the

propodosoma, and without any setae. In the latter genus Tragardh shows the

two lobes of the epistome united to their respective mandibles. Whether this is

due to pressure in mounting, or is a further development from the form seen in

Nanorchestes cannot be decided, but if these two lobes adjoined they would cer-

tainly resemble closely that found in the latter genus.

The genus Caenonychus Ouds. has been rather inadequately described and

has been variously placed in the Eupodidae by Oudemans, the Tydeidae by Vitz-

thum and the Alycidae by Sig Thor. From the details available it would seem to

be better placed in the new family Nanorchestidae and might possibly be synonym-

ous with Trigardh’s Speleorchestes, in which case Caenonychus would have

priority.

While in Nanorchestes and Speleorchestcs the epistome is distinctly marked

off from the anterior margin of the propodosoma, in Epistomalycus and Willania,

it is not only fused with the propodosoma but arises some distance behind the

anterior margin, and in both genera near the apex is furnished with a pair of

ciliated setae (or “vertical hairs” of Oudemans). W#illanta was described with-

out any figure, but there does not appear to be any reason why it should be

separated from Sig Thor’s genus Epistomalycus which was described in March

1931, two months before Oudemans’ description was published.

The genus Sebaia was erected by Oudemans for Berlese’s Alicus (Monali-

clus) siculus on the basis of its clavate posterior sensillae and has been quoted

as a synonym of Monalichus. Berlese, however, although placing siculws in

Monalichus, definitely stated that M. arboriger, now Nanorchestes arboriger, was

the type. Sebaia, then, is a synonym only in part of Monalichus.

In the present paper the old family Alycidae is divided into the Alycidae s. str.

and Nanorchestidae fam., nov., as follows:

Large to small mites, of subquadrate, globose, spherical or elongate form, with

an evenly rounded epistome, and tarsi furnished with paired claws and a ciliated

more or less pad-like or claw-like empodium, Propodosoma often with a crista

and rounded lens-like pseudo-capitulum, and with usually two pairs of sensillae.

Fam. Alycidae Canest. s. str.

Very small mites, usually saltatorial. Propodosoma with a more or less

quadrate shield and with a prominent triangular epistome. With (? always) an

unpaired somewhat sickle-shaped peritremal tube opening orally and in close

association with the mandibles. Claws absent, empodium present and claw-like.

Fam. Nanorchestidae nov.

Fam. ALYCIDAE Canest. 1891 s. str.

In this family should be included the genera Bimichaelia, Alycus, Sphaeroli-

chus, Hybalicus, Leptalicus and Paralycus g.nov. Of these Bimichaelia can be

separated from all the rest on the very different form of the mandibles, etc., and

is here placed in a new subfamily, Bimichaelinae, the remaining genera forming

the Alycinae.

The following key will separate the genera:

1 Mandibles very long and slender with short non-dentate, almost styliform chelicerae;

without dorsal setae. Propodosoma with a broad, more or less distinct crista ending

anteriorly in a lens-like pseudocapitulum; with two pairs of sensillae of which the

posterior are globose, the anterior filamentous. Eyes absent. Body form subquadrate.

Claws 2; etopodium ciliated, not claw-like. Subfam. Bimichaelinae nov.

Gen. Bumichaclia Sig Thor 1902

=: Michaelia Berl. 1884 preoc.)

135

Type—M. angustana Berl. 1884, A. M. S., fasc. 6, Italy ; also M, setigera Berl. 1904.

Redia II. Acari nuovi, Manip. III, Italy; M. subnuda Berl. 1905. Redia IT.

Mat. pel. Manip. V, Italy; M. grandis Berl, 1913. Redia IX. Acari nuovi. Manip.

VII-VIII, Java; and the following new species, B. australica n.sp., B. stellaris

n.sp. and B. pusilla n.sp., from Australia, B, nova-sealandica n.sp., from New

Zealand.

Mandibles short and robust with short slender cheliccrae, Propodosoma without

crista, with or without pseudocapitulum, with one or two pairs of sensillae of which

the posterior may be globose, clavate or filamentous. Shape subquadrate, elongate-

oval or globose. Subfam. Alycinae nov. 2

2 Body shape subquadrate. Propodosoma with both pairs of sensillae filamentous, with-

out crista. or pseudocapitulum. Hysterosoma with impressed transverse lines. Eyes

present. Two claws with claw-like ciliated empodium. Gen. Alycus Koch 1842

Type—<Alycus roseus Koch 1842. C. M. A. (= ? Pachyguathus villosus Dugés

1834), Europe; also Alycus occidentalis u.sp., Australia.

Body globose or spherical, with or without pseudocapitulum and without crista. One

or two pairs of filamentous sensiliae. 3

Body clongate-oval. Posterior sensillae clavate or filamentous. Without pseudo-

capitulum. 4

3 Body spherical. Eyes 1-+1 (?2-+2). Propodosoma triangular, indistinctly separated

from hysterosoma, anteriorly with a large lens-like pseudocapitulum. Both pairs of

sensillae filamentous. Anterior tibiae and tarsi dilated and spinous. Coxae in two

closely adjacent groups. Gen. Sphaerolichus Berl. 1904

Type—S. armipes Berl. 1904. Redia II. Acari nuovi, Manip. IIL, Italy. (Berlese

says only one eye on each side but his figure suggests two on each side.)

Body globose but not spherical. Propodosoma without pscudocapitulum, with only

one {?) pair of sensillae, these basal. Eyes present or absent.

Gen. Hybalicus Berl. 1913

Type—Alicus ornatus Berl. 1904. Redia I]. Acari nuovi. Manip. III, Java; also

H. flabelliger Berl. 1913. Redia IX. Manip. VII-VIIT, Java; and H. gibbosus

n.sp. from Australia.

4 Both pairs of sensillae filamentous. Eyes absent. Gen, Leptalicus Berl. 1910

Type—A. (L.) paoli Berl. 1910. Redia VI. Acari nuovi. Manip. V, Italy; also

A. elongatus Berl. 1904. Redia II. Acari nuovi. Manip. ITI, Italy.

Posterior sensillae clavate. Eyes absent. Gen. Paralycus nov.

For Alicus pyrigerus Berl. 1905. Redia II. Mat. pel. Manip. V, Italy.

Subfam. BIMICHAELINAE nov.

Gen. BIMICcHAELIA Sig Thor 1902

Bimichaelia australica n. sp.

Fig. 1, A-H

Description—Shape quadrate. Colour in life white. Length to 900», width

to 560 pn. Suture between propodosoma and hysterosoma, and several impressed

transverse lines on hysterosoma which disappear when mounted. Propodosoma

roughly triangular with a broad median crista ending anteriorly in a lens-like

pseudocapitulum (cf. fig. 1, A, H); with two pairs of sensillae, posterior globose

and 21 » long, 104 apart, anterior filamentous, 50% long and apparently simple,

65» apart. Eyes absent. Mandibles long and slender, 230, with styliform

chelicerae and no dorsal setae. Palpi 5-segmented, apical segment with a stout

terminal rod flanked on each side by a pointed seta. Legs relatively short, I 540 p,

II 475 », IIT 375 », 1V 425 uw; tarsi I three times as long as wide; segments IV-VI

of legs I and I] with sensory rod-like setae as in fig. 1, E; tarsi with paired claws

and a short median ciliated empodium. Dorsal cuticle with a reticulate pattern

as in fig. 1, A, H, and with short, ciliated setae 15 long. Coxae in two groups,

somewhat widely separated. Ventral setae as on the dorsum,

Locality—Type and paratypes from moss from Waterfall Gully, South Aus-

tralia, 15 April 1933 (R. V. S.); from moss from Long Gully, National Park,

136

South Australia, August 1938, three specimens (H. W.); English Jungle,

Malanda, Queensland, May 1935 (Parkhouse), one specimen; Mount Wellington,

Tasmania, May 1935, December 1937 (J. W. E.), July 1943 (V. V. H.).

Fig. 1, A~-H—BSumichaclia australica n.sp.: A, dorsal view showing crista, sensillae,

pseudocapitulum and reticulation of cuticle, also dorsal and leg setae more enlarged;

B. venter showing position of coxae; C, palp: D, chelicerae of mandibles; E, last

three segments of leg I; F. claws and empodium from below; G, same from side;

H, left half of propodosoma more enlarged.

Bimichaelia nova-zealandica n. sp.

Fig. 2, A-C

Description—Shape subquadrate. Colour (in spirit), white. Length 2,000 y,

width 1,360 2. Suture between propodosoma and hysterosoma; no suture lines on

hysterosoma when mounted. Propodosoma roughly triangular with broad median

crista and an anterior lens-like pseudocapitulum; with two pairs of sensillae,

137

posterior globose, 21 » long, 140 » apart, anterior filamentous 78 » long, apparently

simple, 85 » apart. Eyes absent. Mandibles long and slender, 610 », with almost

styliform chelicerae and no dorsal setae. Palpi 5-segmented, apical segment with

stout terminal rod flanked on each side by a pointed seta. Legs 6-segmented,

relatively short, I 1,275», IT 1,190», HT 1,100 4, TV 1,360 »; tarsus | three times

as long as wide; no sensory rod-like setae observed on segments IV-VI of legs

I and IJ; ciliated setae on tarsi with a longer apical point than in preceding species ;

Fig, 2, A-C—Binuchaelia nova-sealandica n.sp.: A, crista, sensillae, pseudocapitulum

and cpistome with dorsal seta en‘arged; B, ventral seta; C, leg seta, D-E-—Bimichaelia

pusilla n.sp.: D, propodosoma; E, last three segments of leg I. F-G—Bimichaelia

stellaris n.sp.: F, right half of propodosoma; G,. dorsal reticulations highly enlarged.

tarsi with paired claws and a short inconspictious ciliated empodium. Dorsal

cuticle reticulately patterned as in fig. 2A, with short, 10», oval setae with long

ciliations. Coxae in two groups, somewhat widely separated. Ventral setae

similar to dorsal but with longer ciliations,

Locality—One specimen from Davies Bush, Manurewa, New Zealand,

14 July 1933 (E. D. P.).

Bimichaelia pusilla n. sp.

Fig, 2, D-E

Description—Shape quadrate. Colour in life white. Length to 255 n,

width to 185 1. Suture between propodosoma and hysterosoma; impressed trans-

verse lines on hysterosoma distinct even when mounted, Propodosoma roughly

138

triangular ; crista present but not well defined, only shown by the somewhat longer

and stronger reticulations, and ending in a pseudocapitulum smaller than in preced-

ing species and longer than wide; with two pairs of sensillae, posterior globose

and ciliated, 16% long, anterior filamentous, 27 » long with several lateral branch-

lets; bases of posterior sensillae 56 apart, anterior sensillae 24 apart. Eyes

absent. Mandibles long and slender, 88 » with almost styliform chelicerae and no

dorsal setae. Palpi 5-segmented, last segment with apical rod flanked by two

pointed setae as in preceding species. Legs 6-segmented, short, I 152, If 145 yp.

{11 112, IV 135 «2; tarsus I short, only twice as long as wide; tarsi [ and LI with

rod-like sensory setae as in B. australica; claws two, with a median ciliated

empodium. Dorsal cuticle reticulately patterned as in fig. 2D, with short ciliated

setae, 8» long. Coxae in two groups, but not as widely separated as in other

species. Ventral setae as on the dorsum.

Locality—Type and two paratypes from moss from Normanville, South Aus-

tralia, September 1943 (H. M. Cooper); two specimens from moss from Sassa-

fras, Victoria, December 1931 (H. G. A.).

Bimichaelia stellaris n. sp.

Fig, 1, F-G

Description—Shape subquadrate. Colour in life white. Length 550 4, width

190». Suture between propodosoma and impressed transverse lines on hystero-

soma weak. Propodosoma rather triangular with a crista, a small hardly lens-

like pseudocapitulum longer than wide, and with the usual two pairs of sensillae,

the posterior globose, smooth, 15 » long with bases 65 » apart, anterior filamentous

and ciliated. 47 » long and bases 36 apart. Mandibles long and slender, 170»

with almost stylifoerm chelicerae, and without setae. Palpi 5-segmented, last seg-

ment with a terminal rod clavate at tip and not parallel-sided, flanked on each side

with a pointed seta. Legs short, I 270, I] 240, IIT 204 pn, [V 235»; tarsi [

three times as long as wide; segments [V-VI of legs I and IT with usual sensory

rods; tarsi with paired claws and ciliated more or less pad-like empodium. Dorsal

cuticle with reticulate pattern as figured. differing from other species in the pattern

becoming stellate on hysterosoma, with short, 5, ciliated setae. Coxae in two

groups. Ventral setae as on dorsum.

Locality—One specimen in moss from Mount Arden, 12 miles north of Quorn,

South Australia, November 1943 (17. M. C.).

Subfam. ALYCINAE nov.

Gen, Atycus Koch 1842

Alycus occidentalis n. sp.

Fig. 3, A-E

Description—Shape subquadrate with the hysterosoma rather higher than

the propodosoma. Colour in life white. Length to 350», width to 208». Before

mounting with impressed transverse lines on hysterosoma. <A suture between pro-

podosoma and hysterosoma. Propodosoma roughly triangular, without crista or

pseudocapitulum; with two pairs of strongly ciliated filamentous sensillae, each

48 » long, bases of posterior 52 » apart, of anterior 29 apart. Eyes, one on each

side. Mandibles short and robust, 56» long, with two setae, one sub-basal and

about 22 » long, the other only 8 » long and near base of fixed finger of chelicerae,

chelicerae somewhat slender but not styliform and without teeth, movable finger

15,1long. Palpi 5-segmented, rather short and stout, last segment without apical

rod or claw but with a sub-basal stout curved rod-like seta (cf. fig. 3,C). Legs

short, I 136, II 100, TIT 120», 1V 1504; segments IV-VI of legs IT and

II with sensory rod-like setae as in fig. 3,D; tarsi with paired claws and ciliated

claw-like empodium ; tarsi I twice as long as wide. Dorsum with numerous short,

139

16 p, ciliated setac arising from circularly striated areas (cf. fig. 3,4). Coxae in

two groups, narrowly separated; coxae 1V widely separated from each other.

Ventral setae similar to dorsal.

Locality—Many specimens in moss from Glen Osmond, South Australia,

July 1934 (R. V.S.).

Fig, 3, A-E—Alycus occidentalis n.sp—A, dorsal view; B, mandible; C, palp; D, last

three segments of leg 1; E, dorsal seta. F-I—Alyeus ? roseus Koch: F, propodosoma:

G, palp; H, leg I, last three segments; 1, claws and cmpodium.

Atycus ? RosEUS Koch 1842

Fig. 3, F-I

Description—Shape subquadrate, propodosoma roughly triangular but with

a rectangular shield, hysterosoma subquadrate, rather longer than wide with a

slight constriction at one-third. Colour in life a light rosy pink. Length 400 p,

width 183 2. Propodosoma with two pairs of long ciliated sensillae, posterior

52 » long and bases 28 » apart. anterior 40 » long and close together, the bases not

more than 5 apart. Eyes, one on each side, black pigmented, on outside of shield,

and with the usual ocular shield. Mandibles robust, 45 » long, probably with two

setae but only a very short one near base of chelicerae visible; chelicerae smaili.

Palpi 5-segmented, relatively longer and more slender than in occidentalis, last

segment without apical rod but with a curved sttb-basal rod. Legs short, T 182 »,

Il 130 yn, HI 122, 1V 138 ,, tarsi 1 with sensory rods as figured on segments

IV-VI; tarsi I about three times as long as wide, tarsi with two claws and a ciliated

claw-like empodium, Dorsal cuticle striated, with small ciliated setae arising from

indistinct circularly striated areas, but these areas very much smaller than in

occidentalis ; dorsal setae mostly only 3 » long but lengthening posteriorly and last

three rows reaching to 10 » in length.

Locality—Two specimens in moss from Mount Arden, twelve miles north of

Quorn, November 1943 (H. M. C.).

140

Remarks—This is somewhat doubtfully referred to Koch’s European species,

but good figures and descriptions have not been published and comparison with

authentic material must be awaited.

Genus Hysaricus Berlese 1913

Acari nuovi, Maniplus VII-VIII, Redia, 9, 78, 1913. Genotype Alicus ornatus

Berl, 1904, ib:d., Maniplus HI, Redia, 2, 13; also H. flabelliger Berl. 1913,

ibid,

Berlese says, “With the characters of the genus Alicus Koch (Berlese) but

with globose abdomen. Size small.”

As far as one can judge from Berlese’s description and figures and from a

study of the following new species, the genus may provisionally be more fully

diagnosed as follows:

Small mites of globose form. Propodosoma subtriangular and narrower than

hysterosoma with only one posterior pair of ciliated filamentous sensillae present

(Berlese shows a second anterior pair in ornatus but not in flabelliger). Mandibles

short and robust with two dorsal setae, the posterior and longer being near base

ot chelicerae; chelicerae short, stout and dentate. Palpi 5-segmented, last segment

with a terminal long apically knobbed rod. Claws two, long and slender, with

long ciliated empodium. Coxae in two groups, widely separated, coxae IV very

large and elongated and touching medially.

Hybalicus gibbosus n. sp.

Fig. 4, A-G

Description—Shape globose with hysterosoma much higher than propodosoma,

Colour in life white. Length to 310, width to 200”. Suture between propo-

dosoma and hysterosoma. Anterior portion of propodosoma forming a shield,

posterior margin of which runs just behind sensillae bases; with two pairs of stout

curved ciliated setae and a pair of long, 104», ciliated sensillae; in front of the

propodosoma is a semicircular lens-like epistome carrying two short bent ciliated

setae; behind the shield the propodosoma carries a pair of stubmedian strong

curved ciliated setae, and outside of these a pair of shorter similar setae. Eyes,

one on each side, difficult to see, for they are quite lateral and in front of a thick-

ened portion of the lateral margin of the propodosoma, which apparently represents

the oval organ behind the eyes of Nanorchestes. Mandibles bulbous, longitudinally

finely striated, chelate, with two dorsal setae, a short fine one at base of chelicerae

and a longer stronger and ciliated one more posterior, Maxillae as in fig. 4, E.

Palpi 5-segmented, apical segment with a terminal, apically knobbed rod and a

strong pointed subapical seta, all other setae ciliated. Dorsal cuticle verrucose

and finely striated. Dorsal setae strongly curved, ciliated, 30 » long and arranged

44448.8.8. Legs long and slender, I 182 » (including coxae), II 135 », III 150 4,

IV 235 »; tarsi with paired slender claws and median ciliated empodium. Coxae

in two groups, I, If and III small and separated, 1V large elongate and meeting

in mid-line, the posterior margin being very much thickened and strengthened.

Venter: three pairs of small setae on gnathosoma; behind gnathosoma a pair of

longer setae and a similar pair between coxae I, coxae I and III with two setae,

II with one, and IV with six setae; at junction of coxae [V is a pair of very small

setae ; on each side of genital opening a pair of setae and posterior thereto 18 setae

arranged 2.4.4.4.4, 164 long. Genitalia with three pairs of acetabula, and fringed

with setae.

Locality—Many specimens from moss from Black Swamp, near Currency

Creek, South Australia, October 1943 (H. M. C.).

141

Remarks—tIn its globose form this species fits into the genus Fybalicus, as

briefly defined by Berlese (oc. cit.). It differs from both the genotype (ornatus)

and flabelliger in the nature of the dorsal setae. In ornatus from Java the dorsal

setae are more numerous, shorter and almost straight with fewer ciliations, and

the cuticle is more densely furnished with oval verrucae. In flabelliger from

Italy the dorsal setae are short and flabellate. In neither of his species has Berlese

observed the presence of eyes.

Fig. 4, A~-G—Hybalicus gibbosus n.sp.: A, dorsal view; B, ventral view; C, lateral

view; D, mandible; E, maxilla; F, palp; G, claws and empodium.

Fam. NANORCHESTIDAE nov.

As defined earlier in this paper in its separation from Alycidae s. str. The

genera included are Epistomalycus, Willania, Sebaia, Nanorchestes, Speleorches-

tes and Caenonychus. Of these it seems probable that Willania Oudemans, May

1931, is the same as Epistomalycus Sig Thor, March 1931, and that Caenonychus

142

Ouds. may be synonymous with Speleorchestes Tragardh. The genera may be

keyed as follows:

1 Epistome fused with propodosoma andi arising behind the anterior margin, not bilobed,

and furnished anteriorly with paired ciliated setae. Coxae all touching, not in two

groups. Only one pair of sensillae, filamentous. Eyes absent.

Gen. Epistomalyens Sig Thor 1931 (March)

(= ? Willania Ouds. 1931, May)

Type—E. claviptlis Sig Thor 1931, Norway; E. phonipilis Sig Thor 1931, Norway ;

and W’. miro Ouds. 1931, Holland.

Epistome bilobed, striated, without setae and separated from anterior margin of pro-

podosoma by a suture.

2 Sensillae in two pairs, both filamentous and ciliated.

Sensillae in two pairs, posterior clavate, anterior filamentous. Eyes absent.

Gen. Sebaia Ouds. 1903

ta IN

Type—Monalicus siculus Berl. 1910

3 Body short and wide, propodosoma somewhat sunk within hysterosoma. Both sensillae

placed behind midline of propodosomal shield and close together. Eyds present.

Gen. Nanorchestcs Tops. and Trt. 1890

Type—N. anphibins Tops. and Trt. 1890, France; N. arboriger Berl. 1904, Europe

and Australia; N. collinus Hirst 1918, England and Australia.

Body more elongate, propodosoma not sunk within hysterosoma. Anterior sensillae

near anterior margin of propodosomal shield and well separated from posterior sen-

sillae. Eyes present. Gen. Speleorchestes Tragardh

(= ? Caenonychus Ouds. 1903)

Type—S. formucorunt Tragh. 1910, Sweden.

Fig. 5, A-B—Nanorchestes arboriger Berl: A, dorsal; B, empodium. C-E—

N. collinus Hirst: C, dorsal view of propodosoma; D, empodium; E, dorsal scta.

143

Genus NANORCHESTES Tops. and Trt. 1890

NANORCHESTES ARBORIGER (Berlese 1904)

Alichus arboriger Berl. 1904. Redia II, Acari nuovi, Manip. I], Italy, Norway.

Fig. 5, A-B

Very small saltatorial mites of a dirty white to dark greenish colour with

traces of red about gnathosoma and legs. Length (excluding mandibles} 160-

170 », width 120-130. Eyes, one on cach side, with the usual larger ocular lobe

(?eye) behind. Anterior sensillae 37 w long and 20 » apart, posterior 28 » long.

Mandibles stout and robust, 40% long, with indefinable chelicerae, and only a

single dorsal ciliated seta 28 » long. Dorsal setae numerous, tri- to quinquetrous.

Empodium claw-like and doubly bent (cf. fig. 5, B).

Locality—In moss from Normanville, South Australia, September 1943 (H.

M. Cooper), and Black Swamp, near Currency Creek, South Australia, October

1943 (H. M.C.).

NANORCUESTES COLLINUS Hirst 1918

Annals and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1918, (9), 2, 213.

Fig. 5, C-E

Very small mites similar in colour to preceding. Length (without mandibles)

273 », width 1704. Eyes, one on each side, with the usual posterior oval lobe.

Anterior sensillary setae 70» long and 13» apart, posterior 52 » long. Mandibles

robust, 65 long with a dorsal seta divided into two unequal, 26» and 21 y,

branches from its base. Dorsal setae as figured, 8» long. Empodium claw-like

but not doubly bent.

Locality—-This species was hitherto known only from a single specimen froni

the Mendip Hills, Somerset, England, It was not unplentiful in moss from Black

Swamp, near Currency Creek, South Australia, October 1943 (H. M. C.).

SOIL AND VEGITATION RELATIONSHIPS

IN THE LOWER SOUTH-EAST OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

A STUDY IN ECOLOGY

By R. L. CROCKER,

Division of Soils, C.S.I.R., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Adelaide

Summary

The vegetation of the Lower South-East of South Australia has been rather neglected in botanical

literature. This is due partly to the complexity of the area, but more particularly on account of its

distance from Adelaide and, until recently, its relative inaccessibility. Land development is now

proceeding at such a rate that before long it will be impossible to piece together a picture of the

flora of the region as a whole. Indeed even now, in a large area about Mount Gambler it is

impossible to do so, and consequently this area has been omitted from the vegetation map. In other

places, too, the picture is far from complete, and there is necessarily much surmise. The area has

been embodied in several earlier maps, the principal of which were Prescott's "The Vegetation Map

of South Australia" (16) and "Soils of Australia in Relation to Vegetation and Climate” (17), and

Wood's "The Vegetation of South Australia” (25). The first of these was the original vegetation map

of this State, and is of such a general nature that it is now of little interest to botanists and

ecologists. The second is of more interest, although concerning Australia as a whole it is necessarily

broad. By far the best general account of the vegetation of South Australia has been given by Wood

in the publication cited above, but even here the Lower South-East has been inadequately dealt

with. The area concerned, then, has for a long time remained unknown to students of botany.

144

SOIL AND VEGETATION RELATIONSHIPS

IN THE LOWER SOUTH-EAST OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

A STUDY IN ECOLOGY

By R. L, Crocker,

Division of Soils, C.S.1.R., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Adelaide

Prates V to IX witn Maps

{Read 8 June 1944]

INTRODUCTION

The vegetation of the Lower South-East of South Australia has been rather

neglected in botanical literature. This is due partly to the complexity of the area,

but more particularly on account of its distance from Adelaide and, until recently,

its relative inaccessibility. Land development is now proceeding at such a rate

that before long it will be impossible to piece together a picture of the flora of the

region as a whole. Indeed even now, in a large area about Mount Gambier it is

impossible to do so, and consequently this area has been omitted from the vegeta-

tion map. In other places, too, the picture is far from complete, and there is

necessarily much surmise. The area has been embodied in several earlier maps,

the principal of which were Prescott’s “The Vegetation Map of South Austra-

lia” (16) and “Soils of Australia in Relation to Vegetation and Climate” (17), and

Wood’s “The Vegetation of South Australia” (25). The first of these was the

original vegetation map of this State, and is of such a general nature that it is now

of little interest to botanists and ecologists. The second is of more interest,

although concerning Australia as a whole it is necessarily broad. By far the best

general account of the vegetation of South Australia has been given by Wood in

the publication cited above, but even here the Lower South-East has been in-

adequately dealt with. The area concerned, then, has for a long time remained

unknown to students of botany.

The present work is an attempt to define and delimit the principal vegetation

associations, in the Lower South-East, and to establish the edaphic and other

environmental factors influencing their development and maintenance. The arca

concerned is approximately 3,200 square miles in the Counties of Grey and Robe.

The work was carried out over the period from 1937-1940, and. much of it was

done while on soil survey. Where the country was inaccessible use was made of

the original hundred survey diagrams of the Lands Department, Adelaide. Because

of the area involved the work is necessarily of a broad and general nature, but

before detailed work is done in specific localities it is important to have perspec-

tive in an understanding of the arca as a whole.

PHYSIOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY

The chief physiographic feature of the South-East generally is the unique

arrangement of sand-dune ranges parallel to the existing coastline. These ranges

are frequently indurated. They are rarely more than 100 feet above the general

level and between them are series of flats or plains. The ranges are generally

recognised (28), (20), (13), (4) as representing old coastal dunes, or dune

remnants, connected with successive stages in the retreat of the sea in late

Pleistocene or Recent geological times. These superimposed ranges have impeded

the natural drainage to the sea and have preserved a topography of extreme

immaturity.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 68, (1), 28 July 1944

145

As we proceed across sand range and inter-range flat, from the coast to the

most inward range, the Naracoorte Range, we retrace the successive steps in the

recession of the sea. The height of the flats above sea level gradually increases

from the coast to the Victorian border.

Fenner (10) considers that the Naracoorte Range represents an old fault

scarp and not a sand-dune ridge. It probably does represent a fault line, but there

are sand dunes and indurated dunes superimposed upon it. The important thing

is that the country to the east of this range is much higher. Its physiography is

now modified but it was the old land surface prior to the positive earth movements,

of late Pleistocene and Recent times, which resulted in the retreat of the sea. The

chief physiographic features of the Lower South-East are illustrated in an earlier

paper (Crocker (4) ), and in fig, 1b on page 146.

. 2

nea Gyre

reetaate 2

roast

oer fomssF

Peres

femeat?

Saranane

“france guee Foe?

Aan en

AID Gem baveawen

Srangrenda foaesr

;

Curren GHOEE

Fa rree GHEE

went Whe 5

Brawcranae

sear

Dna

anes dine Bor

| Prawavaaaa Moms

}

Censrae

Cannan

Asogy | CaNUR Mange

fASr qebset dance l

Banca Morse

sremats ance | reamer

MANacooaTs — Puaret | Stace BaF ae

gre

WaAac wont Maes

cosires = ewavg

Kt Maman

dame Fung

Fig la

East-West SEcTION—From coast opposite Lake Eliza to Hynam (East of Naracoorte)

Illustrating successive stages in recession of the sea and the succession of dune range remnants.

The plains are underlain by flat-bedded Miocene marine limestones, but these

are normally overlain by more recent calcareous material and recent deposits of

sand. This latter is especially so in the flat heath areas so characteristic of the

Wattle Range region and northwards.

The sand-dune ranges reach their maximum development in the Mount

Burr Range, but the geological features are here further complicated by the exist-

ence of numerous small and isolated basaltic, ash and tuff hills. The volcanic

activity in the Mount Burr region is considered to have been earlier (4) than. that

at Mount Gambier and Mount Schank. The yellow and grey podsolised sands of

the Mount Burr region are superimposed on the general volcanic framework,

whereas about Mount Gambier gently undulating ycllow sandrises (with Mount

Burr sand similarities) have a capping of volcanic ash varying in thickness up to

approximately one-and-a-half feet and weathering to a fertile volcanic loam.

Despite the large number of volcanic outcrops, they are exceedingly small in

area, and the bulk of the Mount Burr Range is covered with Recent sands and in

places indurated sand dunes and shell-beds. Occasionally outcrops of basal

Miocene limestone occur. These limestones are either polyzoal or more massive

and fosstliferous. Some of the sand overlies volcanic material at depth.

Fenner (10) has suggested that the western side of the Mount Burr Range,

between the Bluff and Mount Muirhead, represents an old fault line.

The lava flow at Mount Gambier was of very limited extent and Stanley (22)

considers Mount Gambier lavas related to the Victorian ones. Apart from this

limited flow the volcanism was entirely of an explosive type.

146

Parallel to the coast, from Mount Benson to opposite Kongorong, there is a

limestone range with very shallow soils and practically no sand—the Woakwine

Range (see maps). Apart from the calcareous coastal dunes it is the first range

in the series from the coast to the Naracoorte Range. The limestone varies in

thickness between one foot and several feet and is underlain by a highly calcareous

sand with abundant fine shell fragments. This material is practically identical

with the material in many of the calcareous dunes of the coast, known so well on

‘eet: es ie

a~~,

oom

eee)

SKETCH MAP SHOWING

CHIEF PHYSIOGRAPHIC FEATURES

OF SOUTH EAST OF S.A.

Fig. ib

account of ‘‘coastiness” of sheep associated with them. The lj ;

undoubtedly represents an old fossil B horizon. Similar seiadbenn ‘ond eee be

seen underlying limestone further inland (¢.g., a road cutting in West Avenue

Range, near Bull Island). These indurated sandhills occur in all the sand ridges

and no doubt the method of formation has been similar. The re-sorted sae:

deposited upper horizons are represented in the siliceous sand of the area. The

degree of calcareousness of the origimal dunes probably varied considerably

147

CLIMATE

The whole of the area receives more than 20 inches of rain per annum. Most

of it receives more than 25 inches, and the Millicent-Kalangadoo-Mount Gambier

area more than 30 inches. The rainfall distribution is shown in fig. 2.

NOTE

Hundred boundartes.... 7 = ‘

Isohyets .....------ wun NS

Recording SLQLIONS 020 °

Rainfall map of Lower South-East of South Australia. (After Stephens et alia)

The area falls within Davidson’s Semi-humid Warm Temperate Zone, with

the number of months in which P/E is greater than 0-5 varying from seven im

County Robe to nine in the southern portion of County Grey, and mean annual

temperatures of 56-58° F. (9). The amplitude of the mean annual temperature

is 7-9° F., and phase, 33-36 days lag behind solar radiation (7). Most of the

influential rainfall falls in the winter and spring (April-October) seasons, and

the region is within Trumble’s (24) Temperate and Sub-Temperate-Podsolised

sands Edapho-climatic zones. The higher rainfall of the Millicent-Kalangadoo-

Mount Gambier area is undoubtedly due to the higher altitude of most of it—

particularly to the presence of the Mount Burr Range.

The unique parallel arrangement of sand dune ranges mentioned previously,

with intervening flats and impeded drainage, has produced an extremely variable

148

micro-climate. The micro-climatic zones are orientated at almost right angles to

the major climatic zones,

Some idea of the nature and variation of the yearly rainfall is given in fig. 3.

DRAINAGE

Because of the impeded drainage the plains are very wet in winter and early

spring. Until artificial drains were cut much of the country was not suitable for

agriculture and continuous pasture. In addition to local rainfall there is a con-

siderable contribution in late winter from the adjoining Counties of Lowan and

Follet in Victoria. Together with excess water from the higher land east of the

Naracoorte Range, most of this flows by way of the Mosquito, the Naracoorte and

the Morambro Creeks across the Naracoorte Plain. Further westerly drainage is

prevented by Stuart’s Range (see soil map) and the creeks lose themselves in a

TIUVINI Vo

SFHIN?

‘TZ mM. A. m, rcs a §. 9. N, D.

PERIOD iN MONTHS

Fig. 3

The Mean Monthly Rainfall (70 years) for two selected centres.

series of swamps and lagoons (Bool Lagoon, Moyhal! Swamp, Lake Omerod, Salt

Lake, etc.). Excess water continues to drain very slowly in a north-north-westerly

direction.

While drainage directions are usually westerly on the western side of the

sand ranges, towards the eastern side of the ranges they tend more northerly and

finally run north-north-westerly parallel to and up against the sand ranges. Before

artificial drainage most of the water finally found its way into the Coorong.

The Dismal Swamps, approximately 200 feet above sea level, drain in an

easterly and south-easterly direction towards the Glenelg River in Victoria. In

a wet season there is a noticeable current in the Dismal Swamps (29).

The general drainage directions can be seen by reference to earlier publica-

tions (4) (23). The approximate position of most of the main drains at present

149

in operation is shown in fig. 4. There are many subsidiary drains not shown, par-

ticularly about Millicent and Tantanoola.

THE SOILS

The soils of the area can he classified into four main groups:

1 Podsols

2 Rendzinas

3 Terra Rossas

4 Volcanic Soils—weathered from basalt, ash or tuff

Soil surveys have recently been carried out by the Soils Division of the

Council for Scientific and Industrial Research over some five hundred square miles

PS in the Lower South-East, comprising the Hundreds of Hindmarsh, Riddoch, Grey,

Nangwarry and Young (23), but the remainder of the South-Eastern soils have,

by comparison, only been studied superficially by the author.

KINGS Tent

4 eLUCiMDALE “NARACOORTE

< +“ MALANGALOD a

— iecent

MaP § SHowine SN

AY ke Vv

APPROX POSITION or rrosr \ "4

or GAIN \. DRAINS ahtF GHOBIER

PALE.

oe N >

Ty rent Poa

Fig. 4

As would be expected, the soils are closely related to the geological history of

the area and the major soil groups closely parallel the physiographic features.

1 THE Popsots

The podsols can be further subdivided into two large groups:

(1) the podsolised sands;

(2) the gley podsols.

(1) The podsolised sands

Podsols are essentially soils which are best developed in cold temperate

climates under conditions of excess rainfall, when intense soil leaching occurs.

150

The distribution of podsols throughout the world is markedly. influenced by

geology (21). Because they are most strongly developed in soils poor in: base

reserves, it is not surprising that they occur so widely in the sand ranges and the

sandy heath areas in the South-East.

These podsolised sands are associated with dry sclerophyll forest, or with

sclerophyllous heath vegetation, and are re-deposited (aeolian) sands which have

PROFILE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE PRINCIPAL PODSOLISED

SAND TYPES (after Stephens ef alia)

sand with

Dark grey moderate

Light grey

sand

Light yellow

or yellow sor

sand

Yallow sand

and brown ts

organic

cem.gravel

Brown oryellow-

POND sandy clay

loam

MT. BURR SAND

(E. Baxteri)

sand with

Grey moderate

organic matter

Light grey

Light yellow

12"

sand

2an

or yellow

sand

Brown

Light grey 96"

org.cem.gravel

and sand

108"

sand

Mottled B2 N120"

clay

CAROLINE SAND

(CE. Baxtert - E. Huberiana)

sand with moderate

Grey AL organic matter

Light grey sand

Light yellow

to yellow O"

sand

Brown

90"org.cem.,gravel and

Mottled yellow yellow sand >

grey, brown B2 ‘

NOE Lag with red

inclusions

NANGWARRY SAND

(CE. Baxteri — LE. Hiuberiana)

Grey sand with much

organic matter

. 2

Light erey

or white sand

72" sand with black

Yellow or brown illuviated

organic matter

pg one tnes hardp4n )

sand or clayey

Grey or sénd

ello

¥y Ww B3

clay

YOUNG SAND

(CE. Baxtert)

Fig. 5

undergone considerable previous leaching. They are quite variable in their degree

of podsolisation, and range from podsolised grey and yellow sands to the

more extremely podsolised types—the humus podsols,

This variation in podsolisation is due prin-

is enriched by the addition of humus.

In the latter the B horizon

cipally to climate and local drainage. The well-developed humus podsols, with a

definite organic “hard pan” layer in the B horizon, mostly occur in areas of poor

151

drainage or of local impeded drainage, and are particularly prevalent in. hollows

and about acid swamps. As we proceed northwards from the Mount Burr region

humus podsols become much less prominent.

os These sands are.for the most part overlying limestone (chiefly Pleistocene to

Recent calcareous material), although in the Mount Burr region they may overlic

volcanic ash, tuff and basalt. A few inches of sandy clay loam or sandy clay is

frequently present immediately above the limestone.

In the sandy areas south of Penola the topography is undulating and the

sandhills much lower than in the ranges, and many of the sands are underlain by

a considerable depth of grey and yellow clay, frequently with red inclusions or

mottlings. These soils have affinities with the gley podsols. Some of the low-

lying humus podsols also have gley affinities.

The podsols typified by heath vegetation also occur in a much flatter situation

than the range sands. This area has more the characteristics of being a sand

sheet, but the soils are extremely variable in profile. Some are leached grey,

white, or yellow-grey sands of variable depth overlying yellow and grey clays

(mottling is not uncommon), while others are podsolised sands, which may even

show considerable accumulation of humus in the B horizon. They are all wnder-

lain by Pleistocene to Recent calcareous material but at variable depth.

There are modifications of the heath soils in the more northerly portion of

the area, which result in modified vegetation assemblages. The heath soils are

all very wet in late winter and spring.

The podsolised sands are very acid and for the most part range between

pH 4:7 and pH 6-6. There is usually a considerable amount of organic matter

im the A, and A, horizons. Their nitrogen status is low, normally less than 0-1%

total nitrogen, and phosphate status (P,O,) less than :02% and usually less than

‘01%. The P,O, status of the Short Sand (associated with heath vegetation) is

particularly low, -003--005%.

The Mount Burr Sand, Nangwarry Sand and Caroline Sand are the principal

normal podsolised sands already defined by soil survey. Of these, the Mount Burr

Sand is the most important. The profile characteristics of the three types are sum-

marised in fig. 5.

The humus podsols, representing extreme leaching with the development of

a more or less organic stained and/or cemented pan in the B horizon, are typified

by the Young Sand and the Kilbride and Wandilo Sands (fig. 5 and 6).

(2) The gley podsols

The gley podsols or meadow podsols are a group of soils intermediate between

true podsols and meadow (or gley) soils. Alternate or seasonal waterlogging

and drying (due to impeded drainage) superimposed on normal podsol develop-

ment results in a meadow podsol. The presence of rusty mottlings and streaks in

the clay, indicative of alternating oxidising and reducing conditions, the slight

humus staining, and the ferruginous gravel layer frequently present immediately

above or in the clay, are characteristic of this group.

In the lower South-East the meadow podsols are an important group of soils

extending for the most part marginal to the black soil plains (rendzina) and flank-

ing the western side of some of the sand ranges. The areas are all more or less

low-lying and subject to waterlogging in winter.

_ The most widespread and important soils amongst the meadow podsols are

the Kalangadoo and Riddoch Sands. The former is the more widespread of the

two. Marginal to much of the Kalangadoo Sand country, and very frequent about

the Dismal Swamps area, there occurs a soil which has meadow podsol affinities

iv which there is much more humus staining, and a heavy sesquioxide pan above

the clay. This is the Wandilo Sand. It is relatively restricted in its distribution.

152

The profile characteristics of the meadow podsol types are summarised in

fig. 6.

Other soil types belonging to the podsolic group occur but are of limited

occurrence and relatively unimportant. They are chiefly transitional types which

are intermediates between the major types described.

Stephens et alia (23) consider some of the sands associated with heath vege-

tation as meadow humus podsols.

PROFILE CHARACTERISTICS OF CERTAIN PODSOL AND MEADOW

PODSOL SOILS (after Stephens et alia)

at sand with perk loose sand with

Grey mush oremas grey coarse organic

gu matter matter

Light

grey l2e*

Light grey

or white sand loose sand

Black and

brown .

36! organic hardpan or

stained leyer with

80" peenic herd- ae pai ironstone

pan and gravel side gi i acs

Mottled with channels Brey

ec ery of sand mottled clay

and yellow 104"

clay calcareous material

KILBRIDE SAND SHORT SAND

(E. Baxteri) (X. australia — IT, rostrata)

‘ Dark

send or loany erey fine sand with fine

Grey sand with orgenic matter

organic matter Light

erey Bn

- le" fine sand

Light Dark yellow

erey grey and 14"

sand

yellowbrown clay (with solonetzic

Mottled yellow character)

grey and

brown 24" cay (with red

inclusions ) 30"

S| calcareous material

KALANGADOO SAND RIDDOCH SAND

(E. camaldulensis) CE, ovata— X. australis)

Fig. 6

2 THe RENDZINAS

Soils derived from or closely associated with calcareous parent materials are

broadly of two classes, the rendzinas and terra rossa soils. The former are grey

or grey-black, and the latter red or reddish-brown. The terra rossa soils have a

less siliceous clay complex and show a distinctly lower base status than the rend-

zinas. They may be even acid in reaction.

The rendzinas are grey or grey-black soils which are associated with cal-

careous parent material. As a world group they occur in both temperate and

153

tropical climates and are frequently called “lime humus soils” because they contain

varying amounts of humus and free calcium carbonate. In the Lower South-East

they occur chiefly on the plains over limestone where drainage is imperfect. The

well-known Millicent clay and black and grey soils of the Naracoorte Plain and

the Reedy Creek-Conmurra Plain belong to this group. Before artificial drainage

PROFILES OF THE PRINCIPAL RENDZINA AND TERRA ROSSA SOILS

(after Stephens et alia)

Brown or dark

DEK OE ONE an Statics brown 4" sand to clay loam

Brown or gn

red-brown Bu

sand Brown aa sand to clay loam

Red -brown i”

« a

ci BL 18" veryslight iron-

Brown and stone gravel

yellow-brown

26" mottled frieble clay

¢ sandy lime- Be variable: depth

stone stone

HINDMARSH SANDY LOAM COONAWARRA SERIES

This is a deeper phase. The limestone

frequently outcrops at the surface.

Black L Black clay or clay

FEREDL, WAGY loam(friable)

k "

Blac le Light grey g"

nodular clay and white

with moderates pipeclay

celcium

carbonate

24" ;

with much an

calcium

carbonate Limestone

c Calcareocus

material

MILLICENT CLAY Fig. 7 CONMURRA CLAY

they were exceedingly wet in winter and spring. Agriculturally they have been

used principally for barley growing, but are now frequently developed with pas-

tures. Owing to the excess of calcium carbonate they are unsuitable for sub-

terranean clover, and other legumes like barrel medic, burr medic, and straw-

berry clover are substituted. Because of the poor local drainage conditions, excess

salt (sodium chloride) accumulations ate not uncommon, and may frequently

reach critical proportions. This is particularly so on the Naracoorte Plain (where

several small salt lakes occur) and in parts of the Reedy Creek-Conmurra Plain,

as evidenced by salt analysis of two surface soils collected by the author.

NaCl Total Sol.

Locality Depth pH % Salts %

Between Naracoorte and Stewart - 0-2” 8-9 -09 +22

Near Konetta Station - - 0-3” 8-6 +12 “45

The rendzinas vary considerably, particularly in depth of profile.

154

In some areas well-drained limestone: hummocks-have weathered. to. a. dark-

brown or almost black rendzina, These occur chiefly in the Hundred: of Riddoch,

but are relatively unimportant. a

On the Conmurra-Reedy Creek Plain many of the rendzinas are very shallow

over a grey-white and calcareous C horizon, locally called “pipeclay.” Sometimes

this is exposed at the surface. This.type has been called the Conmurra Clay by

the author, The profile characteristics of the Millicent Clay and Conmurra Clay

are summarised in fig, 7.

Many of the rendzinas in the wettest situations have included shell fragments

and shells of the common freshwater snail, Amerianna pectorosa, These grade into

swamps proper.

The total nitrogen level of the rendzina surface horizon is > °25%. Their

P,O, status (-04%), and K,O status (48%) are higher than any of the lower

South-East soils, except the volcanic suite.

3. Tue Terra Rossa Sorts

The second group of soils closely associated with calcareous parent materials

are the terra rossa soils, These are red or red-brown soils. The terra rossas in

the Lower South-East fall into two large groups: (1) those developed over

Miocene to Recent marine limestone, (2) those associated with the old dune rem-

nants, the so-called “consolidated dunes.”

(1) Over Miocene-Recent marine limestones

(a) Developed over marine limestone in some moderate rises in the meadow

podsol area, terra rossas which range between red-brown sands, loams

and even clay loams occur. They are relatively unimportant, but a

notable occurrence is about Coonawarra, a few miles north of Penola.

(b) Associated with Miocene limestone in the Mount Gambier-Kongorong

district are brown and red-brown soils belonging to this group. They

have been used for agricultural and pastoral purposes for many years and

have never been thoroughly examined.

(2) Developed on the consolidated dunes:

Associated with the consolidated dunes are brown and red-brown shallow

rather sandy soils allied to the terra rossas.

It has been suggested (4) that these consolidated sand dunes are the remnants

of an old soil and represent a fossil B horizon. Downward leaching and redisposi-

tion of lime in former caleareous dunes, followed by the removal of the upper

leached horizons, has exposed this old B horizon. This varies for the most part

between 1 and 7 feet thick, and is underlain by white calcareous sands with

abundant shell fragments. The former A horizons have been re-sorted and re-

deposited to form the present siliceous sands of the ranges—the Mount Burr Sand,

Young Sand, etc.

These “secondary” soils are best exposed and illustrated, and most developed

in the South-East, on the Woakwine Range. ‘This is the first of the inland suc-

cession of Ranges. They also occur associated with the limestone hills through-

out all the ranges from the Woakwine to the Naracoorte Range, all of which

represent old consolidated dunes.

Most of the terra rossa soils of this group are brown and red-brown sands

and sandy loams. In the Mount Burr Range the most important soil occurring

on the consolidated dunes has been called the Hindmarsh Sandy Loam (23).

EELS -]

Wye .

() i

HW LLL

/ /

Hoe

Pid \ \

\ iit

adst his

fo)

OUNTIES GREY AND ROBE

TENTATIVE SOIL MAP

Hers

BAY é&

‘155

.. . The total nitrogen in the surface soils of the terra rossas is usually between

+20 and :25%. Their phosphate status varies from -O1 to -07% and, like their

K,O status, is higher in the loamy types.

4 THE. VOLCANIC SOILS

The volcanic soils of the Lower South-East are of very limited extent, but

especially in the Mount Gambier and Glencoe districts are of great agricultural

value. They are mainly associated with the weathering of volcanic ash and tuff

and, to a less extent, basalt.

The volcanic soils of Mount Gambier have beet: studied in detail by Prescott

and Piper (19). The soils are immature and very variable, probably depending

on the variable calcium carbonate content of the original parent material. The

surface soils are mostly brown, dark brown or grey-brown sandy loams, loams and

clay loams, ranging in reaction from pH 6-4 to pH 8-2. In the Mount Burr region

the basaltic soils are more acid and range as low as pl 5-2. This is further evi-

dence for the volcanism of this region having preceded that at Mount Gambier

The most notable feature of the soils from a plant nutrition viewpoint is the high

P,O, content, which was as high as 0°51% in one sample analysed by Prescott

and Piper.

The distribution of the major soil types in the area is shown on the accom-

panying soil map. Towards the northern limits of the map the soils are much less

familiar to the author. This area is very complex and relatively inaccessible and

should be accepted with reserve.

_ The relationship between soil type and physiography can be seen from refer-

ence to fig. 1b, and reference to the vegetation map illustrates the soil and plant

relationships.

Soils having some affinities with the red-brown earths occur but are not

“important. Some of the soils east of the Naracoorte Range, so-called “gilgai”

soils, have affinities with the soils of the Victorian Wimmera, sometimes allied with

the red-brown earths. Near Jucindale extremely limited soils with Eucalyptus

leucoxylon savannah can be considered weakly podsolised red-brown earths...

With impeded natural drainage, and alternating low-lying and range areas,

local swamps are very numerous and very variable. They require a special study

and, with the exception of several large swamp areas, have been omitted from the

soil map. The coastal dune, coastal swamp and coastal heath plain area has all

been mapped as a “coastal complex.” This also requires very detailed study, but

the very highly calcareous nature ot the sands near the coast deserves mention.

The soils will be further discussed in connection with the vegetation asso-

ciations,

THE VEGETATION

The principal factors influencing the distribution of the main vegetation com-

munities are undoubtedly edaphic and climatic. The very close general relation-

ship existing between soils and vegetation in the Lower South-East of South Aus-

tralia is readily illustrated by reference to the soil and vegetation map.

NOMENCLATURE

Much confusion of terminology, and indeed of concept, has for a long time

hampered ecology. This has, in Australia, led to a lack of understanding and

practically no co-ordination by different workers in different States. Recently

Wood (26), realising the inadequacy of existing systems of study and classifica-

tion of plant communities, reviewed the fundamental concepts in the light of Alus-

tralian experience. This general confusion of terminology has been further

increased by a great difference of opinion in the ecological schools regarding the

156

concept of succession, This has mostly beem due to a dual use of the word, when

applied, not only to developmental and. biotic succession, but to successions which

were deemed “theoretically possible’ under “theoretical” conditions of edaphic

uniformity. There seems little of value in retaining succession for this latter case.

The duplication of nomenclature, which is at least confusing, can be overcome by

using for these closely related associations the “edaphic complex” as defined by

Wood (26).

An adequate scheme of classification for plant communities must in addition

to the higher groups include a place for edaphic sub-associations and must be

capable of expansion in the lower categories to include, for local or detailed work,

the finer distinctions which the study of smaller areas will necessitate. Above all,

it must provide for the welding of local associations and edaphic complexes into

groups, which not only show the relationships of local associations to each other

but also their significance in and to the broader categories.

THE FLorIstTics

In the present paper the floristics are far from complete. Apart from the

great area involved and the relative inaccessibility of much of it, it was impossible

for the author to visit it and collect specimens in late spring—the most favourable

period. They are, however, sufficiently complete for the purposes of the paper,

and in the case of the principal association—E. Barteri association (Dry Sclero-

phyll Forest )—very detailed.

PRINCIPAL VEGETATION UNITS

The classification, nomenclature and chief structural differences between the

communities are summarised below in Table I.

TABLE [ Climatic

Association Edaphic Complex Formation Climax

Bc Basteré Cedaphie:citnix)* . | » Bacay

FE. obliqua } E, Baxteri 1 Sclerophyll

E, Baxteri-E, Huberiana Forest

Xanthorrhoea australis~Hakeo rostrata ‘

Melaleuca gibbosa-Hakea rugosa, etc. X. australis-H. rostrata ivath || Mixed

E. diversifolia E. diversifolia Mallee scrub Eucalypt

Melaleuca pubescens M. pubescens Savannah woodland | Forest

E. rostrata (E. camaldulensis) E. rostrata Eucalypt

&. ovata-X. australis E ta~X trali. Savannaly

. . » OVOALG-A . GUSTYAUS Woodland

Gahnia trifida—Cladium filum | C. trifida-C. filum Savannah

* By edaphic climax is meant the association occurring on the most widespread soil

type in the area.

All the communities have been seriously modified by biotic influences such as

fire, agricultural development, and the imposition over the area of an artificial

system of drainage.

THe Dry ScLEROPHYLL Forests

The dry sclerophyll forests are somewhat open with a sparse and discon-

tinuous grass cover, but characterised by an abundance of sclerophyllous shrubs

and undershrubs (pl. V, fig. 9-13). In the Lower South-East they reach their

maximum development on the Mount Burr Range.

1 E. Baxtert association

Rather than regard the £. Baxteri and E. obliqua associations as co-associa-

tions, they have been given association rank, The distribution of the dominants is

dependent on soil factors, and so accepting Wood’s “edaphic complex” in the

157

wider sense, E. Baxtert and £. obliqua associations are recognised. This forest

reaches its greatest development on the Mount Burr Range, but it is the asso-

ciation par excellence of all the sandy ranges. Many of the dominants have been

removed by man, and everywhere the association shows evidence of bushfires,

On the Mount Burr Range E. Baxteri forms an open canopy at about 40-50

feet. £. obliqua or E. Huberiana may occur, but very rarely, as associated

dominants,

Below the eucalypt canopy a few tall shrubs or small trees occur sporadically.

Chief of these are Banksia marginata (honeysuckle), Acacia melanoxylon (black-

wood), Exocarpus cupressiformis (wild cherry) and Bursaria spinosa (native

box). Acacia pycnantha and A. mollisima occur rarely in this association; they

more usually form almost pure societies on some of the shallow terra rossas of the

consolidated dunes, Apart from B. marginata these shrubs and small trees do not

contribute much to the physiognomy of the forest as a whole. This is governed

principally by the abundance of sclerophyllous undershrubs and small shrubs,

The most characteristic plants of this continuous sclerophyllous undergrowth

stratum are Leptospermum myrsinoides (tea-tree), L. scoparium (tea-tree),

Xanthorrhoea australis (yacka), X. quadrangulata (grass tree), Acacia oxycedrus,

A, myrtifolia, Brachylomum ciliatum, Pteridium aquilinum, Epacris impressa,

Astroloma humifusum, Hibbertia stricta and Leucopogon virgatus. Other plants

occurring freely but less important include Hibbertia sericea, H. fasciculata,

Leucopogon concurvus, Correa rubra, Lepidosperma carphoides, L. canescens,

Scirpus nodosus, Pultenaea acerosa, Astroloma conostephioides and Isopogon

ceratophyllus,

Wahlenbergia gracilis and Goodenia geniculata are the most important

annuals. The perennial composites, Helichrysum obtusifolium and H. Scorpioides

are of seasonal import.

Grasses occur very sparingly. The chief are Danthonia geniculata and S tipa

semibarbata,

Considerable fluctuations in the density and floristic composition of the lower

strata occur. Some of these at least can be correlated with soil variation, e¢.g., the

greater abundance of Acacia oxycedrus, Epacris impressa, Pteridium aquilinum

and Isopogon ceratophyllus on the more extremely podsolised sands—the humus

podsols. Pteridium aquilinum is very important where the forest has been made

more open by tree removal. Sending up fronds from its subterranean ‘stem it is

one of the first plants to recover from fire. In the absence ;of competition and

with greater light intensity it rapidly becomes more abundant.

Towards the northern limits of the area under consideration, with conditions

of much lower rainfall (22-24”), this association becomes greatly modified.

E. Baxteri is still the dominant tree, but it is depauperate and stunted and rather

scrubby in habit and only 14-25’ high. The association is much more open, and

the floristic composition is modified. The small trees and tall shrubs of the Mount

Burr Range area are, with the exception of Banksia marginata (here much

reduced), entirely lacking. Many of the undershrubs remain the same, but their

frequency and their sociability are different. Some new species characteristic of

the drier “mallee” areas further north like H ypolaena fastigiata, Phyllota pleuran-

droides and Adenanthos terminalis are appearing, The most prominent of the

sclerophyllous shrubs and undershrubs in this area are Xanthorrhoea australis,

Banksia marginata, Banksia ornata, Leptospermum scoparium, L. myrsinoides,

-eucopogon concurvus, Lepidosperma carphoides, Astroloma humifusum, A,

conostephioides, Comesperma calymega, Phyllota pleurandroides, Isopogon cerato-

phyllus, Epacris impressa and Pteridium aquilinum. Danthonia geniculata is the

most frequent of the grasses,

158

2 Eucalyptus obliqua association

This association is extremely limited. It occurs on better soils than the

impoverished sands associated with the E, Baxteri association. =

On the Mount Burr Range its occurrence is practically limited to: (1) the.

deeper terra rossa soils, (2) transition soils at the edge of certain basaltic hills,

(3) shallow sandy soils over limestone, less acid than the normal podsolised sands.

The association is usually more open and the floristic composition of the associated

sclerophyllous shrubs is modified. Plants like Acacia oxycedrus, Epacris Impressa,

Leucopogon virgatus, Isopogon ceratophyllus, Leptospermum spp. are absent or

much less important in the shrub stratum. Acaena Sanguisorbae is especially

prominent,

There is a belt of E. obliqua and £. vitrea parallel to the coast from west of

Kongorong to Port MacDonnell and beyond. It is very broken and not continuous,

and it occurs principally on a shallow red-brown loam (4-67) over Miocene (?)

limestone. The trees are very poor and scraggly and rarely more than 20 feet high.

The association here is obviously towards the limit of its edaphic range and enjoys

a precarious stability. It is particularly open with very few undershrubs. The

principal associated plants are depauperate Eucalyptus ovata (white or swamp

gum), Exocarpus cupressiformis, Acacia melanoxylon, Pteridium aquilinum,

Danthonia sp., Acaena Sanguisorbe and H ibbertia spp. Xanthorrhoea australis and

Lomandra longifolia occur occasionally, Acacia mollisima (black wattle) and

A. pycnantha tend to occur in almost pure societies,

E. obliqua has a much more restricted edaphic and climatic range than

E, Baxteri, which explains its limited occurrence.: Its approximate limits in the

north are defined by the 24” rainfall isohyet. The occurrences in the Mount Burr

Range and the other sand ranges of this association are so small that no attempt

has been made on the vegetation map to differentiate these “stands” from the

E. Baxteri association.

The pH of a series of ten (10) surface soils collected at random by the author

and others within the climatic zone in which both E. obliqua and E. Basxteri occur,

are indicative of the relationship between soil reaction and tree dominance in the

dry sclerophyll forest. pH is probably the most important single soil index. The

correlation is shown below in Table II. j

TasLe II

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN PH, as A SINGLE Som. INDEX, AND

EucaLyrer DOMINANCE IN THE STRINGYBARK Forests

Dominant Eucalypt Locality pH

Ei. Baxteri i; Mount Burr Range 5-94

E. Baxteri Mount Burr Range 6°40

BL Baxteri East of Penola 5:46

E. Baxteri Reedy Creek Range (East of Konetta Stn.) | 5-24

LE. Baxteri ‘| East Avenue Range 4-98

FE, obliqua Section 93, Hundred Smith 6°79

E. obliqua ; Mount Burr Range 6°28

EE. obliqua Near Burnda Railway Station 6°30

E. obliqua Between Kongorong and Port MacDonnell 6-84

E. obliqua Mount Burr Range (Glencoe Hill) 8-09

Eucalyptus Huberiana (manna gum) is sometimes a co-dominant and in

places may become locally dominant in the E. Baxteri forests of the Mount Burr

159

area. Its occurrence is frequently difficult to explain on grounds of soil variation.

It is most likely that deep-seated soil changes are involved in some instances.

some of the sands of the region overlie volcanic material at depth, and it is pos-

sible that increased fertility at depth has an influence on tree distribution.

&. Huberiana often occurs in the transition zone marginal to swamps, Here

better water relationships prevail. Although having a slightly more limited

climatic’ range than E. obligua it has wider edaphic limits. Water relationships

are more important.

3. E. Huberiana-E, Baxteri association

On the very shallow phases of the Nangwarry Sand Eucalyptus [ubertanu

often becomes sole dominant. The habitat is a wetter one. The association is

more open and the sclerophyllous undershrubs less abundant. E-rocarpus cupressi-

formis, Acacia mollisima, A. melanoxylon and Pteridium aquilinum are pro-

minent. Grasses, especially Themeda triandra, may be conspicuous. The forma-

tion approaches savannah. This is not unusual when one considers that the Nang-

warry Sand (shallower phases) has affinities with the gley podsols—soils which

in the South-East are normally associated with savannah woodland.

Over most of the Nangwarry area there is an association dominated by

E, Huberiana and E. Baxteri, Associated plants are sitnilar to the sclerophyllous

undershrubs elsewhere—Acacia melanoxylon, A. mollisima, Xanthorrhoea aus-

tralis, Leptospermum myrsinoides, L. scoparium, Banksia marginata, B. ornata,

Astroloma conostephioides, A, humifusum, Epacris impressa, Pteridium aquili-

num, Hibbertia spp., Lewcopogon spp., etc. E. obliqua is very rare in this region.

On the deeper phases of the Nangwarry Sand EF, Baxteri is sole dominant.

£. vitrea, a low, somewhat dwarfed tree usually about 16 feet high with fibrous

bark on the stem and lower branches and long, almost pendulous, narrow leaves,

is common about some of the swamps in this area. E. pauciflora (Y has been

recorded from our South-East but has not been reported in recent years.

South of Wongalina Station and almost to Mount Benson there is a modified

variable association allied to the dry sclerophyll forests. On yellow-brown and red-

brown sandy soils over limestone (sometimes shallow) Eucalyptus obliqua occurs

very sparingly. Shrubs and small trees are abundant and include Banksia

marginata, Bursaria spinosa, Acacia pycnantha and Xanthorrhoea australis, Less

important are Pteridium aquilinum, Dodonaea sp.. Scirpus nodosus, Casuarina

stricta, Olearia sp., etc.

THe Heatu

The South-Eastern heath lands are best considered in relation to the sclero-

phyll forests. They occur on low-lying podsolised sands. These sands are very

variable in profile and some of them have affinities with the gley podsols. They

are very acid and low in fertility. During the winter and early spring they are

very wet. Towards the northern part of the area the heath soils are modified and

for the most part much shallower. There is a parallel modification in floristic

composition.

On the better drained, slightly higher sands the heath invariably gives way to

£, Baxteri dry sclerophyll, It can be considered an edaphic subclimax association

of the dry sclerophyll forests. (E. Huberiana is occasionally present in the more

southerly portions, and E, wvitrea has been recorded.)

Mr. C. D. Boomsma (private communication) reports that Blakely identified a Eucalypt

collected by him near the Victorian Border, Caroline, South Australia, as E. pauciflore.

160

1 Xanthorrhoea australis-Hakea rostrata association (pl. VI, fig. 14)

The heath consists essentially of low sclerophyllous shrubs and undershrubs,

for the most part 2 feet to 3 feet high. It is a difficult association to name because

so many species are consistent, and being much of the same height there are many

dominants. Many of the shrubs and undershrubs of the sclerophyll forest are

prominent.

The principal members of the heath are Xanthorrhoea australis (yacka),

Banksia marginata, B, ornata (honeysuckle), Hakea rostrata (kidney bush),

H. rugosa, H. nodosa, Darwinia micropetala, Leptospermum scoparium, L, myrsin-

oides, Casuarina pusilla, C, paludosa var. robusta, C. distyla, Melaleuca gibbosa,

Isopogon ceratophyllus, Epacris impressa, Leucopogon argatus, Pultenaea laxt-

flora, Stylidium graminifolium (trigger plant), Hibbertia stricta and H. fascicu-

lata, Others frequently present include Calythrix tetragona, Acacia verticilata,

Dillwynia hispida, Rutidosis multiflora, Daviesia brevifolia, Pimelia flava, P.

octophylla, Pultenaea tenuifolia and Sphaerolobium vimineum.

Cyperaceous and Restionaceous plants present are Schoenus apogon, S.

brachyphyllus, Chorizandra enodis, Leptocarpus Brownit, Lepidosperma car-

phoides, L. concavum and L, laterale. Gahnia trifida, Caustis pentandra and

Scirpus antarcticus have been recorded. The Juncaceae are represented by Juncus

capitatus.

Plants of an ephemeral or seasonal nature, abundant in late spring, are

Drosera Planchonii, Stackhousia monogyna, the perennial composites, Helichrysum

obtusifolium and H. scorpioides, together with a few orchids, chief of which is

Caladenia Patersonii,

Grasses are sparse although several genera are represented. Those recorded

include Stipa Muelleri, Agrostis Billardieri and Aira caryphyllea, Several grasses

are prominent in the transition area between the heath and the £. ovata-X. australis

savannah, Chief of these are Themeda triandra, Stipa pubescens and Danthonia

setacea,

As pointed out under the section on soils, the heath profiles are rather

variable. Sufficient work has not been done in relation to the floristic composition

of the associated vegetation to decide whether variations in profile can be con-

sistently correlated with floristic variations. XX. australis definitely prefers a

slightly better drained habitat and is always more abundant on the small sandy

“banks” (rarely more than 2 ft. or 3 ft. higher) that are common throughout the

heath. Banksia ornata is indicative of a moderate clay subsoil.

Although most of the heath conforms to the above description of the

X. australis-H. rostrata association, towards the northern part of the area modifi-

cations in the soils result in modified species composition.

2 Melaleuca gibbosa—Hakea rugosa association

(a) About the southern edge of the Hundred of Spence, in the low-lying area

between the sand ranges, there are very shallow grey soils (over limestone), which

are very wet in winter and spring, with numerous very small limestone rises. On

the low-lying wetter parts the principal plants are Melaleuca gibbosa, Darwinta

micropetala, Hakea rugosa, Leptocarpus Brownu, Lepidosperma concavum and

Pimelea glauca. On higher ground, or very small stony rises depauperate Euca-

lyptus fasciculosa (pink gum), Xanthorrhoea australis, Hakea rostrata, Casuarina

pusilla, Banksia marginata and Darwinia micropetala are associated. On slightly

higher rises, in addition to E. fasciculosa, D. micropetala and X. australis, Mela-

leuca sp. (aff. M. uncinata), Leptospermum scoparium and Isopogon ceratophyllus

are common.

161

“(b) North of (a) (¢.g., sections 60 and 67, Hd. Spence) there are some

further variations in floristic composition. The soils again are very shallow, and

on them occur scattered depauperate E> fasciculosa with very occasional stunted

Eucalyptus leucoxylon (blue gum). The remainder of the vegetation has heath

affinities. Olearia floribunda, Melaleuca gibbosa, M. uncinata (?), Hakea nodosa,

H, rugosa, Banksia marginata, Gahwa sp. (7), lsopogon ceratophyllus, Lepto-

spermum scopartum, Darwinia micropetala, Calythrix tetragona, Astroloma cono-

stephioides and Leptocarpus Brownii are the principal species.

3 E, fasciculosa-Banksia marginata association (pl. VI, fig. 16)

South-east of Lucindale, east of Baker’s Range, there is a variation worth

mentioning. The soil is rather variable, but principally grey sand over yellow

and grey sandy clay over limestone at 10-12 inches. Scattered trees of E. fasci-

culosa are common, with numerous sclerophyllous undershrubs—the principal

species are Banksia marginata (honeysuckle), B. ornate, Leptospermum scoparvum,

L, myrsinoides, Cladium filuin, Melaleuca gibbosa, Isopogon ceratophyllus, Dar-

winia micropetala, Calythrix tetragona, Hakea rugosa, X, australis, Acacia verht-

cillata, Astroloma conostephenioides, A. humifusum, Hibbertia fasciculata, Hib-

bertia sp. and Epacris impressa, This association approaches maquis, but is

grouped with the heath variants for convenience.

4 Cladium filum-Melaleuca gibbosa (?) association (pl. VI, fig. 15)

Between the Reedy Creek and West Avenue Ranges and adjacent to the Reedy

Creek, in the north-western portion of the area, the heath is frequently given a

particular physiognomy by the abundance of Cladium filum (black butt) and

Melaleuca gibbosa (?). Darwinia micropetala, Cladium junceum and Leptocarpis

Browmii are common. These regions are particularly wet in winter and the soils

variable. Two profiles examined by the author are given below in fig. 8.

sandy clay loam grey 3m sand

gen clay loan

erey- 5 silty clay loam

Lieht grey

le"

light grey silty clay

limestone

G limestone

Fig, 8

The modifications in the heath as described above are due principally to

edaphic factors, including water relationships. They have not been mapped

separately. They can hardly be considered edaphic subclimax associations of the

£. Baxteri sclerophyll forests in the same way as can the X. australis-H. rostrata

association. It is probably best to regard all the heath associations as an edaphic

complex, but one which has some definite floristic and edaphic links with the

E. Baxteri edaphic complex.

MALLEE Scru,

1 Eucalyptus diversifolia association (pl. VII, fig. 17-18)

_ The mallee proper in our Lower South-East is practically limited in distribu-

tion to a strip adjacent to the coast between Beachport and Robe. This area

receives between 24” and 26” of rain per annum, Here, on shallow brown and

162

red-brown soils (terra rossa) and somewhat deeper yellow-brown and yellow

sands, over the “consolidated dune” limestone of the Woakwine Range, there is a

typical low dense mallee scrub of E, diverstfolia, which rarely exceeds more than

nine feet in height.

Associated with EF. diversifola are a number of sclerophyllous shrubs and

undershubs, many of which are common to the sclerophyll forest and the heath.

The principal of these are Banksia marginata, Xanthorrhoea australis (yacka),

Hakea rostrata, Pultenaea laxiflora var, pilosa, P, acerosa var. acicularis, Hibbertia

sericea, Daviesi brevifoli, Astroloma humifusum, Dillwynia floribunda, Hakea sp.

(probably H, vittata), Pimelia glauca, Thomasia petalocalyx and Acacia sp. (pro-

bably A. myrtifolia), Lepidosperma carphotdes and L. concavwm are frequently

prominent. Other plants occurring, and more or less important, include Halerr-

hagts tetragyna, Correa rubra, Scirpus nodosus, the twining Comesperma volubile

and the climbing Billardiera cymosa, The principal grass is Stipa sp.

Acaena Sanguisorbae is very conspicuous on the shallower soils. Stackhousia

monogyna has an important seasonal aspect.

Dodonaea sp., Bursaria spinosa and Melaleuca pubescens are sometimes

present, and occasionally may become locally important.

On the coastal side of this association there may be a considerable admixture

with coastal plants like Acacia longifolia var. Sophorae (locally called boobyalla)

and Leucopogon parviflorus (white currant).

Eucalyptus leucoxylon var. macrocarpa as a somewhat stunted form has been

recorded in some hollows where water-relationships are improved.

On most of the shallow soils associated with the isolated consolidated dunes

which occur scattered throughout all the more inland sand ranges (1.¢., east of the

Woakwine Range) Eucalyptus fasciculosa (pink gum) is widespread. It is

approximately limited in the south by the 25” rainfall isohyet, above which it is

replaced by E. obliqua, or where the soils are too shallow by societies of Banksia

morginata and/or Dodonaea sp, It forms a rather open, savannah-like association

and sclerophyllous shrubs and undershrubs are relatively rare. Bursaria spinosa,

Banksia marginata, Dodonaea sp. are often present; the latter two frequently

forming dense societies. Xanthorrhoea australis is usually abundant at the margin

of the consolidated dune, where there is some admixture with sand. Astroloma

humifusum and Acaena Sanguisorbae are usually prominent. The principal grasses

are Danthonia setacea, D. semiannularis (?), Neurachne alopecuroides and

Koeleria Michelu, The association, however, is not very consistent, varying prin-

cipally with variations in soil depth, and it has not been practical to map in these

isolated small areas on the vegetation map.

Towards the northern limits of County Robe, particularly on the consolidated

dunes of the Bull Island-Reedy Creek area, E. diversifolta (mallee) is associated

with E, fasciculosa (pl. VII, fig. 18). As we proceed further north £. diversifolia

becomes more important in this edaphic habitat, finally displacing £. fasctculosa

altogether. £. fasciculosa is a species with a very wide potential habitat.

SAVANNAH COMMUNITIES

1 Melaleuca pubescens association (pl. VII, fig. 19)

Before considering the more important savannah communities dominated by

the eucalypts, it will be more convenient to describe the association dominated by

Melaleuca pubescens (dry-land tea-tree),

This association is most important on the very shallow soils of the Woakwine

Range, south of Beachport, and the belt of mallee just described (see vegetation

map). It also occurs on a small coastal range of consolidated dunes towards

Nelson (Victoria), on portion of Stuart’s Range (west of the Naracoorte Plain)

163

and some consolidated dunes at Bull Island (here, however, there occurs also

E. fasciculosa).

Melaleuca pubescens in this habitat is a small tree, about 15 feet high, fre-

quently with a dense canopy. The association, however, is a very open one.

Bursaria spinosa is sometimes conspicuous, but the associated plants are practi-

cally confined to grasses and herbaceous annuals and perennials. Like most

savannah communities it has been used for grazing since early settlement, and there

is consequently a large number of introduced grasses and clovers.

The principal grasses are Stipa tenuiglumis, Danthonia semiannularis, Festuca

rigida, F. Myuros, Koeleria Michelii, K. phleoides, Aira caryophyllea and Bromus

villosus. Other plants conspicuous in spring include Helichrysum apiculatum,

Vittadinia triloba, Cynoglossum australe, Arenaria serpyllifolia (‘thyme-leaved

sandwort), Brachycome debilis, Hydrocotyle sp., Geranium sp., Myosotis australis,

Sherardia arvensis (field madder) and Juncus bufonius, Acaena Sangutsorbae is

abundant on the very shallow soils.

Metilotus tndica (King Island melilot) and Trifolium procumbens (hop

clover) are usually abundant where the association has been regularly grazed.

The soils are very shallow sandy loams over “consolidated dune” limestone,

but where they become’ deeper (usual!y in valleys) Casuarina stricta and/or

Xanthorrhoea australis and Pteridium aquilinum may be locally important. Very

rarely Acacia melanoxylon occurs on deeper soils,

On the coastal side of the Woakwine Range there is admixture with plants

of the coastal complex like Leucopogon parviflorus and Acacia longifolia var.

Sophorae. Other coastal species like the grasses Koeleria phleoides and Lagurus

ovatus, which are very abundant, and the shrubs Sambucus Gaudichaudiana (white

elder) and Solanum aviculare occur.

This association adjacent to Beachport becomes intermixed with mallee and

finally gives way to it altogether, although it re-occurs again near Mount Benson.

The association is undoubtedly allied to a Melaleuca pubescens association in the

Curramulka-Minlaton-Yorketown area on Yorke Peninsula (South Australia),

where associated with M. pubescens on very shallow -soils over limestone are

Bursaria spinosa (native box), Casuarina stricta and many grasses (principally

Stipa spp. and Danthonia sp.). There is also a great admixture of mallee. This

association, however, has not yet been studied by ecologists.

M. pubescens also occurs sparingly towards the edge of some of the grey

-rendzina country, as north-west of Lucindale, and occasionally on the margins of

the Naracoorte Plain (rendzina).

Although so different structurally, the Melaleuca pubescens association is

undoubtedly closely linked edaphically with the Z. diversifolia association, and the

equilibrium between them is probably a relatively unstable one.

2 Eucalyptus camaldulensis association (pl. VII, fig. 20; pl. VIII, fig. 21-22)

This association is developed on the meadow podsols and is the association

‘par excellence of the Kalangadoo Sand.

Unfortunately, it has been greatly modified by man, who has imposed an

artificial drainage system. It was a typical savarinah dominated by E. camaldu-

lensis (red gum, better known as E, rostrata), with numerous gum saplings and

a ground flora chiefly of grasses and cyperaceous and juncaceous plants.

A great deal of the area is at present being intensely developed under sub-

terranean clover (Trifolium subterraneum) and perennial rye-grass (Lolium

_ perenne), Other pasture species used are cocksfoot (Dactylis glomerata), white

clover (Trifolium repens) and Phalaris (P. iuberosa).

164

The Kalangadoo Sand is naturally poorly drained and subjected to much

excess water in winter and spring, and low-lying swampy areas are frequent.

Most of these dry up in summer, and very few remain as permanent swamps or

waterholes. Although these soils are waterlogged in winter, they dry out con-

siderably in the summer.

The principal grasses are Danthonia geniculata, Poa bulbosa and Briza mior.

Others occurring less abundantly are Aira caryophyllea, Rottboellia compressa

(mat grass), Microlaena stipoides, Hordeum maritimum, AH. murinum and Era-

grostis diandra, Holcus lanatus (fog grass) is sometimes abundant.

There are a great number of other monocotyledonous plants belonging to the

Cyperaceae, Juncaceae, Amaryllidaceae and Centrolepidaceae, which are most

prominent in the lower-lying and consequently wetter places. These include

Cyperus tenellus, Scirpus setaceus, Juncus pallidus (pale rush), J. capilatus,

J. panciflorus, Carex tereticaulis, Lusula campestris, Hypoxis glabella, Centrolepts

oristata and Brizula gracilis. Other species frequently present are Lepidosperma

concavum, Bartschia latifolia, Drosera peltata, Utricularia dichotoma, Rutidosts

multiflora, Crassula macrantha, Leontodon hirtus (lesser hawkbit) and the com-

mon introduced composite Hypochderis radicata (rooted cat’s ear or dandelion).

Nanthorrhoea australis (yacka) is often abundant, but occurs chiefly on the

imore marginal areas where the soils are transitional in nature, Here there are

many shrubs like Bursaria spinosa, Banksia marginata, Acacia mollisima and

A, melanoxylon associated, Simall societies dominated by Pteridium aquilinum

(bracken fern) are frequent on the higher and slightly better-drained areas.

The association is best known to the author in the Kalangadoo-Penola area.

South of Kingston, on modified shallower but low-lying soils, E. camaldulensis is

somewhat stunted and there is a modified ground flora, On the higher land, east

of the Naracoorte Range. “gilgais” are not uncommon and the soils may have

affinities with the red-brown earths. Here Melaleuca sp. (probably M. pubescens)

and Casuarina Luehmannii (bulloak) sometimes occur as co-dominants. Eucalyp-

tus leucoxylon (blue gum) is not uncommon, When more fully understood these

variations can undoubtedly be grouped within, an “edaphic complex’”’—they are

indeed separate, but very closely allied, associations.

Small low-lying black soil swamps (wet in winter and spring) are frequent

about the Kalangadoo area. The floristics are variable, depending upon the degree

of swampiness, In late spring, after these swampy areas have more or less dried

up. Myriophyllum elatinoides, Schoenus apogon, Centipeda Cunninghanui and the

grasses Calamagrostis filiformis and Polypogon maritimus are common. Poa

caepitosa occurs in the less swampy black soil areas.

3. Eucalyptus ovata-Xanthorrhoea australis association (pl, VILL, fig, 23-24)

On some of the meadow podsols (¢.g., Riddoch Sand) and extending onto

the rendzinas in part, is a savannah association which is given a characteristic

physiognomy by the dominance of /, ovata (white or swamp gum), and in a lower

stratum, X. australis (yacka), The soils are all low-lying and prior to drainage

must have been very wet in winter and spring. Casuarina stricta (sheoak) and

Banksia inarginata are sometimes present and may more or less replace E. ovate.

Bursaria spinosa, Acacia melanoxylon and Viminaria denudata occur sparingly.

Of the ground flora the principal species are grasses, Danthonia spp. (prob.

D. geniculata and D, semtannularis), Hypochderis radicata, Erythraea Cen-

taurium and Mentha sp. are usually common.

In the wetter low-lying parts Chorizandra enodis, Lepidosperma lineare and

L. concavum are abundant.

165

The association has been greatly affected by man and is difficult to assess fully

from those remnants remaining. West of the Mount Burr Range adjacent to

Tantanoola, on a somewhat deeper phase of the Riddoch Sand, X. australis is

replaced to some extent by Lomandra longifolia,

There is a large ecotone between this association and the heath in the Hun-

dred of Riddoch.

On the east side of the Reedy Creek-Conmurra Plain and adjacent to the

Reedy Creek Range, on variable soils (some have affinities with the Riddoch Sand),

there is a great mixture of species, which because of the frequent prevalence of

X. australis is best considered here. Plants recorded include Eucalyptus fasct-

ciulosa, E, leucoxylon, Melaleuca pubescens and Casuarina stricta, the grasses,

Danthonia semiannularis, Brisa minor, Hordeum maritinum and Themeda

triandra, while Cladium junceum and Lepidosperima lineare occur freely (pl. IX,

fig. 27), The area is a very complex one because the soils are very variable and

it cannot (at present) be satisfactorily grouped with any of the main associations.

But at least in part there are some affinities with the E. ovata-X. australis associa-

tion, and on the vegetation map the whole area has been mapped in with this asso-

ciation,

4 Eucalyptus leucoxylon-Eucalyptus fasciculosa association (pl. IX, fig. 26)

South-west of Bool Lagoon and in a narrow strip running south from Lucin-

dale there is a rather variable association: HK, leucaxylon (blue gum) and, less

abundantly, E. fasciculosa occur. There is considerable variation within the asso-

ciation and detailed analyses, in connection with a survey of the soil types involved,

is needed before the correct status of the community can be determined. The

actual area though, is small, and the association or associations relatively

unimportant. X. australis is usually abundant, and Banksia marginata is also

frequently present. The principal grasses of the ground flora are Themeda triandra

(kangaroo grass) and Danthonia sp. .

5 Gahnia trifida-Cladium filuim association (pl. IX, fig. 25)

On most of the rendzina soils trees were almost entirely absent, and a

savannah of which the principal plants were Gahnia trifida (cutting grass),

Cladium filum (thatching grass or black butt) and the grass Poa caespitosa

(locally called “white tussock”) occurred. Being treeless, if we except the

ubiquitous Banksia marginata (honeysuckle), it was only natural that following

drainage it should have been rapidly and almost completely developed. In the past

it has been used chiefly for agricultural purposes, particularly barley-growing, but

of latter years seeded pastures and shecp and dairying are becoming important.

In view of the extensive development that has taken place, it is absolutely

impossible to gather a satisfactory picture of the natural vegetation assemblages

of these low-lying swampy rendzina plains. Little more can be done than mention

the most common species occurring in the isolated pieces of vegetation that have

escaped destruction.

There is little doubt that Gala trifida, Cladium filum and Poa caespitosa

were the most important and consistent species, but it is also certain that their

relative abundance varied considerably. Considering the varying salinity of the

soils, it is to be expected that modifications in floristic composition were common.

From the original survey records, information concerning the occurrence of dense

societies of B. marginata (honeysuckle) on some of these “plains” was obtained.

Only a very occasional honeysuckle is left of this so-called “honeysuckle

forest." The author macroscopically examined the soils of such an area defined

by the early surveyors, but could see no difference, in field examinations, of the

() This is no doubt the “honeysuckle country’ mentioned by Tennyson Woods in his

“Geological Observations in South Australia.”

166

profiles in the “honeysuckle forest” area, and an adjacent area delineated by the

surveyors as “cutting grass flat.” Nor did there appear to be any difference if

microtopography.

Most of the plants associated are wet habitat species like Leptocarpus

Brown, Juncus maritimus var. australiensis, Cladium junceum, Centrolepis

polygyna, Scirpus antarcticus, and Schoenus nitens. Danthonia semiannularis is

fairly frequently present. In the more or less saline areas Distichlis spicata (emu

grass) is often abundant. Cladium filum appears to be more tolerant to salinity

than does Gahnia trifida,

Mdetuieuca pubescens occurs sparingiy on some rendzina soils, ¢.g., a small

wecurrence on very shallow dark grey soils allied to the rendzinas north-west of

Lucindale township.

OTHER COMMUNITIES

Ihe Vegetation of the Volcanic Hills—The volcanic soils are limited (see soil

map) und most of the larger areas have been farmed or in other ways the original

vegetation entirely destroyed. Eucalyptus ovata (white gum) occurs occasionally,

and Acacia melanoxylon (blackwood) and A. mollisima (black wattle) have been

recorded. There appears to be some similarity with Patton’s “Basalt Plains asso-

ciation” (14). The distribution of the volcanic soils is shown on the soil map,

but because of the difficulties mentioned above no differentiation is made on the

vegetation map.

SWAMPs

In an area like the Lower South-East, where natural drainage is impeded,

swamps and semi-swamps are very common and vary considerably. They are far

too variable and complex to be considered here and warrant particular and more

detailed study. As yet the only ones described are the isolated Myriophyllum-

Sphagnum bogs near Moynt MacIntyre (6), and recently one of the large coastal

fens.“8) Because of its large extent mention should be made here of a large swamp

occurring at the western edge of the Conmurra-Reedy Creek Plain.. The area

dries out in summer but in winter and spring is covered with from one to two

inches to a foot of water. The soil is dark grey, heavy, shallow over limestone,

and exceedingly saline. A surface sample taken by the author had a pH 8:77,

25% sodium chloride and 67% total soluble salts. The dominant plant is

Melaleuca halmaturorum (salt-water tea-tree)—a small tree about 8-10 feet high.

Common in the ground flora are Aptum australe, Centrolepis polygyna, C. aristata,

Triglochin mucronata, Polypogon maritimum, Calamagrostis filiformis and Poa

lepida, Loranthus miraculosus var. melaleucae is a common parasite on the salt-

water tea-tree.

THE ORIGIN OF THE FLORA AND VEGETATIONAL DYNAMICS

Positive earth movements in Pleistocene and Recent times resulted in the

recession of the sea from the Lower South-East, west of the Naracoorte Range.

About the same time warping and faulting in the basement complex in the old

Murray guli was profoundly affecting the course of the Murray River, and block-

faulting and downward movements in the Gulf Regions of South Australia formed

the rift valleys of St. Vincent and Spencer Gulfs. This latter prevented further

easterly invasion from the endemic centres of south-west Western Australia.

Wood (27) has analysed the flora of the Fleurieu and adjacent peninsulas, and

shown that the flora is composed almost equally of species from the east and west.

He demonstrates the early spread of the western species and the later migrations

from the east. Later migration from the west has been prevented by the gulf

formation, This is entirely endorsed by the South-Eastern flora.

@) Eardley, C. M. 1943 Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 67, (2)

167

In the Lower South-East colonisation of the newly-elevated area was almost

entirely from the east—from the old early Pleistocene land surface. The sub-

sequent imposition of a severe arid cycle (4) must have had profound effects on

the stability of the vegetation. An analysis of the species of Australian origin

collected by the author is given in Table ITI.

TABLE III

An ANALYSIS OF THE FrorA or THE Lower SoutHu-East

Total number species (Australian) recorded - - - 212

Limited to eastern Australia and South Australia - - 136

Occurring in both east and west Australia - - - &§2

Endemic to South Australia - - - - - 23

Limited to South Australia and Western Australia - - 1 (a grass)

The colonisation from the east is well illustrated by the Eucalyptus camaldu-

lensis association which has obviously invaded the area by way of the Marambro,

the Naracoorte and the Mosquito Creeks—particularly the latter. It occurs on all

the meadow podsols defined by the Kalangadoo Sand, and has established itself on

a small area of Riddoch Sand in the transition zone where these two allied soil

types grade gradually into each other.

There is evidence from the edaphic side, and considering that colonisation

has been from the east, that the E. ovata-X, australis has spread at the expense of

some of the Gahnia trifida-Cladium filum association, The former association

occurs on the Riddoch Sand, but has occupied a large area of shallow rendzina

soils, both north of Hatherleigh and near Furner (cf. soil and vegetation maps).

But there are slight modifications in floristic composition in the two habitats, e.g.,

Poa caespitosa is usually present on the rendzinas. This invasion, however, which

appears to have been proceeding very slowly, was suddenly and for all time ended

when artificial drains were built. Land development since has steadily taken place,

and is still proceeding.

The dry sclerophyll forest, associated with the podsolised sands of the series

of strand ranges, has apparently reached relative stability. It is suggested that

very small land movements, either positive or negative, have little effect on the

ranges, whereas in the lower lying areas, with their exceedingly gradual fall to the

west and north-west very minor seismic fluctuations have a considerable effect on

drainage and so actttal soil-water relationships. This would, no doubt, reflect on

the stability of plant commumities associated with them.

Since land development began many cosmopolitan herbs and grasses have

been introduced and are frequently conspicuous in the ground flora in the savannah

communities, Where important, they have becn mentioned in the descriptions of

the association.

DISCUSSION

The general ecology of the vegetation of the Lower South-East of Sotth

Australia has been described, The area is a very complex one, and the field for

more detailed work is an open one. This study, however, throws an interesting

light on general soil-vegetation-climate relationships, which have never been well

presented or well understood. The arguments of varying schools pro and contra

climatic climaxes and climatic climax succession, and the interpretation and mis-

interpretation by other workers of their hypotheses, have led to a great deal of

confusion amongst ecologists, particularly, as pointed out earlier, in relation to

terminology.

EpapHic CONSIDERATIONS

In the area described in this paper the relationship between soils and vegeta-

tion is for the most part remarkably clear cut; Where an association occurs on a

168

modified soil or differing soil type, e.g., E. camaldulensis association, on Kalan-

gadoo Sand, on the higher moditied soils east of the Naracoorte Range or on shallow

soils south of Kingston, there is always accompanying modifications in floristic

composition. This was also so for variations within the heath soils, where the

floristic variations were described as separate associations which could be linked

into an edaphic complex, and again for the dry sclerophyll forest edaphic complex.

The transition from meadow podsol (Kalangadoo Sand) to podsolised sand, and

the sharp change in associated vegetation association and formation is well illus-

trated in pl. IX, fig. 28.

The only case in which the transition from association to association was not

linked with obvious edaphic changes was in the case of the possible invasion of

some of the rendzina soils by the E. ovata-X. australis association. But because

of seismic fluctuations the communities of the low-lying plains with their poor

drainage and varying salinity are not considered to have reached a relative stability

comparable with the better drained types. Ecotone areas are essentially edaphic

transition zones, The general relationships are in complete agreement with the

conclusion that Wood (1939) has reached as a result of his wide experience with

South Australian plant communities—'‘the edaphic complexes and formations ....

are determined in the one climatic zone essentially by soil conditions.”

The edaphic control of the distribution of the principal associations in portion

of- the north-west of South Australia has already been established, and some

variations within the associations themselves explained on edaphic grounds (7).

The evidence from ecological studies elsewhere in Australia, which has

recently been summarised (5), neglecting the invasion of eucalypt forest by rain

forest (Blake, 1938), is also in general agreement with Wood’s conclusions.

Admittedly the soils are inadequately dealt with in most of the early Australian

ecology, and the opinions expressed are based on superficial observation. Too

much value should not be placed upon them, but they are useful as supporting

evidence. In the absence of information concerning soil profiles and soil variation,

and indications of the nutrient levels and soil reaction, the conclusion of Fraser

and Vickery (12) against edaphic control in the Upper Wilhams River and Bar-

rington Tops Districts (New South Wales) is not admissable.

Elsewhere edaphic factors are being recognised as more and more important.

Clements, Long and Martin (8) have found that the dwarf and procumbent forms

of dunes are not due, as is generally assumed, to aerial factors, but to edaphic

factors (both water and nutrient).

An association may occur on more than one soil type in a climatic zone. In

such cases, however, there are always (from the author’s experience) modifica-

tions in floristic composition and the soils are allied. They are, in reality, separate

associations. Soil variations in the South-East can be correlated with floristic

variations, and separate associations linked within Wood’s edaphic complex satis-

factorily demonstrate the environmental relationships.

Water relationships frequently compensate for edaphic variations. This

applies especially to species or groups of species rather than whole associations.

For example, in eastern Australia (Brough, Mcluckie and Petrie 1924, Fraser

and Vickery 1938, Blake 1938) rain forest occurs on elevated basaltic soils, while

in the narrow valley bottoms on poorer soils, where edaphic water relationships

are compensating there is modified rain forest. Within the 10-inch isohyet in

western Queensland (Blake 1938), on the gravelly downs, the vegetation of the

Astrebla pectinata association tends to restrict itself to the margins of the crab-

holes where water relationships are better. In the north-west of South Australia

(Crocker and Skewes (7) ) the occurrence of numerous species like 4cacta aneura

(mulga), Kochia pyranidata and Acacia Burkittii on different edaphic habitats is

due to compensating moisture factors,

169

Within one climatic zone, then, the distribution of vegetation is controlled by

edaphic factors, although abnormal water relationships may be compensating and

result in species and groups of species occurring in two different edaphic habitats.

CLIMATIC CONSIDERATIONS

The effect of climate on vegetation has always been difficult to assess because

of the great edaphic variability, which has usually been only poorly understood.

Indeed, climate, until recently, was considered by pedologists to be all-important

in influencing soil morphology to the almost complete disregard of geological his-

tory. The better understanding of soil fertility, especially the light thrown on it

by the opening up of the minor (micro) element field, has tended to a more

balanced view.

In the South-East the dune range remnants are arranged almost at right

angles to the climatic zones, and pass through several of them, The same soil

type is more or less continuous from regions with a rainfall of more than thirty

inches per annuin in the south, to those receiving about 20-22 inches at the northern

part of County Robe, and continues northwards to approximately the 17-inch

isohyet. They extend over climatic limits ranging from Davidson’s Warm Tem-

perate Semi-humid Zone, with P/E > 0-5 for mine months of the year, to his

Warm Temperate Semi-arid Zone, with P/E > 0:5 for six months of the year. In

the most northerly regions the dune ranges are less regular, but over the whole

range one soil type occurs-—re-sorted, previously leached, deep siliceous sands of

the Mount Burr sand type. The opportunities for fundamental studies on the

effect of climate are indeed unique.

The effect on the floristic composition and structure of the E. Barteri

(stringybark) dry sclerophyll forest as we proceed from the Mount Burr Range

region to the northern portion of County Robe has aleady been pointed out. We

pass gradually from the highly developed forest in the south, where the dominant

FE. Baxteri is approximately 50 feet high, to the more open forest in the northerly

regions, with depauperate stunted E. Baxtert and modified associated plants. The

change is a very gradual one—the dominants gradually become lower and asso-

ciated plants slowly drop out. other more arid species appearing. As we proceed

further north the E, Baxtert becomes more dwarfed and mallce-like in appearance

and, finally, about the 19-inch isohyet reaches the limits of its climatic range (at

least on this soil type) and disappears altogether. Before this it was mixed with

E. angulosa (mallee), and occasionally £, diversifolia (white mallee), which now

take its place. Most of the common sclerophyllous shrubs of the Mount Burr

forest have disappeared; exceptions are Leptospremum myrsinoides, Xanthorr-

hoea australis, Lepidosperma carphotdes, Hibbertia spp., Banksia ornata and a few

others. New associated species like Leptospermum coriaceum, Phyllota pleu-

randroides, Casuarina pusilla, Hypolaena fastigiata and Adenanthos terminalis are

prominent. Further north, about the 174-inch isohyet (¢.g., Coonalpyn),

E, dwersifolia is more prominent, and £. leptophylla also occurs associated with

E, angulosa, ‘

The climate, therefore, affects a gradual modification of the floristic

composition and structure of plant communities. In the more arid regions of the

State it has already been recognised (25) that climate, in conjunction with migra-

tion of species, has a sifting effect on the vegetation, in a gradual progression,

with increasing aridity, through a series of communities—savannah woodland,

mallee, tree steppes and finally shrub steppe. It has also been considered by

Wood (26) that only by selecting arbitrary climatic zones can definite associations

he delimited in this case. In the South-East this is definitely so on the “range”

sands, but the soils over the range Wood has ‘indicated are by no means as con-

stant in profile or nutrient levels. and with detailed soil survey work edaphic rela-

“170

tionships would probably in many cases permit of more accurate association and

formation delineation. But in any case the influence of climate on structure and

composition of plant communities is a modifying one.

It is not strictly true, then, in the circtumstances, to say that in the one climatic

zone associations and formations are controlled by edaphic factors, but rather that

this is so in the one climatic horizon. So that, in any extensive association, even

under conditions of absolute edaphic uniformity, modifications in floristic com-

position must be expected—varying, of course, with the rapidity of climatic

changes—that is, whether the climatic zones are narrow or broad.

If uniform soil types were widespread over climatic zones or numerous

“climatic horizons,” it would be possible to build up “climatic climax” associa-

tions in the sense suggested by Wood (1939). One could further build up

“climatic complexes” analogous to edaphic complexes. In practice edaphic

variation is usually so great that this is unnecessary. Climatic complexes of this

type have been satisfactorily employed, however, in one instance (1), and will be

necessary when extending this study into the Upper South-East.

Reviewing the ecology of the mountainous regions of the Eastern States, and

the difficulties experienced by all workers there, it is obvious that topographical

climatic changes are producing continuous modifications in structure and com-

position of the communities, masking most edaphic relationships. It is clear, too,

that in these cases we are not dealing with associations in the true sense (floristic

variation is too great), but rather with “climatic complexes,” and many of the pro-

blems met by Pryor (20) and Pidgeon (15), with their “forest types,” could be

overcome, and the relationships of the communities better expressed in terms of

edaphic and more particularly climatic complexes.

Summarising, it may be re-stated that most of the difficulties in Australian

ecology have been due to a poor perspective as to the relative importance of edaphic

and climatic factors, and especially to the great disregard of the edaphic condi-

tions. Because species possess variable potential environments (both edaphic and

climatic) the effect of climate on a natural assemblage of plants is to modify both

structure and. specific composition, and climatic changes are, except in special

cases, like sharp rain shadows, always gradual. Major soil variations, on the other

hand, are usually sharp and clear cut, and depend principally on geologic history, but

are modified by climate. Edaphic factors, therefore, cause sudden and profound

changes in composition and structure, and are responsible for the distribution of

formations and associations within any climatic horizon.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The author wishes especially to acknowledge the assistance of Miss C. M.

Eardley, upon whom the greatest burden of identification fell, and Mr. C. G.

Stephens of the Soils Division, Council for Scientific and Industrial Research,

who was particularly encouraging in the field. Of great assistance was the advice

given by Prof. J. G. Wood, who from the outset took a personal interest in the

work.

REFERENCES CITED

(1) Batpwin, J. G., and Crocker, R. L. 1941 Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.,

65, (1)

(2) Brake, S. T. 1938 University of Queensland Papers

(3) Broucu, P., McLucxig, J., Perriz, A. H. K. 1924 Proc. Linn. Soc.

N.S.W.

(4) Crocxer, R. L. 1941 Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 65, (1)

(5) Crocker, R. L. Thesis, University of Adelaide

Trans. Roy. Soc, S, Aust., 1944

VEGETATION MAP OF PORTION OF LOWER SOUTH-EAST

Lf ?

ay Y

ALIS oe

‘) sv)

aoe

Ki a

‘ o*, ;

SV »

erste,

Sade Ih mt

AEN

\ \\\ WY WEY

————

AEN aN EW SN

moi

\\ +

ANAS y,

ASS g

Lf =5

—

i =

% %

2 ”

= r

2 €

5 2

3 ey 2

ne Pe s

= S 2

x é 5

n 2 i 8

z & 2 =

S 3

2 | ee 2 5

P g 3 aes

a 7s ne £ 2 8s = s

Be 5 3 sas = %

Bee = 5 = § g 3

a = S =

at Pee Set ee ee ee

= 2 = FA 2 4 es

es ae ct ES TS

= z 2 SS = s

Se Gees eteawee. Ge ks

171

(6) Crocker, R. L., and Earptey, C. M. 1939 Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.,

(7) Crocker, R. L., and Skewes, H. R. 1941 Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust,

65, (1)

(8) Crements, F. E., Lone, and Martin, E. 1939 Imp. Bur. Pastures and

Forage Crops

(9) Davipson, J. 1936 Trans. Roy Soc, S. Aust., 60

(10) Fenner, C. 1930 Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 54

(11) Fenner, C. 1921 ‘Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 45

(12) Fraser, L., and Vickery, J. W. 1938 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.

(13) Howcnin, W. “Geology of South Australia”

(14) Parron, R. T. 1935 Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict.

(15) Pipczon, I. M. Thesis, University of Sydney

(16) Prescorr, 1929 Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 53

(17) Prescorr, . 1942 Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust., 66, (1)

(18) Prescort, J. A. 1931 Coun, Sci. Ind. Res. (Aust.), Bull. 52

(19) Prescorr, J. A., and Piper, C. S. 1929 Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc.

S. Aust., 53

(20) Pryor, L.O. 1939 Thesis, University of Adelaide

(21) Rosinson, G. W. “Soils, their Origin, Constitution and Classification”

(22) Srantey, E.R. 1909 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 33

(23) STEPHENS, et alia Coun. Sci. Ind. Res. (Aust.), Bull. 142

(24) Trumpie, H.C. 1937 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 61

(25) Woop, J. G. “Vegetation of South Australia,” Govt. Printer, Adelaide

(26) Woon, J. G. 1939 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63

(27) Woop, J. G. 1930 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 54

(28) Woops, JuLtan, 1862 “‘Geology of South Australia”

(29) Woops, TENNyson “Geological Observations in South Australia”

JA.

J. A

EXPLANATION OF PLATES V-IX

Prats V

Fig. 9 Eucalyptus Baxteri association on Mount Burr Sand in the Mount Burr Range

area. Banksia marginata, Xanthorrhoca quadrangulata and Pteridinm aquilinum are prominent

in the photograph. Rainfall, 30 inches per annum,

Fig. 10 #. Baxteri forest on deep podsolised sand. The typical sclerophyllous under-

shrubs include Pteridiwn aquilinum, Xanthorrhoea australis and X. quadrangulata. Eucalyptus

Huberiana sparingly present. Mount Burr Forest Reserve. Rainfall, 30 inches per annum.

Fig. 11 4, Huberione association. Mount Burr Range. Soil, approximately 18” yellow-

brown sand over limestone.

Fig. 12 Depauperate E. Barteri dry sclerophyll forest on leaiched siliceous sands very

closely allied to the Mount Burr Sand, east of Lucindale (Baker’s Range). X. quadrongulate

Isopogon ceratophyllus, Banksia ornata, B. marginata and Leptospermum myrsinoides are the

chief sclerophyllous undershrubs. Annual rainfall, 23 inches.

Prate VI

Fig. 13 Depauperate E. Baxteri forest on leached siliceous sands, West Avenue Range,

pears qilende Xanthorrhoea australis is very prominent in the foreground. Annual rain-

all, 24 inches.

Fig. 14 Xanthorrhoea australis — Hakea rostrata association. The species conspicuous in

the foreground include X, australis, Casuarina paludosa var. robusta, Isopogon. ceratophyllus,

Banksia marginata. Epacris impressa, etc.

Fig. 15 Cladium filum—Meloleuca gibbosa (2) association between Reed Creek and

West Avenue Ranges adjacent to the Kingston-Bull Island road. , =

Fig. 16 Eucalyptus fasiculosa — Banksia marginata association south-east of Lucindale.

Other plaints included Acacia verticillata, Hakea rugosa, X, australis, Melaleuca gibbosa and

Leptospermum myrsinoides.

172

Piate VII .

Fig. 17. Eucalyptus diversifolia (white mallee) association on Woakwine Range near

Beachport. Xanthorrhoea australis and Banksia marginata are here the most prominent of

the associated sclerophyllous undershrubs.

Fig. 18 E. diversifolia and E. fasiculosa ona consolidated dune between Reedy Creek

and’ Bull Island. ;

Fig. 19 Melaleuca pubescens association on Woakwine Range opposite Beachport. Acacna

Sanguisorbae is here abundant. ;

Fig. 20 Eucalyptus camaldulensis association between Hynam and Naracoorte.

: Pirate VIII

Fig. 21 E. camaldulensis association near Wattle Range H.S. Meadow podsol soil type:

Fig. 22 E. camaldulensis association near Kalangadoo. Soil type, Kalangadoo Sand.

Chief grass is Danthonia geniculata. Juncus pallidus (pale rush), J. capitatus and Scirpus

calocarpus are also prominent. .

Fig. 23 Eucalyptus ovata~Xanthorrhoca australis association between Hatherleigh and

Konetta H.S. Soil, rendzina affinities.

Fig. 24 E. ovata—X. australis association on Riddoch Sand (a. meadow podsol)..- Hd.

Riddoch.

Pate TX

Fig.25 Ga/mia trifida (cutting grass) on black (rindzina) soil of the Millicent Clay type.

Fig. 26 Eucalyptus leucoxylon — X. australis association near Lucindale. E. fasiculosa

is also present.

Fig. 27 Eucalyptus fasiculosa--X,. australis associated on a shallow meadow podsol

(Riddoch sand affinities) west of Reedy Creck Range. Lepidosperma lincare in the foreground.

Fig. 28 Transition between Kalangadoo Sand (meadow podsol) and Mount Burr Sand

(normal podsol) near Mount McIntyre. The transition is sharp and paralleled by changes

from the FE. Baxteri dry sclerophyl! forest on the Mount Burr Sand (background) to E. casmel-

dulensis savannah on the meadow podsol. (Photograph, C. G. Stephens.)

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate V

ig. 9

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate VI

ig.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate VII

sare So

: N

00 k

(xy On

Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust, 1944 Vol. 68, Plate VIII

Trans. Roy. Soc. §

. Aust., 1944

—

Rese d

a soe a

ot,

= sat

Fig. 25

Vol. 68, Plate IX

. 28

fy ee r

fA f Th fee

‘ (AVY Ff

[Derwand X MLah Sr f\~,

VOL. 68 PART 2 — 30 NOVEMBER 1944

BERNARD ©. COTTON,

166 WELLINGTON RD., ADELAIDE,

TRANSACTIONS OF

THE ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

ADELAIDE

PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS

KINTORE AVENUE, ADELAIDE

Price - «= Twelve Shillings and Sixpe: > |

Registered at the General Post Office, Adelaide,

for transmission by post as a periodical

A SPECTROCHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF SOME IRONSTONE

GRAVELS FROM AUSTRALIAN SOILS

By A. C. OERTEL and J. A. PRESCOTT

Summary

In a previous communication (Prescott 1934) an account was given of the chemical nature of a

range of ironstone gravels associated with certain soils from Western Australia and South Australia.

The principal feature of this record was the characteristic presence in these gravels of iron oxides

corresponding to 22 to 66% of Fe203, and the low amount of manganese present. Similar results

have since been recorded by Beater (1940) for concretions present in Natal coastal soils. and by

Joachim and Kandiah (1941) for some concretions present in Ceylon soils.

173

A SPECTROCHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF SOME IRONSTONE GRAVELS

FROM AUSTRALIAN SOILS (1)

By A. C. Oerter and J. A, Prescorr

[Read 13 July 1944]

In a previous communication (Prescott 1934) an account was given of the

chemical nature of a range of ironstone gravels associated with certain soils from

Western Australia and South Australia, The principal feature of this record was

the characteristic presence in these gravels of iron oxides corresponding to 22 to

66% of Pe,O, and the low amount of manganese present. Similar results have

since been recorded by Beater (1940) for concretions present in Natal coastal soils,

and by Joachim and Kandiah (1941) for some concretions present in Ceylon soils.

The chemical nature of such gravels or concretions is of interest in throwing

light on soil-forming processes, particularly in the case of ironstone gravels present

in soil residuals associated with the laterite characteristic of certain uplifted pene-

plains and presumably formed under climatic conditions different from those

existing at present.

The present communication records the results of a re-examination of the

ironstone gravels previously mentioned using the spectrograph to determine the

detectable constituents both in the original gravels and in their hydrochloric acid

extracts. The examination of the hydrochloric acid extracts was made by a

quantitative method based om the addition to selected samples of known amounts

of the elements to bei estimated. The use of a rotating stepped sector wedge and

the addition of the element cadmium to the extracts to serve as an internal standard

enabled the selected samples to be used as standards for the analysis of the other

samples. The details of the method as standardised in these laboratories will be

given elsewhere.

The elements selected for quantitative estimation in the hydrochloric acid

extracts were: silver, boron, cobalt, chromium, copper, gallium, germanium,

manganese, molybdenum, nickel, lead, tin, vanadium and zinc. It was found that

the quantity of boron present was of the same order of magnitude as that present

as impurity in the carbon electrodes, and no attempt was therefore made to

estimate this element quantitatively. Germanium was found to remain in the

residue even when added to the sample. Tin, although present in the original

samples, was not detected in the extracts or the residues. The estimation of this

element in hydrochloric acid extracts of soils needs further investigation.

The quantitative estimations as given im Table { are believed to he correct to

within 25%.

PRELIMINARY Quatitarive EXAMINATIONS

Small sub-sanples of each sample of gravel were arced between graphite

electrodes. With the exception of boron and zinc all the above-named elements

were detected in at least some of the samples. Cobalt was detected. in only two of

the gravels. An unexpected result of this preliniinary examination was the easy

detection of molybdenum in nearly all the samples. The complete qualitative

examination of an ironstone gravel (No. 2954) from the Warburton Ranges, con-

taining G65 of FeO, showed the presence of aluminium, barium, calcium,

chromium, cobalt, copper, gallium, gerinanium, iron, lead, magnesium, manganese,

() A contribution from the Division of Soils, Council for Scientife and Industrial

Research.

Frans. Roy. Soe. S.A., 68, (2), 39 November 1944

molybdenum, nickel, potassium, silicon, silver, sodium, strontium, tin, titanium,

vanadium and zinc.

in three cases the soils associated with the gravels were also examined. They

included the soils associated with the gravel (No. 1850) from Kuitpo, South

Australia, a soil sample associated with a gravel (No. 1961) from Birdwood,

South Australia, and the soil sample associated with the above-mentioned gravel

No. 2954. This survey showed that the elements gallium, lead and molybdenum

were present in considerably higher concentrations in the gravel than in the asso-

ciated soil samples, whereas the elements cobalt and titanium were present at con-

siderably lower concentrations in the gravel than in the associated soils.

EXAMINATION oF THE Hyprocitoric Accu EXTRACTS

The extraction of the gravels was made with concentrated hydrochloric acid

of constant boiling strength on the water bath for 48 hours, as in the standard

examination of soils with special precautions to avoid contamination. Ten of the

eravels previously examined were selected as being sufficiently representative.

The results of the quantitative examination of these extracts for 14 elements are

recorded in Table I. The values for jron, aluminium and titanium are taken from

the original published analyses, The amounts of chromium and vanadium in these

campies may be compared with the amounts recorded by Simpson (1912) in

his analyses of Western Australian laterites from Kalgoorlie and Coolgardie. They

are of the same order. Lertrand (1942), in the examination of 20 soils, found

quantities of vanadium over the range, 0-3 to 6°8 parts per 100,000.

In order to give some perspective to these results, Goldschmidt’s figures for

the abundance of these elements in the earth’s crust are given. There is evidently

no change in order of magnitude associated with the relative concentration of

otherwise of these elements in the ironstone gravels, but there is a suggestion that

cobalt, copper, manganese and nickel are not concentrated in these gravels whereas

gallium, molybdenum, lead, vanadium and zine may be. This confirms the evi-

dence of the preliminary qualitative examination of some of these and other gravels

and their associated soils.

A qualitative examination of the residues after extraction showed that

although most of the iron had been extracted by treatment with acid, by no means

were all of the clements listed in Table I completely extracted.

TasBLe [

Elements Ve Al Ti Ag Co Cr Cu Ga Mn Mo Ni Ph Vo Zn

Sample

No. Locality oy &% Yo Parts per 100,000

Western Australia—

2306 Gibson Desert 21.6 3,4 0.2 — (7) -- 60 1.8 10 18 2.5 2.0 4 100 24

2310 ” ” ihe 34.3 2.9 0.2 ~ zee 49 3.5 6 90 4.0 1.2 6 100 i5

2296 + ay cige 30.0 3.0 0.2 0.02 aio 1 2.0 8 25 3.9 0.6 5 50 18

Mingenew ... wn «27,9 1.5 0.2 _ 1 2 10.0 1 3 2.0 5.0 5 10 12

3968 Gingin we were EG 5.2 0.2 _ = 5 1.8 3 2 1.2 1.9 3 12 18

South Australia—

2481 Hawk’s Nest w 28.7 3.5 0.2 ao —_ 6 18 6 14 25 50 6 60 15

2485 i 5 we «35.0 49 0.2 — — 8 #10 4 7 M2 ohh 5 “Oh 42

1850 Kuitpo “hick wee O7B 4.3 0.2 —~- — 6 1.4 4 6 6.0 0.8 4 25 24

2962 Waitpinga .. .. 314 2.3 0.3 Ps — 2 O07 $ 18 2.0 10 2 30 7

Alawoona 24.3 1.1 G1 + 0.06 2 2 #14 #2 4 #12 20 1 16 6

Abundance in earth’s crust @) SL 8.8 0.6 O01 4 20 «10 1.5 93 15 #10 1.6 10 4

(@) Where no values are given, the element was not detected,

(3) Goldschmidt (1937).

Tue RAtio or MotyepeENUM TO lRON

In view of the fact that the detection of molybdenum im the samples had

proved to be easy, it was of interest to attempt to determine whether there had

been a concentration of molybdenum in these gravels parallel with that of the

iron or in greater proportion, The relatively high concentration of molybdenum

‘n iron conerctions from Wyoming, to the amount of 2 and 1-5 parts per 100,000

has also been noted by Stantield (1935). Dingwall, McKibbin and Beans (1934)

were unable to detect molybdenum spectrographically in a group of Canadian

soils, but Watson (1943) found quantities of molybdenum over the rauge 0-2 to

1-9 parts per million in a number of soils from the South Island of New Zealand.

Sandell and Goldich (1943) found the average molybdenum content for 22

American igneous rocks to be 2-4 parts per million. These values may be com-

pared with the 15 parts per million of Goldschmidt. Spectrograms of 83 actual

soils from South Australia, New South Wales and Queensland were examined

for molybdenum, but this element was detected in only eight cases.

In order to compare the relative concentrations of iron and molybdenum mn

these soils with those of the gravels, the relative mtensities of lines in the spectro-

grams due to the two elements were compared. The known ratios of Mo to Fe

in the hydrochloric acid extracts enabled the factor to be ascertained connecting

these relative intensities with actual ratios. This factor was found from the

average of ten observations to be 6 x 10°, Jn Table II are given the ratios of

Mo to Fe in the original gravels.

Tape I

Ratio or Mo to Prin [RONSTONE GRAVELS

Western Australia---

Sample No. Juccality Ratio

2306 - - Gibson Desert 19x 10-°

2310 - = iy iv 10x 10-°

2296 - - ts x 12x 10°

Mingenew 24x 10°

South Australia—

2481 - ~ Hawk’s Nest 24x 10-%

2485 - - * . 30 x 107

1850 - - Kuitpo i9x 10%

2962 - - Waitpinga 24x 10°

Alawoona 8x 10>

In the case of the eight Australian soils mentioned above this ratio was

found to range between 5 x 10 and 10 x 10, as compared with the value of

30 x 10 -* derived from Goldschmidt’s table. The evidence is therefore in favour

not only of an absolute concentration of molybdenum in these gravels, but also

of a concentration relative to the iron probably of a twofold order,

DISCUSSION

The mobility of iron in the soil profile 1s determined principally by the fact

that ferrous hydroxide is precipitated in the neighbourhood of pH 5-5, and that

‘ron therefore is mobilised under reducing conditions more acid than this, but

less acid than the precipitating value for ferric hydroxide at pH 2-3. The

elements which show no evidence of concentration in these gravels are precipitated

as hydroxides at the following hydrogen ion concentrations :

Chromium - pH 5:3 Cobalt - - pH68

Copper - pH5:3 Silver - - pH7-5

Nickel - - pHoe-7 Manganese - pH 8-5

176

and would be expected to be leached from the soil readily at all hydrogen ion

concentrations more acid than pH 5 except for chromium which might form

chromates under certain conditions. Phosphorus and vanadium are known to

be concentrated in iron concretions and limonite (Lindgren 1923) as phosphate

and vanadate and similar concentrations could be expected of molybdate and

chromate, and probably of zincate and plumbate. In view of the fact that gallium

hydroxide is readily dissolved hy aqueous ammonia, its behaviour may be

expected to be parallel with that of zinc, so that the concentration of gallium in

these gravels can be readily understood.

SUMMARY

Ten ironstone gravels from Western Australia and South Australia have

been examined spectrochemically and the proportions of fourteen elements in

these gravels determined quantitatively in their hydrochloric acid extracts.

Cobali, copper, manganese and nickel are probably not concentrated with the

iron, but gallium, molybdenum, lead. vanadium and zinc appear to be so con-

centrated. Chromium is in an intermediate position.

REFERENCES

BEATER, B. E. 1940 Soil Science, 50, 313

BERTRAND, L). 1942 Bull. Soc. Chiin., France, 9, 133

Dincwari, A., Mckunix, R. R., and Beans, H. T. 1934 Can. Jour. Res.

11, 32

GoLpscuMipt, V. M. 1937 Jour. Chem. Soc., 655

Joacuim, A. W. R., and Kanpian, S. 1941 The Trop. Agriculturist, 96, 67

Linporen, W. 1923 Econ. Geol., 18, 439

Prescotr, J. A. 1934 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 58, 10

SANDELL, I. B., and Gotpren, S. S, 1943 Jour. Geol., 51, 99 and 167

simpson, E. S. 1912 Geol. Mag., 5, 9, 404

STANFIELD, K. E, 1935 Ind. Fing, Chem. Anal. Edit.. 7, 273

Watson, |. 1943 N.Z. Jour. Sci. Tech., 25, 162

ECOLOGY OF THE SAND FLATS, AT MORETON BAY,

REEVESBY ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By L. W. STATCH, M.Sc., F.R.M.S.

(Communicated by H. H. HALE

Summary

Because of the necessarily limited period of observation, the present study presents roughly the

state of the populations of the sand flats at Moreton Bay only during the month of December 1930.

Records of abundance for the larger members of the fauna were obtained by averaging series of

counts over selected average quadrats, each being a square meter in area. The smaller organisms

were evaluated from quadrats of nine square decimeters. Numerous counts of the surface fauna

were taken and a typical sample 2.5 cm. in thickness and nine square decimetres in area, taken from

6 mm. below the surface of the sand was obtained to determine the penetration of the apparent

surface fauna, the sand being sieved off through fine cloth and the organic residue being preserved

for examination in the laboratory.

177

ECOLOGY OF THE SAND FLATS AT MORETON BAY, REEVESBY ISLAND,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA ©

By L. W. Sracu, M.Se., F.R.M.S.

(Communicated by Fl. M. Hale)

fRead 13 July 1944 |

Merraops

Because of the necessarily limited period of observation, the present study

presents roughly the state of the populations of the sand flats at Moreton Bay only

during the mouth of December 1936, Records of abundance for the larger mem-

hers of the fauna were obtained by averaging serics of counts over selected average

quadrats, cach being a square metre marca. The smaller organisms were

evaluated from quadrats of nine square decimetres. Numerous counts of the

surface fauna were taken and a typical sample 2°5 em. in thickness and nine square

decimetres in area, taken from 6 mm. below the surface of the sand, was obtained

to determine the penetration of the apparent surface fauna, the sand being sieved

off through fine cloth and the organic residue being preserved for examination in

the laboratory.

Tie HApirat

Development and Relations—-Moreton Bay (fg. 1) 1s a shallow inlet about

half a mile long on the north coast of Reevesby Island. It is backed by a ridge

of sand dunes connecting two low, travertine-capped, granitic outcrops which

terminate this local habitat to the east and west. The sand dunes protect the bay

from the strong prevailing southerly winds, while the granitic outcrop forming

Winceby Island, about a mile to the north, breaks the strength of the north winds,

thus affording a great measure of protection from wave action. The sand flats

are built up and are extended northward by sand blown from the dune ridge.

The wind-blown sand assists the tide in the holding and burial of tidal scour,

consisting principally of the marine angiosperm, Posidonia australis J. Hooker,

the attrition and decay of which provides the bulk of the organic debris of the

sand flats. The tidal scour is concentrated towards the eastern. half of the bay,

the western half always being remarkably clean. The sandy bottom extends to a

depth of five or six feet below low water mark, beyond which it is replaced by a

dense growth of Posidonia australis, extending to the east and west and across to

Winceby [sland. ,

This Posidonia bank limits the extension of the intertidal sand-flat com-

munity to greater depths owing to the alteration of the substratum through biotic

factors, the principal one being the matting effect of the rhizomes of Posidonia

preventing penetration of the substratum by at least the larger members of the

intertidal infauna.

permit reference to pertinent literature on marine ecology published since preparation

of this manuscript.

Veatin, Rox, Soe. SoA, 68, 62), 39 November 19 t+

quantitative work its character will not be discussed further. It may be noted,

however, that this community corresponds to the subtidal Strongylocentrotus -

Asterias biome of North America as described by Newcombe (1935, 238) and

was observed to control in a similar manner the subtidal extension of a lociation

of the mussel, Brachyodontes erosus Lamarck, occurring on a local development

of gravel and sand substratum off the east end of Lusby Island. Notes on the

echinoderm elements of this association are contained in another report (Stach

1938, 329, 330).

Detailed Description—From high tide mark, the beach slopes regularly and

rapidly to the 1’ 6” contour. Beyond this is a series of shallow inshore lagoons

(bounded by the 2’ 6” contour) separated by low ridges connecting with the

barring cuter sand flats and emptying by shallow channels with a very gradual

fall to the sea at low water. Hayman and Henty (1939, pl. X, fig. 1) have pub-

lished a photograph of portion of Moreton Day showing the dune ridge with

inshore lagoon C in the foreground. As the tide recedes the water drains away

SAN WELATS

MORETON BAY,

WIRCEBY

ISLARD

[t9 ee meen alpen aes eee]

i oO ENS 8 400 800

Feet

O'= High Tide Strand Line

PLANE TABLE SURVEY BY LW STACH

nen soem

—

until, when the tide is fully out, a thin film of water about a quarter to half an

inch deep covers the floors of the inshore lagoons. The broad sand flats barring

the Jagoons fall within the 1’ 6” and 2’ contours over the inshore half of their

area and fall away regularly and rapidly to low water mark, at the 6’ contour.

The largest unbroken areas of sand flat occur in the western half of the area

(fig. 1, A), most of which rises above the 1’ 6” contour. The thickness of sand

in the long lagoon in the western half of the bay (fig. 1, B) exceeds one foot. In

the lagoon to the east of this (fig. 1,C) sectioning revealed 6” of sand overlying

at least 9” of coarse shell debris, principally composed of valves of Katelysia

scalaring Lamarck and Soletellina biradiata Wood. Just on the seaward side of

@) For Goniocidaris read Adelcidaris.

179

this lagoon and within the 2’ contour (fg. 1, D) a section in the sand flat showed

15” of sand overlying coarse shell debris. The next lagoon to the east (fig. 1, E)

showed in section 1’ of yellow-grey sand followed by 2” of dark grey-brown

fibrous, decayed organic matter, derived from Posidonia australis, overlying 5’ of

sand passing into coarse shell debris, On the seaward slope of the sand flats in the

eastern half of the bay there is over 24”" thickness of sand.

COMPOSITION OF THE COMMUNITY

The community under consideration may be regarded as a faciation (vide

Shelford 1932, 111) within the sandy beach association of the intertidal biome, as

yet undetermined, of southern Australia. The composition of what is here termed

the Kaleiysia - Arenicola - lintcromerpha faciation is given as follows:

Dominants—Katelysia scalarina Lamarck, <trenicola loveni sudaustraliensis

Stach.

Co-dominant—Enteromorpha criniia J. Agardh,

Sub-dominants—-Cf. Salinator sp., Esica sp., Zeacumantus sp.

Influents—Lysiosquilla vercoi Hale, Nassariids (Niotha pyrrhus Menke, Par-

canassa pantperata Lamarck), Upogebia sp., Cominella lineolata Lamarck,

Soletellina biradiata Wood. Hacmatopus fuliginosus, nereid worms.

Sub-influents—Callianassa ceramica Fulton and Grant, Glycera sp., Tellina sp.

Secondary animals—Philyra laevis Bell, Exosphaeroma laevis Baker.

This faciation is essentially an intaunal community, the co-dominant and the

birds being the only strictly epifaunal members. The apparent surface fauna.

consisting almost exclusively of mollusca, the larger species of which are scaven-

gers and carnivorous feeders provided with heavy shells, should be regarded as

an exposure of the infauna, because of the much denser subsurface population,

rather than as an epifauna, as is shown by a comparison of the tables of the sur-

face and subsurface populations given below:

Organism Dimensions QuadratA Quadrat B

Cf. Salinator - - - 1-5mm. x 1°0 mm. 4320 3600

listeu é 3 - - 1-Om.m. x 0°04 m.m. 3300 4100

Zeacumantus - - - 18-O mm. x 6°O0 mm. 65 280

Nassariids - - - 12-O0mm. x 8:0 mum. 11 15

Coninella & - - 18-Oman. x 10°0 mm. 2 0

Katelysia (adult) - - 40:0 m.m. x 30°0 m.m. 0 50

Katelysia (young adult) - i+-Oinam. x 11°0 mim. 0 10

Katelysia (juvenile) - 25mm. x 2°0 mm. O 12780

Tellina - - - - 16-0 mm. x 9°0 mum. 0 6

Lysiosquilla — - - - 40-0 man. x 6°0 m.m. 0 (5)

Upogebia - - - 180mm. x 3:0 mm. 0 (20)

Arenicola ' - “ 350'O mm. x 25-0 m.m. 0 (4)

Amphipoda, etc. = - 3-Omm. x 15 mm. 0 60

In the above table, Quadrat A represents the average number of individuals

of the populations of several quadrats of ome square metre of the surface of the

inshore lagoons. Quadrat B gives the result of a calculation of the subsurface

population. This was arrived at by counting the total population from a selected

average area of nine square decimetres taken from about 6 mm. below the surface,

the sample being approximately 2-5 cm. in thickness. The total numbers of indi-

viduals of species from this sample were then adjusted according to the size of the

individuals, the result representing the number of individuals present in a layer

180

roughly equal im thickness to the average dimensions of the individuals, The

numbers in parentheses represent the average of counts of individuals from surface

evidence such as castings and burrows.

Hanits Anp ReLarions or ComMuNity MEMBERS

Katelysta sealarina—This strictly infaunal member is common in most

shallow-water sand facies of the south-east Australian coast and occurs in large

numbers in the faciation described above. The large number of juveniles indicates

that a breeding period had just concluded. The adults all bear a tuft of Entero-

inorpha crinita attached near the ventral! margins of the valves and usually pro-

jecting through the sand, thus enabling them to be seen readily from the surface.

Vhe Katelysia population is kept in check by the carnivorous mollusca which bore

Lrough the valves and feed on the contents.

Arenicola lovent sudaustralicasis Stach 1944—The ecology of this lugworm

1as been treated in detail elsewhere (Stach 1944). and a brief stumimary of con-

ditions tending to maximum population will suilice here. The greatest population

occurred in lagoon EH (fg. 1), where sectioning reveated one foot of sand over-

ying a feeding stratum of two inches of dark, grey-brown, fibrous, decayed

organic matter, derived from Posidenta australis, followed by five inches of sand

passing into coarse shell debris. The concentration of the population is also greater

in the Jagoons since, on the higher flats, the period of exposure and consequent

drying out of the sand is of much longer duration between high tides. The body

cavities of all specimens dissected were found to be crowded with eggs or sperms

while, on the seaward margin of the sand flats, large clavate gelatinous ege-masses

were seen extruded from the lugworm burrows. The oyster-catcher (Hacmatopus

fuliginosus) was often observed to peck off the tails of lugworis extruding their

castings.

Enteromorpha crintta—This green alga, the only one occurring abundantly on

the sand flats. was found in small tufts near the ventral margin of the valves of

living Katelysia, It was also abundant, together with numerous other algae, on

the travertine outcrops at the eastern margin of Moreton Bay but, owing to the

scarcity of stutable fixed substratum, all species except 12. crinita appear to be

excluded trom the sandy habitat. Occasionally it was found rooted on empty

valves of several species of pelecypods Iving just below the surface of the sand.

its place in the economy of the faciation is not clear, but it may be a food source

for ef. Selinater and Esiea,

Cf. Salinator sp., Estea sp—These minute gastropods were found in great

abundance in the mshore lagoons and very rarely on the barring outer sand flats,

Their food supply is not known, but they were often seen in clusters on tufts of

[nteromorpha crinita, while their abundance below the surface of the lagoons

sugyvesis that they may feed on organic matter contained in the sand. Possibly

they form part of the diet of the red-capped dotterel (Charadrius alerandrinus

rupicapilius) which was commonly seen on the shores of Moreton Bay.

Zeacwuentis sp—This common turreted gastropod, typically occurring on

line sand with a high organic content, was found very prolifically beneath the

surface of the sand to a depth of 3 cm., where it was apparently feeding on

organic debris,

Laustosquilla vercol-—This crustacean lives in a burrow descending vertically

for about two or three inches and about a quarter inch in diameter. When the

aperture to the burrow is covered by water the animal rises to the aperture and

remains with only the carapace projecting. It was observed on numerous oecasions

181

to snap off portions of the foot of Nassariids and Zeacumantus with its raptorial

appendages, as they passed over the mouth of the burrow. The sooty oyster-

catcher (Hacimaopus fuliginosus) appears to vary its diet with Lystosquilla.

Nassariids (Niotha pyrrhus, Parcanassa pauperata)—These widely dis-

tributed gastropods of the sand facies burrow beneath the surface of the sand flats

and are probably the principal biotic control of the dominant Katelysia. Just below

the surface of the sand many valves are found with a hole bored through, for

which the Nassariids are apparently responsible; they, in turn, suffer from the

attacks of Lysiosquilla.

Cominella lineolata—This gastropod is typically found in sandy habitats with

a high organic content and appears to be a scavenger. It was observed, together

with some Nassariids, feeding on the tail of a lugworm probably caught by the

sooty oyster-catcher,

Soletellina biradiata—This comparatively |

oecurrence in the sandy facies of the south-east Australian coast. In contrast to

Katelysia, which was rarely found below five or six inches under the surface, it

was only met with at depths greater than one foot, where it occurred quite

abundantly.

Haematopus fulginosus——Vhe sooty oyster-catcher was seen «juite commonly

on the sand flats feeding both on the lugworm and on Lysiosquilla,

Upogebia sp.—This small crustacean was of common occurrence; it excavates

a natrow vertical burrow of little depth with the aperture at the summit of a low

cone of sand up to two inches in diameter. Its relation to the other members of

the association is not clear.

Nereid worms—Two or three species of very slender habit were occasionally

met with.

Callianassa ceramica—One specimen only was collected; it was taken from

a depth of over one foot from the surface of one of the inshore lagoons.

arge pelecypod is of common

Glycera sp.-—This polychacte was also of rare occurrence, one specimen being

obtained from the same situation as Callianassa ceraimica.

Tellina sp.—This pelecypod occurred rarely in association with Natelysia and

bears the same relations to the community as the dominant.

Philyra lacvis—This common crab, together with the isopod Exrosphaeroma

laevis, had obviously strayed from the shallow rock pools among the travertine

outcrops bounding the eastern end of Moreton Bay where they both occur com-

monly. Only one specimen of each was seen.

SUMMARY

The principal factors determining the development of this Kaielysia -

elrenicola- Enteromorpha faciation are the large amount of organic debris

(derived principally from the decay of Posidonia australis) contained im the sand

and the protection of the sand flats from the effects of wave action. These factors

permit the abundant development of the dominants Katelysia and Arenicola. The

co-dominant has spread to this facies apparently because it is the only alga which

can adjust itself to the only available substratum, vig., valves of pelecypods. With

the establishment of the passive dominants, an invasion of carnivorous forms

follows, bringing with them in turn their predators. During this stage, also, minor

clements add to the variety of this faciation of the intertidal biome.

To the cast and west of Moreton Bay the faciation is eut off by a shallow

rock-pool facies which limits the depth of sand available for the dominants, while

182

the seaward extension is inhibited by the development of banks of Posidonia

australis, the rhizomes of which mat together and form a substratum sufficiently

impenetrable to exclude the dominants.

List or REFERENCES

Hayman, R. H., and Henry, E. F. 1939 Survey of the Vegetation Community

on Reevesby Island. Repts. McCoy Soc., No. 2, (2); Proc. Roy. Soe.

Vict., ms., 51, (1), 149-152, pls. IX, X.

Newcomne, C. L. 1935 A Study of the Community Relationships of the Sea

Mussel, Mytilus edulis L., Ecology, 16, (2)

SHELFORD, V. E, 1932 Basic Principles of the Classification of Communities and

Habitats and the Use of Terms, Ecology, 13, 105-121

Stacu, L. W. 1938 Echinodermata in—Repts. McCoy Soc., No. 2, (1); Proc.

Roy. Soc. Vict., n.s., 1, (2), 329-337

Stacy, L. W. 1944 Arenicola from south-eastern Australia. Rec. Aust. Mus.,

21, (5), 271-276

NOTES ON THE REGENERA.TION OF MURRAY PINE (CA.LLITRIS SPP.)

By L. W. STATCH, M.Sc., F.R.M.S.

(Communicated by H. H. HALE

Summary

Owing to the advance of settlement in the far north-west of Victoria, large belts of Murray Pine

(Callitris robusta) have been lost in the process of clearing land for the cultivation of cereals.

Although scattered and extensive patches of this species are still intact throughout the unoccupied

Crown Lands towards the South Australian border, the only large area that can be claimed as State

Forest is the Yarrara pine belt. The escape of this area from the inevitable destruction that is

connected with land settlement is all the more remarkable when it is realised that this forest of

27,959 acres was actually surveyed into allotments ready for clearing. However, the combined

influence of the Forests Commission, the local branch of the Australian Natives’ Association, and

the Press succeeded in saving the area‘. Approximately 80% of the area carries C. robusta as the

predominant species, 10% Casurina lepidophlioa and 5% mallee, mainly Eucalyptus oleosa and E.

gracilis. The remaining 5% comprises small timberless spaces of a plain-like character which

support shrubs, grasses, and other seasonal herbage. The lack of natural regeneration or capacity for

vegetative spread of the Callitris genus indicated the desirability of investigation and experiment,

because it was recognised that in the absence of regeneration, cut-over areas would remain quite

nonproductive so far as timber was concerned.

183

NOTES ON THE REGENERATION OF MURRAY PINE (CALLITRIS spp.)

By W. J. ZimMER

(Communicated by R. L. Crocker)

[Read 13 July 1944]

INTRODUCTION

Owing to the advance of settlement in the far north-west of Victoria, large

belts of Murray Pine (Callitris robusta) have been lost in the process of clearing

land for the cultivation of cereals. Although scattered and extensive patches of

this species are still intact throughout the unoccupied Crown Lands towards the

South Australian border, the only large area that can be claimed as State Forest 1s

the Yarrara pine belt. The escape of this area from the inevitable destruction

that is connected with land settlement is all the more remarkable when it is realised

that this forest of 27,959 acres was actually surveyed into allotments ready for

clearing. However, the combined influence of the Forests Commission, the locai

branch of the Australian Natives’ Association, and the Press succeeded im saving

the area.“ Approximately 80% of the area carries C. robusta as the predominant

specics, 10% Casuarina lepidophioia and 5% mallee, mainly Excalyplus oleasa and

E, gracilis. The remaining 5% comprises small timberless spaces of a plain-like

character which support shrubs, grasses and other seasonal herbage. The lack of

natural regeneration or capacity for vegetative spread of the Callitris genus

indicated the desirability of investigation and experiment, because it was recog-

nised that in the absence of regeneration, cut-over areas would remain quite unpro-

ductive so far as timber was concerned.

iAritat FAcTors

The soils of the region exhibit the usual red-brown colouration, texture and

alkalinity associated with pine soils in the north-west.

The average annual rainfall of the region amounts to sliglitly more than

10 inches. The annual net evaporation is over 80 inches. This area comes within

the zone of winter rainfall, and the summers are dry with a high evaporation rate.

The irregularity of the rains is, however, a feature of this region, and this irregu-

larity undoubtedly influences considerably the regeneration of the indigenous

vegetation. An average rainfall of 10 inches has proved adequate to sustain the

xerophytic shrubs and trees of this area. While the light rains do not penetrate

far below the surface before they are lost by evaporation and transpiration, it is

evident that supplies of soil moisture do accumulate at the lower depths. From

here it ig unable to rise again to the surface, and can thus be lost from the soil

only by transpiration. During the course of an examination of these north-

western soils, the writer observed that the roots of the trees and shrubs travelled

downwards into sufficient dampness to enable growth to be supported through

drought periods which frequently occur. At depths exceeding eight feet the soil

was found to be moist, even after long intervals of light rainfall. It is considered

that the heavier falls which occur from time to time replenish the soil moisture to

a depth from which it is unable to rise by capillarity to the soil surface. In the

light of Keen’s observations) this moisture could only be used by roots which

have penetrated to the zone of accumulation.

) Victoria Govt. See. ii, 2 October 1929,

©) B.A. Keen, “The Limited Réle of Capillarity in Supplying Water to Plant Roots,”

Proc. Ist Int. Congress Soil Sci., 1, 504-811 (1927).

Trans. Ray. Soc. S_A.. 68. (2). 39 November 1944

Table I shows the mean monthly rainfall at Mildura from 1911-1937 inclusive.

and the frequency with which the rainfall for cach month is considered to have

been effective. The mean minimum and maximum temperatures at Mildura for

40 years are given in Table IT.

PApiE I

Monthly Rainfall at Mildura (Victoria)

Rainfall Jan. Feb. Mar. Apl May June Jaly Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec Total

Mean, 40 years er, fe 510 074 740.600 1.08 1.28 (83 TAb 1.04 LOL 177 185 Tu.8b

Mean, 1911-37 os ee FR SF 74 S47 1.21 G0 1G 94 DE SS 77 10.64

Nou. of years rainfall for

manth effective, 1911-37 @) 2 4 2 2 12 15 is it 4 4 4 moo

(4) Based on refereuce of monthiy rainfall to monthly evaporation.

TABLE II

Monthly Temperature at Mildura

No, of Annual

Years Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aue. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dee. Mean

Mean Min. ... 40 61.6 62.0 36.1 $9.8 45.0 41.3 39.5 42.8 45.6 50.1 55.2 89.1 50.6

Mean Marx... 40 S1.6 94.9 84.6 76.0 67.0 00.8 63.9 09.7 77.3 83.0 89.5 7o4

INFLORESCENCE OF CALLITRES

fn common with other conifers, Cellitris spp. bear naked ovules in a cone.

‘The integument forms a hard seed coat. It appears that the carpellary leaves,

which support the ovules, are stiniulated to vigorous growth and form woody

coverings around the seeds. Phese are the six valves of the cone. The first leaves

--the cotyledons, are m a whorl of two within the embryo. Although the male

Howers generally appear in a rudimentary fashion in March, the pollen is not

sufficiently developed for dispersal until November, when a copious liberation

takes place. On account of their exceedingly minute nature, the pollen grains are

readily distributed by wind. The female flowers receive the pollen and the develop-

ment of the female cone immediately commences, The cones become ripe after a

period of twelve months and the seeds are liberated in November or December,

when the summer heat causes the cone valves to separate. On hot, windy days

the winged seeds can often be secn falling from the trees like a shower of rain.

SEED CHARACTERISTICS

During an ¢xanunation of hundreds of seeds it was found that the usual

mumber of wings is two, but that three 3-winged seeds are also present in cones

of normal development. The 3-winged seeds occupy a central position, being

formed on the smaller cone scales or valves, one to each valve (see fig. 1). “Che

production of the third wing appears tu be due to the space left by the 2-winged

seeds which are formed on the valves directly against the columella, the third wing

thus pushing its way in towards the corner of the columella. The species examined

possess but a single columella, the faces of which are arranged opposite the three

largest cone valves, The three smaller cone valves, therefore, occupy a position

directly opposite the corners of the columella, Some cones of Callitris propingua

from Kulkyne contained six 3-winged seeds, and this is a departure from the usual

phenomenon of three 3-winged seeds per normal cone. Tt is suggested that the

extra wings are an outgrowth of the integument of the ovule which is made in an

effort to ensure firmness throughout the growth of the cone together with the

process of seed development. These Kulkyne cones were extraordinarily large.

In this case the usual three 3-winged seeds were borne on the three smaller cone

valves, one to each valve, the third wing intruding into the space between the

triple ovule formation on each of the larger cone valves. The additional three

185

3-winged seeds were borne on the larger cone valves, one to each valve, the central

seed ot the triple ovule formation directly adjoining the columella carrying the

third wing (fig. 1). These facts appear to suggest that the function of the

columella is, in part, to provide a buttress for the pressure which is exerted on

the seeds by the incurving valves as they gradually close together.

A Li apex of BE ROME LA AM yp

a _-cOlumelia face ner aa i

en een aoa ey

4 ee = i; a

3 prema valve of cone. e

— “Se

Scare left ty seeds produced on larger cone valves.

2 Sears left by seeds produced or smaller cone valves.

a Positicn of Three-winged seeds.

Fig. 1 Showing typical cone of Cailttris, with three 3-winged seeds (left)

and a cone of Callttris propingua with stx 3-winged seeds (right).

SEED TESTS

With the object of ascertaining the percentage fertility of the seeds of

different Callitris spp., cones were collected locally and from the Terricks State

Forest, 40 miles north of Bendigo. The complete series comprised five cones from

five trees in different areas and they belonged to three species, namely, C. robusta,

C. propinqua and C. verrucosa. On account of the impossibility of separating

fertile seeds from infertile ones by ocular means, every seed, no matter how

insignificant in appearance, was tabulated, because it was found that shrivelled

seeds were sometimes fertile, while robust seeds of good appearance were

frequently sterile. By adopting this method the chances of error were reduced.

A total of 5,433 seeds was tested, and of these 1,261 germinated, giving viability

over the series of 23-2%. A full statement of the results of these investigations

is given in Table ITI.

The following features are to be noted:

1 There was considerable variation from tree to tree in the percentage

fertility.

2 The viability over the complete series was in general low.

3 The highest value obtained in the series was 58°7%.

These figures, however, show that seed sterility is not responsible for the

general absence of regeneration in the forest.

The investigations were carried a stage further by applying variations of

temperature and moisture to selected seeds of C. robusta. The object was to

demonstrate what influence, if any, the heat from the sun’s rays had on exposed

secds, as well as to determine what effect was likely to be brought about by summer

showers that might provide conditions favourable for the commencement of

germination. In other words, was it possible that summer rains might initiate

germination, followed, however, by death due to the extremes of temperature and

increased dryness of the surface soil? A summary of the results of these tests

is given in Table IV.

186

TABLE III

Showing particulars of Germination Tests with Seeds of C. robusta,

C. propingqua and C. verrucosa, Tree Dimensions and Origin of Seeds Tested.

ee = ail tier ia REs RRRAn Tae a ager

ape TOTALS FOR

ig | y Rouge TREE: | | ACH GROUP

: ° o a | 3 i=

oe Origin | E a 3 8 & 2 7 &.S

aes eel . [33 2 yh Seligle a.2) 8 ya £5

a | Species ot [38 fy y 688 )6BB | SR BSS OG SS #8

Ze | \ Seeds (Hs 3 re] esl Sa) ReS Geo: 2 BE SE

e | t| | 'B2 e2 | 2 SE SslSke Be) B 35 bs

Oye) ime EG | wo At MORES UES! Zit Aa bo

pps Serres AS Want Aah 2 alse

\ i © rabusta Yarrara | 7 39 | 200 43 21.5)

3 ri | ns i 6 15 | 247 83 33.6}

3 i % ; 8 25 | 346 82 23.6; 89 46 |

4 5: ; 6 23 | 206 121 58,7) |

5 ! ; 10 30 aso 101 53.4) | 3,188 430 36.1

i | I i

. -: t age ae {

2 : Clrobusta Timberoo | 1200 30 0 122500 750 31.1 \

2 i cB. 4 {149 3926.11

; a 9 300 F290 29° 10.0) 7537

$ o iho 35 | 208 76 36.5 | :

- in 30 | 198 7 3.5! 4,970 226 ahd

3 u prapingna | Kulkyne | BO oe 16.2

1 : ‘ 1435 Eat) 2 11.0)

:y ts | 16 28 66 199 90 48

4 si Paes 0.36 lit 36.8!

: ‘ i 43 12035 55 18.6! (4458 9 307) 210

ss : Ll verrucesa | Konardin > a 27 11.0;

: . 5 48 25 in? |

§ | ae 19 «11.5 5834

4 a 3 5 3 18.1 ;

5 ? . 3 6 66 33.1) | 923 172 18.5

§ i LU rabusta Terricks 10 25 128 27 21 o, :

eo ms : iu 9 30 | 163 17 10.4! :

A + | 8 120 3500} 160 5735.6) 57D |

4 | : rf 30 | 136 22,—Ss«16.1| |

5 ‘ | a 13 28 | 207 1.4) 1 794 126 15.8

t l i

Final Result of Series - - 5,433 1,261 23.2

Taste JV

Showing Maximum Shade Temperatures during Tests and

Percentage Germination obtained

Maximun Shade Temperatures (January-March 1933)

No. of Pass

Frsoe F 81-902 F 91-1008 Fo rOta10® Bo Add-dbde FB

: 5 12 5 7 2

. 4 13 5 5 j

: - 7 10 6 7 1

Germination after Exposure to direct Heat of Sun

Cone No + - - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9. 10

No. ot sends 61 62 50 59 60 56 62 37 58 al

No, gwermitated x - 2 1) 21 24 8 23 21 2 23 a8

germination = Z 44.2 0.0 42.0 40.6 13.3 410 338 385 43.1 45.9

Mean percentage germination — 33.6%

Germination after Moistening followed by Drying

Cone No. - - = 1 54 3 4 5 6 7 & 9 caf)

No. ot seeds - - 35 60 on 58 57 58 61 58 on 58

Hours ot moisture - - Bi 4 6 8 10 aire le 20 24 48

No. yorminated — - 3 30 23 31 26 22°47 33 37 16 ae

“% germination — - - $4.5 38.3 51.6 448 35.0 298 S40 637 266 4G

Mean percentage germination -

187

A tree was selected and the seeds obtained from this tree were found to be

42°5% viable. Twenty additional cones were picked from this tree and these were

divided into two lots of 10 cones each. The seeds from each cone were counted

and tabulated separately. The seeds belonging to 10 of the cones were placed

outside under the direct heat of the summer sun, precautions being taken to prevent

rain from falling on the seeds. The degree of heat received by the seeds is

indicated by the order of the maximum shade temperatures given in Table IV.

On 30 March the seeds were removed and tested for germination by seeding

in boxes and watering in the open. The value obtained was 33°6%. ‘This

indicated that the seeds could tolerate the intense heat of summer without their

viability being impaired.

The seeds from the other 10 cones were submitted to a moisture time schedule

which ranged from a period of two hours subjection to moisture with a progressive

increase to a maximum, of 48 hours duration. At the termination of each period

of treatment, the seeds were recovered and allowed to dry out thoroughly. After

they had dried completely, they were tested for germination. The value obtained

in this case was 44°2%.

REGENERATION EXPERIMENTS

These experiments provide evidence to support the view that the hard crust

of the soil surface was the prime cause of failure of the seedlings to appear. It

appeared reasonable to suppose that if a seed bed were artificially created, suffi-

cient moisture would be conserved in the soil to bring about sufficient germination.

During May 1933 an initial attempt to secure regeneration was essayed. An

area of one acre carrying several seed trees was enclosed with wire netting and

the surface soil broken into a fine condition. Following a single fall of 230 points

in November 1933, 24 seedlings appeared beneath the mother trees in December,

but on account of root competition the seedlings failed to establish and, at the end

of March 1934, all of these had died.

During March 1934 the average shade temperature over 11 consecutive days

was 104° F. The work was persisted with, however, and in May 1934 the area

was again harrowed. In November 1934, 88 seedlings appeared, and again in late

spring of 1935 further seedlings brought the total in this small plot to more than

190,

On 30 April 1938 the number of young trees was 188; it can thus be observed

that loss had been negligible. On 1 January 1938 these young trees were measured.

The following height classes give an indication of the growth rate:

Height class - - 0-6” 6-12" 12-18” 18-24” 24-30" 30-36" 36-72"

No. of young trees. - 21 §9 62 26 15 4 1

It is significant that regeneration ceased in the plot after the soil re-assumed

the crusty nature which is invariably associated with virgin soils in that region.

The germination of the seed is interesting. The seed coat bursts close to the

micropyle, and by the growth of the axis the radicle is protruded and curves down

into the soil. By elongation of the cotyledons. their basal portions are pushed out

of the seed together with the apex which lies between them; the apical portion of

the cotyledons remains within the endosperm till the whole of the contained food

materials has been absorbed and used by the developing embryo. Ultimately the

cotyledons are withdrawn from the seed and rising into the air form the first

green leaves. These differ“considerably, however, from the foliage subsequently

formed.

In August 1937 a further experimental plot of eight acres was prepared along

similar lines to those employed in the first attempt. In November 1937, 65 seed-

188

lings appeared. With the exception of two, which were situated beneath the seed

trees, all of these were alive and presented a particularly vigorous appearance

when last observed in April 1938. The dryness of the ground occasioned by the

seed trees is no doubt responsible for the death of the two seedlings mentioned.

It is important to note that the regeneration of certain native shrubs and

trees such as Dodonaea attenuata, Cassia eremophila, Acacia ligulata and

Myoporum platycarpum also occurred readily. These species survived the dry

summer conditions and developed strongly. The conclusion to be drawn from the

results of these experiments is that natural regeneration can be achieved, provided

sttitable conditions of the surface soil are provided and both rabbits and live stock

are excluded. The rate of growth is not rapid, but it is very necessary that areas

from which timber has been removed should be permitted to regenerate. Measure-

ments taken from trees of a known age and which have grown under natural con-

ditions show that a height of 18 feet, with a butt diameter of six inches, can be

expected in 14 years. The knowledge that regeneration will take place provided

suitable measures are taken, permits the formulation of a definite scheme for the

future management of areas which have grown native pine.

It would appear that so long as the seedlings survive the summer following

their appearance they can be considered to be well established. Protection from

rabbits and stock is vital, and the creation of a seed bed by the breaking of the

surface crust of soil is necessary in order to conserve soil moisture and provide a

suitable medium for germination, This also encourages the seedlings of perennial

grasses (Stipa spp.) and seasonal herbage, which provides shade and shelter. It

has been contended by some authorities that the growth of these latter species

should be prevented because of the drain upon soil moisture. The Stipa spp..

however, die down in early summer and the amount of moisture removed during

the hot summer months is negligible. The dry stalks of these and the annual

plants shade the tiny pines from the fierce summer heat, as was well demonstrated

in Plot 1. It was also observed that seedlings competed successfully with a dense

growth of Jnala graveolens,

SEEDLING DEVELOPMENT

The primary root of the pine seedling immediately commences to penetrate

deeply into the soil. The following particulars relate to a seedling which appeared

in November 1937 and was measured in March 1938, when 120 days old. Its height

was 54 inches and the main axis had developed eight alternate lateral branchlets.

none of which exceeded one inch in length.

The basal portion of the leaves was decurrent, one-third of the total length

of the foliar blade, and extended from the point of issue on the stem to the point

of issue on the whorl below, thus covering the stem between the free leaf blades.

The decurrent parts of the leaves do not form contact along their edges, so that

a groove is formed in which the stomates are protected. As the scedlings become

older the free portion of the blade gradually diminishes until the major portion of

the blade is decurrent to the stem.

The main axis of the root developed to a depth of 32 inches, with very little

lateral formation.

On account of the rapidity of development of the primary root it can be scen

that root competition from shallower rooted plants is of little account. and seasonal!

herbage which finishes its short life cycl: before the severe conditions of summer

set in, is unable to remove moisture during the sunmmer months.

Experiments with broadcast sowings indicated that deep covering of the seeds

is undesirable. Seeds sown 3 inch, | inch, 2 inches and 3 inches below the surface

189

were able to form cotyledons which reached the surface of the soil, although the

percentage of field germination fell away considerably at 3 inches.

The cotyledons of seeds sown at depths of 4 inches and 6 inches failed to

reach the surface and perished in spite of the fact that the germination had been

quite good.

It was also found that Murray pine developed fertile seeds at a comparatively

early age. Seeds from a 12-year-old tree gave a germination of 20°5%

A TRANsEcr Stupy or THE FLicut oF SEEDS

Successful examples of natural regeneration in Victoria are so uncommon

that an opportunity was taken in 1938 to record information resulting from such

an occurrence near Mildura.

Rabbit-proof fencing permitted scedlings to become established within the

enclosure. Outside the fenee, where rabb Pe and hares were alle to find access.

® Parent Trees

6 Seedlings

Fig. 2 Showing dispersal of secdiing trees from three parent trees.

no regeneration occurred. The data obiained from this study indicates the dis-

tance apart that primary belts of this species should be established in the event oj

measures being taken to restore denuded areas of timber in the mallee. Where

broadcast seedine i is necessitated by the complete absence of seed trees, the belts

should be approximately 8 chains apart and placed to suit the topography and sou

conditions of the region concerned,

199

A plan of the area, drawn to seale, is given in fig. 2, and the following

information refers to this instance.

A study was carried out in November 1938. The average height of the young

trees was 13 feet. Regeneration has commenced in 1934, and the number of seed-

ling trees was 138. These were distributed as follows:

Distance from parent tree

Less than 1 chain 1-2 chains 2-3 chains 3-4 chains

16 63 36 23

The area seeded by three parent trees was approximately two acres. The

following classification shows the number of young trees within different height

classes:

Height in feet ~ - I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

No. of young trees - I 1 I 2 1 7 2 5 7 13

Height in feet - - Tt 12 13 14 #15 #16 17 18 19 20

No. of young trees - 8 15 15 16 13 5 10 3 5 8

SUMMARY

Observations on the natural regeneration of Murray Pine (Callitris spp.)

in the Yarrara belt of the far north-west of Victoria are recorded.

The region is characterised by very irregular rainfall, averaging slightly more

than 10 inches per annum, with an annual net evaporation rate of more than

80 inches.

The principal characteristics of the seeds are described, and their germina-

tion has been investigated. Seeds of three species, C. robusta, C. propingua and

C. verrucosa, totalling 5,433 in number, gave an average percentage germination

of 23°2%, shrivelled and undersized sceds being included in those tested. There

was much variation in percentage germination from tree to tree; the highest value

obtained for any series was 58°7%. It has been shown that the general absence

of natural regeneration by Callitris is not due to seed sterility, but to unsuitable

conditions of the surface soil, usually in the form of a hard crust, and in addition,

to the depredations of both rabbits and livestock.

it would appear that so long as the seedlings survive the summer following

their appearance, they are able to resist extreme conditions of drought and may be

considered as well established, provided they are protected from the grazing

influences of rabbits and stock. The primary root of the pine seedling penetrates

rapidly and is capable of attaining a depth of 32 inches with very little lateral

formation after a period of 120 days from germination.

Where broadcast seeding is necessitated by a complete absence of seed trees,

belts approximately 8 chains apart should enable intervening strips to regenerate

from the natural flight of the seeds. Belts should be placed to suit topography

and soil conditions and require to be protected from both livestock and rabbits.

PALAEOZOIC IGNEOUS ROCKS OF LOWER SOUTH-EASTERN

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By D. MAWSON and W. B. DALLWITZ

Summary

The contribution to the knowledge of the igneous rocks of the South-Eastern District of South

Australia deals with outcrops located in the region between the upper Coorong to Kingston on the

south side and Keith to Bordertown on the north; excepted only are the adameilite and gianodiotite

occurrences already described in an earlier contribution. The latter have been included in our map,

fig. 1, in order to make complete the record for that area.

191

PALAEOZOIC IGNEOUS ROCKS OF LOWER SOUTH-EASTERN

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By D. Mawson and W. B. DALewitz

{Read 10 August 1944]

PLATES X AND XI

This contribution to the knowledge of the igneous rocks of the South-Eastern

District of South Australia deals with outcrops located in the region between the

upper Coorong to Kingston on the south side and Keith to Bordertown on the

north; excepted only are the adamellite and granodiorite occurrences already

described in an earlier contribution. The latter have been included in our map,

fig. 1, in order to make complete the record for that area.

ADAMELLITES AND GRANODIORITES

The outstanding example of this suite is that opened up in the Highways

Department’s Taratap Quarry. For a petrological description of this grano-

diorite see Mawson and Parkin (5).

There are several minor occurrences within a mile or so of the quarry in the

serub country to the north-east of the adjacent salt swamp. One tiny outcrop is

on the fence line of the Prince’s Highway half-a-mile south-east of the quarry.

We could not tind evidence of the existence of the patch shown on Dr, Wade’s

map (7) as located about 5 miles south-east of the Taratap Quarry. One patch

is on the sea beach somewhat less than 14 miles to the west-north-west of the

quarry. A number of small outcrops are located in the line of the Reedy Creck

swamp water course, appearing at intervals between 13 and 17 miles to the north

of the quarry, as indicated on the accompanying map (see also pl. X, fig. 1).

QUARTZ-KERATOPHYRES

Rocks of this nature appear to underlie the Tertiary to Recent sediments

over a considerable area, but outcrops are few and scattered. The outcrops

recorded extend in a roughly north and south direction, appearing at intervals

from the Papineau Rocks (21 miles east-north-east of Kingston) to Didicoolum,

a distance of over 25 miles. In one area rocks ot this group have suffered a con-

siderable degree of metamorphism under severe shearing stress reducing them to

the form recognised as porphyroid,

The rocks to be described in this group have a chemical composition which

determines them as rhyolites, but are overwhelmingly sodic. They contain very

little potash and are abnormally low im mafic constituents. Though they contain

some porphyritic albitic feldspar, the base is felsitie. ‘Thus they are palaeotypal,

leucocratic, soda-rhyolites. In some outcrops minute lath-shaped albites appear

in flow alignment reminiscent of trachytic structure, and this first suggested the

term keratophyre as relevant. An analysis of the freshest material from the main

outcrop showed their high silica content, which refers them to the quartz-kerato-

phyres of some petrologists, the term which we have adopted for descriptive pur-

poses herein,

Tue Partneau Rocks Locarity

A notable outcrop of dark felsitic quartz-keratophyre occurs on Section 173

of the Hundred of Minecrow (see pl. X. fig. 2). This outcrop is known as the

Prats. Kay. Soe. SA. 68, 12), 30 November 1944

102

Papmeau Rocks (see map below). The exposed area which we examined

is about 250 yards long and 100 yards across. It extends in an almost true north

and south direction. It emerges from the Pleistocene and Recent sands of the

Ardune Range on the northern edge of a swamp flat which was dry at the time of

our visit. The floor of the drv lake which is part of a swamp channel between

the East Avenue Range") and the Ardune Range is elevated only about 100 feet

above sea level. The summit of the outcrep of igneous rock rises 140 feet above

the lake floor.

In the map accompanying Dr. Wade's report (7) two distinct outerops of

igneous rock, both hatched to represent feldspar-porphyry and situated within one

mile of each other are indicated as existing in this locality. Not being aware at

that time that a second outerop had been indicated, we, in our brief look around

from the high ground in that vicinity, missed sccing any second outerop that may

he there, That some other outerop does exist within « few miles of this locality is

2 srry eee Se ade PS 7

% : ,

cre “

Me se H

%, 1

in best By ¢ owes gto

or ere +7 5ETe. ~ 7 mse Y

ol 5 :

a eed i

Grsent caury ar

deoteenamire + cay as

+ Maanse ot rr v gf x

2 Brneinenent wt On “

coNEWe ov

A tee crth om re faamcoucary, Pay

Migs x pares 2

. vs sean Ae a

eee i , . : x av

ot + Z s

: 6

° ‘ iar

onesie 4 oe aa SEAL aMunnar

o Hes rs nN,

y : ee oO

“ i 8.

4 x

a . +

4 2 nea

Se RADTRAWAY

re v

‘

BLACKFORD AC

indicated by the fact that we have found in the rock collection of the late Walter

Howehbin a specimen [4473], labelled “Kingston District,” of a erey porphyry

closely related but distinct from any that we have met with,

The northern end of the outcrop is least affected by secondary changes:

from there, material catalogued as rock [5779] was collected for petrological

examination. This is a dark, faintly greenish-tinged grey rock with sparse crystals

ot feldspar, discernible in the hand specimen, embedded in a felsitic groundmass.

A microscopic examination discloses that the porphyritic crystals make up

only about 7 per cent. of the whole rock. They consist entirely of plagioclase

which is very close in composition to pure albite. It is only very little clouded.

©) The popular use of the term “Range”

Region of South Australia refer

for a considerable distance

in the geography of the South-Eastern

8 to topographical features which are low ut persistent

across the otherwise flat featureless country. They are no

more than ancient, Pleistocene to Recent. vegetated and fixed sand dunes.

193

The average length of the individuals is about 1 mm., but some up to 3 mm. are

present. Glomeroporphyritic aggregates of plagioclase are common. One such

group observed consists largely of feldspar arranged in an intersertal pattern,

with calcite, leucoxene, epidote, chlorite and iron ore occupying the interstices.

Complex twinning is a feature of the feldspars in combinations of all four types;

Carlsbad, Manebach, Baveno and albite are sometimes encountered. No definite

potash feldspar could be found.

The groundmass, while it is completely crystalline, is very fine-grained, the

average grain-size being about 0°06 mm. There can be recognised quartz, faintly

clouded feldspar, epidote, medium-green chlorite, leucoxene, black iron ore (often

bordered by leucoxene), calcite and occasional needles of apatite. The latter have

been observed within the albite phenocrysts.

Although there is abundant epidote, coloured light brown and yellowish-

brown, both in the groundmass and in the phenocrysts, the feldspar is not visibly

“sy cove Bagger NS county

pabeiibiri y yes \ eRe,

i Wtewouna net '

‘ : i

{

j S78

f moncan perme | gg?

{ pet WOCRS ei

: 2 Tom's CARN gee

{ Pome raitic /

| eres Monga re if

ye vn peasantry ’

i Lf BaeOO SE Riantannrees 3 &

4 gf a

‘ 7 :

altered. Thus it is suggested that this mineral, together with the chlorite, Jeu-

coxene and a small quantity of calcite, is a product of recrvstallisation (perhaps

late-magmatic ) wherein plagioclase and a ferromagnesian mineral were made over

to the minerals named and a more acid plagioclase (albite). Probably nearly all

the lime shown in the analysis is present in the epidote. The specific eravity of

this quartz-keratophyre is 2°680, and a chemical analysis is given in the table on

page 194, where there also appears the chemical composition of another quartz-

keratophyre from the South-East of South Australia (see p. 19). The molecular

proportions of potash and soda are: 7°3 of K,O and 88-7 of Na.O.

For comparison are included published analyses of a “soda-rhyolite” from

Canada, “soda-rhyolite’ from Wales, “quartz-keratophyre”’ from Greece and an

“alsbachite” from Switzerland, all of which are very similar in composition to that

now being described. For further comparison, there is also included in the table,

analyses of a soda-rich aplitic differentiate from the granite of Port Elliot, South

Australia, and an analysis (second grade) of an example of the “porphyroid” of

Western Tasmania.

194

The norm of our rock is as follows:

Quartz - - 38-46 Magnetite = - - 1-86

Orthoclase = - - 4:06 Ilmenite - - O61

Albite - - - 46°63 Apatite - ~ Q-19

Anorthite - - 5:14 Fluorite - - O11

Corundum = - - 0°30 Calcite - - - 0:10

MgsiO, (en) - 0:98 Water - - - 0°65

FeSiO, (hy) - - 0-92 ———

100-01

From this norm the C.I.P.W., classification is I, 3, 2, 4, (Alsbachose )}.

I Ii III lV Vv Vi Vil VIL

Si0,, - - 76°40 75°22 77:44 79-64 78-48 75-61 75-73 76°02

Al,O, - (P94 12:29. 1055 11-44 «10°26 12°62, 12-70 s«14-60

Fe,O, - 1°28 1-25 2°24 0-11 1-81 1-10) 2-25 jO-2r

FeO - - 1:33 1:73, 034.030 0-25-10) > 40-08

MnO - 0:09 trace 0-08 — — a —

MgO - 0°39 0°28 0-09 0-15 0-53 0-98 0:60 0-04

CaO - - 1°30 1-38 0-99 0-71 1:07 2:18 2-00 Q-34

Na,O - 5§:-50 613 6°23 6°40 5-39 5-10 3-48 7-08

K,O - - 0-69 0-48 0-7] 0°38 0°37 0-68 2°04 0°96

H,O+ - 0:57 0-75 0-58 0-30 0-96 0-38) 1-29 (2) 0-34

H,O- - 0-08 0-09 0°33 0:16 0°03 0-04] to. 15

TiO, - 0°32 0°30 0-20 0-50 0°52 0°35 — 0-07

P,O, - 0-08 0-03 O17 0:08 trace 0-32 — _

EF a - OOS _ - =n eA

CO, - - 0°05 — — 0-02 0-08 — aoe

100-07

Less O far F 0-02 —~ — see oe — —

Total - 100-05 99-93 99-91 100-27 100-02 100-36 100700 = 99-95

I Quartz-keratophyre [5779] of Papincau Rocks, South Australia. Analyst,

W. B. Dallwitz.

HT Quuartz-keratophyre [443] of Marcollat. South Australia. Analyst,

Smith, Department of Geology, University of Adelaide,

E.R.

Til “Seda-Rhyolite” ef Copper Island, Behring Sea. Analyst, W. Zygmun-

tonska. See ref (9), p. 76.

IV “‘Soda-Rhyolite” of Skomer Island. Wales. Analyst, E, G. Radley.

ref. (9), p. 76.

Vo “Quartz-keratophyre™ of Epidauros, Greece. Analyst, A. Jindner,

ref (9), p. 76.

VI “Alshachite” of Rusemschlucht, Switzerland, Analyst, 1. Hezner.

ref (9), p. 98.

VII “Porphyroid” of the West Coast, Tasmania. Analyst, W. Fo Ward.

ref. (6),

Vii “Soda- -aplite” of Port Elliot. Analyst, W. R. Browne, _ See ref (2).

@y Determined by E. R. ‘Seenit.

©) Loss at red heat.

See

195

Autometamorphosed Quarts-kcratophyre

Two specimens [5780 and 5781] were collected from the southern end of the

outcrop, where the rock has lost its even grey colour and is mottled greenish-grey

and pink on a rather coarse scale. Here the phenocrysts of feldspar are flesh-

coloured, These effects are ascribed to late-magmatic changes. Both of these

rocks are essentially similar to [5779] and differ from each other only in degree

of autometamorphic change. Thus in [5781], which is an example of the more

greatly changed type, the pink feldspars embedded in the dark-coloured parts of

the rock stand out more distinctly.

In rock [5780] the groundmass consists largely of equidimensional wn-

oriented albite grains (average size, 0°05 mim.), and differs from that of [5779]

in containing very little quartz, Other important minerals prescni are green

chlorite, calcite and epidote, and some larger pseudomorphous masses of brown

leucoxene ; a few grains of partially replaced black iron ore remain. The chlorite,

calcite and epidote are very tnevenly distributed: this feature and the different

secondary reactions going with it appear to account for the mottling evident in the

hand-specimen. The epidote is mostly brownish-grey, but some of it has a strong

yellowish tinge and a spherulitic arrangement. A more or less spongy develop-

ment is characteristic of the calcite, chlorite, and epidote. This is most notice-

able in the carbonate mineral, in which areas 4 mm. or more in length, consisting

of many grains, extinguish simultaneously. This calcite is very abundant in some

parts of the slide, while it is completely absent in others: a fact which again

emphasises the patchy nature of the changes in the rock. Varying amounts of

chlorite are always found with the calcite. Very small needles of apatite are

present, but are extremely rare.

Feldspar phenocrysts are more abundant than in [5779]. Synneusis texture

is rather common. The feldspar is again very close to pure albite, and some of it

contains occasional flecks of orthoclase: here, and in the groundmass as well, it

is slightly clouded. Complex combinations of twins, e.g., Carlsbad, Manebach

and albite are not uncommon. One grain was observed to be divided into four

sections by a combination of Carlsbad and Baveno twinning.

The microscopic examination of [5871] reveals that calcite is very abundant

making up 30% or more of the whole, and has often crystallised into grains up

to 1 mm. across. Associated therewith are numerous small grains of newly-

formed, water-clear albite, which is a by-product of the breakdown of the original

feldspar in those areas. Epidote is scaree. Euhedral porphyritic feldspars are

considerably more abundant than in [5780]. They are quite densely clouded,

while the original groundmass feldspar is rather less altered. In some cases.

clear, secondary albite, identical with that found with the calcite, borders the

phenoerysts which show simple twinning much more often than multiple. Com-

plex twinned crystals are not common,

Another specimen [4431], collected by N. B. Tindale, is almost identical

with our rock [5780]. However, calcite is absent in the microscope slide and

there appears one large grain of purple fluorite in the hand specimen.

Bin Bin

H. ¥. L. Brown (1, p. 268) makes reference to what must be another

occurrence of keratophyre. His statement is as follows: “Bin Bin Islands, four

miles north-east of a deserted station, where an outcrop of felsite and feldspar

porphyry is backed on the west side hy blue metamorphic quartzite. .... -

As the place name Bin Bin does not appear on the county map, reference

was made to Brown’s original sketch plan accompanying his field notes, still pre-

196

served at the Mines Department. The approximate location of Brown's “Bin

Bin Islands,” taken from the above source, is indicated in the map illustrating

this present contribution, On the recently published military map of the area the

name Bin Bin appears situated some four miles to the west of Brown’s location,

and evidently has reference to a spot associated with pastoral occupation.

It is probable that Brown’s “blue metamorphic quartzite” is a fine-grained

inty keratophyre, for he uses the same descriptive term for the keratophyre at

his Gip Gip occurrence (wide postea). Apparently the quartz-keratophyre of this

occurrence occupies one or more low rises in the flat swampy country about six

miles north-west by north of the Papineau Rocks.

MARCOLLAT

A further occurrence of quartz-keratophyre was found at a point about seven

miles from Old Marcollat Station buildings in a direction somewhat west of north.

This appears to be the outcrop visited by H. Y. L. Brown and mentioned as “Gip

Gip” in his record. The locality appearing as “Jip Jip” on the Survey Plans of

the Lands Department is, however, some four miles to the north-west of Brown’s

Gip Gip. Brown describes the rock as “bluish metamorphic quartzite, with dis-

seminated iron pyrites.”

Here we found the outcrop very small indeed, nearly circular and about

100 yards across. It rises as a low island mass to a height of about 30 feet above

the level of the bed of a dry swamp flat. There is a cut of a few feet in depth

blasted in its summit where miners, in the year 1896, gouged in search of gold.

In the neighbourhood of this old working, the keratophyre is shattered and

recemented as a coarse breecia [5890] in which mineralizing solutions have cir-

culated, introducing frequent specks and grains of pyrrhotite up to 3 mm. in

diameter, An assay made for us by T. W, Dalwood, of the Mines Department.

showed gold to be absent.

Very fresh rock is obtainable from the dump heap resulting from the mining

operations, From this coarse breccia we culled for laboratory examination a

fragment [4432] measuring about 9 inches in diameter which has the appearance

of being original rock unaltered by subsequent mineralizing solutions.

This rock [4432] was found to be a diopside-bearing quartz-keratophyre.

[t is outwardly very similar to the keratophyre [5779] already described, which

occurs 17 miles away to the south-south-west. Ags observed in the hand-specimen

i differs mainly in being of a lighter grey colour and by being traversed by

schlieren composed of mottled, turbid feldspar and a dark chloritized ferro-

magnesian mineral, Pyrrhotite has been introduced along some of these schlieren,

evidently lines of strain which permitted the invasion of secondary gases and

solutions.

Microscopically examined, this rock is found to be somewhat different from

that [5779] of the more southerly occurrence already described. In it the por-

phyritic crystals are almost twice as abundant as in the latter, These porphyritic

individuals consist of idiomorphie feldspar, and to a considerably less extent of

hulf-coloured diopside (Z,\e ==39° --:2V medium). Synneusis texture is common

inthe feldspar, which consists largely of almost pure albite in which Carlsbad

twinning is more abundantly represented than the lamellar type commonly asso-

ciated with albite. A puzzling feature ix the presence within the feldspar indi-

viduals of an optically positive and lower D.R. form: either merely albite of

different orientation than the host or patches of an unidentified feldspar. The

feldspar is slightly clouded and often contains a few flakes of greenish-White

chlorite and a little diopside.

197

No quartz could be detected in the groundmass which consists of elongated

plagioclase microlites up to 0-17 mm. long, showing some tendency to parallel

arrangement. Abundant specks of leucoxene and chlorite are also present.

Of the accessory minerals, the most important is greenish-white chlorite

derived from the diopside; then follows dark brown leucoxene showing aggregate

polarization and a suggestion of octahedral shape which probably indicates pseudo-

morphism after titaniferous magnetite, some of which remains and is usually

bordered by leucoxene; rarely minute needles of apatite are also present.

For a chemical analysis of the material of this selected specimen we are

indebted to E. R. Smith, B.Sc. This appears in the table on page 194. The

norm is as follows:

Quartz - - - 32°76 Hy. - - - 1°58

Orthoclase — - - 2-67 Imenite - - O61

Albite - - - 54-49 Magnetite — - - 1°86

Anorthite — - - 3:34 Apatite ; - 0:08

Wo. - - - 1-39 Water - - - 0°84

En. 2 $ - 0-70 —_——

Total - - 100-32

CLPWw.: J, 4, 2, 5 (Mariposose ).

SCHISTOSE QUARTZ-KERATOPMYRES OF DIpICcooLuM

Keratophyres related to the foregoing, but dynamically metamorphosed, occur

in a third locality, namely in the vicinity of the abandoned hutments of the one-

time sheep station of Didicoolum located some 25 miles north-north-west of the

apineau Rocks of Section 173, Hundred of Minecrow,

In Wade’s report (7) the neighbourhood of Didicoolum is hatched as a patch

of “Quartzite and mica schist.” H. Y. L. Brown, in 1896, after a visit to inspect

mining prospects in that locality, recorded (1) that there is there “An outcrop of

rocks containing quartz veins and pyrites; strike N. and S.; dip, vertical.”

At Didicoolum we found schistose rocks occupying a considerable area, but

these are for the most part buried beneath Pleistocene to Recent sand ridges. All

four specimens of bed rock which we colleoted in this area evidence a very con-

siderable degree of metamorphism under shearing stresses. All have reached the

biotite stage, but slight retrograde metamorphism has caused the development of

chlorite in three of them.

Schistose Quartg-keratophyres [5873], [5874], and [5875] are metamor-

phosed representatives of the qtiartz-keratophyres already described. The first two

are grey, owing respectively to finely disseminated chlorite and biotite. The third is

a mottled dark grey and buff rock, which owes its appearance to the concentration

of biotite into large lenses. All have developed in them a rude cleavage, due to

the roughly parallel orientation of the micaccous minerals.

A few unbroken, clouded, porphyritic crystals of plagioclase remain in all

three. Their compositions could not be determined accurately, but measurements

of maximum extinction-angles in the symmetrical zone consistently indicated

albite: these angles varied from 12? in [5874] to 16°5° in [5875]. The sign

throughout is positive and R.I, close to that of balsam. ‘The groundmagss in each

consists of finely crushed feldspar, quartz and pale biotite (bleached and altered

to chlorite in [5873] ), together with variable but small amounts of brown and.

yellow-brown granular or radiating epidote (c.f., epidote in rock [5879] ) often

in aggregates and streaks, and a little zircon. In addition [5875| and [5874] con-

tain sericite, [5873] and [5874] black iron ore, and [5875] an occasional grain of

198

apatite. The biotite is completely unaltered in [5874], but a little chlorite has de-

veloped in [5875]; in the latter colourless epidote also occurs in the residual

plagioclase phenocrysts, around which biotite-rich bands usually wind. The quartz

in all three rocks is partly scattered and partly segregated into irregular pockets,

some of which are roughly lenticular.

The fourth rock specimen collected [194], a biotite-plagioclase-orthoschist,

represents a more basic rock, in all probability a quartz-diorite which has been

subjected to the same process as the three rocks just described. The minerals

present are abundant plagioclase and finely-divided biotite, epidote, quartz, black

iron ore and apatite. Only very few (somewhat saussuritized) plagioclase pheno-

crysts remain; they are optically positive and all R.I.’s are conspicuously greater

than that of balsam, so that their anorthite-content is at least 38%, and, judging

by the curvature of the isogyre in an optic axis figure, probably considerably more.

Crushed augen of plagioclase and quartz are conspicuous. Chlorite is present in

sinall quantity, while epidote is rather plentiful and sometimes occurs in fair-sized

pockets. False cleavage has been developed as an effect of shear.

PERIOD OF VULCANISM

In the region under review, owing to paucity and isolation of the outcrops of

pre-Tertiary rocks which emerge through the ubiquitous veneer of Miocene to

Recent sediments, no field evidence is available clearly linking these quartz-kerato-

phyres with either of the local granitic suites, namely the adamellite-granodiorite

magma situated to the south or the soda-potash granites which occupy a large area

to the north. However, since highly albitic differentiates are associated with the

former suite at Encounter Bay (2) and Cape Willoughby (Kangaroo Island), it

is more than likely that these highly sodic quartz-keratophyres of the South-East

are also linked with the adamellite-granodiorite magma illustrated locally at the

Taratap Quarry. The age of the keratophyres is thus likely to be that of the

granodiorites which has been indicated (5) as probably Middle-Cambrian,

It is interesting to note that in the Heathcote district of Victoria there are

pre-Ordovician soda-rich volcanic rocks interbedded with Dinesus bearing beds

regarded (3) as of Middle-Cambrian age.

The Porphyroid Series of Western Tasmania is mainly of the nature of a

quartz-keratophyre which has undergone varying degrees of metamorphism under

shearing stresses. These felsitic rocks extend in a long line with axial direction

parallel to that of the West Coast Range. Specimens forwarded by W. T. Twelve-

trees (6) were examined and reported upon by Professor MH, Roscenbush in the

year 1898. He classed them as porphyroids or flaser-porphyries. In his descrip-

tion, epidotization and calcitization are recorded, and peculiar nests of albite are

specially remarked upon. Rosenbush further states that in one specimen “nothing

is left of the original groundmass; it has been converted to scricite, quartz and

albite . . . . the chlorite indicated original pyroxene rather than biotite?’ An

analysis by F. W. Ward (the Government Analyst of Tasmania of that time),

which appears in Twelvetrees’ paper, is included herewith in the table on page 194.

A glance at microscopic preparations of some of the Tasmanian porphyroids

further convinced us of their essential similarity with our South Australian

examples.

L. K. Ward (8) states that after the eruptive period which produced the

porphyroids, marked by both extrusive and intrusive phases, there was an absence

of igneous activity in Tasmania until the close of the Silurian or perhaps some

portion of the Devonian. He also states that a period of marked crustal move-

ment appears to have followed closely upon that of the porphyroid eruption.

199

Fortunately, there is some direct palaeontological evidence as to the age of the

Porphyroid Series of Tasmania, for it is associated with the Dundas slates which

contain the fossil Hurdia, which appears (8) to indicate a Middle to Upper-

Cambrian age.

Thus there is good reason to regard the quartz-keratophyres and porphyroids

of South-Eastern South Australia as equivalents of the Porphyroid Series of

‘Tasmania, and probably of Middle Cambrian age. The shearing stresses which

reduced the quartz-keratophyre to the state of porphyroid were doubtless asso-

ciated with great crustal upheaval which affected South Australia in Middle-

Cambrian time.

POTASH-SODA GRANITES

Rather frequent outcrops of an even-grained, pinkish-coloured granite are

distributed throughout an area of some 100 square miles in the Kongal Rocks-

Yallamurray region. Also a white granite of somewhat different character appears

alongside the Duke’s Highway some nine miles east of Keith. All these outcrops.

with the exception of that at Kongal Rocks, are inconspicuous. They are located in

a region elevated little above sea-level and of only very minor topographic relief.

This area of scattered granite outcrops is clothed with a stunted forest growth

and only rarely are there patches of beiter grown trees. Such vegetation is, how-

ever, in marked contrast with the low scrubby growth on so much of the neigh-

bouring country situated to the west and south-west.

These pink granites are found to be so similar petro'ogically to those already

described (5) outcropping to the south of Coonalpyn, that there appears to be no

doubt as to their consanguinity, Thus, the outcrops in this area are regarded as

part of a large batholith which includes also the granites of Murray Bridge and

Coonalpyn.

Section 123, HunpRED oF WIRREGA

An unusually fresh and typical example of this group of rocks occurs as #

low whaleback outcropping about 200 yards to the south of the road. This

locality is about two miles west of Carew Well. The rock, which is exposed over

a length of about 25 yards, is intersected by two fine-grained aplite [5803] veins

of normal type, the major one being six inches in width. There was also observed

traversing the outcrop a local irregular schliere composed of the normal flesh-

coloured feldspar [5799], which is as coarse or coarser grained than that of the

parent granite; it contains very little biotite and no quartz.

In the hand specimen this granite [5785] is seen to be of coarse but fairly

even grain. The obvious mineral constituents are a pinkish-buff coloured potash-

feldspar, faintly smoky quartz, yellowish-white plagioclase and lustreless biotite.

These minerals are not quite evenly distributed, the feldspars tending to be grouped

in aggregates poor in quartz. Occasionally plagioclase forms a shell around the

potash-feldspar.

The texture is typically granitic and roughly seriate, for the grains of potash-

feldspar are generally coarser than those of plagioclase, and the latter still coarser

than those of quartz. The grains of quartz occupy areas as large as the potash-

feldspar crystals, but these areas consist of composite grains. However, the above

relationships of size do not always hold, since very large grains of plagioclase and

quartz are not uncommon.

The “potash-feldspar” is found to be a composite one, varying between

perthite and antiperthite, according as the plagioclase is less or more abundant.

It is usually anhedral and its average grainsize is about 0-5 cm., though some

grains approach lcm. The plagioclase constituent is in long, wavy, branching and

200

confluent wisps, often twinned, and always in optical continuity throughout any

bne composite grain.

A rim of clear plagioclase partially borders some of these grains, and this

material may be in optical continuity with that in the interior of the grain;

furthermore, the included soda-lime feldspar is occasionally in optical continuity

with an adjoining plagioclase crystal. Usually both the orthoclase and plagioclase

in the composite grains are clouded, but the latter very much less so than the

former; indeed, the plagioclase is not infrequently quite clear.

In contradistinction to the “‘potash-feldspar,” the plagioclase occurs in sub-

hedral to euhedral grains, some of which are quite markedly zoned: the inner parts

of these are usually clouded through mild saussuritization, while the outer parts are

almost or quite clear, The theoretical composition (Ab,,An,), as deduced from

the analysis, is almost exactly the same as that determined by means of symmetri-

cal extinction-angles (Ab,.An.); this is not surprising in view of the simple

mineralogical composition of the rock. In a few cases grains of the albite are

included in the “potash-feldspar.”

There 1s nothing unusual about the quartz. It contains gas-liquid inclusions.

The boundaries of the grains are usually quite irregular.

Biotite, which is pleochroic from deep brownish-green to golden-yellow,

probably makes up no more than about 3 to 4% of the whole. Its lustreless

appearance may be due to partial change. One book shows very pronounced sieve-

structure, the included minerals being quartz and fluorite. Leucoxene has

separated from the mica, while feldspar in its vicinity is slightly stained with

iran oxide.

Black iron ore, Huorite, sericite, chlorite, allanite, and more rarely calcite and

aircon are the accessories. Nearly all of the fluorite, some of which has a purple

tinge, is embedded in biotite. while very small quantities of chlorite and sericite

are included im the plagioclase, the latter as a component of incipient saussuritic

alteration, One small crystal of altered allanite of a golden-yellow colour was

found in biotite.

The approximate nineral percentages in this rock are best gauged from the

norm, Actually the composite feldspar preponderates over the albite crystals to

the extent of about four or five to one. but the great abundance of albite in the

former accounts for the normative percentages of plagioclase and orthoclase. On

uccount of its paucity in Hime this rock is a potash-soda-granite rather than an

adamelite,

! a Bel I If {il

SiO, = - 781 76-74 73-77 ria ei Stee a gal

MLO, - 12°38 12-00 13-06 Fiat 9 4 Sad CRORE

heO, = 028 113 O72 See 9. ee OF ear

Pe) - = 0-78 0-43 1-43 C4 aes ~ 0-03 0-06 0-16

Mn) - OO1 trace 0:05 E : - O10 O20 0-04

MeQ - 009 0:03 0-12 Cl - - — ~~ traee

CaO + - 0-33 O49 0-89 S©)., - - -— ao nil

Na,O - 379 4:23 355 S . = as ~- 0:02

KO - = $70 419 5-44 3. 3 .

FEOF - O34 0-47 0:57 100-11 100-31 100-27

11 ,0O- - 14 O18 O11 Less QO tor F 0-04 0-08 0-02

hO, - O11 O10 O18 . - ~ —

PLO. - 002 O04 0-08 Total - 100-07 100-23 100-25

8 nr re ee | ve

Spee. Gray. 2°603 2-584 2-613

201

I Potash-soda granite [5785] from Section 123, Hundred of Wirrega, South

Australia. Analyst. W. B. Dallwitz, Department of Geology, University of

Adelaide.

II Potash-soda Micro-granite [5885} from Hundred of Willalooka, South

Australia. Analyst, E. R. Segnit, Department of Geology, University of

Adelaide.

lil Potash-soda Aporhyolite [4426] from Mount Monster, near Keith, South

Australia. Analyst, W. B. Dallwitz.

‘The chemical composition of this granite as determined by one of us (Dall-

witz} is given in the table on page 200. The molecular proportions of potash and

soda are 50-0 of KO. Gl-l of Na.Q. “Phe norm is as Tollows:

Chuarta ~ - ~ 25°53 Magnetite -- - O45

(rthoclase — - - 27°80 ilmenite + - O15

Allite - - ~ 31°96 Apatite - - - 0:06

Anorthite - - 1-50 Fluorite x - O19

Corundum — - - 0°60 Calcite - - - 0:09

MgSiO, (en. ) - 0°20 Water - - - O48

FesiO, hv.) - 1:06 a

Total - - 100-07

CULPAW. Classification: 1.4 (3). 1,3 ( Liparose-Alaskose }.

KonGanr Rocks

About three miles-south of the granite outerop just described is a much more

extensive development of a very similar granite. “Uhis locality is known as Kongai

Rocks. The outcrop measures about 500 yards by 250 yards and rises above an

already elevated region, indicating a considerable extension of the granite below

the surrounding area.

The specimen [4409| of Kongal granite is of a type closely similar both to

15785] and to [4410]. In granularity it is perhaps nearer to the latter, but the

‘eldspars perhaps more closely correspond with those of the former. Some grains

of light-coloured plagioclase are distinguishable in the hand-specimen, but the bulk

of the feldspar is perthite. A distinctive feature is the blackness of the smoky

auartz—more so than in the case of any other of these potash-soda graniies. The

ferromagnesian mineral is preponderantly biotite, though odd grains of aniphiboie

are macroscopically visible. Grains of colourless Aluorspar are visible in) the

microscope slide.

Occasional narrow veins of an even-grained aplitic microgranite traverse

the granite of Kongal Rocks. “These approach true aplites in character but contain

rather more ferromagnesian mineral (biotite) than is admissable for such. Rocks

j4434] and [4435] are examples of these veinstuffs; both are of similar nmiineral

constitution but the former is coarser grained than the latter. They are con-

stituted of quartz, orthoclase, a little microperthite and some highly albitic plagio-

clase and a very little biotite; the latter is pleochroic from yellow to bronzy-brown,

with remarkably strong absorption. No fluorspar was noted in these vein rocks.

Section 297, HuNpRED OF WIRREGA

Here granite is exposed on a sloping hillside to the east of the road. ft

occupies an area about 400 yards by 150 yards. This is a hornblende-biotite-

potash-soda granite, related to [5785 and 4409], but is also very similar to [4410

and 5894].

202

In the hand-specimen available [4413] there is a marked deficiency in ferro-

magnesian constituents, Some grains of hornblende are showing, but no biotite.

GRANITE NorTH-EAst or Desrerr Camp

On rising ground to the east of the road, about one mile north-east of Desert

Camp, patches of granite are exposed. Other small outerops were met with within

the next half-mile further to the north, confirming our view that a considerable

area of granite probably underlies the clevated block country to the east of this

locality.

A representative specimen [4410] of the rock outcrop at one mile north-east

of Desert Camp proves to be a hornblendic potash-soda-granite. It bears a general

resemblance in the hand-specimen to the foregoing [5785]; it has, however,

suffered somewhat from weathering, resulting in fairly general limonitic staining

and the assumption by the feldspar of a pale buff colour,

Under the microscope it is observed that though this rock is broadly the same

as [5785], there is an important distinction in that amphibole and pyroxene are

the dominant ferromagnesian minerals. These comprise both hornblende, with

X = greenish-brown, Y = very dark greenish-brown, and Z almost opaque, and

subordinate aegirine-augite in which ZAc—= 58° or more. Both these minerals

are extensively, and in some cases almost completely, replaced by haematite.

No separate, subhedral grains of albite were found. The small amount of

plagioclase not in perthite and antiperthite is interstitial between grains of those

feldspars ; as clear albite and chequer-albite, it forms pockets and narrow, border-

ing shells. In the intergrown feldspars, which occasionally show Baveno twinning,

the plagioclase is clear and the orthoclase clouded.

Biotite is rare ; it occurs marginal to black iron ore and associated with haema-

tite. Other minerals present are allanite, zircon and a little chlorite, The allanite

is fresh, slightly pleochroic and zoned, the core being a deep rich brown and the

border golden-brown. No fluorite was observed in the single section available.

HORNBLENDIC GRANITES OF THE YALLAMURRAY — New MARcOLLAT AREA

The track from New Marcollat [Head Station to Old Marcollat Head Station.

at one-and-a-half miles south-west of the former, passes on the east side of a

granite [5826] outcrop. This rises 20 feet above the plain, is 400 yards long by

155 yards across, and is directed in a SIO°W (true) direction, Beyond this point,

after crossing to the east side of the track and walking in a general southerly

direction for about one mile, a further outcrop [4411, 4412 and 5894] several

hundred yards in length is met with; continuing south and somewhat to the east

for a further mile, brings one to still another granite outcrop, It is probable that

there are others again beyond that. One such outcrop which we did not visit is

indicated on the Survey Department’s map of the Hundred of Marcollat, as exist-

ing within three miles of the Yallamurray homestead in a south-west direction. All

of these are petrologically very similar types and closely resemble [441 O} described

above, though perhaps somewhat coarser grained. They ace hornblendic potash-

soda-granites. .\egirine augite has not been observed in them, but fluorite is

present. Occasional subhedral grains of albite are present. Allanite, if present, is

very rare. Needles of apatite are not uncommon in specimen [4411].

SEcTION 11, Hunprep or StiritnG

The most northerly locality where granite was met with in the area now under

consideration is on the north side of the road nine miles south of Keith, The out-

crop visited is meagre, and the rock was found to be considerably weathered. [ft

203

is possible that a further examination of this area may reveal a more extended

outcrop than that examined by us.

This granite [4414] is in appearance distinct from others discussed in this

paper. It is a light grey allotriomorphic granite of a medium-coarse but even

granularity. The feldspars are white to faintly flesh-coloured. The quartz is

without the strong smoky character common in most of the granites extending

from Murray Bridge to the South-East.

The microscope slide reveals that the strongly microperthitic character of

the larger feldspars so common in the other granites is wanting. Here the soda

feldspar is mainly present as medium to acid oligaclase in small to meditim-sized

crystals, some of which are continued in an outer zone of orthoclase. To a

limited degree only, does plagioclase embedded in the orthoclase appear to have

arisen by exsolution from original homogeneous feldspars.

The ferromagnesian mineral is biotite, which for the most part has been much

affected by chloritization. The original mineral is strongly pleochroie from light

yellow to a deep greenish-brown, Zircon is common as small grains and rods in

the biotite. There are present occasional well-defined rods of apatite.

Though varying from the foregoing granites in some respects, there are not

sufficient grounds for regarding this occurrence as other than of the same period

of crustal injection.

POTASH-SODA MICROGRANITES

Apart from very minor aplitic micro-granite veins traversing some of the

granite outcrops described under the previous section, there are some notable

occurrences of microgranite in the region under consideration.

Rocks of this nature were met with in several places located to the west of

the potash-soda granite area, more particularly centred around Uncle Tom’s Cabin.

They are in a widespread region of very low scrubby vegetation, most of which

ig not more than several feet in height. However, in the immediate neighbour-

hood of outcrops of these igneous rocks, or where the latter are located at shallow

depth below the sand and limestone formations of Tertiary to Recent age, there

are patches of eucalypts reaching the dimensions of a stunted forest growth.

Hunprep o¢ WILLALOOKA

A large mass (see pl. XI, fig. 1) of porphyritic microgranite forms a low

hill located some five or six miles to the west-north-west of Kongal Rocks. It is

on the north side of and a quarter of a mile from the track leading from Border-

town to Uncle Toni’s Cabin. ‘The surrounding country is quite flat and occupied

by low heath-like scrubby vegetation growing to some two to three feet in height,

in which stunted banksia is an outstanding element. This granitic outcrop, which

is no more than a couple of hundred yards across, is mainly a broad fat rock

raised 45 feet above the surrounding plain, but this is surmounted near its

southern edge by a knob which reaches to a total height of 90 feet above the plain.

The rock is notably red in colour and porphyritic.

Macroscopically examined, this porphyritic, granophyric, potash-soda, biotite-

microgranite [5885] is medium-grained and consists of pinkish-red feldspar,

semi-vitreous to smoky quartz and fine-grained biotite. Occasional feldspar

crystals are well over 1 cm. in length. As seen under the microscope,

the texture is decidedly porphyritic. Feldspar, quartz, and biotite phenocrysts

are embedded in a matrix of fine-grained feldspar and quartz, The ratio of

phenocrysts to matrix is about two to one,

204

Most of the feldspar is considerably clouded and has a pale brownish tinge

in reflected light, due to finely-disseminated iron oxide. It appears that, among

the feldspar phenocrysts, potash-bearing varieties—- errhgataae orthoclase partly

inverted to microcline, microcline- -perthite are predominant, while

in the groundmass plagioclase is greatly in excess “ad may even exclude the others

altogether. In the compound feldspars the plagioclase is in the form of straight-

sided tongues whose disposition suggests that the potash-feldspar may have been

attacked by late-magmatic soda-rich solutions and partially replaced. The great

abundanee of plagioclase in the matrix lends support to this idea. This latter

fe'dspar is very often in the form of graphic intergrowths with quartz; thus the

groundmass has a granophyric character, The graphic intergrowths frequently

form a complete shell around phenocrysts, especially those of quartz.

The composition of the ness could not be determined in the slide, but

as Indicated by the norm it must be about 100% albite. As no calcite could he

found in the section at hand and, of the assumption that none is present, the

plagioclase cannot be more basic than Ab,-An,.

The quartz, which is sometimes sthhedral, contains abundant gas-liquid

inclusions. The feldspar crystals are subhedral to euhedral. An average valuc

for the size of the porphyritic minerals is about 2 mm., though many grains arc

up to 5 mm. across.

Biotite makes wp about 25% of the rock. It nust be a highly ferriferous

mica in view of the very low value of MgO in the analysis. The mica is pleochroic

from very dark greenish-brown to ye ellow-green with a brownish tinge. In some

places haematite has separated from: it asa result of partial deconiposition.

Other minerals present are fluorite, black iron ore and a little, altered, golden-

yellow allanite. Small grains of the first of these are often an intense purple.

while patches of larger grains are also strongly coloured. Oxidation of the iron

ore has given rise to rather marked strains in the vicinity of that mineral,

A chemical analysis by E. R. Segnit appears in the table on page 200. The

molecular proportions of potash and soda are: 68:2 of Na,O and 44:5 of K,O.

The norm is as follows:

Quartz - - - 35°64 Hlaematite — - - 0°32

QOrthoclase — - - 25:02 Apatite * - 0-10

Albite - - 35°63 Fluorite = - 0°39

Corundum — - - 0-30 Calcite - - 0-10

MegsSiQ,, Cen.) - QO-:10 Water - - - 0°65

Magucetite - - 1:16 Sry

Imenite - - O15 Total L - 100-56

C.LP.W, Classification: 1, 4 (3). 1, 3 (4) (Liparose },

Uncre Tom's Canin

In the neighbourhood of Unele Tom’s Cabin (also in the Hundred of Willa-

looka), an duitstition of the former Didicooluin sheep station, there is a line of

gramitic outcrops trending m a direction 65° to the east of south (true). The sur-

rounding country is mainly a flat expanse of low heath-like scrub: localities where

granite occur, either appearing at the surface or where it lies bencath shallow sandy

surtane formations, are marked by the appearance of patches of trees whose exist-

ence is made possible, no doubt, by the conservation of ground-water on the

irregular surface of the granite. A well aie down through the sandy surface

formation at Uncle Tom’s Cabin taps water 15 feet below on the surface of ihe

granite.

205

The outcropping granite belt is about 200 yards wide and extends in a broken

line for over three-quarters of a mile. In that distance there are four rock masses

rising to a maximum height of somewhat more than 50 feet above the surrounding

plain. There is a general uniformity in the character of the rock of all the out-

crops, though portion [5887] of number three outcrop from the north end is some-

what lighter in colour than the others. Also, there are represented transitional

types between the more characteristic, porphyritic microgranite type and an

almost normal plutonic granite.

The rock [5886] from the most north-westerly outcrop is porphyritic, potash-

soda, hornblende-biotite, microgranite. Embedded in a fine-grained groundmass

there are crystals of flesh-coloured and some yellow-coloured feldspar, smoky and

vitreous quartz and some dark ferromagnesian mineral. Certain of the feldspars

are roughly tabular and over 1 cm. in length. The ratio of phenocrysts to ground-

mass is in the order of between 1:5 and 2 to 1.

Although the general structure of this rock is related to that of [5885] there

are three notable differences, namely, that here the feldspar phenocrysts are about

three times the diameter of the quartzes, whereas in [5885] they are not much

larger; also, the groundmass is more or less even-grained and is not noticeably

gtanophyric; finally there is here a second generation of feldspars, which is not

altogether absent in [5885], though much less easily distinguishable,

The average grain-size of the several minerals of this rock is as follows:

porphyritic feldspars, 6 mm. x 4 mm., though some exceed 1 cm, in length;

porphyritic quartz, 1:5 mm., but many grains up to 3 mm. in diameter: second

generation feldspars, about 1 mm. but variable; groundmass (quartz and plagio-

clase), 0°2 mm.

This rock is even more rich in soda than [5885] because nearly all of the

large porphyritic feldspar is anhedral to subhedral antiperthite, whose plagioclase-

component appears to have an anorthite content of 5% or less; zoned plagioclase

and a little perthite are also among the larger crystals. The soda-lime feldspar,

whose composition ranges from acid oligoclase in the cores to albite in the peri-

phery, sometimes occurs in glomeroporphyritic groups. Crystal intergrowths

and complex twinning are not uncommon in the antiperthite, which, in addition,

always shows excellent albite twinning and sometimes pericline. The second

generation feldspars are predominantly albite (An, or less) which may be slightly

zoned, but antiperthite and perthite are fairly well represented. All of the feld-

spars are gencrally very much clouded, but least change has taken place in the

second generation plagioclase (which may be almost free from it) and in the outer

zones of the large subhedral phenocrysts of that mineral. Evidence in this rock

again points to a progressive enrichment of the mother-liquor in soda as crystalliza-

tion proceeded, for the second generation feldspars are largely albite, while one

large crystal of plagioclase-poor perthite was seen to be bordered by a strongly-

developed antiperthitic shell of varying width, It, therefore, appears that the

bulk of the antiperthite and perthite was formed from slightly perthitic potash-

feldspar by the action of soda-rich liquid.

The quartz contains a few gas-liquid inclusions; it is occasionally found in

graphic intergrowth with late-crystallizing plagioclase.

Biotite and minor amounts of hornblende make up about 6 or 7% of the

rock, The mica, which is usually in aggregates, is pleochroic from almost black

with a greenish tinge to golden-brown when fresh; when bleaching has taken

place, the colour-change seen is from dark greenish-brown to yellow. One grain

of hornblende was observed to be pleochroic from deep red-brown to golden-

200

brown, but this seems to be exceptional, for most grains have X = greenish-

brown, Y = Z—very dark greenish-brown. Apart from occurring in fair-sized

books, biotite, in very small flecks which sometimes have common orientation, is

raiher eveuly distributed in many of the grains of antiperthite; some of these

flecks have changed to green chlorite.

Of the remaining minerals, fluorite, calcite, black iron ore, zircon and pale

yellow-brown, slightly pleochroic altered allanite often accompany biotite. The

hornblende is veined and partly or wholly replaced by oxides of iron, probably

goethite and some haematite; a few scattered streaks of the latter are found in

the hght-coloured minerals also. Sericite and a little calcite have been developed

in the plagioclase crystals, especially the early-formed ones.

A lighter-coloured rock [5887], in the hand-specimen differing mainly from

the foregoing [5886] in that the feldspars are near-white in colour, not reddish.

occurs in the third outcrop from the north-west end of the Uncle Tom’s Cabin

lucahty. This porphyritic, potash-soda, hornblende-biotite-microgranite [5887]

has not been analysed, but it is probably less sodic than rock [5886].

i:vidence for this is that the first generation of feldspars, which are slightly-

perthitic crystals of orthoclase, are much less extensively replaced by late-

magmatic perthite and antiperthite. However, some of the smaller ones, and

even some of the larger ones, have been completely made over, but the changes

have been rather patchy. The groundmiass of this rock is somewhat finer-grained

and relatively more abundant than is the case of [5886].

As far as could be determined, the plagioclase in the antiperthite is about

An,;. Some of the large phenocrysts of plagioclase are bordered by antiperthite,

and perthite whose plagioclase-constituent is in optical continuity with that in the

phenocrysts. Occasionally marginal plagioclase bears the same relationship to

perthite and antiperthite.

Other minerals present are quartz, hornblende, biotite, black iron ore, goethite,

allanite, fluorite, zircon and a few needles of apatite.

Biotite, pleochroic from very dark almost opaque reddish-brown to golden-

yellow, is quite subordinate to the hornblende, whereas the reverse holds in

[5886]. The hornblende occurs in very irregular grains which tend to be

poikilitic towards the granular quartz and feldspar of the groundmass. — Its

pleochroism is as follows: X = light greenish-brown, Y = very deep greenish-

brown, Z= deep brownish-green; in one large grain of this mineral there is a

lighter green core of amphibole. An interesting feature of the amphibole and

mica is that they are never bordered by or included in the large feldspar crystals,

but always occur in the groundmass. This fact supports the suggestion that a

considerable amount of re-hashiug went on during the last stages of consolidation,

and it may also account for the very irregular outlines of the grains of horn-

blende and biotite.

Goethite often borders and seanis the hornblende of which it is an alteration-

product, and also occurs in small flecks in the groundmass and phenocrysts. It is

very difficult or impossible to distinguish it from biotite in many cases, for their

colours are almost identical. It, too, is undoubtedly a late-magniatic product.

Allanite has the same mode of occurrence as the ferromagnesians. Its out-

lincs are usually quite irregular; generally it is fresh and pleochroic in shades of

golden-brown, but marginally it may he altered and show ageregate-polarization.

Some of the smaller grains have suffered complete change. The crystals of

zircon are up to 0-15 mm. across; they are often embedded in hornblende. wherein

they give rise to pleochroic haloes.

207

Another part [5892] of the same outcrop (No. 3) is ol a _warmer-toned

eranite than [5887], and not unlike [5886] but less porphyritic in appearance.

In it, microperthite is much more conspicuous than is the case in [5887]. Horn-

blende, pleochroic from medium yellow to dark green, is a conspicuous con-

stituent, but biotite is scarce. Small grains and rods of zircon are common, mainly

in association with ferromagnesian minerals. Several distinct grains of fluorspar

were also detected. Occasional calcites are to be seen with sharp and clear-cut

boundaries aud the appearance of being primary constituents of the rock.

Johannsen (4, p. 238) in discussing “calcite granite’ makes reference to

several records where calcite occurring in granite has been regarded as a primary

snineral. The literature quoted indicates, amongst other things, the impossibility

of calcite forming as an original erystallization in magmas, like granites, which are

supersaturated with silica.

In the case of our rock [5892| which is fresh and unweathered, the calcite

is certainly not secondary in the fullest sense, namely, resulting from mineral

changes effected after complete and final cooling of the crystallised magma.

Actually the identity of our mineral as calcite has not been completely deter-

mined, but it has been established as a carbonate mineral of the calcite group.

In slides of rock [5892| there are to be seen “calcite” individuals up to

0-6 mm, in diameter which are perfectly homogeneous and optically continuous,

with sharp line contacts against adjacent quartzes, which latter are idiomorphic

against the calcite. The calcite formation is thus subsequent to the crystallization

of the quartz, Llsewhere in the microscope sections calcite is seen in optically

continuous individuals, apparently as arrested replacements of biotite; it forms

tongues penetrating and extending along the cleavages of the latter mineral,

The phenomena presented suggest that the calcite has developed as an auto-

metamorphic reaction-mineral during the final pneumatolitic stage of magma

solidification. Some of the evidence suggests that it is possibly original fluorspar

which has been reduced to calcite by reaction with alkaline carbonates.

Specimen [5891] exemplifies the rock from No. 4 outcrop at Uncle Tom’s

Cabin. In character it represents a transition between the porphyritic micro-

eranite [5886] and a normal plutonic granite. The ferromagnesian mineral is

almost exclusively hornblende; only odd wisps of biotite are to be seen. Zircon

is plentiful. Several patches of magnetite and a tiny scrap of allanite are present.

Some tiny isotropic spindles embedded in the biotite appear to be fluorspar.

Gir Gip Rocks, Hunprep or PEACOCK

Along the brow of some high ground located about 11 miles to the north of

Old Marcollat homestead, and recorded as Gip Gip Rocks on one of the maps of

the Hundred of Peacock (Jip Jip in some of the older records), granitic rocks

outcrop in several places. We were unable, on account of limited time available

during our visit, to fully investigate this area, but specimens from two of the

outcrops were collected. They are both much weathered, The first [4416]

resembles somewhat the rock [5885] located five miles cast of Unele Tom’s Cabin,

but is a nearer approach to a medium fine-grained biotite granite, The other

specimen [4433] is an aplitic biotite- microgranite very similar to [4434], which

latter is a narrow band cutting across the Kongal granite mass.

POTASH-SODA QUARTZ-PORPHYRIES

Mount MONSTER

: At Mount Monster (pl. XI, fig. 2), situated seven miles S.S.W. of the town

of Keith, there is a boldly outcropping mass of quartz-porphyry. Within a mile

208

to the north and two miles to the south-east of the central mass there are other

outcrops of porphyry differing in petrological character from that of Mount

Monster itself.

The chemical analysis of this latter rock [4426] is stated in the table on

page 200. The molecular proportions of potash and soda are 57-8 of K.O,

97°3 of Na,O. The norm is as follows: ‘

Quartz - - - 30°04 lmenite - ~ O41

Orthoclase — - - 32:25 Apatite - - 0°34

Albite - - - 29°87 Fluorite - ~ 0-09

Anorthite —- - 2°78 Calcite - - - 0:35

Corundum = - - 0°25 Pyrite - - - 0-04

MgsiO, - - 0°30 Water - - - 0-68

FesiO, - - 1°66 ———

Magnetite —- - 0°93 Total - - 99-99

C.I.P.W. Classification: I, 4, 1 (2). 3 (Liparose-Toscanose ),

The Mount Monster porphyry is a reddish-brown rock with, as its most out-

standing character, a great abundance of (about 50% by volume) porphyritic

crystals,

The devitrified base is of a liver-brown colour. The quartzes are smoky and

the porphyritic feldspars are pinkish-buff coloured.

In microscope slide the orthoclase individuals, which are abundant, are seen

to be largely rendered “dusty” when observed in transmitted light. Plagioclases,

which are less abundant, have also suffered in the same way. Where suitable for

optical tests, the plagioclase has the characters of nearly pure albite (Ab,,An,) ;

this is in close correspondence with the norm. The ferromagnesian mineral is

biotite but most of it has been altered to secondary minerals, mainly chlorite.

Accessories are zircon, fluorite (rare), black iron ore with marginal leucoxene,

some brown allanite which has suffered partial breakdown to secondary products

and, finally, there has been noted one cluster of calcite.

As it is intended at a later date to investigate the petrological characters of

the several other porphyries of the Mount Monster area, further discussion will

be reserved until then. In the meantime, all that it is now necessary to emphasise

is that the chemical analysis and other petrological characters link these Mount

Monster rocks with the fluorite-bearing potash-soda granites already shown to be

so widely developed in the South-East of the State.

SUMMARY

The Jocation of occurrence and the petrological description of many igneous

rocks, including potash-soda granite, potash-soda microgranite, quartz-kerato-

phyre, whose outcrops are distributed through over 1,000 square miles of South-

Eastern South Australia, have been given in some detail in the foregoing account.

All are believed to be of pre-Ordovician age. The fluorite bearing granites are an

eastern extension of those already known from Murray Bridge and the Coonalpyn

region, The quartz porphyries are microgranites or effusive equivalents of the

same granites. The quartz-keratophyres are taken to be palaeotypal, leucocratic,

soda-rhyolites of middle to late Cambrian age.

In one area, Didicoolum, these keratophyres have suffered shearing stresses

and are presented as localised analogues of regional metamorphism. ‘These sheared

and otherwise metamorphosed keratophytic rocks are believed to represent South

Australian equivalents of the “porphyroid series” of Western ‘Tasmania,

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate X

Fig. 1. Whale-back outcrop of Adamellite in the Reedy Creek swamp water-

course, located 4 miles east of the head of the Upper Coorong.

Fig. 2. Soda-Rhyolite Outcrop, Section 173, Hundred of Minecrow

“a

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate XI

Fig. 1 Outcrop of potash-soda microgranite located 5 miles east

of Uncle Tom’s Cabin.

Fig. 2 Outcrop of potash-soda quartz-porphyry at Mount Monster

209

REFERENCES

Brown, fH. ¥. L. 1908 “Record of the Mines of South Australia.” Mines

Dept. S. Aust., 4th ed.

Brownr, W. R. 1920 “The Igneous Rocks of Encounter Bay, South Aus-

tralia.’ Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 44, 1-57

Davip, T. W. E. 1932. “Explanatory Notes to Accompany a New Geological

Map of Australia.” Sydney

Jouannsen, A. 1932 “Petrography,” 2, Univ. Chicago Press

Mawson, D., and Parkin, L. W. 1943 “Some Granitic Rocks of South-

Eastern South Australia.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S .Aust., 67, (2), 233

Tweiverrees, W. T., and Perrero, W. F. 1900 “On the Felsites and Asso-

ciated Rocks of Mount Read and Vicinity.” Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 11,

33-46

Wave, A. 1915 “The supposed QOil-bearing Areas of South Australia.”

Geol. Survey Dept. S. Aust., Bull 4

Warp, I.. K. 1909 “The Tin Field of North Dundas.” Geol. Survey Tas-

mania, Bull. 6

Wasurneron, H. S. 1917 “Chemical Analyses of Igneous Rocks.” U.S.

Geol. Survey, Prof. Paper 99

A FURTHER ACCOUNT OF THE

MURID, PSEUDOMYS (GYOMYS) APODEMOIDES FINLAYSON

By H. H. FINLAYSON

Summary

This is small native mouse, allied to the Western Australian albocinereus, was discovered by Mr.

Walter Harvey in the upper South-Eastern district of South Australia in April 1929. Three years

later further species having been obtained, the present writer published a preliminary description of

the new species under the above name. in Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust,. 1932, 56, 170. Since then

additional field work, observation of the animal in captivity, and the building up of a much more

adequate series of preserved specimens have provided data for the following more extended

account. This, while still incomplete in some respects, permits of detailed comparison with other

species similarly treated and may lead to a juster estimate of its relation to its allies when these, in

turn, are sufficiently known.

210

A FURTHER ACCOUNT OF THE

MURID, PSEUDOMYS (GYOMYS) APODEMOIDES FINLAYSON

By H. FH. Fixtayson

{Read 10 August 1944|

PLATES AIL ro XV

This small native mouse, allied to the Western Australian albocinereus, was

discovered by Mr. Walter Harvey in the upper South-Eastern district of South

Australia in April 1929. Three years later further specimens having been

obtained, the present writer published a preliminary description of the new specics

under the above name, in Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.. 1932, 56, 170. Since then

additional field work. observation of the anima! in captivity. and the building up

of amuch more adequate seri¢s of preserved specimens have provided data for the

following more extended account. This, while still incomplete in some respects.

permits of detailed comparison with other species similarly treated and may Jead

to a juster estimate of its relation to its allies when these. in turn. are sufficientls

known,

The writer records his appreciation of the co-operation of Mr. Harvey, in

all matters attending the field work upon the animal. the results of which have

heen much enhanced by bis ready and gencrous help.

DISTRIBUTION AND TtAbrrs

Practically the whole series obtained so far has come from a comparatively

small area on Mr. Harvey’s holding in the Hundred of Coombe, and the on

extension of range which is definitely based upon specimens taken is at Pringa-

toola, 27 miles west-south-west of Coombe and within eight miles of the Coorong

coast. Less definite but still reliable evidence. derived from the presence of its

characteristic burrows and tracks and middens thereon, indicate its occurrence at

several other pomts in the counties of Cardwell and Buckingham, both east and

west of the railway. Combinations of topography, soils and vegetations quite

similar to that of the type habitat at Coombe are to be found over a wide area in

the Murray Mallee and South-Eastern Divisions of South Australia and adjacei

tracts of other States, and it seems certain: that it will eventually prove to have a

wide distribution herein; so far, however, neither observation nor enquiry sup-

ported by the submission of specimens. have disclosed the animal beyond the

above mentioned counties. :

The type locality at Coombe lies just within the limits ef the South-Eastern

Histrict, but in topography and general aspect is quite similar to much of the so-

called Ninety Mile Desert, further north in Chandos and Buccleuch. ‘The genera!

relief is lower; the considerable cast and west limestone ridges of the “Upper

Desert are absent and the sandridges with their characteristic serrate profiles arc

replaced by lower undulations or isolated hills. There is a fairly sharp partition

of soils into reddish loams of moderately firm texture and pure white sand, with

corresponding local differences in vegetation. The loamy flats are now frequenth

cultivated, but primitively support a sparse savannah of the so-called Desert Gam

(Eucalyptus fasciculosa), which here tends to be considerably larger than further

north and commonly attains to 30-40 feet in height. and in some favoured oases

to considerably more; the floor is here open, sparsely grassed, but frequently

carrics abundant Triodia (7. basedowei and 7. ivritans). The white sand tract:

Trans. Roy. Suc. SA, 68, (2). 30 November 1944

211

support a dry type heath with honeysuckles (Banksia marginata and dwar!

B. ornata), bulloak (Casuarina pusilla), needle bush (Hakea ulicina), yacka

(Xanthorrhea australis}, white mallee (Eucalyptus angulosa) and broom (Baeckea

spp.) as the chief of the taller shrubs, while im the undergrowth the more promi-

nent species are, Adenanthos terminalis, Brachyloma. ericoides, Astroloma cono-

stephioides, Daviesia brevifolia, Leucopogon woodsti, Correa rubra, Thomasic

petalocalyx, Hibbertia spp., Calythrix cf. tetragena, Leptospermunt myrsinoidcs,

Kunscea pomifera and Lepidosperma laterale.?

Dense, uniform mallee communitics of large extent are not a characteristic

feature, as they are further north. The annual rainfall of 20 inches is consider-

ably higher than in the Desert. and the heath undergrowth tends to be denser and

richer in species.

So far the new species has been taken only in the sandy heath country, where

it lives in scattered isolated colonies, with much apparently suitable country un-

occupied. Its mode of life is very unobtrusive ; it is almost strictly nocturnal, docs

not invade houses nor camps nor cultivated ground, and even in the immediate

vicinity of its living sites it is seldom sufficiently numerous to cause any appreciable

disturbance in the vegetation in feeding, or to make obvious pads. “he sand heaps

at its burrows at certain times of the year are practically the only external evidence

of its presence which can be seen, and these, except when newly thrown up. are

usually quite inconspicuous. Nevertheless, in spite of this obscurity, it secms some~

what remarkable that in a district that has been settled and jarmed for eighty vears

it should not have been noticed before; none of Mr. Harvey’s neighbours had

cognisance of it, and the results of enquiry elsewhere have always been negative.

It is satisfactory to be able to record (as a rare good deed of a rather sinister

domestic figure) that the original specimen was brought in by a house cat.

Attempts at trapping were shortly afterwards undertaken, but the species proved

very difficult to take in this way, both with ordinary baits which are generally

successful with local murids, and special foodstuifs, and lures such as rhodium

and anise oils were unayailing. The next few specimens to be got were found

accidentally trapped in empty posi-holes. a fate which it sometimes shared with

Dromicia concinne, which cceupies the same heaths. This fortunate accident

suggested the deliberate use of pitfalls as a method of capture, ‘The venture was

quite successful, and nearly all subseyuent catches were got by this device. The

method followed was to sink ordinary post-holes about nine inches square and

three fect deep. at random in the heath; when a catch was made, the holes were

multiplied until as many as twenty in an acre were in use. In this way, ten have

been taken in a night, and in most cases the catch was found alive and quite un-

injured. The captives usually accepted their fate, temporarily at any rate, with

resignation, and sought additional shclter by excavating a cavity into the wall of

the hole at the bottom, whence as many as five close-packed adults have been

removed in the morning; a few, however, escaped from time to time by the feat of

climbing the vertical friable walls, and still others by driving nearly vertical shafts

from the shelter pocket to the surface.

There is a marked periodicity in the success of the pittall; the holes have been

left uncovered at all times of the year, but practically all catches have been con-

centrated into the period of auturmn and early winter, and within this period again

there is unmistakable evidence of heightened activity immediately before or during

©) T am indebted to Miss Constance Eardley, of the Botany Department of the

University of Adelaide, for naming the collection of plants made at Coombe; a few species

were indeterminate through absence of flowers or fruit, but the above list includes all

which are quantitatively important in the habitat of apodemoides.

212

rains and at times of unsettled weather—a trait of the species strikingly confirmed

later in captivity. During the summer months it virtually disappears at Coombe,

hut whether through some change of habits placing it beyond easy observation,

or through a definite exodus to other areas, is still uncertain.

The animal is an expert burrower and makes elaborate and relatively large

warrens in which, during the cold weather, the whole of the daylight hours are

spent, and in which the young are born and reared. The chief external evidence of

a burrow site is a heap of white sand thrown up behind a circular aperture of

about one inch in diameter, both commonly at the base of a heath banksia. This

entrance, however, is but a temporary one, opened in autumn for renovation of

the interior, and it is soon afterwards closed from within by a long sand plug.

The real entrances are at a considerable distance from this one and unlike it, are

very inconspicuous and take the form of circular popholes communicating with

nearly vertical shafts. The general topography and architecture of the warren

is shown in the scale diagram (fig. 1) of a comparatively elaborate one excavated

at Coombe in June 1933. The following itemized description will serve as a legend

for this diagram:

Vig. |

A, trial opening, abandoned. B--C, the opening drive; horizontal diameter

one inch, vertical diameter 14 inches; descending evenly from ground level at

B to 18 inches at C; this drive is now disused and functions as a dump, being

loosely packed with sand from other parts of the galleries. C, a circular chamber,

approximately three inches in diameter, such as commonly occurs elsewhere at

major junctions. C—D, the first lateral drive descending to two feet at D, and

sand plugged like B-C. C-E-G-~I is the main longitudinal drive, maintaining a

nearly constant direction except opposite the nest, where there is an acutely angled

bypass; it descends to a maximum depth of about two feet six inches at the nest.

EK. G.I. K. M. are circular chambers of varying size, analogous to C. F, L, O are

short drives used as dumps and loosely packed with sand. H is the nest chamber;

it is a spherical cavity with a diameter of six inches and has two short indepen-

dent tunnels connecting with the main drive. and can thus be completely by-passed

by the ordinary traffic of the warren. The nest almost fills the sand cavity and

is beautifully fashioned of finely shredded bark fibre, derived from a plant not yet

identified, but apparently not occurring in the immediate vicinity of the burrow.

In the centre of the mass is an inner cavity, smoothly lined with carefully adjusted

213

leaves of Banksia marginata, and when opened it was found to be occupied by

four nestlings of about 10 days’ growth. I-J isa continuation of the main drive

which has been used as a sand dump in the same way as B-C; it rises slightly

towards J, where it suddenly terminates in a nearly vertical shaft, leading directly

so the surface two feet above; both vertical shaft and pophole are open, but of

course isolated from the rest of the system and non-functioning. E-M-P-Q is

the main lateral system and, with its branches, is similar to the main gallery, but

uyer its middle course is from three to six inches deeper, The drives, P-Q and

M-N, rise slightly towards their extremities, where they are converted abruptly

into nearly vertical shafts, reaching the surface two feet six inches above the

points Q and N, in the form of circular apertures of one-and-a-half inches

diameter ; these two popholes were the only functioning entrances and exits dis-

covered, and presumably are used indifferently for both purposes.

Apart from the nest chamber, no other cavities suggesting living quarters

were found, and, apart from the breeding nest, there was a complete absence

uf vegetable matter which might serve as fodder or bedding; the tunnels

everywhere showed clean, smooth sandy floors free from excrement, and the

nest was dry and non-odorous. Defaecation on the surface is sometimes con-

centrated upon middens, as mentioned above. ‘The circular chambers at the junc-

tions of passages are possibly made in the first place to facilitate the work of

burrowing, and then left to facilitate trafhe, though if this is so it is curious that

this feature is not always present, even at three-way junctions. The combined

Jengths of all galleries in this warren, including the three vertical shafts, was

approximately 60 feet, and the estimated weight of the moist sand displaced 40-50

pounds ; a work of considerable magnitude for so small and delicate a creature. The

volume of the sand in the dumps external to the warren was, unfortunately. not

ascertained, but that it does not represent the whole volume displaced is clear from

the obvious use made of unwanted passages, for the accommodation of part of it.

The plug of replaced sand was always found to have a looser texture than the

virgin consolidated soil, and a slightly different colour also, so that there was little

difficulty in following the course of these packed tunnels by visual inspection

during the digging.

Each excavation appears to be originally the work of one breeding pair, but

the part-grown young of one or more litters may share the shelter with the parents.

Seven individuals is the maximum number taken so far from one system. When

young examples taken in a pitfall are released near a burrow, they will not enter

unless they are satisfied that it is their own domicile. Uneertainty still prevails

as to the duration of occupation of the burrow. Excavation of new holes and

renovation of old ones is first noticed in early autumn, when the dumps of recently

turned white sand at the entrance hole are, for a time, rather conspicuous. AS

this time also marks the beginning of the chief reproductive period, there seems no

doubt that the two activities are correlated, and that the excavation is made

primarily as a shelter for the young. Investigation of the warrens in summer is

not sufficiently complete to prove that a general vacation of the same takes place,

but there is much evidence in support of this, and at Coombe, the only examples

taken on the surface in daylight have been in midsumer. At the Coorong site of

Pringatoola, where it was trapped in late November, there was no evidence of

burrowing, though it was so plentiful as to form noticeable pads in some favoured

spots, with well-used circular middens; features never seen at Coombe.

Observations on the animal in captivity show that it is rather intolerant of

heat and, as the local summer is a severe one, it is difficult to see why it should

forsake the coolness of its underworld for the discomfort of the surface. It is

possible, of course, that the move is involuntary and forced upon it by changes in

214

the texture of the drying sand; similar considerations have been shown to operate

powerfully on the burrowing habits of some old world Muridae.

The natural enenvies of the species at Coombe are probably chiefly predatory

night birds. Burrows partly dug out by foxes have, however, been observed, and

Mr. Harvey on one occasion found a small brown snake (Demensia textilis)

within, and on another a spotted Pardalote (Pardalotus punctatus). Neither this

snake, taken i situ, nor others taken at random in the district, contained apodc-

motdes in the stomach, though they did contain house mice.

In general aspect the mouse is exceedingly delicate and attractive and remark-

able for the prevailing pallor, not only of its pelage but of all exposed epidermal

areas as well, which are nearly destitute of pigment and appear bright pink in lite.

In size and bulk, afodcmoides is somewhat larger than an average house mouse.

but is very dissimilar in general appearance and mannerisms, The build is rather

squat as to body but with light slender appendages; the squatness is especially

characteristic of some subadult phases, but in all is exaggerated, as is also the

apparently large size of the head, by the erect and profuse pelage.

Observed in captivity, its slow movements and some of its postures are by

no means graceful; when deliberately investigating its surroundings in a new

cage, it has a curious pottering uncertain gait and the long slender tail is carried

ina rather odd way, well clear of the ground and sometimes arched over the back.

When startled, however, or otherwise excited, it is capable of movements of

lightning-like rapidity and great precision—in both respects recalling Notontys.

As noted above, examples on more than one occasion made their escape from

vertical three-foot holes by climbing the sides, but in captivity it shows little

inclination or aptitude for climbing. Much of its time, when stationery, is spent

reared up on its haunches, when it assumes a comical, almost globular shape; its

feeding is usually done so, and, if of suitable size, each particle such as a grain of

seed or a berry, is taken delicately in the two hands and brought up to the mouth

for the incisors to work upon, which they do with the utmost precision and speed

and control, rejecting in the case of a wheat grain the whole of the husk, so that

the cages soon become carpeted with dises of bran, ts feeding, indeed all its

activities, are interrupted abruptly and frequently. for the toilet of the coat, which

it keeps in immaculate condition; the toilet is done largely by the manus and

incisors, the mysticial vibrissac receiving especially frequent attention.

In temperament it is both brisk and adaptable, doctle and confident. — [ts

nonchalance in the pitfall has already been mentioned; when removed by hand it

showed little resentment and made no serious attempt to bite. When transferred

to box cages and compelled to live in radically strange surroundings and upon a

totally new and unaccustomed diet, it retained a cheerful activity with every

evidence of comfort and content.

The cages used for parties of from five to ten were airy boxes three feet by

three feet by two feet, with two glass sides and two of wire gauze to facilitate

observation and ventilation and cooling, respectively. Shelter and nesting boxes

with light hinged lids, and packed with wood-wool and cotton for nesting material,

were provided, and were at once approved and adopted by the mice, but their

sense of security evidently demanded emergency exits. which they promptly sup-

plied by driving popholes through the deal walls. The cages were kept under a

roofed shelter in a comparatively subdued heht, and under these conditions they

frequently left the nest during daylight for short tours of the cage, but all their

main activity remained definitely crepuscular and nocturnal and involved an

immense amount of coming and going, as the quantity of sand shifted plainly

showed. The floor of the cages was covered with a layer of sand two inches deep.

215

and it was early discovered that a moist atmosphere was greatly appreciated. On

several occasions when the sand dried out it was hosed lightly to remoisten it, and

the effect on the colony was electrical; the mice left the shelter box en masse,

though it was broad daylight, and engaged 4 ina most animated display of acrobatics.

The chief evolution was a lightning- like | ooping of the loop. by springing from

the floor to a wall, thence to the roof, thence to the opposite wall and down to

the floor, each impact, though of scareely perceptible duration, being sufficient for

attaining a new impetus; the looping was repeated a dozen times or more in a

continuous series without pause.

They quarrelled very little among themselves, and a dozen might safely be

left to share the same quarters; such bickering as did go on was of a mild kind

and usually resulted in nothing more serious than tail shoitening. One or two

cases of fratriphagy were noticed amongst aged specimens, but as no animosity

had been apparent beforehand, it was possibly due to a temporary protein defi-

ciency in the diet. The staples of the diet adopted were mixed grain and hard

fruits, with an occasional ration of nuts, honey and fat bacon; this proved accept-

able and adequate for the maintainance of all normal activity. including reproduc-

tion and the rearing of voung. Water was always provided in the cages, and in

het weather was frequently drunk, though in the natural habitat it can seldom be

available.

The feeding habits of the animal in the wild have not vet been determined

by observation; most of the specimens handled had been kept alive for some days

pending transit, during which time they were necessarily fed upon an artificial

diet, so that a study of stomach contents could disclose nothing, and in ihe few

examples that were taken dead the material contained no recoguisable fragments.

It may safely be inferred, however, that it is normally grammunivorous aid

frugivorous rather than phytophagous. In trapping. it was noticed that under

stress of deprivation it readily lapses tuto carnivority, partially eaten specimens

having several times been found with the living in pitfalls which had not been

promptly emptied, and this trait was later confirmed in captivity, as mentioned

above. The small vegetation of its habitat is rich in species which fruit and seed

freely, such as Casuarina pusilla, Brachyloma cricotdes, Lepidosperina laterale,

Kunzea pomifera and Triedia spp., and there is no doult that these provide the

mainstay of its dict.

The amnmal is rapidly dehilitated by high temperatures, and most of the deaths

susiained in the captive series oceurred during hear waves in mid-summer.

In the wald, several ectoparasites occur, the chief of which is a Laclaps,; this

is very difficult to eradicate im captivity, though it may be kept in check by frequent

dusting with pyrethrum.; in moderate nuntbers it apparently works no detriment

to the hosts. “Phe animal has no characteristic smell,

REPRODUCTION AND DEVELOPMENT

Of the entire series of 69 examined, 33 are males, 33 females and three un-

determined; fully adults totalled 20, and in the remainder, subadults of medium

growth predominate markedly over earlier stages and nestlings; the latter having

been obtained by excavation of burrows and by breeding in captivity. The pitfall

method of trapping chiefly adopted precludes an adequate representation of the

more immature stages, since these are not independently active at night, and is

unable, therefore, to indicate accurately the prevalence of reproduction at any onc

time. Incidentally. it is noteworthy that of adults taken in pitfalls. females are

three times as numerous as males.

Sufficient evidence has been obtained, however, to show that the main natural

breeding season falls in autumn and early winter. The earliest new-born litters

216

observed were in the third week of May, but advanced nestlings have been found

in June also, and knowledge of the life cycle subsequently obtained indicates that

these must have been produced as early as the beginning of May, with mating

therefore in April. On the other hand, some young collected in November, must

by the same argument have been littered as late as mid-August. The apparent

absence of a natural breeding season in summer depends largely upon negative

evidence, all activities of the species being much more obscure in the hot weather.

However, the batches trapped in October and November contained no pregnant

females, and of the many females kept in captivity only one became pregnant dur-

ing the hat months. In captivity, males have been observed attempting inter-

course as early as the tenth week, but all pregnant females observed, both in the

wild and in captivity, have been fully adult.

In the number of embryos produced there is considerable variation, from four

to seven having been observed in wero; in the latter case five occupied the right

and two the left horn; superior development of the right horn has been observed

also in recently evacuated uteri m which the number of young was unknown.

Litters of as few as three and as many as six thriving nestlings have heen taken,

but the norma! complement seems to be four, as with most Pseudomyds, Whether

a single female may produce more than one litter in a season has not been

ascertained,

Testis enlargement in the male is restricted to a very short period, probably

only from March to April, Of 20 adult or advanced subadult males trapped

between May and November only one showed any scrotal prominence, and this

was a subadult. An interesting feature in the series of males reared in captivity

is the markedly superior gonad development of subadult as compared with fully

adult males. In the wild this has already been noted in some Central Australian

species.

Three litters of young have been successfully reared in captivity; two of these

were born in captivity of females pregnant when taken, while the third was

removed from a nest when about three weeks old. Two of the mothers with

normal-sized litters were assiduous in their attentions to the nestlings and, although

very gentle and permitting themselves to be touched and handled without resent-

ment, became much agitated when the young were removed. The third, with six

young, was overtaxed and apparently unable to nourish them all adequately, and

within a few days ejected two young from the nest. They were found stiff and

cold on the cage floor, but when restored to the nest quickly recovered, only to

be thrown out again the next night; they struggled on for seven days under this

nightly rejection before succumbing, and in general all nestlings observed have

shown great vitality. They adhere very firmly to the nipples of the dam, and when

startled into leaving the nest hurriedly she frequently dragged them with her over

the cage, but not as a routine matter as recorded for Contlurus, ete.

The females occasionally made a shrill chirruping bird-like call, and the young

a more feeble squeak, but both young and parents were less vocal than some other

local murids similarly kept and observed.

For the first three months the nestlings were weighed and examined weekly,

and the following condensed summary gives the main facts of their development

so observed ; the weights quoted are averaged for the members of the three litters:

At three days—Weight 3 grammes; eyes shut; dorsum haired nearly black;

belly nearly nude. pink and with sharp demarkation from dorsum,

At two weeks—5-3 grammes; cvat close, coarse and very dark; belly fur

developing fast; white to base.

217

At three weeks—7°0 grammes; head and body 50 mm; tail 38; pes 14°5;

manus 6°5, ear 6; eyes open; dorsal fur 9 mm. long, still dark and shaggy; belly

completely furred with the middle areas now dark-based; ears closely adpressed

to head; tail sparsely furred but already sparsely sprinkled with dark brown

dorsally.

At four weeks—9'0 grammes; dorsal fur more erect and the pale subterminal

band just appearing.

At five weeks—10°0 grammes ; dorsal coat erect and fluffy and showing much

of the basal slate colour and the pale subterminal band.

Al six weeks—-13 grammes ; time of weaning was not observed but the young

were now much abroad both day and night, and eating grain and other hard foods.

At seven weeks—14 grammes; moult begun.

From eight to fourteen qeeks-—Weights were: 14°5, 16, 16, 16°5, 17, 17, 19

grammes, respectively.

At fifteen weeks—Moult completed; most of the young were now heavier

than the parents, but still retained many signs of immaturity, especially in the head

and body length and in the ear, which was decidedly smaller, and in the thin fluffy

ungrizzled coat.

At twenty-three weeks Cone example )—Head and body 77 mm.; tail, 80;

pes 19-5; ear 15.

In the development of these nestlings an anomaly was met with in the marked

precocity of one example, which at an early stage was left (by a series of acci-

dents) the sole survivor of the original litter. At the fifteenth week this example

weighed 22:5 grammes, and at the eighteenth week had head and body 76 mm.,

pes 20, ear 16, outstripping in linear dimensions the young of full litters by five

weeks, The point is of some interest as affording a possible clue to the causation

of at least part of the apparently capricious variation in dimensions so frequent

in several Australian rats.

The growth changes were not followed up into adult life, but it seems unlikely

that the mean adult dimensions in nature could be attained in less than nine months,

and twelve months is more likely. Evidence derived from the duration of captivity

(which has exceeded two years in some cases) and the maturity of such examples

when taken, suggests a specific life-span of about four years.

EXTERNAL CHARACTERS

The series examined consists of 69 specimens. of which a large proportion

have been examined in the flesh before preservation. Twenty are fully adult, and

the rest form a developmental series which bridges the gap to the naked nestling

stage. Of the total, 25 have been kept under observation in captivity for periods

up to 30 months. There is little evidence of change in structural characters hav-

ing been effected in this way, but for reasons of orthodoxy the statements which

follow on the external characters of the species are drawn entirely from the

strictly feral material.

Bodily size small to medium, the head and body length averaging 85 mm. and

reaching 93 mm., and the live weight about 16 grammes. Build moderate ;

appendages slender and long. The relative head size is much as in such forms as

Ps. (Leggadina) hermannsburgensis; the ratio, head and body length: skull length,

nbout 1: 30'as in that species, but the fur contour has an enlarging effect. The

fur profile of the head is convex with a prominent erect tuft in the anterior nasal

region, due to an opposition ridge just behind the rhinarium. The eye rather

prominent with a diameter from canthus to canthus of 3°5 mm., approxi-

218

mately; well fringed with black lashes. Mysticial vibrissae very strongly

developed; the longest bristles about 35 mm.; the anterior members white, the

posterior black, and the intermediate (and longest) black with white tips. The

supraorbitals, 22 mm. long, and entirely black; genals weak or lacking. The ear

very large; length to 18 mm.; breadth across the trough of pinna to 9 mm. The

RNS ETOER of the ear exceeds that of the eremian minute and approaches that

of the less specialised species of Notontys; its length is about 20% of the head and

body length. The substance of the ear is thin and membranous, and pale except at

the extreme margin, where slight epidermal darkening takes place: in life it is a

delicate pink, as are all exposed areas of epidermis,

Manus, length to 8°5 mm., breadth transversely across palm from base of

second digit to 3-5 mm, and third digit 3 mm.; rather slender in general propor-

tions, but (as is frequently the case) appearing stowter in many subadults in which

the palmar structures are plumper and broader than in calloused adults, The

paim pale pink and unpigmented ; its central area markedly granular, the granu-

larity extending to the basal portion of the underside of the digits, where the

transverse ri idges are broken into rows of granules and are not continuous ag is

oe. The grooving of the digits is deep and prominent, aver: aging eight upon

the third digit. Claws rather stout. their free projection about sejetal to the apical

pads; moderately fringed, but the hairs not quite reaching the claw tip. Ulnar

carpal yibrissae large—reaching 7 mm. Palmar pads of moderate size and

development ; conspicuous more fron the granularity of the surrounding areas

than y their own relief, which is but moderate in adults ; the outlines of the pads

are well defined anteriorly but are sometimes indefinite posteriorly, where the

reliet is much lower. In a few subadults the pads are very strongly developed,

with their anterior portions lifted free of the palm, and their margins somewhat

angular, as in Leporillus. All pads smooth or very faintly striate.

The detailed shape and relative development of the pads is subject to much

variation. “The carpals are always much larger (though variably so) than the

imterdigitals and are relatively narrow. The outer is longer than the inner, and

most frequently has at least twice its area; the inner has a well-marked accessory

fold adjoining the pollux. The first @ interdigital is usually round, but may be

subtriangular or bell-shaped ; the second or median interdigital i is rather constantly

pyriform, and the third which is shaped (and varies) like the first, has usuall y

either a small satellite at its postero- eternal corner, or a low heel formed by the

conjunction of two smaller satellites; quite frequently . however, both these

accessories are absent. In point of relative size, there is a marked tendency for

the median interdigital to be dominant and the laterals subequal ; when the laterals

depart from subequality, 3 > 1 more often than 1 > 3. Subequality of all three

interdigitals is rare, but is more frequent in subadults than adults,

Variation of all the pads, both carpals and interdigitals, is to a large extent

truly individual, and most of the variants may be found in nestlings of 17 days’

growth. While these differences are confusing when a few examples only are

compared, systematic examination of the w hole series leaves no det that the

arrangement most characteristic of the Specitts ist outer carpal > inner carpal >

second interdigital > third interdigital = first interdigital.

Pes-—Length to 22°5 mm.. breadth transversely across the sole from the base

at first digit, to 3°5 mm., and the third digit to 5 mm. General form decidedly

long and slender, the length averaging 25% of the head and body and the

on the pollical side of the palm, is so nunibered in descriptions and formulae, but it is

probably homologous with the second interdigital of the primitive pentadactvle manus.

219

length -+ breadth ratio, ca. 7°0. The width of the sole maintained posteriorly, not

tapering markedly to heel which does not project conspicuously beyond the

malleoli. The posterior plantar surface is nearly simooth or with the usual trans-

verse crease lines, but the interdigital portion. is characteristically verrucose,

as in the manus, The undersurface of the digits well grooved, the third digit

carrying ten grooves and the ridges basally broken into rows of granules as in the

manus. In some nestlings the undersurface of the digits and the interdigital basin

carry scattered hairs, Nails stout; their projection and fringing as in the manus.

Pads of moderate size and prominence; more distinctly striate than in the

manus and remarkably constant in general shape and proportion, and thereby in

sharp contrast to the manus. ‘The inner metatarsal, narrow and much elongated

but with its posterior termination low and vague; it is commonly three to four

times the length of the outer metatarsal which is small and rounded or oval; in

two examples only is there a departure from this condition, and in these the meta-

iarsals are subequal. he first interdigital large and bell-shaped, the second

broadly pyriform or oval and usually differing conspicuously trom the third which

+s smaller and of narrower shape, and the fourth broadly oval or bell-shaped, rarely

with a conjoined satellite, and usually subequal or slightly larger than interdigital

one,

Fourth jnterdigital = first interdigital >

-al > inner metatarsal (in area} > outer meta-

The pad formula therefore

second interdigital > third interdig

tarsal.

The tail is almost always longer than the head and body, averaging 118%

in adults and 114% in subadults; there are, however, one or two cases of sub-

equality in the feral series, and in the captive series tails shorter than the head

and body are not uncommon; there is a suspicion, however, that such cases are

due to mutilations which have healed without obvious defect. The tail is slender

and evenly tapering and capable of considerable flexure in life. The tip is well

covered with the steadily lengthening tail hairs which exceed it by 3 mm.; there

is no exposed calloused knob. Scale counts are rather variable, averaging mid-

dorsally ca, 19 per. centimetre.

Testes relatively small and never greatly swollen; scrotum lightly furred

white, and its epidermis unpigmented.

Mamimac—Posterior 9 mm. from clitoris; anterior 9 mm, front posterior,

The eulva is usually completely occluded in virgin females, and a similar con-

dition may develop in adult females after parturition, if they are denied access

of the male. {n two cases observed in captivity, it was found that 21 weeks after

the birth of litters which were reared in the absence of the male parent, the vulva

was almost completely sealed externally by what appeared to be a considerable

tissue connection between the labiae.

PELAGE

The original description, which was founded on 14 living or just dead

examples holds good with little modification for the whole series, but the addi-

tional material permits of some amplification of the first account,

In the limited area from which specimens have been so far obtained the

species proves to be one of very constant pelage. Sexual and seasonal variation

is scarcely demonstrable, age variations are only marked at early growth stages,

and such differences as do occur, therefore, may be regarded as of individual

origin and varying incidence of the moult. About 5% of the series are slightly

warmer and less glaucus in tone than the type series described 5 in the coldest blue-

erey examples, the colour of the subterminal zone of the fur is near Ridgway’s

“Tilleul Buff? and the tips of the guard hairs are cold black, resulting ina general

220

dorsal colour near ‘Mouse Grey”; in the warmer coloured coats the subtermina!

zone is near “Vinaceous Buff’ and the guard hairs terminate in brownish-black.

The ventral fur at base is normally plumbeous throughout, but in one or two

examples white-based fur occurs on gulo-sternal and abdominal areas. The ear,

when furred grey-brown as described originally, is moderately well contrasted with

the dorsal coat ; sometimes, however, the ear back is haired with a grizzle of near

black and silver, and is then less so. There is in a large proportion of examples

a supra calcaneal darkening (formerly overlooked) caused by a grizzling of the

white hairs of the lower leg with black or blackish-brown; the effect is usually

slight, however, and never forms a prominent marking. The darkening of the

dorsum of the tail is very variable; in a few examples it is sufficiently marked i

attain a fairly sharp contrast with the whitish sides and lower surface, but usually

takes the form of a sparse grizzling of blackish hairs along a narrow dorsal strip

extending from, two-thirds to three-quarters of its length; the pencilling ceases

very abruptly and the terminal one-third to one-quarter is pure white on all sur-

faces. While the darkest tails are all of adult or aged examples, white tails are

less characteristic of immaturity than was thought, and most examples of half-

growth show a noticeable pencilling of the dorsum.

The rearing of three litters in captivity enabled the following facts on the

early development of the pelage to be ascertained. Within three days of birth the

dorsum (which is already pigmented a deep slate) is sparsely haired with black

or near black, while the non-pigmented ventrum is pink and hairless and with

sharp demarcation. At two weeks the dorsal fur is dense enough to obscure the

skin and is close and coarse, while the belly fur which is entirely white is much

thinner, though developing fast. At three weeks the dorsal coat is 9 mm, long and

shaggy, the first lifting from the prone adpressed condition having begun and the

belly fur darkening at the base over the central parts of the area. Even at this

early stage (head and body 50 mm.) the coat is already bipilous, though the long

black contour hairs are much more numerous than the second pile. At four weeks

the second pile is much better developed and has a distinct though dull ashy middle

zone, a brownish tip and a short plumbeous basal zone. This condition leads on

by increase in amount and length of the second pile and increase in the proportion

of the basal blue zone, to the fluffy, erect, blue appearing pelage characteristic of

immaturity up to about the head and body 70 mm. stage. This immature pelage

is very similar in composition to that of adults, but is sparser, finer and more erect

and therefore with a greater exposure of the basal leaden zone; its guard hairs

are fewer and both piles are spun out to very attenuated tips, which in the main

pile are more frequently brown than in adults, while on flanks and rump a sprink-

ling of white tips occurs.

The first moult begins at about the seventh or eighth week and may not be

completed until the fifteenth; spreading downward from the nape its progress can

be readily followed by the pale line of demarcation caused by the more prominent

ashy subterminal zone of the new coat, as well as by its greater density and

grizzling.

In the wild, the adult pelage is evidently subject to heavy attrition, which has

the effect of breaking off the points of the black guard haits and of thinning out

the main pile, so that ultimately, in.adults, a partial return to the glaucus imma-

ture condition is effected. This is made good by a second annual moult, which is

well illustrated by one adult example in captivity (in November), in which the

entire dorsal epidermis is obscured by a dense carpet of the emerging ashy renewal

coat. Although this is the only example actually observed at the change, study

of the entire feral series shows that worn and_ thin pelages are to be found

221

together with rich recently renewed ones on the same dates both in winter and

summer, justifying the inference that the time of moult is governed by individual

rather than seasonal factors.

In captivity, quite marked changes are induced in the pelage even in one life

cycle. At five weeks captive litters are conspicuously darker and longer furred than

wild born ones at the same stage, and both distinctions are retained and accen-

tuated as growth continues. Six advanced subadults at the head and body 78 mm.

stage show much richer pelage than in any feral examples; the over-all length of

the coat (15 mm.) is about the same, but the proportion of guard hairs reaching

this length is greater and the main pile is 2 mm. longer and the general density

higher. Further, the basal plumbeous and terminal zones are darker and the sub-

terminal zone is more strongly contrasted and richer coloured.

Immersion in 80% alcohol for ten years has produced marked changes in

colouration in all but a few of the series so preserved, and a, large proportion of

these would scarcely be suspected of specific identity with field skins; in particular,

the characteristic glaucus tone of the natural pelage disappears very rapidly.

Flesh Dimensions (feral specimens only)

The following figures give, in millimetres, the range and mean values for

the dimensions of (1) a group of adults selected as free from any obvious imma-

turity in external characters, (2) a group of subadults of decidedly inferior bulk,

(3) a long-furred independent nestling, (4) a short-furred nestling of approxi-

mately 17 days’ growth.

1 2 3 4

Pr, oe

3 69 il¢ 99 é 9

Head and body - 86-80 (84) ; 93-80 (87) | 76-70 (71:5); 78-65 (68-5) 50 45

Tail - - =| 10897101) ; 113-90 (99-5) 96-72 (82) : 90-70 (78-5) 70 36

Pes: length - | 22-35-21 (21-5) =; 22+5-20 (21-0) 21-18-5 (19-5); = 20-18-5 (19-5) 18 13

Pes: breadth - —_— 3 353-0 (31) 3-5-3-0 (3-3); 3+5-3-0.(3+1) — | 2-8

Manus: length - — >; 8-0-8-0 (8-0) 8-5-8:0 (8-2); 8-0-7-5 (7-7) 765 6-0

Manus: breadth - — ; 3-5-3-0 (3-3) 3-0-2-8 (2-9); 3-0-2-8 (2-9) 2-2 2.2

Ear: length - | 18-5-16 (17) ‘ 18-16 (17) 17—15 (15-5); 17-13 -5 (15) 14 6

Rhinarium to eye 13-13 (13) ¢ 14-11 (12) 12-10 (11) 11-5-9 (10-0) = 1

Eye to ear - - 12-10 (11) ; 11~9 (10) 11-8-5 (9) 4 10-8 (9-0) me 6

16-12:5'(13+8); 18-5-18 (18) X28 (8-5) : 8-7 (7-5) == pee

Weight (in grms.)

The dimensions quoted for the species in the original description are well

within the range of the adult group, but slightly below the mean values and.

decidedly below the maxima as now ascertained. The general level of variation

in these selected groups of adults and subadults is actually higher in most items

than in the eremian hermannsburgensis; but the individual and capricious varia-

tio, involving major anomalies in development as shown by the concurrence of

maxima and minima in the same example, such as occurs in several series of

Central Australian rats recently reviewed, is absent. Here the occurrence of

maxima for pes, ear and tail is always associated with a high head and body value-

and high body weight, and conversely immaturity can nearly always be detected

by low values for ear and tail. The earsize is an especially useful first criterion

of immaturity ; even advanced subadults may usually be readily recognised by the:

smaller area of the pinna,

@) I have demonstrated a similar state of things in the rock wallaby, Petrogale

penicillata herberti. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 55, (1931), 84

222

Sexual differentiation in dimensions is very; slight and, in adults, of doubtful

significance ; examination of the subadult series, however, seems to suggest that

at some intermediate stages the male develops more rapidly than the female; but

the data is insufficient to establish this.

The extraordinarily rapid development of appendages at the fourth or fifth

week of life, while the head and body length remains almost constant, is well

shown by a comparison of the two nestlings; in the more advanced (4), at the

stage of early erect pelage, when the head and body length is still only 59% of the

adult average, the pes is already 86%, the ear 82%, and the tail 70%, of their

final values.

The effect of captivity upon the linear dimensions of wild born examples is

slight, the only demonstrable change being a failure to attain the normal mean ear

length of feral examples; young reared entirely in captivity may, as already indi-

cated, attain much greater body weight, but whether their ultimate linear measure-

ments are similarly increased is uncertain, no captive born example having yet

reached complete maturity.

SKULL CHARACTERS

A series of 22 skulls has been examined, all removed from animals of known

external characters, dimensions and history; half of them are derived from animals

kept in captivity for varying periods, but as. with external characters, the follow-

ing account is based on the feral series alone.

The salient features of the skull in a general view, are its lengthened nasal

region, over-all narrowness, and very fragile zygomata. The ossification is light.

The general dorsal aspect is fairly constant throughout the series, but there are one

or two examples in which an arrested development of the anterior root of the

zygoma accentuates the leptoprosopic character, and one such anomaly (the only

fully adult example available at the time) was responsible in the original descrip-

tion for the phrase “very peculiar” as applied to its shape; this is now seen to be

somewhat over-stated for the series as a whole. Immature skulls, with shortened

facial region, are quite similar in general dorsal appearance to the more bulbous

forms of hermannsburgensts.

Muzzle region as originally given; the point contact with the frontals is

variably developed, but usually the termini take the form of characteristic prongs,

distinctly separated and penetrating the labyrinth of the fronto-nasal suture. The

width of the nasals increases fairly evenly towards a distal maximum, with a

slight constriction at the beginning of the terminal third. The maxillary fossae

are unusually well developed in old skulls, and the opening of the bursa is con-

spicuous dorsally, The anteorbital fossa rather large in adults much smaller in

immature skulls—the external wall bent strongly inwards. The zygomatic outline

varies considerably; in the majority the anterior width is not markedly less than

the posterior, and the outline tends to parallelism or even slight concavity, with

smooth angles both before and behind; in others, however, the arches are more

prominently thrown out from the skull and decidedly wider posteriorly. In the

interorbital constriction variation in width is largely individual and not strongly

influenced by age; the supraorbital edges, however, show the customary bevelling

with advancing development. Lacrymals narrow; their free margin often irregu-

lar. Braincase of the suddenly expanded type, and fairly constant in development

and shape. interparietal of moderate size; not spanning the braincase, and its

shape crudely rectangular rather than subtriangular and with its interior margin

often irregular.

In lateral view, the upper profile is low and little arched and the occiput

smoothly rounded, without angularity at the lambda. The margin of the zygo-

223

matic plate slopes forwards as stated, but the angle of slope varies considerably,

in general being steeper in adults than in young skulls; the condition under all

three of these heads very similar to what may be seen in waite!, hermannsbur-

yensis and patrius. The posterior palate is conspicuously wide and flat; the

anterior palatine foramina also large, both long and widely open, tapering towards

the incisors and in adults with the maximum width nearly always posterior to the

midpoint ; posteriorly the foramina always reach beyond the anterior margin of

M' and sometimes reach the lingual cusp of the first lamina. The mesopterygoid

fossa large and wide open; in adults the walls are parallel or nearly so, but in

young skulls the maximum width is at the palatal margin. The parapterygoid

variable; in fully adults the fossa is distinctly developed with a stinken floor and

raised ectopterygoid margin (as in the original description) ; in others (usually

subadult) the floor is flat and much less enclosed; the fenestration of the floor

of the parapterygoid fossa is remarkably variable also. Bulla decidedly small for

the size of the skull and little inflated; its age change, as described under

hermannsburgensts,

Dentition weak; upper incisors variably ophisthodont; upper molar rows

straight and nearly parallel; gradation in size from M!-M* moderate, as in

Pseudonvys s. str.

General structure of molar crowns much as in Nofomys, the buccal cusp of

the first lamina of M! obsolete and much reduced on the others. Contrary to the

original description, the posterior displacement of the lingual cusp of the first

lamina of M1, is now seen with more suitable material, to be considerable and the

obliquity of this lamina is equal to that of hermannsburgensis and patrius of the

group Legyadina. There are no supplementary cusps on either upper or lower

molars. Mandible weak. Sexual variation inappreciable.

Skull Dimensions

The following figures give, in millimetres, the skull dimensions of (1) four

adult males all showing appreciable wear on the first lamina of M'*, and extracted

from animals free from any immaturity in external characters, (2) three adult

females in the same age group, (3) one subadult female of head and body length

70 mm.

1 2 3

SSS pica pees —povennel A caaaneaNGR i

Greatest length - - - - | 26°8-25+5 (25-9) ; 26°8-25-0(26-0) ; 23+2

Basal length - - “| -| 22-1-20-6 (21-4) ; 22-4-20-0(20°8) 3 18-5

Greatest Zygomatic breadth +f 12-3-11-8 (12-1) ; 12-4-11-7 (12-1) ; 11-4

Braincase: breadth - ~ -} 1d-7-11-5 (11-6) 3) 12*1-11-4 (11-7) 5 11-2

Interorbital breadth - - - 4-0-3-7 (3+9) é 4-0-3-7 (3-9) : 3°9

Nasals: length - “ ~ -| 10-0-9-0 (9-5) > 105-88 (9-7) ; 8-2

Nasals: greatest breadth - - 2-5+2-3 (2-5) 5 2+5-2-4 (2-4) * 2-1

Palatal length - - ~ - | 13-7-13-0 (13-3) ; 13-9-12-6 (12+3) ; 11-7

Palatilar length - - - | 12-2-11-9 (12-1); 12-5-11-0(11+7) ; 10-3

Ant, Palatine Foramina length - 6+0-5-0 (5-5) 5 5-9-5-0 (5-4) . 5-0

Ant. Palatine Foramina breadth 1-7-1-5 (1-6) Y 1-8-1-7 (1-8) 4 1-4

Bullae: length - - z - 3+7-3-5 (3-6) ; 3-7-3:5 (3-6) 3 3+2

Upper molars - - - - 3:9-3+6 (3:7) : 3°9-3-6 (3-8) 7 39

In the feral series the agreement in dimensions between examples of the same

basal length is close, and these, in turn, are roughly proportional to body size, the

variation in this latter group being about 5% in the case of the head and body:

skull length, ratio. In the captive series, although little or no structural change

can be detected, anomalies in both the above groups of metrical relationships are

224

more marked. Molar wear in both moieties of the series is variable, and if un-

supported by other evidence is unsatisfactory as a criterion of age.

RELATIONSHIPS

Material for direct and detailed comparison with glaucus and albocinereus

(apparently the nearest allies of the present species) is still lacking, so that the

recorded dimensions remain the chief criteria by which the identities of the three

species may be judged. The slight modification to the original figures for apodc-

moides, necessitated by examination of the new scries, does not appreciably alter

the previous assessment of its position.

The flesh dimensions of glaucus may now be completely merged in those of

apodemotdes, but the figures for the skull of the former are all higher except that

of the anterior palatine foramina, which is slightly below the mean for

apodemotdes.

With respect to albocinerens of Western Australia, the effect of the new data

is to close the gap metrically between apodemioides and the typical albocinereus.

so that the South Australian animal is intermediate between the two described

varieties of the latter. A large anterior palatine foramen seems characteristic of

apodemoides; both the maximum length (6°0) and the mean (5°4), exceeding

that of the decidedly larger albocinerens typicus skull.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES XII TO XV

PLATE XII

A typical habitat of Pscudomys (Gyonws) apodemoides: a general westerly view from

a ridge near the eastern boundary of the Hundred of Coombe, South Australia.

PLatE XII1

Three views of adult examples of Pscudomys (Gyomys) apodemoides, in captivity.

(x 0-75 ca. ) (The tail shortening in the upper example is traumatic.)

PLaTE XIV

A, B, C. Dorsal aspeets of the skull of Pseudemys (Gronys) apodemoides

shown by an immature g example of head and body Jength 67 mm., by an average

adult g, and by a very aged ¢, respectively, and illustrating the progressive age changes

in the cranial and facial regions. (x2-8, 2-6, 2-4.) D, Palatal aspect of the skull of

the average adult @ figured at B. (x 2-6.) KE, Lateral aspect of the same. (x 2:6.)

Plate XV

A, B, free margin of the zygomatic plate in an immature g example of head and

body length 67 mm., and in an aged 9, respectively, showing age changes in this feature.

(x 9-0 ca.). C, Unworn upper molars of the right side in an aged @ (x9-0ca.). D, Worn

upper molars of the right side in an aged 9 (x9-Oca.) FE, Worn upper molars of the

right side in a similarly aged example of Pseudomys (Leggyadina) patrins Thomas and Doll-

man. (x9-0Qca.) for comparison of the obliquity of the laminae with C and D. (The supple-

mentary cingular cusp has been deleted.) F, Right pes of an adult @ (x3-3ca.) G, Right

manus of an adult 9 (x4-0ca.), weak type. H, Ditto of another adult @ (x4-0ca.),

stout type.

Vol. 68, Plate XII

Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944

Trans.

sopromapodgn (sitmtot+) s\itopnosd JO yerrqey jeords} V

uossepuly “HCH Ay 010g

Vol. 68, Plate XIII

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944

Aytandeo ur sopromapodn (stuoty ) stiuopnasg JO SMILA

uosdyuly “HA Aq OVO

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate XIV

D — e

Skull characters of Pseudomys (Gyomys) apodemoides

Photo by H. H. Finlayson

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate XV

Skull characters, pes, and manus of Pseudomys (Gyomys) apodemoides

Photo by H. H. Finlayson

AUSTRALIAN CUMACEA NO.8

THE FAMILY BODOTRHIDAE

By HERBERT M. HALE, Director, South Australian Museum

Summary

Herein are recorded further new species, secured mainly by the Fisheries Division of the

Commonwealth Council for Scientific and Industrial Research in the shallow waters off eastern

Australia.

Travs. Re

225

AUSTRALIAN CUMACEA No. 8

THE FAMILY BODOTRIIDAE

By Herserr M. Hare, Director, South Australian Museum

[Read 10 August 1944]

Fig, 1-38

INTRODUCTION

Herein are recorded further new species, secured mainly by the Fisheries

Division of the Commonwealth Council for Scientific and Industrial Research in

the shallow waters off eastern Australia.

A satisfying natural classification of the Cumacea does not seem possible,

at least at present. The genera and the grouping of the genera are based largely

upon the loss or reduction of parts; this seems unavoidable in an Order embracing

forms which, on the whole, are unadventurous in their departures from a basic

uniformity. While the pleopods and the exopods of the peraeopods in their

number serve in part as generic indicators, the ultimate result of placing undue

emphasis upon these factors is exemplified in the classification proposed by

Stebbing in 1913, who, using them freely as criteria, separates a relatively large

number of families from the older ones, many containing only a few species.

Acceptance of this system does not seem to be justified, particularly as it is reason-

able to suspect that further loss convergences will be found to occur (see also

Ifansen, 1920, 3).

Family BODOTRITDAE

In a recent discussion of the species of Cyclaspis (Hale, 1944), that genus

was placed in the subfamily Bodotriinae, having the characters of the Bodotriidae

as formerly limited.

It has become increasingly evident that the family Vaunthomrpsoniidae, unless

possibly one restricts it to the type genus, is by no means easily separable from

the Bodotriidae and that probably the two families should be united (Hansen,

1895, 57: Calman, 1910, 616; Zimmer, 1913, 444, ete.). It is now submitted that

there is support for the division of the Bodotriids into two subfamilies, the Bodo-

triinae and Vaunthompsoniinae. limiting the former to those genera which com-

pletely Jack exopods on all peraeopods excepting the first. This again associates

[Teterocuma and Cumopsis with the Vaunthompsonia group of genera.

Other characters for possible subdivision of the family present themselves,

but the writer still feels that this would be premature.

As Bodotria is the oldest genus of the whole assembly and it is often held that

a family should take its name from the earliest described genus inchided in it,

the long quoted Bodotriidae is here retained although Sars’ Vaunthompsoniidae

has precedence of proposal.

Subfamily BODOTRUNAE

Genera: Bodotria Goodsir, 1828; [phinoe Bate, 1856; Cyclaspis Sars, 1865;

Stephanomma Sars, 1871; Eocuma Marcusen, 1894; Cyclaspoides Bonnier, 1896;

Zxvgosiphon Calman, 1907.

No trace of exopods on any but the first pair of peraeopods. There is more

often than not a reduction in number of the free thoracic somites and the endopod

of the uropod is often undivided.

uy. Sue. S.A. 63, (2), 30 November 1944

226

A two-jomted endopod is found in the uropod of /phinoe (where as far as

known it is constant), in Bodotria (where it is inconstant and in the single

species of Zygosiphon.

The second antenna of the female is in general more rudimentary than in the

Vaunthompsoniinae. The lamellae of the branchial apparatus are apparently never

digitiform and on the whole do not show the reduction in number which occurs in

Faunthompsonia and Bathycuma spp. (see Zimmer 1908, 165, ete.), and in

Gephyrocuma, although in Zvgosiphon they are few, particularly in the female

(fide Calman).

Iphinoe resembles Vaunthompsonia more than do the other genera, all of

which have characters never occurring in the Vaunthompsoniinae. Some slight

additional support for its association with the Bodotriinae is afforded by

[. pellucida sp. nov. which has abdominal articular pegs as in Cyclaspis.

Three of the genera, Cyclaspoides, Stephanomma and Zygosiphon, are

monotypic. The last-named is sharply differentiated by the wide separation

of its branchial siphons, Cyclaspoides by having only two of the pedigerous

somites free. Stephanomma appears, to be a Cyclaspis in which the fusion of the

pseudorostral suture, sometimes found in the highly calcified members of the last-

named genus, is very complete (Calman 1907, 14). The other four genera occur

in both | lemispheres and, as might be expected, are represented in Australian seas.

Genus Boporria Goodsir

Bodotria maculosa sp. nov.

Adult Male (South Australian form). Integument firm, moderately calcified

but not brittle; finely reticulate.

Carapace with dorsal edge scarcely arched, rugose; one-fourth of total length

of animal, depressed, about one-fifth as wide again as.depth, which is a little more

than half its length; median carina low; sides with a prominent longitudinal ridge.

below which is a less marked carina which curves up posteriorly to meet the main

ridge ; above the latter the carapace exhibits a coarse squamose-reticulate pattern-

ing formed by large, shallow pits; the lower lateral carina is emphasised by a line

of shallow pits immediately above it. Antennal notch deep and narrow, tooth

subacute. Pseudorostral lobes wide and truncate anteriorly and reaching apex of

ocular lobe, which is as wide as long with nine prominent yellowish lenses.

First pedigerous somite concealed; second about as long as fourth or fifth

but longer than third; on each somite there is a strong median carina, elevated

posteriorly on the third to fifth somites, and a prominent lateral carina formed by

the upper edge of a pronounced subquadrangular area on the lower half,

Pleon stout, the first five somites each with dorsal carina, and with faint

lateral ridge, which becomes successively less distinct.

Margins of thoracic appendages and uropods more or less serrate. First

antenna with first joint of peduncle stout, longer than rest of appendage ; second

joint longer and stouter than third; main flagellum stout, two-jointed, shorter

than third peduncular joint.

Rasis of third maxilliped half as long again as rest of limb and with apical

lobe rather wide; ischium unusually Jong, distinctly longer than merus or carpus

which are dilated apically; dactylus downbent in subchelate fashion.

First peraeopod stout, the carpus barely reaching to level of antennal tooth:

basis about half as long again as rest of limb, not produced apically; carpus a

little longer than merus, twice as Jong as the unusually short propodus and more

227

than three times as long as the dactylus, which is two-thirds as long as propodus ;

dactylus with a stout terminal spine as long as itself and two or three short setae.

Basis of second peraeopod barely longer than remaining joints together ;

merus longer than carpus, equal in length to dactylus and twice as long as pro-

podus; dactylus with no lateral spines. longer than the longest of its three terminal

spines, which is twice as long as the others.

Basis as long as remaining joints together in third legs, shorter in fourth and

fifth pairs; propodal seta not quite reaching apex of dactylus; a single carpal seta

(at base of which is an insignificant bristle) not reaching beyond middle of length

of dactylus,

Fig. 1

Bodotria maculosa. A, Side view of cephalothorax of type male of South Australian

form. B, Side view of type of New South Wales form. (Both x 40).

Peduncle of uropod one and three-fourths times as long as telsonic somite

and with a fringe of plumose hairs on whole length of inner margin; endopod

single-jointed, equal in length to telsonic somite, slightly longer than exopod, and

with eleven spines on inner margin and a long and a short spine on truncate apex ;

exopod with plumose hairs on inner margin and with a long and a short terminal

spine on truncate apex.

Colour yellow in alcohol, marked with numerous black spots (ground colour

orange during life).

Length, 4°2 mm.

Loc.~South Australia: Spencer Gulf, Memory Grove, 3 fath., 8 to 8.30 p.m.

(KK. Sheard, Feb, 1941), and Dangerous Reef, 4 fath., “Whiting bottom’? (type

loc., K. Sheard, Mar. 1941, 8 to 8.30 p.m.); and Stickney Island, 3 fath. (IK.

Sheard, Feb. 1944) ; St. Vincent Gulf, Corny Point, 2 fath., over sand (K. Sheard,

Feb. 1941, 8 to 8.30 p.m.). and Rapid Bay (E. Hanka, H. Cooper and A. Rau,

jan. 1944); Kangaroo Island, Antechamber Bay, 4 fath., 8 to 8.30 p.m. (K.

Sheard, April 1941). Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. C.2365.

228

The specimens, all males, were taken by submarine lights. The colour spots

vary in number and disposition, but the bright ground colour is of assistance in

sorting material.

The spines on the endopod of the uropod vary from nine to twelve.

Adult Male (New South Wales form). Differs from the above in the fol-

lowing characters. The size is smaller and the colour in alcohol is white with dark

spotting; the squamose pitting of the carapace is more pronounced. ‘he thoracic

appendages are slightly more slender with longer spines and setae. In the first

peraeopods the dactylus is not much shorter than the propodus and the main

terminal seta is longer than the dactylus. The longest dactylar spine of the

Reo SS —

Fig. 2

Bodotria maculesa, paratype male of South Australian form; ceph., cephalothorax

from above (x 20); ant. 1, first antenna (x 175): mxp. 3, third maxilliped (x 82):

prp. and urop., peracopods, and uropod with telsonic somite (x 82); terminal joints

of peraeopods (x 175). A, Terminal joints of peraeopods of New South Wales

form (x 175).

229

second peraeopods is longer than the propodus and dactylus together, and the main

carpal and the propodal seta of the last three pair of legs reach quite to the tip of

the dactylus (ci. 2 and 2A, all to same magnification ).

Length, 3°5 mm.

Smaller examples, 1-5 mm, to 1-9 mm., have the upper lateral carina of the

carapace strong but the lower less apparent, it being defined by the edges of a row

of pits which are less marked than in the adult. The rami of the uropods are

three-fourths as long as the peduncle.

Loc.—New South Wales: off Port Hacking, 50 metres on sand (type loc.),

and off Wata Mooli, 35 metres on sand (K. Sheard, June 1942, and “Cronulla”

Trawl Station 2, July 1943). Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No.

C2448.

B. maculosa resembles arenosa Goodsir, but is separated at a glance by the

posteriorly elevated dorsal carinae of the last three pedigerous somites, the wider

form, the relatively shorter peduncle of the uropods, etc.

B. pumilio Zimmer (1921, 119, fig. 4-7) is also similar in appearance but the

adult is smaller (2 to 2°25 mm.) and, according to Zimmer’s figure of the male, the

carinae of the last three pedigerous somites are not elevated posteriorly.

Genus Eocuma Marcusen

EocuMA AGRION Zimmer

Kocuma agrion Zimmer 1914, 176, fig. 1-2.

Zimmer’s specimens were taken at Fremantle (Perth), South-western Aus-

iralia. The species also occurs at Cronulla (Sydney) on the eastern coast (Hale

and Sheard, submarine light, 8 feet, September 1942 and January 1944),

In life the colour is yellowish, the pleon being semi-transparent, and the deep

pitting of the carapace is conspictious, The uropods are held wide apart; the

rami of each are also spread to form a wide V, the exopod directed upwards and

the endopod downwards. The pleon is very flexible.

These specimens agree with the original description excepting that the size

is larger and the tiny second peracopods have not the five joints (apart from coxa)

shown in Zimmer’s small fig. 2d. In both sexes they consist of basis plus two

other joints, each of which is about the same length as the basis; there are two

unequal terminal setae, one being longer than any of the aforementioned three

joints.

Zimmer describes the female of this curious species in detail and briefly men-

tions a damaged male.

Adult Male. Integument thin, calcitied and brittle. Pitting varying on pleon

but always distinct on carapace.

Carapace plus the fused pedigerous somite fully one-fourth of total length;

depressed, and with its depth less than half length; cornua larger than in female;

antennal notch widely open and augle rounded. Ocular lobe much wider than

long, slightly constricted at base ; corneal lenses not darkly pigmented; there is a

large tumid central lens and two on each side. Pseudorostrum shorter than in

female; there is a tubercle alongside a pit at the termination of each pseudo-

rostral suture.

Free pedigerous somites depressed, wider than in female (see figures).

The pleon is much stouter than in the female; the telsonic somite has two

median dorsal conical projections (the hinder one the larger) and is subtruncate

posteriorly.

230

The first antenna has the third peduncular joint longer than second and half

as long as first, which is expanded in distal half; the short flagellum is four-

jointed, the accessory lash single-jointed.

There are about 17 closely packed. long lamellae in the branchial apparatus.

Third maxilliped much as in female.

First peraeopod with basis nearly one-third as long again as rest of limb.

Fig. 3

Eocuma agrion, male, from the side and (ceph.) cephalothorax from above (x 18);

c. pace, anterior portion of carapace from above (x 30).

Fig. 4

Eocuma agrion; ant. 1, first antenna (x 160; flagella x 320); uixp. 3, third maxilliped

(x 70); 1, 2 and 3, first to third pedigerous somites (x54); prp. 2, second peraeopod

(x 320); prp. 4, terminal joints of fourth peraeopod (x 160).

231

Third to fifth peraeopod with one stout carpal seta which, with that of pro-

podus, reaches to the level of the tip of the slender dactylus.

Peduncle of uropod as deep as telsonic somite and less than one-third as

long as rami.

Length, 6 mm. to 8 mm.

Genus Iputnor Bate

Iphinoe pellucida sp. nov.

Ovigerous female, Integument rather thin, although lightly calcified, with

faint pitting.

Carapace with dorsal edge scarcely arched, with a slight angle between ocular

lobe and the distinct pseudorostrum; one-fourth of total length of animal, and

with depth about two-thirds its length and about equal to greatest breadth; sub-

triangular as seen from above, the sides evenly rounded; a very fine though

Fig. 5

Iphinoe pellucida, allotype adult male, and paratypes ovigerous female and young

male, from the side (x 27); ceph., cephalothorax of ovigerous female from above

(x 27): urop., uropod of adult male (x 67).

distinct dorsal carina; an indistinct depression on each side of anterior portion of

median carina. Antennal notch wide and shallow ; antennal tooth obtuse. Pseudo-

rostral lobes meeting in front of ocular lobe for a distance equal to length of latter

(about one-tenth of carapace). Ocular lobe as wide as long, with seven colour-

less lenses, the median one not. sharply defined.

Five pedigerous somites exposed, the first short, but visible for whole of

depth; second somite longer than third, fourth or fifth; all somites with a fine

median carina.

232

Pleon with fine median carina on each somite including telson; first to fifth

with distinct lateral articular pegs.

First antennae with basal joint almost as long as remaining joints together;

second and third subequal in length, each as long as the two-jointed flagellum.

Basis of third maxilliped nearly twice as long as rest of limb, with outer lobe

long and triangular; merus, carpus and propodus dilated.

lirst peraeopod with carpus attaining level of antennal tooth; basis a little

longer than remaining joints together; carpus and propodus subequal in length,

vach nearly twice as long as dactylus, which is longer than the longest of its half-

dozen terminal setae.

Basis of second peraeopods longer than rest of limb; merus as long as carpus

and propodus together and barely longer than dactylus; the last-named has a stout

terminal spme almost as long as itself, two short. flanking spines, and a short

spine on each side at middle of length. Tossorial legs sparsely armed, with

propedal and carpal setae not reaching to apex of dactylus; one stout seta plus a

very short one on carpus.

Peduncle of uropod slender, with closed serrations on inver edge; more than

talf as long again, as the exopod; endopod a little longer than exopod, distinctly

wo-jointed, the first segment almost three times as long as the second, serrate and

armed with four stout spines on inner edge; second segment serrate on inner edge

and with a long and a short terminal spine; exopod with three spines at apex, the

widdile much the longest, and half the length of the second segment.

Colour: milky, translucent with a sooty band across anterior portion of

carapace,

Length, 4-66 mm.

Adut Male, Differs trom the female in the narrower carapace and pediger-

ous sonutes and the deeper pleon. The first pedigerous somite is less exposed;

mner margin of peduncle of uropods with serrations rather more pronounced

and with two series of spines in:posterior half, the upper short, at right angles

to margin, the others oblique and serrate; first joint of endopod with about ten

spines on inner edge and second with minute inner spines and two unequal

terminal spines; exopod with three distal spines as in female (the inner is really

subdistal) and a few plumose setate on inner margin.

Length, 4°6 min,

Young Male. The juvenile mate illustrated has tiny serrations on the dorsal

erest Of the carapace behind the ocular lobe and the first pedigerous somite is

almost completely concealed. Differs otherwise in usual immature characters—

uropods relatively a little wider, ete.

Loc—Tasmania: off Babel Island, 0-50 metres (“Warreew’ Station 29.

1939). New South Wales: stomach of Morwong or Jackass Fish (Daciylo-

pearus macropterus) (A. C. Simpson, July 1939); off Wata Mooli, 70 metres

(“Cronulla” Traw! Station 4, July 1943); off iden, 30 metres, trawled on coarse

sand CK. Sheard, October 1943); four miles east of Port Hacking, 80 metres on

mud (K. Sheard, trawled, May 1944); Ulladulla, 75 metres (type loc., KK. Sheard,

trawled, June 1944). Types in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. C€.2539

and 2540.

A large number of specimens is available. The pigmentation of the anterior

part of the carapace, although more extensive in some examples than in others,

is a very characteristic feature; there is usually also pigmentation at the lower

cdge of the first five pleon somites. The colouration, shape, and extended pleon

233

of preserved maicrial render it easy of recognition amongst a mass of small

Crustacea.

Some ovigerous females are over 5 mm. in length, others smaller than the

iype. The paratype female in fig. 5 is 4 mm. in length, and young from the

marsupium are 0-8 mm. in length.

Lateral articular pegs are present on the pleon as in most if not all of the

species of Cyclaspis—indeed, but for two characters, the suppression of the

ischium of the second legs and the two-jointed endopod of the uropod, /. pellucida

would be referable to that genus.

ant. 1

Fig. 6

Iphinoe pellucida, paratype ovigerous female; ant. 1, first antenna; mxp. 3, prp. and

urop., third maxilliped, peraeopods and uropod (x 82: terminal joints, x 350).

Although the general facies is very different, the only concise characters

separating Iphinoe from Bodotria seem to be the complete absence of lateral

carinae on the compressed carapace and the rather prominent pseudorostrum,

Like crassipes Hansen, pellucida has the first joint of the endopod of the

uropod much longer than the second; it is readily separated by the different pro-

portions of the first pair of peraepods and other features.

Subfamily VAUNTHOMPSONUNAE

Exopods on at least the first three pairs of peraeopods,

Always five pedigerous somites are exposed and the endopod of the uropod

is two-jointed. The second artenna of the female is often 3-jointed, and in most

genera the terminal, more or less conical, joint is distinctly separated off.

Key to GENERA OF SUBFAMILY VAUNTHOMPSONIINAE

1 Basis of third maxilliped greatly expanded interiorly. First peraeopods with

joints curiously expanded __.... es 0 ae ati i a: ae _

Basis of third maxilliped not expanded interiorly, First peraeopods not so

modified. ae de hes Sa x :

“

234

Pleon unusually short, never more than two-thirds as long as cephalothorax.

First antenna strongly geniculate, with joints of peduncle subglobose,

Gephyracuma Hale

Pleon not unusually short, at least as long as cephalothorax. Virst antenna not

strongly geniculate, and joints not at all globose Be fe ide

3 ‘Pelsonic somite subtruncate, scarcely produced posteriorly. Basis of third

maxilliped with large inner distal lobe and basis of first peraeopod with no

distal lobe _ . . bob .Zenocumia gen, nov.

Telsonic somite well pedulad Apstariatiy, Basis of third maxilliped with no

inner distal lobe and basis of first peraeopod with distal lobe. Pomacuma gen. nov.

4 Second peracopod with a distal brush of setae on propodus and dactylus, but no

spines. Fourth peraeopod of female with small exopod ... |... Leptocuma Sars.

Second peraeopod without brushes of setae on terminal joints, but with spines

on at least dactylus. Fourth peraeopod of female without exopod 3

5 Dorsal plate of telsonic somite subtruncate posteriorly and not at all produced

between hases of uropods F we: sé} Rs Ch su es,

Dorsal plate of telsonic somite rounded or somewhat angular posteriorly and

produced between bases of uropods Ae wt vas < a Ut

Dorsal plate of telsonic somite truncate uoubevidrty: Endopod of pleopods with

narrow external process. [External distal portion of basis of third maxilliped not

produced and bearing about five stout plumose setae or ... Cumopsis Sars.

Dorsal plate of telsonic somite excavated posteriorly . Endopod of pleopods with-

out external process. External distal portion of basis of third maxilliped pro-

duced as a prominent lobe capped with two stout plumose setae.

ffeterocuma Miers

7 Third maxilliped with external distal portion of basis not at all, or not strongly,

produced and with ischium short (much wider than long); merus much longer

than ischium but shorter than carpus Age st aw. Faunthompsonia Bate

Third maxilliped with external distal dothibu, of basis prominently produced and

with ischium at least as long as wide, subequal in length to merus and carpus... 8

& Eye present. Pseudorostral lobes not reaching beyond ocular lobe ite 9

Eye absent. Pseudorostral lobes reaching forward and beyond level of front of

ocular lobe we re i om 4454 sty we TG

9 Fourth peraeopod of rate with piatisied cds she a. Glyphocuma gen. nov.

Fourth peraeopod of male without exopod .... sess ... Synpedonma Stebbing

10 Pseudorostral lobes meeting in front of ocular lobe. ‘Telsonic portion of last

pleon somite much shorter than rest of somite .... 2439 .. Bathycuna Hansen

Pseudorostral lobes not meeting in front of ocular lobe. Telsonic portion of last

pleon somite as long as rest of somite .... the ee .. Gaussticuma Zinmer

The Australian species which have come to hand are of considerable interest.

Although investigation of our waters is by no means comprehensive as yet, it is

evident that this subfamily is well represented but does not equal the Bodotrtinae

in number of species and individuals because of the ever present Cyclaspis, which

is the dominant genus of the family, at least on sandy bottoms. It seems also that

Vaunthompsonia itself is rare and that the important elements group themselves

around three main types, represented by Syinpodomma Stebbing, Leptocuma Sars

and Gephyrocuma llale. The last of these comprise what might be termed the

“operculate” genera and are here dealt with first.

Tur OPERCULATE GENERA

In these the first pair of peraeopods can be folded to form the major part

“of an operculum which bridges the space between the infero-lateral folds of the

carapace, and closes the cavity of the latter from the exterior; these limbs and

the third maxillipeds also are curiously expanded and otherwise modified.

Zimmer (1921, 4) described a single young male, which he did not dissect,

af the first of such species from North-Western Australia, referring it temporarily

235

to Vaunthompsonia; what appears to be his species—australiae—is now available

from eastern Australia.

The present writer (Hale 1936, 412) subsequently proposed a genus,

Gephyrocuma, for the reception of a second operculate species, which possesses

first legs very much as in Zimmet’s form (excepting that the basis lacks a distal

lobe) but which has the third maxilliped very different, the basis of that appendage

being not only more widened interiorly, but at the anterior end sweeping forward

and inward to form a broad, truncate lobe. Another species of this genus is

described herein.

There is also before me a large species related to the small Gephyrocuma and

with similar third maxilliped but with other differences warranting generic separa-

tion; for this a new genus, Zenocnia, is erected. A further species is accommo-

dated, with Zimmer’s australiar, ina third genus, Pomaciuima nov.

The basis of the third maxilliped and first peraeopod is widened and more or

less twisted, or flanged, in all three genera. In the first peraeopod the ischium is

in the form of a rounded lobe with an exterior excavation, The articulations

between ischium, merus, carpus and propodus allow for a complete folding of the

appendage (Zimmer refers to it as subchelate). The inner portions of the carpus

and, to a lesser extent, the propodus, are dilated, and in the carpus lamellate. The

proximal portion of the dactylus is swollen on the upper or outer face. There is

a dense distal brush of long plumose setae on the inner side of the propodus and

on that of the dactylus, while there is a row of plumose setae on the carpus.

The development of plumes of setae on the terminal joints of the first legs is

by no means unique in the Cumacea, although the operculate genera are unusually

well endowed. The “grasping motions” of Gephyrocuma pala (Hale 1943, 341)

suggest that the algal debris found in the stomach and massed around the mouth

may be collected in the same way as is the food of Porrellamid crabs and non-

parasitic Cirripedia. It should be mentioned that amongst smaller material found

beneath the maxillipeds of Pomacuma is a grain of sand 0-25 mm. in diameter.

The operculum is differently formed in each of the genera.

A female example of Zenocuma, with the operculum in position (see fig. 7,

A-D) has the joints of the first peraeopods and third maxillipeds in the following

relative positions.

The basis joints of the third maxillipeds meet completely in the midline, and

form a vault or bridge in the form of a half-cylinder, tapering to the rear and open

at the anterior end. The inner portions of the basis and ischium of the first

peracopods overlap the outer edges of the maxillipedal vault; the lamellate inner

portions of the carpal joints overlie the inner edges of the propodi; the outer

edges of basis, merus and carpus lie against the infero-lateral folds of the cara-

pace; the rounded inner proximal end of each carpus fits into the scooped outer

face of the lobe of the ischium, The outer portion of each basis of the first

peraeopods is flanged, so that when it lies against the infero-lateral fold of the

carapace a narrow ventral gutter results, tapering towards the front; the exopod

of this limb, together with that of the third maxilliped, lies in and fills this gutter,

the plumose setae being folded together like the hairs of a wet camel-hair brush.

(In the figures the exopods are not shown in this position.)

The propodi of the first peracopods are placed together but are actually in

contact only towards each end, a slight curvature of the joints leaving a narrow

gap through which the first antennae may protrude (fig. 7, B and C).

In Gephyrocuma the relationship of third maxillipeds to first peraeopods is

much as in Zenocuma but the proximal thirds of the propodi of the first legs

236

curve against the peduncles of the first antennae which here are stout, swollen and

geniculate, filling the gaps below the pseudorostral lobes (fig. 7, IF), the flagella

being thrust beneath the overhanging portions of the latter.

With the operculum in operation in both Zenocuma and Gephyrocuma, the

dactylus with its setae, and the propodal setae (folded together like a fan) are

all housed inside the maxillipedal vault, the anterior opening of which is plugged

by the swollen distal ends of the propodi; the plumose geniculate palp of the third

maxilliped is also covered by the inner lobe of the basis of that appendage.

ant zx,

carpus prp. 1.

propodus prp, I,

merus prp. I.

seve, ischium prp. i.

ant.

propodus prp, I,

carpus prp. I, ot

merus prp. f.

basis ischium prp. I.

mxp, 3

antz

basis prp. I. carpus prp, 1.

Za “4 propodus prp, I,

merus prp, r.

basis mxp, 3, ischium prop, r,

basis prp. x.

c E

Fig. 7

Letociwma rugosa, paratype iemale; A, B and ©. carapace and appendages from

side, front and below: in C, the body is tilted slightly upwards (x 26); D, oblique

fromtal view, below ocular lobe (x45). E. Carapace and appendages of

Cephyrocuma pala fram the front (x 45).

As stated above, the basis of the first peraeopod of Pomacuima differs from

the other two genera in possessing a distal lobe, but that of the third maxilliped,

though a good deal widened interiorly, lacks such lobe. In this: genus the basis

joints of the first legs meet intimately in the mid-line of the body for their whole

length when the limbs are folded; they are closely applied to, and completely

conceal, the shorter third maxilliped basis joints and project beyond them. Here

the distal lobe of the basis of the first peraeopod plays the same part as the maxilli-

pedal lobe of the other genera, the anterior end of the propodus of the same

237

peraeopod fitting against it. As in Zenocuma and Gephyrocuma the exopods of

the third maxillipeds and first peraeopod fit into a gutter between the basis joints

of the last-named and the infero-lateral folds of the carapace ; the palp of the third

maxilliped is far less geniculate than in the others and is extended well forward,

covered by the carpo-propodal part of the first legs.

Further modifications resulting from these arrangements will be noted im

the descriptions and fig. 8 to 16, The three genera could be placed in a

separate subfamily because of the character of the third and fourth thoracic

appendages but, as described above, these are not really identical in all of them.

Genus Zenocuma nov,

Feniale, Form superficially as in Vaunthompsonia but integument rather

highly calcified.

Carapace with pseudorostral lobes extending in advance of moderately large

ocular lobe but diverging so that their anterior ends are well separated; antennal

notch a closed, but not fused. st, Vive pedigerous somites exposed, the first

short. Pleon as long as cephalothorax; telsonic somite subtruncate posteriorly

the distal margin bisinuate and scarcely at all produced medianly.

First antenna normal, with accessory flagellum single-jeinted. Second

antenna relatively large, three-jointed, the two terminal joints subequal in length.

Mandible robust, with lacinia and molar process long and stovt.

Second maxilliped slender, not at all expanded.

Third maxilliped with well-developed exopod; basis with an external distal

lobe which almost reaches anterior end of merus and is furnished with a serics of

long, stout, plumose setae; interiorly the joint is greatly broadened, particularly

distally where it sweeps forward to form a truncate arched lobe which is ene-

fourth as wide as total leneth of joint; there is a series of a dozen or so broad,

tapering but short plumose setae on proximal half only of the inner margin.

Remaining joints forming a geniculate “palp”; ischium short; carpus expanded in

proximal half and propodus widened distally, the widened portions with series of

long plumose setae; dactylus with plumose setae. (It is not possible to show all

the setae in the drawings. )

First three pairs of peraeopods with well-developed exopods (peduncle and

jointed flagellum); fourth with rudimentary single-jointed exopod capped with

a few setae.

Basis of first peraeopod slightly expanded towards the anterior end which is

subtruncate and a little excavate, rounded externally; there is a stout spine near

distal end of inner margin and posterior to it, after an interval, is a row of other

spines interspersed with plumose setae; ischium with inner lobe; merus articulat-

ing at outside of ischium; carpus expanded proximally with series of plumose

setae.

Carpus of second peraeopod little shorter than merus.

Endopod of uropods two-jointed, the distal segment very short; inner margin

of exopod with slender “serrate” spines.

Genotype Zenocuine rugosa sp. Nov.

The male is as yet unknown. The female has the exopodal furniture just

as in the related Pomacuma gen nov., and Leptocuma, as recognised by the writer

for six Australian species. In both of these and in Gephyrocuma Hale (which

has essentially the same modification of third and fourth thoracic appendages as

Zenocuma) the exopods do not differ in the sexes and there are five pairs of

238

pleopods in the male; one would be inclined to believe that this is the case in

Zcnocuma also, but the assumption cannot be accepted with any degree of con-

fidence when Calman’s Leptocuma minor is borne in mind (see notes under

Leplocuma herein.)

ne species only is available.

Zenocuma rugosa sp. nov.

Female. Carapace as seen from the side little arched but rugose for whole

length, particularly in posterior half, owing to development of a median carina

which is wide and fused-tuberculate and flattens out posteriorly; a rather deep

dorsal excavation on each side of carina on anterior half, the lateral edges of

which are tuberculate and the interior of which has one or two low tubercles; the

Fig. 8

Zenocuma rugosa, paratype female; third niaxilliped and first peraecopod (x 19);

distal end of basis, etc. (x 50): ant. and prp., antennae and distal joints of second

and fourth peraeopods (x 50); urop., uropod, with fifth pleon and telsonic somites

(x19; distal ends of rami, x 62).

239

whole carapace is plump but compressed, less than half as long again as decp and

a little longer than pedigerous somites together. Pseudorostrum shorter than

ocular lobe; pseudorostral lobes subtriangular and narrowly rounded anteriorly

when viewed cither from above or from the side, just meeting at front of ocular

lobe, then flaring outwards so that they are widely divergent, the inner parts in

front of eye-lobe are bent downwards, producing a short longitudinal crease.

Ocular lobe bilobed in front, about as wide as long, blackish, with lenses obscure

but three can be discerned on each side and a central one still less defined.

Pedigerous somites two to five elevated on posterior halt when viewed from

side; first smooth; dorsum of second with a faint transverse elevation and a pair

of longitudinal carinae; back of third to fifth with a transverse ridge (that of

third with a pair of median tumidities) which joins a faint longitudinal dorso-

lateral ridge; on the fifth, and still less distinctly marked on fourth, is a lateral

ridge just below the dorso-lateral ; the second somite, as usual in the group, over-

laps the carapace in front and is in turn over-ridden by the anterior pleural

portions of the third; posterior pleural parts of third and fourth produced back-

wards in the form of a large rounded lobe.

Each of pleon somites one to five with on each side a dorso-lateral carina, two

lateral carinae and an infero-lateral ridge; these are least pronounced cn first and

second, then become conspicuous; there is in addition a median dorsal carina

which is not well defined until the third somite, thence to the fifth it is distinct ;

telsonic somite with median carina on proximal third only, also a dorso—lateral and

a lateral ridge on each side; it is not much longer than wide, not much more

than half as long as fifth pleon somite, with posterior margin bisinuate on each

side, scarcely produced and widely triangular in the middle.

First joint of peduncle of wide superior antenna as long as second and third

joints together with flagellum; second joint nearly twice as long as third ; flagellin

two-jointed, the first segment more than twice as long as second.

Second antenna relatively large, its terminal joint subconical, longer than

second and with well-developed apical sensory appendages.

Mandible with ten or eleven spines in the row, successively stouter from in

front backwards; molar process as long as distal portion of trunk anterior to it.

Basis of third maxilliped twice as long as palp if stretched out, its greatest

width nearly one-third of its length; carpus distinctly more than twice as long as

merus and one-third as long again as propodus; dactylus little longer than merus.

First peraeopod with basis much shorter than rest of limb; propodus more

than one-third as long again as carpus and nearly twice as long as dactylus ; distal

plumose brush of propodus equal in length to propodus and dactylus combined.

Second peraeopod with basis stout, not as long as remaining joints together ;

carpus equal in length to dactylus, not much shorter than merus, and more than

twice as long as propodus; dactylus with four stout spines on inner margin (the

first and last a little larger than the middle two) and two very unequal distal

spines, the longer almost half as long as the joint; the igure shows the other stout

and slender spines, and plumose setae.

Third to filth peraeopods stout; basis of third subequal in length to

remainder of limb, that of fourth and fifth only half as long or less; carpus with

four strong distal fossorial setae (as well as a comb of short setae) which with

propodal seta reach well beyond the blunt dactylar claw, which has a short outer

seta at its base,

Uropod with peduncle and endopod strongly ridged longitudinally, the

former a little longer than telson and two-thirds as long as endopod, which is more

240

than one-eighth longer than exopod; its inner margin bears spines which are

mostly of the same size; first joint of endopod more than five times as long as

second, with an inner row of unequal spines and a single spine at outer distal

corner ; second joint of endopod with only one inner spine and with two or three

unequal spines at rounded apex; exopod with a row of slender compound

(“serrate”) spines on inner margin followed by a single short strong spine and

four or five which may be regarded as apical, one being much longer than the

others; on outer margin near apex is a single small spine.

Colour cream or dark orange-yellow with brown chromatophores on cara~

pace, and a darker brown marking at each postero-lateral corner of excavation on

back of carapace; eve black; very fine chromatophores on pleon. The portion:

[

Fig. 9

Zenocwina rugosa, type female; lateral view and cephalothorax from above (x 10);

anterior part of carapace from the side and from above (x 20).

of the first peraeopods and third maxillipeds exposed when the operculum is in

position are boldly mottled with dark brown.

Length, 14°5 mm.

Loe——New South Wales: off Jibbon, 35 fath., in coarse sand (K. Sheard,

Feb. 1940); off Eden, 30 metres, trawled in coarse sand (K. Sheard, Oct.

1943); Ulladulla, 75 metres, trawled in sand (type loc., K. Sheard, June 1944),

Type female in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. C.2535.

At each of the above localities this form was taken in company with

Pomacuima australiaec, as well as a dozen or more other species of Cumacea: it

stands out from Pomacuma, not only by its larger size, but because of the gaping

pseudorostral lobes, subtruncate telsonic somite, unequal rami of the uropods, etc. ;

241

the jutting basis of the third maxilliped is also very apparent when the anterior

appendages are partly opened, as they often are in preserved material (fig. 9).

Genus Pomacuma nov.

Female. Form superficially as in Vaunthompsonia,; integument little

calcified,

Carapace with pseudorostral lobes extending in front of moderately large

ocular lobe and meeting in the mid-line; antennal notch, as in Zenocuma, a closed

slit. Five pedigerous somites exposed, the first short. Pleon longer than cephalo-

thorax; telsoni¢ somite well produced posteriorly, the distal margin rounded.

First antenna normal, with accessory flagellum single-jointed. Second

antenna three-jointed, like that of Zenocuma.

Mandible with long lacinia and long, stout molar process.

Epipod of first maxilliped with a dozen or more wide lamellate gill-lobes with

thickened edges.

Second maxilliped slender.

Third maxilliped with well-developed exopod; basis with a short external

distal lobe bearing a fan of plumose setae; the joint is widened interiorly and is

truncate distally but is not forwardly produced; there is a series of plumose setae

on the whole length of inner margin, the distal ones about as long as those of

external lobe; remaining joints much as in Zenoeuma, but the palp is rather Jess

markedly geniculate (full series of plumose sctae not shown in figures).

First three pairs of peraeopods with well-developed exopods ; fourth pair with

rudimentary single-jointed exopod. capped with a few setac.

Basis of first peracopod widened distally where a large forwardly directed

lobe is produced interiorly C‘Oberseite” of Zimmer ) reaching to the level of

anterior end of oblique articulation of ischium and merus; remaining joints as in

Zenocuma and Gephyrociina,

Carpus of second peraeopod much shorter than merus,

Iendopod of uropod two-jointed, the distal segment very short; iuner margin

of exopod with plumose setae,

Male. Vleon relatively slightly longer than in feniale.

Second antenna reaching to end cf pleon. the longest joints of flagellum only

half as long again as wide.

Thoracic exopods as in female. Five pairs of pleopods.

Genotype Pomacuma cognata sp. nov.

This genus is related to Zenocunts but the important differences in the struc-

ture of the basis of the third maxilliped and first peraeopod, and in the pseudo-

rostrum and telsonic somile are very apparent without dissection.

It may be noted also that Pomuacima has plumose setae on the whole of the

inner margin of the basis of the third maxillipeds, and they are of different type

from those occurring on proximal half only in Zenocrina; further, this basis,

although less expanded than in the last-named genus, still 1s about one-fourth as

wide as long owing to its relative shortness due to absence of a distal lobe; it does

not project beyond the anterior end of basis of the first peraeopod.

Two well defined species are available from off eastern Australia. One of

these, excepting for a few trivial ditferences, closely resembles Zimmer’s Western

Faunthompsonia (?) australiae and so is referred to that species; im any case

austrahae is undoubtedly congeneric with cognata.

242

IKKEY Toa SPECIES OF PowaAce MA

Carpus of third maxilliped more than half as long again as propodus. Dactylus

of second peraeopod more than three times as long as propodus and with ten

spines on inner margin. Uropod with peduncle equal in length to first joint of

endopod and with a row of spines on distal third of outer margin of exopod.

Pleon ridged —.... : a ner han on te .. €oynata sp. Nov.

Carpus of third manilliped tess than half as long again as propodus. Dactyius of

second peraeopod fess than three times as long as propodus and with only about

seven spines on inner margin. Uropod with peduncle distinctly shorter than first

joimt of endopod and with no long row of spines on outer margin of exopod.

Pleon smooth See ser . : 4 .. australiac (Zimmer)

Pomacuma cognata sp. noy.

Ovigerous Female, Integument glossy. with very fine reticulate pattern and

superficial pitting.

Carapace as seen from side slightly arched dorsally; it is half as long again

as deep and not quite as long as pedigerous somites together; the outline is rugose

Fig. 10

Pomacinnea counatt, teope ovigerous femate: ant. 1, fisst antenna (X86); mxp. 3,

palp and distal end of basis of third maxilliped (x86): prp. 1, merus, ischium

and distal end of hasis of first peracopod (x 86): prp. 2. secand peracapod, basis

not shown (x86): nrop.. nropod, with fifth pleon and telsonic somites (x 26:

distal half of rami, x 80).

245

in posterior half owing 10 the tuberculation of a well-developed median carina,

which is flanked on each side in anterior half by a depression; the latter has tuber-

culate edges and inside it are two rows of ill-defined large tubercles; sides with

sparse, small low rounded tubercles. Pseudorostral lobes each slightly produced

in front, so that pseudorostrum has a somewhat pointed appearance. Ocular lobe

as wide as long, black with the corneal lenses not easily made out.

Pedigerous and pleon somites with sculpturing essentially as described for

Zenocuma rugosa but not so strongly marked. Telsonic somite nearly half as

long again as wide and less than two-thirds as long as fifth pleon somite; its

produced posterior part comprises one-fourth of its length.

Fig. i

Pomacuma cognata, type ovigerous female; lateral view (x 17) and anterior part

of carapace from above (x 46).

first joint of upper antenna nearly twice as Jong as second which is more

than half as long again as third and longer than ‘the stout two-jointed flagellum.

Third joint of second antenna capped with short but well developed sensory

appendages.

Mandible with about 17 spines in the long row.

Carpus of third maxilliped nearly two and two-thirds times as long as merus,

fully two-thirds as long again as propodus and more than twice as long as dactylus.

First peracopod much as in aistraliac, but with joints ot slightly different

proportions.

Dactvius of second peraeopod distinctly more than three times as long as

propodus, two and two-thirds times as long as carpus, and almost half as long

again as imerus; its inner margin bears a row of ten spines (sce note under

244

australiae), and distally it has a Jong spine and a shorter one; other furniture is

shown in the figure of this limb,

Posterior peraeopods robust, with four stout distal carpal setae reaching well

heyond tip of dactylus.

Uropod with peduncle as long as first joint of endopoed and with a row of

spaced spines on inner edge; endopod equal in length to exopod, with first joint

almost four times as long as second and with many unequal, closely-set spines on

inner margin; longer terminal spine of second segment distinetly longer than the

latter: rounded distal end of exopod with four slender blunt-ended spines and

outer margin with nine spines on distal third, successively increasing in length

from first backwards.

Colour, biscuit brown with darker indefinite shadings.

Length, 8 mim.; ova, 0-28 mm. in diameter.

Loc—New South Wales: off Coffs Harbour, 30°18’S., 153° 16’ E.,

50 metres (CK. Sheard, June 1941). ‘Type in South Australian Museum, Ree. No.

C2482.

This species turned up only once in the hauls made off eastern Australia

which may indicate that it is not so abundant there as is the second species referred

to the genus,

POMACUMA AUSTRALIAE (Zinmet )

Feunthompsonia (2) australiae Zimmer, 1921, 4, fig. 1-7.

Leptocwmna australiae Hale, 1936, 409,

Female. integument glossy with very fine reticulate pattern.

Carapace seen from the side almost evenly arched dorsally, very slightly

sinuate on posterior half; median carina distinct. clear eut in front half, where

on each side 1s a smooth, shallow but quite apparent excavation: sides smooth:

itis plump, as wide as deep, less than half as long again as depth and barely as

Fig, 12

Pomeacwna australiae, female: lateral view and cephalothorax from above (x 15);

telsonic somite and anterior part of carapace from the side (x 36).

ant

long as pedigerotis soniites together, Pseudorostral lobes roundly and obliquely

subtruncate in front, not at all pointed and meeting in advance of eye-lobe for a

distance equal to barely half the length of the latter. Ocular lobe as long as wide,

rounded in front, very slightly constricted at base, black, with eye lenses apparently

as described by Zimmer but their definition confused by pigment.

Pedigerous and pleon somites smooth, rounded.

‘Telsonic somite rather less than half as long again as wide and less than two-

thirds as long as fifth pleon somite which is only slightly narrowed towards the

rear; produced distal portion fully one-fourth of total length of somite.

Antennae as in cognata,

Basis of third mawilliped more than half as long again as palp when fully

extended ; carpus barely more than twice as long as merus, not quite half as long

again as propodus, and about twice as long as dactylus.

Basis of first peraeopod as long as rest of limb, with plumose hairs on outer

edge including distal end (two or three) and with spines and plumose setae on

inner edge, leaving distal part and lobe unarmed; ischium, including lobe, about

as long as merus; propodus more than half as long again as carpus and twice as

long as dactylus.

Dactylus of second peracopod about two and one-third times as long as

propodus, less than twice as long as carpus and scarcely longer than merus; its

miner margin bears a row of five to seven spines, and there is a long distal spine

and a short one; other furniture sec figure.

Posterior peracopods robust, with four distal carpal setae which with pro-

wndal seta reach well beyond tip of dactylus.

Uropod with peduncle six-sevenths as long as first joint of endopod and with

a few spines on inner margin; endepod equal in length to exopod, its first joint

wearly five times as long as second, with short spines on inner margin, interspersed

with longer spines; second joint, as in cogiata, with a row of inner spines which

snecessively increase very slightly in length, but with the longer terminal spine of

he rounded distal end shorter than the joint; apex of exopod with three or four

blunt, stout, very unequal spines and with only one small, stout, subdistal spine

on otiter margin.

Colour translucent, with brown chromatophores which are often massed to

form an irregular pattern, the most consistent markings being situated at the

wosterior ends of dorsal excavation of carapace. Sometimes the second and third

pedigerous sontites have the back brown and a brown patch on cach pleural part,

while the posterior half of the first pleon somite is darkened. The eye is always

dhaish-black.

Length, subadult, 8-7 mun,

tdult Male. ‘Vhe same slight irregularity of the dorsal contour of the

carapace is present, but is barely discernible. First antenna of slightly different

propertions (second peduncular joint twice as long as third, as shown by

Zimmer), with flagella more robust and generously furnished with sensory setae;

the main flagellum appears to be three-jointed, but the last “joint” may, as sur-

nused by Zimmer, represent the bases of the terminal sensory appendages. The

last joint of the peduncle of the second antenna is fully two-thirds as long again

as the penultimate; the proximal joints of the flagellum are as wide as long, or

wider, but soon become relatively more elongate but never very much so as in

Paunthompsonia,

The uropods differ from those of the female in having a greater number of

marginal spines (second series well developed on peduncle), those of the second

246

endopodal joint being interspersed with smaller spines, etc.; the plumose hairs on

the exopod are longer and the distal spines of that ramus a little more robust.

Length, 9 mm.

Loc.—Queensland: off Fraser Island, 24° 20’S., 153° 02’ W. (*Warreen”

Station 31, Sept. 1938). New South Wales: off Broughton Island, at sur-

face (D. L. Serventy, midnight, Dec, 1938); off Jibbon, 35 fath., in

coarse sand (K. Sheard, Feb. 1940); off Wata Mocli, 70 metres (“Cronulla”

Trawl Station 4, July 1943); off Eden, 30 metres, trawled in coarse sand (K.

Sheard, Oct. 1943); Ulladulla, 75 metres, trawled in sand (K. Sheard,

June 1944).

Hab.—North-Western and eastern Australia.

Fig. 13

Pomoacnina australiae, female: ant. 2, second antenna; mxp. 3, palp and distal end

of basis of third maxitliped; prp. 1, merus, ischium and distal end of basis of first

peraeopod; prp. 2, second peraeopod, basis not shown: prp. 4, distal joints of

fourth peracopod (all x 86): urop., uroped with filth pleon and telsonic somites

(x 26; distal half of rami, x 100).

247

Zimmer regarded his species as representative of a new gertus beeause of the

structure of the third mavilliped and first peracopod. He did not dissect his single

young male. but illustrates the basis of this maxilliped as truncate at the level of

the insertion of the palp. Although he shows the dorsal margin of the carapace as

perfectly smooth, there is little doubt that the castern specimens are correctly

Is, as far

referred: the proportions of the joints of third maxillipeds and peracopas

as shown, seen much the same, and there are six inner spines on the carpus 01

the second legs. There are, however, some differences ; Zimmer states that the

big. 14

t mate; ant. 1, first antenna (x 42; flagella, x 170):

moxp. 3. third manilliped (x 42): prp.. peracopeds (x32; lobe of basis of first,

"1 « } . : % % is ~

x82): urep., uropod: apices of rami (x 170).

Pomeacunia australiac, adul

telsonic somite is not much produced posteriorly and shows it as so i his fig. 7;

also. he figures three small subapical spines on the outer margin of the uropedal

exopod. He remarks incidentally the characteristic blunt terminal spines of this

ramus, which differ slightly from those of ceguata, The several types of cone

posite setae and other projections occarring in Cumacea, and loosely referred io

as “spines” for taxonomic purposes. are worthy of special studies such as have

been applied elsewhere.

Genus Gepiyrocuma Hale

Gephyrocuina Hale, 1936, 412; and 1943, 340.

Oeular lobe wide and not distinctly separated off from frontal lobe; lenses

very large. Antennal noich so widely open that no distinet incision or antennal

angle is evident.

Pleon reduced, at most only about two-thirds as long as cephalothorax in the

male, shorter in the female.

248

first antenna strongly geniculate, with joints of peduncle globose. Second

antenna of female indistinetly three-jointed, the third segment clongate and with

a ninute terminal jointlet (fig. 17, ant. 2).

Basis of third maxillipeds without external apical lobe but with very large

inner lobe.

Basis of first peraeopod distinetly twisted, with no distal inner Lobe.

IExopods of peraeopods identical in both sexes; well developed on first and

second pairs, and rudimentary on third and fourth. On the third pair the exopod

is cither single-jointed, or with peduncle and first joint only of flagellum developed.

Uropeds with short peduncle and with endopod two-jointed, the first see-

ment much longer than the second.

Key to Species or GepHyrocuMAa

Exopod of third peraecopod with two joints. Endopod of uropod without spines

on miner margin . . ' . pala Hale

fexopod of third peracopod single-jointed. Endopod of uropod with a row of

spines on inner margin . i repanda sp. nov.

Gephyrocuma repanda sp. noy.

Adult Male, Integument thin and fragile, somewhat polished.

Warapace as seen from the side with dorsal margin evenly and slightly convex ;

file more than one-third of total length of animal; twice as long as depth, which

is equal to the width; dorsal carma scarcely apparent. Pscudorostral lobes micet-

in front of the ocular lobe for a distance equal to about one-third of the length

ne latter; wide and truncate anteriorly. Ocular lobe much broader than long,

are

Pig. 15

Gepiyrocunur repanda, type adult mate ox 32).

Pedigerous somites all exposed, together two-thirds as long as carapace 3 first

somite short, concealed on sides; postero-lateral portions of each of second, fourth

and ftth somites produced backwards as a rounded lobe: second to fourth not

differmg markedly in length.

Pleon more than two-thirds as long as cephalothorax: third to fifth somites

somewhat deeper than the others.

hirst antenna very stout; joints of peduncle almost globose, the diameter in

the second and third being equal to the length; first segment of peduncle as long

as rest of appendage: flagellum three-jointed and accessory flagellum small, stout

and knob-hike.

249

Pay

Second antenna long, the flagellum reaching beyond end of telson.

Epipod of first maxilliped with four stout digitiform gill-lobes, two of which

are smaller than the others,

Basis of third maxillipeds with width of inner lobe equal to one-third of

length of joint; two short plumose setae on inner edge; the carpus of the extended

geniculate palp does not quite reach level of distal end of basis.

First peracopod with its massive basis distinctly longer than rest of limb;

carpus a little shorter than propodus, its greatest width two-thirds its length ;

dactylus short and stout, less than half as Jong as propodus.

Basis of second peraeopod three times as long as wide, more than half as long

again as remainder of limb; ischium distinct; merus as Jong as dactylus and longer

than carpus or propodus, the last-named, nevertheless. not much shorter than the

dactylus; the dactylus has three rather stout distal spines.

Fig. 16

Gephyrocuma repanda, paratype adult male; c. pace, anterior portion of carapace

(x 30); ant. 1, first antenna (x 155); mxp. 3, prp. and urop., third maxilliped,

peracopods and uropod (x75; spines and seta, x 330).

Merus of third peraeopods barely shorter than basis, that of fourth and fifth

pairs much longer than basis; propodi and dactyli short and stout; three distal

carpal setae, the longest reaching well beyond tip of dactylus; exopods of third

and fourth legs rudimentary, without trace of flagellum (fig. 17, B).

Peduncle of uropods stout, only about half as long as exopod and with a row

of long plumose setae on inner margin; endopod a little longer than exopod; its

first joint is more than twice as long as the second and its inner margin bears

spinules and, on the distal half, a row of short stout spines; second joint with an

250

inner row of half-a-dozen stout spines and with a terminal spine; exopod with

three unequal apical spines and a row of long plumose sctae on inner margin

(he. 17, B).

Colour translucent with orange chromatophores (artificial lighting), which

appear black after preservation, arranged as shown in fig. 15,

Length, 3-25 mm.

Juvenile Male. he pleon is shorter than in the adult male. but is much

onger than the pedigcrous somites together.

Length, 2 mm.

Non-ovigerous Female, Vhe pleon, though relatively smaller than in the adult

nale, is much longer than the pedigcrous somites together.

eength, 2°5 mim.

Loe.—New South Wales: Cronulla, 8 feet, on coarse sand (ivpe loc.; H. M.

tale and JX. Sheard, submarine light, Sept. 1942 and Jan. 1944); Port

Hacking, 50 metres, on coarse sand (K. Sheard, June 1943); off Wata Mooli,

35 metres, on sand (“Cronulla” Trawl Station 2, July 1943); Jibbon, 45-50

metres, on coarse sand (“Cronulla” Trawl Station 10, Aug. 1943); Ulladulla,

75 metres (K. Sheard, trawled, July 1944). Type male in South Australian

Museum, Reg. No. C.2474,

Most of the examples are adult males secured at Cronulla; the single female

was taken off Jibbon.

In fig. 15 the concavity shown in the outline of the carapace below the pseudo-

rostrum is that into which the carpo-propodal articular areas of the first peraeopod

fit when the operculum is in operation, The projecting distal end of the basis of

the third maxilliped may be seen below the ischio-carpal part of the first leg; this

is even wider than in the genotype, as is also the carpus of the first peraeopod.

‘he carpus and propodus of the first leg accordingly form a wider angle when

folded, the triangular lamellate part of the carpus overlapping slightly the outer

distal portion of the maxillipedal lobe; the peraeopod fits so intimately against the

manxilliped that it is not easv to detect the margins.

The fragile integument collapses on partial drying,

CEPHYROCUMA PALA Tlale

Gepharocuma pala Hale, 1936, 412, fig. 5-6; and 1934, 340, fig. 8-9.

This, the genotype, apart from the smaller size, shows many constant differ-

ences from the New South Wales species.

Male. The pleon is shorter, at most barely longer than the pedigerous

somites together. The subconical accessory flagellum of the first antenna is larger.

The distal spines of the second peracopods are longer, and are four in number.

while the exopods of the third and fourth legs are much larger, that of the third

pair consisting of two joints, peduncle and first segment of the flagellum. The

distal spines of the rami of the uropods are not so stout; the second joint of the

endopod is more than half as Jong as the first. and neither segment has spines on

the inner margin (cf. A and B in fig. 17).

Both species have up to five short and stout plumose setae on the inner margin

of the basis of the third maxilliped.

Oviyerous Female. Much as previously described for the subadult of this

sex, and differing from repanda as above. The pleon is barely as long as the

pedigerous somites together. ‘The flagelium of the first antenna is two-jointed.

exop. Prp. 3

Fig. 17

ant. 2, Second antenna of female of Gephyrocuma pala (x 280). prp. 2, excep. prp.

3-4 and urop. Distal joints of second peraeopods and distal half of rami of uropod

of (A) Gephyrocnma pala, (B) G. repanda (x 140).

The ova are relatively very large, 0-2 mm. in diameter or about one-third the

greatest depth of the body.

Length, 2°3 mm.

Loc.—This species occurs on sandy beaches in St. Vincent Gulf, South Aus-

tralia, sometimes in great numbers, but for long periods may be absent or rare.

Genus LEProcuMA Sars

Leptocuma Sars 1873, 24; Stebbing 1913, 53 (syn.).

The genotype (L. kinbergii) was described from the female; it and two

females subsequently identified with the species (Calman 1907, 30; and 1912, 616)

were taken in the South Atlantic. Calman also referred to the genus a species

(minor Calman 1912, 616, fig. 14-20) from the North Atlantic, and the female

of this would seem to be congeneric with Sars’ species; the male of minor has

only three pairs of pleopods, and exopods are well developed on the first four

pairs of peraeopods. Later, the present writer tentatively placed in the genus two

Australian species (pulleini and sheardi); the females of these also cannot be

satisfactorily separated generically from kinbergti as described by Sars, but the

males have five pairs of pleopods and the exopod of the fourth peraeopod rudi-

mentary as in the feniale.

Vaunthompsonia (?) australiae Zimmer was also temporarily referred to

Leptocuma (Hale 1936, 408), but has been shown above to belong elsewhere.

Four further species, congeneric with pulleini and sheardi, perhaps congeneric

with kinbergii, but certainly not with minor, are now described.

All six Australian species differ from minor in the following characters also.

The pseudorostral lobes, as in Vaunthompsoma, extend a little in front of the

ocular lobe but do not meet. The mandibles are robust and, have a dozen or more

spines (“only about six” in minor). The branchial lobes are thin and leat-like

and are much more numerous (eleven to nineteen plus one reflexed instead of

about seven plus one). The basis of the third maxilliped is not at all produced

distally, but on the contrary the external angle is rounded and slopes backwards ;

252

the fan of distal plumose setae is arranged in two series, only one of which 1s

shown in fig. 18. In the pleopods there is no narrow process on the outer margin

of the endopod. Only a fuller description of the genotype will clarify the situation.

The Australian species apparently agree with both kmbergti and minor in

the structure of the second peraeopods, which are unusual in that there is a brush

of distal setae on the propodus and dactylus, but no spines. The first antennae

have the accessory flagellum single-jointed. The second antenna of the female is

three-jointed (the first and largest joint itself indistinctly divided). The telsonic

somite is well produced posteriorly and its apex is rather angular. In the third

maxillipeds the ischium is short and the merus is not as long as the carpus.

The second antennae of a large but subadult female of wiearia sp. tov.. as

shown in fig. 18, B. juv.. are not distinctly divided into jomts, whereas in

ovigerous females (fig. 18, A and B) there is a long basal joint (indefinitely

divided into two) and the last of the other two jomts is conical and longer than

the second.

alte

C r

Vv 4 A

Sy (y ae

Vs 6

i 6

a cf

See,

arate

Fig. 18

Leptocuma, branchial apparatus, distal part of third mandible, and female second

antennae; maxilliped: A, pulleint, ovigerous female; B, vicarta; C, sheardi, adult male.

The ocular lobe is wide, moderate or large in size. The joints of the flagellum

of the second antenna of the male are elongate.

The integument, as in Vaunthompsonia, is scarcely calcified. The third

somite of the female is produced forward on each side to form a lobe overlapping

the second, and the antero-lateral parts of the fourth somite of the male are

similarly expanded to override the third.

The Australian species fall into two well-defined sections, the differences

heing detailed in the following key.

253

Key ro AUSTRALIAN Species or L&PTOCUMA (ADULTS)

1 First peracopod with a prominent simple spine at distal end of inner margin of basis,

preceded by several shorter spines, and with a well-developed brush of setae at distal

end of propodus. Setae of third to fifth peraeopods very numerous. Uropod

with first joint of endopod shorter, or barely longer, than second. Over 13 mm.

in length. Ae bs we ad af .. ss

First peraeopod with a scrrafe spine at distal end of inner margin of basis, pre-

ceded by one longer spine, also serrate; with sparse setae at distal end of pro-

podus, Sctue of third to fifth peraeopods not very numerous, Uropod with first

joint of endopod much longer than second. Less than 8 mm. in length .. 3

2 Second peraeopod reaching to or beyond distal end of basis of first leg. and with

carpus two-thirds as long again as merus — .... cus _ 2 pulleint Hale

Second peraeopod reaching only to about middle of length of basis of first leg,

and with carpus subequal in length to merus ... sobs .. tlearia sp. nov.

3 Dorsal margins of pedigerous somites, as scen from the side, undulating. One of

the terntinal spines of endepod of uropod geniculate (emale) or hooked (male).

Pleon with obvious lateral and dorsal carinae . wate a. Obshpa sp. nov.

Dorsal margins of pedigerous somites smooth. ‘Terminal spines of endopod of

uropod straight (barely curved). Pleon smooth, or with scarcely distinguishable

traces of carinac “as a . 4. mt 4 7, hs 4

4 Size under 5 mm. Seeond joint of endopod of uropod much more than halt

length of first ... Ne. spas F see w , .. serrifera sp.nov.

Size about 7 mm. Second joint ef endopod of uropod about half as long as

first, or less

“at

First peraeopod with propodus much longer than dactylus. Second peraeopod

with propodus and dactylus subequal in length tr: oa: .. sheardt Hale

First peracopod with propodus scarcely longer than dactylus. Second peraeopod

with dactylus fully one-third as Jong again as propodus intermedia sp.nov.

LeprocuMA PULLEINI Llale

Leptocume pudleini Waie 1928, 38, fig. 7-8; and 1936, 409.

Adult Maile. Carapace about one-fifth of total length of animal, its depth

equal to its width and one-half of its length; seen from above it has the form (as

in the ovigerous female previously described) of a cylinder truncated at each end;

Fig. 19 \

Leptocuma pulleimi, adult male (x if).

dorsal carina as in female, low and fading posteriorly. Ocular lobe larger than in

female, slightly wider than long and with a tiny incision at apex; there are three

> x . 3 . . .

prominent Ienses arranged in a triangle, the centre one pigmented and having

¥F

234

the appearance of including a pair of oval lenses; on each side there are three

much smaller lenses. Pseudorostral lobes rather widely truncate in front; as

usual in the genus, extending in advance of ocular lobe but with inner (medial)

margins bent down and not meeting in front of eye-lobe. Antennal notch se

widely open as to be obliterated; angle rounded.

Pedigerous somites two to five with a faint median dorsal carina; again as

usual in the genus, the anterior margins of the second, third and fouth somites

are fringed with short bristles, and there is a similar row on the posterior edges

of the fourth and fifth.

Pleon somites with faint dorsal carina and with indications of lateral carinae

on second to fourth; first four somites with a fringe of rather long setae

posteriorly,

Flagellum of first antenna four-jointed and with two tiny terminal jointlets,

apparently bases of the sensory appendages.

Mandible with about 18 spines.

First peraeopod with carpus reaching well beyond antennal angle; basis with

long plumose seta at external distal angle and with inner distal spine longer than

ischium; on the distal half of inner margin, posterior to the apical spine is a row

of shorter spines of two different lengths; propodus more than one and three-

fourths times as long as dactylus and a little longer than the carpus.

Second peraeopod reaching forward beyond end of basis of first; basis only

about three-fifths as long as terminal joints together; carpus two-thirds as long

Fig. 20

Leptocuma pulleii, adult male; c. pace, carapace from above (x11): oc. lobe,

anterior portion of carapace (x 29); ant. 1, distal peduncular joints and flagella

of first antenna (x72); prp. and urop., peracopods and ventral view of uropod

(x 36; spines, x72).

orn

again as mertus and more than two and one-half times as long as propodus, which

is Jonger than the dactylus.

Third to filth peraeopods with a large number of fiexthle setae on ischium,

merus and carpus (ten or more) and the usual one on propodus; basis with

plumose setae. The rudimentary exopod of the fourth has the vestigial second

joint as in the female.

Uropod with peduncle shorter than either telsonic somite or rami, with a few

stout spines and two series of stout setae on inner margin; endopod distinctly

longer than exopod; as in the female the second segmem is one-fourth as long

again as first, but the armature is not the same, there being on the distal half of

the second joint a comb of spines which are shorter and of different type from

those on the proximal part.

Colour, white, with sparse stellate spots (night).

Length, 13:5 mm.

Loew ew South Wales: Cronulla, 8 feet, on coarse sand (H. M. Hale and

K. Sheard, submarine light, Sept. 1942 and Jan. 1944).

Ovigerous Female, Deseribed in detail previously. There are several spines

on the inner margin of the basis of the first peracopod. Examination when not

immersed in a icohol and partly dry reveals the presence of very low, smooth but

distinct dorso-lateral, Teel and infero-lateral carinae on the pleon, the last-named

ridges most apparent on the first four somites.

Hab.—South Australia and New South Wales.

The first recorded specimens of this species were collected in June 1886 by

the late Dr. Robt, Pulleine. and, despite searching, it has not been taken since in

South Australia. Two adult males were secured in New South Wales; one is a

little smaller than that described atid figured, but otherwise agrees in detail. The

discrepancy in size between examples from the two localities is considerable, the

immature male recorded from South Australia being 19 mm. in length and the

ovigerous female still larger (24 mm.), but [ can find no other character to

separate them.

Leptocuma vicaria sp. nov.

Ovigerous Female, Carapace about four and one-half times in total length

and not quite as long as first four pedigerous somites together; its depth is equal

to width and more than half its length; viewed from either above or from the side

the carapace tapers markedly to the i front; there is a median dorsal carina very

distinct on anterior three-fourths of length and (unlike that of pulleint) slightly

serrate in appearance. Ocular lobe siall; lenses present but not well defined,

although nine or ten separate small areas are indistinctly discernible; there is a

small incision in the apex of the lobe. Pseudorostral lobes narrow anteriorly with

inner margins, in front of eye-lobe, bent strongly dowrwards. Antennal notch

distinct (not so widely open as in female of pul/eint) and angle subacute.

Second to fifth pedigerous somites with dorsal median carina and with the

one or two shallow longitudinal furrows (usually present in all species) on sides.

First five pleon somites with median dorsal carina, slightly tuberculate dorso-

lateral, lateral and infero-lateral carinae; telsonic somite with dorso-lateral and

lateral carinae.

Tirst antenna with fagellunt three-jointed ; first joint of peduncle much longer

than second, which is nearly twice as long as third; accessory flagellum short.

Second antenna, see fig. 18, B.

Third maxilliped as in pulleini.

256

ceph. 9

Fig. 21

Leptocuma vicaria, Type ovigerous female; ceph., cephalothorax from side and

above (x 74); prp., peraeopods (x25). Allotype male; from the side and (ceph.)

ceephalothorax from above (x8); c, pace, anterior portion of carapace (x 40);

prp. 2 and urop., second peraeopod and uropod (x40); exop. 4, exopod of

fourth peraeopod (x 50).

237

First peraeopods with basis not nearly reaching to level of anteinal angle,

nearly half as long again as rest of limb, and with three shorter spines preceding

the distal inner spine, which is longer than the ischium; plumose setae on both

margins; propodus less than one-half as long again as dactylus and much longer

than carpus.

Second peraeopod reaching only to middle of length of basis of first; basis

barely longer than rest of limb; carpus subequal in length to merus and distinctly

less than twice as long as propodus, which is longer than the dactylus.

Third to fifth peraeopods much as in pulleint.

Peduncle of uropod shorter than telsonic somite or rami, its inner margin

with six strong spines and, near proximal end, three slender spines; endopod

shorter than exopod, the second segment barely longer than the first, which has

ten spines on inner margin, the third and particularly the distal being larger than

the others; second joint with a score of inner spines successively increasing in

length and longest terminal spine fully half the length of the joint; inner margin

of endopod with a row of setae not differing markedly in length; second segment

of exopod more than two and one-half times as long as first (thus relatively

longer than in pileii) and with a gradated series of composite setae on outer

margin, the longest terminal ones one-fourth or more the length of joint.

Colour pale brown, densely spotted with dark stellate markings.

Length, 17°5 mm.

Subadult Male. General form even more slender than in female. Carapace

with sharply defined carina, and tapering as described but more than twice as long

as width or depth. Ocular lobe larger, a little wider than long, with apex more

markedly bilobed than in female, but with lenses not distinct. Antennal notch

and angle as in female, but doubtless the notch opens in the adult; the antennal

angle is visible when the animal is viewed from above.

Similar ridges are present on the pedigerous and pleon somites.

The first antennae have the flagellum only two-joimted at this stage.

The peraeopods have fewer setae (due to immaturity). The basis of the

second peraeopod is slightly shorter than the rest of the limb. The rudimentary

exopod of the fourth pair has the second vestigial joint found in the female and

in both sexes of pulletnt.

The uropods resemble those of the female; but it is probable that the spines

hecome more specialised in the adult male; the first joint of the endopod is very

slightly longer than the second.

Length, 15°5 mm.

Loc.-—New South Wales: 24 miles east of Pt. Hacking, surface (allotype

nale, K. Sheard, Oct, 1940); off Wata Mooli, 35 metres on sand (type

female, “Cronulla” Trawl Station 2, March 1943); off Jibbon, 40 metres

i“Cronulla” Trawl Station 6. July 1943) and 45-50 metres, on coarse sand

i“Cronulla” Trawl Station 10, Aug. 1943). Types in South Australian

Museum, Reg. No. C.2451 and C2501.

At the point where the allotype male and other specimens were talken at the

surface the water is 600 metres in depth.

Although obviously allied to pullemi, vicaria can be readily separated at all

stages by the entirely different proportions of the second peraeopod and the more

prominent dorsal carina of the carapace. In young individuals (10 mmm. or less)

the carapace is shaped as in the adult of pulleint, aig., it is not markedly narrowed

-owards the front as in adult examples or those more nearly approaching maturity.

258

In very small specimens the setae of the peraeopods are much less numerous and

the characteristic brushes on the propodus and dactylus of the first legs are repre-

sented by only three or four setac.

Amongst other smaller points of difference, the eye-lenses are not so distinct

as in pulleini, the endopod of the uropod is shorter than the exopod instead of

longer than it, and its segments are subequal in length; the second joint of the

exopod of the uropod is relatively longer and the terminal joints of the first

peracopods are of different proportions.

Leptocuma obstipa sp. nov.

Ovgerous Female, Carapace robust, less than one-fourth of total length of

animal; depth equal to width and not quite three-fourths of its length; dorsal

carina distinct; there is a long shallow depression on each side of the carina for

about three-fourths of its length and this accentuates the ridge: posterior to these

hollows the carina bifurcates ; on posterior half of carapace is a pair of short ridges

Bags 22

Leplecuma obstitas type iemale aud allotype mate: lateral views and (ceph.)

cephalothorax (x 19); ¢. pace., anterior portion of carapace (x 30).

259

which, as seen from the side, are undulating. Ocular lobe pigmented, as wide as

long and with nine colourless lenses, the median one larger than the others.

Antennal notch moderately wide, a little obtuse, and angle rounded.

The five pedigerous somites together are longer than the carapace and half

as long as the pleon; lateral parts of third somite overlapping second in front and

fourth behind; each has a median dorsal ridge and a low undulating dorso-lateral

carina; on the fourth and fifth somites there is also a low lateral tumidity.

urep. d

Fig. 23

Leptocuma obstipa, paratype ovigerous female and allotype male; ant. 1, first

antenna (x83): ant. 2, second antenna (x 175); mxp. 3, prp. and urop., third

maxilliped, peraeopods and urepods (x 42).

First five somites of pleon with median dorsal carina and a sparsely tubercu-

late dorso-lateral carina on each side; there are also two tuberculate lateral ridges ;

the lower not well marked.

First joint of peduncle of first antenna as long as second and third segments

together; second Jonger than third which is as long as the two-jointed flageilum.

260

Third maxilliped with basis generously furnished with stout plumose setae,

there being eight or so at the subtruncate distal end.

First peraeopod with carpus reaching level of antennal angle; basis five-

sevenths as long as terminal joints together; inner margin with plumose setae;

dactylus slender, almost as long as propodus, which is one-third as long again

as carpus.

Second peraeopod not reaching distal end of merus of first; basis as long as

rest of limb without dactylus, its inner margin with long plumose setae; propodus

three-fourths as long as dactylus and distinctly less than half as long as carpus.

Third to fifth peraeopods with four distal carpal setae, two longer than the

others and reaching, with propadal seta, well beyond tip of dactylus.

Peduncle of uropod much longer than telsonic somite and equal in length to

each ramys; inner edge with a row of sixteen unequal spines; exopod with

plumose setae on mner margin, a few adpressed spines on outer edge and four

unequal terminal spines, the longest half as long as second joint of ramus; first

joint of endopod with spines much as in serrifera, but nearly two and a half times

longer than second joint; second joint with five curved spines successively increas-

ing in length on inner margin and three, unequal, on the rounded distal end; the

middle and longest of these terminal spines is as long as the segment, is of plicate

appearance, rounded apically and is geniculate.

Colour white with sparse brown chromatophores, which forni a conspicuous

marking on the second and third pedigerous somites.

Length, 7-5 mim.; ova, 0°3 to 0-4 min.

-idult Male, Body proportions much as in female but build considerably

more slender. The carinae of pedigerous sonrites and pleon are much more feeble

but are still faintly tuberculate; seen from the side the thoracic somites have the

undulating appearance characteristic of the species,

Carapace narrow, with the sides as seen from above evenly rounded; its depth

is equal to the width and not a great deal more than half its length. Ocular lobe

larger than in female and wider than long; the three median lenses are large and

conspicuous. Antennal notch very widely open and “angle” obtusely rounded.

Pedigerous somites differing from female as usual in the group.

Peduncle of uropod as long as exopod but a little longer than endopod; the

second joint of the last-named has five serrate spines on inner margin and two

distal spines; the longer of these is curved and is longer than the joint, the other

is hooked and serrate; other armature of uropods much as in female but longer.

Length, 6-8 mm,

Loc.—New South Wales: off Jibbon, 35 fath., in coarse sand (K. Sheard,

Feb. 1940). off Wata Moo, 70 metres (“Cronulla” Trawl Station 4, July

1943) ; off Jibbon, 45-50 metres, coarse sand (type loc., “Cronulla” Trawl Station

10, Aug. 1943). Types in the South Australian Museum, Reg. No. C.2488,

C2489.

Only one male is available. A series of ovigerous females [rom the three

localities all have the bent terminal spine on the endopod of the uropod, as figured.

This and the slight irregularity of the dorsal outline enable one to separate the

species with ease,

Some smaller ovigerous females (length, 7 mm.; ova, 0-4 mm.) have the

above characters but the propodus and dactylus of the first peraeopods are rela-

tively shorter ; the propodus is as usual scarcely longer than dactylus, but it is also

barely longer than the carpus.

261

Leptocuma serrifera sp. nov.

Ovigerous Female. Integument thin, very finely reticulate, smooth and

polished.

Carapace short and robust with dorsal edge scarcely arched, appearing

slightly uneven owing to insignificant sinuations; less than one-fourth of total

length of animal; its depth is equal to its greatest width and is more than three-

fourths its length; seen from above the curved sides diverge from the moderately

wide front; the median dorsal carina is obsolete. Ocular lobe wider than long,

pigmented and with distinct lenses. Antennal notch shallow and angle obtusely

rounded; a shallow oblique furrow to rear of notch.

Fig. 24

Leptocuma serrifera, type ovigerous female and allotype male; lateral views,

(ceph.) cephalothorax and (c. pace) carapace (x30); ant. 2, second antenna

of female (x 160).

The five pedigerous somites are without carinac, together they are fully half

as long as the pleon and much longer than the carapace; third and fourth somites

with rounded postero-lateral lobe, and hinder margin of fifth a little backwardly

produced on sides.

262

Pleon slightly tapering, the somites subcylindrical and, excepting fifth, sub-

equal in length; without dorsal or other ridges.

First antenna slender; first joint of peduncle shorter than second and third

together ; second barely longer than third and as long as the two-jointed flagellum ;

accessory lash single-jointed.

Mandible with about 12 spines in the row.

Basis of third maxilliped more than half as long again as remaining joints

together; margin immediately exterior to palp sloping backwards and with long

plumose setae ; inner margin with long setae on proximal half and shorter pluniose

setae on distal half.

ITE

mie

Onennn

Fig. 25

Leptocuma serrifera, paratype ovigerous female: ant. 1, first antenna (x 155):

mxp, 3, prp. and urop., third maxilliped, peraeopods and uropod (x 74; spines of

basis of first leg and tip of dactylus of second, x 155).

Kirst peraeopod with carpus reaching to level of antennal angle; basis only

about four-sevenths as long as the long terminal joints together, and with a

plumose seta at external angle; inner (inferior) margin with a row of plumose

setae; dactylus long, but only three-fourths as long as the propodus, which is

more than half as long again as carpus; merus not much shorter than carpus.

Second peracopod reaching to distal end of merus of first: basis almost as

long as rest of limb, its inner margin with long flexible setae similar to the

fossorial sctae of the posterior peraeopods; carpus much longer than ischiun

and merus together; propodus fully two-thirds as long as dactylus and almost

half as long as carpus.

263

Third to fifth peraeopods with two distal carpal setae of equal length and a

third much shorter; together with the propodal seta the longest reach very much

beyond the tip of the dactylus.

Peduncle of uropod slender, considerably longer than telsonic somite, but

shorter than the equal rami; inner margin with a row of 15 unequal spines, half-

a-dozen of which are prominently longer than the others; exopod with short

plumose setae on inner margin and with several terminal setae, one conspicuously

the longest and more than half as long as the ramus; first joint of endopod little

more than half as long again as second and with eighteen inner unequal spines ;

second joint with about eight finely serrate spines, successively and regularly

inereasing in length, on inner edge, and with three unequal finely serrate distal

spines, the longest barely more than half the length of the longest apical seta

of exopod.

Colour pale yellow, with conspicuous sprawling chromatophores.

Length, 4-4 mm. (ova, 0-15 mm. in diameter).

Adult Male. Carapace with dorsal outline not exhibiting the slight irregu-

larity apparent in the female; one-fourth of total length of animal, its depth equal

to width but rather Jess than two-thirds its length; seen from above the curve

of the sides is more pronounced. the greatest width being at the middle of the

length. Antennal notch more widely open (represented merely by a shallow con-

cavity) and antennal angle very obtusely rounded, almost imperceptibly angular.

Ocular iobe and lenses about one-third as large again as in female.

The five pedigerous somites together are not quite half as long as the pleon

and are equal in length to the carapace; the third locks into a rebate in fourth

and is not considerably expanded posteriorly.

Last pedigerous and first four pleon somites produced postero-laterally on

vach side to form a rounded lobe.

First peraeopod a little longer than in female, and with joints of same

proportions.

Uropod slightly longer; peduncle and rami of same proportions but spines

and setae longer.

Length, 4-2 mm.

Loc-~New South Wales: Cronulla, 8 feet. on coarse sand (K. Sheard,

submarine light, Sept. 1942). Types in South Australian Museum, Reg.

No. C.2484-C2485,

Differs from sheard? in (1) the smaller size; (2) the relatively longer

propodus of the first peraecopod; (3) the relatively longer dactylus of the second

peraeopod; (4) the different proportion of the endopod of the uropod ; (5) the

fewer carpal setae on the fossorial legs.

LeprocuMA sueArpr Hale

Leptocuma sheardi Hale, 1936, 409, fig. 3-4; and 1937, 65.

Only the longer of the two distal serrate spines of the basis of the first leg

was noticed in the original description; the shorter one may be concealed behind

the ischium. The female was described previously in some detail,

Adult Male. Carapace with depth less than two-thirds of its length; the

median dorsal carina appears as three fine parallel lines extending from the large

median eyc-lens to level of posterior ends of pseudorostral sutures; beyond this

it bifureates and quickly fades out. Ocular lobe pigmented, large, wider than

264

long and with nine lenses; three are larger than the others and arranged in a

triangle, the others three on each side of the lobe. Antennal notch very widely

oper (more so than in female) and angle rounded and obtuse.

Pedigerous somites without ridges; third somite not backwardly produced

postero-laterally to form a rounded lobe as in female.

try

ALPE LOL shy thy

wee le

Leptocwana sheardi adult male; lateral view and (ceph.) cephalothorax from above

(x19); c. pace, anterior half of carapace (x 30); ant. 1, distal peduncular joints and

flagella of first antenna (x78); prp. and urop., peracopods and urepod (x 39;

terminal joints, ete., x 78).

265

First to fourth pleon somites with postero-lateral portions rounded; median

and dorso-lateral carinae can be discerned on the fourth and fifth somites but

are very faint.

First antenna with the main flagellum three-jointed (two in female) and with

a brush of sensory filaments at its base.

Mandible with about 12 spines.

First peraeopods slightly longer than in female; basis not much shorter than

rest of limb; dactylus three-fourths as long as propodus, which is not much longer

than carpus: ischium and merus together as long as carpus; the dactylar setac

number 10 or so.

Second peraeopods not reaching to distal end of merus of first; basis as Jong

as rest of limb without dactylus, with a row of inner plumose setae; dactyius

barely longer than propodus and distinctly less than hali as long as carpus,

Third to fifth peracopods with a fan of long subdistal carpal setae, four on

the third pair and five on the fourth and fifth. Fourth with rudimentary exopod

single-jointed.

Peduncle of uropod a little longer than the equal rani, with about 15 or 16

spines, half of which are conspicuously stouter than the others; first joint of

endopod a little more than twice as long as second (not quite twice as: long as

second in female); armature of rami as in female but plumose spines of exopod

more numerous.

In specimens taken at night the colour markings (see previous notes) may

be contracted to single stellate spots, as shown in the figure.

Leneth, 7 mm.

Hab—vThe species has been taken only in South Australia, occurring in the

southern parts of St. Vincent and Spencer Gulfs and also in Antechamber Bay.

Kangaroo Island; it has heen netted at the surface at night and to a depth of

7 fathoms.

Leptocuma intermedia sp. nov.

Adult Male. Very like the male of L. sheardi but with the following

differences.

First peraeopod with dactylus almost as long as propodus. Second

peracopod with dactylus fully one-third as long again as propodus and distinctly

/ N

\ /\ VAN ‘

‘a VAN

pe ip ff \\°

&e ij

a ‘| \

fe Fig. 27

Lepiocuma intermedia, type male; prp. and urop., terminal joints of peraeopods

and endopod of uropod (x 66).

266

more than half length of carpus. Virst joint of endopod of uropod more than

two-and-one-half times longer than second.

Length, 6°6 mm.

Loe.—New South Wales: Cronulla, 8 feet, on coarse sand (K. Sheard, sub-

marine light, Sept. 1942). Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No, C2496,

‘This form was taken with serrifera at Cronulla, a locality rich in species of

Cumacea; apart from the larger size it differs in the very different proportions

of the carpus, propodus and dactylus of the first peraeopods, and in the much

shorter distal segment of the endopod of the uropod as well as other small details.

Genus VAUNTHOMPSONIA Bate

A single imperfect specimen is described below because it represents the only

record of the genus in the Australian region. It is closer to the genotype than is

meridionalis Sars, the only species which has the external distal part of the third

maxilliped at all produced. Also, in the last-named species there are only nine

spines on the short distal portion of the mandible, the branchial lobes are digiti-

form and reduced to four, and the telsonic somite is only slightly produced

posteriorly; as is apparently usual in the genus, the third maxilliped has the

ischium short, and the carpus as long as it and merus together, while the accessory

flagcHum of the first antenna is single-jointed.

Zimmer (1908, 165; and 1921, 131) is of the opinion (not shared by the

present writer) that Bathycwima should be regarded as a subgenus of Vaun-

fhompsonta,

The adult of both sexes is kuown only in the genotype. cristata Bate; in this

species the dorsal median carina of the female is finely dentate, that of the male

unarmed.

Vaunthompsonia nana sp. nov.

<ldult Male. Integument thin, smooth and polished.

Carapace with dorsal margin curving upwards from tip of pseudorostrum to

above ocular lobe, thence to hinder end almost straight; one-fourth of total

length of animal, slightly compressed and with depth equal to about two-thirds of

length; dorsum rounded, very obscurely angular along the mid-line but without

longnudinal ridge; inferior margin finely toothed on anterior half; seen from

above the front third of the carapace is subtriangular in shape, thence the sides

arc almost parallel. Iniero-lateral margins evenly coneave, there being no true

antennal noteh; antennal “angle” rounded. Pseudorostral lobes extending in front

of ocular lobe which is as wide as long, with nine lenses, four lateral pale ones,

and five large and black.

first pedigerous somite partly exposed; second over-lapping third and cara-

pace at postero-lateral and antero-lateral corners inferiorly.

Pedigerous and pleon somites of eyual width (excepting first pedigerous )

without ridges but with faint suggestion of angular rounding at mid-line and

dorso-lateral areas.

Pleon not much longer than cephalothorax; first four somites of equal size

and with inferior and postero-lateral margins finely crenulate; telsonic portion of

last somite subtriangular in side view and also as seen from above, and with a

pair of terminal setules.

Peduncle of first antenna with first joint as long as second and third together ;

second not longer but considerably thicker than third, which is as long as the threc-

jomted flagellum; accessory lash as usual single-jointed,

267

Mandible with thirteen spines in the row.

Third maxilliped with basis not at all produced at apex, with plumose hairs

on inner margin and with a series of stout plumose setae at external apical angle ;

inerus slightly dilated distally and with an external apical spine; carpus equal in

length to propodus, and also to ischium and merus together; dactylus short, with

a stout apical spine and short setae.

Basis of first peraeopods short, with a few plumose setae on inner margin

and a short plumose seta and a long spine near external apical angle; exopod

wider than basis; rest of limb missing.

Second peraeopod damaged.

Fig. 28

Vaunthompsonia nana; lateral view and cephalothorax of type male (x 65).

Carpus of fossorial legs at least as long as ischium and merus together, suc-

cessively increasing in length, so that in the fifth pair it is as long as the basis;

iwo distal carpal setae, the longer reaching beyond level of tip of dactylus; third

with basis longer than rest of limb and narrower than the base of the large

exopod; fourth and fifth with basis shorter than remaining joints together.

Peduncle of exopod of fourth more than half as wide as basis.

Peduncle of uropod as long as telsonic somite, and as exopod, with a series

of eight unequal spines; exopod four-fifths as long as endopod, with first joint

half length of second which has five short spines on outer margin, five longer

ones on inner edge and two apical spines, the longer equal to the segment in length;

first joint of endopod more than twice as long as second, with a dozen spines on

inner margin; second joint of endopod with four inner and three apical spines,

the longest longer than the joint (fig. 29 for relative lengths of armature),

268

Colour yellowish, generously marked with black pigment, particularly on

the dorsum.

Length, 1-9 mm.

Loc.—South Australia: Rapid Bay (H. Cooper and FE. Hanka, submarine

hght, Jan. 1944). Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. C.2444.

This is the smallest species to be referred to Vaunthompsonia. Its smooth

streamlining and well-developed natatory appendages suggest that the male is a

particularly efficient swimmer.

ain

SET Rr

Fig, 29

Peunthompsout mane, type male; ant. , first antenna (x 210); prp. and urop.,

peracopads, and uropad with telsenic somite (x 10Q),

it scems to be close to arabica Calman (1902, 29, pl. vii, fig. 20-24—~-Suez

and Aden), but the carapace is of different shape, the basis of the first peraeopods

is still shorter and stouter; also the proportions of the joints of the last pair of

peracopods seem to be distinctive. The first and second legs may show other

differences.

Gen, Glyphocuma nov.

Pseudorostral lobes not extending in front of ocular lobe, which is narrow

or moderately wide.

tasis of third maxiliped with large cxternal distal lobe, dentate on inner

edge and reaching to or beyond front end of merus, which is not or scarcely

expanded.

Male with exopods (having peduncle and jointed flagellum) on first to fourth

peracopods, those of the fourth pair sometimes small. Female with exopods on

first three pairs only.

First antenna with accessory flagellum two-jointed. Second antenna of

female three-jointed, with the conical distal joint distinctly separated off.

269

Mandibles elongate, with a long row of spines approaching a score in number.

Telsonic somite well produced posteriorly, its apex rounded and very slightly

excavate.

Genotype Sympodomma bakeri Hale.

The female second antennae of two species and of ? Sympodomma africana

are shown in fig. 30. They are apparently very much as in Bathycuma elongata

Hansen, excepting that the conical terminal joint is articulated. The large first

and second joints are not very distinctly separated, and the distal part of the

second is divided off by a faint suture.

Wadd

4 ion ae

ions =

Fig. 30

Glyphocuma, branchial lamellae, mandibles and female second antennae: A, bakeri;

B, inacqualis; C, dentata. D, Second antenna of female of ? Sympodomma africana.

The branchial lamellae are delicate, leaf-like and overlapping; they are

arranged on the narrow epipod in a long row of more than a dozen, and with one

separate and reflexed.

The large distal lobe of the third maxilliped has two conspicuous plumose

setae; the ischium is long and does not differ much in length from the merus.

carpus, propodus or dactylus.

This genus is close to Syutrpodomana but differs in having an exopod on the

fourth peraeopod of the male, and apparently in having the merus of the third

maxilliped less expanded externally. It somewhat resembles Heterocuma but in

that genus the crest of the carapace is not incised in the female, the third maxilli-

ped has the carpus widened as in Cyclaspis, the terminal joint of the second

270

antenna of the female is tiny, the telsonic somite is very different, and the joints

of the flagellum of the male second antenna, as in Cumopsis, are extremely short.

In Glyphocuma (and apparently also in Sympodomma) the joints of this

flagellum are nowhere much longer than wide, indeed, the proximal segments are

twice as wide as long.

Sexual dimorphism—In the four species referred here, the ovigerous female

and immature male have the crest of the carapace finely or coarsely serrate, or

incised with the resultant projection or projections angular. Adult males are

available for all; and these have the armature of the dorsum obliterated. The

antennal notch is distinct in females but is obliterated (or “widely open”) in the

adult male.

The tendency of the antero-lateral portion of the fourth pedigerous somite

of the male to override the third somite is in this genus emphasised in the adult,

the pleural plates being produced forwards on each side into a lobe, defined above

by a notch. In the female the overlapping of the second somite by the anterior

pleural part of the third is also rather pronounced.

Kery To FEMALES OF SPECIES OF GLYPHOCUMA

1 Anterior half of crest of carapace cut into nine or more small teeth ist a 2

Anterior half of crest of carapace with one or two incisions, but no row of teeth. 3

Carapace twice as long as deep, with dorsal teeth inconspicuous; antennal notch

narrow; ocular lobe projecting well beyond pseudorostral lobes and with corneal

lenses not confined to anterior portion .... sist ehh byt ... bakeri (Hale)

Carapace less than twice as long as deep, with dorsal teeth large; antennal notch

wide; ocular lobe not projecting beyond pseudorostral lobes and with the small

corneal lenses restricted to anterior portion... as ... dentata sp. nov.

3 Carapace slender, with two dorsal incisions, the second with two or three

denticles; ocular lobe narrow, more than twice as long as wide, apically rounded

when seen from above .... fa vies _ By a _ macqualis sp. nov.

Carapace robust, with one dorsal incision and two or three denticles; ocular lobe

as wide as long, apically angular when seen from above... serventyt sp. nov.

Key to MALeEs or SPECIES oF GLYPHOCUMA

1 Body slender, the carapace more than twice as long as deep ont pit my a

Body rather robust, the carapace less than twice as wide as deep .... ee, ie Oo

2 Main corneal lenses large and conspicuous; dorsal edge of carapace barely

sinuate. Exopod of fourth peraeopod less than half as long as basis and with

flagellum tWo-jointed Pes bind =~ on ae bakeri (Hale)

Main corneal lenses indistinct, not large; dorsal edge of carapace markedly

sinuate. Exopod of fourth peraeopod almost as long as basis and with flagellum

five-jointed . ah ai ant tes tops inaequalis sp.nov.

3 Ocular lobe narrow, more than twice as long as wide, with corneal Jenses con-

fined to anterior end which is rounded, or only minutely produced. dentata sp nov.

Ocular lobe as wide as long, with corneal lenses reaching to base; anterior end as

seen from above angular and projecting beyond pseudorostral lobes.

servenlyt sp. nov.

GLYPHOCUMA BAKER! (Hale)

Sympodonuna bakeri Hale, 1936, 396, fig. 3 and 4.

Adult Male (10 mm., Spencer Gulf, South Australia). Integument well

calcified and brittle; when dried it does not contort or shrivel. Carapace one-

fourth of total length of animal, slender and compressed; its depth is less than

half the length; surface generally smooth except for the distinct median dorsal

carina, which becomes less prominent posteriorly ; the mid-line shows no trace of

the small teeth present in the female, and the dorsal margin, as seen from the side,

271

is barely arched and almost imperceptibly sinuate. Antennal notch widely open

(or rather, the notch is completely obliterated) and angle very obtuse. Ocular

lobe one-and-one-half times as long as wide; in front it is produced and narrowly

subtriangular, carinate anteriorly—the little ridge extending to its apex, which

thus appears acute as seen from above; three large pale corneal lenses arranged in

a triangle, a smaller pair near apex, and two more on each side of lobe; the median

lens is of somewhat quadrate form; the lobe is blackly pigmented, as shown in the

figure. Pseudorostral lobes crenate in front, not reaching apex of eye-lobe.

Pedigerous somites. together as long as carapace and a little less than half

as long as pleon; the somites are angular (roof-shaped) dorsally with the median

carina fine but distinct; there is a rather large pit near the rounded antero-lateral

Fig. 31

Glyphocuma bakeri, adult 10 mm. male; lateral view and (ceph.) cephalothorax

from above (x13); c. pace, anterior half of carapace from above and from

the side (x 33).

angle of the third, which overlaps the second on the sides; overriding anterior

pleural part of fourth subtriangular and narrowly rounded.

The pleon is almost smooth except for a dorsal carina, which is moderately

distinct on the first to fourth somites but becomes abruptly stronger on the fifth

and telsonic somites.

First antenna with third joint of peduncle a little longer than second, which

is half as long as the first joint; flagellum two-jointed (incompletely three-

jointed) ; accessory flagellum two-jointed as in female.

Mandibles with about 16 spines in the long row.

Basis of third maxilliped three times as long as palp, with the dentate distal

lobe reaching to beyond middle of length of carpus and furnished with two long

272

and stout plumose setae (as well as smaller plumose setae); ischium, merus,

carpus and propodus differing little in length.

First peraeopod with carpus barely reaching beyond antennal angle; the

slender basis equal in length to the remaining joints together and with short

plumose setae on both margins; ischium with a distal tooth and plumose seta on

inner side; carpus equal in length to propodus and half as long again as dactylus.

Basis of second peraeopod barely as long as the rest of limb, margined with

plumose setae, and with a short external distal spine; merts and carpus subequal

in length, each shorter than dactylus, which is three times as long as propodus;

the merus has two distal outer spines and one at middle of inner margin; the

carpus has two spines on inner margin, one being distal, and four of different

SS: exop.

ae prp. 4

ant. 1 .

oi ee

Prp.

Fig. 32

Giyphocuma bakeri, adult 10 mm. male; ant. 1, first antenna (x 53; flagella, x 125);

mxp. 3, palp and distal part of basis of third maxilliped (x53); prp. and urop..;

peraeopods and uropod (x30); exop. prp. 4, exopod of fourth leg (x 125).

c. pace, Carapace of 12 mm. male (x 9.).

lengths at the external apical portion; dactylus with one or two spines on each

margin and a cluster of six distally, the longest about as long as the joint.

Outer distal slope of carpus of third to fifth legs with three long setae and

one shorter one, the longest reaching well beyond apex of dactylus; inner and

outer margins of carpus with one or two setae. The exopod of the fourth

peraeopod is barely half as long as the basis of its limb and has only two joints in

the flagellum; the setae are restricted to three long plumose bristles, on the

flagellum and one on inner margin of peduncle.

Peduncle of uropod slender, one-fourth as long again as telsonic somite, and

more than half as long again as rami; exopod a little longer than endopod, with

the longest of its three slender terminal spines more than half as long as the

273

ramus; second segment of endopod a little longer than first and equal in length

to its longest distal spine.

Colour pale yellow with brown chromatophores (see figure).

Adult Male (12 mm., St. Vincent Gulf, South Australia). The dorsal

margin of the carapace, as seen from the side, is slightly angular at about the

middle of the length, otherwise as with the smaller males.

Females (10 mm., from Spencer Gulf, South Australia, and with fully

developed marsupium) agree in all essentials with the subadult female previously

recorded, and are likewise boldly spotted with dark pigment. The dorsal carina

is almost crest-like at the anterior part of the carapace, where the number of teeth

into which it is cut are constant in number within a small range, approximately

a dozen being present in all.

Ovigerous Female (10 mm., Portland, Victoria). Integument well calcified.

Colour grey with black chromatophores on thorax and mottlings on pleon.

Loc—South Australia: St. Vincent Gulf (type loc., W. H. Baker, 1910),

Brighton (Misses P. Mawson and L. M. Angel, and K. Sheard, submarine light,

Oct. 1941); Spencer Gulf, Port Lincoln, 2 fath. (K. Sheard, submarine light,

Oct. 1941 and Feb. 1944); Kangaroo Island, Antechamber Bay, 4 fath. (K.

Sheard, submarine light, Apri! 1941). Victoria: Portland, 8 feet, sandy bottom

(HH. M. Hale, submarine light. Aug. 1944).

This species was originally described from a single female, but the sub-

marine light method of collecting proves that it is not unconunon in South Aus-

tralia, A haul taken at Port Lincoln on 17 February 1944 is of particular interest ;

about one-tenth of the catch (which of course consisted of many different

organisms) was preserved. Included in this sample G. bakeri is represented by

over six hundred males and a score of females, all approximately 10 mm. in

length. The males are all highly calcified, and are much paler in colour than the

females. The latter are, in striking contrast, greyish with conspicuous colour

spotting (Hale 1936, fig. 3); they have all recently moulted, the integument being

soft and quickly collapsing on drying. The large marsupium is empty, and the

fully developed yellow ovaries (eggs, 0°3 mm.) are visible through the thin exo-

skeleton (compare Cyclaspis usitata Hale 1944, 124).

At Brighton the larger males, 12 mm. in length, were abundant in October

1941, but no females were then taken.

The plumose hairs on the basis of the third to fifth peraeopods tend to collect

Hocculent debris in preserved material and so to conceal the exopods; these setae

are arranged in two series which may “sandwich” the exopod, particularly that

of the fourth peraeopod, which is smaller than in the male of the other three

species and has only a rudimentary two-jointed flagellum in both 10 mm. and

12 mm. examples. It is very like the exopod occurring on the second and third

peraeopods in Heterocuma intermedia (Fage 1924, 364, fig. 1), differing only in

having a second tiny joint in the flagellum,

Glyphocuma dentata sp. nov.

Ovigerous Female. Integument thin and delicate, scarcely at all calcified.

Carapace somewhat Jess than one-fourth of total length of animal; depth

distinctly more than half the length; subtriangular as seen from above, widest

near posterior end, where it is as broad as deep; upper contour slightly arched;

dorsum with a median longitudinal carina, on anterior half cur into about ten

teeth the last minute and on posterior half rather rugose; anterior part of inferior

margin, immediately behind antennal tooth serrate; on each side of the front half

of the mid-line there is a shallow depression delimited by a low lateral tumidity ;

antennal notch moderately deep and open and antennal tooth subacute. Ocular

lobe about three times as long as wide, rounded anteriorly and with nine small

lenses in frontal part, eight grouped around a central one; the first two of the

dorsal teeth are situated on the lobe. Pseudorostral lobes very oblique in front,

extending almost to apex of ocular lobe.

Pedigerous somites together equal in length to carapace, each with a median

dorsal carina; first overlapped by second but visible for whole depth; second

somite widest the others successively decreasing in breadth, so that, viewed from

above, the cephalothorax is sub-oval in shape.

ceph, juv.d

Glyphocuma dentata; lateral views and (ceph.) upper view of cephalothorax of

type ovigerous female and allotype adult male (x19); oc. lobe, ocular lobe of

adult male (x 33); ceph. juv., cephalothorax of subadult male from above (x19).

Pleon somites each with a fine dorsal carina; postero-lateral margins of first

to fourth angularly produced backwards, those of fifth less markedly angular; all

but fifth approximately equal in length; telsonic somite produced between bases

of uropods.

First antenna with second and third joints of peduncle subequal in length,

together almost as long as first joint and each shorter than the two-jointed

flagellum; accessory lash two-jointed.

Mandible with usual long spine row of 18 to 20.

Basis of third maxilliped twice as long as rest of limb, and with well-

developed external apical lobe, reaching distal end of the slightly dilated merus.

Virst peraeopod long and slender, the carpus extending to beyond the antennal

tooth; basis not much more than two-thirds as long as rest of leg, distally sub-

truncate and with some plumose setae and (at middle third) three spines on inner

275

margin; propodus nearly one-fourth as long again as carpus, which is as long as

the dactylus.

Second peraeopod with basis shorter than remaining joints together; ischium

very short; merus as long as carpus, with two distal spines; carpus with distal

spines and one on inner margin; dactylus elongate, four times as long as propodus

and as long as carpus and propodus together; with short lateral spines and four

distal, the longest of which is only one-fourth the length of the dactylus.

Third to fifth peraeopods with three setae at distal end of carpus, the longest

reaching beyond tip of dactylus.

anti. i ¢

Se cos

Sp RT PF, BOP ape rer

‘i AEN

\ \ .

ik ON

£ re

Vig. 34

Glyphocuma dentata, paratype ovigerous female and subadult male; ant. 1, and

mand., first antenna and mandible (x 85); mxp. 3, prp. and urop., third maxilliped,

peraeopods and uropods (x32); mxp. lobe, external distal lobe and ischium of

third maxilliped, plumose setae omitted (x 170).

Peduncle of uropod a little longer than telsonic somite, and than exopod.

with half-a-dozen spines, alternating with shorter spines, on inner margin and a

more prominent spine at inner apical angle; first joint of endopod half as long

again as second, with ten unequal spines on inner edge, several on outer, and a

more prominent spine at inner distal angle; second joint of endopod with a row

276

ot short spines successively increasing in length on inner margin and a few on

outer, and with a terminal spine as long as the joint; exopod a little longer than

endopod, its second segment with spines on both margins and with the longest

terminal spine as in endopod.

Colour: pale translucent yellow spattered with brown all over body, leaving

margins of carapace and somites pale; darker on front of carapace and with a

large brown marking above each pseudorostral suture and a smaller one below it.

eve darkly pigmented. Legs translucent. Ova dark yellow.

Length, 7 mm,

Adult Male. Carapace more slender than in female and lacking all trace of

dorsal teeth, the upper edge being very faintly sinuate; there is a small shallow

subcireular depression above the end of each pseudorostral suture, and below this

a small tumidity immediately behind end of suture; median carina distinct, sharply

defined anteriorly. Antennal notch very obtuse (widely open) and angle rounded;

margin of carapace posterior to angle with obsolete serrations. Ocular lobe

slightly widened at base, twice as long as breadth and with lenses small and

situated near the apex.

Pleural portions of first pedigerous somite not at all exposed.

Iirst peraeopod not quite so long as in female,

Second peraeopod with basis almost as long as rest of limb and terminal

spine of dactylus nearly as long as its joint.

Last pair of pleopods abruptly smaller than the first four.

Endopod of uropod almost as long as exopod.,

Colour as in female.

Length, 7*1 moi.

Submature Male. Males about as long as the adult but with the pleopods

not fully developed exhibit the above sexual differences excepting that the dorsal

teeth of the carapace are still present (fig. 33, ceph. juv.).

Loc.—New South Wales: off Cape Three Points, 25-32 fath., sticky mud

and shell (“Thetis” Station 13, Feb. 1898): off Jibbon, 46-55 fath., sand to

mud (“Thetis” Station 38, Mar. 1898) ; 5 miles east of Port Hacking, 100 metres,

on mud (type female, “Cronulla” Trawl Station, July 1943); 4 miles off Eden,

70 metres (K. Sheard, Oct. 1943); 4 miles east of Port Hacking, 80 metres, on

mud (i. Sheard, trawled. May 1944); Ulladulla, 75 metres (allotype male, K.

Sheard, trawled, June 1944). Types in South Australian Musetm, Reg. No.

€.2464 and C.2542.

The largest examples, taken off Eden, are just over 8 mm. in length.

This, like taequalis, is a common species in the localities cited. It ts noted

for both that the “Cronulla” examples retained represent only portions of a haul.

The dorsal teeth of the carapace of female and subadult male vary in num-

ber between nine and twelye. As in the other species of the genus, the full

development of the swimming apparatus of the male coincides with the loss of the

armature Of the carapace.

Glyphocuma inaequalis sp. nov.

Ovigerous female, Integument smooth and rather polished, with very fine

reticulate pattern.

Carapace less than one-fourth of total length of animal; slender, twice as

long as depth which is equal to the greatest width; seen from above the sides are

slightly curved and diverge evenly to the rear; dorsum with a prominent carina

oc. lobe @

c.pace 9

G.pace

Fig. 35

Glyphocuma inaequalis, type female and allotype male; lateral views and (ceph.)

cephalothorax from above (x 10); ¢. pace, anterior half of carapace from the side;

and oc. lobe, ocular lobe, etc. (x 25).

278

from apex of ocular lobe to hinder margin; seen from the side the dorsal margin

is elevated to form a short and abrupt declivity immediately posterior to the

ocular lobe and again at the first third of its length (see fig. 35, c. pace); the

edge of the second incision is cut into two denticles; for the posterior two-thirds

the dorsal margin is almost straight, slightly uneven, Antennal notch widely open

and angular; antennal tooth rounded. Ocular lobe narrow, about three times as

long as greatest width (basal) narrowly rounded in front and with nine pig-

mented but not sharply defined lenses. Pscudorostral lobes rounded anteriorly

and not reaching apex of ocular Jobe.

Pedigerous somites together longer than carapace, and half as long as pleon;

each with low dorsal carina; second somite longer than any of the others, its

rounded antero-lateral portion overlapping the first somite and the extreme

postero-lateral angle of carapace; postero-lateral portions of third to fifth somites

a little produced backwards, and rounded.

Pleon somites each with a median dorsal carina, all but fifth of about equal

length ; telsonic somite scarcely produced between bases of uropods,

First antenna with third joint of peduncle shorter than second, which is half

as long as first; flagellum two-jointed, not as long as third peduncular segment ;

accessory flagellum two-jointed.

Mandible with the usual long row of 18 or 19 spines.

Third maxilliped with basis nearly three times as long as rest of limb and

with the external apical angle strongly produced, the lobe reaching to level of the

shghtly expanded distal portion of merus.

First peraeopod long, the carpus extending beyond level of antennal angle;

with the slender basis a little longer than remaining joints together and having

short plumose setae on both margins, and one at external distal angle; carpus and

propodus subequal in length, each shorter than dactylus, which is about as long

as merus.

Second peraeopods with basis shorter than rest of limb, with plumose setae

on both margins, and a short apical spine; ischium short with one spine; merus

as long as carpus with a subapical spine on each margiil; carpus with two spines

(one apical) on inner margin and two, unequal, at outer distal angle; dactylus

more than twice as long as propodus, with three apical spines (the longest as long

as propodus and dactylus together), two on outer margin and one on inner.

Basis of third legs as long as rest of limb, of fourth shorter, of fifth much

shorter; outer apical portion of carpus with three setae and inner margin with

two or three; the longest fossorial setae reach beyond apex of dactylus.

Peduncle of uropod slightly longer than telsonic somite, the inner margin

with short spines of different lengths; endopod as long as exopod, the first joint

a little shorter than second and with a row of spines on inner edge, and one

specialised, at outer distal angle; of the inner spines, one at middle of length is

prominent and one at inner distal angle is particularly strong; second joint of

endopod with a spine two-thirds length of segment and two shorter spines at

rounded apex and a row of spines on inner margin ; exopod two-thirds as long as

peduncle with half-a-dozen short plumose setae on inner margin, a few short

spines on outer margin and five apical spines the largest half as long as exopod.

Colour: spattered with dark brown, leaving carapace and somites margined

with the pale creamy-white ground colour; also there are pale circular areas scat-

tered all over the body and particularly well defined on the carapace,

Length, 13-5 mm. (ova, 0°34 mm.).

Fig. 36

Glyphocuma imacqualis, type ovigerous female and paratype mate: ant. 1, first

antenna (x40); mxp. 3, prp. and urop., third maxilliped, peraeopods and uropods

(x 25); mxp. lobe, external distal lobe of third maxilliped, with setae omitted

(x 210).

280

Adult Male, Form not differing much from that of female but carapace

more compressed (less than half as wide as long) ; incisions of dorsal edge more

oblique, thus appearing less pronounced, and without denticles in second, Ocular

lobe a little wider and the lenses larger, with distinct granules. Antennal notch

more widely open.

Second pedigerous somite not longer than any of the others.

First peraeopod longer, with carpus shorter than propodus and about as long

as dactylus; propodus with a few long subapical setae, and dactylus with more

abundant setae; ischium with a tooth at inner distal angle.

Second peraeopod with basis as long as rest of limb, but otherwise much as

in female.

Uropod with peduncle proportionately longer and with endopod slightly

longer than exopod ; outer distal spine of first joint of endopod larger and exopod

with a greater number of plumose setae.

Colour decidedly paler than that of female with small separated brown spots;

the pale circular areas without dark pigment are nevertheless well defined.

Submature Male, Immature males, about as long as the adult but with

pleopods not quite fully developed, have dorsum of carapace as in the female; it

is hkewise remarkably uniform, the only variation being in the number of denticles

(two or three) in the second dorsal incision,

Length, 12°5 mm.

Loc—New South Wales: off Jibbon, 3 to 22 fath., sand to mud

("Thetis” Station 38, Mar. 1898); Broughton Island, Shallow Station (K.

Sheard, 11 p.m. to 12 midnight, Dec. 1938); off Jibbon, 35 fath., in coarse

sand (KK. Sheard, Feb. 1940) ; off Coffs Harbour, 50 metres (IX. Sheard, trawled,

June 1941) ; 5 miles east of Port Hacking, 100 metres on mud (“Cronulla” Trawl

Station, July 1943); off Wata Mooli, 70 metres (“Cronulla” Trawl Station 4,

9 am., July 1943); Jibbon Station, 70 metres (type loc., “Cronulla” Traw!

Station 3, July 1943); 4 miles east of Port Hacking, 80 metres, on mud (K.

Sheard, trawled, May 1944); Ulladuila, 75 metres CX. Sheard, trawled, June

1944). Tasmania: off Babel Island, 0-50 metres (“Warreen” Station 29, 1939).

Types in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. €.2453 and €.2454,

This form, evidently not uncommon, is readily recognised by the slender

form and the distinctive shape of the dorsal margin of the carapace in both sexes.

Glyphocuma serventyi sp. nov.

Ovigerous Female, Integument thin but firm, finely reticulate.

Carapace one-fourth of total length of animal; its depth is equal to three-

fourths its length, and is scarcely more than the greatest width; seen from above

it is widest posteriorly and tapers to the front; dorsal margin in lateral view

scarcely arched but abruptly incised at first third of length, the incision with two

small denticles, one of which is minute; there is a distinct median dorsal carina.

single anteriorly but bifurcating and diverging posterior to the incision; the thin

anterior portion of the carina bends abruptly downwards at front of ocular lobe.

trom above presenting the appearance of a triangular poiut projecting beyond

the pseudorostral lobes; at the posterior end of each pseudorostral suture there

is a low tubercle. Antennal notch rather deep and narrow ; antennal angle acute;

there is a shallow groove behind the notch and the inferior margin of the cara-

pace behind the tooth is serrate for a short distance. Pseudorostral lobes not

quite reaching to end of eye lobe, narrowly subtruncate in front. Ocular lobe

281

slightly longer than wide, with pigmented lenses, three arranged in a triangle

larger and more conspicuous than the others.

Pedigerous somites with an almost indiscernible median dorsal carina;

together they are almost as long as carapace and seen from above the second is

much the widest; the postero-lateral portions of the third to fifth are not greatly

backwardly produced.

Fig. 37

Glyphocuma serventyi, type female and allotype male; lateral views and (ceph.)

cephalothorax from above (x 163); c. pace, anterior portion of carapace (x33);

ant. n, antennal notch and angle, slightly flattened (x 33).

282

Pleon with an obsolete dorsal carina, the somites excepting fifth subequal.

First antenna with massive first peduncular joint as long as rest of appendage,

and with second shorter than third; both flagella two-jointed, the accessory lash as

usual very short.

Mandible with long row of 18 or 19 spines.

Basis of third maxilliped (including lobe in the measurement) twice as long

as palp, serrate and with plumose hairs on distal half of inner margin; the external

lobe reaches to the level of the distal margin of carpus, is strongly dentate on

inner edge and is capped with a pair of plumose setae stouter than the other

fringing setae.

First peraeopod with carpus reaching just beyond level of antennal tooth;

basis not produced apically and with a plumose seta at external distal angle; inner

margin with the usual plumose setae and three spines, the last subapical; the

remaining joints together are half as long again as the basis; propodus one-third

as jong again as dactylus which is subequal in length to carpus.

Second peraeopod with basis much shorter than rest of leg; ischium dis-

tinct; merus and carpus of equal length, together about as long as dactylus ; merus

with one or two distal spines on each side; carpus with two spines on inner margin

and a cluster of four at external distal angle; propodus very short; dactylus with

marginal spines and a distal cluster of five unequal spines the longest little more

than half length of the joint.

Third to fifth peraeopods with three carpal setae, decreasing in length, the

longest, like propodal seta, not reaching beyond tip of dactylus; basis of third

pair longer than rest of limb, of fourth and fifth shorter,

Peduncle of uropod little longer than either telsonic somite or exopod, and

with a row of about 14 stout spines, alternately short and longer, on inner edge;

exopod slightly longer than endopod, twice the length of the longest of its four

terminal spines and with few setae on inner margin; first joint of endopod threc-

fourths as long again as second with a row of unequal inner spines and a spine at

each distal angle, that on the inner side the stouter; second joint with half-a-dozen

short spines, successively increasing in length and with two short and one long

apical spine, the latter fully as long as the joint.

Colour: white, mottled with dark grey.

Length, 8°3 mm.

Adult Male. There is no trace of an incision in the scarcely arched, slightly

sinuate dorsal profile of the carapace; the latter is as wide as deep, narrower than

in female and with the sides evenly curved; not at all subtriangular as seen from

above; the median carina is double for the greater part of its length (a furrow

with raised edges, and emphasised as a shallow pit near posterior margin).

Pseudorostral lobes sinuate and rather widely truncate in front and with a few

low tumidities posteriorly. Ocular lobe depressed along sides, wider than long and

with lenses larger and more conspicuous than in female, but projecting similarly in

front of pseudorostral lobes as a triangular point. Antennal notch shallow and

widely open; antennal angle obtuse.

Third maxilliped as in female.

First peraeopod with basis not much shorter than remaining joints together ;

the whole limb scarcely longer relatively than in female, although the carpus and

propodus are a little longer in proportion to the other joints; ischium with a sub-

apical inner tooth.

Second peraeopods with basis stout and almost as long as rest of limb; spines

more robust but otherwise as in female,

283

~t>

TRG: my

Fig. 38

1, first antenna

and urop., third maxilliped,

d of young male.

ant.

oe v

v 8

& oa

o a

a =

Bas

0 aw

Bon?

——e-o

ov «

Taye

axe

as.

KES

Bo»

ao ~

i) n

cary base]

(x 84; accessory flagellum,

peraeopods and uropoc

Glyphocuma serventyt

284

The flagellum of the exopod of the fourth peraeopeds is short and five-

jointed, with setae not very long.

Peduncle of uropod distinctly longer than either telsonic somite or uropod,

with longer and slightly more numerous spines; endopod with twice as many

marginal spines as in female and with first joint less than half as long again as

second, which has the longest terminal spine shorter than the joint.

Length, 8-5 mm.

Subadult Male. A large but immature male has the dorsal margin of the

carapace incised and with two small teeth as in the female; in addition, there is a

small denticle midway between the incision and apex of ocular lobe. The exopod

of the fourth peraeopod has a three-jointed flagellum and the pleopods are not

fully developed and lack setae. The first peraeopod is a little shorter than in the

adult, the basis of the second peraeopod (as in the female) is much shorter than

rest of limb, and there are other slight differences due to immaturity.

Length, 8:5 mm.

Loc—Tasmania: Long Island, off Cape Barren Island (allotype male, D. L.

Serventy, submarine light, Nov. 1939) and off Babel Island, 39° 55’S.,

148° 31’ E. (“Warreen” Station 29, 1939). New South Wales: off Jibbon,

35 fathoms on coarse sand (type female, K. Sheard, Feb. 1940), Types in South

Australian Museum, Reg. No. C.2476 and C.2479,

This species is named after Dr. D, L. Serventy, Biologist on the “Warreen.”

It is distinguished by the deep carapace, projecting point at apex of ocular lobe

and other obvious features,

Genus SyMpopomMA Stebbing

Sympodomma Stebbing, 1912, 138; and 1913, 15.

As noted above, in the known species of Glyphocuma, females and immature

males always have the crest of the carapace serrate or incised, but this armature

is obliterated or smoothed out in the fully developed male. The few recorded

specimens of Sympodomma suggest that this obtains here also.

Five species have been placed in Stebbing’s genus. One of these, anomala

(Sars), must, in view of Glyphocuma, be regarded as doubtfully referred, as it

is known only from the female; this has dorsal teeth on the carapace. The imma-

ture males and females described for diomedeae (Calman) and africana Stebbling

have a dentate crest. S. weberi (Calman) is known from an adult male, which

has the dorsum of the carapace unarmed but slightly, though distinctly, sinuate.

The fifth species, eustraliensis Foxon is the only other in which the mature male

is recorded, and here also the dorsum is without serrations according to Foxon’s

fig. 5, but the female is stated to have “a marked dorsal ridge, which terminates

anteriorly in a sharp tooth over the typical elongated ocular lobe, and the ridge

is armed by a few hairs and three or four small denticles.” (Foxon, 1932, 388.)

Stebbing depicts 10 or 11 leaflets in the branchial apparatus of his africana.

In the figures of this species, and of Calman’s qweberi and diomedeac, the merus

of the third maxilliped is shown as rather more expanded than it is in the species

herein placed in Glyphocuma.

ERRATA

§ P, 270, ii key to males, second line: for “wide” read “long.”

P, 284, after last line, add: “represent a new species, but

description awaits more material.”

285

SUMMARY

It is suggested that two subfamilies, the Bodctriinae and Vaunthompsoniinae,

be recognised. The genus Cyclaspis of the first-named was reviewed previously

(Hale 1944), and herein Bodotria maculosa and [phinoe pellucida are described

as new.

In the Vaunthompsoniinae two new genera, Zenocuma and Pomacuma, allied

to Gephyrocuma Hale, are proposed; the first peraeopods in these three genera

can be folded to form the major part of an operculum which seals the cavity of

the carapace from the exterior. Also, Glyphocuma, gen. nov., allied to Sympo-

domma Stebbing, receives four species, the sexual dimorphism of which is

recorded, while the genus Leptocuma Sars is discussed and a key is given to all

the genera included. Species described as new are Zenocwna rugosa, Pomacuina

cognata, Gephyvrocuma repanda, Leptocuma vicaria, L. obstipa, L. serrifera,

L. intermedia, Vaunthompsonia nana, Glyphocuma inaequalis, G. dentata, and

Gr. servontyt,

REFERENCES

Carman, W. T. 1907 “On New and Rare Crustacea of the Order Cumacea

from the Collection of the Copenhagen Museum.” pt. i Trans. Zool.

Soc., 18, 1-58, pl. i-ix

C'AaLMAN, W. T. 1910 “On Heterocima sarsi Miers.” Ann. Mag. Nat. Tist.

(8), 6, 612-616, pl. x

Face, M. Lours 1924 “A propos d’une espece nouvelle du genre /eterocunia.”

Bull. Mus. Nat. d’Hist., Paris, 30, 364-367, fig. 1

Foxon, G. E. H. 1932 Great Barrier Reef Exped., 1928-29. Sci. Rep. 4,

No. 11, 387-395, fig. 5-10

{fAce, Hernerr M. 1928 “Australian Cumacea.” Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust..

52, 31-48, fig. 1-17

HALE, Hernerr M. 1936 “Cumacea from a South Australian Reef.” Rec.

S. Aust. Mus., 5, 404-438, fig. 1-23

HALE, Hrrnert.M. 1943 “Notes on Two Sand-dwelling Cumacea, Gephyro-

cuma and Picrocuma.” Ree. S. Aust. Mus., 7, 337-342, fig. 1-9

HALE, Hernert M. 1944 “The Genus Cyelaspis.’ Rec. S, Aust. Mus., 8,

63-142, fig. 1-60

HANnseN, H. J. 1895 “TIsopoden, Cumaceen u. Stomatopoden der Plankton-

Expedition.” Ergebn. d. Plankton-Exped., Bd. ii, 1-105, pL. i-viit

Hansen, H. J. 1920 “Crustacea Malacostraca,” pt. iv, The Order Cumacea.

Danish Ingolf-Exped., 3, (6), 1-85, pl. i-iv.

Sars, G. O. 1873 “Beskrivelse af syv nye Cumaceer fra Vestindien og det Syd-

Atlantiske Ocean.” KK. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Hand., Bd. 11 1-30, pl. i-vi

Srepping, T. R. R. 1912 “The Sympoda” (Pt. iv, of South African Crus-

tacea for the Marine Investigations in South Africa). Ann, S. Afr.

Mus., 10, 129-176, pl. i-xvi

Stesnine, T. R. R. 1913 “Cumacea (Sympoda)”. Das Tierreich, Lief.. 39,

1-210, fig. 1-137

ZIMMER, Cart 1908 “Die Cumaceen der Deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition.”

Wiss. Ergeb. d. Tiefsee-Exp. “Valdivia,” 8, 157-196, pl. xxxvi-xlvi

ZiIMMun, C. 1213) “Die Cumaceen der Deutschen Siidpolar-Expedition,

1901-1903.” -D. Stidpolar-Exp., 1901-1903, 14 (Zool. vi), 439-491,

pl. xl-xlvi, text fig. 1-2

ZIMMER, Cart 1914 Cumacea, Fauna Stidwest Aust., 5, 175-185, fig. 1-18

ZIMMER, CArt 1921 Results of Dr. Mjoberg’s Swedish Scientific Expeditions

to Australia, 1910-1913, 26, Cumaceen, K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Hand.,

61, (No. 7), 1-13, fig. 1-16

RECENT AUSTRALIAN SPECIES

OF THE FAMILY RISSOIDAE (MOLLUSCA)

By BERNARD C. COTTON, Conchologist, South Australian Museum

Summary

In the following paper an attempt is made to father together all species of Australian Recent

Rissoidae and to allot them to their proper genera. Australian authors have not previously separated

the families Rissoidae, Rissoinidae and Litiopidae in the same way in which they are now

recognised. We find under Rissoidae such genera as Diala which belongs to Litiopidae, Cithna

belonging to Cyclostremidae, Rissolina, Stiva and Rissoina belonging to Rissoinidae where the New

Zealand Nozeba also belongs, and Heterorissoa placed by Thiele in Rissoellidae. New species from

the dredgings made by the late Sir Joseph Verco and species collected by the author and others are

described. It is pretty certain that many more species remain to be discovered in shell sand and alive

on the various weeds and sea-grasses around our coast, even in the shallow waters accessible to the

amateur collector. As it is almost impossible for students to classify the Rissoids or even find access

to much of the literature concerning them, it is hoped that this preliminary survey with its keys,

brief diagnoses and original references will encourage further study both in the Recent and fossil

fields. With regard to the latter, much work will have to be done, and no doubt the species will form

good indicators of strata. Small mollusca of this type can be obtained in quantity, undamaged by the

drill, which so often destroys the larger forms.

286

RECENT AUSTRALIAN SPECIES

OF THE FAMILY RISSOIDAE (MOLLUSCA)

By Brernarp C. Corron, Conchologist, South Australian Museum

{Read 14 September 1944]

PLATE XVI

INTRODUCTION

In the following paper an attempt is made to gather together all species of

Australian Recent Rissoidae and to allot them to their proper genera. Australian

authors have not previously separated the families Rissoidae, Rissoinidae and

{Litiopidae in the same way in which they are now recognised. We find under

Rissoidae such genera as Diala which belongs to Litiopidae, Cithna belonging to

Cyclostremidae, Rissolina, Stiva and Rissoina belonging to Rissoinidae where the

New Zealand Nozeba also belongs, and //eterorissoa placed by Thiele in Rissoelli-

dae. New species from the dradzines made by the late Sir Joseph Verco and

species collected by the author and others are described. It is pretty

certain that many more species remain to be discovered in shell sand and alive on

the various weeds and sea-grasses around our coasts, even in the shallow waters

accessible to the amateur collector. As it is almost impossible for students to

classify the Rissoids or even find aceess to much of the literature concerning them,

it is hoped that this preliminary survey with its keys, brief diagnoses and original

references will encourage further study both in the Recent and fossil fields.

With regard to the latter, much work will have to be done, and no doubt the

species will form good indicators of strata. Small mollusca of this type can be

obtained in quantity, undamaged by the drill, which so often destroys the larger

forms.

Key To GENERA or AUSTRALIAN RIsSSOTDAE

a. Shell moderately elongate.

b. Shell not scalariform.

c. Aperture not separated from the body whorl or duplicate.

d. Aperture edge thin, often reflexed, much thickened

internally, no exterior varix.

e. Smooth or weakly developed axials th fas vw £stea

ce. Axials of elongate nodules os . Subestea

ce. Aperture edge thickened by means of 2 an external 1 varix,

f. Sculptured.

g. Sculpture not clathrate.

h. Axial ribs dominant . . . .. dlaurakia

hh. Spiral sculpture dominant.

i. Spiral cords .... : ant ‘ et ... Lironoba

ii. Spiral incised lines.

j. Aperture circular, thickened within .... a. Botelloides

jj. Aperture ovate, not thickened within ... Subonoba

ge. Sculpture clathrate.

k. Protoconch spirally lirate, dull... .. Aferclina

kk. Protoconch smooth, glossy mas a. Linemera

fi. Smooth or nearly so.

1, Aperture entire, shell not truncate, solid.

m. Smooth, whorls convex, aperture

shnple, rotund ron Mice ... Notosetia

mm. Smooth, whorls flattened, aperture

slightly channelled below, aperture

ovato-pyriform m3 Feet .. Dardanula

I, Aperture discontinuous, effuse, shell

truncate at the apex, transparent a. Enusetia

Vrans. Koy. Soc. S.A., 68, (2), 306 November 1944

287

cc. Aperture separated from the body whorl or duplicate.

n. Cylindrical, protoconch large,

globose, smooth or ~ . Epigrus

nn. Normal shape, protoconch not

smooth,

o. Protoconch stippled with very

fine lines... ren xa uw. Serobs

oo. Protoconch engraved with a

honeycomb pattern 1958 a. Notoscrobs

bb. Shell scalariform =... ah abe m) yee =a .. Anabathron

aa, Shell very elongate, about four times as long as wide.

p. Axially sculptured i a Caenaculunt

pp. Spirally sculptured 7 w. Altenuata

Estra Iredale 1915

Estea Iredale 1915, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 47, 451

Genotype: Rissoa sosterophila Webster 1905—Devenport, near Auckland, New

Zealand.

Shell minute, oval, elongate, subrimate, dull, smooth, no sculpture; spire

conical, higher than the aperture; outlines slightly convex; whorls rather rapidly

increasing, flattened, periphery subangled, base rounded, suture not much

impressed ; aperture slightly oblique, oval, angled above, peristome continuous, but

much thickened internally, sharp, very little expanded; columella short, arcuate,

callous; operculum colourless and presenting a malleated appearance on the inner

surface; protoconch conical, small, of two flat smooth whorls.

Distribution—New Zealand, Australia, Tasmania. Fossil, Tertiary.

Remarks—Distinguished by the smooth shell, the protoconch and shape of

aperture, which is perpendicular, circular, with peristome reflected all round.

This heterogenous group may represent a number of genera. In any case, there

are so many and varied species allotted here that it seems almost impossible and

futile to attempt to key them before they have been further studied. There appear

to be at least seven groups represented in Australia.

(a) Species which are quite smooth and polished like epproxima.,

(b) Species which are sculptured with microscopic axial accremental striae

like fasmanica,

(d) Species with strongly thickened and reflexed aperture lip like incidata.

(e) Species with comparatively little thickened and reflected aperture lip

like janjucensis.

(£) Species with a very blunt apex like frara.

(g) Species with comparatively sharp apex like rubicunda.

Gatlif€ and Gabriel, in figuring the species Rissoa bicolor Petterd, point out

that the protoconch, under microscopic examination, “shows that the two-whorled

protoconch is minutely granulated, these granules being symmetrically arranged

in about twelve spiral rows, which are more clearly defined on the second whorl.”

A similar sculpture or texture is referred to in this paper under the genus

Merelina.

EsTEA APPROXIMA (Petterd 1884)

Rissoa cyclostoma rosea Tenison Woods 1884, Proc, Roy. Soc. Tasm.. 153, not

Deshayes 1863 or Hutton 1873

Rissoa approxima Petterd 1884, Journ. Conch., 138, 4.

Rissoa woodst Pritchard and Gatliff 1902, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict.. 104.

Locs.—Tasm.: Blackman’s Bay (type loc. rasea), Tamar Heads (type loc.

aphroxtma)» Vict.: Western Port (type loc. woods?) ; S. Aust.: shell sand from

288

Guichen Bay, Robe, Largs Bay, St. Francis Island, Venus Bay, also Gulf. St.

Vineent, 14 fathoms.

Remarks——-Smooth polished and thin lipped. Tasmanian North Coast speci-

mens may be quite white, rose-red, brown or partly white and partly red and

brown,

EstTea BicoLor (Petterd 1884)

Kissoa bicolor Petterd 1884, Journ. Conch., 4, 137.

Loes—Tasm.: North Coast (type loc.), Derwent Estuary, Cape Raoul, 50

fathoms; Vict.: Portsea; S. Aust.: Beachport 110 fathoms, Cape Borda 62

fathoms, Gulf. St. Vincent and Spencer Gulf; N.S.W.: Cape Three Points 41 to

30 fathoms.

Remarks—Distinguished by the white band beneath the suture. South Aus-

tralian specimens show variations from the type as follows:

(1) More blunt at the apex, suture more impressed, whorls more convex,

mouth with more expanded lip and rounder.

‘2: Whorls more rapidly increasing, minute rimate perforation, aperture

projecting beyond the level of the spire whorls.

é3) Whorls less rapidly increasing. mouth not so expanded, not so bevelled

on the inner margin,

ISspia conus NARITA (Hedley and May 1908)

Rissou columnaria tledley and May 1908, Rec. Aust., Mus., 7, 117, pl xxii, fig. 9.

Lees —Tasm.: seven miles cast of Cape Pillar 100 fathoms (type loc.) ; Viet.

Hemarks—Distinguished by the very elongate shape, variable colour, axials

‘ine, close set aecremental striae.

Estea FRENCHIENSIS (Gatliff and Gabriel 1908)

Rissoa frenchiensis Gatliff and Gabriel 1908, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 379.

Rissoa cylostoma Tenison Woods 1877, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 152, not Recluz

1843.

Locs—Vict.: Western Port 6 fathoms, Port Phillip, Puebla Coast; Tasm.:

Long Bay (type loc.), Blackman’s Bay; 5. Aust.: shell sand from Robe, Norman-

ville, MacDonnell Bay, St. Francis Island, Cape Borda 62 fathoms; N.S.W.:

Port Jackson.

Remarks—Subturreted, tumid in the middle, suture margined with a white

line. This species has a comparatively greater diameter than approxima.

ESTEA INCIDATA (Frauenfeld 1867)

Sabanaea incidata Frauenfeld 1867, Novara Exped., Moll, 12, pl. ii, fig. 19.

Locs.—N.S.W.: Botany Bay (type loc.) ; Tasm.: South and East; Qld.; Vict.

Renarks—Remarkable for its thickened and expanded aperture peristome.

Hstea erma n. sp.

(PL. xvi, fig. 1)

ilolatype: Reg. No, 1.14184, South Australian Museum.

Shell conical, thick, polished ruby brown, smooth, whorls five, flat and angled

at the suture without a peripheral channel; no spiral punctuations; peristome of

aperture thickened. Height 1-2 mm., diameter 0-7 mm.

289

Locs.—S. Aust.: Cape Borda 62 fathoms (type loc.), Dackstairs Passage

22 fathoms; Tasm.: North Coast; Vict.

Remarks—Differs from mcidata in being smaller, having the apex less blunt

and no spiral punctuations. One variety has an incision at the very angulate

periphery, and another near the base. This may be the species recorded as inendat

in Victoria and Tasmania.

EsTea TRAVADOIDES (Gatliff and Gabriel 1913)

Rissoa iravadoides Gatliff and Gabriel 1913, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 26, 67.

Locs—Vict.: dredged off Wilson’s Promontory (type loc.), Western Port

8 to 10 fathoms; Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms.

Distinguished by the numerous regular spiral lirae.

Remarks

Lsrea JANJUCENSIS (Gatliff and Gabricl 1913)

Kissoa janjucencis Gatlff and Gabriel 1913, Proc, Roy. Soc. Vict., 26, 67, pl. Vill.

fig. 2.

Locs—Vict.: Jan Juc, Puebla Coast (type loc.), Western Port 8 to 10

fathoms; Tasm.: Penguin, North Coast in shell sand; S. Aust.: Outer Harbour

shell sand, Beachport 40 fathoms.

Remarks—Distinguished by the rather large, roundly pyriform aperture.

laterally extended to the right and with a complete peristome. The sculpture in

relata is even weaker.

Esrea praAkEpa (Hedley 1908)

Rissoa praeda Hedley 1908, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 33, 468, pl. x. fig. 35.

Locs.—-N.S.W.: Middle Harbour (type loc.).

Reimarks—The sheil is distinguished by the massive perpendicwar mbs

numbering 11 on the body whorl, and stopping at the periphery, leaving the base

smooth; apex smooth,

Estea puivitta (Ledley 1906)

Rissoa pulvilla Hedley 1906, Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W., 30, 526, pl xxxii, hy. 25.

Loes.—N.S.W.: Manly (type loc.).

Remarks—Distinguished by the polished surface with microscopic growth

lines and two spiral brown colour bands, separating this species from tasrtantica.

which it otherwise somewhat resembles.

Estea amblycorymba n. sp.

(PI. xvi, fig. 2)

tlolotype: Reg. No. D1i4185, South Australian Museum.

Shell minute. subcylindrical, thin, shining, white and polished under 10x

magnification; very finely spirally and axially striate under 50x, striae a little

more pronounced around the base; whorls four, flatly convex, widely marginate

round and below the sutures with an opaque white band; protoconch flattened.

of one and a half depressed whorls. giving the shell a flat-topped appearance :

aperture in the plane of the axis, pyriform, peristome reflected and entire. Height

2-1 mm., diameter 1-0 mm.

Locs-——S. Aust.: Gulf St. Vincent 14 fathoms (type loc.), Backstairs Pas-

sage 22 fathoms, Streaky Bay, Beachport 40 and 110 fathoms.

290

Remarks—The species is unique in having the dull white band below the

suture and the axial and spiral microscopic sculpture. The body whorl is com-

paratively larger in proportion to the spire than any other Estea described.

Esrea TasmANICA (Tenison Woods 1876)

Lidina tasmanica Tenison Woods 1876, Proc. Roy Soc. Tasm., 29.

Locs—Tasm.: Long Bay 6 fathoms (type loc.), Pirate Bay, Derwent Estuary

i0 fathoms, east coast 10 to 100 fathoms; S. Aust.: Cape Rorda 62 fathoms,

Newland Head 26 fathoms; Vict.

Remarks—Bears some relation to pulvilla Hedley trom New South Wales.

Esrea tiara (May 1915)

Amphithalamus tiara May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 96, pl. vii, fig. 35.

Locs.—Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms (type loc.).

Remarks—tThis species is evidently one belonging to the pertuinida type with

blunt and flattened apex, which in this case is so flattened that the small tip on

the top of the second whorl makes the whole protoconch look like a turban crown-

ing the shell,

Estea tumMipa (Tentson Woods 1876)

Piala tiumida Tenison Woods 1876, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 147

Locs—-Tasm.: Swansea (type loc.), King Island; 5. Aust.: Beachport 40

and 150 fathoms, Cape Jaffa 130 fathoms; Vict.: Western Port.

Remarks—Distinguished by the almost obsolete oblique axial plaits, and the

colour banding of yellow above and below the sutures.

EsreA FRAUENFELD! (Frauenfeld 1867}

Rissoa frauenfeid: Frauenfeld 1867, Novara Exped., Moll., 10, pl. ii, fig. 13.

Loces —N.S.W.: Sydney, Port Jackson (type loc.) ; Qld.

Remarks—Distinguished from olivacea by the axial sculpture which is

obsolete on the upper whorls and pronounced on the body whorl in this species.

In olivacea the sculpture becomes obsolete on the body whorl.

Estea relata n. sp.

(Pl. xvi. fig. 3)

Holotype: Reg. No. D14186, South Australian Museum,

Shell subacute, conical, solid, fawn-coloured; whorls six, slightly convex,

suture deeply incised; penultimate and hody whorl weakly axially plicate ; aper-

ture oval; lip thickened. Height 3 mm., diameter 1-4 mm.

Loes-—S. Aust.: Gulf St, Vincent {4 fathoms (type foc.),

Remarks-—This species is related to fraucnfeldi approximating to the draw-

ing by Frauenteld of the less strongly sculptured variety which he gives together

with the typical form in his original description. This species relata is more solid

with strongly developed aperture and peristome.

lestea PERPoLITA May 1919

listea perpolita May 1919, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 61, pl. xv, fig. 13.

Loes.—Tasm.: Thouin Bay 50 fathoms (type loc.), Cape Pillar 100 fathoms.

Remarks—Distinguished by its rounded whorls, flattened summit and high

polish, differing from rubicunda in being shorter and blunter.

291

Esrea PertUMIDA (May 1915)

Amphithalamus pertionida May 1919, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 96, pl. vi, fig. 33.

Locs.—Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms (type loc.), Cape Pillar 100 fathoms.

Remarks—Distinguished by the swollen whorls, particularly the whorl fol-

lowing the protoconch. The whorls are also constricted abruptly at the base

towards the suture, somewhat like those of obeliscus.

IsteA puER May 1921

Estea puer May 1921, Check List Moll., Tasm., 51.

Rissoa pupoides May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 93, pl. v, fig. 26 (not pupordes

Stimpson 1851).

Locs—Tasm.: Port Arthur 50 to 70 fathoms (type loc.).

Remarks—Known only from the type locality. This species is remarkable

for its pupaeform shape. Its deeply impressed suture somewhat recalls pertunida

and obeliscus.

Este rusbicuNDA (Tate and May 1900)

Rissoa rubicunda May 1900, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 24, 100.

Locs-—Tasm.: Derwent Estuary (type loc.) ; Viet.: Western Port.

Remarks—Related to perpolita but is less blunt at the apex as well as show-

ing the other differences mentioned under perpolita.

Esrra Kersiizaw1 (Tenison Woods 1877)

Rissoina kershawi Tenison Woods 1877, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 57.

Locs.—Vict.: Western Port; Tasm.: North Coast Channel 10 fathoms (type

loc.).

Remarks—Distinguished by the axial riblets covering the whole of the

whorl.

Estea LABRoTOMA May 1919

Fstea labrotoma May 1909, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 61, pl. xv, fig. 14.

Locs—Tasm.: Frederick Henry Bay, taken from roots of the giant kelp

(type loc.).

Remarks—LDistinguished by the thick and well reflected peristome, which has

a deep indentation where it joins the body whorl.

Esrea Microcosta May 1919

Listea inicrocosta May 1919, Proc. Roy. Soc, Tasm., 61, pl. 15, fig. 12.

Locs-—Tasm.: seven miles east of Cape Pillar 100 fathoms (type loc.) ;

S. Aust.: Beachport 40 and 200 fathoms; Vict.

Remarks—Distinguished from kershawi by the much more numerous and

finer ribs, rounder mouth, and more cylindrical form.

Esra oneriscus (May 1915)

Rissoa obeliscus May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 92, pl. v, tig. 4+.

Locs.—Tasm.: Port Arthur 30 to 70 fathoms (type loc.), Schouten Island

40 fathoms; Vict.

Remarks — Distinguished by the elongate shell and the comparatively

numerous whorls which show a rather sudden constriction at the bottom, running

abruptly in towards the suture beneath. There is also an umbilical chink.

292

Esrea oLivAcea (Frauenfeld 1867)

Alvania olivacca Frauenfeld 1867, Novara Exped., Moll., 11, pl. ii. fig. 14.

Rissoa diemenensis Petterd 1884, 4, 138.

Locs—N.S.W.: Sydney (type loc.), Botany Bay, Manly Beach; Tasm.:

Tamar Heads, Table Cape (type loc. diemenensis), Derwent Estuary, King

Island, Bass Straits; S. Aust.: Port MacDonnell, Outer Harbour in shell sand.

Gulf St. Vincent 14 fathoms, Beachport 200 fathoms, St. Francis Island 15 and

20 fathoms; W. Aust.: 80 miles west of Eucla 80 fathoms; Old.; Vict.

Remarks—Distinguished by the axially ribbed shell, emarginate by an im-

pressed spirat just below the suture forming nodules on the top of the ribs. This

widely distributed shell is now added to the Western Australian fauna.

Subestea n. gen.

Genotype: leauia seminodosa May 1915—Tasm., Vhouin Bay 40 fathoms.

Sheil small, shining. pale yellowish, elongate; whorls five. rounded, stture

well impressed; spire whorls bear about nine nodulous-like ribs which become

weaker and narrower as they descend, and almost disappear about the middle oi

the body whorl; a few faint spirals on the hase; aperture rather broadly pyriform,

ebhque, surrounded by a well-defined margin; protoconch of one-and-a-hali

whorls, at first smooth and later developing about five faint spirals.

Distribution—Australia,

Remarks—-The genus is distinguished by the sculpture of nodulous-like ribs

S a 2

and the protoconch.

KKry to SPEciES oF SunEsTrEa

a. Shell wide and roundly subangulate at the periphery of the

body whorl ss or ma seas a Salebresa

aa. Sheil normal in shape and not subangulate at the periphery at

the body whorl.

b. Axial ribs stopping before the base is reached ; seninodosa

bb. Axial ribs extending unto the base : ae Hlindersi

SUBESTEA SALEBROSA (Frauenfeld 1867)

Kissoa salebrosa Vrauenteld 1867, Novara Exped., Moll., 11, pl. n. fig. 15,

Locs.—N.S.W.: Sydney (type loc.) Qld.: Viet.

Kemarks-—Distinguished from semitiodosa by the comparatively wide shel.

subangulation of the body whorl and rather subdilate aperture.

SUBESTEA SEMINODOSA (May 1915)

leania seminedosa May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 94, pl. vi, fig. 30.

Locs—Vasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms (type loc. ).

Remuarks—This genotype species is much smaller than flindersi and has i:

simpler sculpture. there being no interstitial pustules between the major nodules

at the suture.

SUBESTEA FLINDERST t Tenison Woods 1876)

(Pl. xvi, fig. 12)

Rissoma flindersi Penison Woods 1876, Proce. Roy Soc. Tasm., 154.

Loes—Vasm.: North West Coast (type loc.): S. Aust.: MacDonnell Bay.

Gulf St. Vincent, Largs Bay. Sceales Bay, St. Francis Island 35 fathoms:

W. Aust.: Hopetown; Vict.

Remarks—-A South Australian specimen of this species is figured, taken frou

shell sand at Glenelg. They are very closely allied to the Tasmanian specimen>

inthe May Collection.

203

HaAurAniA Iredale 1915

Haurakia Iredale 1915, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 47, 449.

Genotype: Rissoa hamiltoni Suter 1898—Lyall Bay, near Wellington, New

Zealand.

Shell thin, axial sculpture dominating, sometimes crossed by spiral threads,

which may continue to the base or stop at the periphery of the bedy whorl ;

aperture round and subvertical, peristome continuous ; proteconch smooth and

elobose with convex, whorls.

Pistribution—Austratia, New Zealand, Tasmania. lossil, Tertiary.

Remurks—The genus closely resembles Turboella Gray 1847 but is dis-

tinguished by the reunder aperture and less concave columella, Although regarded

sometimes as a synonym of Lurboella Gray = Pusillina Monterosato. the genus

has been accepte das distinet by all Aust ralian and New Zealand conchologists.

Key To Species or LIAURAKIA

a. Base spirally ribbed ... ws r ts _ ne . siranyei

aa. Base sincoth or with merely erital threadlets or axials,

bh. Base with spiral threadlets.

ce. Strong axiaJ ribs and weaker spirals.

d. No spiral band running round the top of the whorls. ... supracostata

dd. A spiral band running round the top of the w horls 0... profrundior

ec. Weak axial ribs and strong spirals.

ce. Bady whorl sculptured all over.

f. Ribs not arched ; 2, a8 ; ca HOVarensts

ff. Ribs arched , th : demcssa

ee. Body whorl smooth - in the middie mediolaevts

bh. Base smooth or with axials only,

we. Base with axtais . . : Uddelliana

pg. Base smooth ; wits . desere pans

LPAURABLA STRANGED (Brazicr 1894)

Rissoad (Apicularia) strange? Virazier 1894, Proc. Linn. Soe, N.SAV.. 19, 173.

pl. xiv, fig. 11.

Rissoa lineata Petterd 1884. Journ. Conch., 147 (non Risso 1826)

Loes.—N.S.W.: Watsons Bay (type loc.) ; Tasm.: North Coast (type Joc.

lineata), Frederick the entry Bay, Kelso; Viet.: S. Aust.: Gulf St. Vincent 14

fathoms, Beachpori it fathoms, shell sand fron: MacDonnell Bay, Guichen Bay.

Robe, Streaky Bay, St. Francis Island, Reevesby Island, Venus Bay, Port Elliston.

Carawa: W. Aust. 30 miles west of Eucla 80 fathoms, Hopetown, Ning George

sound.

Remarks—The following varietal forms may be observed amongst Southern

Australian specimens :

(1) There may be no spirals in the body whorls.

(2) One spiral just below the suture causing tuberculation of the anxials ;

another just above the suture marking the end of the anials with a small

tuberele.

There may he several spirals which cross and. slightly tuberculate the

axials, as many as 18 in the penultimate spire whorl.

os)

FIAURAKIA SUPRACOSTATA Ate av 1919

Haurakia supracostata May 1919, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 62, pl. xv. fig. 16.

Loes,—Vasm.: Frederick Henry Bay (type loc.), North Coaek Thouin Bay

40 fathoms. King Island; Vict.

204

Kemarks—Distinguished by the deeply impressed suture and the compara-

tively few axial ribs fading at the periphery.

ITAURAKIA PROFUNDIOR (Hedley 1907)

Kissa profundior Hedley 1907, Ree. Aust. Mus., 6, 358, pl. Ixvii, fig. 15.

Locs--N.S.W.: 35 miles east of Sydney 800 fathoms (type loc.).

Kemarks-~-Distinguished by the spiral band running round the top of the

six whorls,

HAURAKIA NOVARENSIS (Frauenfeld 1867)

Hlvante novarensis Frauenteld 1867, Novara Exped., Moll., 11, pl. ji, fig. 16.

Rissoa (Alvania) trajectus Watson 1886, 15, 596, pl. xliv, fig. 6.

Locs—N.S.W.:. Sydney (type loc.); Qld.: Torres Straits 3-11 fathoms

(type foc. trajectus), Caloundra; Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms.

Remarks—Distinguished by the comparatively greater development of the

spirals.

HAURAKIA DEMESSA (Tate and May 1900)

Wissow (Apieulariay demessa Yate and May 1900, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.,

24, 98.

Lacs.

Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms (type loc.), Frederick Henry Bay.

Remarks erc is a variety from Thouin Bay 40 fathoms in which the shell

is shehtly wider and the spirals less marked.

Haurakia mediolaevis n. sp.

(Pl. xvi, fig. 4)

Halatype—Reg. No. 1.14187, South Australian Museum.

shell ovate, thick, white, not colour banded; whorls five slightly convex,

gradate, finely spirally lirate; lirae crossed by weak axial lirae; aperture ovate,

columella slightly arcuate ; outer lip thickened by a varix; middle of each whorl

smooth, or nearly so, through the axials and spirals becoming more or less

obsolete. Tleight 2:5 mm., diameter 1-5 mm.

Locs~-S. Aust.: Cape Jaffa 300 fathoms (type loe.); Tasm.: Thouin Bay

40 fathoms; W. Aust.: Cottesloe (Ifenn.) ?

Remarks—Differs from H, novarensis in the weaker sculpture becoming

obsolete on the middle of the whorls, and in being unicoloured white or horn with-

out any colour banding of any sort. The species is rare and dredged only at the

two localities named. This, and not novarensis, may be the species recorded from

Cottesiog, Western Australia, by Henn,

HAURAKIA LIDDELLIANA (fledley 1907)

Kissow tiddelliana Hedley 1907, Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 32, (3), 494, pl. xvii,

Locs.—QOld.: Mast Head Reef, Capricorn Group 17-20 fathoms (type loc.) :

Viet.

Remarks-—In this species the axials extend on to the base.

HAURARKIA DESCREPANS (Tate and May 1900)

Rissoa (Pusillina) descrepans Tate and May 1900, Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust..

24, 93.

Rissoa incompleta Hedley 1908, Proc. linn. Soc. N.S.W., 33, 468, pl. x, fig. 36.

Lees.—Tasm.: Cape Pillar 100 fathoms (type loc.), Pilot Station 10 fathoms;

NoS.W.: Middle Harbour, Sydney (type of iacompleta): Vict.: S. Aust.:

295

Beachport 40 fathoms, Cape Borda 60 fathoms, Streaky Bay; W. Aust.:

ilopetown.

Remarks—Some South Australian specimens have a tendency to develop a

weakly defined rib at the bottom of the axials somewhat resembling a spiral basal

rib at the periphery, and in some specimens the apical whorls are of a vinous

brown and the next whorls of increasing lighter colour.

Lironosa Iredale 1915

Lironoba Iredale 1915, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 47, 450.

Genotype—Rtssoa suteri Hedley 1904, Foveaux Straits, New Zealand.

Shell small, ovate, imperforate, gradate and solid; typical sculpture of broad

flat spiral ribs; sometimes the ribs are weaker but the spiral sculpture is always

dominant; aperture oval, oblique, peristome much thickened; protoconch smooth

in one series (typical) and spirally lirate in another.

Distribution—New Zealand, Australia, Tasmania. Fossil, Tertiary.

Key Tro Species or LiroNoBA

a. Outer lip rounded, not produced at the base of the columella.

b. Strong spiral keels.

c. Keels wider than the interstices.

d. Keels numbering SIX... f. nl oth . _. freycineti

dd. W&Weels numbering eight eat od 9 5 . a. archensis

cc. Keels narrower than the interstices.

e. A simooth area at the top of the whorl .... . agnewt

ec. Smooth area narrow or obsolete.

f. Keels five on the ‘body whorl at Hy . . australis

ff. Keels seven on the body whorl tiny a. twilsonensis

bb. Weak spiral keels.

g. Whorls rounded.

h. Keels irregular dee wot byte Ds . sulcata

hh. Keels regular,

i, Keels ten wah “Ate wid ted nhs .. wutltilirata.

ii. Keels eight ... ds oa 4 sys . lockyert

ii. Keels seven sat — ide hie uw. layardi

ge. Whorls angulate.

j. Weak spiral riblets group to form an

angulation rae mil sid ae a. anilirata

jj. Strong spiral riblets group to form an

angulation.

k. Base with spiral riblets 50 . .. praetornattlis

kk. Base smooth a. Umbrex

aa. Outer lip rounded, but produced at the base of the columella .... schoutanica

LreoNOBA FREYCINETI (May 1915)

Rissoa freyeineti May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 94, pl. v, fig, 28.

Locs—Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms (type loc.).

Remarks—Distinguished by the six and sometimes seven strong rotnded

keels on the body whorl, separated by grooves almost as wide.

LigoNonpa ARCHENSIS (May 1913)

Rissoa archensis May 1913, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 47, pl. ti, fig. 5.

Locs.—Tasm.: Arch Island. D’Entrecasteaux Channel (type loc.), Thouin

Bay 40 fathoms.

Remarks—Distinguished from freycineti by the more numerous keels of the

body whorl.

296

LIRONOBA AGNEW! (Tenison Woods 1877)

Rissoa agnewt Yenison Woods 1877, Proc. Roy Soc. Tasm., 152.

Locs.—Tasm.: Blackman’s Bay (type loc.), Frederick Henry Bay, Schouten

Island 40 fathoms; N.S.W.; Vict.

Remark by the smooth are at the top of the whorls and the

four keels of the body whorl. Shells picked out of shell sand by me from Robe,

South Australia, bear some resemblance to this species but are not sufficiently well

preserved to determine whether they belong here or to lockyeri. They probably

belong to the latter species.

JTARONOBA AUSTRALIS (Tenison Woods 1877)

Cingulina australis Tenison Woods 1877, Proc, Roy. Soc. Tasm., 147.

Nissoa tentsoni Tate 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 23, 233, nom. mut., not

Cingulina australis Sowerby.

Locs.—Tasm.: Badger Island Bass Straits (type loc.), King Island, Frederick

Henry Bay, North Coast; Vict.; S. Aust.: Beachport 200 fathoms, Cape Borda

55, 60 and 62 fathoms, Cape Jaffa 49 fathoms. shell sand from Lacepede Bay,

MacDonnell Bay, Holdfast Bay, Guichen Bay, Robe.

Remarks—Distinguished by the five elevated spiral keels of the body whorl.

The species is neither Rissoe nor Cirgulina, so the name australis stands.

LIRONOBA WILSONENSIS (Gatlitf and Gabriel 1913)

Rissoa wilsonensts Gatliff and Gabriel 1913, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 26, 68, pl. viii,

fig. 4.

Loes.--Viet.: Wilson’s Promontory (type loc.); Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40

iathoms, Cape Pillar 100 fathoms; S. Aust.: Neptune Island 104 fathoms, Cape

Borda 62 fathoms.

Remarks—Distinguished froni australis by the more numerous keels on the

body whorl and the less acuminate shell. South Australian shells agree with the

cotype.

Lironoba sulcata n. sp.

(PI xvi, fig. 5)

Ree. No. D.14188, South Australian Museum,

Shell small, rather narrow and elongate, solid, white; whorls convex, slowly

micreasing in size, four in number; sculpture of numerous irregular fine

spiral keels starting after a fairly wide smooth area below the suture, and present

right on to the base: the upper two well separated, then the rest more crowded

the interstices giving a sulcate appearance to the shell; aperture well defined.

round, entire, lip thickened tending to become a little effuse and very slightly

produced below the columella; entire surface microscopically spirally regularly

scratched; protoconch paucispiral, depressed smooth whorls giving a truncate

appearance to the top of the shell. Height 3 mm., diameter 1-5 nim.

Loes—s. Aust.: Cape Borda 62 fathoms (type loc.). Gulf St. Vincent 14

fathoms.

Holotype

Remarks culiar spetigs occurred in number in dredge sifting from

the type locality. The irregularly placed spirals, distant at first and then more

crowded and running right over the base, together with the microscopic spiral

scratches distinguish this species.

297

LIRONOBA MULTILIRATA (May 1915)

Rissoa multilirata May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 93, pl. v, fig. 27.

Locs—Yasm.: North Coast, Frederick Henry Bay (type loc.); S. Aust.:

Kingston shell sand, Cape Jaffa 130 fathoms.

Remarks—Distinguished by the flatly rounded keels of the body whorl,

numbering ten, separated by narrow grooves, and smooth base.

Lironopa Lockyerr (Hedley 1911)

Rissou lockyeri Hedley 1911, Zool. Res. Endeavour, 1, 103, pl. xviii, fig. 22.

Locs-—S. Aust.: 40 miles south of Cape Wiles 100 fathoms (type loc.), St.

Francis Island 15, 20, 35 fathoms, Cape Jaffa 130 fathoms, Spencer Gulf 40

fathoms, Cape Borda 62 fathoms.

Remarks—Distinguished from /ayardi by its greater size, tendency to a wider

smooth area below the suture and at the base, and in having eight instead of seven

keels. |/t was known previously only from the type locality.

LigoNOBA LAVARDE (Petterd 1884)

Rissou layardi Petterd 1884, Journ, Conch., 138.

Locs—Yasm.: North Coast (type loc.), Schouten Island 40 fathoms,

Frederick Henry Bay, D’Entreeasteaux Channel, Storm Bay 24 fathoms, North

West Coast; Vict. ?

Remarks—I\mstinguished by the fine, regular spiral keels numbering seven on

the body whorl. An examination of South Australian specimens previously

identified by various local conchologists as agnewi and layardi, and specimens

taken by me at Robe in shell sand, proves them to be variants of lockyeri.

LiroNOBA UNILIRATA (Tenison Woods 1878)

Keissoing unilirate Tenison Woods 1878, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 123.

Locs.—Tasm,: Frederick Henry Bay (type loc.) shallow water to 100

fathoms; S. Aust.: Cape Borda 55 fathoms, Neptune Island 104 fathoms, Beach-

port 150 fathoms; Vict.?

Reimarks—-Distinguished by the spiral riblet sculpture forming a single or

double keel on the upper whorls, producing an angulation, the body whorl

generally but not always destitute of riblets or may have only one.

LIRONOBA PRAETORNATILIS (Iledley 1912)

Alvania praetornatilis Hedley 1912, Rec. Aust. Mus., 8, 139, pl. xh, fig. 16.

Locs —N.S.W.: Broughton Island, Port Stephens 35 fathoms (type loc.).

Remarks—Distinguished from tbrex by the less exsert spire whorls and the

spirally ridged base.

LIRONOBA IMBREX (Hedley 1908)

Rissoa iimbrey Vedley 1908, Linn. Soc, N.S.W., 33, 469, pl. x, fig. 33,

Loc-—N.S.W.: Middle Harbour (type loc.).

Remarks—Distinguished from praetornatilis by the lack of spiral riblets on

the base and the more elongate shape of the shell. .

Lironopa scnouTAnica {May 1913)

Rissoa schoutanica May 1913, Proc, Roy. Soc. Tasm., 47, pl. 1, fig. 6.

Locs—Tasm.: Schouten Island 40 fathoms (type loc.); 5S. Aust.: Cape

Borda 55 fathoms; Vict.: Ninety Mile Beach 140 fathoms.

298

Remarks—Distinguished from all other species of Lironoba by the massive

aperture, the lip of which is produced below the columella, and the broad, heavy

shell with few strongly developed keels. This is a new record for South Australia.

BOTELLOIDES Strand 1928

Botelloides Strand 1928, Arch. Naturgesch., 92, 1926, A. 8, 66.

Botellus Iredale 1924, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 49, (3), 244: not Botellirs Spix

and Martius 1823 or Moniez 1887.

Genotype: Onoba bassiana Hedley 1911—Devenport, North Tasmania.

Shell subcylindrical, rounded at each end, whorls wound obliquely on the last

two-thirds of the length; earlier whorls smooth, later bearing fine incised spiral

grooves; aperture circular, columella excavate, outer lip grooved within and

bevelled to a sharp edge.

Distribution—Australia and Tasmania. :

Remarks—The thickening of the aperture within and its small and circular

shape, the pupoid shape of the shell and its heavy structure, distinguish this genus

from Subonoba,

Key to Species or BoTELLOIDES

a. Shell gradually widening towards the body whorl os a hassianius

aa. Shell not widening but cylindrical.

b. Sides of whorls rather flattened .... . = _ a. berda

bb. Sides of whorls somewhat convex m0 att bats .. Glomerosa

BOTELLOIES BASSIANUS (Hedley 1911)

Onoba bassiana Hediey 1911, Zool. Res. Endeavour, 1, 108, pl. xix, fig. 25.

Locs.—Tasm.: Devenport (type loc.), Thouin Bay 40 fathoms; S. Aust. :

Beachport 40, 49, 100, 110, 150 and 200 fathoms, Cape Borda 55 and 62 fathoms.

Cape Jaffa 130 fathoms, St. Francis Island 35 fathoms, Newland Head 20

fathoms, Gulf St. Vincent 14 fathoms, Backstairs Passage 22 fathoms; W. Aust.:

King George Sound, Bunbury, Rottnest beach, dead; Vict.: Port Fairy; N.S.W.:

Twofold Bay and Green Cape 25 to 70 fathoms.

RKemarks—This species is larger and more solid than the other two members

of the genus, and the shell widens towards the body whorl. This is an addition

to the Western Australian Mollusca.

Botelloides borda n. sp.

(PL. xvi, fie. 6)

Holotype—Reg. No, D14189, South Australian Musemn.

Shell solid, oblong, subeylindrical, rounded at each extremity ; surface smooth

and polished with numerous delicate spiral incisions; whorls very flatly convex :

suture slightly sunken and slightly constricting the previous whorl; body whorl

shghtly longer than the rest of the shell; aperture very small and round. thickened

within. Height 3-75 mm., diameter 1-5 mm.

Locs—S. Aust.: Cape Borda 55 fathoms (type loc.), Gulf St. Vincent 14

fathoms, Beachport 40 fathoms; Vict.: Wilson’s Promontory.

Remarks—This species is distinguished from glomerosa by its greater size

and comparatively greater length to width. It differs from bassiana in its more

cylindrical shape,

BoOTELLOmES GLOMEROSA (Hedley 1907)

Onoba glomerosa Hedley 1907, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.AW.. 32, (3), 459,

pl. xvii, fig. 23.

Loes.—-Old.: Mast Head Reef, Capricorn Group (type loc.). Noosa; Vict.

299

Sunonona Iredale 1915

Subonoba Iredale 1915, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 47, 450.

Genotype: Rissoa fumata Suter 1898—Te Onepoto, near Littleton, New Zealand.

Shell minute, subcylindrical, thin, imperforate, translucent; sculpture of

numerous close spiral incisions; whorls rapidly increasing in size, moderately

convex, sutures impressed; aperture slightly oblique, ovate, angled above.

peristome continuous, sharp, slightly thickened, basal hp slightly effuse; proto-

conch papillate, of one-and-a-half smooth and convex whorls.

Disiribution—New Zealand, Australia.

Renarks—The aperture, by its oval shape and lack of internal thickening,

distinguishes this genus from Bofelloidcs.

SUBONOBA MERCURIALIS (Watson 1886)

Rissoa (Onoba) mercurialis Watson 1886, Challenger, Zool., 15, 600, pl. xiv,

fig. 12.

Locs.—Qld.: off Wednesday Island, Cape York 8 fathoms (type loc.).

Meretrna Iredale 1915

Merclina Iredale 1915, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 47, 449.

Genotype: Rissoa (Alvania) cheilostoma Tenison Woods 1877—\.ong Bay 20

fathoms, Tasmania.

Shell minute, turreted, yellow, or white, conspicuously Jatticed throughout ;

aperture produced, bilabiate and entire; peristome continuous, variced, with sub-

sutural sinus; protoconch paucispiral, depressed, inrolled at the tip, with a weak

terminal varix where it adjoins the shell; under 50 x magnification the protoconch

shows a minutely porous surface and the very fine dense punctures give the effect

of running together into spiral lines or grooves.

Distribution—Australia, Tasmania, New Zealand, Lifu, Kermadec Island.

Remarks

Linemera.

The spirally grooved protoconch distinguishes this genus from

Key to Speciés or MERELINA

a. Elongate, greatest width less than half the height.

b. Latticed sculpture with threc spirals on the body whorl . cheilastome

bb. Latticed sculpture with four spirals on the body whorl ... gracilis

aa. Ovate, greatest width less than half the height.

c. Sculpture a close reticulation .... ie x, .. australiac

ec. Sculpture a wide reticulation.

d. Body whorl with two spirals .... ms oe nfs a Aulliana

dd. Body whorl with more than two spirals.

e Body whorl with four spirals ie an a cyrla

ee. Body whorl with five spirals rte wu bin a. eucraspeda

MERELINA CHEILOSTOMA (Tenison Woods 1877)

Rissoa cheilostoma Tenison Woods 1877, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 152.

Alvania elegans Angas 1877 (August), Proc. Zool. Soc., 174, pl. xxvi, fig. 15.

Loes—Tasm.: Long Bay 20 fathoms (type loc.), Thouin Bay 40 fathoms.

Frederick Henry Bay, North Coast; N.S.W.: Port Jackson (type loc., elegans),

Balmoral; Old.; Vict.; S. Aust.: Beachport 40 and 150 fathoms, Gulf St. Vincent

14 fathoms, Cape Borda 55 fathoms, shell sand from MacDonnell Bay, Kingston,

Guichen Bay.

Remarks—Most South Australian and North Tasmanian specimens are worn.

and are a little narrower than the tvpical Peronian specimens.

SOU

MERELINA GkACILIS (Angas 1877)

Alvanta gracilis Angas 1877, Proc. Zool. Soc., 174, pl. xxvi, fig. 16.

Rissoa devecta Tate 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 23, 235.

Locs—N.SW.: Port Jackson (type loc., also of devectu); Viet.; Qld.;

Tasm.: Derwent Hstuary, South Hast 10 to 100 fathoms; S. Aust.: Neptunes

104 fathoms; W. Aust.: Rottnest Island, King George Sound.

Kemarks—Wlindersian records are from single beach rolled specimens of

doubtiul determination.

MERELINA AUSTRALIAE (Frauenfeld 1867)

Cingula australiae Prauenteld 1867, Noyara Exped., Moll. 14, pl. ii, fig. 23.

Ressoa ochroleuca Brazier 1804, Proc, Linn. Soe. N.S.W., 1, 174. pl. xiv. fig. 12.

Merelina (Apicwaria) apicilirata Vate and May 1900, Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust.

24, 99.

Lors.-N.S.W.2 Sydney (type loc.), dredged off Green Point, Watson's Bay

ctype loc, of vehroleuca): Vasm.: North Coast, D’Entreeasteaux Channel (type

loc, apteilirata) ; Qld.; Viet.: Kileunda.

Kemarks——Tasmanian specimens in the May collection are typical, but 1 have

been unable to discover any South Australian specimens. A very poor and worn

specimen from Rottnest, Western Australia, somewhat resembles this species, but

more material would be required before it is added to the Western Australian list.

MERELINA HULLIANA (Tate 1893)

Rissoa (Alvania) hulliana Tate 1893, Hand List S. Aust. Moll., 7, nom. mut. for

Dunkeria fasciata Tenison Woods 1876, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 146, non

Requienr 1848.

focs—Vict.: Bass Straits (type loe.); Tasm.: South and North Coast:

S. Aust.: Gulf St. Vineent, MacDonnell Bay, Robe, Kingston, Guichen Bay in

shell sand.

Reimtuarks—Distinguished by the wide latticed sculpture and broad shell, In

life the shell is translucent and has two yellowish spiral bands, one below the

suture, the other at the periphery.

Merelina cyrta n. xp.

(PL xvi, fig. 7)

Holotype: Reg. No. D14190, South Australian Musetum.

Shell minute, turreted, latticed all over: translucent, shining golden vellow,

with a white band in the middle of the spire whorls, including the central

space and the rib on either side; whorls seven, four spiral lirae crossed by

twelve axial, oblique and curved costae on the penultimate; number of axials

variable; mouth effuse at the front of the outer lip and labrum slighily sinuous

in profile; base has six or seven spiral ribs. Height 2°5 mm., diameter 1-3 mm.

Locs.-W. Aust.: King George Sound (type loc.), Great Australian Bight

west Of Eucla 100 fathoms, Yallingup, Hopetown, Rottnest, Albany, Ellenbrook;

5. Aust.: Beachport 40 fathoms, Cape Borda 55 fathoms. 62 fathoms; Neptune

Island 104 fathoms, Investigator Straits 20 fathoms, St. Francis Island,

6, 15 and 35 fathoms, Gulf St. Vincent 14 fathoms, shell sand from Port

River, [franklin Island, Sceales Bay, Guichen Bay, Largs Bay, St. Francis Island,

West Coast, Glenelg.

Remarks-——Compared with M7. hulliana the present species is less solid, more

attenuated, seven whorls instead of six; penultimate whorl with four spirals

SOL

instead of two; eleven axial costae instead of six or seven and these are more

oblique and more curved, but may vary from twelve to twenty; the more

effuse mouth at the front of the outer lip, and the more sinuous labrum in

profile; the base has six or seven spiral ribs instead of three or four. The follow-

ing variations may be noted:

i The two smooth apical whorls are ruddy chestnut, whereas most have a

white apex.

2 Most are white, but many have a white band in the middle of the whorls.

the rest of the shell being a golden yellow; some have an infrasutural

darker band.

3 The respective validity of the axial costae and spiral lirae varies in

different examples.

4 The number of axial costae vary in number; in some cases about twelve

to fourteen, in others twenty to twenty-four.

5 In some the central spiral lira is prominent and its tubercles are opaque

white like a row of pearls.

MeRELINA EUCRASPEDA (Hedley 1911)

Rissoa hulliana eucraspeda Hedley 1911, Zool. Res. Endeavour, 1, 103, pl. xviii,

fig. 21.

Locs.—S. Aust.: 40 miles south of Cape Wiles 100 fathoms (type loc.).

Beachport 110 fathoms, Cape Borda 62 fathoms, Neptune Island 104 fathoms.

Remarks—Not bicarinate as in M. hulliana, where two spirals encircle the

whorls forming the bicarination. In the present species five or six spirals encircle

the body whorl and base. It was previously known only from the type locality.

LINEMERA [inlay 1924

Linemera Finlay 1924, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 55, 483.

Genotype: Linemera interrupta Finlay 1924 = Rissoa gradata Mutton preoce—

New Zealand.

Sculpture clathrate, protoconch adpressed, smooth, glossy, and dome-shaped,

with inconspicuous sutures, instead of being projecting, spirally grooved, dull, and

paucispiral, with deep sutures; aperture with thin edge, sometimes thickened

behind with a simple varix, without a second projecting rim inside, a sub-

sutural sinus, rather effuse at base; chink-like umbilicus generally present.

Distribution—New Zealand, Australia and Tasmania. Fossil, Tertiary.

Remarks—Distinguished from Merelina by the protoconch, and from

Haurakia by the tendency to a slight indentation and a stronger spiral rib near

y y g : ger sp

the suture, otherwise the sculpture recalls Haurakia.

Key To Species or LINEMERA

a. Elongate, greatest width less than half the height = we Suprasculpta

aa. Ovate, greatest width more than half the height.

b. Sutures not very deeply excavated.

c. No spiral beaded rib on the shoulder of the whorl.

cd. Spiral sculpture more prominent than the axial .... w. filocincla

dd. Spiral sculpture less prominent than the axial .... we Herconiana

cc. A spiral beaded rib on the shoulder of the whorl.

e. Sculpture well developed _.... ba tty = wa. seul ptilis

ec. Sculpture weak : er qos eat sail we Occidua

bh. Sutures very deeply excavated .... oe ate _ ... thoninensis

LINEMERA SUPRASCULPTA (May 1915)

cllvania suprasculpta May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 95, pl. vi, fig. 31.

Locs.—Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 to 50 fathoms (type loc.) ; S. Aust.: Guichen

Bay, Beachport 40 and 200 fathoms, Port MacDonnell, Cape Jatta 49, 90 and

130 fathoms.

Remarks—Distinguished by the regular reticulate sculpture with spiral ltrae

in the square meshes, and by the high and narrow shape of the shell.

LINEMERA FrLocINCTA (Hedley and Petterd 1906)

Rissoa fiocincta Hedley and Petterd 1906, Rec. Aust. Mus., 6, 217, pl. xxxvil,

Locs —N.S.W.: Narrabeen 80 fathoms, off Sydney 300 fathoms (type loc.) ;

Tasm.: General 40 to 80 fathoms; S. Aust.: Port MacDonnell; Vict.: Ninety Mile

Beach 40 fathoms.

Remarks—Iin the early part of the shell the axials predominate, but later

and on the body whorl the spirals become more prominent than the axials. In

verconiana the axials are more dominant throughout the shell.

LINEMERA VERCONIANA (Hedley 1911)

Rissoa verconiana Hedley 1911, Zool. Res. Endeavour, 1, 104, pl. xix, fig. 23.

Locs—-S. Aust.: 40 miles south of Cape Wiles 100 fathoms (type loc.),

Seachport 40 fathoms, Cape Borda 55 fathoms, Cape Jaffa 130 fathoms;

W. Aust.: 120 miles west of Eucla 300 fathoms.

Remarks— The species is distinguished from filocincta by the stronger

sculpture, particularly the axials which extend right down to the base and are

stronger than the spirals. It was known previously only from the type locality.

LINEMERA SCULPTILIS (May 1919)

Merelina sculptilis May 1919, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 62, pl. xv, fig. 15.

Loc—Tasm.: Thouin Bay 50 fathoms (type loc.).

Remarks — Distinguished from filocincta by its flatter whorls, more

numerous axials, strong beaded spirals on the shoulder, channelled sutures, sharp

outer lip, discontinuous peristome.

Linemera occidua n. sp.

(PL xvi, fig. 8)

Holotype: Reg. No. D.14191, South Australian Museum.

Shell solid, ovate, yellow coloured, imperforate; whorls five including two

smooth, rounded, depressed whorls forming the protoconch; suture well defined

by a shallow channel; adult whorls crossed by regular strong spirals which get

stronger towards the base of the body whorl, these in turn crossed by about 20

axials which fade out on the base of the body whorl; both above and below the

suture a spiral of small nodules is defined by an incised spiral line a little deeper

than those lines cutting the rest of the whorls, except the strong ones of the base;

about a dozen spirals cross the body whorl; aperture ovate, outer lip thickened by

a weak varix; colour pattern consisting of a spiral golden band at and below the

suture, cut into wide axial flames by the ground colour; round the umbilical region

is a narrow golden band, and a tendency to spirals of minute golden dots on the

spirals of the base and lower body whorl. Height 2:1 mm., diameter 1-0 mm.

Locs.—W. Aust.: Hopetown (type loc.) ; S. Aust.: Carawa, West Coast.

Remarks — This species bears some resemblance to sculptilis but is easily

separated by the smaller size, golden flames and lines, much weaker sculpture and

ihe somewhat thickened outer lip.

LINEMERA THOUINENSIS (May 1915)

Alvania thouinensis May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc, Tasm., 94, pl. v, fig. 28.

Locs-——Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms (type loc.), D’Entrecasteaux Channel.

Remarks-—Distinguished by the deeply excavate sutures. Some specimens

from D’Entrecasteaux Channel are variants with more numerous ribs.

Norosetia Iredale 1915

Notosctia Iredale 1915, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 47, 452.

Genotype: Barleeia neoselanica Suter 1898—Stewart Island, New Zealand.

Shell minute, ovate-conical, imperforate, subpellucid, white, thin, smooth and

shining; sculpture of fine oblique growth lines and a few (in the genotype) spiral

striae around the umbilical area; protoconch small, globose, of one-and-a-half

smooth, convex whorls, suture impressed, slightly channelled, margined by a thin

thread; aperture vertical, oval, angled above, peristome discontinuous, sharp, not

thickened, basal lip effuse; columella vertical, slightly concave and callous; a thin

callosity on the parietal wall.

Distribution—-New Zealand, Australia, Tasmania. Fossil, Tertiary.

Remarks—The distinguishing features are the almost smooth surface, though

it may be faintly spirally lirate, convex whorls and simple, round, thin-edged

aperture. A species bearing some resemblance to those of this genus was described

as Rissoa pertranslucida May 1912, but it has since been correctly placed as a

Lissotesta under family Liotitdae.

Key To Species or NOTOSETIA

a. Colour banded.

b. Axial bands _.... oe ey ats ba, _ " ... simillima

bb. Spiral bands.

c. Bifasciate with brown weil be _ _ mi a mitens

cc. Alternately bifasciate with cream and brown nd .. procincta

aa. Not colour banded.

d. Translucent white.

e. Pink spot on base... . he whe ia vu muuratensis

ee. No pink spot .... 4 . _ ce hs pellucida

dd. Purple or rose coloured

ji. Aperture subovate . . ne wt : purpureostoma

ff. Aperture round eh ace ; : dtropurpurea

Norosetia simittima (May 1915)

Rissoa simillima May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. ‘Lasm., 93, pl. v, fig. 26.

Locs—Tasm: Schouten Island 40 fathoms (type loc.), Port Arthur 56

fathoms, 70 fathoms.

Remarks—-May does not mention the type locality or any other definite

locality in his original description, merely stating that “it seems to be well dis-

tributed on our continental shelf.” (i.c., Tasmania). Cotypes in the South Aus-

tralian Museum are labelled “Schouten Island 40 fathoms.” The species is dis-

tinguished from nitens by the axial banding.

304

NoroseTiA NITENS (Frauenfeld 1867)

Setia nitens Frauenfeld 1867, Novara Exped., Moll., 13, pl. ii, hg. 22.

Rissoa (Cingula) atkinsoni Tenison Woods 1877, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 153.

Locs.—-N.S.W.: Botany Bay (type loc.); Tasm.: Long Bay (type loc.

atkinsont), South and East shallow water down to 10 fathoms; Vict.

Remarks—-The bifasciation, found both in New South Wales shells and

Tasmanian shells, described by Tenison Woods as atkinsoni, distinguishes this

species.

NoroseTIA ProciNcta (Tledley 1908)

Rissoa procincia Hedley 1908, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 33, 469, pl. 10, fig. 34.

Loc-—-N.S.W.: Middle Harbour (type loc.).

Remarks—Distinguished by the two spiral, alternating bands of cream and

pale brown on each whorl, and the simple pyriform aperture.

Notosetia muratensis n. sp.

(PL xvi, fig. 9)

Holotype: Reg. No. D.14192, South Australian Museum.

Shell minute, turbinately conical, polished translucent white. unicoloured

except for a faint pink blotch in the middle of the base in living specimens ;

protoconch microscopic, turbinate, paucispiral, rounded, smooth whorls; whorls

five, excluding protoconch, rounded, slightly angulate, suture impressed; aperture

ovate, a little produced anteriorly, outer lip thin, acute, inner lip reflected into a

false umbilicus. Height 1°5 mm., diameter 0-5 mm. Larger specimens reach

2 mm. in height.

Locs.—S. Aust.: Murat Bay (type loc.), Streaky Bay, Fowler Bay, Mac-

Donnell Bay, Largs Bay, Grange, Cape Borda 55 fathoms, Robe, Beachport 200

fathoms, Franklin Island, Venus Bay; Tasm.: North Coast; Vict.: Western Port:

W. Aust.: King George Sound, Abrolhos Island.

Remarks—This species differs from mifens in being larger and white, having

a longer spire and a pink spot on the base in fresh specimens.

NOTOSETIA PELLUCIDA (Tate and May 1900)

Rissoa (Nodulus) pellucida Tate and May 1900, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 24, 100.

Locs-~Tasm.: Frederick Henry Bay (type loc.) ; Vict.

Remarks—Somewhat resembling maratensis but there is no basal blotch, and

the peristome is thickened,

NOoTosETIA PURPUREOSTOMA May 1919

Notosetia purpureostoma May 1919, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 63, pl. xvi, fig. 18.

Loc—Tasm.: Penguin in shell sand (type loc.).

Remarks——Distinguished by the purple or rose-coloured shell and the sub-

ovate aperture.

NOTOSETIA ATROPURPUREA (Frauenfeld 1867)

Setia atropurpurea Frauenfeld 1867, Novara Exped., Moll., 13, pl. ii, fig. 21.

Loes—-N.5.W.: Botany Bay (type loc.), Bondi; Old.; Vict.

Remarks—l\vistinguished by the purple to rose-coloured shell and round

aperture.

305

DarvanuLa Iredale 1915

Pardanula Iredale 1915, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 47, 452.

Dardania Elutton 1882, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 14, 147, not Dardania Stal.,

1822.

Genotype: Dardania olivacca Hutton 1882—On seaweed in rock pools, Littleton

Harbour, New Zealand.

Shell smooth, whorls flattened or convex, aperture ovate-pyriform, peristome

discontinuous and thin, slightly channelled below. Animal with large foot, rounded

in front, emarginate behind; pence lobe small, simple; rostrum emarginate at

the extremity ; tentacles long and setaceous; eyes ‘large, on swellings at the outer

bases of the tentacles; operculum ovate, suibspiral, with a long shelly process from

below the nucleus.

Distribution—New Zealand, Australia, Tasmania. Fossil, Tertiary.

Remarks-——The smooth shell with a tendency to flattened <ehaule, the slightly

channelfed aperture and the operculum distinguish this genus.

Key tro SPECIES OF DARDANULA

a. Unicoloured.

b. White .. $i ra _ bet _ _ At w. erratica

bb. Coloured.

ce. Black or purplish ... 4 Ries ae th rs" ... melanochroma

ec. Brown , nal seis ett os sos Me ... dubitalis

aa. Banded or flamed.

d. Orange bands —.... eit _— be “i wo aurantiocincta

dd. Red axial flames ek _ ig: axe am .. flammea

DARDANULA ERRATICA (May 1912)

clinphithalamus erratica May 1912, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 48, pl. ii, fig. 7.

Locs—Tasm.: Seven miles east of Cape Pillar 100 fathoms (type loc.),

Gordon 10 fathoms; S. Aust.: Beachport 40 fathoms, Cape Borda 55,

62 fathoms. St. Francis Island 35 fathoms, Venus Bay; Vict.: Wilson’s Pro-

montory.

Remarks—Distinguished from flamuneca by being unicoloured and longer, and

also in the flatter whorls. South Australian specimens here recorded correspond

with cotypes.

DARDANULA MELANOCUROMA (Tate 1899)

Rissoa melanochroma Tate 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 23, 234.

Rissoa melanura Tenison Woods 1877, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 153, not melanura

Adams 1850.

Locs—Tasm.: Blackmans Bay (type loc.) ; 5S. Aust.: St. Francis Island 6 and

8 fathoms, Cape Borda 55 fathoms, shell sand from MacDonnell Bay, Robe,

Kingston, Venus Bay, Cape Northumberland, West Coast; Vict.: Port Fairy;

\W Aust.: King George Sound.

Remarks—Distinguished by the black or purplish though translucent shell,

the flatly convex w horls, obtusely angulate base and anteriorly produced aperture.

DARDANULA buBITALIS (Late 1899)

Rissoa dubitalis Tate 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 23, 232.

Rissoa dubia Petterd 1884, Journ, Conch., 4, 137, not dubia Detrance 1927.

Locs.—Tasm.: teens ae on rocks at low water (type loc.), North Coast

and Cape Pillar; S. Aust.: Cape Borda 55 fathoms, MacDonnell Bay; Vict.

Remarks

white labrum,

anucdehon by the bluish-brown shell, expanded aperture and

305

DARDANULA AURANTIOcCINCEA (May 1915)

Amphithalamus auruntiocinctus May 1915, Proc. Roy. Sec. ‘Pasm., 96, pl vi.

fig. 33.

Locs.—Tasm.: Thouin Bay 49 fathoms (type loc.).

Remarks—I)istinguished by the thicker sheil, more ovate mouth and the two

spiral orange colour bands.

DARDANULA FLAMAIEA (Frauenfeld 1867)

Sabanaca flammea Frauenfeld 1867, Novara Exped., Moll., 12, pl. it. tig. 22.

Rissoa (Setia) flamia Beddome 1883, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 169.

Rissoa beddomet Tate 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 23, 234.

Rissoa sophiae Brazier and [lenn 1894, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.AW.. 9, 174.

Lees —N.S.W.: Botany Bay (type loc.). Watsons Bay (type loc. sophie).

Little Coogee; Tasm.: Blackmans Bay 7 fathoms (type loc. flamia), Kelso, Tamar

River, Derwent Estuary, North Coast; Vict.: Western Port, Portsea; Qld.

Remarks—~Distinguished by the red axial flames.

Eusetia n. gen

Genotype: Rissopsts expansa Powell 1930—-Mangonut Heads in 6-10 fathoms.

New Zealand.

shell small, thin, transparent and blunt at the apex ; protoconch heterostrophe

running into following whorls without any line or varix of demarcation, the

initial whorl immersed by the volution of the succeeding whorl; whorls slightly

convex, body whorl comparatively large; aperture expanded, oblique, rhomboidal,

peristome discontinuous, slightly thickened, outer lip arcuate, projecting pos-

teriorly at right angles to the body whorl, rounded basal hp expanded, columella

sinuous from the formation of the inner lip.

Distribution—New Zealand, Australia, Tasmania. Fossil, Tertiary.

Remarks—This genus bears little resemblance to Rissopsis Garrett (geno-

type Rissopsis typtca Garrett), a most peculiar species from Viti and Samoa

Islands, which is a long exsert shell with constricted and abnormally narrow

whorls with a tendency to oblique, twisted plications more or less obsolete. The

resemblance to Australian and New Zealand species is in no way apparent, the

apertures here being larger, more expanded and more reflected peristome, though

discontinuous. In this genus can be placed the two Tertiary fossils castlecliffensts

and fricta Finlay 1930 from New Zealand, the recent genotype from New Zealand

and the Australian species here reviewed.

Key ro Species or Eusrrra

a. Shell moderately truncate.

b. Shell smooth.

c. Body whorl less than half the length of the shell ... . consobrina

ec. Body whorl more than half the length of the shell buliminotdes

bb. Shell spirally marked,

d. Microscopic spirals . ie set : colummaria

dd. Fine spirals a 438 ust ; .. GHaCCONE

aa. Shell widely truncate ... — : nan z. a3 Lu brevis:

EUSETIA CONSORRINA (Tate and May 1900)

Rissopsis consobrina Tate and May 1900, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 24, 101.

Locs—-Tasm.: Frederick Henry Bay (type loc.).

Remarks—Distinguished from bulimtnoides by the turreted form, rounded

whorls, elongate-oval aperture and shorter body whorl.

307

EuseTIA BULIMiNOIDES (Tate and May ae

Rissopsis buliminoides Tate and May 1900, Trans. Roy. Soe. 5. ASE 24, 101.

Locs—Tasm.: Frederick Henry Bay 10 fathoms (type loc.) : 5. ‘hasty pt:

Francis Island 35 fathoms.

Remarks—Distinguished from consobrina by the larger and longer body

whorl.

Eusetia COLUMNARIA (May 1910)

Aclis columnaria May 1910, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 18, pl. xv, fig. 27.

Locs.—Tasm. : seven miles east of Cape Pillar 100 fathoms (type loc.) ; Viet. :

Wilson’s Promontory.

Remarks—-Distinguished by the convex whorls and fine spiral grooves which

can be seen under 50x magnification.

EusetiA MAccoyi ‘(Tenison Woods 1877)

Rissoa maccoyi Tenison Woods 1877, Proc. Roy. Soe. Tasm., 154.

Locs.—Tasm.: Blackmans Bay (type loc.), Derwent Estuary. D’Entrecas-

teaux Channel down to 10 fathoms: S. Aust.: Backstairs Passage 22 fathoms.

Gulf St. Vincent 14 fathoms, Largs Bay shell sand; N.S.W.

Remarks—Distinguished by the spirally lirate shell.

Eusetra brevis (May 1919)

Rissopsis brevis May 1919, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 63, pl. xvi, fig. 19.

Locs—Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms (type loc.), Rich Island, D’Entre-

casteaux Channel.

Remarks—VDistinguished by the very widely truncate apex, and few whorls.

Epicrus Hedley 1903

Epigrus Hedley 1903, Mem. Aust. Mus., 4, 355,

Genotype: Rissoina cylindracea Tenison W

45 fathoms.

Shell tall, slender, smooth, cylindrical; aperture oblique, appressed ; proto-

conch of one-and-a-half whorls, large, often protuberant.

Distribution—Australia, Tasmania. New Zealand, Philippines, Tongatabu.

Fossil, Tertiary.

Re Scrobs but has not the separated aperture

nor the elongate shaped shell of that genus.

N.S.W., Port Jackson

Kiy to Species or Eprarus

a. No median spiral rib on the body whorl.

b. Not microscopically spirally striate.

c. Last whorl not uncoiled.

d. Shell 5 mm. or more in length.

e. Whorls five and a half sibs ie 7 bes .. exlindraceus

ee. Whorls seven rs “ts ost fete _ . berda

dd. Shell 4 mm. or less.

f, Length 4 mm. sat 3 ties! Laperets aly . dissimilis

ff. Length under 2 mm. ens ves ats a hadius

ec. Last whorl uncoiled nae Fs hic vee re protractus

bb. Microscopically striate : ha _ . y. : wanthias

aa. With a median spiral rib on the body whorl ep mi . scnucinctus

308

Epickus CyLINpRACEUS (Tenison Woods 1878)

Rissoina eylindraceus Tenison Woods 1878, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 2, 266.

Rissoa ischna Tate 1899, Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust., 23, 233, nom. amut., not

Rissoa cylindracca Krynicki 1837.

Kissoa (Amphithalamus) simsoni Tate and May 1900, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.,

24, 100, pl. xxvi, fig. 76,

Loes—N.S.W.: Port Jackson 45 fathoms (type loc.): Tasm.: Derwent

Isstuary, South and East 10 fathoms; Vict.

Remarks—Distinguished by its comparatively large size, cylindrical shape,

and from borda by the fewer whorls. five-and-a-half in c\lindraceus and seven

in borda.,

Epigrus borda n. sp

(Pl. xvi, fig. 10)

Holotype: Reg. No, 1.14193. South Australian Museum.

Shell cylindrical, strong, shining, white; whorls seven, flatly convex, sculp-

ture of microscopic oblique striae; suture linear; aperture oval, peristome con-

tinuous, adnate to the parietal wall. Height 5 mm., diameter 1-5 nim,

Locs—S. Aust.: Cape Borda 62 fathoms (type loc.), 55 fathoms, Cape Jatfa

90 fathoms, Neptune Island 104 fathoms, Beachport 40, 130. 150, 200 fathoms;

W. Aust.: King George Sound, HMopetown, Cottesloe (Henn.) ?

Remarks-—Distinguished from eylindraceus by the more numerous whorls,

seven instead of five-and-a-half, and there is no contraction of the body whorl,

the callus at the posterior angle of the aperture is not so large and triangular,

and the basal margin is not so cffuse, the aperture itsclf is smaller. It is larger,

wider and has a more contracted mouth than dissimilis, lts main peculiarity is

the tendency to have a constricted narrow spiral area below the suture in earlier

whorls becoming obsolete on the body whorl. This is probably the specific name

of the specimens recorded by Henn. from Cottesloe as “ischnus.”

IoPIGRUS DISSIMILIS “(Watson 1886)

Ieudime dtssinulis Watson 1886, Challenger, Zool., 15, 522, pl. xxxvii, fig. 5.

Locs —N.SW.: Port Jackson 2 to 10 fathoms (type loc.) : Tasm.: North

Coast; 5. Aust.: Beachport 40 fathoms, Investigator Straits 22 fathoms, Cape

Borda 35 fathoms, St. Francis Island 6, 15, 20 and 35 fathoms, shell sand Fowler

Bay; Viet: Port Fairy; Qld.

Remarks—The shell is smaller than eylindraceis and borda and the aperture

is wider but less high.

Iprorus BApius (Petterd 1884)

Rissoa badia VPetterd 1884, Journ. Conch., 4, 138.

Rissoa verconis Tate 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 23, 233.

Loes.—Tasm.: North Coast (type loc.), Islands Bass Straits, Southern Lays

down to 10 fathoms; Viet.: Western Port; S. Aust.: Backstairs Passage dredged

10 fathoms; N.S.AW.; Old.

Kemarks-Distinguished by its small size, being under 2 mm. in length,

Evickus prorracrus Hedley 1904

Epigrus protractus Hedley 1904, Proc. T.inn, Soc. N.S.W., 29, 185, pl. viii, fig.

8 to TL.

Loes—N.S.W.: Chinamans Beach, Middle Harbour (type loc.).

309

Remarks—The shell is small, only 1-3 mm. in length, and is remarkable in

that the last whorl is uncoiled. It is not a monstrosity, as several specimens were

taken by Hedley at the type locality.

Epicrus XAnTHTIAS (Watson 1886)

Mucronalia vanthias Watson 1886, Challenger, Zool., 15, 523, pl. xxxvii, fig. 8.

Locs.—Tongatabu 18 fathoms (type loc.); Philippines 10 to 20 fathoms ;

Old.: Wednesday Island, Cape York, North East Australia 8 fathoms.

Remarks-—Distinguished by the elongate and narrow shell and spiral micro-

scopic striae.

Epicrus semMicrxcrus May 1915

Epigrus semicinctus May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 96, pl. vii, lig. 36.

Locs-—Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms; N.S.W.; 5. Aust.: Beachport 40

fathoms.

Remarks—Distinguished by the strong, median keel which develops on the

body whorl and extends to the lip: there is another small keel on the base. Other-

wise somewhat like badius.

Scrops Watson 1886

Serobs Watson 1886, Challenger, Zool., 15, 611.

Genotype: Rissoa (Serobs) scrobiculator Watson 1886—Port Jackson, N.S.W.

Shell small, strong, lustrous; protoconch roundly and bluntly pointed, sculp-

tured with microscopic stipplings arranged in spiral rows; aperture gibbously

round, almost transverse to the axis, encircled by a broad furrow which lies

between the outer and inner edge of the continuous peristome; inner hp almost

horizontal, crossing the entire front of the body, so as to leave no pillar at all,

separated from the body by a level shelf; in this shelf is the circumoral furrow,

which widens into a small triangular depression at the intersection of the outer Tip.

Distribution—Australia, New Zealand, Tasmania.

Remarks—Distinguished by the mouth separated from the body whorl.

Key ro SPECIES OF SCROBS

a. Elongate and narrow.

b. Obovate ae : Wy Bas a5 ; , w. serobiculttor

bb. Tapered. :

c. Body whorl! roundly obtusely angulate . . a Pyrantidata

ec. Body whorl not roundly obtusely angulate.

dd. About 2 mm. in length des Re ers ‘ a. petlerdi

d. About 1 mm. in length : 4, . , . pellyae

aa. Ovate.

e. Smooth.

f. Widely umbilicate .... a : ape a. deeksont

ff. Narrowly umbilicate. :

g. A light colour band below the suture m3 luteofuscus

gg. Two bands of pale orange .... ak _ we Gpricorncus

ee. Sculptured.

h. Axtal costae |... off ses ae a a costatus

Scrons scropicuLaAtor (Watson 1886)

Rissoa scrobiculator Watson 1886, Challenger, Zool., 15, 611, pl. xlvi, fig. 4.

Remarks—This type species of the genus is of a peculiar pupoid or obovate

shape, though it resembles the other Australian and New Zealand species in

apertural characters.

310

SCROBS PYRAMIDATA Iledley 1903

Scrobs pyramidata Hedley 1903, Mem. Aust. Mus., 4, 354, fig. 77.

Locs.—N.S.W.: Wata Mooli 54 to 59 fathoms (type loc.), Botany 50 to 59

fathoms, Port Hacking 22 to 38 fathoms; Vict.: Ninety Mile Beach 40 fathoms.

Kemarks—Distinguished by the roundly obtuse angulation of the body

whorl, and the conical shape.

SCROBS PETTERD! (Brazier 1895)

Rissoia (Amphithalamus) petterdi Brazier 1895, Proc, Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 19,

697.

Rissoa pulchella Peiterd 1884, Journ. Conch., 138, not pulchella Risso 1836,

Philippi 1836.

Locs.—Tasin.: North Coast and Islands in Bass Straits (type loc.), all round

the coast from beach to 4 fathoms; N.S.W.: Botany Bay, Port Jackson; Vict.

Remarks—This minute species is smooth except for the faint growth lines.

It is brown-coloured and narrowly umbilicate, narrow in shape and has a promi-

nent aperture and long body whorl.

SCROBS PELLYAE (Nevill 1881)

Rissoa (Ceratia) pellyae Nevill 1881, Journ, Asiatic Soc. Bengal, 1, pt. ii, 165.

Locs—S, Aust.: in sand from near Adelaide (type loc.), Cape Northumber-

land, Robe, Fowler Bay, Venus Bay, Henley Beach, Glenelg, all in shell sand,

Cape Borda 55 fathoms; W. Aust.: Geraldton ? (Verco).

Remarks—~The specimens here recorded, and figured for the first time, are in

all probability of the species described by Nevill but not listed from anywhere

else but South Australia, and not referred to by subsequent workers. It in some

ways resembles pefterdi: but is easily distinguished by the extra whorl and a

tendency for the aperture to be well separated from the body whorl, even pro-

jecting, and by the strong and continuous peristome. Features referred to in the

original description are characteristic of our specimens and are here pointed out.

Smooth, polished, shining, of a rich chestnut brown colour; spire shortly and

ventricosely conical, suture distinct, apex exceedingly obtuse; whorls three-and-a-

half. very convex, Jast whorl produced, regularly ovate, about two-thirds the size

of the whole shell, brought forward at the aperture in a highly characteristic

manner. The following variations may be noticed in South Australian specimens:

1 Rather smaller, marked inner lip somewhat projecting; apex less blunt;

shell more conical and less cylindrical; whorls less convex.

2 Like the previous variety but with a simple mouth, in which the lip is

thinner and little separated from the base of the last whorl.

3 Same length, but narrower than the second variety; more cylindrical and

with rounder whorls.

SCROBS JACKSONI (Brazier 1895 )

Rissoia (Amphithalamus) jacksoni Prazier 1895, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.,

19, 695.

Rissoa (Scrobs) badia Watson 1886, Challenger, Zool., 15, 612, pl. xlvi, fig. 3.

not Rissoa badia Petterd 1884.

Locs—N.5.W.: Sow and Pigs Port Jackson 4 fathoms (type loc.), Port

Jackson 2 to 10 fathoms (type loc, badia); Tasm.: Pilot Station 10 fathoms,

Thouin Bay 40 fathoms; Vict.; S. Aust.: Beachport 40 fathoms, Cape Borda 66

fathoms, Gulf St. Vincent 14 fathoms.

Reimarks—Distinguished from scrobiculator by the more conical-ovaie shell

and the more delicate stippling of the protoconch. It ig rare in South Australia,

Scrors Lurrorusces (May 1919)

Anphithalamus lntcofuscus May 1919, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 63, pl. xvi, fig. 17.

Loc—-Tasin.: Kelso near Tamar Heads (type loc.).

Remarks—Its nearest ally is jacksoni but it is more narrowly tumbilicate, has

a comparatively wider mouth, and a distinctive colour pattern of a light band

below the suture on a lustrous red-brown ground colour.

Scrons capricorneus (Hedley 1907)

-nphithalanins capricorneus Hedley 1907, Proc. Linn Soc. N.S.W., 32, 495,

pl. xvii, fig. 22.

Loc-—Qld.: Mast Head Reef 17 to 20 fathoms (type loc. ).

Remarks—Distinguished by the rich golden colour of the earlier whorls and

the two bands of pale orange on the body and later whorls, which are characteristic

of this minute shell.

Scross costatus (ifedley 1911)

Amphithalanius costatus Hedley 1911, Zool. Res. Endeavour. 1, 104, pl. xix.

fie, 244

Locs.—S. Aust.: 40 miles south of Cape Wiles 100 fathoms (type loc.).

Beachport 110 fathoms, St. Francis Island 15, 20, 35 fathoms, Gulf St. Vincent

14 fathoms, Cape Borda 62 fathoms.

Remarks—Distinguished by the flat axial ribs. The species was known

hitherto only from the type locality.

Noroscross Powell 1927

Notoscrobs Powell 1927, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 57, 547.

Genotype: Notoscrobs ornate Powell 1927—New Zealand.

Shell solid, conical; protoconch dome-shaped of one-and-a-half whorls.

sculptured with about twelve spiral rows of round shallow pits which, as they

do not also form vertical rows produce a honeycomb effect, adult whorls with plain

spiral keels, the uppermost crossed by axial ribs: aperture not separated from

body-whorl, peristome continuous, duplicated, inner margin smooth and narrow

surrounded by a broad flattened area, widest above and on the parietal wall.

Distribution—New Zealand and Tasmania.

NoroscRrobs TRIANGULUS {May 1915)

Aniphithalamus triangulus May 1915, Pro. Roy. Soc. Tasin., 95, pl. vi, fig. 32.

Loc—Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms (type loc.).

Remarks—Distinguished by the sculpture. There are two New Zealand

species, ornata and crosa.

ANABATHRON Frauenfeld 1867

Anabathron Frauenfeld 1867, Novara Exped., Moll., 13.

Genotype: Anabathron contabulata Frauenfeld 1867—Botany Bay, N.S.W.

Shell scalariform, with a carinated shoulder, imperforate, smooth, aperture

rounded, peristome continuous; protoconch spirally striate.

312

Distribution—Australia and Tasmania,

Remarks—Distinguished by the scalariform shell.

Key To Seecies OF ANABATITRON

«. No axial plicae.

bb. Later whorls not uncoiled.

c. Spiral keel not massive... . 09. 7 nen . contabulaium

cc. Spiral keel massive a . rom a oa GSCeNSUM

bb. Later whorls uncoiled on : es . . a Contortiem

ai. With axial plicae rs _ . ts . . . emblematicumt

ANABATHRON CoNTARVLATUAL Frauenfeld 1867

Anabathron coatabulatuim Frauenteld 1867. Novara Iexped., Moll. 13, pho ii,

fig. 20a.

Anabathron contabilation lene Medley 1918, Proc. |inn. Soe. NUSAV., 26, supp..

53, fig. hy Frauenfeld op. cit. fig. 20b,

Locs—N.S.W.: Botany Bay (type loc. comtubulatiant and le: ne); Viet.;

Tasm.: North Coast shallow w ar to 50 fathoms, Frederick llenry Bay, Penguin;

S. Aust.: Fowlers Bay, Robe, St. Francis Island: W. Aust.: King George Sound:

Old.

Remarks-—Remarkable for the development of the sharp spiral keel at the

angle of the whorls, giving the shell a scalate appearance. The slightly wider,

more swollen variety “lene” is more common in South Australia than the typical

form,

ANABATHRON ASCENSUM [ledley 1907

Inabathron ascensuan Hedley 1907, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 32, (3), 496.

Locs.—Old.: Mast Head Reef, Capricorn Group { (type ae: ),

Remarks— Distinguished by the massive spiral keel, second keel on the base.

lirst appearing as a thread above the suture of the last whorl, the fine microscopic

striae over-running the whole surface, and the aperture surrounded by a broad

and thick yvarix,

ANABATHRON ControrTUM Hedley 1907

fnabathron contortum Hedley 1907. Proc. Linn. Soe, N.SAV..

Locs.—Old.: Mast Head Reef, Capricorn Group (type ms

2, (3), 496.

Remarks—Remarkable in that the Jast whorl is uncoiled.

ANABATTIRON EMBLEMATICUM (Hedley 1906 }

Kissou emblematicumn Hedley 1906, Pree. Linn. Soc. N.SAY., 30

he. 24.

Loc——-N.S.W.: Manly Beach (type loc.).

Remarks—Distinguished by the axial plicae. A specimen from St. [Francis

Island, South Australia, approaches this species but it is doubtful whether it is

this species or a new one. More material is required before it can be decided,

520, pl. xxxit.

’

CoENACULUM Iredale 1924

Coenacnulunt Iredale 1924, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 49, 244.

Paraseala Cotton and Godfrey 1931, S. Aust. Nat., 13, (1), 7. Same genotype.

Genotype: Scalarta (Aerilla) ininutula Tate and May 1900-—Tasmania,

Shell minute, thick, ie turreted, very elongate, suture linear, bounded

anteriorly by a spiral thread; sculptured by slender slightly oblique ribs number-

313

ing 15 on the penultimate whorl, and somewhat bent at the angulation of the

whorls; the interspaces as wide and smooth; protoconch of a four carinated

whorl which is convex and wide, and of a small hemispheric tip.

Remarks—This peculiar shell may be distinguished by its protoconch of one

whorl and a tip and by its very elongate and narrow shell. Thiele places

Cocnaculum, with a query, as a section of the genus Aclis Loven 1846 in the

family Achidae.

CoENACULUM MINUTULUM (Tate and May 1900)

Scalaria (Acrilla) minutula Tate and May 1900, Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 24, 95.

Locs-—-Tasm.: North Coast; N.S.W.: dead in shell sand and alive in dredg-

ings from 20 to 22 fathoms Twofold Bay; 5S, Aust.: shell sand Gulf St. Vincent,

Robe, Arno Bay; Vict.: shell sand Western Port.

Remarks—Readily recognised by its elongate form, peculiar sculpture and

protoconch, this shell seems to be fairly widely distributed in shell sand along

our coasts.

Arrenvuata Hedley 1918

Attenuata Hedley 1918, Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 41, (supplement) 52.

Genotype: Rissoa integella Medley 1904—16 miles east of Wollongong, 100

fathoms.

Shell elongate and slender; sculpture of sharp spiral keels which multiply

from three on the first to eight on the body whorl; interstices latticed with faint

lines and microscopic spiral scratches; aperture subcircular, outer lip bearing a

rather strong varix, inner lip reflected over an umbilical furrow; protoconch

globose, spirally grooved, of one rounded whorl constricted at the suture.

Distribution—New South Wales.

Remarks—Distinguished from Coenaculum by the dominant spiral sculpture

of the shell. The protoconch suggests close affinity with that genus.

ATTENUATA INTEGELLA (Hedley 1904)

Rissoa integella Hedley 1904, Proc, Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 29, 185, pl. ix, fig. 20.

Locs-—N.S.W.: 16 miles cast of Wollongong 100 fathoms (type loc.).

Remarks—The elongate, narrow shell and peculiar spiral sculpture dis-

tinguish the species.

SUMMARY

Seventeen gencra and 103 species of recent Rissoidae are recorded in this

revision of the Australian members of the family. This does not include those

genera sometimes placed in Rissoidae but here regarded as Rissoinidae, namely,

Rissoina, Rissolina, Stiva in Australia, and Nogeba in New Zealand, all separated

from typical Rissoidae by the semilunar, anteriorly effuse or channelled aperture.

By comparison, it may be noted that the recent New Zealand fauna contains 29

genera and 131 species. Fourteen genera are common to both Australia and

New Zealand. Two new genera and ten new species are described as listed below.

The more important localities are mentioned to show the distribution in the various

States, and many new southern Australian localities are here recorded for the

first time.

NEw GENERA

Subestea n. gen., genotype Alvania seminodosa May 1915.

Eusctia n. gen., genotype Rissopsis expansa Powell 1930.

Estea relata n.sp., South Australia, Gulf,

Heurakia mediolacvis 1. sp., South Australia, Cape Jaffa 300 fathoms.

314

NEw SPECIES

Estea erma n.sp., South Australia, Cape Borda 62 fathoms.

Estea amblycorymba n. sp., South Australia, Gulf St. Vincent, i4 fathoms.

St. Vincent 14 fathoms.

Lironoba sulcata n. sp., South Australia, Cape Borda 62 fathoms.

Botelloides borda n.sp., South Australia, Cape Borda 55 fathoms.

Merelina cyrta n. sp., Western Australia, King George Sound.

Linemera occidua n.sp., Western Australia, Hopetown,

Notosetia muratensis n. sp., South Australia, Murat Bay.

Epigrus borda n.sp., South Australia, Cape Borda, 62 fathons.

Page

Achs - = - 307,313

Acrilla - + 312

agnewi - - 296

Alvania ~ = 292

amblycorymba ~- 289

Anabathron - 311

Apicularia - - 293

apicilirata - - 300

approxima - - 287

archensis - - 295

ascensum - - 312

atkinsoni - - 304

atropurpurea - 304

Attenuata - - 313

aurantiocincta - 306

australiae - - 300

australis - = 296

badia - ~~ 308,310

badius - - ~- 308

Barleeia - - 303

bassiana - - 298

beddomei - ~- 306

bicolor - - - 288

borda - - 298, 308

Botelloides - - 298

Botellus - = 298

brevis - - - 307

buliminoides - 307

capricorneus ~ 311

castlecliffensis - 306

cheilostoma - 299

Cithna - - - 286

Coenaculum - 312

columnaria - 288, 307

consobrina - - 306

contabulatum - 312

contortum - - 312

costatus ~ » 311

cyclostema - 287,288

cylindraceus - 308

cyrta - - - 300

Dardanula - - 305

demessa - 294

INDEX TO

devecta -

Diala - -

diemenensis

descrepans -

dissimilis =

dubia - +

dubitalis ~

elegans -

emblematicum

Epigrus -

erma -— -

erratica -

Estea - -

eucraspeda -

Eusetia >

expansa -

fasciata -

filocincta = -

flamia - -

flammea -

flindersi -

frauenfeldi -

frenchiensis

freycinett -

fricta - +

fumata - -

glomerosa -

gracilis - -

egradata -

hamiltoni = -

Haurakia-

Hetororissoa

hulliana -

imbrex - -

incidata -

incompleta -

integella -

iravadoides -

ischna

jacksoni -

janjucensis -

kershawi -

labrotoma -

Page

- 300

- 286

- 296

- 294

- 308

- 305

- 299

- 312

- 307

- 288

- 305

~ 287

- 301

- 306

- 300

- 302

- 306

~ 292

- 290

~ 288

- 295

- 306

- 299

- 298

- 300

~ 301

- 293

- 286

~ 300

- 297

- 288

- 294

- 313

~ 289

- 308

- 3ll

~ 289

- 291

SPECIES AND GENERA

layardi - -

tene - -

liddelliana -

lineata - -

Linemera = -

Lironoba = +

lockyeri ~

luteofuscus -

maccoyi -

mediolaevis

melanochroma

melanura ss -

mercurialis -

Merelina -

microcosta -

minutulum -

multilirata -

muratensis -

nitens - -

Nodulus -

Notoscrobs -

Notosetia -

novarensis -

Nozeba “

obeliscus -

occidua -

ochroleuca -

olivacea =

Parascala -

pellucida -

pellyae -— -

perpolita -

pertranslucida

pertumida -

petterdi -

praeda - -

praetornatilis

procincta = -

profundior -

protractus -

puer -

pulvilla -

pulchella = -

Page

297

312

294

293

301

295

297

311

307

294

305

299

291

313

297

304

311

303

294

286

291

302

300

292

312

304

310

290

303

291

310

289

297

304

294

308

291

298

310

pupoides -

Pusillina -

purpureostoma

pyramidata

relata - -

Rissopsis -

Rissolina — -

rosea -— -

rubicunda = -

salebrosa -

schoutanica

scrobiculater

Scrobs ~~ -

sculptilis -

semicinctus

seminodosa

simillima = -

simsoni -

sophiae *

Stiva - +

strangel -

Subestea -

Subonoba -

suleata - -

supracostata

suprasculpta

suteri - -

tasmanica-

tenisoni -

tiara - .

thouinensis -

trajectus -

triangulus

tumida - -

typica - -

unilirata -

verconiana -

verconis -

wilsonensis -

woodsi - -

xanthias -

zosterophila

ukhwn-

fox

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944

Estea erma n.sp., holotype, x 42 7

Estea amblycorymba n. sp., holotype, x 24 8

Estea relata n.sp., holotype, x 17 9

Haurakia mediolaevis un. sp., holotype,x 190.

Lironoba sulcata n.sp., holotype. x 15 11

Botelloides borda un. sp., holotype, x 13 12

Vol. 68, Plate XVI

Merelina cyrta n.sp., holotype, x 20

Linemera occidua n.sp., holotype, x 27

Notosetia muratensis n.sp., holotype, x 32

Epigrus borda n.sp., holotype, x 10

Scrobs pellyae Nevill, x 24

Subestea flindersi Tenison Woods, x 12

THE DISTRIBUTION OF PLAGUES OF AUSTROICETES CRUCIATA

SAUSS. (ACRIDIDAE) IN AUSTRALIA IN RELATION TO CLIMATE,

VEGETATION AND SOIL

By H. G. ANDREWARTHA

Waite Agricultural Research Institute. University of Adelaide

Summary

The small plague grasshopper, Austroicetes cruiata Sauss, has only one generation in a year. This is

ensured by the occurrence of an obligate diapause in the egg-stage (Andrewartha 1943, 1944). In

eastern Australia egg-laying begins early in November and continues for about five weeks. Within a

few days of being laid the eggs enter a stale of diapause which continues during the summer and is

finally eliminated during June (Birch 1942). Once diapause has been eliminated the eggs are no

longer resistant to drought (Birch and Andrewartha 1942). Consequently, they either hatch during

the early spring or, if soil moisture is inadequate for development, they die. The date of emergence

of the nymphs may vary between mid-August and late September, depending upon the temperature

of the soil in which they are developing (Andrewartha 1944). The nymphs require about six weeks

to complete their development; sexually mature adults usually appear towards the end of October.

315

THE DISTRIBUTION OF PLAGUES OF AUSTROICETES CRUCIATA SAUSS.

(ACRIDIDAE) IN AUSTRALIA IN RELATION TO CLIMATE,

VEGETATION AND SOIL

By H. G. ANDREWARTHA

Waite Agricultural Research Institute, University of Adelaide

[Read 14 September 1944]

Piates XVII axnp XVIII

A INTRODUCTION

The small plague grasshopper, Austroicetes cruciata Sauss, has only one

generation in a year. This is ensured by the occurrence of an obligate diapause

in the egg-stage (Andrewartha 1943, 1944). In eastern Australia egg-laying

begins early in November and continues for about five weeks. Within a few days

of being laid the eggs enter a state of diapause which continues during the summer

and is finally eliminated during June (Birch 1942), Once diapause has been

eliminated the eggs are no longer resistant to drought (Birch and Andrewartha

1942). Consequently, they either hatch during the early spring or, if soil mois-

ture is inadequate for development, they die. The date of emergence of the

nymphs may vary between mid-August and late September, depending upon the

temperature of the soil in which they are developing (Andrewartha 1944).

The nymphs require about six weeks to complete their development; sexually

mature adults usually appear towards the end of October.

The life cycle of the species in Western Australia is essentially similar, except

that the season is some four to six weeks earlier than in eastern Australia. Thus

nymphs may hatch in July and egg-laying may begin late in September. Diapause

may be eliminated from the eggs earlier than it is in eastern Australia (Jenkins

1937).

The occurrence of diapause in the egg-stage is a valuable adaptation, since it

ensures that the active stages af the grasshopper will not be present during the

summer when there would be no food for them, or during the winter when tem-

perature would be too low for satisfactory development. Diapause also limits

the distribution of the species, preventing it from colonising areas in which the

temperature during the winter is too high to eliminate diapause, or areas in which

the rainfall in the spring is unreliable.

Plagues of A. cruciata have been recorded from Western Australia (Jenkins

1937), South Australia (Andrewartha 1939), and New South Wales (Key 1938) ;

plagues occur in well-defined areas which are situated on the borders of the wheat

belts in those States (text fig. 2C and 4B). These areas are not continuous ;

those in Western and South Australia are separated by a vast area in which the

species is not known to occur, even as solitary individuals. The infestation area

in South Australia is separated from the infestation area in New South Wales

by a large region in which solitary individuals of A. cruciata occur, but from

which swarms have either not been recorded, or else have occurred rarely in

restricted local situations (text fig. 1). It will be shown in this paper that the

region which separates the infestation areas in Western and South Australia

experiences a climate which is unfavourable for the survival of A. cruciata. On the

‘Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 68, (2), 30 November 1944

316

other hand, the region separating the infestation areas in South Australia and

New South Wales experiences essentially the same climate as these two infesta-

tion areas, but in this case the nature of the soil and vegetation inhibits the wide-

spread development of swarms,

Bo INFLUENCE or CLIMATE

The influence of rainfall is more important than that of temperature in limit-

ing the distribution of plagues of A. eruciata in southern Australia, For example,

in South Australia records of minimum temperature for the winter period indicate

that temperatures adequate for the elimination of diapause occur widely, both to

the north and the south of the area in which plagues of A. eruciata occur.

Similarly, records of maximuni temperatures) for the spring period indicate

that temperatures adequate for the development of the active stages are not

Hinges y ate ayeden es — EY ia ao — eS BE — 1

: i : j j F

+ : r

o fog vt

' TYPE v

ee. LIMIT OF SUMMER DRAIN

DISTRIBUTION OF GRASSHOPPERS

ae) SWARMS MAY BE WIDESPREAD

o SSOLATED SWARMS

.e) SOLITARY INDIVIDUALS.

| VEGETATION TYPES

ms SG ONE) TTT? zone 2 E:

ZONES

bo seeb apes ISOPLETHS FoR % RATIO

Siena ere

: { } t i

age a aE: gee ap ee J

lig. 1

Part of south-eastern Australia, showing: (a) The zone of favourable climate for

A. cruciate as indicated by isopleths for P/E ratio. The northern boundary is the

isopleth for P/E ratio for October = 0-25, and the southern boundary is the isopleth for

P/IE ratio for September = 1-0. (b) The distribution of soil favourable to 4. eruciala as

indicated by the distribution of vegetation types. (c) The areas commonly infested by

swarms of «f. ernectata,

restricted to the infestation area for fl. cruciata. Ty Western Australia the infesta-

tion area experiences mininium temperatures during the winter which are higher

than those recorded for the infestation areas in South Australia and New South

Wales, but in Western Australia a geographical race of A. cructata, which requires

higher temperatures for the elimination of diapause has developed (Andrewartha

1944). So in Western Australia and New South Wales, as in South Australia,

temperatures favourable for the elimination of hapause and the development of

the active stages occur over a much wider ar ‘a than that actually infested by

swarms of -f. cruciata, which are restricted by their moisture requirements.

comparisons involving the influence of temperature upon rate of development (Andre-

wartha 1944 a).

317

‘The active stages of A. cruciata are present during July to October in Western

Australia, and August to November in castern Australia; and drought during

this period may prove critical in limiting the distribution of the species towards

the drier parts of Australia. It has been shown that oceasional droughts during

this critical period are important in limiting the numbers of A. cruciata in the

infestation areas (Froggatt 1909, Birch and Andrewartha 1941).

The effectiveness of rainfall in promoting the development of plants and

animals can be satisfactorily measured by the ratio of rainfall to evaporation ;

in particular the conception has been developed of a “season” defined by the

number of months in the year during which this ratio exceeds O05 (Davidson

1936). In southern Australia the scason of adequate moisture occurs during the

winter. ‘The number of months during which the ratio P/E exceeds 0°5 decreases

as the distance inland increases. Consequently, it is to be expected that an

isopleth for P/E ratio may be found which may serve to define the linnts of the

infestation area for A. cruciata on its drier side.

The distribution of swarms of 4. cruciata is known best for South Australia.

Consequently, the infestation area for this State was plotted on a map together

with isopleths for various values of P/E ratio, calculated from the records for

mean monthly rainfall, temperature and relative humidity by methods described

elsewhere (Andrewartha 1940). It was found that the isopleth for P/E = 0°25

for October closely followed the boundary of the infestation area (text fig. 1).

Other isopleths (¢.g., P/E = 0°13 for November) fitted nearly as well, But the

former was chosen because it was the best of those tried. It is to be expected that

isopleths for different values of P/IE ratio for adjacent months should be parallel

since there was a high correlation between rainfall, or evapo ration, for adjacent

months for the stations used in this analysis. The value P/E = 0:25 for October

might reasonably have been expected to provide a useful criterion since: (a) Any

zone for which the P/E ratio for October exceeded 0°25 would have a higher

ratio (probably in excess of 0°5) for June, July, August and September, thus

ensuring adequate growth of the annual and herbaccous perennial plants upon

which 4. cruciata feeds; (b) Most of these plants are drought-resistant and

require less rain to keep them alive and green than is necessary for active growth.

Speargrass (Stipa spp.) is particularly adapted to make use of small falls of rain

(Birch and Andrewartha 1941).

The isopleth for P/E ratio for October = 0:25 was plotted on a map showing

the infestation area in New South Wales.) For Western Australia the isopleth

P/E for September = 0°25 was used since the scason for 4. cructatais about four

weeks carlier there than in eastern Australia. he isopleths were copied from

unpublished maps prepared by Professor J. Davidson, using the methods which

he has described (Davidson 1935). The infestation areas in both New South

Wales and Western Australia fall, for the most part, inside the climatic zone, of

which the boundary on the drier side is defined by this isopleth for P/E ratio

(text fig. 1 and 2).

The infestation areas for <i. cruciata do not extend into the more hamid

zones nearer the coast. The way in which climate inhibits the development of

swarms of 4. cruciate in these humid zones has not been demonstrated by specific

to me by Dr, K. H. L. Rey, whe had compiled them in co-operation with the officers of

the Pasture Protection Boards of New South Wales (Key 1938). The infestation area

jor Western Australia was taken from maps kindly loaned to me by Mr. C.F, H. Jenkins,

who had compiled them in collaboration wth officers of the Agricultural Bank of Western

Australia. They covered the period 1935-1941 and gave detailed information on the

oceurrence of plagues of 4. cructata on each farm-holding.

318

observations, But it is likely that most importance should be attributed to the

influence of periods of high rainfall and atmospheric humidity, which create an

environment favourable for the development of bacterial and fungal parasites of

the grasshoppers. Parker (1930) has quoted several examples where mass

destruction of nymphs was brought about in this way. He concludes that wet

weather lasting for about five days may initiate an epidemic of fungal and

bacterial parasites. Continuous high atmospheric humidity appears to be more

important than the amount of rainfall, or the prevailing temperature. Epidemics

have occurred at widely different temperatures. In one of the examples quoted

by Parker the prevailing maximum temperatures were of the order 70°-80° B.,

and the minimum temperatures 40°-60° F. In another example the prevailing

maximum temperatures were of the order 50°-60° F., and the minimum tempera-

tures 30°-40° F. The latter temperatures are of the same order as those experi-

enced in the infestation areas for 4. cruciata during the time when the nymphs

are present.

The destruction of A. cruciata in this way has not been observed; but the

expansion and contraction of the area in Western Australia infested by swarms

A YALGoo

GARLEE

(777) AREA INFESTED BY

SWARMS 1935-42

AREA INFESTED 8Y

KAJ swarms 1937

aeeer {SOPLETHS FOR

Raario

Vig. 2

Part of West Australia A, showing: (a) The zone of favourable climate for A. cruciata

as indicated by isopleths for P/E ratio. (b) The areas infested by plagues of A. cructata

during the period 1935-42. (c) “Soil and ecological regions” (after Teakle), B, showing

the distribution of “reverted” arable land in the area where climate favours 4. cruciata.

Each dot represents 5,000 acres. ‘C, showing the distribution of arable land in the same

area. Each dot represents 10,000 acres.

during the period 1936-1938 may provide indirect evidence that such an event

occurred in 1938 (text fig. 2 and 3). From text fig. 2 it is clear that in 1937

widespread swarms were present in an area normally not infested: isolated swarms

occurred over an even wider area than that shown on the map. Since A. cruciata

is not strongly migratory—about 15-20 miles is the most that it travels in one

generation (Jenkins 1937)—it is clear that the swarms had developed from

solitaria in this zone. They disappeared from this area during 1938, and during

this and subsequent years swarms were restricted to the normal infestation area.

For 1937, and for several years preceding 1937, the rainfall in this area was below

average (Jenkins 1937) ; in 1938 the rainfall was also below average, but July was

abnormally wet. Not only was rainfall for July abnormal (P/E ratio exceeded

2-0 over most of: the area which had been infested by swarms in 1937), but also

rain was recorded on 10 out of the 15 days between 16-31 July. There is little

doubt that this excessively humid period during the latter part of July 1938 was

319

the principle cause for the disappearance of swatms from the area outside the

normal infestation area (text fig. 3). Text fig. 3 also shows that there were no

such excessively humid periods in the critical months (July-August) of 1936 or

1937, when the grasshoppers were multiplying to plague numbers.

The rainfall during earlier months of the winter (May-June) does not

influence the survival of the grasshopper directly, since the egg stage is little

affected by exposure to high humidity“; but indirectly rainfall during these

months may be important since adequate rainfall at this time promotes a dense

growth of grasses and other herbaceous plants and thus increases the humidity

near the soil surface where the grasshoppers live. This may be a partial explana-

tion for the relationship which Jenkins demonstrated between the increase in

swarms of 4. cruciata and the total rainfall to the end of July (Jenkins 1937).

AUG. 1936 \

aig 9 wet Gays

145i wet days

Phas § wet days

wn 5 wet days

Oe TULY 1937 \V NASA Aus 1937 \

‘Vth 3 weet days

0 2 wet days re

| ft Bt twee days

ya wet days

A %

. WY ij, AREA INFESTED BY SWARMS 1995+ 42

WN AREA INFESTED BY SWARMS [937

be i. : Se naTio

SI) Suey 1938 \ mi =

VY at ge 1 eee

| JUNE 1938 Whar 303 Je Ee Jom

we MRED SIS Sec senna ce 2p =) (MEAN)

ce _—— vt me z

| a

Fig. 3

Showing: (a) the area normally infested by plagues of A, cruciate and the abnormal

distribution of plagues during 1937. (b) The value for P/E ratio for individual

months. Note that values for P/E ratio for July and August were low during

1936 and 1937, and that July 1938 was abnormally humid.

The complexity of climatic factors operating to inhibit the development of

swarms in the humid zones makes it difficult to find a single climatic index which

may define the limits on the humid side of the climatic zone favourable for the

development of A. cruciata, Nevertheless, it has been found practicable to use

an isopleth of P/E ratio for this purpose.

The infestation area for South Australia was plotted on a map together with

various isopleths for P/E ratio. It was found that the isopleth for P/E for

@) This statement is based on unpublished experiments with the eggs of A. cruciala

done at the Waite Institute,

tea

tya

September = 1-0 approximated most closely to the southern limits of the infesta-

tion area in South Australia. This isopleth was then plotted on a map of New

South Wales ‘together with the infestation area for that State. For Western

Australia the isopleth of P/E for August = 1-0 was used. The isopleths were

copied from maps published by Davidson, (1935). It was found that the infesta-

tion areas for Western Australia and New South Wales for the most part. fell

inside one climatic zone defined in this way (text fig. 1 and 2 A).

This method of using P/E ratio gives only an indirect measure of the

factors which it is desired to define, namely, the frequency and intensity of spells

of humid weather during the time that the grasshoppers are active.4? The success

of the method depends upon the correlation between P/E ratio and the frequeney

and intensity of periods of humidity high enough to tavour the development of

fungal and bacterial parasites of the grasshopper.

The use of an isopleth for a single month (September for eastern Australia.

August for Western Australia) to define the limits of the infestation areas is

reasonable despite the fact that the active stages of sf. cruciate are present for

several months, because (a) there is a high correlation between the P/E ratio for

adjacent months, and (b) in southern Australia there is a well-defined wet season

in the winter and dry season in the summer; thus the weather becomes pro-

gressively drier as the season advances, and consequently the greater hazards from

excessive humidity occur early in the season when the nymphs are still in the early

stages of development. The latter condition does not hold further north, because

the influence of summer rainfall becomes important (Davidson 1936).

Swarms of 4. criciata have not been tecorded north of about Dubbe in

New South Wales, although solitary individuals have been recorded from as far

north as the Queensland border (Key 1938). The ecology of «1. criciata in these

northern areas has not been studied, consequently it has been found impracticable

to interpret the climatic factors inhibiting swarm formation in this zone, Lt is,

however, quite unlikely that the sanie arbitrary criteria which served to delimit

the favourable areas for A. eruciata in a winter rainfall zone will also serve in a

zone where the greater part of the rain falls in the summer. The isopleths for

P/E ratio= 1 for September and 0-25 for October, extend northwards into

southern. Queensland, but ‘they have little significance as indicators of a favourable

zone for A. cructata north of about latitude 31° S, which marks the approximate

southern limit of the summer rainfall type in this area (text fig. 1). (See Year-

hook of the Commonwealth of Australia 1940, map opposite p. 39.)

Co Tr TNPLueNce or Som,

The females of f. eruciata require firm, compact soil for egg-laying, Indeed,

they sometimes succeed in boring into surfaces which seem incredibly hard for

this purpose; for example. they have been observed ovipositing into the surface

of a metal road (Andrewartha 1939). But they do net oviposit into loose sandy

soil or into soil that has been recently cultivated (Jenkins 1937, Newman 1937).

This requirement restricts the distribution of f. eruciatu. In certain paris of ihe

zone of favourable climate, shown in text fig. 1 and 2, the development of

A. cruciate is inhibited by the absence of suitable soil for oviposition. The soils

inthis zone have nat been mapped in sufficient detail to be tised in this study

P/E ratio was developed, namely, to define the minimum amount of rainfall necessary

to maintain soil moisture at an adequate level for the development of plants and animials.

Tt was in this latter capacity that the ratio was used to define the limits af the infestation

areas on their drier side, (See above.)

32]

of the distribution of the grasshopper. But the distribution of vegetation types

las been studied in more or less detail for all the areas with which we are con-

cerned, and the distribution of vegetation type is related to the distribution of soll

iwpe Clrescott 1931) > im this case it provides a useful guide to the occurrence of

suils favourable to A. criciata.

he distribution of soil and vegetation types in Western Australia has been

studied by Teakle (1938). Tle considers that the area with which we are con-

cerned (see text fig. 2) is a dissected plateau. The original level of the plateau

is represented by high-level lateritic sandplain, which is generally about 100 to

200 fect above the level of the valley floors. The process of erosion and dissection

has produced broad mature valleys which are characterised by woodland vegeta-

tien and “salt-lake” systems (pl. xvii, fig. 1).

The principal soils associated with the woodland vegetation are “mallee”

suils consisting of a brown or greyish surface soil resting on a calcareous subsoil.

They are all sandy loams, often shallow, with the amount of clay increasing

rapidly in the deeper layers. If these soils be cultivated for a period and then

alloweé to remain idle for a few years. they set frm and are then suitable for ovi-

position by 4. cruciata.

The loose sandy soil and the heath “serub” vegetation which is characteristic

of the high-level lateritic sandplain is shown in pl. xvii, fig. 2, The soil is infertile.

It will support only poor herbage when cleared and cultivated; when arable land

has been left idle for a few years the original heath vegetation tends to re-establish

itself, The soils of the sandplain are unsuited to .4. cruciata, no matter how they

he treated.

The precise distribution of vegetation types i Western Australia has not

been mapped. But Teakle has divided the State into a number of “‘soil and

ecological regions.” The relevant regions are shown on text fig. 2. The infesta-

tion area for A. cruciata is largely restricted to the Merredin region which is

essentially an area of brown and red-brown woodland soils. The western part of

the Fitzgerald region, which lies inside the climatic zone favourable to A. eructata

but into which the infestation area does not extend, has a larger proportion of

sand-heath formation than any other region of the zone of grey and brown

calcareous. solonised soils of the low rainfall Eucalyptus woodland (Teakle 1938).

In eastern Australia in the zone where climate is favourable for A. cruciata,

the distribution of vegetation types has been mapped in greater detail, The distribu-

tion shown in text fig. 1 has been adapted from maps prepared by Wood (1937)

and Beadle! Zone 1 of text fig. 1 includes the Sclerophyl Forest and Savannah

Woodland of Wood, and the Woodland, Savannah Woodland, and Savannah of

Beadle. Zone 2 ineludes certain “Arid Communities’ of Wood (namely,

uecalyptus odorata-E. oleasa- Callitris, Cassia - Dodonca - Eremophila, Mvyo-

porum - Atriplex and Atriple. - Salicornia) and the Shrub Steppe of Beadle (ze.

-ltriples vesicarium and Kochia). Zone 3 includes the Mallee (Lucalyptus -

pleosa- Li. dwmosa) and Mulga (Acacia ancnra) of Wood and the Eucalyptus

vleasa - E. dumosa and Casuarina ~ Heterodendron zones of Beadle. The boundary

ai zone 3 in Victoria was taken from a map published by Hills showing the limits

of the Mallee in Victoria (ills 1939),

The vegetation types which have been grouped in zone 3 are usually asso-

ciated with light soils which are loose and sandy on the surface and consequently

& Mr. N. Beadle very kindly gave me a copy of a map which he had prepared

<hawing the distribution of vegetation types in south-western New South Wales. Mr.

oe has pot yet published this map or the results of his studies in the ecology of

this area.

are not favourable for 4. eruciafa, Tn local situations within this zone the soil

may be favourable, for example in South Australia in the Mallee heavier soils

may be associated with low lying areas; and in such situations wf. cruciata may

flourish. But in general the soils in zone 3 are not favourable to 4. cruciate :

swarms are less likely to develop under these conditions, and when they do develop

they are restricted to local situations (text fig. 1). The vegetation types which

have been grouped in zones 1 and 2 are associated with soils which, for the most

part, are firm on the surface and are therefore favourable to 4. cruciatu. The

boundaries of these two zones mark the limits of the area which is potentially

subject to plagues of the grasshopper. At present the distribution of swarms

within this area is restricted by the distribution of habitats carrying an abundanec

of suitable food plants.

THr [NPLUENCE OF VEGETATION (6)

The most favourable food plants for A. cruciata are certain grasses, par-

ticularly ffordeum murinum L., Schismus calycinum 1.., Stipa spp., Danthonia spp..

and cereals such as wheat and oats. They also feed readily on certain species of

Medicago, Trifolium, Erodium and Sida, and less readily on Lichinim planta-

gineum 1... and Heliotropuim ecuropeum 1, which may become common in certain

habitats. All these plants are either annuals or low-growing herbaceous peren-

nials. Many are exotics; all are important because they have the ability to invade:

and dominate areas from which the native vegetation has been removed.

Wherever the original vegetation remains, favourable habitats for 4. cruciate

are restricted in area and widely dispersed. The undergrowth in the woodland

associations in Western Australia consists largely of shrubs which are not suit-

able food plants for the grasshopper. Grasses are not common; they tend ta

eecur only in local situations (Teakle 1938). Similarly, in eastern Australia

favourable habitats for A. cruciata are not extensive in those arcas where the

original vegetation remains, since the indigenous trees and shrubs are not suitable

food plants for the grasshopper; and grasses and low-growing annuals and herba-

ceous perennials are not common except in restricted situations. Clearly the

presence of large areas which are favourable to the development of swarms of

A. cruciata is causally related to the history of the utilisation of these areas since

they were opened up for agriculture,

in Western Australia, in the climatic zone favourable to 4. cruciata, the

land was developed almost exclusively for wheat-growing, The heavier woodland

soils were chosen; very little of the high-level sandplain was cleared. Over most

of the area rainfall has proved to be too low and too unreliable for wheat-growine.

Facihties for sheep-raising were not available. So, in many cases, farmer

abandoned their holdings and the land was allowed to lie idle. The plants which

established themselves on this idle land were mostly species which were suitable

as food for the grasshopper. In the more southern parts of the area Hordeun

murinum was the most common species, and there are vast arcas in which this

species occurs as an almost pure stand (pl. xvii, fig. 3); further north Siipa spp.

become more common. These areas of “reverted” arable land are highly favour-

able habitats for A. cruciata,

The distribution of these areas of “reverted” land within the climatic belt

favourable to 4. cruciate is indicated in text fig. 2B. The data were taken from

() In the preceding section the distribution of the original vegetation types, before

it Was modified by the activities of white settlers, was used as a guide to the distribution

of soils favourable to A. cruciafa. This section is concerned with the vegetation which

occurs in these areas at present.

323

the Statistical Register for Western Australia, Table No. 9. The land under

crops or recently cultivated was estimated for each statistical district for each year

between 1928-1940. The area given for 1940 was subtracted from the area for

the year in which this figure reached a maximum. The balance was considered as

“reverted” arable land for the purposes of text fig. 2B. This method (although

unsatisfactory for giving an estimate of the absolute quantity of “reverted” land.

since there is no guarantee that the same land is referred to each year) gives a

useful guide to the distribution of ‘‘reverted” land. It is clear that plagues of

A. cruciata tend to occur in areas where there is a lot of “reverted” land.

In eastern Australia the land was developed both for wheat-growing and for

sheep-raising, the former more particularly in the more humid areas (i.e., roughly

zone 1 of text fig. 1), and the latter in the more arid areas. The land, which was

originally developed for wheat-growing, has had much the same history as that

in Western Australia. The rainfall proved inadequate for wheat-growing and

wheat was gradually replaced by pasture.

A large number of grasses and other low-growing herbage plants constitute

the major part of the flora of these pastures (pl. xviii, fig. 2). For example, the

plants which were collected from the representative situations in the grasshopper

belt of South Australia are listed below. The species marked by an asterisk were

prominent; the others less common or rare. All three situations provided highly

favourable habitats for A. crvciata. Situation A was a common near Pekina:

situation B a stock route near Wilmington; and situation C a paddock near

Orroroo,

Situation B

*Stipa scabra Lindl.

SITUATION A

*Lomandra dura lewart

Triodia trritans R. Br.

Flordeunt murtiauae qa.

Danthoma semiannularis R. Br.

Bromus niadritensis L.

Koelaria phleoides Pers.

Trifolium tomentosum LL,

Medicago minima Grutb.

Lchium plantagincuns L.

Cryptostemma calendulacenm BK. Br.

Atriplex campanulatum Benth.

Calotis hispidula F.v. M.

Convolulus arvensis LL.

Plentago varia R. Br.

Jerodiuim botrys Bertol

Frodiun cygnorum Nees

Letragonia crcmaea Ostenf.

Malva parviflora L.

*Danthonia seniannularis R. Br.

*Hordeum murimum L,

*Schismus barbatus Juel

Medicago denticulata Willd.

Atriplex campanulatum Benth.

Chenopodium cristatuin Fv, M,

Chenopodium album 1.

Bassia patenticuspis R. WH. Anders

Euphorbia Driummondii Boiss

Calotis hispidula F.v. M.

Maloa parviflora L.

*iEchium plantagineum L.

Heltoiropium europacum LL,

Sida sp.

Siruation C

*Stipa scabra Lindl.

*Danthonia semiannularis R. Br.

*Schismus barbatus Juel

*Flordewn murinun, L.

*Triodia irritans R.Br.

*Erodium cygnorum Nees

Atriplex campanulatui Benth,

Papaver hybridum 1.

Spergularia diandra Heldr et Sart

*Zygophyllum crenatum F.v. M.

In the more arid areas the tendency has been for the land to be developed for

sheep-raising without first being used for wheat-growimg. In some instances.

324

particularly im South Australia, this has led to the destruction of the original

vegetation and its replacement by plant communities which provide favourable

habitats for the grasshopper. The general facies of the plant communities is much

the same as in those communities which occur on “reverted” arable land, but the

speargrasses (Siipa spp.) are more prominent (pl. xviii, fig. 1).

Thus in South Australia the relationship between the distribution of “reverted”

arable land and the distribution of swarms of 4. eruciata holds only for the more

humid part of the infestation area, This relationship is illustrated in text fig. 4A.

Vhe data were taken from the Statistical Register for South Australia and

analysed in the same way as the data for Western Australia. Comparable data

ior New South \Wales were not available; but Froggatt recognised as early as 1900

that it was the agricultural development taking place in the woodland areas that

favoured the increase of 4. cruciata (Froggatt 1900).

Certain of the vegetation associa-

‘tions which occur in zone 3 of text

: fig. 1 provide good pasture for sheep

(pl. xvin, fig. 3). And there are ex-

tensive areas in this zone, particularly

in New South Wales, where the land

has been developed for shecp-raising

without destroying, or greatly modify-

ing, the original vegetation, Con-

sequently there are large areas where

plagues of A. cruciata do not occur

even though the climate and the soil

are favourable. [f. during the future

development of these areas the

original vegetation should be de-

stroyed either by clearing or by mis-

management or overstocking of the

pastures, it is likely that the same

succession will occur in the vegetation

Text Fig. 4

art of South Australia A, showing the

distribution of “reverted” arable land in

relation to the area normally infested by

swarms of <f. erictata. Each dot repre-

sents 1,000 acres. B, showing the distri-

bution of arable land in the same area.

here as elsewhere in the zone. And an

extension may oecttr in the areas

which are subject to plagues of the

grasshopper.

Conversely the regeneration of suit-

able perennial shrubs in the pastures

in the areas which are now subject to

plagues may be followed by a reduction in the frequeney and severity of these

plagues. It may, at the same time, lessen the severity of soil erosion and help to

stabilise the carrying capacity of the pastures in these areas. This matter has been

discussed more fully elsewhere (Andrewartha 1943 a),

Each dot represents 5,000 acres.

SUM MARY

The distribution of plagues of A. cruciata in Australia is restricted, in the first

place, by climate, Swarms do not develop in areas where the rainfall during the

winter and spring is insufficient to keep the herbage upon which the grasshopper

feeds green until the egg-laying stage has been reached. The limits of the infesta-

tion area on the dry side correspond with the isopleth of P/E ratio = 0-25 for

October for eastern Australia, and for September for Western Australia.

325

At the other extreme, the development of plagues may be inhibited by the too

frequent occurrence during the early spring when the nymphs are present, of

periods of high humidity which favour the development of fungal and bacterial

parasites of the grasshopper. The limits of the infestation area on the wet side

correspond with the isopieth P/E ratio — 1-0 for September in eastern Australia

and for August in Western Australia.

Within the zone where climate is favourable the distribution of plagues of

-l. cruciata is further restricted by the absence of the type of firm soil which the

grasshopper requires for oviposition, The distribution of suitable soil has been

“aferred from the known distribution of vegetation types.

The distribution of swarms of A. cruciata is still further restricted by the

absence of favourable food plants. Favourable habitats do not occur extensively

in areas where the original vegetation remains because most of the indigenous

trees and shrubs are not eaten by the grasshopper. Where the original vegetation

has been destroyed, the land has usually been invaded by grasses and other low-

growing herbage which are favourable food plants for the grasshopper. There

are large areas in the zone where climate and soil are favourable where the

development of the land for agricultural and pastoral uses has destroyed the

original vegetation and created extensive favourable habitats for A. cruciata.

The establishment of suitable perennial shrubs in the pastures of the areas

where plagues occur may reduce the frequency and severity of the outbreaks.

REFERENCES

Axprewartia, H. G. 1939 Journ. Agric. S. Aust.. 43, 99

Anprewarrna, Hf. G. 1940 Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 64, 76

Awprewartna, H. G. 1943 Bull. dnt. Res., 43,

Anprewartua, H. G. 1943a Journ. Agr. S. Aust., 46, 314

AnprewartHa, FH, G. 1944 Aust. Journ, Exp. Biol. Med. Sci., 22, 17

Anprewartia, H. G. 1944a Bull. Ent. Res. (in press)

Breen, L. C. 1942 Aust. Journ. Exp. Biol. Med. Sci., 20, 17

Biren, L. C., and AnprewarrHa, H. G. 1941 Journ. Agr. S. Aust., 45, 95

Biren, L. C., and Anprewarrna, 11. G. 1942 Aust. Journ. Exp. Biol. Med.

Sei. 20,

Davinson, |. 1935 Trans. Roy. Soc, 5. Aust., 59, 107

Davipson, |. 1936 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 60, 88

Froccarr, W. 1900 Agric. Gaz. N.5.W., 11, 175

Froccart, W. 1909 Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., 20, 764

Finis, E.S. 1939 Trans. Roy. Soc. Viet.. 51, 297

Jenkins, C.F. EL, 1937 Journ. Agr. W. Aust.. 14, 367

Kry, Kk. HW. 1. 1938 Counc. Sci. Ind, Res. Aust. Bull, 117

Parker, J. R. 1930 Univ. Montant. Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull, 223

Newman, L. }. 1937 Journ. Agric. W. Aust., 14, 24

Prescott, J. A. 1931 Counce. Sct. Ind. Res. Aust. Bull., 52

Trace, L. J. H. 1938 Journ. Roy. Soc, W. Aust., 24, 123

Woop, J. G. 1937 ‘The Vegetation of S. Aust.: Nandb. Brit. Sci. Guild (S.A,

Branch)

326

EXPLANATION OF PLATES XVII AND XVIII

Pirate XVII

Fig. 1 Characteristic woodland vegetation in the grasshopper belt of Western Australia.

The trees are mostly Eucalyptus longicornis, the undershrubs Melaleura paupertflord. Note

the absence of grasses and other plants which might serve as food for the grasshoppers.

Fig. 2 Characteristic heath scrub on high-level lateritic sand-plain near Dalwallinu,

Western Australia, This soil is unsuited to A. cruciala, no matter how it is treated.

Fig.3 A dense growth of barley grass (Hordeum murinum) near Koorda, Western

Australia. This is characteristic of the “reverted” arable land on the woodland soils in the

grass-belt in Western Australia. It is a highly favourable habitat for 4. cruciata.

Pirate XVIII

Fig. 1 Characteristic grasshopper habitat in the more arid parts of the grasshopper

belt of South Australia. This land has never been cultivated, but the original scrub vege-

tation has been destroyed and speargrass (Stipa spp.) has become dominant.

F ig. 2 Characteristic grasshopper habitat on “reverted” arable land in South Australia.

The chief component of the pasture is barley grass (/lordewm murinum).

Pig. 3 Shrub Steppe in South Australia. The dominant plant is a saltbush (4tripler

vesicarma), which is good fodder for sheep, but is not suitable as food for the grasshopper.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944

ied j Te i

Vol. 68, Plate XVII

Fig.

ios)

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944

Vol. 68, Plate XVIII

Fig. 1

SOME SPECIES OF THE CHAETOGNATH GENUS SPADELLA

FROM NEW SOUTH WALES

By PATRICIA M. MAWSON, University of Adelaide

Summary

The Chaetognaths described in this paper were collected and recognised as belonging to an unusual

group by Mr. Keith Sheard of the C.S.ILR. Fisheries Division, Cronulla. New South Wales. The

present opportunity to examine them is due to his courtesy, and it is with pleasure that one of the

species has been associate with his name. The material has been deposited in the South Australian

Museum. Assistance from the Commonwealth Research Grant to the University of Adelaide is

acknowledged.

327

SOME SPECIES OF THE CHAETOGNATH GENUS SPADELLA

FROM NEW SOUTH WALES

By Parrtcra M. Mawson, University of Adelaide

| Read 14 September 1944|

The Chaetognaths described in this paper were collected and recognised as

belonging to an unusual group by Mr. Keith Sheard of the C.S.LR. Fisheries

Division, Cronulla, New South Wales. The present opportunity to examine them

is due to his courtesy, and it is with pleasure that one of the species has been

associated with his name. The material has been deposited in the South Austra-

lian Museum, Assistance from the Commonwealth Research Grant to the

University of Adelaide is acknowledged.

All specimens in the collection are apparently bottom-living forms belonging

io the genus Spadella. They have been taken only at two trawling stations. Of

the more northerly of these Mr. Sheard writes: “The Chaetognaths were taken

at a depth of about 70 metres about three miles off Port Hacking on fine sand and

detritus. That is the zone between the sands and the muds. Ecologically speak-

ing, it lies between the mud zone, characterised by Pagurids of various species,

and that dominated by tube-building amphipods. It represents the furthest dis-

tance seaward at which the estuarine flathead, Platycephalus fuscus, can be taken,

and the closest point on shore at which the tiger flathead (Neoplatycephalus

macrodom) is trawled. No algae come up from this depth.” The more southerly

station is off Ulladulla (140 miles south of Sydney), where the chaetognaths were

taken at 100 metres (45 fathoms) on fine sand. They have not been taken from

nearby stations on course sand or mud.

Most of the specimens collected have been identified as Spadella schizoptera

Conant, but amongst them are representatives of two species apparently hitherto

undescribed,

The only species belonging to this genus which has so far been recorded from

Australian waters is Sp. moretoncnsis Johnston and Taylor 1919, taken from

amongst algae at low tide mark in Moreton Bay, Queensland.

Many of the specimens were cleared in methyl salicylate, and it was found

that this caused a considerable and most misleading shrinkage in size; a specimen

measuring 5°6 mm. in length in glycerine shrank in methyl salicylate to 4-7 mm.,

and the tail segment taken as a percentage of the body length fell from 48% to

45%. In the case of Sip. schisoptera the lengths mentioned and the figures drawn

below are of specimens in glycerine; in Sp. sheardi and Sp. johnstoni they are,

unless otherwise stated, taken from material in methyl salicylate. In all meastire-

ments of total lengths the tail fin has been excluded,

SPADELLA SCHIZOPTERA Conant 1895

(Fig, 1-3, 6-11, 12-16)

About twenty individuals of Sp. schisoptera have been examined, and a more

detailed description of the species is now given.

The length of the present specimens varies from 4:1-4-9 mm., the greater

number being 4:1-4-4 mm. The head is slightly wider than the body. The tail

segment is about half the total body length. Of the two pairs of lateral fins the

posterior are entirely on the tail segment and are closely followed by a series of

five or six finger-like processes. Intestinal diverticula are not present. Ventral

transverse muscles can be seen extending nearly to the anus.

Trang. Roy. Sec. S.A., 68, (2) 30 November 1944

There are only two rows of teeth, corresponding lo the anterior rows in

Sayitta spp.; there are three large recurved teeth in each of these rows. Behind

them, ventrally (corresponding, as indicated by Yosii and Tokioka 1939, to the

vesuibular organ). is a pair of pads bearing wumerous denticles. Phere are 11

pairs of jaws of a simple tapering type. without flanges or serrations, The eoroua

lies partly on the head and partly on the body; its form: is best seen in Ag. 1. The

Fig.

sheardi, ventral view.

4, Sp.

a, anus; t, transverse duct from receptaculum

Fig.

and 5 to same scale.

semiinis:

ventral and lateral views.

Pig,

dorsal

soptera:

Sp, johistoni, ventral view,

Fig, 1-3, Sp. scha

small eyes he just behind the brain, and in long-preserved specimens the pigment

is all but faded. Sensory patches on the body are numerous and are arranged in

longitudmal and transverse rows; from most of them project relatively long hairs

which arise m each patch from its midline parallel to the width of the anima!

(fig. 15). In sections of these patches it is seen that cach is largely below the

vg, ventral ganglion,

329

epidermis, and consists of numerous ceils each with a deeply staining nucleus ;

many of the cells appear to be connected with the projecting hairs (fig. 14).

The brain was observed only in sections. It is joined to more posteriorly

situated lateral ganglia, from which branches are to be seen leading to some of

the larger sensory patches on the head, presumably there are finer branches to

the smaller sensory patches. The ventral ganglion, large and very obvious in a

lateral view of the animal, is hard to see in ventral view, and is apparently over-

Ob mm.

Fig. 6-11, Sp. schisoptera: series of transverse sections, numbered in order, 6 being

the most anterior. All to same scale. Lettering as in previous figure; in addition:

ap, adhesive process; h, homogeneous material; m, muscle; o, ovum; rs, receptaculum

seminis; s, sensory patch; v, vesicula seminalis.

lain by numerous sensory patches as shown in fig. 2. In transverse section it is

secn to consist, as described by various observers, of median nerve fibres and twa

lateral masses of ganglion cells.

The anterior fin is very small, about -O&8 mm. wide and -35 mm. long. Its

greatest width is at or just behind the centre. Although Yosit and Tokioka in

330

their account (1939) state that anterior fins were not present in their material,

iheir figure indicates a slight expansion in front of the posterior fin. This

expansion has a different relationship to the tail septum and to the female opening

from that exhibited in-our specimens. The anterior fins, as figured by Conant,

are distinctly wider than in our animals, though possessing approximately a

similar relation to the female opening and the tail septum.

The posterior fin follows almost immediately behind the anterior, commenc-

ing at about the beginning of the tail segment, The fin is 0-9 mm. long, and only

a little wider than the anterior, and each is closely followed by a ventrally-lying

flange produced into five or six finger-like processes. The most lateral of these

processes is continued from the outer edge of the fin and is covered for the

greater part of its length with small tubercular outgrowths. The number of pro-

cesses, whether five or six, appears to depend on the degree of separation of the

outermost two, these sometimes forming one stout process. As is shown in section

(fig. 10, 11), these processes do not contain any fin rays, and are supplied with

muscle fibres which pass obliquely from the ventral body wall; they arise from

the ventrolateral, instead of the dorsolateral, part of the body, They are therefore

not to be regarded as part of the fin. They are apparently mobile and used for

adhesion and support (probably in the manner described below for Sp. sheardi),

whereas the fins are balancing structures not movable separately from the body.

Yosii and Tokioka (1939) figure rays passing into the processes as well as into

the fins ; in the Australian specimens such lines are to be seen, but prove on closer

examination to be underlying muscle fibres.

The ovary in older specimens reaches almost to the neck region. Its struc-

ture had not been studied in detail, The general arrangement is as shown in

fig. 6-8. Apparently on each side the ovaries lie dorsally and the ducts ventrally.

On each side between the ovary and intestine, as well as occasionally between the

eggs and dorsal to the ovary, is a homogeneous material showing no structure and

without an enclosing wall, but connected with an accumulation of a similar sub-

stance, more definite in outline, which lics beside the ventral mesentery. This

substance has the appearance of a coagulated body-fluid, and is seen in all sections

from the posterior loop of the corona (anterior to the ovary) to the region behind

the female opening. In fig. 6-8 it is shown for convenience in black, though it

does not stain particularly deeply. Leading from each receptaculum seminis is a

tube which passes ventrally below the intestine just anterior to the anus and

apparently ends blindly at the mid-ventral mesentery, At about its mid-length

this tube gives off a short anterior caecum (fig. 13). This corresponds to the

structure described by Conant as occurring in Sp. schizoptera; but a median tube

leading forward, formed by the junction of the two transverse tubes, was not

observed in the present specimens, either in whole mounts or in section. The

presence of transverse ducts from the receptacultm seminis is not a characteristic

of the genus Spadella; they do not occur in the type species, S'p. cephaloptera, a

detailed description of which has been published by C. C. John (1933).

Spadella schizoptera has hitherto been recorded only twice, once by Conant

from three specimens captured off the Bahama Islands, and once by Yosii and

Tokioka from a single specimen found with Sp. cephaloptera collected near

Misaki, Japan.

Irom the figures given by these authors, and those of the present specimens,

it is apparent that a variation exists in the extent of the postcrior processes.

Those seen by Conant and those described above are present in about the third

quarter of the tail segment; those of the Japanese specimen reach from about the

middle of the tail segment to a point beyond its posterior end, In view of this,

and of the damaged condition of the corona and lateral fins in the Japanese

material, it is impossible to say whether the latter is an aberrant individual of

331

Sp. schizoptera, A table in which the significant points of these records are

compared will be found at the conclusion of this paper.

Spadella sheardi n. sp.

(Fig. 4, 17)

Five specimens of a closely related chaetognath were taken in company with

Sp. schisoptera described above. They differ, however, in several significant

features.

The lengths of two immature specimens are 3-9 mm, and 4-4 mm. (latter in

glycerine), and those of adults ranged between 4°7-6°3 mm. They are dis-

tinguished at a glance as being larger and more thick-set than Sp. schizoptera. The

tail segment is 44-45% of the body length when measured in methyl salicylate,

and 48% when in glycerine. In life the body is opaque and faintly mauve; the

dorsal surface is marked with brown pigment, which is present mainly in three

longitudinal bands and two transverse bands, one at the level of the receptacula

seminis and one at the level of the vesiculae seminales. In addition yellow pig-

ment is scattered lightly over the whole body surface. The eyes are small and

widely spaced, and are overlain by brown pigment. The fins are relatively wide.

Posterior adhesive processes are present, arranged in two groups on each side.

When the living animal is at rest in a petri dish it takes up an almost vertical

position with the head uppermost, supported by the tail fin flattened out on the

bottom of the dish and by the outspread adhesive processes which serve as “props”

to support the body. The stance is reminiscent of a,kangaroo supported by its

tail and hind limbs, and of the nematodes of Epsilonema spp., which have been

described as resting on the posterior curve of the body, the head projecting in

search of food, That the processes have adhesive qualities is shown by gently

shaking the petri dish, when the animal sways, but maintains its position on

the glass.

In four specimens the jaws are folded; in the remaining worm those on one

side are outspread and number 11. They are simple in form, without flange or

serration. The anterior teeth, of which there are three on each side, are unusually

long, reaching from about a third to a half the length of the jaws. The vestibular

pads are sparsely provided with small denticles. The corona is less extensive than

in Sp. schisoptera and is quite distinctive in shape, as shown. in fig. 17. Numerous

sensory patches with protecting setae are arranged symmetrically over the body

surface.

The anterior fin is, in a specimen 6°5 mm. long, 35 mm. wide and “5 mm.

in length, and is almost rectangular. It is supported entirely on the trunk. It is

followed almost immediately by the posterior fin which is entirely on the tail seg-

ment, is 1°5 mm. long, and is of an even width, ‘45 mm., throughout its length.

In the immature specimens these fins are relatively closer together, but in the

adult they are separated by the female opening. The tail fin is spatulate.

Adhesive processes arise from the ventral tail surface between the posterior

fin and the seminal vesicles; they are arranged in two groups on each side, an

anterior and a posterior. When not compressed by a coverslip the anterior project

almost at right angles to the tail, while posterior processes lie along the tail sur-

face. There are about ten or eleven in each group; all are thickly beset with

tubercles and contain muscle fibres, as has been described above for

Sp. schisoptera,

There are no diverticula from the alimentary canal. Ventral transverse

muscles are present almost to the anus.

The ovary in the older specimens extends to the neck region. A ventral

transverse duct leads from each receptactulium seminis, and in sections the two

appear to join at the midline just anterior to the anus. No accessory branch, like

332

that in Sip. schisoptera, is given off from this duct. The ducts lie laterally to

the ovary.

The features by which this species is most readily distinguished from

Sp. schizoptera are the stouter build of the body, the shape of the lateral fins and

of the corona, and the doubling of the adhesive processes.

Spadella johnstoni n. sp.

(Fig. 5, 18)

One chactognath amongst those collected near Port Hacking differed from

the two species described above in the form of the corona, the position of the

adhesive processes, and in the number of anterior teeth. It was first observed

alive, swimming with three Sp. sheardi, and was easily distinguished from them

Vig. 12-16, Sp. schisoptera@; 12, head, ventral view; 13, region of seminal vesicles in

ventral view; 14, T.S. of a median dorsal sensory patch; 15, surface view of a sensory

patch; 16, optical seciion in region of reeeptaculum seminis. Fig. 17, Sp. sheaedt:

head, dorsal view. Fig. 18, Sp. fedimetoul; head in dorsal view. Fig. 12 and 18 to

same scale; fig. 13 and 17; fig. 14 and 15. Lettering as in previous figures; in

additien: th, brain: i, intestine.

by the colouring, in which yellow predominated, by the more slender form, and by

the position of rest, which was always with the body inclined at an angle of 45°

instead of the vertical position consistently adopted by Sp. sheardi. Sp. schizop-

fera has not been observed by me while alive. This difference of position may

be duc to the presence of only two groups of adhesive processes.

The body length is 4°6 mm., of which the tail segment occupies 2-4 mm.,

ar 529. The jaws are folded, but there are at least 10 pairs. The anterior tecth,

of which there are two pairs, are about half the length of the jaws. The corona

hes mostly on the neck; its inner margin is Imed by closely-packed brown pigment

spots.

$33

The fins are so damaged by the clearing agent that no satisfactory attempt

can be made to measure or to draw them., When observed in the living animals

they appeared similar to those of Sp. schizoptera.

Posterior adhesive processes are present and are arranged in one group on

each side. They are at about the same level as the vesiculae seminales, but both

structures are much more posteriorly situated on the tail than in Sp. schizoptera.

The processes are very numerous and the tips of some reach beyond the tail

scement.

Ventral transverse muscles have not been observed. There are no diverticula

to the alimentary canal. Transverse ducts from the receptacula seminis are present

and apparently join in the mid-line. The vesiculae seminales are oval and of a

very vivid yellow in the living animal.

In view of the different build of the body and shape of the corona and of the

difference in extent of the adhesive processes of this specimen from any hitherto

described species of the genus Spad'ella, it has been assigned to a new species,

Sp. johustoni; the specific name is given in recognition of the early work on

Australian chaetognaths by Professor T. Harvey Johnston.

The main differences between the species described above are summarised in

the following table. Abbreviations used are: T % L, length of tail segment

expressed as percentage of body length; divertic., intestinal diverticula; no. ad. p.,

number of adhesive processes; pos. ad. p., position of adhesive processes on tail

segment.

Spadella schigoptera Sp. sheardt Sp. fohustonit

Conant Yos.& Tok. mihi

Length ;, pel Pr 4 2-97 4-1-4°9 4°7-6°5 4-6

T&L . a : $1 53-7 47-51 44-45 52

Ant. teeth. bed _ 2-3 2-3 3 3 2

Jaws Se ses ae 3 7-10 il ll ll

Divertic. . r ae absent present absent absent absent

Novad. p. ie ; 2 2 2 4 2

Pos. ado pow. _ f ard post. 3rd post. post.

quart. half quart. halt quart.

SUM MARY

Two new species of Spadella, Sp. sheardi and Sp. jolustont, are described

from 100 metres depth off the coast of New South Wales, and a description of

the closely allied Sp. schizopfera Conant from the same locality is added.

LITERATURE

Conant, FS. 1895 Ann. Mag. Nat. Mist., (6), 16, 288-292

Jonnsros, T. Hand Tavtor. B. B. 1919) Proce, Roy. Soe. Qld. 31, 63), 28-41

Yosn, N..and Toxioxa, T. 1939) Annot. Zool, Jap.. 18, (4), 267-273

THE NATURE AND OCCURRENCE OF

URANIFEROUS MINERAL DEPOSITS IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By DOUGLAS MAWSON

Summary

Now that there is a revival of interest in uranium it seems appropriate for me having been associated

with the first publication (15) on the radioactive minerals of Australia and later with the discovery

and investigation of two of the most important uraniferous deposits in South Australia, to publish

what information I have accumulated relating to the uranium-bearing mineral occurrences within

the boundaries of this State. It has been my intention of more fully investigating the Radium Hill

and Mount Painter formations, but circumstances have arisen which deem it expedient for me to

publish immediately such information as I have now at hand.

334

THE NATURE AND OCCURRENCE OF

URANIFEROUS MINERAL DEPOSITS IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By Doucitas Mawson

{Read 12 October 1944]

PLares XIX, XX, XX1

CONTENTS Page

Uranium IN THE Moonta Mines Sn bh rn 7 a4 334

Tur Raptum Hit Locarity ha rn th os *. fe 336

Geological Features Fe ¥.. = oF aft #e 336

Characteristics of the Uraniferous Lodes .. Ri i 338

Assessment of Uraniferous Minerals Recoverable .. ash ke 340

Minerals of the Lodes .. an Fh “ns os si 344

URANIUM IN THE PEGMATITES OF THE Boo_coomata BatHoryTH .. tt 347

OCCURRENCES IN THE NEIGHBOURHOOD OF COWELL .. ae 3! Ma 347

Tue Mount Painter Fiero ie <4 #4 rs a; a 348

Geological Features oe a iy +4 an i 348

Location and Character of the Uraniferous Outcrops . he 350

Minerals of the Lodes .. me ee or wa “3 354

Report oF URANIUM aT Mount Ociivie, Norr Frinners RANGES .. yu 356

OccuURRENCE IN THE Muscrave RANGES .. my 4 ~ a 356

Lisr or REFERENCES Ls _ a . ms ee ne, 350

EXPLANATION OF PLATES .. * 2% Ae _ a4 5 357

Now that there is a revival of interest in uranium it scems appropriate for

me having been associated with the first publication (15) on the radio-active

minerals of Australia and later with the discovery and investigation of two of the

most important uraniferous deposits in South Australia, to publish what informa-

tion I have accumulated relating to the uranium-bearing mineral occurrences

within the boundaries of this State. It has been my intention of more fully

investigating the Radium Hill and Mount Painter formations, but circumstances

have arisen which deem it expedient for me to publish immediately such informa-

tion as I have now at hand.

URANIUM IN THE MOONTA MINES

Early in the year 1906 Mr. S. Radcliffe, a member of the Mine Staff, dis-

covered electroscopically-active ore coming from the underground workings. At

the time of my visit later in the year the active ore had been localised as occurring

in two quite distinct places. The first was in the workings of Treuer’s Shaft at

Moonta. The veinstuff in which the first traces were found was broken in driv-

ing at the 50 level south of Treuer’s Shaft. Later it was discovered in ore

broken by tributors at the 35 level. These workings are apparently on a

different lode course. My examination was at a depth of several hundred fect

below the surface, where the lode was scen to cut a cross-course ; only in the latter

or in the vicinity of it was there electroscopically-active mineral,” This cross-

course, which traverses the wall rock composed of Pre-Cambrian felsitic quartz-

porphyry and schists, was observed to range from 2 to 6 inches in width and to

be occupied by black, loosely coherent matter principally composed of friable

covellite and crystals of smoky quartz. Amongst the constituents recorded in

G. J. Rodgers’ analysis (16) are uranic oxide to the extent of several per cent.

and a little carbon. Radcliffe recorded finding at this locality a uraniferous

encrustation of a yellow carnotite-like mineral.

The second place of occurrence in the Moonta Mines is in a cross-course met

with in workings connected with Taylor’s Shaft. Here also the radio-actiye ore

Trane. Roy. Soc. S.A.. 68, (2), 36 November 1944

335

is carbonaceous to a notable degree. It is, in fact, a hydrocarbonaceous substance

of specific gravity 1°5, which yields on proximate analysis 13% of volatile hydro-

carbon and 10% of fixed carbon. It is brownish-black and exhibits a lustrous

conchoidal fracture. One of the specimens of uraniferous hydrocarbonaceous

substance collected at the time of my visit in 1906 has now exfoliated as a result

of exposure to the air, and tiny yellow spots of a crystalline secondary uranium

mineral have developed, indicating that the uranium is irregularly distributed

through the original substance.

A radio-active mass resembling coal, found in a vugh at the 720-ft. level.

was proved by Radcliffe to contain 35% of fixed carbon and 5% of volatile hydro-

carbon.

Kane Serra ; ey Sneae

‘ MUSGRAVE Ra ak

! AS. = Ps

t ry p ;

i een

t ny

: <x my

\ ook 7

\ A,

wl I A

wanner %

1 \ Mt tie

Af OLOEM aT GGIL €Q) @

ia al a {)

7 v

OLD BOOLCOOMATA

HS,

P~,

fae

{

i. ae

wo oe

\e@

‘

mR RANGES eT RGEUSTA

ve RADE

cof. !

PORTION OF gy

a woncan |

SOUTH AUSTRALIA eg

uranium Mineral Localifies : WADELAIBE

indinated thu } |

oN. !

. 3a

Fig. 1 KOS

The most highly uraniferous sample from these Moonta veins tested by Rad-

cliffe contained about 10% U.,O,. but the usual tenor was scarcely half that figure.

This association of uranium embodied in a hydrocarbonaceous substance occurring

ina vein formation traversing Pre-Cambrian rocks, recalls occurrences of the kind

which have been reported from Canada and Scandinavia.

For some time past the Moonta Mine has been closed down. In the days

when it was operating it was worked as a large-scale copper producer, and it was

only by accident that radio-active ore was located and recorded. It was then not

of sufficient economic importance for the Company to pursue the matter further.

It is interesting to note. however, that at the time of Radcliffe’s discovery, I was

informed by several of the older miners that in the early stages of mining develop-

ment at Moonta a dump of similar carbonaceous material brought to the surface

was eventually disposed of by burning. A further matter of interest is that during

the past 20 years some very nice and characteristic specimens of torbernite have

been recovered from the old dump heaps at the mine. Examples of these have

reached the South Australian Museum.

336

THE RADIUM HILL LOCALITY

In the older Pre-Cambrian area of the north-east of South Australia there

are several locations where uranium-bearing minerals have been found. Of out-

standing tmportance is the long-known occurrence located 20 miles E.S.E. of

Olary. Here, on the eastern slopes of a low rise known as Radium Hill, there are

several ore bodies outcropping as more or less parallel lodes (text fig. 2); a pre-

liminary report was published by me (8) in the year 1906, and further notes

(10) thereon at a later date. The South Australian Mines Department has pub-

lished much relating thereto, of which a compilation by Mr. Lionel Gee (18), and

reports by Dr. L. K. Ward (19 and 20) are of special importance; other refer-

ences (21 and 22) in the publications of the Mines Department are mainly in the

¥ 7

2 xj a a

bo F cy ICA he

Pou penunia ; MEALE /

i Be a MILL ef a « OMLES Ny !

Inog. AMBCWRE ae RGuatibierbess teers nara Sed H

MN / wa

| : 2

. lah a

| Nae a s hee pei dil ra URANIUM OCCURAENCES

i at @ Lf SHOWN THUS‘

i 2H

* a rs Newer Pae-Camarian HaTcHED = *

ry: surtco OLOER Par"Camani

os. Ba

AUTALPA LE / a

Hath

i 4

b epee p~

v alee CUTANA r] *

ran J ~Baee* !

soe ai !

vo Sh . \ 4

fe b> Y Neanoowa |

of es

re Avy a 4 |

Lod Bs |

s yA £. i wo MILL ’

tek oe tox Pod vA . XN y

ae ths Vi us by / a

f fe, 4 ee Sf a4 A/a wir 4 ns

POU Ki MB

yyy Vp [ef f ; |

£S ca é '

ff ~ a «

t Yo vA at i

FP lok PPK LIL, wea

fi 4 Gf bh. x Lo of TA la \ |

iZ ESB “se os “Lo kf dF ra VG ere

Cais fom ‘@WADNAMINGA SKY a OAVENSOROUGH , at ; Rox ) '

ZZ LLM LLL LRP ROP. it

Tier, 2

Map of the Radium Hill and Boolcoomata Area.

nature of progress reports dealing with mining operations, Observations. made

by myself during investigations prosecuted in the years 1923-24 have not yet been

adequately published. but items of scientific interest then accumulated are incor-

porated herein. ‘

GEoLouicaL Prarurrs

Nearby to the west of Radium Hill, with its eastern margin sweeping down

irom the neighbourhood of MacDonald [Till to the Maldorky Range, via Dene’s

lil, is a great basin of late Pre-Cambrian sediments with several horizons of

ite (Sturtian) extending upwards from near ihe base of the formation.

To the east of that basin is an older Pre-Cambrian terrain lying uncen-

formably below the former; included in it is the neighbuurhood of Radiuna THill.

This older Pre-Cambrian area is co-extensive with that lying further to the north

in the region of the Boolcoomata Hills and Mingary, and with that of the southern

Barrier Ranges. The rocks of this formation in the neighbourhood of Radium

Hill have all suffered a considerable degree of metamorphism and, in the main, are

presented as crystalline schists and gneisses. The oldest elements are meta-

337

sediments; they include mica schist, hornblende schist, granulite, kyanite schist.

staurolite schist, scapolite-bearing schist, ete. The foliation and gneissic banding

is broadly aligned in the direction N. 30° E.

Transgressing these recrystallised sediments in the neighbourhood of the

radium-bearing lodes, and exposed in some of the workings, is a soda-granite

developed as a small scale intrusion of irregular shape. Where it is more massive

it is practically free from foliation, though it bears evidence of cataclasis to a

considerable degree. It is probably of late Pre-Cambrian age, comparable with

the Umberumberka and Boolcoomata granites. As this granite [2883] 1s closely

associated with the uranium-bearing lodes, it has been subjected to a detailed

examination.

Soda-Granite [2883] is a medium to fine, even-grained granite with the

usual hypidiomorphic granular texture. Feldspar, which is abundant, conforms

in optical characters to albite (Ab,,An,). If present, orthoclase is inconspicuous.

Quartz, which is the next most abundant constituent, shows the effects of stress

by the presence of a faintly discernible system of cracks. Included in the quartz

are abundant tiny needles of rutile. Biotite, both chloritized and bleached (some

may be muscovite), is plentiful. There are occasional grains of black iron ore

and some which show leucoxenic changes, evidently ilmenite. Tiny yellow

geniculate twinned crystals of rutile have been observed in the slides. Apatite 1s

also present as an accessory.

The chemical composition of this granite is stated in the table on page 338.

Its very high soda content is outstanding, The norm has the following com-

position :

Quartz wee =623°76 Magnetite . . 0-46

Orthoclase 2... 0... 462 ilmenite cee OF

Afbite 0... 0, ~=63°72 Pyrite .... : ; 0-08

Anorthite vee) LEZ Apatite 0°07

Corundum .... ... = 388

Hypersthene .. O71 99°71

0-62

Total .., 100-33

C.P.LW, classification: IJ, 4, 1, 5.

Plagioclase-Aimphibolite {2882|—The line of foliation of the meta-sedi-

mentary system: has been intersected by several basaltic dyke-like intrusions, some

of which are several yards in width. One such dyke cuts across the line of the

uraniferous lodes, passing to the south of the main workings. But it was pro-

bably in existence before the late stages of ore formation were completed. This

rock has been completely recrystallised.

A chemical analysis of it is included in the table on page 338. It is to he

observed that, like the lodes themselves, this rock is exceptionally rich in titanium

and carries a notable quantity of vanadium. The minerals constituting it are

mainly labradorite and amphibole, which is pleochroic from light yellow to blue-

green with ZAc = 22°. There is also an abundance of grains of black iron ore,

most exhibiting the form usually assumed by ilmenite; apatite is another accessory.

Some minute colourless grains are, apparently, zoizite.

The composition of the norm:

Orthoclase ... ... U-Hl Ilmenite ney i> 6s)

Albite wae = 16480 Pyrite 0. 00... . 0-08

Anorthite ae ee ~42+50 Apatite cee O84

Wo eaten) ape LD

En wet ett nce aD Total . 99-77

Hy can he lw, ~GA0F a

C.LP.W. = LW CID, 5, 4, 5 (Auvergnose-Hessose).

338

Another example [2816] of intrusive basic magina makes a more conspicuous

outcrop at a point about three miles to the east of Radium Hill, where it has been

opened up by prospectors searching for copper, indicated by some staining of the

rocks nearby. This is a dark-coloured rock with notable parallelism of the amp hi-

bole, and thus best described as a plagioclase-hornblende-schist. The dominant

mineral, hornblende, is strongly pleochroic: X= yellow, Y = dark green,

Z = blue-green. Plagioclase is abundant, some as basic as labradorite, There is

a little granular quartz and some grains of magnetite.

Another dark-coloured rock [2815] from the same locality as [2816] proved

on microscopic examination to be a quartz-biotite-hornblende-scapolite-hornfels, in

which the scapolite is poeciloblastically disposed. Grains of magnetic, calcite and

epidote are present. [Evidently this is a thermally metamorphosed, arenaceous,

calcareous shale. I ll Ili

SiO, mh ete a . 71-56 45-90 39-16

AlOs a er a ae 17-74 18-99 17-55

Fe:Os; ey pte hers wpe 0-30 4-60 9-97

FeO ee ; of 0+86 8-51 5°66

MgO ae Midas nul 5-78 15-16

CaO ee ee ‘ 0-38 9-46 nil

Naz:O cae Myo) Bi. Ox: 7-54 1-97 2°79

K.0 aT _ un 0-78 0-21 5-66

H:O+ _.. ‘ 28 : 0-47 0-62 t 2.50

H:0 — = eee 0-13 0-18 jes

TiOe ay, rat fhe : 0-38 3°77 Q- 64

P20s . - . . 0-03 0-15 +f

V20; sg siuttoe ua 7 ant 0-08 trace

MnO wt ae 0-01 O-17 trace

CreO: af ies, bes 4.3 —_— toh 0-62

BaO . ee ee nil nil =

CO: . . -_ a nil nil nil

od ee ns a = 0-78

Chiehin x a : - nil nil

SO: ! by Lids BRS nil nil

FeS, : ee im: ren 0-08 0-08

100-49

Oxygen equivalent . 6-32

Total , 100-28 100-47 100-17

I Soda-granite from Radium Hill, S. Aust. Analyst, W. S$. Chapman.

{lL Plagioclase-ampbibolite of Radium Hill, S. Aust. Analyst, W. S.

Chapman.

TI} Biotite mica of the Radium Hill Lode. Analyst, R. E, Stanley.

This analysis is of the biutite after eliminating 1.6% of rutile

needles mechanicaliy contained in it. Note that in Stanley's mean

analysis as originally printed there is a type-setter’s error, the

chemically combined Tih, shad be 0.63 not 0.03.

CHARACTERISTICS OF THE URANIFEROUS Lopes

At the time of first discovery there were outcropping on the sloping hill-

side, four lode formations all roughly parallel and clearly distinguishable, trending

with the foliation of the country (sce pl. xix, fig. 1). Mining experience has shown

that all are very variable in width, ranging from a few inches to several feet, and

change their mineral composition notably both vertically and longitudinally within

100 to 200 feet. If followed sufficiently far they can be seen to dwindle and to fade

out of existence. In other cases where there has been no apparent lode on the

original outcrops in the central area.

339

surface, useful bodies have been met underground. Mining operations have dis-

closed dislocation of the ore bodies by movements subsequent to ore deposition.

Outcrops of these lode formations (text fig. 3) appear for quite half-a-mile

in the direction of strike, but no single body could be traced at the surface for

more than about 250 vards.

Mining operations have shown that in the central

part of the field they all dip steeply, with an underlay to the east ranging from

20° to 27° from the vertical.

They are epigenetic formations introduced along fracture planes and, at least

at one stage in their development, appear to represent deposition from watery

magmatic solutions. In this respect they are related to pegmatites though peculiar

in character, and furthermore they have undergone a certain degree of subsequent

inetamorphie change.

AMPHIBOLITIZED

7 BASIC INTRUSION

The magma represented

by the sheared granite of

the locality may have con-

tributed to the formation of

the uraniferous lodes, for

\ oF AAS

ae: a we have found urantum

SMEARED 5 \ . +

APLITIC SODA GRANITE associated with the normal

‘ SCHISTS AND ‘41 Ba. cee - . .

hae Sap tw} be anersses | pegmatites of granite of

i ee es Tae \ apparently the same age

located about 30 miles to

the north-west. The ti-

tanium content of the

granite is also suggestive of

this relationship. The other igneous rock, the amphibolitized gabbro, appears to

have greater claims to consanguimity on account of its high content of titanium,

vanadium, magnesium and iron. Perhaps the basic intrusive is a lamprophyric

derivative of the granite magma.

A common feature of the lodes is their high content of “iron ores” and

abundance of black mica. The primary mineral assemblage as exposed in the out-

crops is found to vary in the case of each of the lodes, also it varies from place to

place in the same lode. Thus a more westerly line of reef was observed to be com-

posed essentially of micaceous hematite and quartz. The mainj reef, located about

60 yards to the east of the former, outcropped as iron ores (mainly a mixture of

martitized ilmeno-magnetite, and a variety of ilmenite containing small quantities

of rare earths, uranium, ete.) and black mica with an irregular distribution of

reef quartz.

Ten yards further to the east a lode was noted consisting of a mixture of heavy

black titaniferous iron ores and black mica. While a fourth vein still further to

the east was observed to be mainly titaniferous iron ores and reef quartz.

The information gained in an examination of the outcrops and of the mine

workings has shown that in their full development these lodes are primarily com-

posed of vanadiferous, uraniferous, titaniferous iron ores, together with black mica

and (less commonly developed) a late-stage contribution of quartz. Associated

with the latter is a very little davidite (10). Secondary minerals such as carnotite,

arising from the weathering of the primary constituents, are in evidence in the

outcrops and extending down in places to depths of about 100 feet,

Fig. 3

Diagrammatic Cross-Section of Radium Hill Lodes.

THE MORE PEGMATITIC PITASE OF THE Main Lone

The central portion of the main lode has characters linking it with the

pegmatites, The marginal zones are particularly rich in black mica, which has been

derived partly by reaction with the wall rock material. A central portion, which

is well defined in some places and which has been derived from residual liquors,

is largely composed of reef quartz with embedded ilmenitic mineral. As a verv late

340

development, and more marked in some sections of the formation than others.

the ilmenitic mineral has broken down by subsequent reaction to a high-iron biotite

with release of TiO, as rutile or ilmeno-rutile.

It appeared worth while ascertaining the average chemical composition of a

large block of this more typically pegmatitic phase of the formation. With this

object in view, a length of 180 feet of the lode on the 40-ft level was carefully

and systematically sampled. About a ton of material which resulted from repeated

cross-section sampling was crushed and reduced by quartering until only 10 Ibs.

remained. This was submitted for analysis, with the result stated in the table on

page 344.

The mineral constituents are principally black mica, the ilmenitic minerals and

quartz. On account of the high mica content the norm is quite dissimilar to the

mode.

Allocating the rare-earth oxides to the lime quota, coupling vanadic oxide with

ferric oxide, and accepting the uranic oxide as pitchblende, the composition of the

norm is as follows:

Quartz ’ .. 41-88 Geikiclite . 23-29

Orthoclase 0... ... 16-12 Hematite ; 9-44

Albite oo... Bais 1-05 Chromite . . 0-22

Anorthite ae, 2-50 Pyrite , X. 0-18

Corundum oo... 2°65 Pitchblende (UQ:).. 0-18

Enstatite =: wae oe TDN ee

98-11

Water... : 1-30

Total .. 99-4]

If this were to be expressed in the C.LP.W. classification it would iall into I, 2, 1,1

ASSESSMENT OF URANIFEROUS MINERALS RECOVERABLE

When mining operations were in progress in 1924 we made a fairly exhaustive

examination of the exposures in the workings, with a view to obtaining an estimate

of the quantity and quality of the ore reserves. The following is a summary of

our findings.

Marin Lope

South Shaft Workings—At a depth of 56 feet vertically below the surface.

this shaft, sunk on the underlay, encountered a flat fault with a drag to the west.

but the lode was picked up displaced only about 15 feet. Water in the workings

prevented an examination of this displaced extension of the ore body, which was

unfortunate, as samples that had been obtained therefrom were found to be more

highly uraniferous than usual.

From this shaft, at a vertical depth of 40 feet below ground-level, a drive

extended to the north along the lode for a distance of about 18 fect. Three average

samples of the cross-section of the ore body gave the following values:

24” wide lode

30” wide lode 30” wide lode from N. end of drive

18° below surface 37’ below surface 40’ below surface

Composition (partial) : % % %

SiOz an ead Fs vA 30-3 34°83 46-0

ESS th Cees wha wh Mi 15-7 15-2 13-0

TiO: wide eee me ii 23-1 16-0 16-0

U.0.* ca = Pht fe. ete 0-25 0-10 0-25

Heavy concentrate obtainable:

Percentage of lode material 30 24 16

U:Os content of concentrate 1-13 0-70 1-10

* The U,O, was estimated electroscopically by comparing the rate of discharge with

a sample of Radium Hill ore of known uranium content. The partial analysis of ore

samples was done by W. 8. Chapman’s Department at the School of Mines; the heavy

concentrate determinations were made in our University Geological Department.

341,

The Main Sliaft—This is located on the main lode, 228 feet north of the

South Shaft. At the time of inspection it had bottomed at about 127 feet (vertical

depth) below the ground surface; throughout this depth it is well defined but

changes in character towards the bottom, At depths of 40 feet and 85 feet, drives

extend both to the north and to the south of this shaft. In this shaft, at 7 feet

below the surface, the width of the lode is 6 feet and most of the ilmenitic mineral

is on the hanging wall side concentrated in a width of 2 feet. The remainder of

the lode is principally quartz and mica. -Ata depth of 18 feet the lode is 5 feet

6 inches wide and the bulk of the ilmenite is concentrated in the centre region.

Below the main Jevel a large horse of mullock is enclosed in the lode dividing

the ore body in that vicinity into an east and a west limb. At the contact between

the lode matter and the wall rock, and between the lode filling and the horse there

is developed a selvage of finer grain than the lode matter and usually 3 inches in

thickness, principally composed of an unusually black variety of mica, This is in

contrast with the more characteristic mica of the ore body, which is in very coarse

flakes and has a distinct bronzy appearance. In this part of the lode where the

ilmenitic iron minerals are deficient in the ore, there is usually developed a coarse-

grained, quartz-mica rock in which much of the nica is located in distinct patches

or pockets.

The lode. with good values of the ilmenitic content, continues down to about

the 68-fect level as exposed in the shaft; beyond this point there is a falling off in

the obvious ilmenitic element. At the 95-fect level the lode is notably siliceous and

the colour of the ilmenitic constituent is of a somewhat reddish-brown, due to high

titania content, existing partly as free rutile, Carnotite, which decreases in abund-

ance with increasing depth from the surface, is found in vestiges only in the

95-feet level.

Beyond this point the ore body becomes more micaceous, until at the bottom of

the shaft it is constituted very largely of coarse bronzy mica with a limited amount

of a grey-black variety of the ilmenitic mineral occurring as nodules wp to an inch

in diameter (average size, Z inch). This latter is richer than usual in uranium and

vanadium.

The Windlass Shaft—This is an underlay shaft sunk on the main lode 91 feet

north of the Main Shaft. On the south side, just below the plat at 39 feet below

the surface, a fault face is revealed which dips steeply to the north at an angie of

about 30° and reaches the surface about 45 feet north of the collar of the shait.

Below this fault the shaft continues down at a flatter angle to a total depth of

50 feet vertically below the surface. The lower portion of the shaft is not in true

lode matter but follows a micaceous apophysis of the lode which is very irregular

in width and bifurcates near the limit of the workings.

The filling of these apophyses is principally in the nature of coarse black mica and

quartz in the marginal zone, and in the central belt it is almost exclusively coarse

black mica; there is a very stall quantity, barely 1%, of radio-active iulmenitic

mineral. A partial analysis of an average sample taken where the apophysis was

observed to be almost entirely composed of mica gave SiO, = 40°3%, Fe = 14:8%.

TiO, = 3-9%, uranic oxide only a trace.

Drives AND Stopes or THE Marn Suart AND WINDLASS SHAFT SYSTEM

The 40-feet Level—A drive at this level links both shafts and extends well

on towards the South Shaft. Throughout this length the lode continues as a well-

defined body with distinct walls, and the class of lode matter traversed is of the

same general character, except that at the south end it grades towards that met

with in the South Shaft. Though the class of ore in this block remains sensibly

similar in character, there were observed considerable variations in the proportion

of the iron ore constituent, the rich ore occurring in chutes. Over the main area,

342

the width ranges from 3 feet to 6 feet, and even wider where a horse of mullock

divides the ore body, Towards the south it dwindles somewhat in conformity with

the narrower section in the South Shait workings.

Average cross-sections of the ore body on this level gave the following values:

1 2 3 + 5 6 7 8 9

( mutposition (partial):

SiOz 43-0 63:9 5657 366) 585) 6358 57-8 5663) 45-7

Te 13°5 6°7 5-8 14-1 7°3 4-8 8-0 10-4 10-8

TiO. 2465 9.2 9-8 24-7 9-0 7-2 95 1552 18-8

U:08 0-3 0-2 0-1 O-4 0-05 0-05 Q+1 0-2 0-45

ileavy concentrate

obtainable:

Percentage of lode

material she 4U 8 a) 32 7 0 ll 25 20

U;:08 content of

concentrate .... 1-00 1-20 0:96 1:15 0:60 0-70 0-98 1-10 4-78

Floor of level at 25 ft. south of Windlass Shaft. Width, 5 ft. 5 in.

Floor of level at 50 ft. south of Windlass Shaft. Width, 4 ft. 10 in.

Floor of level at 75 ft. south of Windlass Shaft. Width, 7 ft.

Floor of level at 15 ft. south of Main Shaft. Width, 3 ft 3 in,

Floor of level at 49 ft. south of Main Shaft. Width, 4 ft. 6 in.

End of the level at 83 ft. south of Main Shaft. Width, 4 ft,

Roof of stope 21 ft. south of Main Shaft. Width, 3 ft. 9 in,

Roof of stope 50 ft. south of Main Shaft. Here the width of stopa was 7 ft., but sample taken only

on the best 2 ft. 7 in.

Roof of stope 72 ft. south of Main Shaft. Width, 4 ft. 6 in., with iron ore values only on foot

wall side.

The Lower Drive (85 feet vertically below the surface) extends along the

lode both to the north and to the south from the Main Shaft: on the north side,

at 65 feet, the lode is cut off by a fault face dipping to the S.S.E. a continuation of

that met in the Windlass Shaft. The drive’ continues on in a siliceous gneiss for a

short distance beyond the fault. Southward of the Main Shaft the drive con-

tinues all the way in ore to a total length of 84 feet. The average width of lode

may be taken as about 4 feet, but at this level it carries a distinctly lower propor-

tion of the titaniferous iron ore mineral than in the upper workings. The tenor

of the lode material as exposed in the Main Shaft at this level is given in the table

on page 343.

Beyond the 85-feet level the Main Shaft continues on the underlay to a total

vertical depth from the surface of about 125 feet. At the bottom the ore passes

into a mica rock similar to that in the apophyses below the Windless Shaft, though

here there are in it definite black ilmenitic nodules. This change may be due to the

further extension of the fault met with higher up in the Windlass Shaft. An

analysis of an average sample taken over a 2-feet face of the more mineralised

section of the micaceous vein filling occupying the bottom of the shaft is stated

in the table on page 343.

Toe Wie Suarr

This is located approximately 810 feet to the north-east from the Windlass

Shaft. It is in the neighbourhood of 50 yards to the east of the main lode line as

defined by the trend indicated by the excavations already detailed. It can be

traced to extend for some distance on either side of the shaft and ranges from

1 foot to 2 feet 6 inches in width. The dip fron: the vertical is 45° in the upper

section of the workings, and deeper down it flattens to 30°. The total vertical

depth below the surface at the time of inspection was 58 feet,

Though the lode filling in this case is of the same general type as that of the

main workings, the lode channel is distinctly different, being along a fracture

plane lying at a considerable angle to the planes of foliation of the gneissic band-

ing of the country rocks.

The jointing in the siliceous gneisses, which constitute the wall rock, strikes

in a similar direction to that in the neighbourhood of the Main Shaft, namely,

OME Ub ete

vos

343

about north-east, and the dip is steep to the east; that is about the same direction

and dip as the lode at the Main Shaft. See sketch, fig. 4.

The hanging wall side of the lode is very clearly defined and exhibits a stepped

outline which appears to be a counterpart of a roughly stepped arrangement

appearing in the footwall. The steps in the roof are smooth and much rounded.

More frequently than not the steps in the footwall side are occupied by cracked

or shattered rock, partly altered by the introduction of mica and titaniferous iron

ore, This metasomatic introduction of mica and ilmenitic minerals extends down

in many places along the joint plane on the floor of the lode. Thus is deposited

titaniferous iron ore surrounded by black mica in scattered and isolated centres in

the gneiss. The latter is in some places notably contorted.

A Ay By 5 ale ‘<isth, taste _ For a distance of several

+a fa, howe a/a" it ity ix: Oe yt ae inches from the lode the country

! rock has been considerably

affected by the vein solutions,

whereby black mica and ilmenitic

minerals have been introduced.

a The lode filling is rich in ilmeni-

Wejcoanse * tic iron ore and coarse black

dy)? Biotite mica is abundant. To a less

7, t rrdyy pt extent quartz figures in small

a patches and blebs, often signifi-

cantly arranged in the lode above

“+

+ TITANIFEROUS “IRON-ORES

[+ foe yt, thet

QUARTZ STRINGERS

+ + t

je ae + eat # Fos

el I a Bale dh et er, the joint planes of the gneiss, as

ee fh FER ES eet & if the effect on the joint planes

Hig ree Et, we ¢ i / ‘Ef fe had been to facilitate a contribu-

a tion of quartz to the lode matter.

Vig. f The black mica is abundant

Diagrammatic Cross-Section

of the Whip Shaft Lode. throughout, but is frequently

massed in horizontal patches

extending into the lode from the junctions of joint planes, Also, mica 1s notably

aceumulated as a selvage along the hanging wall (roof) side of the formation.

Massive patches of the ilmenitic mineral feature in the lode immediately

between the joint planes of the country and more on the roof than on the floor.

indeed, over most of the lode, the concentration of ilmenite mineral on the hang-

ing wall side is most obvious,

The composition of two average samples taken across he lode ate stated in

the table herewith.

Connposition f partial) : 1 2 3 4

SiO... oo; rene sy 65-0 44-2 36°9 4i-4

Fe . he 4, athe 3-7 6-92 O-7 11-9

TiO: : coed non 11-0 8-7 ae). 24°3

U0... hay ue dive Gel Q-9 0-45 0-15

Tear concentrate obtainable:

Percentage of lode material it 1 34 27

UO; content of concentrate : 0-68 0-84 1-20 0-75

1 Average sample of the lode in the Main Shaft at the 83-ft. level.

2 Average sample taken over a 2-ft. face of the more mineralized section of the micaceous vein matter

at the bottom of the Main Shaft. 125 ft. (vertical) below the surface.

3 Average sample of lode 2 ft, wide, in the Whin Shaft at 31 ft. vertically below the surface.

4 Average sample of the lode 1 ft. 6 in. wide, in the Whip Shaft, at 54 ft. vertically below the surface.

Tur QUANTITY OF URANIFEROUS ORE AVAILABLE

Already it has been noted that the ore bodies are very irregular, both as

regards quantity and quality of the uraniferous mineral contents. Also, the

344

extension of the lodes beyond the limits proved in the mine workings is uncertain;

they are affected by faulting and are seen to fade out after no great linear exten-

sion. However, the belt of country in which they occur runs for about a couple

of miles along the strike, consequently other lodes not obvious at present may be

located by the application of geophysical methods.

At the time (1924) of my last stock-taking of reserves definitely in sight, as

exposed by mine workings, the quantity of concentrates available was put at over

1,000 tons, having an approximate average composition as follows: Uranic oxide

1%, vanadic oxide 1%, chromic oxide 1%, rare earth oxides 3%, titanic oxide

50%, iron oxides 34%, silica. etc., 10%. Since then some further ore has been

mined and shipped away.

The radium content of this ore was found to average an equivalent of 5 mg.

of radium bromide per ton for every 1% of uranic oxide present. The radium

bromide produced therefrom by the original Radium Hill Company was tested by

Sir Ernest Rutherford. who reported “The preparation is free from meso-thorium

and other radio-active substances which, without a careful examination being

made, are likely to be mistaken for radium.”

MINERALS OF THE LODES

Quarts as the compact reef variety, usually somewhat brownish in colour

and sporadic in distribution, enters into the formations in variable amount. One

of the subsidiary lodes, with a thickness of only a few inches, was observed to be

composed almost entirely of black “ilmenite”? imbedded in quartz. Usually it is

present in quite small amounts when compared with the biotite and “iron ores.”

Biotite in abundance, together with titaniferous “iron ores” constitute an

overwhelming proportion of all the lode material. The “iron ore” content, at times

the dominant mineral present, may fade to insignificance and the biotite (or biotite

with some quartz) occupies almost the whole of the lode.

I Il Ti lV Vv VI VIi

SiOg inn} 1-15 §-9@) 12-70 8-70 54-50 —_—

TiOs 54-3 51°85 -45+7 45-85 50-98 14-60 —

AkOs _ 0:63 0°74 7

FeOs 13-0 17°87 16-3 17-40 17-29 9-02 19-3

FeO .. 16-0 17-37 16°5 16-90 8-93 3°15 —

MnO as 0-24 trace =a 0-05 _—

MgO 0-6 trace _ trace 0-94 5-80 trace

CaO 1-5 0-25 — 0-55 a 0-32 1-0

PhO 1+] 0-40 2 0-16 0°67 present 1-3

Tho: = 0-13 — nil

TaOnete. | ga | gage OOF 327 OB Foss —

¥2Oa, ete. J io 0-32 Pd

CreOs | 1-60 1-8 0-85 2:34 Q-44 _—

UO. § gO) 2°25 209 1-60 2-756) 0-19 47-8

V2Os | 0-93 Tel 0°87 2-00 0-37 16-8

PLO; oa — — —_ — present trace

Na:O i = (5 a Ee 0-14 1:8

K.O — _ —_— —_ 2-69 5:2

Cl a ~ 0-05 aa

SO. are ~ - G-02 ses

ieee aan —~ — —_ —_ 0-17 —

Te f not 0-99 —

Ho. fs eb hs ex, OP Tey

Occluded Gases — ~ - — —

100-9 99°79 98-74 100-15 99-91 100-07 98-9

(?) Mainly uranium.

() Insoluble siliceous residue.

(@) Another selected specimen contained 3% of U,0,.

(4) Absence of CO, and BaO proved.

345

I Analysis (4) of davidite by Dr. W. T. Cooke, University of Adelaide.

II Bulk sample of the brighter titaniferous iron ore from 10 feet below the surface near the Main Shaft.

Analysed (5) by T. Crook, Imperial Institute, London.

JIt The heavy gravity concentrate from a bulk sample of the Main Lode collected near the Main Shaft.

Analysed by S. Radcliffe in year 1909,

IV Composition of average concentrates from magnetic separators forwarded for treatment to_the

Radium Hill Coy’s works in Sydney in year 1911,

Vo The dull black titaniferous iron ore from the South Shaft. Analysis by R. G. Thomas and A. R.

Alderman, Department of Geology, University of Adelaide (1924),

VI Average composition of the entire lode matter made on a length of 180 feet at the 40-feet level at

Main Shaft. Analysis by W. S, Chapman, School of Mines, Adelaide.

VIL Carnotite encrustation with mechanically admixed impurities from the Radium Hill Lode. Analysed

(5) by T. Crook, Imperial Institute, London. :

The biotite appears in two somewhat different forms. One as observed in

the hand-specimen is of a bronzy-black colour and rather coarsely crystalline, as

much as 4 cins. across the cleavage flakes. This variety appears to be the earlier

formed of the two. The other is finer grained, jet black biotite which is clearly

seen to have been developed, in some measure at least, at a later stage of

mineralisation by reaction of the lode-forming gascs or liquids with the already

crystallized “iron ore.” Thus the latter contributes some of its iron to the forma-

tion of a crop of biotite, leaving “iron ore” residue enriched in titanitum; in this

way, from original ilmenite there may he developed ilmeno-rutile. Actually, in

some portions of the workings, kernels only of red rutile remain located within an

aureole of fine black mica.

Irort and magnesium were determined on exainples of each of these varieties

selected at random, with the following result. Bronzy large flake mica: total iron

as Fe,O, == 14°55%, magnesia = 17°57%. Small black mica: Fe,O, = 16°50%,

MgO = 10-71%.

An example of the black variety of the Radium Hill lode biotite was more

fully investigated by one of our students (17), whose chemical analysis is included

in the table on page 338. This jet black, strongly pleochroic variety has the optical

properties of biotite, Stanley found it to be rich in mechanically included and

axially oriented needles of rutile to the extent of 1°3% by weight of the mica.

Chromiferous Chlorite (?)—A mecium to light-green mineral of micaceous

habit was met with jn extremely small quantity in the upper workings near the

Main Shaft. Even at the commencement of mining operations it was difficult to

get cnough for a full examination, and it is no longer obtainable. It occurred as

minute flakes on the face of cavities and cracks in a late-formed, quartzose section

af the lode. It contains 6°8% of chromic oxide, some silica, alumina, and lime as

well as traces of iron and magnesia. Vanadium and uranium were proved to be

absent. The presence of chromitim suggests green mariposite, but the mean

refractive index is rather low. namely 1°589%. Finally, enough material was

obtained to establish that it contains 18-69% of I,O. which suggests that itisa

chromitm-bearing chlorite.

“Troy Ores’'—The most characteristic feature of these lodes is the abundance

af heavy iron ore minerals rich in titanium, some containing small quantities of

uranium, chromium and rare earths. In our earlier contributions these have been

referred to as “ilmenite.” but are now included under the general title “iron ores,”

which is less specific.

Actually the iron ore complex is a variable mechanical mixture of several

minerals including ilmenite, iimenite-davidite combination, titano-magnetite, marti-

tized magnetite, titano-hematite, imeno-rutile, and even rutile; and also, though

rarely, minute quantities of davidite. Some of these contain vanadium, which

in some cases may be present as the coulsonite molecule (6), Where, however,

they are radio-active, due to the presence of uranium, T have inferred that the

346

davidite molecule is present in solid solution. This conclusion has been reached

after a study of polished sections of the ore minerals: gradations in physical

characters can be observed ranging from ilmenite to pure davidite. A further

check has been provided by autoradiographs of polished sections; these alsu

demonstrate a regular progression of radio-active intensity in the ilmenite lead-

ing up to that of the crystallized davidite. This method of observation also illus-

trates graphically the varying concentration of the davidite molecule in the

ilmenite (see plate xxi), Certain of these “iron ores” have undergone mineral

changes since their first deposition. In all probability such changes were effected

partly during a late stage of the original lode-forming activity, but they are to

some extent to be attributed to regional metamorphism subsequent to their origina!

deposition.

A varicty of ilmenite of bright appearance and comparatively rich ‘in the

davidite molecule is illustrated by analysis IJ of the table 6n page 344.

The composition of a bulk gravity concentrate from the richer portion of the

main lode as mined in 1907 is given as III of the same table and analysis [V is of

the run-of-mine concentrate shipped to Sydney for treatment during later

development.

An average sample of an ilmeno-rutile concentrate from the southern end

of the main lode near where it contacts an amphibolite dyke was found

hy Alderman (1) to contain 60°76% TiO,, 28°58% Fe and 0°84% V,O,.

A partial analysis by R. G. Thomas in 1924 (then of our Department of

Geology) of the ilmenitic mineral of a small lode some three-quarters of a mile

north-north-east of the main Radium Hill workings yielded 93°3% TiO,, 42:07%

of total Fe recorded as FeO and 1:60% V,O,.

At the south end of the main lode the “iron ore” mineral met with below the

zone of surface weathering is of a dull sooty black appearance and is much richer

in chromium, vanadium and uranium, A chemical analysis is given (V) in table on

page 344, Stages both in its weathering and in its reaction to later lode solutions

traversing the lode are well evidenced. It is observed to have changed to brown

and, finally, in extreme cases, to yellow produets which appear to be partly of the

nature of leucoxene. This change appears to have been accompanied by the

development of some late-formed biotite. Residual leucoxenized pellets embedded

in the biotite have been found to be exceptionally rich in uranium present in a

mechanically admixed yellow earthy form.

A highly radio-active sooty coating on a joint face traversing siliccous rock

ata depth in the southern part of the mine workings (10) is evidently a film of

uranic oxide, Another feature of interest in connection with the southern exten-

sion of the main lode is that after exposure for several years in a mullock dump

at the surface, tiny scales of a yellow mineral developed on the surface of the

mica. To the naked eye this mustard-coloured efflorescence resembles carnotite

and the phenomena was reported as such (10). Flowever. recent tests show it

10 be strongly fluorescent under ultra-violet light, which is not the case with

carnotite. It appears therefore to be autunite.

Davidite—This name was given to a very rare constituent of the Radium

Hill Lode. The chemical composition is given (1) in the table on page 344. In the

year 1911. Sir William Crookes, who kindly undertook to examine it spectro-

graphically for scandium reported that it contained a notably high proportion of

that element.

Davidite is known in the pure state only from the main lode in the neigh-

bourhood of the Main Shaft. There it has been found crystallised in a rough

cuboidal form on drusy faces which, after formation, were encased in reef quartz

of a late period of lode formation. From such faces the pure davidite can some-

times be observed to pass back into the common bright ilmenitic mineral of the

lode. In such cases the constituents peculiar to davidite grade off part passu with

the changes in physical character of the “ilmenite.” This gradation indicates that

the common bright mineral of the lode may be regarded.as in some meastire a

solid solution of davidite in ilmenite. We have observed tiny bright specks and

spots of davidite distributed as local concentrations in the substance of the

ilmenite.

Davidite is a pitch-black mineral of adamantine lustre. It is perfectly homo-

geneous and is found in crystal form. It appears to be a member of the

perofskite group. The error of Crook and Blake (5), when they concluded that

davidite ig non-homogeneous and therefore not a definite mineral substance is

explained by the fact that they had worked on a large block of mixed ilmenitic

iron ore of the lode, believing that it was that which had been named davidite

(10).

If sufficient of this mineral can be got we intend to ascertain its crystallo-

graphic structure by X-Ray analysis and to use it as a most suitable mineral for

age determination.

Carnotite——Within about 80 feet of the surface certain other minerals have

developed as products of weathering. Of these carnotite is the most abundant.

It occurs as mustard-like films in crevices, and especially as a coating on the

radio-active ilmenite, An analysis (VIL) by Dr. Cook of this carnotite encrustation

is quoted in the table on page 344.

Other secondary uranium and vanadium minerals also are to be found but

only in minute amount, not sufficient to encourage efforts to ascertain their exact

nature, Of these, minute flaky crystals of a yellow mineral which react strongly

with ultra-violet light are probably autunite.

URANIUM IN THE PEGMATITES OF THE

BOOLCOOMATA BATHOLYTH

Recently, in company with Mr. A. W. Kleeman and advanced students

engaged in making a mineral survey of the pegmatite following of the Pre-

Cambrian Boolcoomata batholyth, we located uraniferous minerals in two localities

separated by a distance of about 10 miles. Many years ago, during our student

excursions to that area, we stimulated local interest in the commercial possibilities

presented by the many splendid examples of coarse pegmatites in the vicinity of

the granite masses. As a result, ever since then, the mining of the feldspar of the

pegmatites has been continued on a small scale. Lately, beryl to the extent of

some tons has been marketed.

On our recent visit several specimens of gummite-like uranium mineral were

got in one of these feldspar quarries located about one mile south of the sunimit

of Binberrie Hill.

Autunite and some specks of a highly radio-active mineral hke broeggerite

were found in a beryl and tantalite-bearing pegmatite located a couple of miles

west-north-west of Ameroo Hill on Outalpa Station. A full account of both

these occurrences will appear in our forthcoming report on the paragenesis of the

minerals of the pegmatites. The localities are indicated on the map, page 336.

OCCURRENCES IN THE NEIGHBOURHOOD OF COWELL

Dr. L. K. Ward has recorded (19) that “Torbernite and autunite are known

to exist near the Government Weir across Yeldulkic Creek in the neighbourhood

of Cleve. At this place uranium-bearing minerals have been found in traces in

348

joint planes traversing a pegmatite intrusion.” This locality is about 22 miles

west of Cowell.

To the north-west of Cowell, distant about seven miles and situated in Sec-

uion 1B of the Hundred of Minbrie, carnotite encrustations were observed by

Dr. R. f., Jack (22) as accidentally met with in developing an asbestos mine in a

cale-silicate belt of country. It is recorded “a costean has exposed decomposed

rock, possibly an argillaceous sediment, cut by a dyke containing oligoclase felds-

par. The joints and cleavages of the decomposed rock carry films of a bright

yellow material, which consists of carnotite, evidently secondary in its deposition.

One assay yielded 0°3% of uranium: oxide, while a second yielded 0-007 %.”

Both these occurrences on Eyre Peninsula are in Pre-Cambrian formations

in the neighbourhood of granite intrusions.

THE MOUNT PAINTER FIELD

GEOLOGICAL FEATURES

Mount Painter is situated in a patch of rugged country of older Pre-Cambrian

age ear the northern extremity of the Llinders Ranges. The map below

Hlustrates not only its geographical position but, by appropriate hatch-

ey *

* Ps ie 7

ANICHOLS KNOB,

MT.OGILVIE & \

‘h \

/ MURTURPA

POUND

KK 4

+j Sper tit 3 “i Lt

r a

@MT SEARLE ‘ 9 BALCANDONA

: 5 sian. 4.

bony

Portion of the Northern ilinders Ranees with CGeolovical Hatching.

This includes Mount Painter and Mount Ovilvic.

awaeosoic and pre-Palaeozoie rocks of the surrounding region are dis-

the

in several groups. tn most paris of the map the boundaries of

rraius are only roughly indicated. his degree of delineation is the

resuit, of a nuraber of reconnaissances made in that area, none of which were

crtaken to accurately map exact boundaries, Areas occupied by the Pound

fe are included as Cambrian. Phe blank arcas are either occupied by post-

¢ formations or are insuticiently known to be referred to any particular

LLANE

period,

in the vicinity of Mount Painter the couttry outside the atea indicated as

older Pre-Cambrian is occupied by later Pre-Cambrian formations which corre-

spon with the Adelaide Series of southern South Australia. Coming towards

Moun? Painter, by the Blue Mine track fron: Unberatana. one passes down stuc-

349

cessively from the Sturtian Tillie horizon at Red Hill and the Wheat Turner

Mine, through dolomitic limestones partly converted to calc-silicate rocks, repre-

senting the Beaumont Dolomites and Slates, to a great quartzite equivalent to the

Thick Quartzite. This quartzite flanks and unconformably overlies the rugged

central country on the west. A. similar succession is met with on the eastern

margin of the Mount Painter country. Already some account of the geology of

that region has been published (sec references 9, 11, 12, 138, 14). other con-

tbutions incorporating the observations of our more recent visits are 1

preparation,

LT take this opportunity to advise that, in the detail of a succession of sedi-

ments published in 1034 (see [4), [ laser found that the series is broken by an

important line of faulting along the janction of formations 10 (chocolate shales )

and 11 (Cave [Hil doiomite). The beds to the east have been heavily thrown

down in relation to those to the west. To the west of Mcleach’s Well is the

Beaumont Dolomite series passing upward to the sturtian ‘Tillite above. Thus

the tillite at Mount Jaceb and the tillite at Mount Warren llastings are of the

same age. ‘There may, however, be a still older tillite, as will be mentioned shortly.

The core of the Mount Painter country is occupied by a complex, largely

igneous but partly of sedimentary origin, all of which, however, has undergone

more or less severe metamorphism, in which, usually, the dynamic factor is

abundantly evident. ‘The intrusion of a highly sodie post-Proterozoic granitic

magma into the outskirts af this region has long been known and is being dealt

with in detail by us at the present moment. Whether, however, any of the igneous

rocks of the central belt are post-Proterozvic in age remains to be proved by

detailed mapping of the area. It is a fact that many of the notable types of

igneous rock of the central belt are met with as ervatics in the Proterozoic tillite

vi the neighbourhood.

In the very cemre of the regiou a massive, coarse breecia and conglemerate

formation which has undergone a considerabie degree of dynaniic metamorphism

can be traced tor several miles, approximately parallel to the line of the Mount

sinter Ridge. It is intersected on the Radium Last Creek where “conglomer-

aie? is indicated on the map on page 351. Contained in it are blocks of many

types of older rocks which oceur i situ rearby. In many respects this has the

characters of a metamorphosed tilite formation and suggests that it is the Sturtian

Tillite involved at some time in the past in some great orogenic disturbance. This

may be the case. but there is some evidence which appears to differentiate it from

the Sturtian Tillite and suggests that perhaps it corresponds to an earlier glacial

period.

In Middle-Proterozoic times great basic volcanic activity developed, as evi-

denced in the country between the Arkaroola and \Wooltana ; also at Yudana-

muttana.

As some time, possibly in late Proterozoic or even im late Cambrian time, ihe

core region became subjected to great dynamic movements which are recorded m

remarkable shatter zones in the pink granites and other rocks which constitute the

matrices cf the uraniferous fermations. They follow two main systems: one

trends youglily east to west. and the other north to south.

Thus extensive belts of crush conglomerate and erush breccias traverse the

oldest rocks, and particularly the pink granites in the region of Mount Patter to

Radium: Ridge, Later these shatter zones have heen invaded hy gases and solu-

tions responsible for the uraniferous lodes. Thus quartz, stilbite, fluorspar, fer-

gusonite, monazite, baryta and hematite, as well as some uranium minerals, have

been introduced on a notable seale. Splendid examples have been observed in

these shatter zones illustrating the metasomatic replacement of the silicate minerals

by hernatite. Mount Gee, in particular, has heen the centre of great hydrothermal

activity during the period of mineralization.

350

My field observations in the central area have becn conducted mainly from

two locations, namely, Main Camp and Rock Holes Camp, respectively elevated

about 1,350 feet and 1,950 feet above, sea-level, ‘The crest of Radium Ridge is

about 900 fect above Main Camp. Mount Painter itself is about 3,000 feet above

sea-level.

LOCATION AND CHARACTER OF THe URANIEEROUS OUTCROPS

‘These are illustrated on the map on page 331. Short references to each will be

made under the distinguishing numbers recorded on the map.

No, 1 and 2—-Excavations in a strougly defined reef which extends down the

northern slopes of Radium Ridge at an elevation of about 840 feet above the camp

on Radium Creek. The formation is mainly a dense mass of hematite six feet

thick which forms the foot wall of a large, notably siliceous, body with drusy

cavities which also carries platy hematite, Monazite is abundant in some portions

of the reef, and blebs of the dark brown mineral which has been referred to as

iergusonite are occasionally visible. Local concentrations of the rarer minerals

eecur at mtervals in the lode, so that small blocks of rock composed almost entirely

of monazite and fergusonite are veeasionally met with. “These latter have asso-

ciated with them the secondary uranium minerals which have been referred to as

gumuite and uranosphaerite.

For the recovery of the monazite and fergusonite, commercial operations

would necessitate the mining and milling of the whole of the formation followed

by magnetic separation, A fergusonite concentrate recovered by this method of

treatment from a bulk sample of the richer ore from this locality yielded a pro-

duct equivalent to 6°5% U,O.@ In the case of a specially selected and purified

sample of the fergusonite the produce had a U,O, activity of 8%.

An average sample taken across the six feet face of solid hematite reef, where

monazite but no fergusonite was visible, yielded on magnetic separation a

recovery of 0°-43% of monazite. The recovery from a hand-picked sample from

the same place yielded 1°34% of monazite.

A magnetic and gravity separation of a rich mass of this monazite-fergusonite

rock yielded 40% fergusonite, 40% monazite and 20% of hematite and quartz.

Another sample, containing noticeable fergusonite, was crushed and separated

clectromagnetically for a yield of 80% by weight of iron ore, 10% of monazite

and 89 of fergusonite,

No. 3 is an ironstone mass some 60 yards by 20 yards in area capping Radium

Ridge at an elevation of 850 feet above the camp on Radium Creek. This mass

is composed of platy hematite associated with quartz and a variable amount ot

violet to black fluorspar; it is studded with small cells representing spaces from

which some mineral has been weathered out, and in which scales of torbernite

may be located. A cross-section sample of the leached outcrop was found to have

a UO, activity equivalent to 0-27%. Experiments proved that by judicious

crushing and electromagnetic separation a fraction having an activity of 1%

U..O, can be recovered,

This iron-rich mass dips to the north, A shaft sunk on the underlay side

and a drive beneath it traversed weathered granite spangled with torbernite, A

hand-picked sample of the better class granitic material from the spoil-heap was

scopically on their activity in relation to that of a standard Radium Hill mineral of known

uranium content. It is, of course, realised that the uranium yalue thus obtained may, in

special cases, especially when dealing with the weathered portion of uraniferous Iddes,

be considerably in error. For instance, where rapid leaching of the more soluble uranium

tninerals has been in progress, the radium as sulphate which is extremely insoluble

will remain behind in unduly high proportion in relation to the uranium; in which case

the electroscopic method will record too high a value for the uranium present,

351

found to have a U,O, activity value of 0°4%. It was found that a more rigid

selection could yield up to 0°7%.

No. 4 is a patch of hematite and vughy quartz with some fluorspar and traces

of torbernite, which covers an area of about 50 yards by 20 yards and rests on

granitic rock. In nature it is thus comparable with No. 3. This occurrence is at

330 feet above the camp, on a small spur which descends from Radium Ridge.

Some black specks in the associated reddish-brown granite gave an indication of

slight radio-activity when subjected to the autoradiographic test.

An excavation in the decomposed granite adjacent to the ironstone proved

it to carry on a width of two feet a notable amount of torbernite. This 2-feet

wide belt is the richest ore in this vicinity and its average grade is 0°37% U,O,

a ————

Mparucrair

RO A

ra Marr wero

ede

eee Se ere NOB®

——

ya Bacon SS 6 €& _

no 3.@ Broo * UM R . \ gocn HOLES CAMP

2 i 1 NO 10.

No 2. RA D

\ \ w ™Y i ee a

| ° m7

[ i noa| o \ wNa

/ \ *

Se eo \ EE Smart

a / / fo NG 13.

{ /

h NOS ww

\ { Qroa MT GEERS { \

Peete : i | iS! No12.@

\ ¢

tie Ss i = oy a \

ie ee tle Ss! Qnoro a GREENWOCO'S CAMPS

Maa te ace” AS / e MT PAINTER MH \o Got mo now |

Ss ™,

| rR ® :

MAINRCAMP uy \ nt E m

S A

\ ) <x * f

i SY yw .

@ro7 vs greeaf wo’ j

: a 5 SCALE iN

% oe ‘ ae te ners

a es I

* A j

Bh URANIUM MINERAL OCCURRENCES {

oR SHOWN THUS - ® |

: |

i A a

Fig. 6

The Mount Painter Field, with Localities of Uraniferous Occurrences.

yalue. By selecting only the fines from the crushed sample a value of 0°5%

can be got.

No. 5--On the western slope of Mount Gee at 650 feet above the camp, on

the line of a massive hematite formation, scattered flakes of torbernite are spar-

ingly distributed through the rock. When quarrying here to a depth of seven fect

occasional concentrations of uranium minerals, torbernite and a yellow ochreous

substance were met with in vughs.

No. 6 has, up to the present, proved the richest of the finds. Here the out-

crop is a manganiferous ironstone mass, with a nearly north to south trend. It is

situated on the crest of a spur ridge overlooking and adjacent to Radium Creek.

The collar of the shaft sunk on it is 270 feet above the creek bed at the foot of

the spur.

The ironstone mass is situated on a north-south crush zone in granitic gneiss.

An adit, driven 172 fect into the hillside 100 feet below the collar of the shaft,

traverses siliceous gneiss in which are sillimanite-bearing belts.

S52

The main shaft is located just where an east-west dislocation cuts the north-

south crush zone. This east-west slip face dips at 60° to the south and is strongly

slickensided. Along this face soft argillaceous and ferruginous ores have been met

it. seams up to 9 inches wide, composed principally of solid autunite. Apart from

this the values have been principally confined to the hanging wall side, where thin

seams and splashes of uranium minerals recur at intervals on slip and joint faces.

Extensive workings have not succeeded in locating further really rich ore

since the slip-face body cut out at about the 50-feet level. The result of mining

at No. 6 has been to raise a tew tons of high-grade ore, some hundreds. of tons

of low-grade ore and to leave in the mine, developed ready for stoping, a con-

siderable further quantity of low-grade ore.

At the time of my last visit average samples taken over two different sections

of the richer areas exposed in the underground workings, gave respectively an

average of 0°8% and 0°32% U,,O, activity. Experiments showed that, in the

case of the first sample, by partial crushing and selecting the fines which passed

through a 20-mesh sieve, a recovery could be made of 25% of the original weight

but having an activity of 1-7%. The same treatment on a hand selected sample

from the 0°32% ore yielded material of 1% activity,

Other results from this beneficition treatment of average samples from

dumps in and about No. 6 workings are as follows: Ore of 0°77% UO, gave a

15% recovery of 20-mesh sievings of activity 1-7% UO, ; 063% ore yielded 16%

recovery of 20-mesh sievings of activity 2°1% U,O,; 0°34% ore yielded 40% of

20-mesh sievings of activity 0°-48% U,O.; 1:19% ore yielded 34% recovery of

30-mesh sievings of activity 2°5% U,O,.

A sample of very hard ore of 0°48% activity yielded a 15% recovery of

30-mesh screenings of activity 0°95%.

No. 7 is located on a steep spur 365 feet above the creek at the camp. The

local rock is granitic gneiss with an east to west trend. The main workings are

ona fracture zone trending approximately north to south. Alongside the fracture

zone is a siliceous pegmatized vein with occasional drusy vughs. Secondary

uranium minerals, chiefly torbernite and gummite, associated with concentrations

of psilomelane are distributed in the rock adjacent to the vein.

Considerable nuning reconnaissance has revealed that the only possible useful

formation is to be taken as one foot in width. An average sample of this face

gave a uranium activity value of 0°37% ; but a greatly improved product could be

obtained by beneficiation, By hand picking alone a useful grade of ore could no

doubt be got, for some 5% UO, ore has been recovered and shipped abroad from

these workings.

No. 8 is located 400 feet above the camp on a spur descending from Radium

hidge. There is no distinct lode outcrop. The country is granitic gneiss in which

there are several drusy quartz stringers cach about one inch thick, trending east

to west, with torbernite concentrations related to them.

tland-picked material from the dump, accumulated as the result of mining

operations, gave an average value of 0-7% U,O,. Experiment shows that by

selecting the fines passing through a 20-mesh sieve and by rumbling the coarse

material a recovery of 21% of 1°7% U.,O, grade can be got. This, it is estimated,

would mean the mining of 50 tons of the granitic rock to obtain one ton of the

17% grade.

No. 9 is a massive granular baryta-rich formation, possibly 60 feet wide and

extending for some distance as a spur from the western end of Radium Ridge.

On one side of it is an ironstone selvage bearing a considerable amount of

fluorspar, Traces of carnotite were reported in a sample from this mass sub-

mitted by W. B. Greenwood to the Mines Department. Also traces of lead were

333

reported. In a cursory inspection I did not observe any uranium minerals at this

place, but is should be further investigated.

No. 10 is a locality where Mr, A. C. Broughton (2 and 3) collected slugs of

radio-active ilmenite shed on the surface and embedded in mica schist and peg-

matite. The rock is reported richest in this ilmenite at the contact_of the peg-

matite with the schist. Samples submitted by Broughton to W. B, Chapman for

analysis have returned U,O, content ranging from 0°30% to5%. The location

is given as 4 mile distant, on a bearing W.10° S, from Mount Gee; and about

14 miles distant and on a bearing W. 5°.N. from Mount Painter.

No. 11—A lode about 8 feet wide extending west into the face of the west

bank of Radium-East Creek at a locality known as Greenwood’s Camp. The late

W. B. Greenwood, who first prospected the area made this spot one of his main

camps. The lode is largely composed of platy hematite, and is somewhat cellular

owing to removal by weathering of more readily decomposed constituents. Scales

of torbernite oceur in the cells and on joint planes. Traces of turquois have been

met as films in the joint planes, The quality of the ore is low, so that even by

severe hand-picking no useful quantity of 1% grade could, be got.

At an elevation of 95 feet above the creek, on the opposite bank and separated

by a couple of hundred yards, is a cut in the granite face exposing films of

secondary iron oxide and occasionally turquois deposited along seams in the rock.

No. 12 is an ironstone formation of very limited proportions located in

gneissic rock intersected by quartz and hematite infiltrations. It is situated at a

point 153 fect above the creek, on a steep spur, about one-quarter of a mile to

the west of north from No. 11. The ore is very low grade, averaging only about

0-1% U,Ox activity.

No. 13 is on a steep rock spur composed of conglomerate which has suffered

much crushing in the course of dynamic metamorphism. Torbernite, very sparsely

distributed in the rock, appears at intervals for several hundred feet down the

hillside to the creek.

No. 14—Qccasional spangles of torbernite are met with in crushed red

granite. Cellular ironstone occupies the fracture spaces in the rock. At this

locality flakes of torbernite have been observed in the substance of unfractured

blocks of the granite and in vein quartz. The occurrence is of extremely low

grade.

No. 15 is a large ironstone outcrop situated some 600 yards to the north-

west of Rock Iloles Camp and clevated at its summit some 550 feet above it.

The ironstone mass rises through crushed granite country and is obviously of the

nature of a replacement by solutions which have circulated in the crushed zone.

In the case of certain leaders continuing to the west beyond the main body, clear

evidence of metasomatic replacement of the feldspar by hematite 1s to be

recognised,

The main mass of hematite-impregnated rock is some 200 yards in length and

50 yards in width. The type of ore here is very similar to that of No, 3, Fluor-

spar, deep blue to black, appears here and there in the formation, and in at least

one place definite blebs of brown fergusonite are to be seen embedded in the

hematite; quartz is a plentiful constituent. Torbernite is sparsely distributed

throughout the mass and abundant along one zone.

Along the crown of the outcrop is a run of manganiferous ironstone some

30 feet wide, much richer in torbernite than elsewhere. This is evidently a shear

zone, atid as it trends directly towards No. 3, this locality may be regarded as a

continuation of Radium Ridge.

Chippings across the outcrop of this ferruginous mass were crushed and

found to have an average radio-activity equivalent to 0°4% U,O,. This ore could,

of course, yield a useful quota of higher grade material. As the mass amounts to

354

thousands of tons and there is hope of an improved grade in the shear zone below,

it should be worth investigation.

No. 16—Torbernite outcrops extend for several hundred yards along the

flank of a steep hillside about half-a-mile to the west of and 450 feet above the

Rock Floles Camp.

This is a shatter zone in massive aplitic pink granite. Red feldspar and

quartz are the most obvious minerals, but tiny grains of platy hematite and specks

of other black minerals resembling ilmenite and found by the autoradiographic test

to be radio-active are distributed through the rock in small quantities. Occa-

sionally flakes of torbernite are to be seen on broken faces. In shatter zones there

is more hematite and torbernite. A highly ferruginous outcrop measuring about

60 feet by 20 feet in superficial area is rich in iron and manganese, and carries

some torbernite. An average sample of the torbernite-bearing red granite has

less than 0°1% UO, activity and, therefore, is of no economic value,

MINERALS OF THE Loves

Hematite constitutes the main mass of some of the lode formations, It is a

platy hematite of an unusually tough nature. A sample separated magnetically

from No. 2 ore was found to contain no titanium, vanadium or niobium.

Monagile is associated with some of the highly ferruginous ore bodies, usually

appearing in small quantity only. However in the occurrence at No. 2 it is

abundant in local concentrations. A sample of the monazite from this lode, which

we separated from other minerals by electromagnetic concentration, was analysed

for me by R. G. Thomas; the result is inclided in the table below. The

presence of iron, niobium, and silica appears to indicate that in the process of

separation a pure monazite product was not achieved and ‘that it contained some

admixed fergusonite, etc. The small percentage of uranium oxide may also be

accounted for as a constituent of the fergusonite. This monazite, it will be

noted, is exceptionally low in thoria.

Monazite from the corundum schists, a mile or more to the west-south-west

of No. 2, was found (11) also to carry an infinitesimal amount of thoria, namely

0°16% ThO, in one sample and 0-20% in another.

Fergusonitc—W. S, Chapman referred a greasy liver-coloured constituent of

several of the lodes to this mineral. I found it most abundant at No. 2 occurrence,

but met with it also on Mount Gee and at No. 15. Chapman’s analysis is quoted

in the table below. We made partial analyses of samples of this mineral

obtained from several localities, and in every case we got results lower in iron

and higher in uranium than Chapman’s original analysis, indicating either that the

mineral varies in composition from place to place, or that the samples were not

thoroughly free from foreign admixtures.

Tergusonite concentrate obtained from the No. 2 ore had an activity of that

of 675% U,O,. In the case of specially selected and purified fergusonite its

activity was found to be equal to 89% U,,O,.

Doubtless the chemical coniposition of this mineral varies with the locality of

occurrence in the Mount Painter field.

Recently my colleague, A. W. Kiceman, has kindly provided a check analysis.

Me utilized material from a rich monazite-fergusonite-hematite mass from No. 2

workings. The analysis was executed with great care and is, therefore, specially

valuabie. Though the mineral was separated as carefully as passible from other

constituents of the rock (chiefly monazite and quartz), Kleeman found evidence

that it was contaminated to some extent by mechanically held quartz, This latter

was not taken up in the bisulphate fusion. and is recorded in his initial analysis as

“siliceous residue. ‘The recomputed analysis, having deducted this impurity,

is given in column IIT of the table. Chemically considered, it appears to be a

355

member of either the fergusonite or samarskite group, though it could perhaps fit

into the pyrochlore group. Mr. Kleeman is conducting further investigations to

settle this point and will publish a fuller account in due course,

I I iil

SiO, laze By 0-78 6-26 —

TiOs sl — Fie nil nil 0-43

AWwOs . 7” es —_ 2-99 0-46

MnO ‘4 ra eT — 0:48 0-26

_ O13 st. tr.

—_ 4-32 1-50

0-30 trace st. tr.

29+26 1-76 0-29

Sn, Bite, _ - 23-60 = 0-12

VoOs, ete. hod hea 3°30 7-08 Pra

Nb:Os u Spock aut ‘i 4 } 4 1-11

TasOs : we “i 2-82) y 48-08 2-60

UsOs “a aaalt +21 1-20 8°64

PHO ars ted —_ — 0-66

SnO: <3. et —_ trace trace

P.O; ara of 27-17 — sis

HO ' sates mse 4-57

Hon. a sh Oe a 3-22

109-58 98-15 98-76

(@) Apparently mechanically admixed impurily. @) Compuied as FeO.

@) Computed as FeO. @) Mainly Nb,O,.

L Monzite from No. 2. Analysed by RG. Thomas. The sample reported tu have been contaminated

by a hitle quartz aud fergusonite.

il “Fergusonite’ from Radium Ridge. Analysed by W. S. Chapman. Sample selected as free as

possible from associated siliceous matter, etc.

lit “Fergusonite’ from No. 2 workings. Analysed by A. W. Kleeman, Recomputed analysis after allow-

ing for elimination of mechanically admixed siliceous impurity.

Autunite is common in the weathered portion of the lodes, but is seen only

rarely in the actual outcrops. Some wonderful specimens of it have been got

from No. 6 in the deeper working.

Torbernite is the most widely distributed secondary uranium mineral in the

Mount Painter field.

In portion of the upper zone of No. 6 the “torbernite” is of a peculiar siskin-

ercen colour. Some of it was examined by A.W. Kleeman, who reports tt as

closely corresponding to metatorbernite.

From the No. 6 workings chaleo-uranite has been reported. Analyses of the

uranate minerals from this same locality have sometimes incittded arsenic present

replacing some of the phosphorus, indicating transitions towards uranospinite

and sewnerite,

From the No. 2 workings, and from Mount Gee, uwranophane and guanmite

have been reported by Mr. W. S. Chapman. A mineral resembling uwrano-

sphaerite was found at the No. 2 workings. Carnotite has been recorded by

Mr. Chapman both from No. 9 and No. 10 workings. There has, however, been

no quantitative determinations of any of these secondary uranium minerals,

Radio-Active Ibnenite —~ Broughton has described (2) the occurrence ot

uraniferous ilmenite from locality 10, where he collected pieces up to three inches

in diameter. A representative sample first submitted to W. 5. Chapman for

analysis was found to contain 34-19% TiO,, 17°8% total Fe and 3-7% U,O,; also

the presence of vanadium was recorded. This sample had a conchoidal fracture

and was said co show yellow stains of carnotite on the fracture faces. Some of

the fragments are stated to show evidence of partial leucoxenization,

356

A later sample collected by Broughton was reported (3) to contain 20°1%

TiO, and 0°30% U,O,. Finally, a sample submitted to Chapman was found to

contain 489% TiO, and 5% U,O,; iron and the cerium earths were present also.

This latter sample was stated to resemble very closely the Radium Hill ore,

The red aplitic granite from certain localities, for instance from No. 16

contains particles of hematite and other black specks, some of which were found

by autoradiographic test to be radio-active. These are suspected of heing radin-

active ilmenite, though some may be even specks of broeggerite,

Mliyorite is met with in many of the uranifcrous outcrops, but in no case has

it been found to be radiv-active., Also the absence of rare-earths has been proved

in the case of that from the No. 3 occurrence. It ranges from colourless to black.

mitch of it being amethystine or green, Where it is present. it is usually scattered

in isolated grains throughout the ore complex,

MOUNT OGILVIE, NORTHERN FLINDERS RANGES

BOM. Krause (7) is responsible for the following statement: “Ticbigite is a

decomposition product of other uranium ores. An impure variety, mixed with

some clayey and ochreous matter and enclosing native gold. occurs at Mount

Ogilvie, S.A." This locality is about 42 miles to the west of Mount Painter and

is ina region of Proterozoic sediments. Some years ago rich poekets of gold

were mined in that area, | have not found any other reference to the discovery

of uranium ores in that vicinity. Tiebigite is a hydrous-caleium-uranium-car-

bonate, At my suggestion, Mr. G, A. Greenwood, of Mount Serle Station, paid a

visit to the Mount Ogilvie mining field. bat failed to locate uraniunt minerals.

OCCURRENCE IN THE MUSGRAVE RANGES

Recently Mr. A. PF, Wilson, on a geological reconnaissance in the vicinity oF

Ernabella, discovered a radio-active nineral oecurring in large crystal masses in

a coarse pegmatite. Tis only weakly radio-active, but its presence in the peg-

matites of the locality increases the hope that other uramum-bearing minerals may

be discovered in that extensive region of older Pre-Cambrian rocks. In dtc

course, Mr. Wilson will publish details of his interesting mineral discovery,

ACK NOW LIEDGMIENTS

The amount of laboratory and fell work embodied in these iInvestigatian~

in the Olary and the Mount Painter fields has been very considerable, and much

help has been rendered hy my students and colleagues, Chief amongst these are

R.G, Thomas and A, R. Atderman. A notable contribution has been provided

by the analytical section of the Mines Department, mainly during the term ot

ofhee of Mr. W. S. Chapman. Also in chemical investigations, iny colleague,

A. W. Wheeman, has recently assisted hy checking certain of the analvses, At

the time when active development at Radiant Mall lodes was at its height Dr. C.F.

Madigan kindly assisted in the examination of the lodes. Pinay, at all times in

the prosecution of field operations in the Mount Painter area. great help has been

accorded to me by Mr. Gordon A. Greenwood of Mount Serle Station, and by

his brother Bentley of Arkaroola Station. In conclusion, H. E. E. Brock’s skilful

assistance mn providing microscopical preparations and plans bas heen greath:

appreciated.

List or REFERENCES

ALDERMAN, A, R. 1925) Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., 49, 89

3RouGH TON, A C, 1925 Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 49, 101

SRovGUTON, A. C. 1926 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 50, 315

Cooke, W. T. 1916 Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 40, 267

Crook, T., and Brake, G. S. 1910 Min. Mae., 15, 271-284

Dunn, |. A..and Dey, A. K. 1937 Trans. Min. and Geol. Inst.. India, pt. 1

ON Un Be te Ae

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate XIX

Fig. 1 The Radium Hill Mine soon after its Discovery

Fig. 2. Mount Gee. Viewed from the west.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate XX

Fig. 1 No. 6 Workings and Radium Ridge forming the sky-line

Fig. 2. No. 3 Workings on Radium Ridge

357

7 Krause, F. M. 1896 “An Introduction to the Study of Mineral.,” 343. Sydney

8 Mawson, D. 1906 Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 30, 188-193

9 Mawson, D. 1912 Trans. Aust. Ass. Adv. Sci., 13, 188

10 Mawson, D. 1916 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 40, 262

11 Mawson, D. 1923 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 47, 376

12 Mawson, D. 1926 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 50, 192

13 Mawson, D. 1927 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 51, 192

14 Mawson, D. 1934 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 58, 187

15 Mawson, D., and Lany, T. H., 1904 Trans. Roy. Soc. N.S.W

16 Rapcurrr, S. 1906 Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 30, 199-204

17 Srantey, E.R. 1916 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 40, 268

18 S. Aust. Mines Dept. Spec. Bull. 1911

19 S. Aust. Mines Dept. Bull. 17. 1912 Mount Painter

20 S. Aust. Mines Dept. Bull. 19 1913 Radium Hill

21 S. Aust. Mines Dept. Bull. 26 1917 Index to Radium Mining Reports

22 S. Aust. Mines Dept. Bull, 38 1923 Carnotite, Hundred of Minbrie

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

Plate XTX

Fig. 1 The mine at Radium Hill, showing the locality as it appeared in the year

19066 soon after its discovery. The main lode extends in a line from the shaft in the

foreground to the figure standing on the outcrop in the distance. The picture illustrates

the flat nature of the country and the sparsely: distributed mulga scrub,

Fig. 2. Mount Gee, viewed from the west. The dark belt outcropping on the

slopes is mainly a lode of massive hematite: with it is associated No. 5 workings.

Place XX

Fig. 1 Looking north-west from the main shaft sunk on No. 6 workings. Radium

Ridge forms the distant sky-line. The figure is that of Mr. Fabian, who was in charge

of developments in earlier stages of production.

Fig. 2 No. 3 workings on Radium Ridge.

Pate XAT

Autoradiographs of polished faces of Radium Hill ore; reproduced natural size.

Fig. 1 Showing, in the upper left-hand corner of the picture, davidite crystals

lining a narrow vein traversing heterogeneous irou-ore minerals. The homogencous

character of davidite is reflected in the uniformity of its photographic record. The dark

non-active mineral (dark spaces between the davidite crystals) of the vein is quartz.

The inactive areas elsewhere are occupied by rutile and hematite. Areas of medium

activity are of radio-active ilmenite. At the right-hand bottom corner is ilmenite which

by reaction with later lode solutions has lost most of the davidite quota of the peripheral

zone, though it remains unaltered in the core area.

Fig. 2 Another example illustrating, in the lower right-hand side of the picture, a

late-formed vein of pure davidite traversing the ore complex which in this case is mainly

radio-active ilmenite. The latter, particularly in the neighbourhood of the davidite vein.

has lost part of its davidite quota. The non-active mineral in hematite,

Fig. 3. The white areas are davidite and the bright films are carnotite. The davidite

is mainly at the top left-hand corner on cither side of the quartz (inactive). The other

black areas are rutile, and non-active tron-ore.

Fig. 4 A record of the dead-black radio-active “iImenite” from the south end of

the main lode. ‘his is the mineral recorded in column v of the table on page 344. The

unrecorded areas are occupied by quartz, biotite, rutile, etc. The non-homogenicty of

the “ilmenite” is illustrated by variations in the intensity of the record. In this case,

where biotite has been developed as a late-formed mineral partly at the expense of the

iron from the ‘ilmenite,’ the border of the latter individuals is enhanced in activity.

Vig. 5 Here the original mineral wag radio-active ilmenite, but it has been aitected

at a later stage by secondary changes. Where the latter has operated the intensity of

activity has been reduced. Kernels of the original mineral are indicated by the uniform

lighter areas within. The very bright specks and streaks are secondary ex-solution con-

centrations of davidite.

OBITUARY NOTICES

FREDERICK CHAPMAN

Frederick Chapman, who passed away on 13 December 1943, at the age of 79, had been an

Honorary Fellow of our Society since 1926.

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

358

OBITUARY NOTICES

FREDERICK CHAPMAN

Frederick Chapman, who passed away on 13 December 1943, at the age of 79,

had been an Honorary Fellow of our Society since 1926.

Born at Camden Town, |-ondon, in 1864, he started his scientific career, and

tor 20 years continued, as assistant to Prof. Judd at the Royal College of Science,

London. During this period he established himself as an authority on the

ioraminifera.

In 1902 he was appointed palacontologist to the National Museum, Mel-

bourne, and conumenced a long and full study of Australian fossils. In addition

to a large number of papers (over 500), mainly on fossil invertebrates, contri-

buted to scientific journals, including our own Transactions, he published, in 1914,

“Australasian Fossils.” In 1927, on retiring from the National Museum, he was

appointed Commonweath Palaeontologist in connection with the search for oil.

Iie was a Fellow of the Geological Society of f.ondon, from which Society he was

awarded the Lyell Medal; he was also an Associate (honoris causa) of the Lin-

nean Society of London.

REV. N. . LOUWYCK

The Rev. Napoleon Henry Louwyck died on 18 August at the age of 81. He

had been a member of our Society since 1920, and was not only a regular

attendant at the monthly meetings, but also had contributed to our Transactions.

Mr. Louwyck was born at Hauthen, in Belgium, and as a Capuchin monk served

in India. In 1900 he left the Catholic Church and entered the Church of Eng-

rand. In 1916 he came to Australia and was priest-in-charge at Yorketown and

rector at Yankalilla. retiring in 1937. He was an authority on Egyptology,

archacology and anthropology, and was Past President of the Anthropological

Society of South Australia. He privately published several books, such as ‘In

Quest of Truth,” “Mental Indefiniteness,” ete., using his own small printing press

and setting his own type.

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

1929) Pror, Warter Howcuin, F.GS.

1930) Jouw~ McC. Brack, A.L.S.

1931 Pror. Sie Doucras Mawsex, O.U.E, D.Sc, BEL, Fun S.

1933 Pror. J. Berron Crrtann, M1.

1935. Pror, T. Harvey Jonnsron, M.A., D.Se.

1938 Prov. J. A. Prescort, D.Sc. FLA.LC.

1943) Hereerr Wowerscvey, A.L.S.. F.RLES.

1944 Prov, J. Gr. Weon, D.Sc, PhD.

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED).

Receipts and Payments for the Year ended September 30, 1944.

359

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED)

Receipts and Payments for the

Audited and found correct. The Inseribed

verified lv certificates.

1). GLASTONBURY, F.A.1LS.,

POM. ANGEL

Adelaide, 11 October, 1944

AVPLEA.

Year ended 30 September 1944

RECELPTS PAYMENTS

és ad £ 8 ad} £os6sd £ 834

‘ce, 1 Octohier, 1943 165 14 91 By Transactions (Vol. 67, Pt. 2)—

Sub ions 124.19 0 Printing Le fab eZ B= of

, Government Grant for Illustrating 58 13 2

Printing ete... ; 14519 4, Publishing 13.19 3

. Sale af Publications and a) DEBTS 9

Reprints: 1, Reprints 58 10 11

University of Adelaide 28 14° 0 |, librarian 32 18 0

Sundri¢s 32 13 0 i, Sundries—

eee «6 OL 2 0 Lighting 314 6

Use of Room 3°09 ~0 i Cleaning . mm. EAS aeD

Exchange ~ 2 0 Vrinting, Postages and

bieinee _S Stationery od Laie SB

, Interest -— Transferred Library 10 0

from Endowment Petties 6 5 0

Fund 199 15 3 Epidiascope 115 0

‘Ingurances 610 0

{ Legal Expenses .... 111 6

{ 62 2 0

ee Balances—30 Sep. 1944-—

Savings Bank of S.A... 251 2 4

Bank of Aust., £20 17. §

Less Out-

standing Chqus. 8 4 10

——--——— 12 12 10

| ot 963, PS |Z

£701 1 10 £701 1 10

ENDOWMENT FUND as at 30 September 1944

(Capital-—-Stocks, ete, Face Value, £5,969 4s. 1Gd.; Cost, £5,821 4s, 10d.)

£ «sd £ 8s. adi £os da é€ 8 4.

1843-—(yetuber 1 1944—September 30

To Balanee— By Revenue Account ... 199 15 3

Aust, Inscribed Stocks 5,812 0 0 ',, Balance—

Savings Bank of S.A. 9 4 10 Aust. Inscribed Stocks 5,812 0 0

wee 5 82L 4 10 | Savings Bank of S.A. .. 9 4 10

. interest ; ee 5827 410

Ineerthed Stocks 196 160 6

Savings Bank of S.A. 218 9

fete [991s 3

£6,021 0 f | £6,021 0 1

Stocks and respective Bank Balances have been

HERBERT M. HALE,

Hon, Treasurer

Hon.

Auditors

LIST OF FELLOWS, MEMBERS, ETC.

AS ON 30 SEPTEMBER 1944

Those marked with an asterisk (*) have contributed papers published in the Society's Transactions.

Those marked with a dagger (+) are Life Members.

Any change in address or any other changes should be notified to the Secretary.

Note - The publications of the Society are not sent to those members whose subscriptions are in

arrear.

360

LIST OF FELLOWS, MEMBERS, ETC.

AS ON 30 SEPTEMBER 1944

Those marked with an asterisk (*) have contributed papers published in the Society's

Transactions. Those marked with a dagger (+) are Life Members.

Any change in address or any other changes should be notified to the Secretary.

Note—The publications of the Society are not sent to those members whose subscriptions

are in arrear.

Ficction Honorary Frerrow

1894. *Wison, Profi. J. T.. M.D., Ch.M., F.R.S., Cambridge University, England.

FELLows.

1935. Apa, D. B., B.Agr.Se., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adclaide—Council,

1939-42; Vice-President, 1942-; Librarian, 1942-.

1927, *ALpERMAN, A. R., Ph.D., M.Sc. F.G.S., Diy. Indus. Chemistry, C.S.LR., Box 4331.

G.P.O., Melbourne, Victoria—Council, 1937-42.

1931. Anprew, Rev. J. R., 5 York Street, Henley Beach, S.A.

1935. *AnprewartuHa, H. G., M.Agr.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1935. *ANpREWaRTHA, Mrs. H. V.. B-Agr.Sc., M.S., 29 Claremont Avenue, Netherby, 5S...

1929. AnceL, F. M., 34 Fullarton Road, Parkside, S.A.

1939. *AnceL, Miss L. M., M.Sc., University, Adelaide,

1936. Barrien, Miss B. S., M.Sc., University, Adelaide.

1932. Brac, P. R., D.D.Se., L.D.S., Shell House, 170 North Terrace, Adelaide.

1928. Besr, R. J., M.Sc., F.A.C.1., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1946. Biren, L. C., B.Agr.Se., M.Sc. Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1934, BLacK, E. C., M.B., B.S., Magill Road, Tranmere, Adelaide.

1907. *Biack. J. M., A.L.S. (Hom causa), 82 Brougham Place. North Adelaide-—Verco

Medal, 1930; Council, 1927-1931: President, 1933-34; Vice-President, 1931-33.

1940. Bonytuon, Sir J. Lavincron, 263 East Terrace, Adelaide.

1944, SURBRIDGE, Miss N. VT. 242 Portrush Road, Glen Osmond, S.A.

1923. Burpon, R. §., D.Se., University, Adelaide, S.A.

1922, *Campnenn, T. D, D.D.Sc. D.Sc. Dental Dept, Adclaide Hospital, Adelaide-—

Council, 1928-32, 1935, 1942-; Vice-President, 1932-34; President, 1934-35,

1944. Casson, P. B., B.Sc. For. (Adel.), Dept. For... Mount Crawford Forest, S.A.

1929. Curistir, W., M.B., B.S.. Education Department, Adclaide—Treasurer, 1933-8,

1895. *Crrtann, Pror, J. B. M.D., University, Adelaide — Verco Medal, 1933; Council,

121-26, 1932-37; President, 1927-28; 1940-41; Vice-President, 1026-27, 1941-42.

1929. CieLann, W. P, M.B., B.S., M.R.C.P., Dashwood Road, Beaumont.

1930, *Cotgunoun, T. T., M.Se., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adclaide—Secretary.

1942-43.

1938. *Conpon, H. T., S.A. Museum, Adelaide.

1907, Coonr, W. 1. DSc. ALAC, University, Adelaide—Council, 1938-41, Vice-

President, 1941-42, 1943-44; President, 1942-43.

1942, Cooper, H. M.. 51 Hastings Street, Glenelg, S.A,

1944. Cornisu, Menvitte, State Bank, Pirie Street, Adefaide.

1920, *Corrox, B. C., S.A. Museum, Adelaide--Council, 1943-

1924.0 pe Cresrtany, Sir C. T. C., DS.O., M.D. ELR.C.P., 219 North Terrace, Adelaide.

1937. *Crocker, R. L., M.Se.. Waite Institute (Private Muil Bag), Adelaide -~- Secretary,

1943-

1929. *Davinsox, Pror, J., D.Sc. Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide—Council,

1932-35; Vice-President, 1935-37, 1938-39; President, 1937-38: Rep. Fauna and

Flora Board, 1940-44.

1927. *Davies, Pror. E. H., Mus.Doc., The University, Adelaide.

1941, *Drckinson, S. B. B.Sc., Mines Department, Flinders Street, Adelaide.

1930. Dix, E. V., Hospitals Department, Adelaide, S.A.

1932, Dunstonxe, H. E., M.B., B.S., J.P... 124 Payneham Road, St Peters, Adelaide.

1944. Duwsstonr, S. M. L., M.B.. B-S., ¢/o De. Cardon, Partridge Street. Glenelg, S.A.

1921. Durron, G, H,, B.Sc., 12 Halshury Avenue, Kingswood, Adelaide.

1931. Dwyer, J. M., M.B., B.S., 25 Port Road. Bowden. (CA LI. abroad.)

1933. *Earpiey, Miss C. M. B.Se.. Waite Institute (Private Mail Baz), Adelaide—Council,

1943-

1902, *Fnovist, A. G. 19 Farrell Street, Glenelg, S.A.

361

Date of

Election.

1917, *Fexnxer. C. A. EK, D.Se.. 42 Alexandra Av., Rose Park, Adelaide--Council, 1925-28;

President, 1930-31; Vice-President, 1928-30; Secretary 1924-25; ‘Treasurer,

1932-33; Editor, 1934-37.

1935. *Frnner, F. J. M.B., B.S., 42 Alexandra Avenue, Rose Park. (A..F. abroad.)

1944. Ferrers, Miss H. M., 8 ‘Taylor's Road, Mitcham, S. A.

1027. *Fintayson, H. H., 305 Ward Strect, North Adelaide-—-Council, 1937-40.

1923. *lfry, H. K, D.S.O,, M.D., B.S. B. Se, F.RA.C.P., Town Hall, Adelaide—Council,

1933- 37; Vice- President, 1937- 38, 1939-40 ; President, 1938- 1939.

1932. *Greson, E. S. H., B.Sc. 207 Cross Roads, Clarence Gardens, Adelaide.

1935, StL Agiecenn? J, QO. G. B.A. MiSe, Dip.Ed., Armament School, R.A.A-F., Hamil-

ton, Victoria.

1919. +Grastonnury, O. A., Adelaide Cement Co., Grenfell Street, Adelaide.

1927. Goprrry, F. K., Robert Street, Payneham, S.A.

1935. Hace nsack, H., Coromandel Valley.

1939, (soonr, J. R., BAgr. Sc., Box 186, G.P.O., Whyalla, S.A.

1925. +Gossr, J. H., Gilbert House, Gilbert Place, Adelaide.

1910. *Grant, F ioe Kerr, M.Sc., TLL, University, Adelaide.

1930. Gray, J. T , Orroroo, S.A.

1933. (GREAVES, BH, Director, Botanic Gardens, Adelaide

1904. GRIFFITH, H. B., Dunrobin Road, Brighton, S. A!

1934. Gunter, Rev. H. A., 10 Broughton Street, Glenside, S.A.

1944.00 Grurpy, D. J.. B.Sc. "RAALE.

1922, *Hare, Fl. M,, Director, S.A. Muscum, Adelaide—Council, 1931-34; Vice-

President, 1934-36, 1937-38; President, 1936-37; Treasurer, 1938-.

1O44, Harris, J. B. B.Sc. 3 Airlie Avenuc, Prospect, S.A,

1939. Harvey, Miss A., B.A., Dequetteville Terr., Kent Town, Adelaide.

1944. Trrrior, R. L, B.Agr.Sc., Soil Conservator, Dept. of Acriculture, S.A.

1927, Hover, fue Hox. E. W., B.Sc, Dequettevilie Terrace, Kent Town, Adelaide.

1933, Hosxrnc, H.C, BA. 24 Northeote Terrace, Gilherton, Adelaide.

1924. *Hossrern, P. S., M.Sc. 132 Fisher Street. Fullarton, 5.A.

1944. Hesore, D. S. W., 238 Payncehain Road, Payncham, 5.A,

1928, Iroutp, P., Kurralta, Burn: side, S.A.

1942. JENKINS, C.F. cat ut spartment of Agriculture, St, George's Terrace, Perth, WA.

1918. *JENNISON, Re 7 Vrew Street, Fullarton, Adelaide.

1910. *Jotsson, A., ie D., MLRCS., “Larni Warra,’? Port Noarlunga, $.A.

192]. *JounstTon, coh TH. M.A, D.Sc. University, ‘Adclaide—-Verco Medal, 1935;

Council, 1926-28, 1940-; Vice- President, 1928-31; President, 1931-32; Secretary

1938-40: Rep, raere and Flora Board, 1932-39; ‘Editor, 1943.,

1939. +Kuaknar, H. M., PhD. M.B., F. R.G.S., Khakar Buildings, CP. Tank Road, Beni-

bay, India.

1933. *Kurewan, A. W., M.Se., University, Adelaide,

7939, Leasx, J. C.. AMT, @ Buller Street, Prospe ct SAL

1022, Lexpox. G. A.. M.D., BS. E.-R.C.P.. North Terrace, Adelaide. ALLE. abroad.4

1938, *Love, Rev, JR. B. MLC, D.CAL, MLA., Ernabella, v! ‘a Oodnadz itta, a A.

1931. *Luprrook (Mrs. WwW. V.) ON. FL, M. A., Elimatta Strect, Reid, A.C.

1938. Manrerx, C, B., BD-S. “TDD.Se is Shell Flouse, North Terrace, Seda

$922. *AMAnIGAN, C. T. M.A.. B.F.. D.Se., F.G.S., University of Adclaide—Council, 4929-35

Vice-President, 1933-35, 1936-37 : President, 1935-3f.

1933. MaAcarry, Mrss K. de B., B.A., B.Se.. 19 Ashbourne Avenue, Mitcham, S.A.

1932. Mann, E. A, C/o Bank of Adelaide, Adelaide.

1923. MARSHALL, F Cc. Mageppa Station, Comaum, 5.A.

1930. Marsnauy, T. J. M.Agr.Se., Ph.D., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bae}, Adelaide.

1929. Martin, F. 6 M.A., Technical Hi ot School, Thebarton, S.A. P

1905. *Mawsown, Pror, Str DouGias, O.BE, DSc, BE. F-R.S., University, Adelaide

Verco Medal, 1931; President, 1924-25, 1044: Vice- President, 1923-24, 192

Council, 1941-43.

1938. *Mawson, Miss P. M., M.Sc., University, Adelaide.

1926, Mayo, Tun Hox. Mr. Justice, LLB. KC. Supreme Court, Adelaide,

1943. McCartiy, Mtss D. F., B.A. B.Se., 70 Halton Terrace, Kensington Park.

1934. McCroucury, C. L., BE., A.M.LE. (Aust.}, Town Hall, Adelaide.

1944. MeGrir, L. K., 294 Spaviow Road, Henley Beach, S.A,

1929. MecLaucnntn, om M.B., BS., M.R.C.P.. 2 Wakefield Strect, Kent Town, Adeiait

1907. Merrrose, R. T., Mount Pleasant, S.A.

1935, MINCHAM, Vv. H,, Willafoo, via Hallett, S.A.

1925. +MrrcHert, Pror. ‘Sir W., K.C.M.G., M.A., D.Se., Fitzroy Ter., Prospect, SA.

1933. Muircurrt, Pror. M. L., M.Sc. Universi ty, ” Adelaide.

1938. Moornousr, F. W. M.Sc., Chief Inspector of Fisheries, Flinders Strect, Adelaide.

1940. MorrrocKk, J. A. T., 39 ee 3 Street, Adelaide.

Tate of

fuieetion.

1936.

1944,

1044,

193G,

1913.

362

+M hae C. P., 25 First Avenue, St. Peters, Adelaide.

“4 W,, [Engineer and Waters Dept., Port Road, Thebarton, S.A.

JR, BA. 62 Shefheld Street, Malvern, S.A.

OcKEXDEN N, ee P., Public School, Norton’s Summit, S.A.

*OSBORN, Pror. T. G. B., D.Se., University, Oxiord, England —Council, 1915-20,

1922- 24: President, 1925-26; Vice- President, 1924-25, 1926-27.

#*P ARKIN, U W., M:A., B.Sc., c/o Nth. Broken Hill L td., Box 20 C, Broken Hill, N.S.W.

Pautt, ‘A. G., M.A., B.Se., Eglinton Terrace, Mount Gambier.

Purpps, I. 1, PhD. B.Agr.Se., efo The Flax Production Comimittee, 409 Collins

lee Melbourne, Victoria.

*Piver, CS. D.Se., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adclaide—Council, 1941-43,

Riese pee Por. J. A. D.Sc. ALC. Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide—

Verco Medal, 1938; Council, 1927- 30, 1935-39; Vice-President, 1930-32; President,

1932-33.

Prev, ALG, CMG. MA, Litt.D., FR.G.S., 226 Melbourne Street, North Adelaide.

Pucsiey, A. T., B.Ag.Sc., M.Se., Waite Institute (Private Mail Baz), Adelaide.

*Rart, W. 1, M.Se., Medical School, University of Melbourne, Carlton N. 3, Victoria

Eman, D.S., B.Agr.Sc.. Animal Nutrition Labor., Univ., Adelaide.

Arpson, A. E. V., C.M.G., M.A. D.Sc., 314 Albert Street, East Melbourne.

Sanpars, Mtss D. F., Dept. of Biology, University, Nedlands, W.A,

Scunriver, M., M.B., B.S. 175 North Terr,, Adelaide.

*Sronit, R. W., M.A., B.Sc, Assist. Goyt., Geol, Flinders St, Adelaide—Secretary,

1930-35; Council, 1937-38; Vice-President, 1938-39, 1940-41: President, 1939-40.

*SubraArp, H., Victor Harbour, S.A.

*SHearp, K., Fisheries Research Div. C.S LR. Cromdta, N-SW,

Suinkrierp, R. C., Salisbury, S.A.

Sispmonps, H. W.. 130 Fisher Street, Pullartort, S.A.

*SIMPSON, ae E.R, M.Se., Warland Road, Burnside.

StMPSoON, P Pirie Strect, Adelaide.

Suri, C. A. ec Waite fustitute (Private Mail Bae), Adelaide, S.A.

Ssura, J. Laxcroxp, B.Se., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide. CRLALAL

Sxwownatt, G. J., B.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

Souticorr, R. V., MB. BLS., 12 Avenue Road, Unley Pork, S.A.

Sourmwoon, A. R., M.D., M.S. (Adel.), M.R.C.P., Wootcona Terr., Glen Osmond, S.A,

*Spriag, RL C.. MiSe, “Delamere,” Delamere Avenue, Springfield.

*Soppuans, C. G., M.So, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

Swan. D.C. MiSe., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide --- Secretary,

1O49-42.

Symons, IG. Murray Strect, Mitcham.

*Tayror, J. K. B.A. M.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide---Council,

1949-43.

Tescn, J. E., BAgr.Se.. 3 Mitchell Street, Elyde Park.

Titomson, J. M., 135 Mibtary Road, Semaphore South.

*Trxpark, N. B. B.Se, South Australian Museum, Adelaide--Secretary, 1935-36.

(RIALALB.)

*TuMBLE, Pror. I. CC. D.Se., M.Agr.Se.. Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag.

Adeclaide-—Council, 1942-

*Yurner, A. J.. M.D., FLR.ELS.. Dauphin Terr., Brisbane, Old,

Turner, D. C.,, National Chambers, King William Street, Adelaide.

Warkiey, A. BA. B.Sc. PhD. Div. Industrial Chemistry, C.S.LR., Box 4331,

Melbourne, Victoria.

FWann, TL. RY BA. Bae. DSc. 22 Northumberland Avenue, Tusmore —~ Council,

1924-27, 1933-35: President, 1928-30: Vice-President, 1927-2.

Warn, D.C, M.Agr. Se.. Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

WatrerHouse, Miss L. M., 35 Kine Street, Brighton, S.A.

Watson, R. H, Central Wool Gomaiiitees Testing House, 572 Flinders Lane, Melb. C4

WerrDING, Rev. DL J. Sageysy Bridge, S.A.

Witson, C. EB, C., M.B., B.S “Woodlield, ”’ Fisher Street, Fulfurton, Adelaide.

Wirnsos, B.C. M. A., B.Se., Myrtle Bank, S.A,

#Witson, J. O., Animal Nutrition Laboratory, University. Adelaide.

*Wosterstey, H. FRIES. A.LUS. (f/fonm. causa), S.A. Museum, Adcelaide—Secretary,

1930-37; Editor, 1937-43; President, 1943-44: Verco Medal, 1943: Vice-President,

1944...

Womesstry, HL B.S. BSc. Tox. 43 Carlisle Road, Westbourne Park, SvA.

Wanersiey, J. S., 43 Carlisle Road, Westbourne Park, S.A.

*Woop, Prop. J. G. D.Sc. PhD. University, Adelaide—Council, 1938-40; Vice-

President, 1940-41; Rep. Fauna and Flora Board, 1940-; President, 1041-42,

\Wooptanps, Haroip, Box OS9TE G.PLO., Adelaide.

GENERAL INDEX.

[Generic and specific names in italics indicate that the forms described are new to science. ]

363

GENERAL INDEX

[Generic and specific names in italics indicate that the forms described

are new to science.]

Acarina, Families Alycidae and Nanorchesti- | Capillaria sirigis, (1), O41,

dae, Womersley, H., (1), 133

Acronycta anceps, (1), 6

Aganippe simpsoni, (1), 18, 22

(1), 25

Aluecuris brachylophi, (1), 60, ot

Alycidae, (1), 143, 134

Alycinae, (1), 138

Alyeus necidentalis, (1), 138; roseus, (1), 139

Anabathron, (2), 287, Jf; contabulatum,

ascensum, contortum, emblematicum, (2),

312

Aname sp. (1), 18, 23

; pelochroa, :

65; emberizac.

lepidopodis, (1), 60, 66

Capsularia marina, (1), ol

Caradrina obtusa, maculatra, (1), 9

: Carcpalxis monticulo, montifera, (1), 18

Carroll, D., The Simpson Desert Expedition,

1939, Scientific Reports, No. 2, Geology~—

Desert Sands, (1), 49

’ Cerearia ellis?, (1), 125, gigantura v. grandtor.

(1), 128: angelae, (1), 130

Chusaris, (1), 15

Conocrana ochthera, (1), 8

: Contracaecum magnicolare, legendrei spicu-

to:

Andrewartha, H. G., The Distribution of -

Plagues of Austroicetes cruciata Sauss. ,

(Acrididac) in Australia in relation

Climate, Vegetation and Soil, (2), 315

etproscepta amblopis, (1), 17

Araneus transmarinus, (1), 18, 40

-t(rehaconcura non. for Palaeoneura, (1), 3

Argiope protensa, (1), 18. 40

ligerum, (1), 60, 61: spp. larvae, (1), 62

Cosmocephalus jaenschi, (1), 00, 62

Cetton, Bo CL. Recent Australian Species of

the Family Rissoidae (Mollusca), (2), 280:

| Crespin, 1, The Occurrence of Cycloclypeus

in the Tertiary Deposits of South Austra-

hia, (1), 126

Crocker, R. L., Soil and Plant Relationship

in the Lower South-east of South Aus-

tralia: A Study in Ecology, (13, 144

| Crypsiprora oostigma, symprepes, (1), 8

Ariathisa feronephra, (1), 9; desertortuni, |

(1), 10

Artigisa anomozancla, (1), 14

Ascarophis australis, (1), 60, 62; morrhua, |

(1), 62

Attenuata, (2), 287, 313; integella, (2), 313

Austroicetes cruciata Sauss. (Acrididac) m

Australia in relation to Climate, Vegeta-

tion and Soil: The Distribution of Plagues

of, Andrewartha, H. G., (2), 315

Barybela. chionostiqma, (1), 7

Bathycuma, (2), 234

Bathytricha cethalion, truncata, (1), 9

_ Cyclaspoides, (2)

Cucullanellus sheardi, (1). 60, 64; fraseri,

(1), o4

Cumacea, No. 8 The Family Bodotriidac.

Australian, Hale, H. M.. (2), 225

Cumopsis, (2), 234

Cyclaspis, (2), 225

225

+ oe,

: Cycloclypeus in the Tertiary Deposits of

Beryl from Boolcoomatta, South Australia; |

On the Analysis of, Kleeman, A. W., (1) |

122

Bimichaelia ausiralica, 135; s0va-

QQ),

sealandica, (1), 136; pusilla, (1), 137; |

stellaris, (1), 138

Bimichaelinae, (1), 134, 135

Bodotria maculosa, (2), 226; arenosa, punlic,

(2), 229

Bodotriidae. (2), 225

Bodotriinae, (2), 225

Borolia microsticta, (1), 6

Seuth Australia; The Occurrence of,

Crespin, I, (4), 120

Dallwitz, \W. B.. and Mawson, D., Palaeozoic

Igneous Rocks of Lower South-eastern

South Australia, (2), 191

Dardanula, (2), 286, 305; erratica, melano-

chroma, dubitalis, (2), 305; aurantiocincta

flammea, (2), 306

| Dinopis unicolor, (1), 18, 23

Diplasiocotvle johustont, (1), 67, 77, 79

» Diplotriaena clelandi, (1), 60, 64

Botelloides, (2), 286, 2989: bassianus, horde, |

glomerosa, (2), 298

Cacyparis, (1). 12

Caenaculum, (2), 287, 312; minutulum, (2),

313

Calathusa anisocentra, (1), 11;

Camptocrossa

Capelica oxylopha, (1), 13

selenotypa, acracuasta,

englypta, (1),

),!

Echmochasmus pelecant, (1). 113

Ecology of the Sand Flats at Moreton Bay,

Reevesby Island, South Australia, Stach,.

L. W., (2), 177

| Ecology, Soil and Plant Relationships in the

Lower South-east of South Australia; A

Study in, Crocker, R. L., (1), 144

Eligma, (1), 12

Eacuma agrion, (2), 229

Epidesmia tricolor, (1), 4

Epigrus, (2), 287, 307; cylindraceus, borda,

dissimilis, hadius, protractus, (2), 308>

xanthias, semicinctus, (2), 309

Eremaula minor, (1), 8; ptilopleura, (1), 9

364

Erenmsuophanes apicinota, (1), 12

teressa strepsimeris, xanthostacta, stenothyris,

megalospila, (1), 5

Estea, (2), 286, 287; approxima, (2), 287;

bicolor, columnaria, frenchiensis, incidata, |

evaut, (2), 288; iravadoides, janjucensis,

}

pracda, pulvilla, wablyeoryinba, (2), 2895.

tumida, frauenfetdi,

(2), 290; puer, pertu-

kershawi, labrotoma,

(2), 291; olivacea,

tasmanica, tiara,

relata, perpolita,

mida, rubicunda,

microcosta, obeliscus,

(2), 292

lesthlodera acosmopa, (1), 17

leublemma fhupalochroaa, (1), 10

Euprora Hehenophora, (1), 8:

tl}, 10

tiuseHa, (2), 286, 306;

buliminoides, columnaria, maccovi, brevis,

(2), 307

Eustrongylides gadopsis, (1), 60, 64

Fustrotia macrosema, cyclospila,

tropha, (1). 10

cevpsichiora,

ere

Vinlaysen, MH. H., A further Account of the

Finlayson, (2), 210

va diplosticha, (1). 3

cuma, (2), 234

vrocuma, (2), 234, 247:

248: pala, (2), 250

eptd, (2), 234, 208;

(23, 2733 tiaequitlts,

yw, (2), 280

Sus carduyts, (1), 07, 75

from Australian Soils; A Speetro-

repanda, (2)

24, 2705

ores:

bakert, (

(2),

al Examination of some [ronstone,

AL C.. and Prescott. J. A. (2).

truniherana parana, (1). 100

we nePhobola, (1), 5

kia, (2), 286, 293; strangei, supra-

aa, (2), 293; prefundior, nevarensis,

femessa, Hedialacsis, liddelliana. desere-

(2), 294

a perichares, (1). 5

Henuchoea longtpes, (1). 28

Hemihoplopus yaschenkot, (1). 19

fete s gallinac, (1), 60, 61

Heterecuma, (2), 254

Heteropoada pessieri, regina.

(1). 44

{ick

dition, 1939: Scientific Reports,

Bieloey—Scorpions and Spiders,

lale. H. M., Australian Cumacea,

The Pamily Bodotriidae, (2), 225

Tybaticus yibbosus, (1), 140

Ivdrusa nesothetis, (1), 4

No. 1,

(1), 18

No. &.

Ivpenodes costistrigalis, porphyritica, mr-

cropa, demonias, asthenopa, (1), 15;

(1), 16

LOCUS,

eonsobrina, (2), 306;

rid, Pseudomys (Gyomys) apodemoides |

yn, V. V., Phe Simpson Desert [expe- |

inframaculatus, |

ischnophara non. for Stenophara, (1), 3

Isopeda pessleri, horni, (1), 18, 44

Iphinoe pellucida, (2), 231: crassipes,

233

Ixettticus sentfis, CL),

(2),

18, 24

Johnston, T. H., and Simpson, E. R., Life

History of the Trematode Echinochasmus

pelicant, mesp., (1), 1E3

Jehnsten, T. Ef, and Mawson, P. M., Re-

marks on some Parasitic Trematodes from

Australia and New Zealand, (1), 60

Johnston, T. Hl, and Simpson, E, R., Larval

Trematodes from Australian Fresh-

water Mofluses, pt. ix, (1), 125

Kleeman, A. W., On the Analysis of Beryl

from Boolcoomatta, South Australia, (1),

122

Latrodectus hasseltit, (1), 18, 40

Leptocuma, (2), 234, 251; pulleini, (2), 253;

stearia, (2), 255: obstipa, (2), 258;

serrifera, (2), 261: sheardi, (2), 263;

tnfermedia, (2), 265

Lepidoptera: Studies in Australian, Turner,

Jo A. (1), 3

Leucania melanepasta, (1), 6

Leeuwenhoekia — australiensts, (1), 104:

adelaidav, (1), 105: hirsti, (1). 107;

southcott,, (1), 109: nova-qiinea, (1), 110

Leenwenhockiiuiw, (1), 102

Leeuwenhoektinae (Acarina) of Australia

and New Guinea; Notes on and Additions

to the Trombiculinae and, Womersley, H.,

(1), $2

Linemera, (2), 286, 301; suprasculpta, filo-

cineta, verconiana, sculpttlis, occidia, (2),

362: thouinensis, (2), 303

Juirenoba, (2), 280, 295; frevcineti, archensis.

(2), 295: agnewi, australis, wilsonensis,

sidcata, (2), 206: muitilirata, lockyeri

favardi, unilirata, praectornatilis, imbrex,

schoutaniea, (2), 207

floscelis, tanvphylla, (1), 8

Lvcosa arenosa, arevaris, (1). 18: abmingont,

(1), 18. 28: boerti, (1), 18, 28, 29; flaket,

(1).

wyoxdert,

28, 34:

(1), IS. 28, 33; Aales, 18,

madigant, (1), 18, 28, 36

(1),

Macracoia, nen. for Tenaga, (1). 3

Macroprora chienobola, oostigma, symprepes,

(1), 8

Mawson, D.. and Dallwitz, W. B., Palaeozoic

leneous Rocks of Lower South-eastern

Sonth Australia, (2), 101

Mawson, P. M., and Johnston, T. H., Re-

marks on some Parasitic Nematodes from

Australia and New Zealand, (1), 60

Mawson, P. M., Some Species of the Chaeto-

enath Genus Spadella from New South

Wales, (2), 327

18. 28, 31: flefeheri, (1), 18, 28, 32;

365

Mawson, D., The Nature and Occurrence of

Unaniferous Mineral Deposits in South

Australia, (2), 334

Meliana scotti, lewinii, similis, xylogramma,

(1). 6

Merelina, (2), 286, 299; cheilostoma, (2),

299; gracilis, australiae, hulliana, cyrta,

(2), 300; eucraspeda, (2), 231, 301

Microcotyle gerres, (1), 67; sillaginae, para-

siMaginac, (1), 68; pentapodi, (1), 67, 69;

citrematis, temnodontis, australiensis,

sebastis, elegans, victoriae, hiatulae, (1),

71: scorpis, (1), 67, 71; seriolae, reticu-

lata, (1), 72; helotes, (1), 67, 78, acam-

thogobii, (1), 74

Microcotylidae of Western Australia, A Con-

tribution te the Knowledge of _ the,

Sanders, D. F., (1), 67

Micropatetis glycychroa, (1), 10

Miturga lineata, (1), 18, 46

Murray Pine (Calutris, spp.), Notes on the

Regeneration of, Zimmer, W. J., (2) 183

Nanorchestes arboriger, collinus, (1). 143

Nanorchestidae, (1), 141

Namangana eugraphica, (1),

albirena, (1), 10

Narangodes glycychroa, (1), 10

Neocleta empyra, (1), 11

Nematodes, Remarks on some Parasitic, from

Australia and New Zealand, Johnston, T. H..

and Mawson, P. M., (1), 60

NeoschOngastia mecullochi, (1), 100

Neosparassus inframaculatus, (1), 44

Nephila imperatrix, (1), 18, 40

Notoserobs, (2), 287, 311; triangulus, (2), 311

Notesctia, (2), 286, 303; simillima, (2), 303: |

nitens, procincta, wnirafensis, pellucida, ,

purpurcostoma, atropurpurea, (2) 304

horologa, 7:

Ocrisiona sp. (1), 18, 47

Odo australiensis, (1), 18. 40

Oertel, A. C., and Prescott, J. A.; A Spectro~

chemical Examination of some Ironstone

Gravels from Australian Soils, (2), 173

Oeglassa prionosticha, (1), 14

Olies inframaculatus, (1), 18, 44

Orthosia horologa, (1), 7

Oxyopes elegans, (1), 18, 38

Palaeozaic Teneous Rocks of Lower South-

eastern South Australia, Mawson, D., and

Dallwitz, W. B., (2), 191

Paralyeus, C1), 135

Pardosa evrei, (1), 18, 24; pera, (1), 18, 2h

Pediana horni, regina, (1). 18, 44

Phacotypa n.n. for Lophozancla, (1),

Philenora nialthauca, (1), 6

Phlegetonia bathroleuca, (1), 11

Phobelica n.n. ior Idiozancla, (1), 3

Phrataria replicataria, transcissata, bijugata,

L’-album, C1), 4

Pomacuma, (2), 234, 241; cognata, (2), 242;

australiae, (2), 244

Prescott, J. A. and Oertel, A. C.; A Spectro-

chemical Examination of some Ironstone

Gravels from Australian Soils, (2), 173

Procamallanus murrayensis, (1), 60, 64

Prometopus horologa, (1), 7

Pseudomys (Gyomys) apodemoides Finlay-

son; A further Account of the Murid,

Finlayson, H. H., (2), 210

Rhapsa occidentalis, (1), 14

Rissoidac (Mollusca); Recent Australian

Species of the Family, Cotton, B. C., (2)

286

Saitis lacustris, (1), 18, 46

Sandars, D. F., A Contribution to the Know-

ledge of the Mierocotylidae of Western

Australia, (1), 67

Sands, Simpson Desert, (1), 49

Schéngastia pusilla, (1), 96; blestowei, (1),

97; salmi, (1), 98

Scorpions of the Simpson Desert, (1), 18

Scrobs, (2), 287, 309; scrobiculator, (2), 309;

pyramidata, petterdi, pellyae, jacksoni, (2),

310; luteofuscus, capricorneus, costatus,

(2), 311

Seuratia marina, (1), 60, 62

Simpson, I. R., and Johnston, T. H., Larval

Trematodes from Australian Freshwater

Molluscs, pt. ix, (1), 125

Simpson, E. R., and Johnston, T. H., Life

History of the Trematede Echinochasmus

pelecani, n.sp. (1), 113

Simpson Desert Expedition, The, 1939, Scien-

tific Reports, No. 2, Geology—Desert

Sands, Carroll, D., (1), 49

Simpson Desert Expedition, 1939, The,

Scientific Reports, No. 1, Biology—

Scorpions and Spiders, Hickman, V. V., (1),

Soil and Vegetation Relationships in the

Lower South-east of South Australia, A

Study in Ecology, Crocker, R. L., (1), 144

Spadella from New South Wales; Some

Species of the Chaetognath Genus, Maw-

son, P. M., (2), 327

Spadelia schizoptera, (2), 327; sheardt, (2),

330; johustont, (2), 331

Spiders of the Simpson Desert, (1), 18

Spironeura stpsent, nn. for hylae, (1), 60,

Stach, L. W.. Ecology of the Sand Flats at

Moreton Bay, Reevesby Island, South

Australia, (2), 177

Stenoprora triplax, (1), 13

Stephanomma. (2), 225

Storena gracffei, (1), 18; todd7, (1), 18, 38

Subestia, (2), 286, 292: salebrosa, semino-

dosa, flindersi, (2), 292

Subonoba, (2), 286, 299; mercurialis,

299

(2),

366

Sympodomma, (2), 234, 284; africana, (2),! Uraniferous Mineral Deposits in South Aus-

284

Syntomis aperta, melitospila, (1), 4

Taxcotis homoeopa, (1), 3

Thalamarchella, nn. for Thalamarchis, (1),

Tharpyna simpsont, (1), 18, 45

Thoracolopha, (1), 9

Thynnascaris legendrei, (1), 61

Tipasa demonias, asthenopa, (1), 15

Trematodes from Australian Freshwater

Moiluses, pt. ix, Larval, Johnston, T. H.

and Simpson, If. R., (1), 125

Trematode, Echinochasmus pclecani,

Life History of the, Johnston, T.

Simpson, E. R., (1), 113

Trombicula translucens, (1), 83: scincoides,

1 Sp.

H., and

(1), 84; obscura, (1), 86; kohlsi, (1), 87;

wa'chi, fletcheri, (1), 89; dehensis,

90; miner (1), 92; wichmanni,

(1), 93; sarcina, (1), 95

Trombiculinac and Lecuwenhoekiinae (Aca-

rina) of Australia and New Guinea: Notes

on and Additions to the, Womersley, H.,

(1), 82

Turner, J. A. Studies in Australian Lepi-

doptera, (1), 3

QQ),

hatori,

XNanthoptera macrosema, (1).

tralia; The Nature and Occurrence of,

Mawson, D., (2), 334

Urodacus yaschenkoi, (1), 18, 19

Vaunthompsenia, (2), 234, 2060; nana, (2),

206

Vaunthompsoniinac, (2), 233

Walchia disparunguis, (1),

(1), 102

Womersley, H., Australian Acarina, Families

Alycidae and Nanorchestidae, (1), 133

Womersley, H., Notes and Additions to the

Trombiculinae and Leeuwenhoekiinae

(Acarina) of Australia and New Cuiines,

(1}, 82

101;

glabrum.

Zcnocuma, (2), 234, 237: rugosa, (2), 237.

238

Zethes hemicyclophera, (1), 15

Zimmer, W. J., Notes on the Regeneration of

Murray Pine (Callitris) spp.), (2), 183

Zygosiphon, (2), 225

Wholly set up and printed in Australia by Gillingham & Co. Jimtted, 106 Currie Street, Adelaide

CONTENTS

PART I

Turner, A. J.: Studies in Australian Lepidoptera

Hickman, V. V.: The Simpson Desert Expedition, 1939, Scientific Reports. No. 1,

Biology—Scorpions and Spiders ae ne ae = ey, aS ‘

Carrott, D.: The Simpson Desert eu, 1939, Scientific Reports. No. 2, tute

Desert Sands De Ae Sie : oe = is

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M.: Remarks on some Parasitic Nematodes from

Australia ap New Zealand

Sanpars, D. F.: A Contribution to the Knowledge of the Microcotylidae of Western

Australia i et = Ke

Womerstey, H.: Notes on and Additions to the Trombiculinae and Leeuwenhoekiinae

(Acarina) of Australia and New Guinea

Jounston, T. H., and Srmpson, E. R.: Life History of the Trematode—Echinochasmus

pelecam n. sp.

Crespin, I.: The Occurrence of Cycloclypeus in the Tertiary Deposits of South Australia

Kireman, A. W.: On the Analysis of Beryl from Boolcoomatta, South Australia

Jonnston, T. H., and Srmpson, E. R.: Larval Trematodes from Australian Fresh-

water Molluscs, Pt. IX...

Womerstey, H.: Australian Acarina, Families Alycidae and Nanorchestidae

Crocker, R. L.: Soil and Vegetation Pee in the Lewer South-East of South

Australia — A Study in Ecology F = a ye ;

PART II

Orrtet, A. C., and Prescorr, J. A.: A Spectrochemical Examination of some Ironstone

Gravels from Australian Soils

Sraco, L, W.: ae of the Sand Flats at Moreton ws oe Island, South

Australia 5 me ac ay Y os , 5 a a we

Zimmer, W. J.: Notes on the Regeneration of Murray Pine (Callitris spp.)

Mawson, D., and Dattwitz, W. B.: Palaeozoic Igneous Rocks of Lower South-eastern

South Australia

Fintayson, H. H.: A Further Account of the Murid,. Pseudomys (Gyomys)

apodemoides Finlayson i re Sy ree a Ss Be a8 fe

Hate, H: M.: Australian Cumacea, No. 8, The Family Bodotriidae

Corron, B. C.: Recent Australian Species of the Family Rissoidae (Mollusca) .

Anprewartua, H. G.:- The Distribution of Plagues of Austroicetes cruciata Sauss.

(Acrididae) in Australia in Relation to Climate, Vegetation and Soil

Mawson, P. ‘M.: Some Species of the Chasiogharh Genus Spada from New South

Wales

Mawson, D.: The Nature and Occurrence of Uraniferous ‘Mineral Deposits in South

Australia... ra re a5 ~

Osituaries: Mr. Feed. Chapeen and Rey. N. H. Louwyck ..

Verco MEDAL

BALANCE-SHEET |

List or FELuows ay epee es

INDEX

Page

113

120

122

125

133

144

173

177

183

191

210

225

315